D-Link DGS-3000 Series Switch CLI Reference Guide
Below you will find brief information for Switch DGS-3000 Series. The DGS-3000 Series is a Layer 2 managed Gigabit Ethernet switch that provides a variety of features for managing and securing your network. These features include VLANs, 802.1X authentication, QoS, and more.
Advertisement
Advertisement
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Table of Contents
i
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
ii
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
iii
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 Using Command Line Interface
The Switch can be managed through the Switch’s serial port, Telnet, SNMP or the Web-based management agent.
The Command Line Interface (CLI) can be used to configure and manage the Switch via the serial port or Telnet interfaces.
This manual provides a reference for all of the commands contained in the CLI. Every command will be introduced in terms of purpose, format, description, parameters, and examples. Configuration and management of the Switch via the Web-based management agent are discussed in the Web UI Reference Guide. For detailed information on installing hardware please also refer to the Hardware Installation Guide.
1-1 Accessing the Switch via the Serial Port
The Switch’s serial port’s default settings are as follows:
• 115200 baud
• no parity
• 8 data bits
• 1 stop bit
A computer running a terminal emulation program capable of emulating a VT-100 terminal and a serial port configured as above are then connected to the Switch’s Console port via an included RS-232 to RJ-45 convertor cable.
With the serial port properly connected to a management computer, the following screen should be visible. If this screen does not appear, try pressing Ctrl+r to refresh the console screen.
DGS-3000-26TC Gigabit Ethernet Switch
Command Line Interface
Firmware: Build 2.00.004
Copyright(C) 2016 D-Link Corporation. All rights reserved.
UserName:
PassWord:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
There is no initial username or password. Just press the Enter key twice to display the CLI input cursor
− DGS-
3000-26TC:admin#. This is the command line where all commands are input.
1-2 Setting the Switch’s IP Address
Each Switch must be assigned its own IP Address, which is used for communication with an SNMP network manager or other TCP/IP application (for example BOOTP, TFTP). The Switch’s default IP address is 10.90.90.90.
You can change the default Switch IP address to meet the specification of your networking address scheme.
The Switch is also assigned a unique MAC address by the factory. This MAC address cannot be changed, and can be found on the initial boot console screen – shown below.
1
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Boot Procedure V2.00.001
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Power On Self Test ........................................ 100 %
MAC Address : B0-C5-54-30-00-A0
H/W Version : A2
Please Wait, Loading V2.00.004 Runtime Image .............. 100 %
UART init ................................................. 100 %
Starting runtime image
Device Discovery .......................................... 100 %
Configuration init ........................................ 100 %
The Switch’s MAC address can also be found in the Web management program on the Switch Information (Basic
Settings) window on the Configuration menu.
The IP address for the Switch must be set before it can be managed with the Web-based manager. The Switch IP address can be automatically set using BOOTP or DHCP protocols, in which case the actual address assigned to the Switch must be known.
Starting at the command line prompt, enter the commands config ipif System ipaddress
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy. Where the x’s represent the IP address to be assigned to the IP interface named System and the y’s represent the corresponding subnet mask.
Alternatively, you can enter config ipif System ipaddress xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/z. Where the x’s represent the IP address to be assigned to the IP interface named System and the z represents the corresponding number of subnets in CIDR notation.
The IP interface named System on the Switch can be assigned an IP address and subnet mask which can then be used to connect a management station to the Switch’s Telnet or Web-based management agent.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config ipif System ipaddress 10.24.22.100/255.0.0.0
Command: config ipif System ipaddress 10.24.22.100/8
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
In the above example, the Switch was assigned an IP address of 10.24.22.100 with a subnet mask of 255.0.0.0.
The system message Success indicates that the command was executed successfully. The Switch can now be configured and managed via Telnet, SNMP MIB browser and the CLI or via the Web-based management agent using the above IP address to connect to the Switch.
There are a number of helpful features included in the CLI. Entering the ? command will display a list of all of the top-level commands.
2
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# ?
Command:?
..
? cable_diag ports cd cfm linktrace cfm lock md cfm loopback clear clear address_binding dhcp_snoop binding_entry ports clear address_binding nd_snoop binding_entry ports clear arptable clear attack_log clear cfm pkt_cnt clear counters clear ethernet_oam ports clear fdb clear historical_counters ports clear igmp_snooping data_driven_group clear igmp_snooping statistics counter clear jwac auth_state clear log clear mac_based_access_control auth_state clear mld_snooping data_driven_group clear mld_snooping statistics counter
CTRL+C ESC q Quit SPACE n Next Page ENTER Next Entry a All
When entering a command without its required parameters, the CLI will prompt you with a Next possible
completions: message.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config account
Command: config account
Next possible completions:
<username>
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
In this case, the command config account was entered with the parameter <username>. The CLI will then prompt to enter the <username> with the message, Next possible completions:. Every command in the CLI has this feature, and complex commands have several layers of parameter prompting.
In addition, after typing any given command plus one space, users can see all of the next possible sub-commands, in sequential order, by repeatedly pressing the Tab key.
To re-enter the previous command at the command prompt, press the up arrow cursor key. The previous command will appear at the command prompt.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config account
Command: config account
Next possible completions:
<username>
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config account
3
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
In the above example, the command config account was entered without the required parameter <username>, the CLI returned the Next possible completions: <username> prompt. The up arrow cursor control key was pressed to re-enter the previous command (config account) at the command prompt. Now the appropriate username can be entered and the config account command re-executed.
All commands in the CLI function in this way. In addition, the syntax of the help prompts are the same as presented in this manual
− angle brackets < > indicate a numerical value or character string, braces { } indicate optional parameters or a choice of parameters, and brackets [ ] indicate required parameters.
If a command is entered that is unrecognized by the CLI, the top-level commands will be displayed under the
Available commands: prompt.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#the
Available commands:
.. ? cable_diag cd cfm clear config copy create debug del delete dir disable download enable erase login logout md move no ping ping6 rd reboot reconfig rename reset save show smtp telnet traceroute traceroute6 upload
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
The top-level commands consist of commands such as show or config. Most of these commands require one or more parameters to narrow the top-level command. This is equivalent to show what? or config what? Where the what? is the next parameter.
For example, entering the show command with no additional parameters, the CLI will then display all of the possible next parameters.
4
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show
Command: show
Next possible completions:
802.1p 802.1x aaa access_profile account accounting acct_client address_binding arp_spoofing_prevention arpentry attack_log auth_client auth_diagnostics auth_session_statistics auth_statistics authen authen_enable authen_login authen_policy authentication authorization autoconfig bandwidth_control boot_file bpdu_protection cfm command command_history community_encryption config control_pkt cpu cpu_filter current_config ddm device_status dhcp dhcp_local_relay dhcp_relay dhcp_server dhcpv6 dhcpv6_local_relay dhcpv6_relay dhcpv6_server dos_prevention dot1v_protocol_group dscp duld eee environment erps error ethernet_oam external_alarm fdb filter flow_meter gratuitous_arp greeting_message gvrp historical_counter historical_utilization host_name igmp igmp_snooping ipif ipif_ipv6_link_local_auto iproute ipv6 ipv6route jumbo_frame jwac l2protocol_tunnel lacp_port led limited_multicast_addr link_aggregation lldp lldp_med log log_save_timing log_software_module loopdetect mac_based_access_control mac_based_access_control_local mac_based_vlan mac_notification max_mcast_group mcast_filter_profile mirror mld_snooping multicast multicast_fdb name_server nd_spoofing_prevention nlb packet password_recovery per_queue port port_security port_security_entry port_vlan ports power_saving pppoe private_vlan pvid qinq radius rcp rmon router_ports rspan safeguard_engine scheduling scheduling_mechanism serial_port session sim smtp snmp sntp sred ssh ssl storage_media_info stp sub_vlan super_vlan switch syslog system_severity tech_support terminal tftp time time_range traffic traffic_segmentation trap trusted_host utilization vlan vlan_translation vlan_trunk voice_vlan wac
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
In the above example, all of the possible next parameters for the show command are displayed. At the next command prompt, the up arrow was used to re-enter the show command, followed by the account parameter.
The CLI then displays the user accounts configured on the Switch.
5
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
1-3 Command Syntax Symbols
Syntax angle brackets < > square brackets [ ] vertical bar | braces { } parentheses ( ) ipif <ipif_name 12> metric <value 1-31>
1-4 Line Editing Keys
Description
Encloses a variable or value. Users must specify the variable or value.
For example, in the command create ipif <ipif_name 12>
{<network_address>} <vlan_name 32> {secondary | state [enable |
disable] | proxy_arp [enable | disable] {local [enable | disable]}} users must supply an IP interface name for <ipif_name 12> ,a VLAN name for
<vlan_name 32> and an address for <network_address> when entering the command. DO NOT TYPE THE ANGLE BRACKETS.
Encloses a required value or list of required arguments. Only one value or argument must be specified.
For example, in the command create account [admin | operator | power_user | user] <username 15> {encrypt [plain_text | sha_1]
<password>} users must specify the account level to be either the admin, operator, power_user, or user level when entering the command.
DO NOT TYPE THE SQUARE BRACKETS.
Separates mutually exclusive items in a list, one of which must be entered.
For example, in the command create account [admin | operator | power_user | user] <username 15> {encrypt [plain_text | sha_1]
<password>} users must specify the account level to be either the admin, operator, power_user, or user level when entering the command.
DO NOT TYPE THE VERTICAL BAR.
Encloses an optional value or a list of optional arguments. One or more values or arguments can be specified.
For example, in the command reset {[config | system]} {force_agree} users may choose to reset the configuration or the system in the command.
DO NOT TYPE THE BRACES.
Indicates at least one or more of the values or arguments in the preceding syntax enclosed by braces must be specified.
For example, in the command config bpdu_protection ports [<portlist> | all]
{state [enable | disable] | mode [drop | block | shutdown]}(1) users have the option to specify to configure the state or the mode. The (1) following the set of braces indicates at least one argument or value within the braces must be specified.
DO NOT TYPE THE PARENTHESES.
12 means the maximum length of the IP interface name.
1-31 means the legal range of the metric value.
Keys
Delete
Backspace
Insert
Left Arrow
Right Arrow
Tab
P n or Space
Description
Delete character under cursor and shift remainder of line to left.
Delete character to left of cursor and shift remainder of line to left.
Toggle on and off. When toggled on, inserts text and shifts previous text to right.
Move cursor to left.
Move cursor to right
Help user to select appropriate token.
Display the previous page.
Display the next page.
6
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Keys
CTRL+C
ESC q r a
Enter
Description
Escape from displayed pages.
Escape from displayed pages.
Escape from displayed pages. refresh the displayed pages
Display the remaining pages. (The screen display will not pause again.)
Display the next line.
The screen display pauses when the show command output reaches the end of the page.
In the above example, all of the possible next parameters for the show command are displayed. At the next command prompt, the up arrow was used to re-enter the show command, followed by the account parameter.
The CLI then displays the user accounts configured on the Switch.
7
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 2 Basic Command List
show session show serial_port
config serial_port {baud_rate [9600 | 19200 | 38400 | 115200] | auto_logout [never | 2_minutes | 5_minutes |
10_minutes | 15_minutes]} enable clipaging disable clipaging login logout
? clear show command_history
config command_history <value 1-40>
config greeting_message {default} show greeting_message
config command_prompt [<string 16> | username | default]
config terminal width [default | <value 80-200>] show terminal width
config ports [<portlist> | all] {medium_type [fiber | copper]} {speed [auto {capability_advertised {10_half | 10_full |
100_half | 100_full | 1000_full}} | 10_half | 10_full | 100_half | 100_full | 1000_full {[master | slave]} | 10g_full ] | auto_negotiation [restart_an | remote_fault_advertised [disable | offline | link_fault | auto_negotiation_error]] | flow_control [enable | disable] | learning [enable | disable ] | state [enable | disable] | mdix [auto | normal | cross] | [description <desc 1-32> | clear_description] | auto_speed_downgrade [enable | disable]}(1)
show ports {<portlist>} {[description | err_disabled | auto_negotiation | details | media_type]}
2-1 show session
Description
This command is used to display a list of current users logged into the Switch.
Format show session
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only administrators and Operators can issue this command.
Example
To display the session entries:
8
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show session
Command: show session
ID Live Time From Level Name
--- ------------ --------------------------------------- ----- ---------------
8 00:00:17.080 Serial Port admin Anonymous
Total Entries: 1
CTRL+C ESC q Quit SPACE n Next Page p Previous Page r Refresh
2-2 show serial_port
Description
This command is used to display the current serial port settings.
Format show serial_port
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the serial port setting:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show serial_port
Command: show serial_port
Baud Rate : 115200
Data Bits : 8
Parity Bits : None
Stop Bits : 1
Auto-Logout : 10 mins
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
2-3 config serial_port
Description
This command is used to configure the serial bit rate used to communicate with the management host and the idle connection auto logout time.
9
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Format config serial_port {baud_rate [9600 | 19200 | 38400 | 115200] | auto_logout [never | 2_minutes | 5_minutes |
10_minutes | 15_minutes]}
Parameters
baud_rate - (Optional) The serial bit rate that will be used to communicate with the management host. The default baud rate is 115200.
9600 - Specify the serial bit rate to be 9600.
19200 - Specify the serial bit rate to be 19200.
38400 - Specify the serial bit rate to be 38400.
115200 - Specify the serial bit rate to be 115200.
auto_logout - (Optional) The auto logout time out setting.
never - Never timeout.
2_minutes - When idle over 2 minutes, the device will auto logout.
5_minutes - When idle over 5 minutes, the device will auto logout.
10_minutes - When idle over 10 minutes, the device will auto logout.
15_minutes - When idle over 15 minutes, the device will auto logout.
Restrictions
Only Administrators and Operators can issue this command.
Example
To configure baud rate:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config serial_port baud_rate 9600
Command: config serial_port baud_rate 9600
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
2-4 enable clipaging
Description
This command is used to enable the pausing of the screen display when the show command output reaches the end of the page. The default setting is enabled.
Format enable clipaging
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators and Operators can issue this command.
Example
To enable pausing of the screen display when show command output reaches the end of the page:
10
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#enable clipaging
Command: enable clipaging
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
2-5 disable clipaging
Description
This command is used to disable the pausing of the screen display when the show command output reaches the end of the page. The default setting is enabled.
Format disable clipaging
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators and Operators can issue this command.
Example
To disable pausing of the screen display when show command output reaches the end of the page:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#disable clipaging
Command: disable clipaging
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
2-6 login
Description
This command is used to allow user login to the Switch.
Format login
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
11
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Example
To login the Switch with a user name dlink:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#login
Command: login
UserName:dlink
PassWord:****
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
2-7 logout
Description
This command is used to logout from the command prompt.
Format logout
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To logout from the current user:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#logout
Command: logout
**********
* Logout *
**********
DGS-3000-26TC Gigabit Ethernet Switch
Command Line Interface
Firmware: Build 2.00.004
Copyright(C) 2016 D-Link Corporation. All rights reserved.
UserName:
2-8 ?
Description
This command is used to display a description of a specific command or general command.
12
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Format
?
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To get “ping” command usage, descriptions:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#? ping
Command: ? ping
Command: ping
Usage: [<ipaddr> | <domain_name 255>] { times <value 1-255> | timeout <sec 1-99>}
Description: Used to test the connectivity between network devices.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
2-9 clear
Description
This command is used to clear the screen.
Format clear
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To clear screen:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#clear
Command: clear
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
13
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
2-10 show command_history
Description
This command is used to display command history.
Format show command_history
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display command history:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show command_history
Command: show command_history
? ping login show serial_port show session
? config bpdu_protection ports
? reset
? create account
? create ipif show the
?
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
2-11 config command_history
Description
This command is used to configure the number of commands that the Switch can recall. The Switch “remembers” upto the last 40 commands you entered.
Format config command_history <value 1-40>
Parameters
<value 1-40> - Enter the number of commands that the Switch can recall. This value must be between 1 and 40.
Restrictions
Only Administrators and Operators can issue this command.
14
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Example
To configure the number of command history:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config command_history 25
Command: config command_history 25
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
2-12 config greeting_message
Description
This command is used to configure the greeting message (or banner).
Format config greeting_message {default}
Parameters
default - (Optional) Add this parameter to the config greeting_message command will return the greeting message (banner) to its original factory default entry.
Restrictions
Only Administrators and Operators can issue this command.
Example
To edit the banner:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config greeting_message
Command: config greeting_message
Greeting Messages Editor
===============================================================================
DGS-3000-26TC Gigabit Ethernet Switch
Command Line Interface
Firmware: Build 2.00.004
Copyright(C) 2016 D-Link Corporation. All rights reserved.
===============================================================================
<Function Key> <Control Key>
Ctrl+C Quit without save left/right/
Ctrl+W Save and quit up/down Move cursor
Ctrl+D Delete line
Ctrl+X Erase all setting
Ctrl+L Reload original setting
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
15
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
2-13 show greeting_message
Description
This command is used to display a greeting message.
Format show greeting_message
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators and Operators can issue this command.
Example
To display greeting message:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show greeting_message
Command: show greeting_message
================================================================================
DGS-3000-26TC Gigabit Ethernet Switch
Command Line Interface
Firmware: Build 2.00.004
Copyright(C) 2016 D-Link Corporation. All rights reserved.
================================================================================
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
2-14 config command_prompt
Description
This command is used to modify the command prompt.
The current command prompt consists of four parts: “product name” + “:” + “user level” + “#” (e.g. “DGS-3000-
26TC:admin#”). This command is used to modify the first part (1. “product name”) with a string consisting of a maximum of 16 characters, or to be replaced with the users’ login user name.
When issuing the reset command, the current command prompt will remain the same. However, when issuing the reset system command, the command prompt will return to its original factory default value.
Format config command_prompt [<string 16> | username | default]
Parameters
<string 16> - Enter the new command prompt string of no more than 16 characters.
username - Enter this command to set the login username as the command prompt.
default - Enter this command to return the command prompt to its original factory default value.
16
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Restrictions
Only Administrators and Operators can issue this command.
Example
To edit the command prompt:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config command_prompt Prompt#
Command: config command_prompt Prompt#
Success.
Prompt#:admin#
2-15 config terminal width
Description
This command is used to set current terminal width.
The usage is described as below:
1. Users login and configure the terminal width to 120, this configuration take effect on this login section. If users implement “save” command, the configuration is saved. After users log out and log in again, the terminal width is 120.
2. If user did not save the configuration, another user login, the terminal width is default value.
3. If at the same time, two CLI sessions are running, once section configure to 120 width and save it, the other section will not be effected, unless it log out and then log in.
Format config terminal width [default | <value 80-200>]
Parameters
default - Specify the default terminal width setting. The default value is 80.
<value 80-200> - Enter the configured terminal width. The width is between 80 and 200 characters.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To configure the current terminal width:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config terminal width 120
Command: config terminal width 120
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
17
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
2-16 show terminal width
Description
This command is used to display the configuration of current terminal width.
Format show terminal width
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the configuration of current terminal width:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show terminal width
Command: show terminal width
Global terminal width : 80
Current terminal width : 80
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
2-17 config ports
Description
This command is used to configure the Switch's Ethernet port settings.
Format config ports [<portlist> | all] {medium_type [fiber | copper]} {speed [auto {capability_advertised {10_half |
10_full | 100_half | 100_full | 1000_full}} | 10_half | 10_full | 100_half | 100_full | 1000_full {[master | slave]} |
10g_full] | auto_negotiation [restart_an | remote_fault_advertised [disable | offline | link_fault | auto_negotiation_error]] | flow_control [enable | disable] | learning [enable | disable] | state [enable | disable] | mdix [auto | normal | cross] | [description <desc 1-32> | clear_description] | auto_speed_downgrade [enable | disable]}(1)
Parameters
<portlist> - Enter a range of ports to be configured.
all - Specify all ports in the system, you may use the “all” parameter command.
medium_type - (Optional) Specify the medium type for the combo ports. This parameter is optional. For noncombo ports, the user doesn't need to specify medium_type in the command.
fiber - Specify the fiber port.
copper - Specify the copper port
speed - Specify the port speed.
auto - Specify the port auto negotiation speed.
capability_advertised - Specify that the capability will be advertised.
10_half - Specify the port speed to 10_half.
10_full - Specify the port speed to 10_full.
100_half - Specify the port speed to 100_half.
18
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
100_full - Specify the port speed to 100_full.
1000_full - Specify the port speed to 1000_full. Using master or slave mode in this mode is optional.
10_half - Specify the port speed to 10_half.
10_full - Specify the port speed to 10_full.
100_half - Specify the port speed to 100_half.
100_full - Specify the port speed to 100_full.
1000_full - Specify the port speed to 1000_full. While set port speed to 1000_full,user should specify master or slave mode for 1000BASE-T interface, and leave the 1000_full without any master or slave setting for other interface.
master - (Optional) Specify that the port(s) will be set to master.
slave - (Optional) Specify that the port(s) will be set to slave.
10g_full - Specify the port speed to 10g_full.
auto_negotiation - Specify that the auto-negotiation option will be configured.
restart_an - Specify to restart the auto-negotiation process.
remote_fault_advertised - Specify that the remote fault advertisement option will be configured.
disable - Specify to disable remote fault advertisement.
offline - Specify that a local device may indicate Offline prior to powering off, running transmitter tests, or removing the local device from the active configuration. If it is set and detected offline, it will advertise at the next auto-negotiation. It interacted for 1000Mbps MAUs.
link_fault - Specify that if set and local device was detected, a Link_Failure condition indicated by the loss of synchronization, will advertise at the next auto-negotiation. It interacted for 1000Mbps MAUs.
auto_negotiation_error - Specify the resolution which precludes operation between a local device and link partner advertised at the next auto-negotiation. It interacted for 1000Mbps MAUs.
flow_control - Turns on or turns off the flow control on one or more ports by enabling or disabling this function.
enable - Specify that the flow control option will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the flow control option will be disabled.
learning - Turns on or turns off the MAC address learning on one or more ports.
enable - Specify that the learning option will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the learning option will be disabled.
state - Enables or disables the specified port. If the specified ports are in error-disabled status, configure their state to enable will recover these ports from disabled to enable state.
enable - Specify that the port state will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the port state will be disabled.
mdix - The MDIX mode can be specified as auto, normal, and cross. If set to the normal state, the port is in the
MDIX mode and can be connected to PC NIC using a straight cable. If set to the cross state, the port is in the
MDI mode, and can be connected to a port (in the MDIX mode) on another switch through a straight cable.
auto - Specify that the MDIX mode for the port will be set to auto.
normal - Specify that the MDIX mode for the port will be set to normal.
cross - Specify that the MDIX mode for the port will be set to cross.
description - Specify the description of the port interface.
<desc 1-32> - Enter the port interface description. This value can be up to 32 characters long.
clear description - (Optional) Specify that the description field will be cleared.
auto_speed_downgrade - Specify to enable or disable the option to automatically downgrade the advertised speed. This setting has no effect when the port is working in the forced mode.
enable - Specify to enable the option to automatically downgrade the advertised speed.
disable - Specify to disable the option to automatically downgrade the advertised speed.
Restrictions
Only Administrators and Operators can issue this command.
Example
To configure the ports:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# config ports 1-3 speed 10_full learning enable state enable flow_control enable
Command: config ports 1-3 speed 10_full learning enable state enable flow_control enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
19
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
2-18 show ports
Description
This command is used to display the current configurations of a range of ports. No parameter will show all ports.
Format show ports {<portlist>} {[description | err_disabled | auto_negotiation | details | media_type]}
Parameters
<portlist> - (Optional) Enter a range of ports to be displayed.
description - (Optional) Specify to display the port description.
err_disabled - (Optional)Specify to display disabled information.
auto_negotiation - (Optional) Specify to display detailed auto-negotiation information.
details - (Optional) Specify if port information is included in the display.
media_type - (Optional) Displays SFP information.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the port details:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show ports details
Command: show ports details
Port : 1
--------------------
Port Status : Link Up
Description :
HardWare Type : Gigabits Ethernet
MAC Address : B0-C5-54-30-00-A1
Bandwidth : 100000Kbit
Auto-Negotiation : Enabled
Duplex Mode : Full Duplex
Flow Control : Disabled
MDI : Cross
Address Learning : Enabled
Last Clear of Counter : 3 hours 9 mins ago
BPDU Hardware Filtering Mode: Disabled
Queuing Strategy : FIFO
TX Load : 0/100, 0 bits/sec, 0 packets/sec
RX Load : 0/100, 0 bits/sec, 0 packets/sec
CTRL+C ESC q Quit SPACE n Next Page p Previous Page r Refresh
20
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 3 802.1Q VLAN Command List
create vlan <vlan_name 32> tag <vlanid 2-4094> {type [1q_vlan | private_vlan]} {advertisement}
create vlan vlanid <vidlist> {type [1q_vlan | private_vlan]} {advertisement}
delete vlan <vlan_name 32>
delete vlan vlanid <vidlist>
config vlan <vlan_name 32> {[add [tagged | untagged | forbidden] | delete] <portlist> | advertisement [enable | disable]}(1)
config vlan vlanid <vidlist> {[add [tagged | untagged | forbidden] | delete] <portlist> | advertisement [enable | disable] | name <vlan_name 32>}(1)
config port_vlan [<portlist> | all] {gvrp_state [enable | disable] | ingress_checking [enable | disable] | acceptable_frame [tagged_only | admit_all] | pvid <vlanid 1-4094>}(1)
show vlan {<vlan_name 32>}
show vlan ports {<portlist>}
show vlan vlanid <vidlist>
show port_vlan {<portlist>} enable pvid auto_assign disable pvid auto_assign show pvid auto_assign
config gvrp [timer {join < value 100-100000> | leave < value 100-100000> | leaveall <value 100-100000>} | nni_bpdu_addr [dot1d | dot1ad]] show gvrp enable gvrp disable gvrp
config private_vlan [<vlan_name 32> | vid <vlanid 2-4094>] [add [isolated | community] | remove] [<vlan_name
32> | vlanid <vidlist>]
show private_vlan {[<vlan_name 32> | vlanid<vidlist>]}
3-1 create vlan
Description
This command is used to create a VLAN on the Switch. The VLAN ID must be always specified for creating a
VLAN.
Format create vlan <vlan_name 32> tag <vlanid 2-4094> {type [1q_vlan | private_vlan]} {advertisement}
Parameters
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the VLAN name to be created. The VLAN name can be up to 32 characters long.
tag - Creates the VLAN ID.
<vlanid 2-4094> - Enter the VLAN ID. The VLAN ID value must be between 2 and 4094.
type - (Optional) Specify the type of VLAN here.
1q_vlan - (Optional) Specify that the type of VLAN used is based on the 802.1Q standard.
private_vlan - (Optional) Specify that the private VLAN type will be used.
advertisement - (Optional) Specify the VLAN as being able to be advertised out.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
21
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Example
To create a VLAN with name “p1” and VLAN ID 2:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#create vlan p1 tag 2 type private_vlan advertisement
Command: create vlan p1 tag 2 type private_vlan advertisement
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
3-2 create vlan vlanid
Description
This command is used to create more than one VLANs at a time. A unique VLAN name (e.g. VLAN10) will be automatically assigned by the system. The automatic assignment of VLAN name is based on the following rule:
“VLAN”+ID. For example, for VLAN ID 100, the VLAN name will be VLAN100. If this VLAN name is conflict with the name of an existing VLAN, then it will be renamed based on the following rule: “VLAN”+ID+”ALT”+ collision count.
For example, if this conflict is the second collision, then the name will be VLAN100ALT2.
Format create vlan vlanid <vidlist> {type [1q_vlan | private_vlan]} {advertisement}
Parameters
<vidlist> - Enter the VLAN ID list to be created.
type - (Optional) Specify the type of VLAN to be created.
1q_vlan - (Optional) Specify that the VLAN created will be a 1Q VLAN.
private_vlan - (Optional) Specify that the private VLAN type will be used.
advertisement - (Optional) Specify the VLAN as being able to be advertised out.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To create some VLANs using VLAN ID:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#create vlan vlanid 10-30
Command: create vlan vlanid 10-30
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
3-3 delete vlan
Description
This command is used to delete a previously configured VLAN by the name on the Switch.
Format delete vlan <vlan_name 32>
22
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Parameters
vlan - The VLAN name of the VLAN to be deleted.
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the VLAN name here. This name can be up to 32 characters long.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To remove a vlan v1:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#delete vlan v1
Command: delete vlan v1
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
3-4 delete vlan vlanid
Description
This command is used to delete one or a number of previously configured VLAN by VID list.
Format delete vlan vlanid <vidlist>
Parameters
vlanid - The VLAN ID list to be deleted.
<vidlist> - Enter the VLAN ID list here.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To remove VLANs from 10-30:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#delete vlan vlanid 10-30
Command: delete vlan vlanid 10-30
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
3-5 config vlan
Description
This command is used to configure a VLAN based on the name.
23
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Format config vlan <vlan_name 32> {[add [tagged | untagged | forbidden] | delete] <portlist> | advertisement
[enable | disable]}(1)
Parameters
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the VLAN name you want to add ports to. This name can be up to 32 characters long.
add - (Optional) Specify to add tagged, untagged or forbidden ports to the VLAN.
tagged - Specify the additional ports as tagged.
untagged - Specify the additional ports as untagged.
forbidden - Specify the additional ports as forbidden.
delete - (Optional) Specify to delete ports from the VLAN.
<portlist> - (Optional) Enter the list of ports used for the configuration here.
advertisement - (Optional) Specify the GVRP state of this VLAN.
enable - Specify to enable advertisement for this VLAN.
disable - Specify to disable advertisement for this VLAN.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To add 4 through 8 as tagged ports to the VLAN v2:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config vlan v2 add tagged 4-8
Command: config vlan v2 add tagged 4-8
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
3-6 config vlan vlanid
Description
This command is used to configure multiple VLANs at one time. But conflicts will be generated if you configure the name of multiple VLANs at one time.
Format config vlan vlanid <vidlist> {[add [tagged | untagged | forbidden] | delete] <portlist> | advertisement [enable
| disable] | name <vlan_name 32>}(1)
Parameters
<vidlist> - Enter a list of VLAN IDs to configure.
add - (Optional) Specify to add tagged, untagged or forbidden ports to the VLAN.
tagged - Specify the additional ports as tagged.
untagged - Specify the additional ports as untagged.
forbidden - Specify the additional ports as forbidden.
delete - (Optional) Specify to delete ports from the VLAN.
<portlist> - (Optional) Enter the list of ports used for the configuration here.
advertisement - (Optional) Specify the GVRP state of this VLAN.
enable - Specify to enable advertisement for this VLAN.
disable - Specify to disable advertisement for this VLAN.
name - (Optional) The new name of the VLAN.
24
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the VLAN name here. This name can be up to 32 characters long.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To add 4 through 8 as tagged ports to the VLAN ID from 10-20:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config vlan vlanid 10-20 add tagged 4-8
Command: config vlan vlanid 10-20 add tagged 4-8
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
3-7 config port_vlan
Description
This command is used to set the ingress checking status, the sending and receiving GVRP information.
Format config port_vlan [<portlist> | all] {gvrp_state [enable | disable] | ingress_checking [enable | disable] | acceptable_frame [tagged_only | admit_all] | pvid <vlanid 1-4094>}(1)
Parameters
<portlist> - Enter a range of ports for which you want ingress checking. The port list is specified by listing the beginning port number on the Switch, separated by a colon. Then highest port number of the range (also separated by a colon) is specified. The beginning and end of the port list range are separated by a dash.
all - Specify all ports for ingress checking.
gvrp_state - (Optional) Enables or disables the GVRP for the ports specified in the port list.
enable - Specify that GVRP for the specified ports will be enabled.
disable - Specify that GVRP for the specified ports will be disabled.
ingress_checking - (Optional) Enables or disables ingress checking for the specified portlist.
enable - Specify that ingress checking will be enabled for the specified portlist.
disable - Specify that ingress checking will be disabled for the specified portlist.
acceptable_frame - (Optional) The type of frame will be accepted by the port. There are two types:
tagged_only - Only tagged packets can be accepted by this port.
admit_all - All packets can be accepted.
pvid - (Optional) Specify the PVID of the ports.
<vlanid 1-4094> - Enter the VLAN ID here. The VLAN ID value must be between 1 and 4094.
Restrictions
Only Administrators and Operators can issue this command.
Example
To sets the ingress checking status, the sending and receiving GVRP information:
25
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config port_vlan 1-5 gvrp_state enable ingress_checking enable acceptable_frame tagged_only pvid 2
Command: config port_vlan 1-5 gvrp_state enable ingress_checking enable acceptable_frame tagged_only pvid 2
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
3-8 show vlan
Description
This command is used to display the vlan information including of parameters setting and operational value.
Format show vlan {<vlan_name 32>}
Parameters
<vlan_name 32> - (Optional) Enter the VLAN name to be displayed. The VLAN name can be up to 32 characters long.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display VLAN settings:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show vlan
Command: show vlan
VLAN Trunk State : Disabled
VLAN Trunk Member Ports :
VID : 1 VLAN Name : default
VLAN Type : Static Advertisement : Enabled
Member Ports : 1-26
Static Ports : 1-26
Current Tagged Ports :
Current Untagged Ports: 1-26
Static Tagged Ports :
Static Untagged Ports : 1-26
Forbidden Ports :
Total Static VLAN Entries: 1
Total GVRP VLAN Entries: 0
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
26
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
3-9 show vlan ports
Description
This command is used to display the vlan information per ports.
Format show vlan ports {<portlist>}
Parameters
<portlist> - (Optional) Enter the list of ports for which the VLAN information will be displayed.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the VLAN configuration for port 6:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show vlan ports 6
Command: show vlan ports 6
Port VID Untagged Tagged Dynamic Forbidden
----- ---- -------- ------ ------- ---------
6 1 X - - -
6 2 - X - -
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
3-10 show vlan vlanid
Description
This command is used to display the vlan information using the VLAN ID.
Format show vlan vlanid <vidlist>
Parameters
<vidlist> - Enter the VLAN ID to be displayed.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the VLAN configuration for VLAN ID 1:
27
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show vlan vlanid 1
Command: show vlan vlanid 1
VID : 1 VLAN Name : default
VLAN Type : Static Advertisement : Enabled
Member Ports : 1-26
Static Ports : 1-26
Current Tagged Ports :
Current Untagged Ports: 1-26
Static Tagged Ports :
Static Untagged Ports : 1-26
Forbidden Ports :
Total Entries : 1
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
3-11 show port_vlan
Description
This command is used to display the ports’ VLAN attributes on the Switch.
Format show port_vlan {<portlist>}
Parameters
<portlist> - (Optional) Enter a range of ports to be displayed.
If no parameter specified, system will display all ports gvrp information.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display 802.1Q port setting:
28
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show port_vlan
Command: show port_vlan
Port PVID GVRP Ingress Checking Acceptable Frame Type
------- ---- -------- ---------------- ---------------------------
1 2 Enabled Enabled Only VLAN-tagged Frames
2 2 Enabled Enabled Only VLAN-tagged Frames
3 2 Enabled Enabled Only VLAN-tagged Frames
4 2 Enabled Enabled Only VLAN-tagged Frames
5 2 Enabled Enabled Only VLAN-tagged Frames
6 1 Disabled Enabled All Frames
7 1 Disabled Enabled All Frames
8 1 Disabled Enabled All Frames
9 1 Disabled Enabled All Frames
10 1 Disabled Enabled All Frames
11 1 Disabled Enabled All Frames
12 1 Disabled Enabled All Frames
13 1 Disabled Enabled All Frames
14 1 Disabled Enabled All Frames
15 1 Disabled Enabled All Frames
16 1 Disabled Enabled All Frames
17 1 Disabled Enabled All Frames
18 1 Disabled Enabled All Frames
19 1 Disabled Enabled All Frames
20 1 Disabled Enabled All Frames
CTRL+C ESC q Quit SPACE n Next Page ENTER Next Entry a All
3-12 enable pvid auto assign
Description
This command is used to enable the auto-assignment of PVID.
If “Auto-assign PVID” is enabled, PVID will be possibly changed by PVID or VLAN configuration. When user configures a port to VLAN X’s untagged membership, this port’s PVID will be updated with VLAN X. In the form of
VLAN list command, PVID is updated with last item of VLAN list. When user removes a port from the untagged membership of the PVID’s VLAN, the port’s PVID will be assigned with “default VLAN”. The default setting is enabled.
Format enable pvid auto_assign
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To enable the auto-assign PVID:
29
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#enable pvid auto_assign
Command: enable pvid auto_assign
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
3-13 disable pvid auto assign
Description
This command is used to disable auto assignment of PVID.
Format disable pvid auto_assign
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To disable the auto-assign PVID:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#disable pvid auto_assign
Command: disable pvid auto_assign
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
3-14 show pvid auto_assign
Description
This command is used to display the PVID auto-assignment state.
Format show pvid auto_assign
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
30
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Example
To display PVID auto-assignment state:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show pvid auto_assign
Command: show pvid auto_assign
PVID Auto-assignment: Enabled
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
3-15 config gvrp
Description
This command is used to set the GVRP timer’s value. The default value for Join time is 200 milliseconds; for Leave time is 600 milliseconds; for LeaveAll time is 10000 milliseconds.
Format config gvrp [timer {join < value 100-100000> | leave < value 100-100000> | leaveall <value 100-100000>} | nni_bpdu_addr [dot1d | dot1ad]]
Parameters
timer - Specify that the GVRP timer parameter will be configured.
join - (Optional) Specify the Join time will be set.
<value 100-100000> - Enter the time used here. This value must be between 100 and 100000.
leave - (Optional) Specify the Leave time will be set.
<value 100-100000> - Enter the time used here. This value must be between 100 and 100000.
leaveall - (Optional) Specify the LeaveAll time will be set.
<value 100-100000> - Enter the time used here. This value must be between 100 and 100000.
nni_bpdu_addr - This address is used to determine the BPDU protocol address for GVRP at a service provider's site. It can use either an 802.1d GVRP address (0180C2000021) or an 802.1ad service provider GVRP address (0180C200000D).
dot1d - Specify that the NNI BPDU protocol address value will be set to Dot1d.
dot1ad - Specify that the NNI BPDU protocol address value will be set to Dot1ad.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To set the Join time to 200 milliseconds:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config gvrp timer join 200
Command: config gvrp timer join 200
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
3-16 show gvrp
Description
This command is used to display the GVRP global setting.
31
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Format show gvrp
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the global setting of GVRP:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show gvrp
Command: show gvrp
Global GVRP : Disabled
Join Time : 200 Milliseconds
Leave Time : 600 Milliseconds
LeaveAll Time : 10000 Milliseconds
NNI BPDU Address: dot1d
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
3-17 enable gvrp
Description
This commands is used to enable the Generic VLAN Registration Protocol (GVRP).
Format enable gvrp
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To enable the generic VLAN Registration Protocol (GVRP):
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#enable gvrp
Command: enable gvrp
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
32
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
3-18 disable gvrp
Description
This command is used to disable the Generic VLAN Registration Protocol (GVRP).
Format disable gvrp
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To disable the Generic VLAN Registration Protocol (GVRP):
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#disable gvrp
Command: disable gvrp
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
3-19 config private_vlan
Description
This command is used to add or remove a secondary VLAN from a private VLAN.
Format config private_vlan [<vlan_name 32> | vid <vlanid 2-4094>] [add [isolated | community] | remove]
[<vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vidlist>]
Parameters
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the name of the private VLAN.
vid - Specify the VLAN ID of the private VLAN.
<vlanid 2-4094> - Enter the VLAN ID used here. This value must be between 2 and 4094.
add - Specify that a secondary VLAN will be added to the private VLAN.
isolated - Specify the secondary VLAN as isolated VLAN.
community - Specify the secondary VLAN as community VLAN.
remove - Specify that a secondary VLAN will be removed from the private VLAN.
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the secondary VLAN name used. This name can be up to 32 characters long.
vlanid - A range of secondary VLAN to add or remove to the private VLAN.
<vidlist> - Enter the secondary VLAN ID used here.
Restrictions
Only Administrators and Operators can issue this command.
33
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Example
To associate secondary vlan to private vlan p1:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config private_vlan p1 add community vlanid 3
Command: config private_vlan p1 add community vlanid 3
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
3-20 show private_vlan
Description
This command is used to show the private VLAN information.
Format show private_vlan {[<vlan_name 32> | vlanid<vidlist>]}
Parameters
<vlan_name 32> - (Optional) Enter the name of the private VLAN or its secondary VLAN. This name can be up to
32 characters long.
vlanid - (Optional) Specify the VLAN ID of the private VLAN or its secondary VLAN.
<vidlist> - Enter the VLAN ID used here.
Restrictions
Only Administrators and Operators can issue this command.
Example
To display private VLAN settings:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show private_vlan
Command: show private_vlan
Primary VLAN 3
------------------------------------------
Promiscuous Ports :
Trunk Ports :
Total Entries: 1
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
34
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 4 802.1X Command List
enable 802.1x disable 802.1x
create 802.1x user <username 15>
delete 802.1x user <username 15> show 802.1x user
config 802.1x auth_protocol [local | radius_eap]
config 802.1x fwd_pdu system [enable | disable]
config 802.1x fwd_pdu ports [<portlist> | all] [enable | disable]
config 802.1x authorization attributes radius [enable | disable]
show 802.1x {[auth_state | auth_configuration] ports {<portlist>}}
config 802.1x capability ports [<portlist> | all] [authenticator | none]
config 802.1x max_users [<value 1-448> | no_limit]
config 802.1x auth_parameter ports [<portlist> | all] [default | {direction [both | in] | port_control [force_unauth | auto | force_auth] | quiet_period <sec 0-65535> | tx_period <sec 1-65535> | supp_timeout <sec 1-65535> | server_timeout <sec 1-65535> | max_req <value 1-10> | reauth_period <sec 1-65535> | max_users [<value 1-
448> | no_limit] | enable_reauth [enable | disable]}(1)]
config 802.1x init [port_based ports [<portlist> | all] | mac_based ports [<portlist> | all] {mac_address
<macaddr>}]
config 802.1x auth_mode [port_based | mac_based]
config 802.1x reauth [port_based ports [<portlist> | all] | mac_based ports [<portlist> | all] {mac_address
<macaddr>}]
create 802.1x guest_vlan <vlan_name 32>
delete 802.1x guest_vlan <vlan_name 32>
config 802.1x guest_vlan ports [<portlist> | all] state [enable | disable]
config 802.1x trap state [enable | disable] show 802.1x guest_vlan
show auth_statistics {ports <portlist>}
show auth_diagnostics {ports <portlist>}
show auth_session_statistics {ports <portlist>}
4-1 enable 802.1x
Description
This command is used to enable the 802.1X function.
Format enable 802.1x
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
Used to enable the 802.1X function:
35
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#enable 802.1x
Command: enable 802.1x
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
4-2 disable 802.1x
Description
This command is used to disable the 802.1X function.
Format disable 802.1x
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To disable the 802.1X function:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#disable 802.1x
Command: disable 802.1x
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
4-3 create 802.1x user
Description
This command is used to create an 802.1X user.
Format create 802.1x user <username 15>
Parameters
<username 15> - Enter the username to be added. This value can be up to 15 characters long.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
36
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Example
To create a 802.1x user “test”:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#create 802.1x user test
Command: create 802.1x user test
Enter a case-sensitive new password:****
Enter the new password again for confirmation:****
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
4-4 delete 802.1x user
Description
This command is used to delete an 802.1X user.
Format delete 802.1x user <username 15>
Parameters
<username 15> - Enter the username to be deleted. This value can be up to 15 characters long.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To delete user “test”:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#delete 802.1x user test
Command: delete 802.1x user test
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
4-5 show 802.1x user
Description
This command is used to display the 802.1X user.
Format show 802.1x user
Parameters
None.
37
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the 802.1X user information:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show 802.1x user
Command: show 802.1x user
Current Accounts:
Username Password
--------------- ---------------
test test
Total Entries:1
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
4-6 config 802.1x auth_protocol
Description
This command is used to configure the 802.1X authentication protocol.
Format config 802.1x auth_protocol [local | radius_eap]
Parameters
local - Specify the authentication protocol as local.
radius_eap - Specify the authentication protocol as RADIUS EAP.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure the 802.1X authentication protocol to RADIUS EAP:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config 802.1x auth_protocol radius_eap
Command: config 802.1x auth_protocol radius_eap
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
4-7 config 802.1x fwd_pdu system
Description
This command is used to globally control the forwarding of EAPOL PDU. When 802.1X functionality is disabled globally or for a port, and if 802.1X fwd_pdu is enabled both globally and for the port, a received EAPOL packet on
38
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide the port will be flooded in the same VLAN to those ports for which 802.1X fwd_pdu is enabled and 802.1X is disabled (globally or just for the port). The default state is disabled.
Format config 802.1x fwd_pdu system [enable | disable]
Parameters
enable - Enables the forwarding of EAPOL PDU.
disable - Disables the forwarding of EAPOL PDU.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure forwarding of EAPOL PDU system state enable:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config 802.1x fwd_pdu system enable
Command: config 802.1x fwd_pdu system enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
4-8 config 802.1x fwd_pdu ports
Description
This command is used to control the forwarding of EAPOL PDU. When 802.1X functionality is disabled globally or for a port, and if 802.1X fwd_pdu is enabled both globally and for the port, a received EAPOL packet on the port will be flooded in the same VLAN to those ports for which 802.1X fwd_pdu is enabled and 802.1X is disabled
(globally or just for the port). The default state is disabled.
Format config 802.1x fwd_pdu ports [<portlist> | all] [enable | disable]
Parameters
<portlist> - Enter the list of ports used for the configuration.
all - Specify that all the ports will be used.
enable - Enables forwarding EAPOL PDU receive on the ports.
disable - Disables forwarding EAPOL PDU receive on the ports.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure 802.1X fwd_pdu for ports:
39
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config 802.1x fwd_pdu ports 1-2 enable
Command: config 802.1x fwd_pdu ports 1-2 enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
4-9 config 802.1x authorization attributes
Description
This command is used to enable or disable the acceptance of authorized configuration.
When the authorization is enabled for 802.1X’s RADIUS authentication, the authorized attributes (for example
VLAN, 802.1p default priority, and ACL) assigned by the RADUIS server will be accepted.
Format config 802.1x authorization attributes radius [enable | disable]
Parameters
radius - If specified to enable, the authorization attributes (for example VLAN, 802.1p default priority, and ACL) assigned by the RADUIS server will be accepted. The default state is enabled.
enable - Specify to enable the authorization attributes.
disable - Specify to disable the authorization attributes.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
The following example will disable to accept the authorized data assigned from the RADIUS server:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config 802.1x authorization attributes radius disable
Command: config 802.1x authorization attributes radius disable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
4-10 show 802.1x
Description
This command is used to display the 802.1X state or configurations.
Format show 802.1x {[auth_state | auth_configuration] ports {<portlist>}}
Parameters
auth_state - (Optional) Displays 802.1X authentication state machine of some or all ports.
auth_configuration - (Optional) Used to display 802.1X configurations of some or all ports.
40
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
port - (Optional) Specify a range of ports to be displayed. If no port is specified, all ports will be displayed.
<portlist> - Enter the list of ports used for the configuration here.
If no parameter is specified, the 802.1X system configurations will be displayed.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the 802.1X port level configurations:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show 802.1x auth_configuration ports 1
Command: show 802.1x auth_configuration ports 1
Port Number : 1
Capability : None
AdminCrlDir : Both
OpenCrlDir : Both
Port Control : Auto
QuietPeriod : 60 sec
TxPeriod : 30 sec
SuppTimeout : 30 sec
ServerTimeout : 30 sec
MaxReq : 2 times
ReAuthPeriod : 3600 sec
ReAuthenticate : Disabled
Forward EAPOL PDU On Port : Enabled
Max User On Port : 16
CTRL+C ESC q Quit SPACE n Next Page p Previous Page r Refresh
4-11 config 802.1x capability ports
Description
This command is used to configure the port capability.
Format config 802.1x capability ports [<portlist> | all] [authenticator | none]
Parameters
<portlist> - Enter the list of ports used for the configuration here.
all - Specify all ports to be configured.
authenticator - Specify the port that will enforce authentication before allowing access to services that are accessible from that port. This port will adopt the authenticator role.
none - Disables authentication on the specified ports.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure the port capability:
41
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config 802.1x capability ports 1-10 authenticator
Command: config 802.1x capability ports 1-10 authenticator
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
4-12 config 802.1x max_users
Description
This command is used to limit the maximum number of users that can be learned via 802.1X authentication. In addition to the global limitation, maximum user for per port is also limited. It is specified by config 802.1x auth_parameter command.
Format config 802.1x max_users [<value 1-448> | no_limit]
Parameters
<value 1-448> - Enter the maximum number of users. This value must be between 1 and 448.
no_limit - Specify that the maximum user limit will be set to 448.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure 802.1X number of users to be limited to 200:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config 802.1x max_users 200
Command: config 802.1x max_users 200
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
4-13 config 802.1x auth_parameter ports
Description
This command is used to configure the parameters that control the operation of the authenticator associated with a port.
Format config 802.1x auth_parameter ports [<portlist> | all] [default | {direction [both | in] | port_control
[force_unauth | auto | force_auth] | quiet_period <sec 0-65535> | tx_period <sec 1-65535> | supp_timeout
<sec 1-65535> | server_timeout <sec 1-65535> | max_req <value 1-10> | reauth_period <sec 1-65535> | max_users [<value 1-448> | no_limit] | enable_reauth [enable | disable]}(1)]
Parameters
<portlist> - Enter the list of ports used for the configuration here.
42
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
all - Specify that all the ports will be used.
default - Sets all parameter to be default value.
direction - (Optional) Sets the direction of access control.
both - For bidirectional access control.
in - For unidirectional access control.
port_control - (Optional) You can force a specific port to be unconditionally authorized or unauthorized by setting the parameter of port_control to be force_auth or force_unauth. Besides, the controlled port will reflect the outcome of authentication if port_control is auto.
force_unauth - Forces a specific port to be unconditionally unauthorized.
auto - The controlled port will reflect the outcome of authentication.
force_auth - Forces a specific port to be unconditionally authorized.
quiet_period - (Optional) It is the initialization value of the quietWhile timer. The default value is 60 seconds and can be any value among 0 to 65535.
<sec 0-65535> - Enter the quiet period value here. This value must be between 0 and 65535 seconds.
tx_period - (Optional) It is the initialization value of the transmit timer period. The default value is 30 seconds and can be any integer value among 1 to 65535.
<sec 1-65535> - Enter the TX period value here. This value must be between 1 and 65535 seconds.
supp_timeout - (Optional) The initialization value of the aWhile timer when timing out the supplicant. Its default value is 30 seconds and can be any integer value among 1 to 65535.
<sec 1-65535> - Enter the supplicant timeout value here. This value must be between 1 and 65535 seconds.
server_timeout - (Optional) The initialization value of the aWhile timer when timing out the authentication server.
Its default value is 30 seconds and can be any integer value among 1 to 65535.
<sec 1-65535> - Enter the server timeout value here. This value must be between 1 and 65535 seconds.
max_req - (Optional) The maximum number of times that the authentication PAE state machine will retransmit an
EAP Request packet to the supplicant. Its default value is 2 and can be any integer number among 1 to 10.
<value 1-10> - Enter the maximum required value here. This value must be between 1 and 10.
reauth_period - (Optional) It’s a nonzero number of seconds, which is used to be the re-authentication timer. The default value is 3600.
<sec 1-65535> - Enter the re-authentication period value here. This value must be between 1 and 65535 seconds.
max_users - (Optional) Specify per port maximum number of users. The default value is 16.
<value 1-448> - Enter the maximum users value here. This value must be between 1 and 448.
no_limit - Specify that no limit is enforced on the maximum users used.
enable_reauth - (Optional) You can enable or disable the re-authentication mechanism for a specific port.
enable - Specify to enable the re-authentication mechanism for a specific port.
disable - Specify to disable the re-authentication mechanism for a specific port.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure the parameters that control the operation of the authenticator associated with a port:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config 802.1x auth_parameter ports 1-20 direction both
Command: config 802.1x auth_parameter ports 1-20 direction both
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
4-14 config 802.1x init
Description
This command is used to initialize the authentication state machine of some or all ports.
43
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Format config 802.1x init [port_based ports [<portlist> | all] | mac_based ports [<portlist> | all] {mac_address
<macaddr>}]
Parameters
port_based ports - Specify the authentication as the port-based mode.
<portlist> - Enter the list of ports used for the configuration here.
all - Specify that all ports will be used.
mac_based ports - Specify the authentication as the MAC-based mode.
<portlist> - Enter the list of ports used for the configuration here.
all - Specify that all ports will be used.
mac_address - (Optional) Specify the MAC address of client.
<macaddr> - Enter the MAC address used here.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To initialize the authentication state machine of some or all:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config 802.1x init port_based ports all
Command: config 802.1x init port_based ports all
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
4-15 config 802.1x auth_mode
Description
This command is used to configure 802.1X authentication mode.
Format config 802.1x auth_mode [port_based | mac_based]
Parameters
port_based - Specifies the authentication as the port-based mode.
mac_based - Specifies the authentication as the MAC-based mode.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure the authentication mode:
44
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config 802.1x auth_mode port_based
Command: config 802.1x auth_mode port_based
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
4-16 config 802.1x reauth
Description
This command is used to re-authenticate the device connected to the port. During the re-authentication period, the port status remains authorized until failed re-authentication.
Format config 802.1x reauth [port_based ports [<portlist> | all] | mac_based ports [<portlist> | all] {mac_address
<macaddr>}]
Parameters
port_based ports - Specify the authentication as the port-based mode.
<portlist> - Enter the list of ports used for the configuration here.
all - Specify that all ports will be used.
mac_based ports - Specify the authentication as the MAC-based mode.
<portlist> - Enter the list of ports used for the configuration here.
all - Specify that all ports will be used.
mac_address - (Optional) Specify the MAC address of client.
<macaddr> - Enter the MAC address used here.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To re-authenticate the device connected to the port:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config 802.1x reauth port_based ports all
Command: config 802.1x reauth port_based ports all
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
4-17 create 802.1x guest_vlan
Description
This command is used to assign a static VLAN to be guest VLAN. The specific VLAN which assigned to guest
VLAN must be existed. The specific VLAN which assigned to guest VLAN can’t be deleting.
Format create 802.1x guest_vlan <vlan_name 32>
45
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Parameters
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the VLAN to be guest VLAN. The VLAN name can be up to 32 characters long.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To create a VLAN named “guestVLAN” as 802.1X guest VLAN:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#create 802.1x guest_vlan guestVLAN
Command: create 802.1x guest_vlan guestVLAN
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
4-18 delete 802.1x guest_vlan
Description
This command is used to delete guest VLAN setting, but not delete the static VLAN. All ports which enabled guest
VLAN will remove to original VLAN after deleted guest VLAN.
Format delete 802.1x guest_vlan <vlan_name 32>
Parameters
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the VLAN name here. The VLAN name can be up to 32 characters long.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To delete the guest VLAN named “guestVLAN”:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#delete 802.1x guest_vlan guestVLAN
Command: delete 802.1x guest_vlan guestVLAN
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
4-19 config 802.1x guest_vlan ports
Description
This command is used to configure guest VLAN setting. If the specific port state is changed from enabled state to disable state, this port will move to its original VLAN.
46
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Format config 802.1x guest_vlan ports [<portlist> | all] state [enable | disable]
Parameters
<portlist> - Enter the list of ports used for guest VLAN.
all - Specify that all the port will be used for guest VLAN.
state - Specify the guest VLAN port state of the configured ports.
enable - Specify to join the guest VLAN.
disable - Specify to be removed from the guest VLAN.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
Enable on port 2 to 8 to configure 802.1x guest VLAN:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config 802.1x guest_vlan ports 2-8 state enable
Command: config 802.1x guest_vlan ports 2-8 state enable
Warning, The ports are moved to Guest VLAN.
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
4-20 config 802.1x trap state
Description
This command is used to enable or disable the sending of 802.1X traps.
Format config 802.1x trap state [enable | disable]
Parameters
enable - Specify to enable the sending of 802.1x traps.
disable - Specify to disable the sending of 802.1x traps.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
This example shows how to enable the trap state for 802.1x.
47
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# config 802.1x trap state enable
Command: config 802.1x trap state enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
4-21 show 802.1x guest_vlan
Description
This command is used to show the information of guest VLANs.
Format show 802.1x guest_vlan
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show 802.1x guest VLAN on the Switch:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show 802.1x guest_vlan
Command: show 802.1x guest_vlan
Guest VLAN Setting
-----------------------------------------------------------
Guest VLAN : guestVLAN
Enabled Guest VLAN Ports : 2-8
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
4-22 show auth_statistics
Description
This command is used to display information of authenticator statistics.
Format show auth_statistics {ports <portlist>}
Parameters
ports - (Optional) Specify a range of ports to be displayed.
<portlist> - Enter the list of ports that will be displayed here.
48
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display authenticator statistics information for port 1:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show auth_statistics ports 1
Command: show auth_statistics ports 1
MAC Address : 00—01-02-03-04-05
Port Number : 1
EapolFramesRx 0
EapolFramesTx 9
EapolStartFramesRx 0
EapolReqIdFramesTx 6
EapolLogoffFramesRx 0
EapolReqFramesTx 0
EapolRespIdFramesRx 0
EapolRespFramesRx 0
InvalidEapolFramesRx 0
EapLengthErrorFramesRx 0
LastEapolFrameVersion 0
LastEapolFrameSource 00-00-00-00-00-00
CTRL+C ESC q Quit SPACE n Next Page p Previous Page r Refresh
4-23 show auth_diagnostics
Description
This command is used to display information of authenticator diagnostics.
Format show auth_diagnostics {ports <portlist>}
Parameters
ports - (Optional) Specify a range of ports to be displayed.
<portlist> - Enter the list of ports that will be displayed here.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display authenticator diagnostics information for port 1:
49
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show auth_diagnostics ports 1
Command: show auth_diagnostics ports 1
Mac Address : 00-01-02-03-04-05
Port Number : 1
EntersConnecting 11
EapLogoffsWhileConnecting 0
EntersAuthenticating 0
SuccessWhileAuthenticating 0
TimeoutsWhileAuthenticating 0
FailWhileAuthenticating 0
ReauthsWhileAuthenticating 0
EapStartsWhileAuthenticating 0
EapLogoffWhileAuthenticating 0
ReauthsWhileAuthenticated 0
EapStartsWhileAuthenticated 0
EapLogoffWhileAuthenticated 0
BackendResponses 0
BackendAccessChallenges 0
BackendOtherRequestsToSupplicant 0
BackendNonNakResponsesFromSupplicant 0
BackendAuthSuccesses 0
BackendAuthFails 0
CTRL+C ESC q Quit SPACE n Next Page p Previous Page r Refresh
4-24 show auth_session_statistics
Description
This command is used to display information of authenticator session statistics.
Format show auth_session_statistics {ports <portlist>}
Parameters
ports - (Optional) Specify a range of ports to be displayed.
<portlist> - Enter the list of ports that will be displayed here.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display authenticator session statistics information for port 1:
50
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show auth_session_statistics ports 1
Command: show auth_session_statistics ports 1
Mac Address : 00-01-02-03-04-05
Port Number : 1
SessionOctetsRx 0
SessionOctetsTx 0
SessionFramesRx 0
SessionFramesTx 0
SessionId
SessionAuthenticMethod Remote Authentication Server
SessionTime 0
SessionTerminateCause SupplicantLogoff
SessionUserName
CTRL+C ESC q Quit SPACE n Next Page p Previous Page r Refresh
51
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 5 Access Authentication Control
Command List
enable password encryption disable password encryption enable authen_policy disable authen_policy enable authen_policy_encryption disable authen_policy_encryption show authen_policy
create authen_login method_list_name <string 15>
config authen_login [default | method_list_name <string 15>] method {tacacs | xtacacs | tacacs+ | radius | server_group <string 15> | local | none}
delete authen_login method_list_name <string 15>
show authen_login [default | method_list_name <string 15> | all]
create authen_enable method_list_name <string 15>
config authen_enable [default | method_list_name <string 15>] method {tacacs | xtacacs | tacacs+ | radius | server_group <string 15> | local _enable | none}
delete authen_enable method_list_name <string 15>
show authen_enable [default | method_list_name <string 15> | all]
config authen application [console | telnet | ssh | http | all] [login | enable] [default | method_list_name <string
15>] show authen application
create authen server_group <string 15>
config authen server_group [tacacs | xtacacs | tacacs+ | radius | <string 15>] [add | delete] server_host
[<ipaddr> | ipv6 <ipv6addr> ] protocol [tacacs | xtacacs | tacacs+ | radius]
delete authen server_group <string 15>
show authen server_group {<string 15>}
create authen server_host [<ipaddr> | ipv6 <ipv6addr>] protocol [tacacs | xtacacs | tacacs+| radius] {port <int 1-
65535> | [key [<key_string 254> | none] | encryption_key <key_string 344>] | timeout <int 1-255> | retransmit
<int 1-20>}
config authen server_host [<ipaddr> | ipv6 <ipv6addr>] protocol [tacacs | xtacacs | tacacs+| radius] {port <int 1-
65535> | [key [<key_string 254> | none] | encryption_key <key_string 344>] | timeout <int 1-255> | retransmit
<int 1-20>}
delete authen server_host [<ipaddr> | ipv6 <ipv6addr>] protocol [tacacs | xtacacs | tacacs+ | radius] show authen server_host
config authen parameter response_timeout <int 0-255>
config authen parameter attempt <int 1-255> show authen parameter enable admin
config admin local_enable {encrypt [plain_text | sha_1] <password>}
create accounting method_list_name <string 15>
config accounting [default | method_list_name <string 15>] method {tacacs+ | radius | server_group <string 15>
| none}
delete accounting method_list_name <string 15>
show accounting [default | method_list_name <string 15> | all]
config accounting service command {administrator | operator | power_user | user} [method_list_name <string>
| none]
config accounting service [network | shell | system] state [enable {[radius_only | method_list_name <string 15> | default_method_list]} | disable] show accounting service show aaa
52
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
5-1 enable password encryption
Description
This command is used to enable password encryption. The user account configuration information will be stored in the configuration file, and can be applied to the system later.
If the password encryption is enabled, the password will be in encrypted form.
Format enable password encryption
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To enable the password encryption:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#enable password encryption
Command: enable password encryption
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
5-2 disable password encryption
Description
This command is used to disable password encryption. The user account configuration information will be stored in the configuration file, and can be applied to the system later.
When password encryption is disabled, if the user Specify the password in plain text form, the password will be in plain text form. However, if the user Specify the password in encrypted form, or if the password has been converted to encrypted form by the last enable password encryption command, the password will still be in the encrypted form. It can not be reverted to the plaintext.
Format disable password encryption
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To disable the password encryption:
53
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#disable password encryption
Command: disable password encryption
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
5-3 enable authen_policy
Description
This command is used to enable system access authentication policy.
Enable system access authentication policy. When authentication is enabled, the device will adopt the login authentication method list to authenticate the user for login, and adopt the enable authentication method list to authenticate the enable password for promoting the user‘s privilege to Admin level.
Format enable authen_policy
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To enable system access authentication policy:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#enable authen_policy
Command: enable authen_policy
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
5-4 disable authen_policy
Description
This command is used to disable system access authentication policy.
Disable system access authentication policy. When authentication is disabled, the device will adopt the local user account database to authenticate the user for login, and adopt the local enable password to authenticate the enable password for promoting the user‘s privilege to Admin level.
Format disable authen_policy
Parameters
None.
54
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To disable system access authentication policy:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#disable authen_policy
Command: disable authen_policy
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
5-5 enable authen_policy_encryption
Description
This command is used to enable the authentication policy encryption. When enabled, TACACS+ and RADIUS key will be in the encrypted form.
Format enable authen_policy_encryption
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To enable the authentication policy encryption:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#enable authen_policy_encryption
Command: enable authen_policy_encryption
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
5-6 disable authen_policy_encryption
Description
This command is used to disable the authentication policy encryption. When disabled, TACACS+ and RADIUS key will be in the plain text form.
Format disable authen_policy_encryption
55
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To disable the authentication policy encryption:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#disable authen_policy_encryption
Command: disable authen_policy_encryption
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
5-7 show authen_policy
Description
This command is used to display that system access authentication policy is enabled or disabled.
Format show authen_policy
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To display system access authentication policy:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show authen_policy
Command: show authen_policy
Authentication Policy : Enabled
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
5-8 create authen_login
Description
This command is used to create a user-defined method list of authentication methods for user login. The maximum supported number of the login method lists is 8.
56
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Format create authen_login method_list_name <string 15>
Parameters
<string 15> - Enter the user-defined method list name. This value can be up to 15 characters long.
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To create a user-defined method list for user login:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#create authen_login method_list_name login_list_1
Command: create authen_login method_list_name login_list_1
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
5-9 config authen_login
Description
This command is used to configure a user-defined or default method list of authentication methods for user login.
The sequence of methods will affect the altercation result. For example, if the sequence is TACACS+ first, then
TACACS and local, when user tries to login, the authentication request will be sent to the first server host in
TACACS+ built-in server group. If the first server host in TACACS+ group is missing, the authentication request will be sent to the second server host in TACACS+ group, and so on. If all server hosts in TACACS+ group are missing, the authentication request will be sent to the first server host in TACACS group. If all server hosts in TACACS group are missing, the local account database in the device is used to authenticate this user. When user logins the device successfully while using methods like TACACS/XTACACS/TACACS+/RADIUS built-in or user-defined server groups or none, the “user” privilege level is assigned only. If user wants to get admin privilege level, user must use the “enable admin” command to promote his privilege level. But when local method is used, the privilege level will depend on this account privilege level stored in the local device.
Format config authen_login [default | method_list_name <string 15>] method {tacacs | xtacacs | tacacs+ | radius | server_group <string 15> | local | none}
Parameters
default - The default method list of authentication methods.
method_list_name - The user-defined method list of authentication methods.
<string 15> - Enter the method list name here. This value can be up to 15 characters long.
method - Specify the authentication method used.
tacacs - (Optional) Specify to authenticate by using the built-in server group called “TACACS”.
xtacacs - (Optional) Specify to authenticate by using the built-in server group called “XTACACS”.
tacacs+ - (Optional) Specify to authenticate by using the built-in server group called “TACACS+”.
radius - (Optional) Specify to authenticate by using the built-in server group called “RADIUS”.
server_group - (Optional) Specify to authenticate by using the user-defined server group.
<string 15> - Enter the server group value here. This value can be up 15 characters long.
local - (Optional) Specify to authenticate by local user account database in device.
none - (Optional) No authentication.
57
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To configure a user-defined method list for user login:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config authen_login method_list_name login_list_1 method tacacs+ tacacs local
Command: config authen_login method_list_name login_list_1 method tacacs+ tacacs local
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
5-10 delete authen_login
Description
This command is used to delete a user-defined method list of authentication methods for user login.
Format delete authen_login method_list_name <string 15>
Parameters
<string 15> - Enter the user-defined method list name. This value can be up to 15 characters long.
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To delete a user-defined method list for user login:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#delete authen_login method_list_name login_list_1
Command: delete authen_login method_list_name login_list_1
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
5-11 show authen_login
Description
This command is used to display the method list of authentication methods for user login.
Format show authen_login [default | method_list_name <string 15> | all]
58
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Parameters
default - Displays default user-defined method list for user login.
method_list_name - Displays the specific user-defined method list for user login.
<string 15> - Enter the method list name here. This value can be up to 15 characters long.
all - Displays all method lists for user login.
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To display a user-defined method list for user login:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show authen_login method_list_name login_list_1
Command: show authen_login method_list_name login_list_1
Method List Name Priority Method Name Comment
---------------- -------- --------------- ------------------ login_list_1 1 tacacs+ Built-in Group
2 tacacs Built-in Group
3 mix_1 User-defined Group
4 local Keyword
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
5-12 create authen_enable
Description
This command is used to create a user-defined method list of authentication methods for promoting user's privilege to Admin level.
Format create authen_enable method_list_name <string 15>
Parameters
<string 15> - Enter the user-defined method list name. This value can be up to 15 characters long.
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To create a user-defined method list for promoting user's privilege to Admin level:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#create authen_enable method_list_name enable_list_1
Command: create authen_enable method_list_name enable_list_1
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
59
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
5-13 config authen_enable
Description
This command is used to configure a user-defined or default method list of authentication methods for promoting user's privilege to Admin level. The sequence of methods will affect the altercation result. For example, if the sequence is TACACS+ first, then TACACS and local_enable, when user try to promote user's privilege to Admin level, the authentication request will be sent to the first server host in TACACS+ built-in server group. If the first server host in TACACS+ group is missing, the authentication request will be sent to the second server host in
TACACS+ group, and so on. If all server hosts in TACACS+ group are missing, the authentication request will be sent to the first server host in TACACS group. If all server hosts in a TACACS group is missing, the local enable password in the device is used to authenticate this user’s password.
Format config authen_enable [default | method_list_name <string 15>] method {tacacs | xtacacs | tacacs+ | radius | server_group <string 15> | local _enable | none}
Parameters
default - The default method list of authentication methods.
method_list_name - The user-defined method list of authentication methods.
<string 15> - Enter the method list name here. This value can be up to 15 characters long.
method - Specify the authentication method used.
tacacs - (Optional) Specify to authenticate by using the built-in server group called “TACACS”.
xtacacs - (Optional) Specify to authenticate by using the built-in server group called “XTACACS”.
tacacs+ - (Optional) Specify to authenticate by using the built-in server group called “TACACS+”.
radius - (Optional) Specify to authenticate by using the built-in server group called “RADIUS”.
server_group - (Optional) Specify to authenticate by the user-defined server group.
<string 15> - Enter the server group name here. This value can be up to 15 characters long.
local_enable - (Optional) Specify to authenticate by local enable password in device.
none - (Optional) No authentication.
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To configure a user-defined method list for promoting user's privilege to Admin level:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config authen_enable method_list_name enable_list_1 method tacacs+ tacacs local_enable
Command: config authen_ enable method_list_name enable_list_1 method tacacs+ tacacs local_enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
5-14 delete authen_enable
Description
This command is used to delete a user-defined method list of authentication methods for promoting user's privilege to Admin level.
Format delete authen_enable method_list_name <string 15>
60
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Parameters
<string 15> - Enter the user-defined method list name. This value can be up to 15 characters long.
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To delete a user-defined method list for promoting user's privilege to Admin level:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#delete authen_enable method_list_name enable_list_1
Command: delete authen_enable method_list_name enable_list_1
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
5-15 show authen_enable
Description
This command is used to display the method list of authentication methods for promoting user's privilege to Admin level.
Format show authen_enable [default | method_list_name <string 15> | all]
Parameters
default - Displays default user-defined method list for promoting user's privilege to Admin level.
method_list_name - Displays the specific user-defined method list for promoting user's privilege to Admin level.
<string 15> - Enter the method list name here. This value can be up to 15 characters long.
all - Displays all method lists for promoting user's privilege to Admin level.
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To display all method lists for promoting user's privilege to Admin level:
61
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show authen_enable method_list_name enable_list_1
Command: show authen_enable method_list_name enable_list_1
Method List Name Priority Method Name Comment
---------------- -------- --------------- ------------------ enable_list_1 1 tacacs+ Built-in Group
2 tacacs Built-in Group
3 mix_1 User-defined Group
4 local_enable Keyword
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
5-16 config authen application
Description
This command is used to configure login or enable method list for all or the specified application.
Format config authen application [console | telnet | ssh | http | all] [login | enable] [default | method_list_name
<string 15>]
Parameters
console - Application: console.
telnet - Application: Telnet.
ssh - Application: SSH.
http - Application: web.
all - Application: console, Telnet, SSH, and web.
login - Selects the method list of authentication methods for user login.
enable - Selects the method list of authentication methods for promoting user's privilege to Admin level.
default - Default method list.
method_list_name - The user-defined method list name.
<string 15> - Enter the method list name here. This value can be up to 15 characters long.
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To configure the login method list for Telnet:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config authen application telnet login method_list_name login_list_1
Command: config authen application telnet login method_list_name login_list_1
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
5-17 show authen application
Description
This command is used to display the login/enable method list for all applications.
62
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Format show authen application
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To display the login/enable method list for all applications:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show authen application
Command: show authen application
Application Login Method List Enable Method List
----------- ----------------- ------------------
Console default default
Telnet login_list_1 default
SSH default default
HTTP default default
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
5-18 create authen server_group
Description
This command is used to create a user-defined authentication server group. The maximum supported number of server groups including built-in server groups is 8. Each group consists of 8 server hosts as maximum.
Format create authen server_group <string 15>
Parameters
<string 15> - Enter the user-defined server group name. This value can be up to 15 characters long.
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To create a user-defined authentication server group:
63
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#create authen server_group mix_1
Command: create authen server_group mix_1
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
5-19 config authen server_group
Description
This command is used to add or remove an authentication server host to or from the specified server group. Builtin server group “TACACS”, “XTACACS”, “TACACS+”, “RADIUS” accepts the server host with the same protocol only, but user-defined server group can accept server hosts with different protocols.
Format config authen server_group [tacacs | xtacacs | tacacs+ | radius | <string 15>] [add | delete] server_host
[<ipaddr> | ipv6 <ipv6addr> ] protocol [tacacs | xtacacs | tacacs+ | radius]
Parameters
tacacs - Built-in server group “TACACS”.
xtacacs - Built-in server group “XTACACS”.
tacacs+ - Built-in server group “TACACS+”.
radius - Built-in server group “RADIUS”.
<string 15> - Enter the server group name here. This value can be up to 15 characters long.
add - Adds a server host to a server group.
delete - Removes a server host from a server group.
server_host - Specify the IP address of the server host.
<ipaddr> - Enter the server host IPv4 address.
ipv6 - Specify the server host IPv6 address.
<ipv6addr> - Enter the server host IPv6 address.
protocol - Specify the authentication protocol used.
tacacs - Specify that the TACACS authentication protocol will be used.
xtacacs - Specify that the XTACACS authentication protocol will be used.
tacacs+ - Specify that the TACACS+ authentication protocol will be used.
radius - Specify that the RADIUS authentication protocol will be used.
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To add an authentication server host to an server group:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config authen server_group mix_1 add server_host 10.1.1.222 protocol tacacs+
Command: config authen server_group mix_1 add server_host 10.1.1.222 protocol tacacs+
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
64
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
5-20 delete authen server_group
Description
This command is used to delete a user-defined authentication server group.
Format delete authen server_group <string 15>
Parameters
<string 15> - Enter the user-defined server group name. This value can be up to 15 characters long.
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To delete a user-defined authentication server group:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#delete authen server_group mix_1
Command: delete authen server_group mix_1
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
5-21 show authen server_group
Description
This command is used to display the authentication server groups.
Format show authen server_group {<string 15>}
Parameters
<string 15> - (Optional) Enter the built-in or user-defined server group name. This value can be up to 15 characters long.
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To display all authentication server groups:
65
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show authen server_group
Command: show authen server_group
Group Name IP Address Protocol
--------------- --------------- -------- mix_1 10.1.1.222 tacacs+
10.1.1.223 tacacs radius 10.1.1.224 RADIUS tacacs 10.1.1.225 tacacs tacacs+ 10.1.1.226 tacacs+ xtacacs 10.1.1.227 xtacacs
Total Entries : 5
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
5-22 create authen server_host
Description
This command is used to create an authentication server host. When an authentication server host is created, IP address and protocol are the index. That means over 1 authentication protocol services can be run on the same physical host. The maximum supported number of server hosts is 16.
Format create authen server_host [<ipaddr> | ipv6 <ipv6addr>] protocol [tacacs | xtacacs | tacacs+| radius] {port
<int 1-65535> | [key [<key_string 254> | none] | encryption_key <key_string 344>] | timeout <int 1-255> | retransmit <int 1-20>}
Parameters
<ipaddr> - Enter the server host IP address.
ipv6 - Specify the server host IPv6 address.
<ipv6addr> - Enter the server host IPv6 address.
protocol - Specify the host's authentication protocol.
tacacs - Server host’s authentication protocol.
xtacacs - Server host’s authentication protocol.
tacacs+ - Server host’s authentication protocol.
radius - Server host’s authentication protocol.
port - (Optional) The port number of authentication protocol for server host. Default value for
TACACS/XTACACS/TACACS+ is 49. Default value for RADIUS is 1812.
<int 1-65535> - Enter the authentication protocol port number here. This value must be between 1 and 65535.
key - (Optional) The key for TACACS+ and RADIUS authentication. If the value is null, no encryption will apply.
This value is meaningless for TACACS and XTACACS.
<key_string 254> - Enter the TACACS+ or the RADIUS key here. This key can be up to 254 characters long.
none - No encryption for TACACS+ and RADIUS authentication. This value is meaningless for TACACS and
XTACACS.
encryption_key - (Optional) Specify the encrypted form key string for TACACS+ and RADIUS authentication.
This value is meaningless for TACACS and XTACACS. The encryption algorithm is based on DES.
<key_string 344> - Enter the encrypted form key string for TACACS+ and RADIUS authentication.
timeout - (Optional) The time in second for waiting server reply. Default value is 5 seconds.
<int 1-255> - Enter the timeout value here. This value must be between 1 and 255 seconds.
retransmit - (Optional) The count for re-transmit. This value is meaningless for TACACS+. Default value is 2.
<int 1-20> - Enter the re-transmit value here. This value must be between 1 and 20.
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
66
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Example
To create a TACACS+ authentication server host, its listening port number is 15555 and timeout value is 10 seconds:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#create authen server_host 10.1.1.222 protocol tacacs+ port 15555 timeout
10
Command: create authen server_host 10.1.1.222 protocol tacacs+ port 15555 timeout 10
Key is empty for tacacs+ or RADIUS.
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
5-23 config authen server_host
Description
This command is used to configure an authentication server host.
Format config authen server_host [<ipaddr> |ipv6 <ipv6addr>] protocol [tacacs | xtacacs | tacacs+ | radius] {port
<int 1-65535> | [ key [<key_string 254> | none] | encryption_key <key_string 344> ] | timeout <int 1-255> | retransmit <int 1-20>}
Parameters
<ipaddr> - Enter the server host IP address.
ipv6 - Specify the server host IPv6 address.
<ipv6addr> - Enter the server host IPv6 address.
protocol - Specify the server host's authentication protocol.
tacacs - Server host’s authentication protocol.
xtacacs - Server host’s authentication protocol.
tacacs+ - Server host’s authentication protocol.
radius - Server host’s authentication protocol.
port - (Optional) The port number of authentication protocol for server host. Default value for
TACACS/XTACACS/TACACS+ is 49. Default value for RADIUS is 1812.
<int 1-65535> - Enter the port number here. This value must be between 1 and 65535.
key - (Optional) The key for TACACS+ and RADIUS authentication. If the value is null, no encryption will apply.
This value is meaningless for TACACS and XTACACS.
<key_string 254> - Enter the TACACS+ key here. This value can be up to 254 characters long.
none - No encryption for TACACS+ and RADIUS authentication. This value is meaningless for TACACS and
XTACACS.
encryption_key - (Optional) Specify the encrypted form key string for TACACS+ and RADIUS authentication.
This value is meaningless for TACACS and XTACACS. The encryption algorithm is based on DES.
<key_string 344> - Enter the encrypted form key string for TACACS+ and RADIUS authentication.
timeout - (Optional) The time in second for waiting server reply. Default value is 5 seconds.
<int 1-255> - Enter the timeout value here. This value must be between 1 and 255 seconds.
retransmit - (Optional) The count for re-transmit. This value is meaningless for TACACS+. Default value is 2.
<int 1-20> - Enter the re-transmit value here. This value must be between 1 and 20.
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To configure a TACACS+ authentication server host’s key value:
67
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config authen server_host 10.1.1.222 protocol tacacs+ key "This is a secret."
Command: config authen server_host 10.1.1.222 protocol tacacs+ key "This is a secret."
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
5-24 delete authen server_host
Description
This command is used to delete an authentication server host.
Format delete authen server_host [<ipaddr> | ipv6 <ipv6addr>] protocol [tacacs | xtacacs | tacacs+ | radius]
Parameters
<ipaddr> - Enter the server host's IP address.
ipv6 - Specify the server host IPv6 address.
<ipv6addr> - Enter the server host IPv6 address.
protocol - Specify that server host's authentication protocol.
tacacs - Server host’s authentication protocol.
xtacacs - Server host’s authentication protocol.
tacacs+ - Server host’s authentication protocol.
radius - Server host’s authentication protocol.
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To delete an authentication server host:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#delete authen server_host 10.1.1.222 protocol tacacs+
Command: delete authen server_host 10.1.1.222 protocol tacacs+
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
5-25 show authen server_host
Description
This command is used to display the authentication server hosts.
Format show authen server_host
68
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To display all authentication server hosts:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show authen server_host
Command: show authen server_host
IP Address Protocol Port Timeout Retransmit Key
--------------- -------- ----- ------- ---------- -------------------------
10.1.1.222 tacacs+ 15555 10 ------ This is a secret.
Total Entries : 1
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
5-26 config authen parameter response_timeout
Description
This command is used to configure the amount of time waiting or user input on console, Telnet, SSH application.
Format config authen parameter response_timeout <int 0-255>
Parameters
<int 0-255> - Enter the timeout response time for user input on console, Telnet or SSH. 0 means there is no time out. This value must be between 0 and 255. Default value is 30 seconds.
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To configure the amount of time waiting or user input to be 60 seconds:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config authen parameter response_timeout 60
Command: config authen parameter response_timeout 60
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
69
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
5-27 config authen parameter attempt
Description
This command is used to configure the maximum attempts for user's trying to login or promote the privilege on console, Telnet, or SSH application.
Format config authen parameter attempt <int 1-255>
Parameters
<int 1-255> - Enter the amount of attempts for user's trying to login or promote the privilege on console, Telnet or
SSH. This value must be between 1 and 255. Default value is 3.
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To configure the maximum attempts for user's trying to login or promote the privilege to be 9:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config authen parameter attempt 9
Command: config authen parameter attempt 9
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
5-28 show authen parameter
Description
This command is used to display the parameters of authentication.
Format show authen parameter
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To display the parameters of authentication:
70
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show authen parameter
Command: show authen parameter
Response Timeout : 60 seconds
User Attempts : 9
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
5-29 enable admin
Description
This command is used to enter the administrator level privilege. Promote the "user" privilege level to "admin" level.
When the user enters this command, the authentication method TACACS, XTACACS, TACACS+, user-defined server groups, local_enable or none will be used to authenticate the user. Because TACACS, XTACACS and
RADIUS don't support "enable" function in itself, if user wants to use either one of these 3 protocols to do enable authentication, user must create a special account on the server host first, which has a username "enable" and then configure its password as the enable password to support "enable" function.
This command can not be used when authentication policy is disabled.
Format enable admin
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To enable administrator lever privilege:
DGS-3000-26TC:puser#enable admin
Command: enable admin
PassWord:*****
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
5-30 config admin local_enable
Description
This command is used to config the local enable password of administrator level privilege. When the user chooses the “local_enable” method to promote the privilege level, the enable password of local device is needed. When the password information is not specified in the command, the system will prompt the user to input the password interactively. For this case, the user can only input the plain text password. If the password is present in the command, the user can select to input the password in the plain text form or in the encrypted form. The encryption algorithm is based on SHA-1.
71
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Format config admin local_enable {encrypt [plain_text | sha_1] <password>}
Parameters
encrypt - (Optional) Specify the password form.
plain_text - Specify the password in plain text form.
sha_1 - Specify the password in SHA-1 encrypted form.
<password> - (Optional) Enter the password for promoting the privilege level. The length for a password in plain-text form and SHA-1 encrypted form are different.
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To configure the administrator password:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config admin local_enable
Command: config admin local_ebable
Enter the old password:
Enter the case-sensitive new password:******
Enter the new password again for confirmation:******
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
5-31 create accounting method_list_name
Description
This command is used to create a user-defined list of accounting methods for accounting services on the Switch.
The maximum supported number of accounting method lists is 8.
Format create accounting method_list_name <string 15>
Parameters
<string 15> - Enter the built-in or user-defined method list.
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To create a user-defined accounting method list called “shell_acct”:
72
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#create accounting method_list_name shell_acct
Command: create accounting method_list_name shell_acct
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
5-32 config accounting
Description
This command is used to configure a user-defined or default method list of accounting methods.
Format config accounting [default | method_list_name <string 15>] method {tacacs+ | radius | server_group
<string 15> | none}
Parameters
default - Specify the default method list of accounting methods.
method_list_name - Specify the user-defined method list of accounting methods.
<string 15> - Enter the name of the method list.
method - Specify the protocol.
tacacs+ - Specify the built-in TACACS+ server group.
radius – Specify the built-in RADIUS server group.
server_group - Specify the user-defined server group. If the group contains TACACS and XTACACS server, it will be skipped in accounting.
<string 15> - Enter the name of server group.
none - Specify no accounting.
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To configure a user-defined method list called “shell_acct”, that Specify a sequence of the built-in TACACS+ server group, followed by the RADIUS server group for accounting service on the Switch:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config accounting method_list_name shell_acct method tacacs+ radius
Command: config accounting method_list_name shell_acct method tacacs+ radius
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
5-33 delete accounting method_list_name
Description
This command is used to delete a user-defined method list of accounting methods.
Format delete accounting method_list_name <string 15>
73
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Parameters
<string 15> - Enter the built-in or user-defined method list.
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To delete the user-defined accounting method list called “shell_acct” from the Switch:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#delete accounting method_list_name shell_acct
Command: delete accounting method_list_name shell_acct
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
5-34 show accounting
Description
This command is used to display the list of accounting methods on the Switch.
Format show accounting [default | method_list_name <string 15> | all]
Parameters
default - Displays the user-defined list of default accounting methods.
method_list_name - Specify the user-defined list of specific accounting methods.
<string 15> - Enter the name of the method list.
all - Displays all accounting method lists on the Switch.
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To display the user-defined accounting method list called “shell_acct”:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show accounting method_list_name shell_acct
Command: show accounting method_list_name shell_acct
Method List Name Priority Method Name Comment
---------------- -------- --------------- ------------------ shell_acct 1 tacacs+ Built-in Group
2 radius Built-in Group
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
74
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
5-35 config accounting service command
Description
This command is used to configure the state of the specified accounting service.
Format config accounting service command {administrator | operator | power_user | user} [method_list_name
<string> | none]
Parameters
administrator - Accounting service for all administrator level commands.
operator - Accounting service for all operator level commands.
power_user - Accounting service for all power-user level commands.
user - Accounting service for all user level commands.
method_list_name - Specify accounting service by the AAA user-defined method list specified by the create
accounting method_list_name <string 15> command.
<string> - Enter the name of the method list.
none - Disables AAA command accounting services by specified command level.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure AAA accounting methodlist “shell_acct ” for accounting all administrator commands:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config accounting service command method_list_name shell_acct
Command: config accounting service command method_list_name shell_acct
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
5-36 config accounting service
Description
This command is used to configure the state of the specified RADIUS accounting service.
Format config accounting service [network | shell | system] state [enable {[radius_only | method_list_name <string
15> | default_method_list]} | disable]
Parameters
network - Accounting service for 802.1X, JWAC and WAC port access control. By default, the service is disabled.
shell - Accounting service for shell events: When user logs on or out the Switch (via the console, Telnet, or SSH) and timeout occurs, accounting information will be collected and sent to RADIUS server. By default, the service is disabled.
system - Accounting service for system events: reset, reboot. By default, the service is disabled.
state - Specify the state of the specified service.
enable - Specify to enable the specified accounting service.
radius_only - (Optional) Specify accounting service to only use RADIUS group specified by the config
75
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
radius add command.
method_list_name - (Optional) Specify accounting service by the AAA user-defined method list specified by the “create accounting method_list_name <string 15>” command.
<string 15> - Enter the method list name.
default_method_list - - (Optional) Specify accounting service by the AAA default method list.
disable - Specify to disable the specified accounting service.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
Enable it to configure accounting shell state:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config accounting service shell state enable
Command: config accounting service shell state enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
5-37 show accounting service
Description
This command is used to show the status of RADIUS accounting services.
Format show accounting service
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show information of RADIUS accounting services:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show accounting service
Command: show accounting service
Accounting State Method
------------------- ---------------
Network : Disabled
Shell : Disabled
System : Disabled
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
76
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
5-38 show aaa
Description
This command is used to display AAA global configuration
Format show aaa
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To display AAA global configuration:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show aaa
Command: show aaa
Authentication Policy: Enabled
Accounting Network Service State: Disabled
Accounting Network Service Method:
Accounting Shell Service State: Disabled
Accounting Shell Service Method:
Accounting System Service State: Disabled
Accounting System Service Method:
Accounting Admin Command Service Method:
Accounting Operator Command Service Method:
Accounting PowerUser Command Service Method:
Accounting User Command Service Method:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
77
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 6 Access Control List (ACL)
Command List
create access_profile profile_id <value 1-512> {profile_name <name 32>} [ethernet {vlan {<hex 0x0-0x0fff>} | source_mac <macmask 000000000000-ffffffffffff> | destination_mac <macmask 000000000000-ffffffffffff> |
802.1p | ethernet_type} | ip {vlan {<hex 0x0-0x0fff>} | source_ip_mask <netmask> | destination_ip_mask
<netmask> | dscp | [icmp {type | code } | igmp {type } | tcp {src_port_mask <hex0x0-0xffff> | dst_port_mask
<hex 0x0-0xffff> | flag_mask [all | {urg | ack | psh | rst | syn | fin}]} | udp {src_port_mask <hex 0x0-0xffff> | dst_port_mask <hex 0x0-0xffff>} | protocol_id_mask <hex 0x0-0xff> {user_define_mask <hex 0x0-0xffffffff>}]} | packet_content_mask { offset_chunk_1 <value 0-31> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> | offset_chunk_2 <value 0-31> <hex
0x0-0xffffffff> | offset_chunk_3 <value 0-31> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> | offset_chunk_4 <value 0-31> <hex 0x0-
0xffffffff>} | ipv6 {class | flowlabel | source_ipv6_mask <ipv6mask> | destination_ipv6_mask <ipv6mask> | [tcp
{src_port_mask <hex 0x0-0xffff> | dst_port_mask <hex 0x0-0xffff>} | udp { src_port_mask <hex 0x0-0xffff> | dst_port_mask <hex 0x0-0xffff>} | icmp {type | code }]}]
delete access_profile [profile_id <value 1-512> | profile_name <name 32> |all]
config access_profile [profile_id <value 1-512> | profile_name <name 32>] [add access_id [auto_assign |
<value 1-256>][ethernet {[vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlan_id <vlanid 1-4094>] {mask <hex 0x0-0x0fff>} | source_mac <macaddr> {mask <macmask>} | destination_mac <macaddr> {mask <macmask>} | 802.1p
<value 0-7> | ethernet_type <hex 0x0-0xffff>} | ip {[vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlan_id <vlanid 1-4094>] {mask
<hex 0x0-0x0fff>} | source_ip <ipaddr> {mask <netmask>} | destination_ip <ipaddr> {mask <netmask>} | dscp
<value 0-63> | [icmp {type <value 0-255> | code <value 0-255>} | igmp {type <value 0-255>} | tcp {src_port
<value 0-65535> {mask <hex 0x0-0xffff>} | dst_port <value 0-65535> {mask <hex 0x0-0xffff>} | flag [all | {urg | ack | psh | rst | syn | fin}]} | udp {src_port <value 0-65535> {mask <hex 0x0-0xffff>} | dst_port <value 0-65535>
{mask <hex 0x0-0xffff>}} | protocol_id <value 0-255> {user_define <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> {mask <hex 0x0-
0xffffffff>}}]} | packet_content {offset_chunk_1 <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> {mask <hex 0x0-0xffffffff>} | offset_chunk_2
<hex 0x0-0xffffffff> {mask <hex 0x0-0xffffffff>} | offset_chunk_3 <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> {mask <hex 0x0-0xffffffff>} | offset_chunk_4 <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> {mask <hex 0x0-0xffffffff>}} | ipv6 {class <value 0-255> | flowlabel <hex
0x0-0xfffff> | source_ipv6 <ipv6addr> {mask<ipv6mask>} | destination_ipv6 <ipv6addr> {mask <ipv6mask>} |
[tcp {src_port<value 0-65535> {mask <hex 0x0-0xffff>} | dst_port <value 0-65535> {mask <hex0x0-0xffff>}} | udp {src_port <value 0-65535> {mask <hex 0x0-0xffff>} | dst_port <value 0-65535> {mask <hex 0x0-0xffff>}} | icmp {type<value 0-255> | code <value 0-255>}]}] [port [<portlist> | all] | vlan_based [vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlan_id <vlanid 1-4094>]] [permit {priority <value 0-7> {replace_priority} | [replace_dscp_with <value 0-63> | replace_tos_precedence_with <value 0-7>] | counter[enable | disable]} | mirror | deny] {time_range
<range_name 32>} | delete access_id <value 1-256>]
show access_profile {[profile_id <value 1-512> | profile_name <name 32>]}
config flow_meter [profile_id <value 1-512> | profile_name <name 32>] access_id <value 1-256> [rate [<value
1-1048576>] {burst_size [<value 1-262144>]} rate_exceed [drop_packet | remark_dscp <value 0-63>] | tr_tcm cir <value 1-1048576> {cbs <value 1-262144>} pir <value 1-1048576> {pbs <value 1-262144>} {[color_blind | color_aware]} {conform [permit | replace_dscp <value 0-63>] {counter [enable | disable]}} exceed [permit
{replace_dscp <value 0-63>} | drop] {counter [enable | disable]} violate [permit {replace_dscp <value 0-63>} | drop] {counter [enable |disable]} | sr_tcm cir <value 1-1048576> cbs <value 1-262144> ebs <value 1-262144>
{[color_blind | color_aware]} {conform [permit | replace_dscp <value 0-63>] {counter [enable | disable]}} exceed [permit {replace_dscp <value 0-63>} | drop] {counter [enable | disable]} violate [permit {replace_dscp
<value 0-63>} | drop] {counter [enable | disable]} | delete]
show flow_meter {[profile_id <value 1-512> | profile_name <name 32>] {access_id <value 1-256>}}
config time_range <range_name 32> [hours start_time <time hh:mm:ss> end_time <time hh:mm:ss> weekdays
<daylist> | delete] show time_range show current_config access_profile
6-1 create access_profile
Description
This command is used to create access control list profiles.
When creating ACL, each profile can have 256 rules/access IDs. However, when creating ACL type as Ethernet or
IPv4 at the first time, 62 rules are reserved for the system. In this case, only 194 rules are available to configure.
You can use the show access_profile command to see the available rules.
78
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Support for field selections can have additional limitations that are project dependent.
For example, for some hardware, it may be invalid to specify a destination and source IPv6 address at the same time. The user will be prompted with these limitations.
The Switch supports the following profile types:
1. MAC DA, MAC SA, Ethernet Type, Outer VLAN Tag
2. Outer VLAN Tag, Source IPv4, Destination IPv4, DSCP, Protocol ID, TCP/UDP Source Port, TCP/UDP
Destination Port, ICMP type/code, IGMP type, TCP flags
3. Source IPv6 Address, Class, Flow Label, IPv6 Protocol (Next Header)
4. Destination IPv6 Address, Class, Flow Label, IPv6 Protocol (Next Header)
5. Class, Flow Label, IPv6 Protocol (Next Header), TCP/UDP source port, TCP/UDP destination port, ICMP type/code, Outer VLAN Tag
6. Packet Content, Outer VLAN Tag
7. MAC SA, Ethernet Type, Source IPv4/ARP sender IP, Outer VLAN Tag
8. LLC Header/SNAP Header, Outer VLAN Tag
9. Source IPv6 Address, Class, IPv6 Protocol (Next Header), Outer VLAN Tag
10. Destination IPv6 Address, Class, IPv6 Protocol (Next Header), Outer VLAN Tag
NOTE: Profile Types 7 and 8 are not user configurable. Only system applications are allowed to create this type of profiles.
Format create access_profile profile_id <value 1-512> {profile_name <name 32>} [ethernet {vlan {<hex 0x0-0x0fff>}
| source_mac <macmask 000000000000-ffffffffffff> | destination_mac <macmask 000000000000-ffffffffffff> |
802.1p | ethernet_type} | ip {vlan {<hex 0x0-0x0fff>} | source_ip_mask <netmask> | destination_ip_mask
<netmask> | dscp | [icmp {type | code } | igmp {type } | tcp {src_port_mask <hex0x0-0xffff> | dst_port_mask
<hex 0x0-0xffff> | flag_mask [all | {urg | ack | psh | rst | syn | fin}]} | udp {src_port_mask <hex 0x0-0xffff> | dst_port_mask <hex 0x0-0xffff>} | protocol_id_mask <hex 0x0-0xff> {user_define_mask <hex 0x0-
0xffffffff>}]} | packet_content_mask { offset_chunk_1 <value 0-31> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> | offset_chunk_2
<value 0-31> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> | offset_chunk_3 <value 0-31> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> | offset_chunk_4 <value
0-31> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff>} | ipv6 {class | flowlabel | source_ipv6_mask <ipv6mask> | destination_ipv6_mask <ipv6mask> | [tcp {src_port_mask <hex 0x0-0xffff> | dst_port_mask <hex 0x0-
0xffff>} | udp { src_port_mask <hex 0x0-0xffff> | dst_port_mask <hex 0x0-0xffff>} | icmp {type | code }]}]
Parameters
profile_id - Specify the index of the access list profile.
<value 1-512> - Enter the profile ID here. This value must be between 1 and 512.
profile_name - The name of the profile must be specified. The maximum length is 32 characters.
<name 32> - Enter the profile name here.
ethernet - Specify this is an ethernet mask.
vlan - (Optional) Specify a VLAN mask. Only the last 12 bits of the mask will be considered.
<hex 0x0-0x0fff> - Enter the VLAN mask value here.
source_mac - (Optional) Specify the source MAC mask.
<macmask> - Enter the source MAC address used here.
destination_mac - (Optional) Specify the destination MAC mask.
<macmask> - Enter the destination MAC address used here.
802.1p - (Optional) Specify the 802.1p priority tag mask.
ethernet_type - (Optional) Specify the Ethernet type mask.
ip - Specify this is a IPv4 mask.
vlan - (Optional) Specify a VLAN mask. Only the last 12 bits of the mask will be considered.
<hex 0x0-0x0fff> -Enter the VLAN mask value here.
source_ip_mask - (Optional) Specify a source IP address mask.
<netmask> - Enter the source IP address mask here.
destination_ip_mask - (Optional) Specify a destination IP address mask.
<netmask> - Enter the destination IP address mask here.
dscp - (Optional) Specify the DSCP mask.
icmp - (Optional) Specify that the rule applies to ICMP traffic.
type - Specify the type of ICMP traffic.
code - Specify the code of ICMP traffic
igmp - (Optional) Specify that the rule applies to IGMP traffic.
79
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
type - Specify the type of IGMP traffic.
tcp - (Optional) Specify that the rule applies to TCP traffic.
src_port_mask - (Optional) Specify the TCP source port mask.
<hex 0x0-0xffff> - Enter the TCP source port mask here.
dst_port_mask - (Optional) Specify the TCP destination port mask.
<hex 0x0-0xffff> - Enter the TCP destination port mask here.
flag_mask - (Optional) Specify the TCP flag field mask.
all – Specify that all the flags will be used for the TCP mask.
urg – (Optional) Specify that the TCP flag field will be set to ‘urg’.
ack - (Optional) Specify that the TCP flag field will be set to ‘ack’.
psh - (Optional) Specify that the TCP flag field will be set to ‘psh’.
rst - (Optional) Specify that the TCP flag field will be set to ‘rst’.
syn - (Optional) Specify that the TCP flag field will be set to ‘syn’.
fin - (Optional) Specify that the TCP flag field will be set to ‘fin’.
udp - (Optional) Specify that the rule applies to UDP traffic.
src_port_mask - (Optional) Specify the UDP source port mask.
<hex 0x0-0xffff> - Enter the UDP source port mask here.
dst_port_mask - (Optional) Specify the UDP destination port mask.
<hex 0x0-0xffff> - Enter the UDP destination port mask here.
protocol_id_mask - (Optional) Specify that the rule applies to IP protocol ID traffic.
<0x0-0xff> - Enter the protocol ID mask here.
user_define_mask - (Optional) Specify that the rule applies to the IP protocol ID, and that the mask option behind the IP header length is 4 bytes.
<hex 0x0-0xffffffff> - Enter a user-defined mask value here.
packet_content_mask - Specify the packet content mask. Only one packet_content_mask profile can be created.
offset_chunk_1 - (Optional) Specify that the offset chunk 1 will be used.
<value 0-31> - Enter the offset chunk 1 value here. This value must be between 0 and 31.
<hex 0x0-0xffffffff> - Enter the offset chunk 1 mask here.
offset_chunk_2 - (Optional) Specify that the offset chunk 2 will be used.
<value 0-31> - Enter the offset chunk 2 value here. This value must be between 0 and 31.
<hex 0x0-0xffffffff> - Enter the offset chunk 2 mask here.
offset_chunk_3 - (Optional) Specify that the offset chunk 3 will be used.
<value 0-31> - Enter the offset chunk 3 value here. This value must be between 0 and 31.
<hex 0x0-0xffffffff> - Enter the offset chunk 3 mask here.
offset_chunk_4 - (Optional) Specify that the offset chunk 4 will be used.
<value 0-31> - Enter the offset chunk 4 value here. This value must be between 0 and 31.
<hex 0x0-0xffffffff> - Enter the offset chunk 4 mask here.
ipv6 - Specify this is the IPv6 mask.
class - (Optional) Specify the IPv6 class.
flowlabel - (Optional) Specify the IPv6 flow label.
source_ipv6_mask - (Optional) Specify an IPv6 source sub-mask.
<ipv6mask> - Enter the source IPv6 mask value here.
destination_ipv6_mask - (Optional) Specify an IPv6 destination sub-mask.
<ipv6mask> -Enter the destination IPv6 mask value here.
tcp - (Optional) Specify that the rule applies to TCP traffic.
src_port_mask - (Optional) Specify an IPv6 TCP source port mask.
<hex 0x0-0xffff> - Enter the TCP source port mask value here.
dst_port_mask - (Optional) Specify an IPv6 TCP destination port mask.
<hex 0x0-0xffff> - Enter the TCP destination port mask value here.
udp - (Optional) Specify that the rule applies to UDP traffic.
src_port_mask - Specify the UDP source port mask.
<hex 0x0-0xffff> - Enter the UDP source port mask value here.
dst_port_mask - Specify the UDP destination port mask.
<hex 0x0-0xffff> - Enter the UDP destination port mask value here.
icmp - (Optional) Specify a mask for ICMP filtering.
type - (Optional) Specify the inclusion of the ICMP type field in the mask.
code - (Optional) Specify the inclusion of the ICMP code field in the mask.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
80
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Example
To create three access profiles:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#create access_profile profile_id 1 profile_name t1 ethernet vlan source_mac 00-00-00-00-00-01 destination_mac 00-00-00-00-00-02 802.1p ethernet_type
Command: create access_profile profile_id 1 profile_name 1 ethernet vlan source_mac 00-00-00-
00-00-01 destination_mac 00-00-00-00-00-02 802.1p ethernet_type
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#create access_profile profile_id 2 profile_name 2 ip vlan source_ip_mask
20.0.0.0 destination_ip_mask 10.0.0.0 dscp icmp type code
Command: create access_profile profile_id 2 profile_name t2 ip vlan source_ip_mask 20.0.0.0 destination_ip_mask 10.0.0.0 dscp icmp type code
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#create access_profile profile_id 4 profile_name 4 packet_content_mask offset_chunk_1 3 0xFFFF offset_chunk_2 5 0xFF00 offset_chunk_3 14 0xFFFF0000 offset_chunk_4
16 0xFF000000
Command: create access_profile profile_id 4 profile_name 4 packet_content_mask offset_chunk_1
3 0xFFFF offset_chunk_2 5 0xFF00 offset_chunk_3 14 0xFFFF0000 offset_chunk_4 16 0xFF000000
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
6-2 delete access_profile
Description
This command is used to delete access list profiles. This command can only delete profiles that were created using the ACL module.
Format delete access_profile [profile_id <value 1-512> | profile_name <name 32> |all]
Parameters
profile_id - Specify the index of the access list profile.
<value 1-512> - Enter the profile ID value here. This value must be between 1 and 512.
profile_name - Specify the name of the profile.
<name 32> - Enter the profile name.. The maximum length is 32 characters.
all - Specify that the whole access list profile will be deleted.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To delete the access list rule with a profile ID of 1:
81
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#delete access_profile profile_id 1
Command: delete access_profile profile_id 1
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
6-3 config access_profile
Description
This command is used to configure an access list entry. The ACL mirror function works after the mirror has been enabled and the mirror port has been configured using the mirror command.
When applying an access rule to a target, the setting specified in the VLAN field will not take effect if the target is a
VLAN.
Format config access_profile [profile_id <value 1-512> | profile_name <name 32>] [add access_id [auto_assign |
<value 1-256>][ethernet {[vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlan_id <vlanid 1-4094>] {mask <hex 0x0-0x0fff>} | source_mac <macaddr> {mask <macmask>} | destination_mac <macaddr> {mask <macmask>} | 802.1p
<value 0-7> | ethernet_type <hex 0x0-0xffff>} | ip {[vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlan_id <vlanid 1-4094>] {mask
<hex 0x0-0x0fff>} | source_ip <ipaddr> {mask <netmask>} | destination_ip <ipaddr> {mask <netmask>} | dscp <value 0-63> | [icmp {type <value 0-255> | code <value 0-255>} | igmp {type <value 0-255>} | tcp
{src_port <value 0-65535> {mask <hex 0x0-0xffff>} | dst_port <value 0-65535> {mask <hex 0x0-0xffff>} | flag
[all | {urg | ack | psh | rst | syn | fin}]} | udp {src_port <value 0-65535> {mask <hex 0x0-0xffff>} | dst_port
<value 0-65535> {mask <hex 0x0-0xffff>}} | protocol_id <value 0-255> {user_define <hex 0x0-0xffffffff>
{mask <hex 0x0-0xffffffff>}}]} | packet_content {offset_chunk_1 <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> {mask <hex 0x0-
0xffffffff>} | offset_chunk_2 <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> {mask <hex 0x0-0xffffffff>} | offset_chunk_3 <hex 0x0-
0xffffffff> {mask <hex 0x0-0xffffffff>} | offset_chunk_4 <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> {mask <hex 0x0-0xffffffff>}} | ipv6
{class <value 0-255> | flowlabel <hex 0x0-0xfffff> | source_ipv6 <ipv6addr> {mask<ipv6mask>} | destination_ipv6 <ipv6addr> {mask <ipv6mask>} | [tcp {src_port<value 0-65535> {mask <hex 0x0-0xffff>} | dst_port <value 0-65535> {mask <hex0x0-0xffff>}} | udp {src_port <value 0-65535> {mask <hex 0x0-0xffff>}
| dst_port <value 0-65535> {mask <hex 0x0-0xffff>}} | icmp {type<value 0-255> | code <value 0-255>}]}] [port
[<portlist> | all] | vlan_based [vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlan_id <vlanid 1-4094>]] [permit {priority <value 0-7>
{replace_priority} | [replace_dscp_with <value 0-63> | replace_tos_precedence_with <value 0-7>] | counter[enable | disable]} | mirror | deny] {time_range <range_name 32>} | delete access_id <value 1-256>]
Parameters
profile_id - Specify the index of the access list profile.
<value 1-512> - Enter the profile ID value here. This value must be between 1 and 512.
profile_name - Specify the name of the profile.
<name 32> - Enter the profile name here. This name can be up to 32 characters long.
add - Specify that a profile or a rule will be added.
access_id - Specify the index of the access list entry. The value range is 1-256, but the supported maximum number of entries depends on the project. If the auto_assign option is selected, the access ID is automatically assigned, when adding multiple ports.
auto_assign - Specify that the access ID will automatically be assigned.
<value 1-256> - Enter the access ID used here. This value must be between 1 and 256.
ethernet - Specify to configure the ethernet access profile.
vlan - (Optional) Specify the VLAN name.
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the name of the VLAN here. This name can be up to 32 characters long.
vlan_id - (Optional) Specify the VLAN ID used.
<vlanid 1-4094> - Enter the VLAN ID used here. This value must be between 1 and 4094.
mask - (Optional) Specify an additional mask parameter that can be configured.
<hex 0x0-0x0fff> - Enter the mask value here.
source_mac - (Optional) Specify the source MAC address.
<macaddr> - Enter the source MAC address used for this configuration here.
mask - (Optional) Specify an additional mask parameter that can be configured.
<macmask> - Enter the source MAC mask used here.
82
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
destination_mac - (Optional) Specify the destination MAC address.
<macaddr> - Enter the destination MAC address used for this configuration here.
mask - (Optional) Specify an additional mask parameter that can be configured.
<macmask> - Enter the destination MAC mask here.
802.1p - (Optional) Specify the value of the 802.1p priority tag.
<value 0-7> - Enter the 802.1p priority tag value. The priority tag ranges from 1 to 7.
ethernet_type - (Optional) Specify the Ethernet type.
<hex 0x0-0xffff> - Enter the Ethernet type mask here.
ip - Specify to configure the IP access profile.
vlan - (Optional) Specify a VLAN name.
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the name of the VLAN here. This name can be up to 32 characters long.
vlan_id - (Optional) Specify that VLAN ID used.
<vlanid 1-4094> - Enter the VLAN ID used here. This value must be between 1 and 4094.
mask – (Optional) Specify an additional mask parameter that can be configured.
<hex 0x0-0x0fff> - Enter the mask value here.
source_ip - (Optional) Specify an IP source address.
<ipaddr> - Enter the source IP address used for this configuration here.
mask - (Optional) Specify an additional mask parameter that can be configured.
<netmask> - Enter the source netmask used here.
destination_ip - (Optional) Specify an IP destination address.
<ipaddr> - Enter the destination IP address used for this configuration here.
mask - (Optional) Specify an additional mask parameter that can be configured.
<netmask> - Enter the destination netmask used here.
dscp - (Optional) Specify the value of DSCP. The DSCP value ranges from 0 to 63.
<value 0-63> - Enter the DSCP value here.
icmp - (Optional) Specify to configure the ICMP parameters.
type - (Optional) Specify that the rule will apply to the ICMP Type traffic value.
<value 0-255> - Enter the ICMP type traffic value here. This value must be between 0 and 255.
code - (Optional) Specify that the rule will apply to the ICMP Code traffic value.
<value 0-255> - Enter the ICMP code traffic value here. This value must be between 0 and 255.
igmp - (Optional) Specify to configure the IGMP parameters.
type - (Optional) Specify that the rule will apply to the IGMP Type traffic value.
<value 0-255> - Enter the IGMP type traffic value here. This value must be between 0 and 255.
tcp - Specify to configure the TCP parameters.
src_port - (Optional) Specify that the rule will apply to a range of TCP source ports.
<value 0-65535> - Enter the TCP source port value here. This value must be between 0 and 65535.
mask - (Optional) Specify an additional mask parameter that can be configured.
<hex 0x0-0xffff> - Enter the source port mask here.
dst_port - (Optional) Specify that the rule will apply to a range of TCP destination ports.
<value 0-65535> - Enter the TCP destination port value here. This value must be between 0 and 65535.
mask - (Optional) Specify an additional mask parameter that can be configured.
<hex 0x0-0xffff> - Enter the destination port mask here.
flag - (Optional) Specify the TCP flag fields.
all - Specify that all the TCP flags will be used in this configuration.
urg - (Optional) Specify that the TCP flag field will be set to 'urg'.
ack - (Optional) Specify that the TCP flag field will be set to 'ack'.
psh - (Optional) Specify that the TCP flag field will be set to 'psh'.
rst - (Optional) Specify that the TCP flag field will be set to 'rst'.
syn - (Optional) Specify that the TCP flag field will be set to 'syn'.
fin - (Optional) Specify that the TCP flag field will be set to 'fin'.
udp - Specify to configure the UDP parameters.
src_port - (Optional) Specify the UDP source port range.
<value 0-65535> - Enter the UDP source port value here. This value must be between 0 and 65535.
mask - (Optional) Specify an additional mask parameter that can be configured.
<hex 0x0-0xffff> - Enter the source port mask here.
dst_port - (Optional) Specify the UDP destination port range.
<value 0-65535> - Enter the UDP destination port value here. This value must be between 0 and
65535.
mask - (Optional) Specify an additional mask parameter that can be configured.
<hex 0x0-0xffff> - Enter the destination port mask here.
protocol_id - Specify that the rule will apply to the value of IP protocol ID traffic.
<value 0-255> - Enter the protocol ID used here.
user_define - (Optional) Specify that the rule will apply to the IP protocol ID and that the mask options behind the first 4 bytes of the IP payload.
<hex 0x0-0xffffffff> - Enter the user-defined mask value here.
83
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
mask - Specify an additional mask parameter that can be configured.
<hex 0x0-0xffffffff> - Enter the mask value here.
packet_content - A maximum of 4 offsets can be specified. Each offset defines 4 bytes of data which is identified as a single UDF field.
offset_chunk_1 – (Optional) Specify the value of the packet bytes to be matched. Offset chunk 1 will be used.
<hex 0x0-0xffffffff> - Enter the offset chunk 1 mask here.
offset_chunk_2 - (Optional) Specify the value of the packet bytes to be matched. Offset chunk 2 will be used.
<hex 0x0-0xffffffff> - Enter the offset chunk 2 mask here.
offset_chunk_3 - (Optional) Specify the value of the packet bytes to be matched. Offset chunk 3 will be used.
<hex 0x0-0xffffffff> - Enter the offset chunk 3 mask here.
offset_chunk_4 - (Optional) Specify the value of the packet bytes to be matched. Offset chunk 4 will be used.
<hex 0x0-0xffffffff> - Enter the offset chunk 4 mask here.
ipv6 - Specify that the rule applies to IPv6 fields.
class - (Optional) Specify the value of the IPv6 class.
<value 0-255> - Enter the IPv6 class value here. This value must be between 0 and 255.
flowlabel - (Optional) Specify the value of the IPv6 flow label.
<hex 0x0-0xffff> - Enter the IPv6 flow label mask used here.
source_ipv6 - (Optional) Specify the value of the IPv6 source address.
<ipv6addr> - Enter the source IPv6 address used for this configuration here.
mask - (Optional) Specify an additional mask parameter that can be configured.
<ipv6mask> - Enter the source IPv6 mask here.
destination_ipv6 - (Optional) Specify the value of the IPv6 destination address.
<ipv6addr> - Enter the destination IPv6 address used for this configuration here.
mask - (Optional) Specify an additional mask parameter that can be configured.
<ipv6mask> - Enter the destination IPv6 mask here.
tcp - (Optional) Specify to configure the TCP parameters.
src_port - Specify the value of the IPv6 Layer 4 TCP source port.
<value 0-65535> - Enter the TCP source port value here. This value must be between 0 and 65535.
mask - Specify an additional mask parameter that can be configured.
<hex 0x0-0xffff> - Enter the TCP source port mask value here.
dst_port - (Optional) Specify the value of the IPv6 Layer 4 TCP destination port.
<value 0-65535> - Enter the TCP destination port value here. This value must be between 0 and 65535.
mask - Specify an additional mask parameter that can be configured.
<hex 0x0-0xffff> - Enter the TCP destination port mask value here.
udp - (Optional) Specify to configure the UDP parameters.
src_port - Specify the value of the IPv6 Layer 4 UDP source port.
<value 0-65535> - Enter the UDP source port value here. This value must be between 0 and 65535.
mask - Specify an additional mask parameter that can be configured.
<hex 0x0-0xffff> - Enter the UDP source port mask value here.
dst_port - Specify the value of the IPv6 Layer 4 UDP destination port.
<value 0-65535> - Enter the UDP destination port value here. This value must be between 0 and
65535.
mask - Specify an additional mask parameter that can be configured.
<hex 0x0-0xffff> - Enter the UDP destination port mask value here.
icmp - (Optional) Specify to configure the ICMP parameters used.
type - (Optional) Specify that the rule applies to the value of ICMP type traffic.
<value 0-255> - Enter the ICMP type traffic value here. This value must be between 0 and 255.
code - (Optional) Specify that the rule applies to the value of ICMP code traffic.
<value 0-255> - Enter the ICMP code traffic value here. This value must be between 0 and 255.
port - Specify the port list used for this configuration.
<portlist> - Enter a list of ports used for the configuration here.
all - Specify that all the ports will be used for this configuration.
vlan_based - Specify that the rule will be VLAN based.
vlan - Specify the VLAN name used for this configuration.
<vlan_name> - Enter the VLAN name used for this configuration here.
vlan_id - Specify the VLAN ID used for this configuration.
<vlanid 1-4094> - Enter the VLAN ID used here. This value must be between 1 and 4094.
permit - Specify that packets matching the access rule are permitted by the Switch.
priority - (Optional) Specify that the priority of the packet will change if the packet matches the access rule.
<value 0-7> - Enter the priority value here. This value must be between 0 and 7.
replace_priority - (Optional) Specify that the 802.1p priority of the outgoing packet will be replaced.
replace_dscp_with - (Optional) Specify that the DSCP of the outgoing packet is changed with the new value.
If using this action without an action priority, the packet will be sent to the default TC.
<value 0-63> - Enter the replace DSCP with value here. This value must be between 0 and 63.
replace_tos_precedence_with - (Optional) Specify that the IP precedence of the outgoing packet is changed
84
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide with the new value. If used without an action priority, the packet is sent to the default TC.
<value 0-7> - Enter the replace ToS precedence with value here. This value must be between 0 and 7.
counter - (Optional) Specify whether the ACL counter feature is enabled or disabled. This parameter is optional. The default option is disabled. If the rule is not bound with the flow_meter, all matching packets are counted. If the rule is bound with the flow_meter, then the “counter” is overridden.
enable - Specify that the ACL counter feature will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the ACL counter feature will be disabled.
mirror - Specify that packets matching the access rules are copied to the mirror port.
deny - Specify that packets matching the access rule are filtered by the Switch.
time_range - (Optional) Specify the name of the time range entry.
<range_name 32> - Enter the time range name here. This name can be up to 32 characters long.
delete - Specify that a profile or a rule will be deleted.
access_id - Specify the index of the access list entry. The value range is 1-256, but the supported maximum number of entries depends on the project.
<value 1-256> - Enter the access ID used here. This value must be between 1 and 256.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure a rule entry for a packet content mask profile:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config access_profile profile_id 3 add access_id auto_assign packet_content offset_chunk_3 0xF0 port all deny
Command: config access_profile profile_id 3 add access_id auto_assign packet_content offset_chunk_3 0xF0 port all deny
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
6-4 show access_profile
Description
This command is used to display the current access list table.
Format show access_profile {[profile_id <value 1-512> | profile_name <name 32>]}
Parameters
profile_id - (Optional) Specify the index of the access list profile.
<value 1-512> - Enter the profile ID used here. This value must be between 1 and 512.
profile_name - (Optional) Specify the name of the profile.
<name 32> - Enter the profile name used here. This name can be up to 32 characters long.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the current access list table:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show access_profile
85
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Command: show access_profile
Access Profile Table
Total User Set Rule Entries : 4
Total Used HW Entries : 128
Total Available HW Entries : 896
==============================================================================
Profile ID: 1 Profile name: EtherACL Type: Ethernet
MASK on
VLAN : 0xFFF
802.1p
Ethernet Type
Available HW Entries : 193
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Rule ID : 1 Ports: 1
Match on
VLAN ID : 1
802.1p : 0
Ethernet Type : 0xFFFE
Action:
Permit
==============================================================================
==============================================================================
Profile ID: 2 Profile name: IPv4ACL Type: IPv4
MASK on
VLAN : 0xFFF
DSCP
ICMP
Available HW Entries : 193
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Rule ID : 1 Ports: 2
Match on
VLAN ID : 1
DSCP : 0
Action:
Permit
==============================================================================
==============================================================================
Profile ID: 3 Profile name: IPv6ACL Type: IPv6
MASK on
Class
TCP
86
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Available HW Entries : 255
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Rule ID : 1 Ports: 3
Match on
Class : 0
Action:
Permit
==============================================================================
==============================================================================
Profile ID: 4 Profile name: PCACL Type: User Defined
MASK on
offset_chunk_1 : 0 value : 0x00000000
offset_chunk_2 : 1 value : 0x00000000
offset_chunk_3 : 2 value : 0x00000000
offset_chunk_4 : 3 value : 0x00000000
Available HW Entries : 255
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Rule ID : 1 Ports: 4
Match on
offset_chunk_1 : 0 value : 0x0000FFEE Mask : 0x0000FFEE
Action:
Permit
Priority : 1
Replace DSCP : 1
==============================================================================
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
The following example displays an access profile that supports an entry mask for each rule:
87
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show access_profile profile_id 2
Command: show access_profile profile_id 2
Access Profile Table
Profile ID: 2 Profile Name: 2 Type : Ethernet
Mask on
VLAN : 0xF
Source MAC : FF-FF-FF-00-00-00
Destination MAC : 00-00-00-FF-FF-FF
Available HW Entries: 255
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Rule ID : 22 Ports: 1-7
Match on
VLAN ID : 8 Mask : 0xFFF
Source MAC : 00-01-02-03-04-05 Mask : FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF
Destination MAC :00-05-04-03-02-00 Mask : FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-00
Action:
Deny
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
The following example displays the packet content mask profile for the profile with an ID of 4:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show access_profile profile_id 4
Command: show access_profile profile_id 4
Access Profile Table
Profile ID: 4 Profile name:4 Type: User Defined
MASK on
offset_chunk_1 : 3 value : 0x0000FFFF
offset_chunk_2 : 5 value : 0x0000FF00
offset_chunk_3 : 14 value : 0xFFFF0000
offset_chunk_4 : 16 value : 0xFF000000
Available HW Entries : 255
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Rule ID : 1 Ports: 1-2
Match on
offset_chunk_1 : 3 value : 0x000086DD
offset_chunk_2 : 5 value : 0x00003A00
offset_chunk_3 : 14 value : 0x86000000
Action:
Deny
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
88
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
6-5 config flow_meter
Description
This command is used to configure the flow-based metering function. The metering function supports three modes: single rate two color, single rate three color, and two rate three color. The access rule must be created before the parameters of this function can be applied.
For the single rate two color mode, users may set the preferred bandwidth for this rule, in Kbps, and once the bandwidth has been exceeded, overflowing packets will either be dropped or have a drop precedence set, depending on the user configuration.
For single rate three color mode, users need to specify the committed rate, in Kbps, the committed burst size, and the excess burst size.
For the two rate three color mode, users need to specify the committed rate in Kbps, the committed burst size, the peak rate and the peak burst size.
There are two cases for mapping the color of a packet: Color-blind mode and Color-aware mode. In the Color-blind case, the determination for the packet’s color is based on the metering result. In the Color-aware case, the determination for the packet’s color is based on the metering result and the ingress DSCP.
When color-blind or color-aware is not specified, color-blind is the default mode.
The green color packet will be treated as the conforming action, the yellow color packet will be treated as the exceeding action, and the red color packet will be treated as the violating action.
The replace DSCP action can be performed on packets that conform (GREEN) and packets that do not conform
(YELLOW and RED). If drop YELLOW/RED is selected, the action to replace the DSCP will not take effect.
Format config flow_meter [profile_id <value 1-512> | profile_name <name 32>] access_id <value 1-256> [rate
[<value 1-1048576>] {burst_size [<value 1-262144>]} rate_exceed [drop_packet | remark_dscp <value 0-63>]
| tr_tcm cir <value 1-1048576> {cbs <value 1-262144>} pir <value 1-1048576> {pbs <value 1-262144>}
{[color_blind | color_aware]} {conform [permit | replace_dscp <value 0-63>] {counter [enable | disable]}} exceed [permit {replace_dscp <value 0-63>} | drop] {counter [enable | disable]} violate [permit
{replace_dscp <value 0-63>} | drop] {counter [enable |disable]} | sr_tcm cir <value 1-1048576> cbs <value
1-262144> ebs <value 1-262144> {[color_blind | color_aware]} {conform [permit | replace_dscp <value 0-
63>] {counter [enable | disable]}} exceed [permit {replace_dscp <value 0-63>} | drop] {counter [enable | disable]} violate [permit {replace_dscp <value 0-63>} | drop] {counter [enable | disable]} | delete]
Parameters
profile_id - Specify the profile ID.
<value 1-512> - Enter the profile ID here. This value must be between 1 and 512.
profile_name - Specify the name of the profile. The maximum length is 32 characters.
<name 32> - Enter the profile name used here.
access_id - Specify the access ID.
<value 1-256> - Enter the access ID used here. This value must be between 1 and 256.
rate - Specify the rate for single rate two color mode. Specify the committed bandwidth in Kbps for the flow.
<value 1-1048576> - Enter the rate for single rate two color mode here. This value must be between 1 and
1048576.
burst_size - (Optional) Specify the burst size for the single rate two color mode. The unit is Kbytes.
<value 1-262144> - Enter the burst size value here. This value must be between 1 and 262144.
rate_exceed - Specify the action for packets that exceeds the committed rate in single rate, two color mode.
drop_packet - Drops the packet immediately.
remark_dscp - Marks the packet with a specified DSCP. The packet is set to have a high drop precedence.
<value 0-63> - Enter the remark DSCP value here. This value must be between 0 and 63.
tr_tcm - Specify the “two rate three color mode”.
cir - Specify the Committed Information Rate. The unit is in Kbps. CIR should always be equal or less than
PIR.
<value 1-1048576> - Enter the committed information rate value here. This value must be between 1 and
1048576.
cbs - (Optional) Specify the “Committed Burst Size”. The unit is Kbytes. That is to say, 1 means 1Kbytes. This parameter is an optional parameter. The default value is 4*1024.
89
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
<value 1-262144> - Enter the committed burst size value here. This value must be between 1 and 262144.
pir - Specify the “Peak Information Rate”. The unit is in Kbps. PIR should always be equal to or greater than
CIR.
<value 1-1048576> - Enter the peak information rate value here. This value must be between 1 and
1048576.
pbs - (Optional) Specify the “Peak Burst Size”. The unit is in Kbytes. This parameter is an optional parameter.
The default value is 4*1024.
<value 1-262144> - Enter the peak burst size value here. This value must be between 1 and 262144.
color_blind - (Optional) Specify the meter mode as color-blind. The default is color-blind mode.
color_aware - (Optional) Specify the meter mode as color-aware. The final color of the packet is determined by the initial color of the packet and the metering result.
conform - (Optional) Specify the action when a packet is mapped to the “green” color.
permit - Permits the packet.
replace_dscp - Changes the DSCP of the packet.
<value 0-63> - Enter the replace DSCP value here. This value must be between 0 and 63.
counter - (Optional) Specify the ACL counter. This is optional. The default is “disable”. The resource may be limited so that a counter cannot be turned on. Counters will be cleared when the function is disabled.
enable - Specify that the ACL counter option will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the ACL counter option will be disabled.
exceed - Specify the action when a packet is mapped to the “yellow” color.
permit - Permits the packet.
replace_dscp - (Optional) Changes the DSCP of the packet.
<value 0-63> - Enter the replace DSCP value here. This value must be between 0 and 63.
drop - Drops the packet.
counter - (Optional) Specify the ACL counter. This is optional. The default is “disable”. The resource may be limited so that a counter cannot be turned on. Counters will be cleared when the function is disabled.
enable - Enables the ACL counter option.
disable - Disables the ACL counter option.
violate - Specify the action when a packet is mapped to the “red” color.
permit - Permits the packet.
replace_dscp - (Optional) Changes the DSCP of the packet.
<value 0-63> - Enter the replace DSCP value here. This value must be between 0 and 63.
drop - Drops the packet.
counter - (Optional) Specify the ACL counter. The default value is disabled. The resource may be limited so that a counter cannot be turned on. Counters will be cleared when the function is disabled.
enable - Specify that the ACL counter option will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the ACL counter option will be disabled.
sr_tcm - Specify “single rate three color mode”.
cir - Specify the Committed Information Rate. The unit is Kbps.
<value 0-1048576> - Enter the committed information rate value here. This value must be between 0 and
1048576.
cbs - Specify the “Committed Burst Size” The unit is Kbytes.
<value 0-131072> - Enter the committed burst size value here. This value must be between 0 and 131072.
ebs - Specify the “Excess Burst Size”. The unit is Kbytes.
<value 0-131072> - Enter the excess burst size value here. This value must be between 0 and 131072.
color_blind - (Optional) Specify the meter mode as color-blind. The default is color-blind mode.
color_aware - (Optional) Specify the meter mode as color-aware. The final color of the packet is determined by the initial color of the packet and the metering result.
conform - (Optional) Specify the action when a packet is mapped to the “green” color.
permit - Permits the packet.
replace_dscp - Changes the DSCP of the packet.
<value 0-63> - Enter the replace DSCP value here. This value must be between 0 and 63.
counter - (Optional) Specify the ACL counter. This is optional. The default is “disable”. The resource may be limited so that a counter cannot be turned on. Counters will be cleared when the function is disabled.
enable - Enables the ACL counter option.
disable - Disables the ACL counter option.
exceed - Specify the action when a packet is mapped to the “yellow” color.
permit - Permits the packet.
replace_dscp - (Optional) Changes the DSCP of the packet.
<value 0-63> - Enter the replace DSCP value here. This value must be between 0 and 63.
drop - Drops the packet.
counter - (Optional) Specify the ACL counter. This is optional. The default is “disable”. The resource may be limited so that a counter cannot be turned on. Counters will be cleared when the function is disabled.
enable - Enables the ACL counter option.
disable - Disables the ACL counter option.
90
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
violate - Specify the action when a packet is mapped to the “red” color.
permit - Permits the packet.
replace_dscp - (Optional) Changes the DSCP of the packet.
<value 0-63> - Enter the replace DSCP value here. This value must be between 0 and 63.
drop - Drops the packet.
counter - (Optional) Specify the ACL counter. This is optional. The default value is disabled. The resource may be limited so that a counter cannot be turned on. Counters will be cleared when the function is disabled.
enable - Enables the ACL counter option.
disable - Disables the ACL counter option.
delete - Deletes the specified flow_meter.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure a “two rate, three color” flow meter:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config flow_meter profile_id 1 access_id 1 tr_tcm cir 1000 cbs 2000 pir
2000 pbs 2000 color_blind conform permit counter enable exceed permit replace_dscp 60 counter enable violate drop
Command: config flow_meter profile_id 1 access_id 1 tr_tcm cir 1000 cbs 2000 pir 2000 pbs
2000 color_blind conform permit counter enable exceed permit replace_dscp 60 counter enable violate drop
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
6-6 show flow_meter
Description
This command is used to display the flow-based metering (ACL Flow Metering) configuration.
Format show flow_meter {[profile_id <value 1-512> | profile_name <name 32>] {access_id <value 1-256>}}
Parameters
profile_id - (Optional) Specify the profile ID.
<value 1-512> - Enter the profile ID used here. This value must be between 1 and 512.
profile_name - (Optional) Specify the name of the profile.
<name 32> - Enter the profile name used here. The maximum length is 32 characters.
access_id - (Optional) Specify the access ID.
<value 1-256> - Enter the access ID used here. This value must be between 1 and 256.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the flow metering configuration:
91
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show flow_meter
Command: show flow_meter
Flow Meter Information
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Profile ID:1 Aceess ID:1 Mode : trTCM / ColorBlind
CIR(Kbps):1000 CBS(Kbyte):2000 PIR(Kbps):2000 PBS(Kbyte):2000
Action:
Conform : Permit Counter: Enabled
Exceed : Permit Replace DSCP: 60 Counter: Enabled
Violate : Drop Counter: Disabled
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Total Entries: 1
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
6-7 config time_range
Description
This command is used to define a specific range of time to activate a function on the Switch by specifying which time range in a day and which days in a week are covered in the time range. Note that the specified time range is based on the SNTP time or the configured time. If this time is not available, the time range will not be met.
Format config time_range <range_name 32> [hours start_time <time hh:mm:ss> end_time <time hh:mm:ss> weekdays <daylist> | delete]
Parameters
time_range - Specify the name of the time range settings.
<range_name 32> - Enter the time range name used here. This name can be up to 32 characters long.
hours - Specify the time of a day.
start_time - Specify the starting time of a day.
<time hh:mm:ss> - Enter the starting time here. (24-hr time). For example, 19:00 means 7PM. 19 is also acceptable. The time specified in the start_time parameter must be smaller than the time specified in the end_time parameter.
end_time - Specify the ending time of a day. (24-hr time)
<time hh:mm:ss> - Enter the ending time here. (24-hr time). For example, 19:00 means 7PM. 19 is also acceptable. The time specified in the start_time parameter must be smaller than the time specified in the end_time parameter.
weekdays - Specify the list of days contained in the time range. Use a dash to define a period of days. Use a comma to separate specific days.
<daylist> - Enter the weekdays that will be included in this configuration here. For example, mon-fri (Monday to Friday). sun, mon, fri (Sunday, Monday and Friday)
delete - Deletes a time range profile. When a time_range profile has been associated with ACL entries, deleting the time_range profile will fail.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure a time range named “1” that starts every Monday at 01:01:01am and ends at 02:02:02am:
92
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config time_range 1 hours start_time 1:1:1 end_time 2:2:2 weekdays mon
Command: config time_range 1 hours start_time 1:1:1 end_time 2:2:2 weekdays mon
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config time_range 1 delete
Command: config time_range 1 delete
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
6-8 show time_range
Description
This command is used to display the current time range settings.
Format show time_range
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the current time range settings:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show time_range
Command: show time_range
Time Range Information
-----------------------------
Range Name : 1
Weekdays : Mon
Start Time : 01:01:01
End Time : 02:01:01
Total Entries :1
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
6-9 show current_config access_profile
Description
This command is used to display the ACL part of the current configuration, when logged in with user level privileges.
93
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
The overall current configuration can be displayed by using the show config command, which is accessible with administrator level privileges.
Format show current_config access_profile
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the ACL part of the current configuration:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show current_config access_profile
Command: show current_config access_profile
#-------------------------------------------------------------------
# ACL create access_profile ethernet vlan profile_id 1 config access_profile profile_id 1 add access_id 1 ethernet vlan default port 1 permit create access_profile ip source_ip_mask 255.255.255.255 profile_id 2 config access_profile profile_id 2 add access_id 1 ip source_ip 10.10.10.10 port 2 deny
#-------------------------------------------------------------------
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
94
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 7 Address Resolution Protocol (ARP)
Command List
create arpentry <ipaddr> <macaddr>
delete arpentry [<ipaddr> | all]
config arpentry <ipaddr> <macaddr>
config arp_aging time <value 0-65535> clear arptable
show arpentry {ipif <ipif_name 12> | ipaddress <ipaddr> | static | mac_address <macaddr>}
7-1 create arpentry
Description
This command is used to enter a static ARP entry into the Switch’s ARP table.
Format create arpentry <ipaddr> <macaddr>
Parameters
<ipaddr> - Enter the end node or station IP address.
<macaddr> - Enter the corresponding MAC address of the IP address above.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To create a static ARP entry for the IP address 10.48.74.121 and MAC address 00-50-BA-00-07-36:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#create arpentry 10.48.74.121 00-50-BA-00-07-36
Command: create arpentry 10.48.74.121 00-50-BA-00-07-36
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
7-2 delete arpentry
Description
This command is used to delete an ARP entry, by specifying either the IP address of the entry or all. Specify ‘all’ clears the Switch’s ARP table.
Format delete arpentry [<ipaddr> | all]
95
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Parameters
<ipaddr> - Enter the end node or station IP address.
all - Specify to delete all ARP entries.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To delete an entry of IP address 10.48.74.121 from the ARP table:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#delete arpentry 10.48.74.121
Command: delete arpentry 10.48.74.121
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
7-3 config arpentry
Description
This command is used to configure a static entry’s MAC address in the ARP table. Specify the IP address and
MAC address of the entry.
Format config arpentry <ipaddr> <macaddr>
Parameters
<ipaddr> - Enter the end node or station IP address.
<macaddr> - Enter the corresponding MAC address of the IP address above.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure a static ARP entry, whose IP address is 10.48.74.121, set its MAC address to 00-50-BA-00-07-37:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config arpentry 10.48.74.121 00-50-BA-00-07-37
Command: config arpentry 10.48.74.121 00-50-BA-00-07-37
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
7-4 config arp_aging time
Description
This command is used to set the maximum amount of time, in minutes, that a dynamic ARP entry can remain in the
Switch’s ARP table, without being accessed, before it is dropped from the table.
96
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Format config arp_aging time <value 0-65535>
Parameters
<value 0-65535> - Enter the ARP age-out time, in minutes. This value must be between 0 and 65535 minutes.
The default value is 20.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure ARP aging time to 30 minutes:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config arp_aging time 30
Command: config arp_aging time 30
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
7-5 clear arptable
Description
This command is used to clear all the dynamic entries from ARP table.
Format clear arptable
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To clear the ARP table:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#clear arptable
Command: clear arptable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
97
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
7-6 show arpentry
Description
This command is used to display the ARP table. You can filter the display by IP address, MAC address, Interface name, or static entries.
Format show arpentry {ipif <ipif_name 12> | ipaddress <ipaddr> | static | mac_address <macaddr>}
Parameters
ipif - (Optional) The name of the IP interface the end node or station for which the ARP table entry was made, resides on.
<ipif_name 12> - Enter the IP interface name here. This value can be up to 12 characters long.
ipaddress - (Optional) The IP address of the end node or station.
<ipaddr> - Enter the IP address here.
static - (Optional) Displays the static entries in the ARP table.
mac_address - (Optional) Displays the ARP entry by MAC address.
<macaddr> - Enter the MAC address here.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the ARP table:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show arpentry
Command: show arpentry
ARP Aging Time : 20
Interface IP Address MAC Address Type
------------- --------------- ----------------- ---------------
System 10.0.0.0 FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF Local/Broadcast
System 10.1.1.1 00-02-03-04-05-06 Static
System 10.1.1.2 00-02-03-04-05-06 Dynamic
System 10.1.1.3 00-02-03-04-05-06 Static
System 10.90.90.90 00-01-02-03-04-00 Local
System 10.255.255.255 FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF Local/Broadcast
Total Entries: 6
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
98
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 8 ARP Spoofing Prevention
Command List
config arp_spoofing_prevention [add gateway_ip <ipaddr> gateway_mac <macaddr> ports [<portlist> | all] | delete gateway_ip <ipaddr>] show arp_spoofing_prevention
8-1 config arp_spoofing_prevention
Description
This command is used to configure the spoofing prevention entry to prevent spoofing of MAC for the protected gateway. When an entry is created, those ARP packets whose sender IP matches the gateway IP of an entry, but source MAC field does not match the gateway MAC of the entry will be dropped by the system.
Format config arp_spoofing_prevention [add gateway_ip <ipaddr> gateway_mac <macaddr> ports [<portlist> | all]
| delete gateway_ip <ipaddr>]
Parameters
add - Specify to add an ARP spoofing prevention entry.
gateway_ip - Specify a gateway IP address to be configured.
<ipaddr> - Enter the IP address used for this configuration here.
gateway_mac - Specify a gateway MAC address to be configured.
<macaddr> - Enter the MAC address used for this configuration here.
ports - Specify a range of ports to be configured.
<portlist> - Enter a list of ports used for the configuration here.
all - Specify all of ports to be configured.
delete - Specify to delete an ARP spoofing prevention entry.
gateway_ip - Specify a gateway ip to be configured.
<ipaddr> - Enter the IP address used for this configuration here.
Restrictions
Only Administrators and Operators can issue this command.
Example
To configure the ARP spoofing prevention entry:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config arp_spoofing_prevention add gateway_ip 10.254.254.251gateway_mac
00-00-00-11-11-11 ports 1-2
Command: config arp_spoofing_prevention add gateway_ip 10.254.254.251 gateway_mac 00-00-00-
11-11-11 ports 1-2
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
99
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
8-2 show arp_spoofing_prevention
Description
This command is used to show the ARP spoofing prevention entry.
Format show arp_spoofing_prevention
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators and Operators can issue this command.
Example
To display the ARP spoofing prevention entries:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show arp_spoofing_prevention
Command: show arp_spoofing_prevention
Gateway IP Gateway MAC Ports
------------------ ------------------- --------------------
10.254.254.251 00-00-00-11-11-11 1-2
Total Entries: 1
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
100
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 9 Auto-Configuration Command List
enable autoconfig disable autoconfig show autoconfig
config autoconfig timeout <value 1-65535>
9-1 enable autoconfig
Description
This command is used to enable auto configuration. When enabled, during power on initialization, the Switch will get configure file path name and TFTP server IP address from the DHCP server. Then, the Switch will download the configuration file from the TFTP server for configuration of the system.
Format enable autoconfig
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators and Operators can issue this command.
Example
To enable autoconfig:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#enable autoconfig
Command: enable autoconfig
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
9-2 disable autoconfig
Description
This command is used to disable auto configuration. When disabled, the Switch will configure itself using the local configuration file
Format disable autoconfig
Parameters
None.
101
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Restrictions
Only Administrators and Operators can issue this command.
Example
To disable autoconfig:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#disable autoconfig
Command: disable autoconfig
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
9-3 show autoconfig
Description
This command is used to display if the auto-configuration is enabled or disabled.
Format show autoconfig
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show autoconfig status:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show autoconfig
Command: show autoconfig
Autoconfig State: Disabled
Timeout : 50 sec
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
9-4 config autoconfig timeout
Description
This command is used to configure the timeout value. This timer is used to limit the length of time in getting configuration settings from the network. When timeout occurs, the auto configuration operation will be stopped and the local configuration file will be used to configure the system.
Format config autoconfig timeout <value 1-65535>
102
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Parameters
<value 1-65535> - Enter the timeout length in seconds. The default setting is 50 seconds.
Restrictions
Only Administrator, and Operator level users can issue this command.
Example
To configure auto configuration timeout:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config autoconfig timeout 60
Command: config autoconfig timeout 60
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
103
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 10 Basic Commands Command List
create account [admin | operator | power_user | user] <username 15> {encrypt [plain_text | sha_1] <password>}
config account <username> {encrypt [plain_text | sha_1] <password>} show account
delete account <username> show switch
enable telnet {<tcp_port_number 1-65535>} disable telnet
enable web {<tcp_port_number 1-65535>} disable web
reboot {force_agree}
reset {[config | system]} {force_agree}
config firmware image <path_filename64>boot_up
create ipif <ipif_name 12> <network_address> <vlan_name 32> {secondary | state [enable | disable]}
config ipif <ipif_name 12> [{ipaddress <network_address> | vlan <vlan_name 32> | state [enable | disable]} | bootp | dhcp | ipv6 [ipv6address <ipv6networkaddr> | state [enable | disable]] | ipv4 state [enable | disable] | dhcpv6_client [enable | disable] | dhcp_option12 [hostname <hostname 63> | clear_hostname | state [enable | disable]]
delete ipif [<ipif_name 12> {ipv6address <ipv6networkaddr>} | all]
enable ipif [<ipif_name 12> | all]
disable ipif [<ipif_name 12> | all]
show ipif {<ipif_name 12>}
enable ipif_ipv6_link_local_auto [<ipif_name 12> | all]
disable ipif_ipv6_link_local_auto [<ipif_name 12> | all]
show ipif_ipv6_link_local_auto {<ipif_name 12>}
10-1 create account
Description
This command is used to create user accounts. The username is between 1 and 15 characters, the password is between 0 and 15 characters. It is case sensitive. The number of account (include admin and user) is up to 8.
Format create account [admin | operator | power_user | user] <username 15> {encrypt [plain_text | sha_1]
<password>}
Parameters
admin - Specify the name of the admin account.
operator - Specify the name for the operator user account.
power_user - Specify the name for the power-user account.
user - Specify the name of the user account.
<username 15> - Enter the username used here. This name can be up to 15 characters long.
encrypt - (Optional) Specify the encryption applied to the account.
plain_text - Specify the password in plain text form.
sha_1 - Specify the password in the SHA-1 encrypted form.
<password> - The password for the user account. The length for of password in plain-text form and in encrypted form are different. For the plain-text form, passwords must have a minimum of 0 character and can have a maximum of 15 characters. For the encrypted form password, the length is fixed to 35 bytes long. The password is case-sensitive.
104
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To create the admin-level user “dlink”:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#create account admin dlink
Command: create account admin dlink
Enter a case-sensitive new password:****
Enter the new password again for confirmation:****
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To create the user-level user “Remote-Manager”:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#create account user Remote-Manager
Command: create account user Remote-Manager
Enter a case-sensitive new password:****
Enter the new password again for confirmation:****
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
10-2 config account
Description
This command is used to configure user account. When the password information is not specified in the command, the system will prompt the user to input the password interactively. For this case, the user can only input the plain text password.
If the password is present in the command, the user can select to input the password in the plain text form or in the encrypted form. The encryption algorithm is based on SHA-1.
Format config account <username> {encrypt [plain_text | sha_1] <password>}
Parameters
<username> - Enter the user name of the account that has been defined.
encrypt - (Optional) Specify that the password will be encrypted.
plain_text - Specify the password in plain text form.
sha_1 - Specify the password in the SHA-1 encrypted form.
<password> - The password for the user account. The length for of password in plain-text form and in encrypted form are different. For the plain-text form, passwords must have a minimum of 0 character and can have a maximum of 15 characters. For the encrypted form password, the length is fixed to 35 bytes long. The password is case-sensitive.
105
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To configure the user password of “dlink” account:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config account dlink
Command: config account dlink
Enter a old password:****
Enter a case-sensitive new password:****
Enter the new password again for confirmation:****
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To configure the user password of “administrator” account:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config account administrator encrypt sha_1
*@&cRDtpNCeBiq15KOQsKVyrA0sAiCIZQwq
Command: config account administrator encrypt sha_1 *@&cRDtpNCeBiq15KOQsKVyrA0sAiCIZQwq
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
10-3 show account
Description
This command is used to display user accounts that have been created.
Format show account
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To display the accounts that have been created:
106
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show account
Command: show account
Current Accounts:
Username Access Level
--------------- ------------
admin Admin
oper Operator
power Power_user
user User
Total Entries : 4
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
10-4 delete account
Description
This command is used to delete an existing account.
Format delete account <username>
Parameters
<username> - Enter to delete the name of the user.
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To delete the user account “System”:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#delete account System
Command: delete account System
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
10-5 show switch
Description
This command is used to display the Switch information.
Format show switch
107
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
The following is an example for display of the Switch information.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show switch
Command: show switch
Device Type : DGS-3000-26TC Gigabit Ethernet Switch
MAC Address : F0-7D-68-30-00-10
IP Address : 10.90.90.90 (Manual)
VLAN Name : default
Subnet Mask : 255.0.0.0
Default Gateway : 0.0.0.0
Boot PROM Version : Build 2.00.001
Firmware Version : Build 2.00.004
Hardware Version : A2
System Name :
System Location :
System Uptime : 0 days, 0 hours, 42 minutes, 49 seconds
System Contact :
Spanning Tree : Disabled
GVRP : Disabled
IGMP Snooping : Disabled
MLD Snooping : Disabled
VLAN Trunk : Disabled
Telnet : Enabled (TCP 23)
Web : Enabled (TCP 80)
SNMP : Disabled
SSL Status : Disabled
CTRL+C ESC q Quit SPACE n Next Page ENTER Next Entry a All
10-6 enable telnet
Description
This command is used to enable Telnet and configure port number.
Format enable telnet {<tcp_port_number 1-65535>}
Parameters
<tcp_port_number 1-65535> - (Optional) The TCP port number. TCP ports are numbered between 1 and 65535.
The “well-known” TCP port for the Telnet protocol is 23.
Restrictions
Only Administrators and Operators can issue this command.
108
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Example
To enable Telnet and configure port number:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#enable telnet 23
Command: enable telnet 23
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
10-7 disable telnet
Description
This command is used to disable Telnet.
Format disable telnet
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators and Operators can issue this command.
Example
To disable Telnet:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#disable telnet
Command: disable telnet
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
10-8 enable web
Description
This command is used to enable HTTP and configure port number.
Format enable web {<tcp_port_number 1-65535>}
Parameters
<tcp_port_number 1-65535> - (Optional) The TCP port number. TCP ports are numbered between 1 and 65535.
The “well-known” TCP port for the WEB protocol is 80.
109
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Restrictions
Only Administrators and Operators can issue this command.
Example
To enable HTTP and configure port number:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#enable web 80
Command: enable web 80
Note: SSL will be disabled if web is enabled.
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
10-9 disable web
Description
This command is used to disable HTTP.
Format disable web
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators and Operators can issue this command.
Example
To disable HTTP:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#disable web
Command: disable web
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
10-10 reboot
Description
This command is used to restart the Switch.
Format reboot {force_agree}
110
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Parameters
force_agree - (Optional) The reboot command will be executed immediately without further confirmation.
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To reboot the Switch:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#reboot
Command: reboot
Are you sure to proceed with the system reboot?(y/n)
Please wait, the switch is rebooting…
10-11 reset
Description
This command is used to provide reset functions. The configuration setting will be reset to the default setting by the
“reset config” command. For the “reset system” command, the device will store the reset setting in the NVRAM and then reboot the system. The “reset” command will not reset IP address, log, user accounts and banner configured on the system.
Format reset {[config | system]} {force_agree}
Parameters
config - (Optional) All parameters are reset to default settings. However, the device will neither save or reboot.
system - (Optional) All parameters are reset to default settings, and the Switch will reset to factory default settings, save and reboot.
force_agree - (Optional) The reset command will be executed immediately without further confirmation.
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To reset the Switch:
111
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#reset system
Command: reset system
Are you sure you want to proceed with system reset?(y/n)
y-(reset all include configuration, save, reboot )
n-(cancel command) y
Reboot & Load Factory Default Configuration...
Saving configurations and logs to NV-RAM...... Done.
Please wait, the switch is rebooting...
10-12 config firmware image
Description
This command is used to select a firmware file as a boot-up file. This command is required to be supported when multiple firmware images are supported.
Format config firmware image <path_filename64>boot_up
Parameters
<path_filename64> - Enter a firmware file on the device file system.
boot_up - Specify the firmware as the boot-up firmware.
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To configure c:/ firmware.had as the boot-up image:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config firmware image c:/firmware.had boot_up
Command: config firmware image c:/firmware.had boot_up
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
10-13 create ipif
Description
This command is used to create an IP interface. An interface only allows one IPv4 IP address. To be able to have multiple IPv4 addresses, create a secondary IP interface with different IPv4 address on the same VLAN.
Format create ipif <ipif_name 12> <network_address> <vlan_name 32> {secondary | state [enable | disable]}
112
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Parameters
ipif - Specify the name of the IP interface.
<ipif_name 12> - Enter the IP interface name here. This name can be up to 12 characters long.
<network_address> - Enter the IPv4 network address with a host address and length of network mask
(xx.xx.xx.xx/xx).
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the VLAN name used here. This name can be up to 32 characters long.
secondary - (Optional) Specify to add the secondary IPv4 interface.
state - (Optional) Specify the state of the IP interface.
enable - Specify that the IP interface state will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the IP interface state will be disabled.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To create an IP interface:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#create ipif Inter1 192.168.16.1/24 vlan2 state enable
Command: create ipif Inter1 192.168.16.1/24 vlan2 state enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To create a secondary IP interface:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#create ipif Inter2 192.168.16.2/24 default secondary state enable
Command: create ipif Inter2 192.168.16.2/24 default secondary state enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
10-14 config ipif
Description
This command is used to configure the IP interface.
Format config ipif <ipif_name 12> [{ipaddress <network_address> | vlan <vlan_name 32> | state [enable | disable]}
| bootp | dhcp | ipv6 [ipv6address <ipv6networkaddr> | state [enable | disable]] | ipv4 state [enable | disable]
| dhcpv6_client [enable | disable] | dhcp_option12 [hostname <hostname 63> | clear_hostname | state
[enable | disable]]
Parameters
<ipif_name 12> - Enter the IP interface name used here. This name can be up to 12 characters long.
ipaddress - (Optional) Specify a network on an ipif. The address should specify a host address and length of network mask. Since an ipif can have only one IPv4 address, the new configured address will overwrite the original one.
<network_address> - Enter the network address used here.
vlan - (Optional) Specify the name of the VLAN here.
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the VLAN name used here. This name can be up to 32 characters long.
113
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
state - (Optional) Specify the state of the interface.
enable - Specify to enable the state of the interface.
disable - Specify to disable the state of the interface.
bootp - Specify to use BOOTP to obtain the IPv4 address.
dhcp - Specify to use DHCP to obtain the IPv4 address.
ipv6 - Specify that the IPv6 configuration will be done.
ipv6address - Specify the IPv6 network address. The address should specify a host address and length of network prefix. There can be multiple IPv6 addresses defined on an interface. Thus, as a new address is defined, it is added on this ipif.
<ipv6networkaddr> - Enter the IPv6 address used here.
state - Specify that the IPv6 interface state will be set to enabled or disabled.
enable - Specify that the IPv6 interface sate will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the IPv6 interface sate will be disabled.
ipv4 - Specify that the IPv4 configuration will be done.
state - Specify that the IPv4 interface state will be set to enabled or disabled.
enable - Specify that the IPv4 interface sate will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the IPv4 interface sate will be disabled.
dhcpv6_client - Specify the DHCPv6 client state of the interface.
enable - Specify to enable the DHCPv6 client state of the interface.
disable - Specify to disable the DHCPv6 client state of the interface.
dhcp_option12 - Specify the DHCP option 12.
hostname - Specify the host name to be inserted in the DHCPDISCOVER and DHCPREQUEST message.
<hostname 63> - Enter a name starting with a letter, end with a letter or digit, and have only letters, digits, and hyphen as interior characters; the maximal length is 63.
clear_hostname - Specify to clear the host name setting. If host name is empty, system name will be used to encode option 12. The length of system is more than 63, the superfluous chars will be truncated. If system name is also empty, then product model name will be used to encode option 12.
state - Specify to enable or disable the insertion of option 12 in the DHCPDISCOVER and DHCPREQUEST message.
enable - Specify to enable insertion of option 12 in the DHCPDISCOVER and DHCPREQUEST message.
disable - Specify to disable insertion of option 12 in the DHCPDISCOVER and DHCPREQUEST message.
This is the default.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure an interface’s IPv4 network address:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config ipif System ipaddress 192.168.69.123/24 vlan default
Command: config ipif System ipaddress 192.168.69.123/24 vlan default
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
10-15 delete ipif
Description
This command is used to delete an IP interface.
Format delete ipif [<ipif_name 12> {ipv6address <ipv6networkaddr>} | all]
114
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Parameters
<ipif_name 12> - Enter the IP interface name used here. This name can be up to 12 characters long.
ipv6address - (Optional) Specify the IPv6 network address. The address should specify a host address and length of network prefix. There can be multiple IPv6 addresses defined on an interface.
<ipv6networkaddr> - Enter the IPv6 address used here.
all – (Optional) Specify that all the IP interfaces will be used.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To delete an IP interface:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#delete ipif newone
Command: delete ipif newone
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
10-16 enable ipif
Description
This command is used to enable the IP interface.
Format enable ipif [<ipif_name 12> | all]
Parameters
<ipif_name 12> - Enter the IP interface name used here. This name can be up to 12 characters long.
all - Specify that all the IP interfaces will be enabled.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To enable an IP interface:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#enable ipif newone
Command: enable ipif newone
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
115
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
10-17 disable ipif
Description
This command is used to disable an IP interface.
Format disable ipif [<ipif_name 12> | all]
Parameters
<ipif_name 12> - Enter the IP interface name used here. This name can be up to 12 characters long.
all - Specify that all the IP interfaces will be disabled.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To disable an IP interface:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#disable ipif newone
Command: disable ipif newone
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
10-18 show ipif
Description
This command is used to display an IP interface.
Format show ipif {<ipif_name 12>}
Parameters
<ipif_name 12> - (Optional) Enter the IP interface name used here. This name can be up to 12 characters long.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display an IP interface:
116
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show ipif
Command: show ipif
IP Interface : Inter2
VLAN Name : default
Interface Admin State : Enabled
Link Status : LinkUp
IPv4 Address : 192.168.16.2/21 (Manual) Secondary
IPv4 State : Enabled
IP Interface : System
VLAN Name : default
Interface Admin State : Enabled
DHCPv6 Client State : Disabled
Link Status : LinkUp
IPv4 Address : 10.90.90.90/8 (Manual) Primary
IPv4 State : Enabled
IPv6 State : Enabled
DHCP Option12 State : Disabled
DHCP Option12 Host Name :
Total Entries: 2
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
10-19 enable ipif_ipv6_link_local_auto
Description
This command is used to enable the auto configuration of link local address when there are no IPv6 addresses explicitly configured. When an IPv6 address is explicitly configured, the link local address will be automatically configured, and the IPv6 processing will be started. When there is no IPv6 address explicitly configured, by default, link local address is not configured and the IPv6 processing will be disabled. By enable this automatic configuration, the link local address will be automatically configured and IPv6 processing will be started.
Format enable ipif_ipv6_link_local_auto [<ipif_name 12> | all]
Parameters
<ipif_name 12> - Enter the IP interface name used here. This name can be up to 12 characters long.
all - Specify that all the IP interfaces will be used.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To enable the IP interface for IPv6 link local automatic:
117
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#enable ipif_ipv6_link_local_auto newone
Command: enable ipif_ipv6_link_local_auto newone
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
10-20 disable ipif_ipv6_link_local_auto
Description
This command is used to disable the auto configuration of link local address when no IPv6 address are configured.
Format disable ipif_ipv6_link_local_auto [<ipif_name 12> | all]
Parameters
<ipif_name 12> - Enter the IP interface name used here. This name can be up to 12 characters long.
all - Specify that all the IP interfaces will be used.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To disable the IP interface for IPv6 link local automatic:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#disable ipif_ipv6_link_local_auto newone
Command: disable ipif_ipv6_link_local_auto newone
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
10-21 show ipif_ipv6_link_local_auto
Description
This commands is used to display the link local address automatic configuration state.
Format show ipif_ipv6_link_local_auto {<ipif_name 12>}
Parameters
<ipif_name 12> - (Optional) Enter the Ip interface name used here. This name can be up to 12 characters long.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
118
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Example
To display the link local address automatic configuration state.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show ipif_ipv6_link_local_auto
Command: show ipif_ipv6_link_local_auto
IPIF: System Automatic Link Local Address: Disabled
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
119
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 11 BPDU Attack Protection Command
List
config bpdu_protection ports [<portlist> | all ] {state [enable | disable] | mode [ drop | block | shutdown} (1)
config bpdu_protection recovery_timer [<sec 60-1000000> | infinite]
config bpdu_protection [trap | log] [none | attack_detected | attack_cleared | both] enable bpdu_protection disable bpdu_protection
show bpdu_protection {ports {<portlist>}}
11-1 config bpdu_protection ports
Description
This command is used to configure the BPDP protection function for the ports on the Switch. In generally, there are two states in BPDU protection function. One is normal state, and another is under attack state. The under attack state have three modes: drop, block, and shutdown. A BPDU protection enabled port will enter under attack state when it receives one STP BPDU packet. And it will take action based on the configuration. Thus, BPDU protection can only be enabled on STP-disabled port.
BPDU protection has high priority than FBPDU setting configured by configure STP command in determination of
BPDU handling. That is, when FBPDU is configured to forward STP BPDU but BPDU protection is enabled, then the port will not forward STP BPDU.
Format config bpdu_protection ports [<portlist> | all] {state [enable | disable] | mode [ drop | block | shutdown]}(1)
Parameters
<portlist> - Enter a range of ports to be configured (port number).
all - Specify that all the port will be configured.
state - Specify the BPDU protection state. The default state is disable.
enable - Specify to enable BPDU protection.
disable - Specify to disable BPDU protection.
mode - Specify the BPDU protection mode. The default mode is shutdown.
drop - Drops all received BPDU packets when the port enters under_attack state.
block - Drops all packets including BPDU and normal packets when the port enters under_attack state.
shutdown - Shuts down the port when the port enters under_attack state.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To set the port state enable and drop mode:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config bpdu_protection ports 1 state enable mode drop
Commands: config bpdu_protection ports 1 state enable mode drop
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
120
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
11-2 config bpdu_protection recovery_timer
Description
This command is used to configure BPDU protection recovery timer. When a port enters the ‘under attack’ state, it can be disabled or blocked based on the configuration. The state can be recovered manually or by the auto recovery mechanism. To manually recover the port, the user needs to disable and re-enable the port.
Format config bpdu_protection recovery_timer [<sec 60-1000000> | infinite]
Parameters
<sec 60 –1000000> - Enter the timer (in seconds) used by the Auto-Recovery mechanism to recover the port.
The valid range is 60 to 1000000.
infinite - The port will not be auto recovered.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure the bpdu_protection recovery_timer to 120 seconds for the entire switch:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config bpdu_protection recovery_timer 120
Commands: config bpdu_protection recovery_timer 120
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
11-3 config bpdu_protection
Description
This command is used to configure the BPDU protection trap state or state for the Switch.
Format config bpdu_protection [trap | log] [none | attack_detected | attack_cleared | both]
Parameters
trap - Specify the trap state.
log - Specify the log state.
none - Neither attack_detected nor attack_cleared is trapped or logged.
attack_detected - Events will be logged or trapped when the BPDU attacks is detected.
attack_cleared - Events will be logged or trapped when the BPDU attacks is cleared.
both - The events of attack_detected and attack_cleared shall be trapped or logged.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To config the bpdu_protection trap state as both for the entire switch:
121
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config bpdu_protection trap both
Commands: config bpdu_protection trap both
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
11-4 enable bpdu_protection
Description
This command is used to enable BPDU protection function globally for the Switch.
Format enable bpdu_protection
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To enable bpdu_protection function globally for the entire switch:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#enable bpdu_protection
Commands: enable bpdu_protection
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
11-5 disable bpdu_protection
Description
This command is used to disable BPDU protection function globally for the Switch.
Format disable bpdu_protection
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
122
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Example
To disable bpdu_protection function globally for the entire switch:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#disable bpdu_protection
Commands: disable bpdu_protection
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
11-6 show bpdu_protection
Description
This command is used to display BPDU protection global configuration or per port configuration and current status.
Format show bpdu_protection {ports {<portlist>}}
Parameters
ports - (Optional) Specify a range of ports to be configured.
<portlist> - Enter the portlist here.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show the bpdu_protection for the entire switch:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show bpdu_protection
Commands: show bpdu_protection
BPDU Protection Global Settings
---------------------------------------
BPDU Protection status : Enabled
BPDU Protection Recovery Time : 60 seconds
BPDU Protection Trap State : None
BPDU Protection Log State : None
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To show the bpdu_protection status ports 1-12:
123
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show bpdu_protection ports 1-12
Commands: show bpdu_protection ports 1-12
Port State Mode Status
------ ------------ ----------- ----------
1 Enabled shutdown Normal
2 Enabled shutdown Normal
3 Enabled shutdown Normal
4 Enabled shutdown Normal
5 Enabled shutdown Under Attack
6 Enabled shutdown Normal
7 Enabled shutdown Normal
8 Enabled shutdown Normal
9 Enabled shutdown Normal
10 Enabled Block Normal
11 Disabled shutdown Normal
12 Disabled shutdown Normal
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
124
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 12 Cable Diagnostics Command List
cable_diag ports [<portlist> | all]
12-1 cable_diag ports
Description
This command is used to configure cable diagnostics on ports. For FE port, two pairs of cable will be diagnosed.
For GE port, four pairs of cable will be diagnosed.
The following test result can be displayed.
• Open - The cable in the error pair does not have a connection at the specified position.
• Short - The cable in the error pair has a short problem at the specified position.
• Crosstalk - The cable in the error pair has a crosstalk problem at the specified position.
• Shutdown - The remote partner is powered off.
• Unknown - The diagnosis does not obtain the cable status. Please try again.
• OK - The pair or cable has no error.
• No cable - The port does not have any cable connected to the remote partner.
When a port is in link-up status, the test will obtain the distance of the cable. Since the status is link-up, the cable will not have the short or open problem. But the test may still detect the crosstalk problem.
When a port is in link-down status, the link-down may be caused by many factors.
1. When the port has a normal cable connection, but the remote partner is powered off, the cable diagnosis can still diagnose the health of the cable as if the remote partner is powered on.
2. When the port does not have any cable connection, the result of the test will indicate no cable.
3. The test will detect the type of error and the position where the error occurs.
When the link partner is Fast Ethernet ports:
• Where the link partner is powered on with no errors and the link is up, this command cannot detect the cable length
• Where the link partner is powered on with errors, this command can detect whether the error is open, short, or crosstalk. In this case this command can also detect the distance of the error
• Where the link partner is powered down with no errors and the link is down, this command cannot detect the cable length
• When the link partner is powered down with errors, this command can detect whether the error is open, short, or crosstalk. In this case this command can also detect the distance of the error
• When there is no link partner with no errors and the link is up, this command can detect the cable length
• When there is no link partner with errors, this command can detect whether the error is open, short, or crosstalk. In this case this command can also detect the distance of the error
When the link partner is Gigabit Ethernet ports:
• Where the link partner is powered on with no errors and the link is up, this command can detect the cable length
• Where the link partner is powered on with errors, this command can detect whether the error is open, short, or crosstalk. In this case this command can also detect the distance of the error
• Where the link partner is powered down with no errors and the link is down, this command cannot detect the cable length
• When the link partner is powered down with errors, this command can detect whether the error is open, short, or crosstalk. In this case this command can also detect the distance of the error
• When there is no link partner with no errors and the link is up, this command can detect the cable length
• When there is no link partner with errors, this command can detect whether the error is open, short, or crosstalk. In this case this command can also detect the distance of the error
125
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
NOTE: This test is only for copper cable. The fiber port is not tested. For the combo ports, only the copper media will be tested. The cable diagnosis does not support on the Pair 1 and 4 if the link partner is FE port. If the link partner is FE port, the target port's link will be down after the test.
Format cable_diag ports [<portlist> | all]
Parameters
<portlist> - Enter a list of ports used for the configuration here.
all - Specify that all the ports will be used for this configuration.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To test the cable on port 1, 11, and 12:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#cable_diag ports 1,11-12
Command: cable_diag ports 1,11-12
Perform Cable Diagnostics ...
Port Type Link Status Test Result Cable Length (M)
------ ---------- ------------- ------------------------- -----------------
1 100BASE-T Link Up OK 4
11 100BASE-T Link Down No Cable -
12 100BASE-T Link Down No Cable -
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
126
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 13 Command Logging Command List
enable command logging disable command logging show command logging
13-1 enable command logging
Description
This command is used to enable the command logging function. This is disabled by default.
NOTE: When the Switch is under booting procedure, all configuration command should not be logged. When the user under AAA authentication, the user name should not changed if user uses “enable admin” command to replace its privilege.
Format enable command logging
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To enable the command logging function:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#enable command logging
Command: enable command logging
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
13-2 disable command logging
Description
This command is used to disable the command logging function.
Format disable command logging
Parameters
None.
127
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To disable the command logging:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#disable command logging
Command: disable command logging
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
13-3 show command logging
Description
This command is used to display the Switch’s general command logging configuration status.
Format show command logging
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators and Operators can issue this command.
Example
To show the command logging configuration status:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show command logging
Command: show command logging
Command Logging State : Disabled
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
128
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 14 Compound Authentication
Command List
create authentication guest_vlan [vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid 1-4094>] enable authorization attributes
delete authentication guest_vlan [vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid 1-4094>] disable authorization attributes
config authentication guest_vlan [vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid 1-4094>] [add | delete] ports [<portlist>
| all]
config authentication mac_format {case [lowercase | uppercase] | delimiter {[hyphen | colon | dot | none] | number [1 | 2 | 5]}(1)}(1)
config authentication ports [<portlist> | all] {auth_mode [port_based | host_based {vlanid <vid_list> state
[enable | disable]}] | multi_authen_methods [none | any | dot1x_impb | impb_jwac | impb_wac | mac_impb| mac_jwac| mac_wac]}(1)
config authentication server failover [local | permit | block] show authorization show authentication show authentication guest_vlan show authentication mac_format
show authentication ports {<portlist>}
14-1 create authentication guest_vlan
Description
This command is used to assign a static VLAN to be a guest VLAN. The specific VLAN which is assigned to be a guest VLAN must already exist. The specific VLAN which is assigned to be a guest VLAN can’t be deleted.
Format create authentication guest_vlan [vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid 1-4094>]
Parameters
vlan - Specify the guest VLAN by VLAN name.
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the guest VLAN by VLAN name. The VLAN name can be up to 32 characters long.
vlanid - Specify the guest VLAN by VLAN ID.
<vlanid 1-4094> - Enter the guest VLAN by VLAN ID. The VLAN ID value must be between 1 and 4094.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To assign a static VLAN to be a guest VLAN:
129
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#create authentication guest_vlan vlan guestVLAN
Command: create authentication guest_vlan vlan guestVLAN
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
14-2 enable authorization attributes
Description
This command is used to enable authorization. When authorization for attributes is enabled, the authorized attributes (for example VLAN, 802.1p default priority, and ACL) assigned by the RADIUS server or local database, will be accepted depending on the individual module’s settings. Authorization for attributes is enabled by default.
Format enable authorization attributes
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To enable the authorization global state:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#enable authorization attributes
Command: enable authorization attributes
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
14-3 delete authentication guest_vlan
Description
This command is used to delete guest VLAN setting, but won’t delete the static VLAN.
All ports which enable guest VLAN will move to original VLAN after deleting guest VLAN.
Format delete authentication guest_vlan [vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid 1-4094>]
Parameters
vlan - Specify the guest VLAN by VLAN name.
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the VLAN name here. This name can be up to 32 characters long.
vlanid - Specify the guest VLAN by VLAN ID.
<vlanid 1-4094> - Enter the VLAN ID here. This ID must be between 1 and 4094.
130
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Restrictions
Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command.
Example
To delete guest VLAN configuration:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# delete authentication guest_vlan vlan guestVLAN
Command: delete authentication guest_vlan vlan guestVLAN
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
14-4 disable authorization attributes
Description
This command is used to disable authorization. When authorization for attributes is disabled, the authorized attributes (for example VLAN, 802.1p default priority, and ACL) assigned by the RADIUS server or local database, will be ignored even if the individual module’s setting is enabled. Authorization for attributes is enabled by default.
Format disable authorization attributes
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To disable the authorization global state:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#disable authorization attributes
Command: disable authorization attributes
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
14-5 config authentication guest_vlan
Description
This command is used to assign or remove ports to or from a guest VLAN.
Format config authentication guest_vlan [vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid 1-4094>] [add | delete] ports
[<portlist> | all ]
131
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Parameters
vlan - Specify the guest VLAN name.
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the guest VLAN name. The VLAN name can be up to 32 characters long.
vlanid - Specify the guest VLAN VID.
<vlanid 1-4094> - Enter the guest VLAN VID. The VLAN ID value must be between 1 and 4094.
add - Specify to add a port list to the guest VLAN.
delete - Specify to delete a port list from the guest VLAN.
ports - Specify a port or range of ports to configure.
<portlist> - Enter a range of ports to configure.
all - Specify to configure all ports.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure authentication for all ports for a guest VLAN called “gv”:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config authentication guest_vlan vlan gv add ports all
Command: config authentication guest_vlan vlan gv add ports all
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
14-6 config authentication mac_format
Description
This command is used to set the MAC address format that will be used for authentication username via the
RADIUS server.
Format config authentication mac_format {case [lowercase | uppercase] | delimiter {[hyphen | colon | dot | none] | number [1 | 2 | 5]}(1)}(1)
Parameters
case - Specify the case format used.
lowercase - Specify using the lowercase format, the RADIUS authentication username will be formatted as: aa-bb-cc-dd-ee-ff.
uppercase - Specify using the uppercase format, the RADIUS authentication username will be formatted as:
AA-BB-CC-DD-EE-FF.
delimiter - Specify the delimiter format used.
hyphen - Specify using the “-“ as delimiter, the format is: AA-BB-CC-DD-EE-FF
colon - Specify using the “:“ as delimiter, the format is: AA:BB:CC:DD:EE:FF
dot - Specify using the “.“ as delimiter, the format is: AA.BB.CC.DD.EE.FF
none - Specify not using any delimiter, the format is: AABBCCDDEEFF
number - Specify the delimiter number used.
1 - Single delimiter, the format is: AABBCC.DDEEFF
2 - Double delimiter, the format is: AABB.CCDD.EEFF
5 - Multiple delimiter, the format is: AA.BB.CC.DD.EE.FF
132
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure the MAC address format to IETF style:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config authentication mac_format case uppercase delimiter hyphen number 5
Command: config authentication mac_format case uppercase delimiter hyphen number 5
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
14-7 config authentication ports
Description
This command is used to configure authorization mode and authentication method on ports.
Format config authentication ports [<portlist> | all] {auth_mode [port_based | host_based {vlanid <vid_list> state
[enable | disable]}] | multi_authen_methods [none | any | dot1x_impb | impb_jwac | impb_wac | mac_impb| mac_jwac| mac_wac]}(1)
Parameters
<portlist> - Enter a port or range of ports to configure.
all - Specify to configure all ports.
auth_mode - The authorization mode is port-based or host-based.
port-based - If one of the attached hosts pass the authentication, all hosts on the same port will be granted access to the network. If the user fails the authentication, this port will keep trying the next authentication.
host-based - Specify to allow every user to be authenticated individually. The "vlanid" can authenticate the client on a specific authenticated VLAN(s).If the "vlanid" is not specified, or all the VLANs are disabled, it means the host does not care which VLAN the client comes from. The client will be authenticated if the client's MAC address (regardless of the VLAN) is not authenticated.
vlanid - (Optional) Specify the VLAN ID used for this configuration.
<vid_list> - Enter the VLAN ID used for this configuration here.
state - (Optional) Specify whether the authentication mode will be enabled or disabled on a specified
VLAN.
enable - Specify that the authentication mode will be enabled on the specified VLAN.
disable - Specify that the authentication mode will be disabled on the specified VLAN.
multi_authen_methods - Specify the compound authentication method. (If the compound authentication method selected includes IMPB(ex: dot1x_impb, impb_jwac, impb_wac, mac_impb) and the other method (802.1X,
JWAC, WAC or MAC) is globally disabled, only IMPB will be used. If the mac_jwac or mac_wac option is selected, both authentication methods will be applied. If one of the authentication methods fails or is globally disabled, then access will be denied.)
none - Specify that compound authentication is not enabled.
any - Specify if any of the authentication methods (802.1X, MAC, and JWAC/WAC) pass, then pass.
dot1x_impb - Dot1x will be verified first, and then IMPB will be verified. Both authentications need to be passed.
impb_jwac - JWAC will be verified first, and then IMPB will be verified. Both authentications need to be passed.
impb_wac - WAC will be verified first, and then IMPB will be verified. Both authentications need to be passed.
mac_impb - MAC will be verified first, and then IMPB will be verified. Both authentications need to be passed.
mac_jwac - MAC will be verified first followed by JWAC. Both authentication methods need to be passed.
mac_wac - MAC will be verified first followed by WAC. Both authentication methods need to be passed..
133
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To set the authentication mode of all ports to host-based:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config authentication ports all auth_mode host_based
Command: config authentication ports all auth_mode host_based
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To set the compound authentication method of all ports to “any”:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config authentication ports all multi_authen_methods any
Command: config authentication ports all multi_authen_methods any
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
14-8 config authentication server failover
Description
This command is used to configure authentication server failover function.
Format config authentication server failover [local | permit | block]
Parameters
local - Uses local DB to authenticate the client.
permit - The client is always regarded as authenticated.
block - Blocks the client. This is the default.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To set the authentication server authentication fail over state:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config authentication server failover local
Command: config authentication server failover local
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
134
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
14-9 show authorization
Description
This command is used to display authorization status.
Format show authorization
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
This example displays authorization status:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show authorization
Command: show authorization
Authorization for Attributes: Enabled.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
14-10 show authentication
Description
This command is used to display the authentication server failover configuration.
Format show authentication
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show authentication global configuration:
135
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show authentication
Command: show authentication
Authentication Server Failover: Local.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
14-11 show authentication guest_vlan
Description
This command is used to display guest VLAN information.
Format show authentication guest_vlan
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the guest VLAN setting:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show authentication guest_vlan
Command: show authentication guest_vlan
Guest VLAN VID :
Guest VLAN Member Ports:
Total Entries: 0
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
14-12 show authentication mac_format
Description
This command is used to display the authentication MAC format setting.
Format show authentication mac_format
Parameters
None.
136
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the authentication MAC format setting:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show authentication mac_format
Command: show authentication mac_format
Case : Uppercase
Delimiter : None
Delimiter Number : 5
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
14-13 show authentication ports
Description
This command is used to display the authentication method and authorization mode on ports.
Format show authentication ports {<portlist>}
Parameters
<portlist> - (Optional) Enter to display compound authentication on specific port(s).
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the authentication settings for ports 1 to 3:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show authentication ports 1-3
Command: show authentication ports 1-3
Port Methods Auth Mode Authentication VLAN(s)
---- -------------- ----------- ----------------------
1 None Host-based
2 None Host-based
3 None Host-based
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
137
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 15 Configuration Command List
show config [effective | modified | current_config | boot_up | file <pathname 64>] {[include | exclude | begin]
<filter_string 80> {<filter_string 80> {<filter_string 80>}} {[include | exclude | begin] <filter_string 80>
{<filter_string 80> {<filter_string 80>}} {[include | exclude | begin] <filter_string 80> {<filter_string 80>
{<filter_string 80>}}}}}
config configuration <pathname 64> [boot_up | active]
save {[config <pathname 64> | log | all]} show boot_file
15-1 show config
Description
This command is used to display the content of the current configuration, the configuration to be used in next boot, or the configuration file specified by the command.
The output stream of the configuration data can be filtered by the expression specified at the end of the command.
The expression can contain up to three multiple filter evaluations. A filter evaluation begins with a filter type
(include, exclude, and begin), followed by up to three filter strings (ex: “stp”). A filter string is enclosed by symbol ".
The following describes the meaning of the each filter type.
• include: includes lines that contain the specified filter string.
• exclude: excludes lines that contain the specified filter string
• begin: The first line that contains the specified filter string will be the first line of the output.
The relationship of multiple filter strings following the same filter type is OR. That is, one line is qualified if one of specified filter strings is matched.
If more than one filter evaluation is specified; the output of filtered by the former evaluation will be used as the input of the latter evaluation.
Format show config [effective | modified | current_config | boot_up | file <pathname 64>] {[include | exclude | begin]
<filter_string 80> {<filter_string 80> {<filter_string 80>}} {[include | exclude | begin] <filter_string 80>
{<filter_string 80> {<filter_string 80>}} {[include | exclude | begin] <filter_string 80> {<filter_string 80>
{<filter_string 80>}}}}}
Parameters
effective - Shows commands which only affects the behavior of the device. For example, if STP is disabled, only
“STP is disabled” is displayed for STP configuration. All other lower level setting regarding STP is not displayed. The lower level setting will only be displayed when the higher level setting is enabled.
modified - Shows only the commands which are not default setting.
current_config - Specify the current configuration.
boot_up - Specify the list of the boot-up configuration.
file - Specify to display the configuration file.
<pathname 64> - Enter an absolute pathname on the device file system. If pathname is not specified, the boot-up configuration is implied. This name can be up to 64 characters long.
include - (Optional) Includes lines that contain the specified filter string.
exclude - (Optional) Excludes lines that contain the specified filter string.
begin - (Optional) The first line that contains the specified filter string will be the first line of the output.
<filter_string 80> - A filter string is enclosed by symbol ". Thus, the filter string itself cannot contain the
“ character. The filter string is case sensitive. This value can be up to 80 characters long.
<filter_string 80> - (Optional) A filter string is enclosed by symbol ". Thus, the filter string itself cannot contain
138
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide the “ character. The filter string is case sensitive. This value can be up to 80 characters long.
<filter_string 80> - (Optional) A filter string is enclosed by symbol ". Thus, the filter string itself cannot contain the “ character. The filter string is case sensitive. This value can be up to 80 characters long.
include - (Optional) Includes lines that contain the specified filter string.
exclude - (Optional) Excludes lines that contain the specified filter string.
begin - (Optional) The first line that contains the specified filter string will be the first line of the output.
<filter_string 80> - A filter string is enclosed by symbol ". Thus, the filter string itself cannot contain the
“ character. The filter string is case sensitive. This value can be up to 80 characters long.
<filter_string 80> - (Optional) A filter string is enclosed by symbol ". Thus, the filter string itself cannot contain the “ character. The filter string is case sensitive. This value can be up to 80 characters long.
<filter_string 80> - (Optional) A filter string is enclosed by symbol ". Thus, the filter string itself cannot contain the “ character. The filter string is case sensitive. This value can be up to 80 characters long.
include - (Optional) Includes lines that contain the specified filter string.
exclude - (Optional) Excludes lines that contain the specified filter string.
begin - (Optional) The first line that contains the specified filter string will be the first line of the output.
<filter_string 80> - A filter string is enclosed by symbol ". Thus, the filter string itself cannot contain the
“ character. The filter string is case sensitive. This value can be up to 80 characters long.
<filter_string 80> - (Optional) A filter string is enclosed by symbol ". Thus, the filter string itself cannot contain the “ character. The filter string is case sensitive. This value can be up to 80 characters long.
<filter_string 80> - (Optional) A filter string is enclosed by symbol ". Thus, the filter string itself cannot contain the “ character. The filter string is case sensitive. This value can be up to 80 characters long.
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
The following example illustrates how the special filters, ‘modified’, affect the configuration display:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show config modified
Command: show config modified
#-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
# DGS-3000-26TC Gigabit Ethernet Switch
# Configuration
#
# Firmware: Build 2.00.004
# Copyright(C) 2016 D-Link Corporation. All rights reserved.
#-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
# DEVICE
# BASIC
# ACCOUNT LIST create account admin admin admin admin
CTRL+C ESC q Quit SPACE n Next Page ENTER Next Entry a All
139
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
15-2 config configuration
Description
This command is used to select a configuration file as the next boot-up configuration or to apply a specific configuration to the system. This command is required when multiple configuration files are supported.
Format config configuration <pathname 64> [boot_up | active]
Parameters
<pathname 64> - Enter a configuration file on the device file system.
boot_up - Specify it as a boot-up file.
active - Specify to apply the configuration.
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To configure the Switch’s configuration file as boot-up:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config configuration config.cfg boot_up
Command: config configuration config.cfg boot_up
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
15-3 save
Description
This command is used to save the current configuration to a file.
Format save {[config <pathname 64> | log | all]}
Parameters
config - (Optional) Specify to save the configuration.
<pathname 64> - Enter the pathname of the indicated pathname. The pathname can be up to 64 characters long.
log - (Optional) Specify to save the log.
all - (Optional) Specify to save changes to an active , current configuration to the log file.
Restrictions
Only Administrators and Operators can issue this command.
Example
To save the current configuration to the bootup configuration file:
140
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#save
Command: save
Saving all configurations to NV-RAM.......... Done.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To save the current configuration to a destination file, named 1:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#save config 1
Command: save config 1
Saving all configurations to NV-RAM.......... Done.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To save a log to NV-RAM:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#save log
Command: save log
Saving all system logs to NV-RAM.......... Done.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To save all the configurations and logs to NV-RAM:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#save all
Command: save all
Saving all configurations and logs to NV-RAM.......... Done.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
15-4 show boot file
Description
This command is used to display the configuration file and firmware image assigned as boot-up files.
Format show boot_file
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the boot file:
141
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show boot_file
Command: show boot_file
Boot-up Firmware : /c:/runtime.had
Boot-up Configuration : /c:/config.cfg
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
142
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 16 Connectivity Fault Management
(CFM) Command List
create cfm md <string 22> {md_index <uint 1-4294967295>} level <int 0-7>
config cfm md [<string 22> | md_index <uint 1-4294967295>] {mip [none | auto | explicit] | sender_id [none | chassis | manage | chassis_manage]}
create cfm ma <string 22> {ma_index <uint 1-4294967295>} md [<string 22> | md_index <uint 1-4294967295>]
config cfm ma [<string 22> | ma_index <uint 1-4294967295>] md [<string 22> | md_index<uint 1-4294967295>]
{vlanid <vlanid 1-4094> | mip [none | auto | explicit | defer] | sender_id [none | chassis | manage | chassis_manage | defer] | ccm_interval [10ms | 100ms | 1sec | 10sec | 1min | 10min] | mepid_list [add | delete]
<mepid_list>}
create cfm mep <string 32> mepid <int 1-8191> md [<string 22> | md_index <uint 1-4294967295>] ma [<string
22> | ma_index <uint 1-4294967295>] direction [inward | outward] port <port>
config cfm mep [mepname <string 32> | mepid <int 1-8191> md [<string 22> | md_index <uint 1-4294967295>] ma [<string 22> | ma_index <uint 1-4294967295>]] {state [enable | disable] | ccm [enable | disable] | pdu_priority <int 0-7> | fault_alarm [all | mac_status | remote_ccm | error_ccm | xcon_ccm | none] | alarm_time
<centisecond 250 -1000> | alarm_reset_time <centisecond 250-1000>}(1)
config cfm ais md [<string 22> | md_index <uint 1-4294967295>] ma [<string 22> | ma_index <uint 1-
4294967295>] mepid <int 1-8191> {period [1sec | 1min] | level <int 0-7> | state [enable | disable]}
config cfm lock md [<string 22> | md_index <uint 1-4294967295>] ma [<string 22> | ma_index <uint 1-
4294967295>] mepid <int 1-8191> { period [1sec | 1min] | level <int 0-7> | state [enable | disable]}(1)
delete cfm mep [mepname <string 32> | mepid <int 1-8191> md [<string 22> | md_index <uint 1-4294967295>] ma [<string 22> | ma_index <uint 1-4294967295>]]
delete cfm ma [<string 22> | ma_index <uint 1-4294967295>] md [<string 22> | md_index <uint 1-4294967295>]
delete cfm md [<string 22> | md_index <uint 1-4294967295>] enable cfm disable cfm
config cfm ports <portlist> state [enable | disable]
show cfm ports <portlist>
show cfm {[md [<string 22> | md_index <uint 1-4294967295>] {ma [<string 22> | ma_index <uint 1-
4294967295>] {mepid <int 1-8191>}} | mepname <string 32>]}
show cfm fault {md [<string 22> | md_index <uint 1-4294967295>] {ma [<string 22> | ma_index <uint 1-
4294967295>]}}
show cfm port <port> {level <int 0-7> | direction [inward | outward] | vlanid <vlanid 1-4094>}
cfm lock md [<string 22> | md_index <uint 1-4294967295>] ma [<string 22> | ma_index <uint 1-4294967295>] mepid <int 1-8191> remote_mepid <int 1-8191> action [start | stop]
cfm loopback <macaddr> [mepname <string 32> | mepid <int 1-8191> md [<string 22> | md_index <uint 1-
4294967295>] ma [<string 22> | ma_index <uint 1-4294967295>]] {num <int 1-65535> | [length <int 0-1500> | pattern <string 1500>] | pdu_priority <int 0-7>}
cfm linktrace <macaddr> [mepname <string 32> | mepid <int 1-8191> md [<string 22> | md_index <uint 1-
4294967295>] ma [<string 22> | ma_index <uint 1-4294967295>]] {ttl <int 2-255> | pdu_priority <int 0-7>}
show cfm linktrace [mepname <string 32> | mepid <int 1-8191> md [<string 22> | md_index <uint 1-
4294967295>] ma [<string 22> | ma_index <uint 1-4294967295>]] {trans_id <uint>}
delete cfm linktrace {[md [<string 22> | md_index <uint 1-4294967295>] {ma [<string 22> | ma_index <uint 1-
4294967295>] {mepid <int 1-8191>}} | mepname <string 32>]} show cfm mipccm
config cfm mp_ltr_all [enable | disable] show cfm mp_ltr_all
show cfm remote_mep [mepname <string 32> | md [<string 22> | md_index <uint 1-4294967295>] ma [<string
22> | ma_index <uint 1-4294967295>] mepid <int 1-8191>] remote_mepid <int 1-8191>
show cfm pkt_cnt {[ports <portlist> {[rx | tx]} | [rx | tx] | ccm]}
clear cfm pkt_cnt {[ports <portlist> {[rx | tx]} | [rx | tx] | ccm]}
143
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
16-1 create cfm md
Description
This command is used to create a maintenance domain.
Format create cfm md <string 22> {md_index <uint 1-4294967295>} level <int 0-7>
Parameters
<string 22> - Enter the maintenance domain name. This name can be up to 22 characters long.
md_index - (Optional) Specify the maintenance domain index.
<uint 1-4294967295> - Enter the maintenance domain index value here. This value must be between 1 and
4294967295.
level - Specify the maintenance domain level.
<int 0-7> - Enter the maintenance domain level here. This value must be between 0 and 7.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To create a maintenance domain called “op_domain” and assign a maintenance domain level of “2”:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#create cfm md op_domain level 2
Command: create cfm md op_domain level 2
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
16-2 config cfm md
Description
This command is used to configure the parameters of a maintenance domain. The creation of MIPs on an MA is useful to trace the link, MIP by MIP. It also allows the user to perform a loopback from an MEP to an MIP.
Format config cfm md [<string 22> | md_index <uint 1-4294967295>] {mip [none | auto | explicit] | sender_id [none | chassis | manage | chassis_manage]}(1)
Parameters
<string 22> - Enter the maintenance domain name. This name can be up to 22 characters long.
md_index - Specify the maintenance domain index.
<uint 1-4294967295> - Enter the maintenance domain index value here. This value must be between 1 and
4294967295.
mip - Specify to configure MIPs.
none - Specify not to create MIPs. This is the default value.
auto - MIPs can always be created on any ports in this MD, if that port is not configured with an MEP of this
MD. For the intermediate switch in an MA, the setting must be automatic in order for the MIPs to be created on this device.
explicit - MIPs can be created on any ports in this MD, only if the next existent lower level has an MEP
144
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide configured on that port, and that port is not configured with an MEP of this MD.
sender_id - Specify the control transmission of the sender ID TLV.
none - Specify not to transmit the sender ID TLV. This is the default value.
chassis - Transmits the sender ID TLV with the chassis ID information.
manage - Transmits the sender ID TLV with the managed address information.
chassis_manage - Transmits sender ID TLV with chassis ID information and manage address information.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure the maintenance domain called “op_domain” and specify the explicit option for creating MIPs:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config cfm md op_domain mip explicit
Command: config cfm md op_domain mip explicit
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
16-3 create cfm ma
Description
This command is used to create a maintenance association. Different MAs in an MD must have different MA
Names. Different MAs in different MDs may have the same MA Name.
Format create cfm ma <string 22> {ma_index <uint 1-4294967295>} md [<string 22> | md_index <uint 1-
4294967295>]
Parameters
<string 22> - Enter the maintenance association name. This name can be up to 22 characters long.
ma_index - (Optional) Specify the maintenance association index.
<uint 1-4294967295> - Enter the maintenance association index value here. This value must be between 1 and 4294967295.
md - Specify the maintenance domain name.
<string 22> - Enter the maintenance domain name here. This name can be up to 22 characters long.
md_index - Specify the maintenance domain index.
<uint 1-4294967295> - Enter the maintenance domain index value here. This value must be between 1 and 4294967295.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To create a maintenance association called “op1” and assign it to the maintenance domain “op_domain”:
145
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#create cfm ma op1 md op_domain
Command: create cfm ma op1 md op_domain
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
16-4 config cfm ma
Description
This command is used to configure the parameters of a maintenance association. The MEP list specified for an MA can be located in different devices. MEPs must be created on the ports of these devices explicitly. An MEP will transmit a CCM packet periodically across the MA. The receiving MEP will verify these received CCM packets from the other MEPs against this MEP list for the configuration integrity check.
Format config cfm ma [<string 22> | ma_index <uint 1-4294967295>] md [<string 22> | md_index <uint 1-
4294967295>] {vlanid <vlanid 1-4094> | mip [none | auto | explicit | defer] | sender_id [none | chassis | manage | chassis_manage | defer] | ccm_interval [10ms | 100ms | 1sec | 10sec | 1min | 10min] | mepid_list
[add | delete] <mepid_list>}(1)
Parameters
<string 22> - Enter the maintenance association name. This name can be up to 22 characters long.
ma_index - Specify the maintenance association index.
<uint 1-4294967295> - Enter the maintenance association index value here. This value must be between 1 and 4294967295.
md - Specify the maintenance domain name.
<string 22> - Enter the maintenance domain name here. This name can be up to 22 characters long.
md_index - Specify the maintenance domain index.
<uint 1-4294967295> - Enter the maintenance domain index value here. This value must be between 1 and 4294967295.
vlanid - Specify the VLAN Identifier. Different MAs must be associated with different VLANs.
<vlanid 1-4094> - Enter the VLAN ID used here. This value must be between 1 and 4094.
mip - Specify to configure MIPs.
none - Specify not to create MIPs.
auto - MIPs can always be created on any ports in this MA, if that port is not configured with an MEP of that
MA.
explicit - MIP can be created on any ports in this MA, only if the next existing lower level has an MEP configured on that port, and that port is not configured with an MEP of this MA.
defer - Inherit the setting configured for the maintenance domain that this MA is associated with. This is the default value.
sender_id - This is the control transmission of the sender ID TLV.
none - Specify not to transmit the sender ID TLV. This is the default value.
chassis - Transmits the sender ID TLV with the chassis ID information.
manage - Transmits the sender ID TLV with the manage address information.
chassis_manage - Transmits the sender ID TLV with the chassis ID information and the manage address information.
defer - Inherits the setting configured for the maintenance domain that this MA is associated with. This is the default value.
ccm_interval - Specify the CCM interval.
10ms - Specify that the CCM interval will be set to 10 milliseconds. Not recommended.
100ms - Specify that the CCM interval will be set to 100 milliseconds. Not recommended.
1sec - Specify that the CCM interval will be set to 1 second.
10sec - Specify that the CCM interval will be set to 10 seconds. This is the default value.
1min - Specify that the CCM interval will be set to 1 minute.
10min - Specify that the CCM interval will be set to 10 minutes.
mepid_list - Specify the MEPIDs contained in the maintenance association. The range of the MEPID is 1-8191.
add - Specify to add MEPID(s).
146
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
delete - Specify to delete MEPID(s). By default, there is no MEPID in a newly created maintenance association.
<mepid_list> - Enter the MEP ID list here.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure a CFM MA:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config cfm ma op1 md op_domain vlanid 1 ccm_interval 1sec
Command: config cfm ma op1 md op_domain vlanid 1 ccm_interval 1sec
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
16-5 create cfm mep
Description
This command is used to create an MEP. Different MEPs in the same MA must have a different MEPID. MD name,
MA name, and MEPID that together identify a MEP.
Different MEPs on the same device must have a different MEP name. Before creating an MEP, its MEPID should be configured in the MA’s MEPID list.
Format create cfm mep <string 32> mepid <int 1-8191> md [<string 22> | md_index <uint 1-4294967295>] ma
[<string 22> | ma_index <uint 1-4294967295>] direction [inward | outward] port <port>
Parameters
<string 32> - Enter the MEP name used. It is unique among all MEPs configured on the device. This name can be up to 32 characters long.
mepid - Specify the MEP ID. It should be configured in the MA’s MEPID list.
<int 1-8191> - Enter the MEP ID used here. This value must be between 1 and 8191.
md - Specify the maintenance domain name.
<string 22> - Enter the maintenance domain name used here. This name can be up to 22 characters long.
md_index - Specify the maintenance domain index.
<uint 1-4294967295> - Enter the maintenance domain index value here. This value must be between 1 and 4294967295.
ma - Specify the maintenance association name.
<string 22> - Enter the maintenance association name used here. This name can be up to 22 characters long.
ma_index - Specify the maintenance association index.
<uint 1-4294967295> - Enter the maintenance association index value here. This value must be between 1 and 4294967295.
direction - Specify the MEP direction.
inward - Specify the inward facing (up) MEP.
outward - Specify the outward facing (down) MEP.
port - Specify the port number. This port should be a member of the MA’s associated VLAN.
<port> - Enter the port number used here.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
147
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Example
To create a CFM MEP:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#create cfm mep mep1 mepid 1 md op_domain ma op1 direction inward port 2
Command: create cfm mep mep1 mepid 1 md op_domain ma op1 direction inward port 2
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
16-6 config cfm mep
Description
This command is used to configure the parameters of an MEP. An MEP may generate 5 types of Fault Alarms, as shown below by their priorities from high to low:
• Cross-connect CCM Received: priority 5
• Error CCM Received: priority 4
• Some Remote MEPs Down: priority 3
• Some Remote MEP MAC Status Errors: priority 2
• Some Remote MEP Defect Indications: priority 1
If multiple types of the fault occur on an MEP, only the fault with the highest priority will be alarmed.
Format config cfm mep [mepname <string 32> | mepid <int 1-8191> md [<string 22> | md_index <uint 1-
4294967295>] ma [<string 22> | ma_index <uint 1-4294967295>]] {state [enable | disable] | ccm [enable | disable] | pdu_priority <int 0-7> | fault_alarm [all | mac_status | remote_ccm | error_ccm | xcon_ccm | none]
| alarm_time <centisecond 250 -1000> | alarm_reset_time <centisecond 250-1000>}(1)
Parameters
mepname - Specify the MEP name.
<string 32> - Enter the MEP name used here. This name can be up to 32 characters long.
mepid - Specify the MEP ID.
<int 1-8191> - Enter the MEP ID used here. This value must be between 1 and 8191.
md - Specify the maintenance domain name.
<string 22> - Enter the maintenance domain name used here. This name can be up to 22 characters long.
md_index - Specify the maintenance domain index.
<uint 1-4294967295> - Enter the maintenance domain index value here. This value must be between 1 and 4294967295.
ma - Specify the maintenance association name.
<string 22> - Enter the maintenance association name used here. This name can be up to 22 characters long.
ma_index - Specify the maintenance association index.
<uint 1-4294967295> - Enter the maintenance association index value here. This value must be between 1 and 4294967295.
state - Specify the MEP administrative state.
enable - Specify that the MEP will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the MEP will be disabled. This is the default value.
ccm - Specify the CCM transmission state.
enable - Specify that the CCM transmission will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the CCM transmission will be disabled. This is the default value.
pdu_priority - The 802.1p priority is set in the CCMs and the LTMs messages transmitted by the MEP. The default value is 7.
<int 0-7> - Enter the PDU priority value here. This value must be between 0 and 7.
fault_alarm - Specify the control types of the fault alarms sent by the MEP.
all - All types of fault alarms will be sent.
148
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
mac_status - Only the fault alarms whose priority is equal to or higher than “Some Remote MEP MAC Status
Errors” are sent.
remote_ccm - Only the fault alarms whose priority is equal to or higher than “Some Remote MEPs Down” are sent.
error_ccm - Only the fault alarms whose priority is equal to or higher than “Error CCM Received” are sent.
xcon_ccm - Only the fault alarms whose priority is equal to or higher than “Cross-connect CCM Received” are sent.
none - No fault alarm is sent. This is the default value.
alarm_time - Specify the time that a defect must exceed before the fault alarm can be sent. The unit is centisecond, the range is 250-1000. The default value is 250.
<centisecond 250-1000> - Enter the alarm time value here. This value must be between 250 and 1000 centiseconds.
alarm_reset_time - Specify the dormant duration time before a defect is triggered before the fault can be realarmed. The unit is centisecond, the range is 250-1000. The default value is 1000.
<centisecond 250-1000> - Enter the alarm reset time value here. This value must be between 250 and 1000 centiseconds.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure a CFM MEP:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config cfm mep mepname mep1 state enable ccm enable
Command: config cfm mep mepname mep1 state enable ccm enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
16-7 config cfm ais md
Description
This command is used to configure the parameters of the AIS function on a MEP.
Format config cfm ais md [<string 22> | md_index <uint 1-4294967295>] ma [<string 22> | ma_index <uint 1-
4294967295>] mepid <int 1-8191> {period [1sec | 1min] | level <int 0-7> | state [enable | disable]}(1)
Parameters
md - Specify the maintenance domain name.
<string 22> - Enter the maintenance domain name. The maximum length is 22 characters.
md_index - Specify the maintenance domain index.
<uint 1-4294967295> - Enter the maintenance domain index value here. This value must be between 1 and 4294967295.
ma - Specify the maintenance association name.
<string 22> - Enter the maintenance association name. The maximum length is 22 characters.
ma_index - Specify the maintenance association index.
<uint 1-4294967295> - Enter the maintenance association index value here. This value must be between 1 and 4294967295.
mepid - Specify the MEPID.
<int 1-8191> - Enter the MEP MEPID between 1 and 8191.
period - Specify the transmitting interval of the AIS PDU.
1sec - Specify that the transmitting interval period will be set to 1 second.
1min - Specify that the transmitting interval period will be set to 1 minute.
149
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
level - Specify the client level ID to which the MEP sends AIS PDU. The default client MD level is the MD level that the most immediate client layer MIPs and MEPs exist on.
<int 0-7> - Enter the client level ID used here. This value must be between 0 and 7.
state - Specify the state of the AIS function.
enable - Specify that AIS function state will be enabled.
disable - Specify that AIS function state will be disabled.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure the AIS function so that it is enabled and has a client level of 5:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# config cfm ais md op-domain ma op-ma mepid 1 state enable level 5
Command: config cfm ais md op-domain ma op-ma mepid 1 state enable level 5
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
16-8 config cfm lock md
Description
This command is used to configure the parameters of the LCK function on a MEP.
Format config cfm lock md [<string 22> | md_index <uint 1-4294967295>] ma [<string 22> | ma_index <uint 1-
4294967295>] mepid <int 1-8191> { period [1sec | 1min] | level <int 0-7> | state [enable | disable]}(1)
Parameters
md - Specify the maintenance domain name.
<string 22> - Enter the maintenance domain name. The maximum length is 22 characters.
md_index - Specify the maintenance domain index.
<uint 1-4294967295> - Enter the maintenance domain index value here. This value must be between 1 and 4294967295.
ma - Specify the maintenance association name.
<string 22> - Enter the maintenance association name. The maximum length is 22 characters.
ma_index - Specify the maintenance association index.
<uint 1-4294967295> - Enter the maintenance association index value here. This value must be between 1 and 4294967295.
mepid - Specify the MEPID.
<int 1-8191> - Enter the MEP MEPID between 1 and 8191.
period - Specify the transmitting interval of the LCK PDU.
1sec - Specify that the transmitting interval period will be set to 1 second.
1min - Specify that the transmitting interval period will be set to 1 minute.
level - Specify the client level ID to which the MEP sends LCK PDU. The default client MD level is the MD level that the most immediate client layer MIPs and MEPs exist on.
<int 0-7> - Enter the client level ID used here. This value must be between 0 and 7.
state - Specify the LCK function state used.
enable - Specify that LCK function state will be enabled.
disable - Specify that LCK function state will be disabled.
150
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure the LCK function state as enabled and specify a client level of 5:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# config cfm lock md op-domain ma op-ma mepid 1 state enable level 5
Command: config cfm lock md op-domain ma op-ma mepid 1 state enable level 5
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
16-9 delete cfm mep
Description
This command is used to delete a previously created MEP.
Format delete cfm mep [mepname <string 32> | mepid <int 1-8191> md [<string 22> | md_index <uint 1-
4294967295>] ma [<string 22> | ma_index <uint 1-4294967295>]]
Parameters
mepname - Specify the MEP name.
<string 32> - Enter the MEP name used here. This name can be up to 32 characters long.
mepid - Specify the MEP ID.
<int 1-8191> - Enter the MEP ID used here. This value must be between 1 and 8191.
md - Specify the maintenance domain name.
<string 22> - Enter the maintenance domain name used here. This name can be up to 22 characters long.
md_index - Specify the maintenance domain index.
<uint 1-4294967295> - Enter the maintenance domain index value here. This value must be between 1 and 4294967295.
ma - Specify the maintenance association name.
<string 22> - Enter the maintenance association name used here. This name can be up to 22 characters long.
ma_index - Specify the maintenance association index.
<uint 1-4294967295> - Enter the maintenance association index value here. This value must be between 1 and 4294967295.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To delete a CFM MEP:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#delete cfm mep mepname mep1
Command: delete cfm mep mepname mep1
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
151
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
16-10 delete cfm ma
Description
This command is used to delete a created maintenance association. All MEPs created in the maintenance association will be deleted automatically.
Format delete cfm ma [<string 22> | ma_index <uint 1-4294967295>] md [<string 22> | md_index <uint 1-
4294967295>]
Parameters
<string 22> - Enter the maintenance association name. This name can be up to 22 characters long.
ma_index - Specify the maintenance association index.
<uint 1-4294967295> - Enter the maintenance association index value here. This value must be between 1 and 4294967295.
md - Specify the maintenance domain name.
<string 22> - Enter the maintenance domain name used here. This name can be up to 22 characters long.
md_index - Specify the maintenance domain index.
<uint 1-4294967295> - Enter the maintenance domain index value here. This value must be between 1 and 4294967295.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To delete a CFM MA:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#delete cfm ma op1 md op_domain
Command: delete cfm ma op1 md op_domain
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
16-11 delete cfm md
Description
This command is used to delete a previously created maintenance domain. All the MEPs and maintenance associations created in the maintenance domain will be deleted automatically.
Format delete cfm md [<string 22> | md_index <uint 1-4294967295>]
Parameters
<string 22> - Enter the maintenance domain name. This name can be up to 22 characters long.
md_index - Specify the maintenance domain index.
<uint 1-4294967295> - Enter the maintenance domain index value here. This value must be between 1 and
4294967295.
152
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To delete a CFM MD:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#delete cfm md op_domain
Command: delete cfm md op_domain
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
16-12 enable cfm
Description
This command is used to enable the CFM globally.
Format enable cfm
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To enable the CFM globally:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#enable cfm
Command: enable cfm
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
16-13 disable cfm
Description
This command is used to disable the CFM globally.
Format disable cfm
153
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To disable the CFM globally:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#disable cfm
Command: disable cfm
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
16-14 config cfm ports
Description
This command is used to enable or disable the CFM function on a per-port basis. By default, the CFM function is disabled on all ports.
If the CFM is disabled on a port:
1. MIPs are never created on that port.
2. MEPs can still be created on that port, and the configuration can be saved.
3. MEPs created on that port can never generate or process CFM PDUs. If the user issues a Loopback or
Link trace test on those MEPs, it will prompt the user to inform them that the CFM function is disabled on that port.
Format config cfm ports <portlist> state [enable | disable]
Parameters
<portlist> - Enter the list of ports used for this configuration.
state - Specify that the CFM function will be enabled or disabled.
enable - Specify that the CFM function will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the CFM function will be disabled.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure the CFM ports:
154
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config cfm ports 2-5 state enable
Command: config cfm ports 2-5 state enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
16-15 show cfm ports
Description
This command is used to show the CFM state of specified ports.
Format show cfm ports <portlist>
Parameters
<portlist> - Enter the list of logical ports.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show the CFM ports:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show cfm ports 3-6
Command: show cfm ports 3-6
Port State
----- --------
3 Enabled
4 Enabled
5 Enabled
6 Disabled
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
16-16 show cfm
Description
This command is used to show the CFM configuration.
Format show cfm {[md [<string 22> | md_index <uint 1-4294967295>] {ma [<string 22> | ma_index <uint 1-
4294967295>] {mepid <int 1-8191>}} | mepname <string 32>]}
Parameters
md - (Optional) Specify the maintenance domain name.
155
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
<string 22> - Enter the maintenance domain name used here. This name can be up to 22 characters long.
md_index - (Optional) Specify the maintenance domain index.
<uint 1-4294967295> - Enter the maintenance domain index value here. This value must be between 1 and 4294967295.
ma - (Optional) Specify the maintenance association name.
<string 22> - Enter the maintenance association name used here. This name can be up to 22 characters long.
ma_index - (Optional) Specify the maintenance association index.
<uint 1-4294967295> - Enter the maintenance association index value here. This value must be between 1 and 4294967295.
mepid - (Optional) Specify the MEP ID.
<int 1-8191> - Enter the MEP ID used here. This value must be between 1 and 8191.
mepname - (Optional) Specify the MEP name.
<string 32> - Enter the MEP name used here. This name can be up to 32 characters long.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show the CFM configuration:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show cfm
Command: show cfm
CFM State: Enabled
MD Index MD Name Level
---------- ---------------------- -----
1 op_domain 2
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show cfm md op_domain
Command: show cfm md op_domain
MD Index : 1
MD Name : op_domain
MD Level : 2
MIP Creation: Explicit
SenderID TLV: None
MA Index MA Name VID
---------- ---------------------- ----
1 op1 1
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show cfm md op_domain ma op1
Command: show cfm md op_domain ma op1
MA Index : 1
MA Name : op1
MA VID : 1
MIP Creation: Defer
CCM Interval: 1 second
SenderID TLV: Defer
MEPID List : 1
MEPID Direction Port Name MAC Address
----- --------- ----- ----------- -----------------
1 Inward 2 mep1 00-01-02-03-04-02
156
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-24TC:admin#show cfm mepname mep1
Command: show cfm mepname mep1
Name : mep1
MEPID : 1
Port : 1
Direction : Inward
CFM Port Status : Enabled
MAC Address : 78-54-2E-B6-6C-01
MEP State : Enabled
CCM State : Enabled
PDU Priority : 7
Fault Alarm : Disabled
Alarm Time : 250 centisecond((1/100)s)
Alarm Reset Time : 1000 centisecond((1/100)s)
Highest Fault : None
AIS State : Disabled
AIS Period : 1 Second
AIS Client Level : Invalid
AIS Status : Not Detected
LCK State : Disabled
LCK Period : 1 Second
LCK Client Level : Invalid
LCK Status : Not Detected
Out-of-Sequence CCMs: 0 received
Cross-connect CCMs : 0 received
Error CCMs : 0 received
Normal CCMs : 2 received
Port Status CCMs : 0 received
If Status CCMs : 0 received
CCMs transmitted : 14
In-order LBRs : 0 received
Out-of-order LBRs : 0 received
Next LTM Trans ID : 0
Unexpected LTRs : 0 received
LBMs Transmitted : 0
AIS PDUs : 0 received
AIS PDUs Transmitted: 0
LCK PDUs : 0 received
LCK PDUs Transmitted: 0
Remote
MEPID MAC Address Status RDI PortSt IfSt LCK Detect Time
------ ----------------- ------ --- ------- ---------- --- -------------------
2 B8-A3-86-F4-1C-99 OK No Up Up No 2016-05-10 02:50:01
DGS-3000-24TC:admin#
16-17 show cfm fault
Description
This command is used to display all the fault conditions detected by the MEPs contained in the specified MA or MD.
This display provides the overview of the fault status by MEPs.
157
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Format show cfm fault {md [<string 22> | md_index <uint 1-4294967295>] {ma [<string 22> | ma_index <uint 1-
4294967295>]}}
Parameters
md - (Optional) Specify the maintenance domain name.
<string 22> - Enter the maintenance domain name used here. This name can be up to 22 characters long.
md_index - (Optional) Specify the maintenance domain index.
<uint 1-4294967295> - Enter the maintenance domain index value here. This value must be between 1 and 4294967295.
ma - (Optional) Specify the maintenance association name.
<string 22> - Enter the maintenance association name used here. This name can be up to 22 characters long.
ma_index - (Optional) Specify the maintenance association index.
<uint 1-4294967295> - Enter the maintenance association index value here. This value must be between 1 and 4294967295.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show the CFM faults:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show cfm fault
Command: show cfm fault
MD Name MA Name MEPID Status
----------- ----------- ----- --------------------------------- op_domain op1 1 Cross-connect CCM Received
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
16-18 show cfm port
Description
This command is used to show MEPs and MIPs created on a port.
Format show cfm port <port> {level <int 0-7> | direction [inward | outward] | vlanid <vlanid 1-4094>}
Parameters
<port> - Enter the port number used here.
level - (Optional) Specify the MD Level. If not specified, all levels are shown.
<int 0-7> - Enter the MD level value here. This value must be between 0 and 7.
direction - (Optional) Specify the MEP direction.
inward - Specify that the MEP direction will be inward facing.
outward - Specify that the MEP direction will be outward facing.
If not specified, both directions and the MIP are shown.
vlanid - (Optional) Specify the VLAN identifier. If not specified, all VLANs are shown.
<vlanid 1-4094> - Enter the VLAN ID used here. This value must be between 1 and 4094.
158
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show the MEPs and MIPs created on a port:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show cfm port 2
Command: show cfm port 2
MAC Address: 00-01-02-03-04-02
MD Name MA Name MEPID Level Direction VID
----------- ----------- ----- ----- --------- ---- op_domain op1 1 2 Inward 1
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
16-19 cfm lock md
Description
This command is used to start/stop cfm management lock. This command will result in the MEP sends a LCK PDU to client level MEP.
Format cfm lock md [<string 22> | md_index <uint 1-4294967295>] ma [<string 22> | ma_index <uint 1-4294967295>] mepid <int 1-8191> remote_mepid <int 1-8191> action [start | stop]
Parameters
md - Specify the maintenance domain name.
<string 22> - Enter the maintenance domain name here. This name can be up to 22 characters long.
md_index - Specify the MD index value used.
<uint 1-4294967295> - Enter the MD index value used here. This value must be between 1 and
4294967295.
ma - Specify the maintenance association name.
<string 22> - Enter the maintenance association name here. This name can be up to 22 characters long.
ma_index - Specify the MA index value used.
<uint 1-4294967295> - Enter the MA index value used here. This value must be between 1 and
4294967295.
mepid - The MEP ID in the MD which sends LCK frame.
<int 1-8191> - Enter the MEP ID value here. This value must be between 1 and 8191.
remote_mepid - The peer MEP is the target of management action.
<int 1-8191> - Enter the remote MEP ID used here. This value must be between 1 and 8191.
action - Specify to start or to stop the management lock function.
start - Specify to start the management lock function.
stop - Specify to stop the management lock function.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To start management lock:
159
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# cfm lock md op-domain ma op-ma mepid 1 remote_mepid 2 action start
Command: cfm lock md op-domain ma op-ma mepid 1 remote_mepid 2 action start
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
16-20 cfm loopback
Description
This command is used to start a CFM loopback test. You can press Ctrl+C to exit the loopback test. The MAC address represents the destination MEP or MIP that can be reached by this MAC address. The MEP represents the source MEP to initiate the loopback message.
Format cfm loopback <macaddr> [mepname <string 32> | mepid <int 1-8191> md [<string 22> | md_index <uint 1-
4294967295>] ma [<string 22> | ma_index <uint 1-4294967295>]] {num <int 1-65535> | [length <int 0-1500> | pattern <string 1500>] | pdu_priority <int 0-7>}
Parameters
<macaddr> - Enter the destination MAC address here.
mepname - Specify the MEP name used.
<string 32> - Enter the MEP name used here. This name can be up to 32 characters long.
mepid - Specify the MEP ID used.
<int 1-8191> - Enter the MEP ID used here. This value must be between 1 and 8191.
md - Specify the maintenance domain name.
<string 22> - Enter the maintenance domain name here. This name can be up to 22 characters long.
md_index - Specify the maintenance domain index.
<uint 1-4294967295> - Enter the maintenance domain index value here. This value must be between 1 and 4294967295.
ma - Specify the maintenance association name.
<string 22> - Enter the maintenance association name here. This name can be up to 22 characters long.
ma_index - Specify the maintenance association index.
<uint 1-4294967295> - Enter the maintenance association index value here. This value must be between 1 and 4294967295.
num - (Optional) Number of LBMs to be sent. The default value is 4.
<int 1-65535> - Enter the number of LBMs to be sent here. This value must be between 1 and 65535.
length - (Optional) The payload length of the LBM to be sent. The default is 0.
<int 0-1500> - Enter the payload length here. This value must be between 0 and 1500.
pattern - (Optional) An arbitrary amount of data to be included in a Data TLV, along with an indication whether the Data TLV is to be included.
<string 1500> - Enter the pattern used here. This value can be up to 1500 characters long.
pdu_priority - (Optional) The 802.1p priority to be set in the transmitted LBMs. If not specified, it uses the same priority as CCMs and LTMs sent by the MA.
<int 0-7> - Enter the PDU priority value here. This value must be between 0 and 7.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To transmit a LBM:
160
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#cfm loopback 32-00-70-89-31-06 mepname mep1
Command: cfm loopback 32-00-70-89-31-06 mepname mep1
Reply from 32-00-70-89-31-06: bytes=0 time=50ms
Reply from 32-00-70-89-31-06: bytes=0 time=50ms
Reply from 32-00-70-89-31-06: bytes=0 time=50ms
Reply from 32-00-70-89-31-06: bytes=0 time=50ms
CFM loopback statistics for 32-00-70-89-31-06:
Packets: Sent=4, Received=4, Lost=0(0% loss).
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
16-21 cfm linktrace
Description
This command is used to issue a CFM link track message.
Format cfm linktrace <macaddr> [mepname <string 32> | mepid <int 1-8191> md [<string 22> | md_index <uint 1-
4294967295>] ma [<string 22> | ma_index <uint 1-4294967295>]] {ttl <int 2-255> | pdu_priority <int 0-7>}
Parameters
<macaddr> - Enter the destination MAC address.
mepname - Specify the MEP name used.
<string 32> - Enter the MEP name used here. This name can be up to 32 characters long.
mepid - Specify the MEP ID used.
<int 1-8191> - Enter the MEP ID used here. This value must be between 1 and 8191.
md - Specify the maintenance domain name.
<string 22> - Enter the maintenance domain name her. This name can be up to 22 characters long.
md_index - Specify the maintenance domain index.
<uint 1-4294967295> - Enter the maintenance domain index value here. This value can be between 1 and 4294967295.
ma - Specify the maintenance association name.
<string 22> - Enter the maintenance association name her. This name can be up to 22 characters long.
ma_index - Specify the maintenance association index.
<uint 1-4294967295> - Enter the maintenance association index value here. This value can be between
1 and 4294967295.
ttl - (Optional) Specify the link trace message TTL value. The default value is 64.
<int 2-255> - Enter the link trace message TTL value here. This value must be between 2 and 255.
pdu_priority - (Optional) The 802.1p priority to be set in the transmitted LTM. If not specified, it uses the same priority as CCMs sent by the MA.
<int 0-7> - Enter the PDU priority value here. This value must be between 0 and 7.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To transmit an LTM:
161
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#cfm linktrace 00-01-02-03-04-05 mepname mep1
Command: cfm linktrace 00-01-02-03-04-05 mepname mep1
Transaction ID: 26
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
16-22 show cfm linktrace
Description
This command is used to show the link trace responses. The maximum link trace responses a device can hold is
128.
Format show cfm linktrace [mepname <string 32> | mepid <int 1-8191> md [<string 22> | md_index <uint 1-
4294967295>] ma [<string 22> | ma_index <uint 1-4294967295>]] {trans_id <uint>}
Parameters
mepname - Specify the MEP name used.
<string 32> - Enter the MEP name used here. This name can be up to 32 characters long.
mepid - Specify the MEP ID used.
<int 1-8191> - Enter the MEP ID used here. This value must be between 1 and 8191.
md - Specify the maintenance domain name.
<string 22> - Enter the maintenance domain name her. This name can be up to 22 characters long.
md_index - Specify the maintenance domain index.
<uint 1-4294967295> - Enter the maintenance domain index value here. This value must between 1 and 4294967295.
ma - Specify the maintenance association name.
<string 22> - Enter the maintenance association name her. This name can be up to 22 characters long.
ma_index - Specify the maintenance association index.
<uint 1-4294967295> - Enter the maintenance association index value here. This value must between 1 and 4294967295.
trans_id - (Optional) Specify the identifier of the transaction displayed.
<uint> - Enter the transaction ID used here.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show the link trace reply when the "all MPs reply LTRs" function is enabled:
162
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show cfm linktrace mepid 5 md md6 ma ma1 trans_id 30
Command: show cfm linktrace mepid 5 md md6 ma ma1 trans_id 30
Transaction ID: 30
From MEP mep5 to 30-00-26-81-34-A2
Start Time : 2016-01-31 14:47:36
Hop MEPID MAC Address Forwarded Relay Action
--- ----- ----------------- --------- ------------
1 - 30-00-26-81-34-19 Yes FDB
2 - 30-00-26-81-34-B8 No Hit
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#”
To show the link trace reply when the "all MPs reply LTRs" function is disabled:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show cfm linktrace mepname mep1 trans_id 27
Command: show cfm linktrace mepname mep1 trans_id 27
Transaction ID: 27
From MEP mep1 to 32-00-70-89-31-06
Start Time : 2011-11-22 16:28:56
Hop MEPID Ingress MAC Address Egress MAC Address Forwarded Relay Action
--- ----- ------------------- ------------------- --------- ------------
1 - 00-00-00-00-00-00 32-00-70-89-41-06 Yes FDB
2 - 00-32-28-40-09-07 00-32-28-40-09-05 Yes FDB
3 2 00-00-00-00-00-00 32-00-70-89-31-06 No Hit
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#”
16-23 delete cfm linktrace
Description
This command is used to delete the stored link trace response data that have been initiated by the specified MEP.
Format delete cfm linktrace {[md [<string 22> | md_index <uint 1-4294967295>] {ma [<string 22> | ma_index <uint
1-4294967295>] {mepid <int 1-8191>}} | mepname <string 32>]}
Parameters
md - (Optional) Specify the maintenance domain name.
<string 22> - Enter the maintenance domain name her. This name can be up to 22 characters long.
md_index - Specify the maintenance domain index.
<uint 1-4294967295> - Enter the maintenance domain index value here. This value must be between 1 and 4294967295.
ma - (Optional) Specify the maintenance association name.
<string 22> - Enter the maintenance association name her. This name can be up to 22 characters long.
ma_index - Specify the maintenance association index.
<uint 1-4294967295> - Enter the maintenance association index value here. This value must be between 1 and 4294967295.
mepid - (Optional) Specify the MEP ID used.
<int 1-8191> - Enter the MEP ID used here. This value must be between 1 and 8191.
mepname - (Optional) Specify the MEP name used.
163
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
<string 32> - Enter the MEP name used here. This name can be up to 32 characters long.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To delete the CFM link trace reply:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#delete cfm linktrace mepname mep1
Command: delete cfm linktrace mepname mep1
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
16-24 show cfm mipccm
Description
This command is used to show the MIP CCM database entries. All entries in the MIP CCM database will be shown.
A MIP CCM entry is similar to a FDB which keeps the forwarding port information of a MAC entry.
Format show cfm mipccm
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show MIP CCM database entries:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show cfm mipccm
Command: show cfm mipccm
MA VID MAC Address Port
---------- ---- ----------------- ----- opma 1 00-11-22-33-44-55 2 opma 1 01-23-45-67-89-10 3
Total: 2
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
164
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
16-25 config cfm mp_ltr_all
Description
This command is used to enable or disable the "all MPs reply LTRs" function.
Format config cfm mp_ltr_all [enable | disable]
Parameters
enable - Specify that the MP's reply to the LTR function will be set to all.
disable - Disables sending the all MPs replay LTRs function.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To enable the "all MPs reply LTRs" function:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config cfm mp_ltr_all enable
Command: config cfm mp_ltr_all enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
16-26 show cfm mp_ltr_all
Description
This command is used to show the current configuration of the "all MPs reply LTRs" function.
Format show cfm mp_ltr_all
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show the configuration of the "all MPs reply LTRs" function:
165
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show cfm mp_ltr_all
Command: show cfm mp_ltr_all
All MPs reply LTRs: Disabled
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
16-27 show cfm remote_mep
Description
This command is used to show remote MEPs.
Format show cfm remote_mep [mepname <string 32> | md [<string 22> | md_index <uint 1-4294967295>] ma
[<string 22> | ma_index <uint 1-4294967295>] mepid <int 1-8191>] remote_mepid <int 1-8191>
Parameters
mepname - Specify the MEP name used.
<string 32> - Enter the MEP name used here. This name can be up to 32 characters long.
md - Specify the maintenance domain name.
<string 22> - Enter the maintenance domain name here. This name can be up to 22 characters long.
md_index - Specify the maintenance domain index.
<uint 1-4294967295> - Enter the maintenance domain index value here. This value must between 1 and
4294967295.
ma - Specify the maintenance association name.
<string 22> - Enter the maintenance association name here. This name can be up to 22 characters long.
ma_index - Specify the maintenance association index.
<uint 1-4294967295> - Enter the maintenance association index value here. This value must between 1 and 4294967295.
mepid - Specify the MEP ID used.
<int 1-8191> - Enter the MEP ID used here. This value must be between 1 and 8191.
remote_mepid - Specify the Remote MEP ID used.
<int 1-8191> - Enter the remote MEP ID used here. This value must be between 1 and 8191.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show the CFM Remote MEP information:
166
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show cfm remote_mep mepname mep1 remote_mepid 2
Command: show cfm remote_mep mepname mep1 remote_mepid 2
Remote MEPID : 2
MAC Address : 00-11-22-33-44-02
Status : OK
RDI : Yes
Port State : Blocked
Port Status Defect : Blocked
Interface Status : Down
Interface Status Defect : No
Last CCM Serial Number : 1000
Sender Chassis ID : 00-11-22-33-44-00
Sender Management Address: SNMP-UDP-IPv4 10.90.90.90:161
Detect Time : 2008-01-01 12:00:00
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
16-28 show cfm pkt_cnt
Description
This command is used to show the CFM packet’s RX/TX counters.
Format show cfm pkt_cnt {[ports <portlist> {[rx | tx]} | [rx | tx] | ccm]}
Parameters
ports - (Optional) Specify the port counters to show. If not specified, all ports will be shown.
<portlist> - Enter the list of ports used for this configuration here.
rx - (Optional) Specify to display the RX counter.
tx - (Optional) Specify to display the TX counter. If not specified, both of them will be shown.
rx - (Optional) Specify to display the RX counter.
tx - (Optional) Specify to display the TX counter. If not specified, both of them will be shown.
ccm - (Optional) Specify the CCM RX counters.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show the CFM packet’s RX/TX counters:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show cfm pkt_cnt
Command: show cfm pkt_cnt
CFM RX Statistics
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Port AllPkt CCM LBR LBM LTR LTM VidDrop OpcoDrop
----- -------- -------- -------- -------- -------- -------- -------- -------- all 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
167
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
11 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
12 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
13 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
14 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
15 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
16 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
17 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
18 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
19 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
20 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
21 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
22 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
23 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
24 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
25 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
26 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
CFM TX Statistics
-----------------------------------------------------------
Port AllPkt CCM LBR LBM LTR LTM
----- -------- -------- -------- -------- -------- -------- all 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0 0 0 0
2 0 0 0 0 0 0
3 0 0 0 0 0 0
4 0 0 0 0 0 0
5 0 0 0 0 0 0
6 0 0 0 0 0 0
7 0 0 0 0 0 0
8 0 0 0 0 0 0
9 0 0 0 0 0 0
10 0 0 0 0 0 0
11 0 0 0 0 0 0
12 0 0 0 0 0 0
13 0 0 0 0 0 0
14 0 0 0 0 0 0
15 0 0 0 0 0 0
16 0 0 0 0 0 0
17 0 0 0 0 0 0
18 0 0 0 0 0 0
19 0 0 0 0 0 0
20 0 0 0 0 0 0
21 0 0 0 0 0 0
22 0 0 0 0 0 0
23 0 0 0 0 0 0
24 0 0 0 0 0 0
25 0 0 0 0 0 0
26 0 0 0 0 0 0
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show cfm pkt_cnt ccm
168
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Command: show cfm pkt_cnt ccm
CCM RX counters:
XCON = Cross-connect CCMs
Error = Error CCMs
Normal = Normal CCMs
MEP Name VID Port Level Direction XCON Error Normal
----------- ---- ----- ------ ---------- ---------- ---------- ----------
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
16-29 clear cfm pkt_cnt
Description
This command is used to clear the CFM packet’s RX/TX counters.
Format clear cfm pkt_cnt {[ports <portlist> {[rx | tx]} | [rx | tx] | ccm]}
Parameters
ports - (Optional) The ports which require need the counters clearing. If not specified, all ports will be cleared.
<portlist> - Enter the list of ports used for this configuration here.
rx - (Optional) Specify to clear the RX counter.
tx - (Optional) Specify to clear the TX counter. If not specified, both of them will be cleared.
rx - (Optional) Specify to clear the RX counter.
tx - (Optional) Specify to clear the TX counter. If not specified, both of them will be cleared.
ccm - (Optional) Specify the CCM RX counters.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To clear the CFM packet’s RX/TX counters:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#clear cfm pkt_cnt
Command: clear cfm pkt_cnt
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#clear cfm pkt_cnt ccm
Command: clear cfm pkt_cnt ccm
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
169
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 17 CPU Interface Filtering Command
List
create cpu access_profile profile_id <value 1-5> [ethernet {vlan | source_mac <macmask 000000000000ffffffffffff> | destination_mac <macmask 000000000000-ffffffffffff> | 802.1p | ethernet_type} | ip {vlan | source_ip_mask <netmask> | destination_ip_mask <netmask> | dscp | [icmp {type | code} | igmp {type} | tcp
{src_port_mask <hex 0x0-0xffff> | dst_port_mask <hex 0x0-0xffff> | flag_mask [all | {urg | ack | psh | rst | syn | fin}]} | udp {src_port_mask <hex 0x0-0xffff> | dst_port_mask <hex 0x0-0xffff>} | protocol_id_mask <hex 0x0-
0xff> {user_define_mask <hex 0x0-0xffffffff>}]} | packet_content_mask {offset_0-15 <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex
0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff>|offset_16-31 <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex
0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff>|offset_32-47 <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex
0x0-0xffffffff>|offset_48-63 <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-
0xffffffff>|offset_64-79 <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff>} | ipv6
{class | flowlabel | source_ipv6_mask <ipv6mask> | destination_ipv6_mask <ipv6mask>}]
delete cpu access_profile [profile_id <value 1-5> | all]
config cpu access_profile profile_id <value 1-5> [add access_id [auto_assign | <value 1-100>] [ethernet {[vlan
<vlan_name 32> | vlan_id <vlanid 1-4094>] | source_mac <macaddr> | destination_mac <macaddr> | 802.1p
<value 0-7> | ethernet_type <hex 0x0-0xffff>} | ip {[vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlan_id <vlanid 1-4094>] | source_ip
<ipaddr> | destination_ip <ipaddr> | dscp <value 0-63> | [icmp {type <value 0-255> | code <value 0-255>} | igmp {type <value 0-255>} | tcp {src_port <value 0-65535> | dst_port <value 0-65535> | flag [all | {urg | ack | psh | rst | syn | fin}]} | udp {src_port <value 0-65535> | dst_port <value 0-65535>} | protocol_id <value 0-255>
{user_define <hex 0x0-0xffffffff>}]} | packet_content {offset_0-15 <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex
0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> | offset_16-31 <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex
0x0-0xffffffff> | offset_32-47 <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> | offset_48-63 <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> | offset_64-79 <hex
0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff>} | ipv6 {class <value 0-255> | flowlabel
<hex 0x0-0xfffff> | source_ipv6 <ipv6addr> | destination_ipv6 <ipv6addr>}] port [<portlist> | all] [permit | deny]
{time_range <range_name 32>} | delete access_id <value 1-100>] enable cpu_interface_filtering disable cpu_interface_filtering
show cpu access_profile {profile_id <value 1-5>}
17-1 create cpu access_profile
Description
This command is used to create CPU access list profiles.
Format create cpu access_profile profile_id <value 1-5> [ethernet {vlan | source_mac <macmask 000000000000ffffffffffff> | destination_mac <macmask 000000000000-ffffffffffff> | 802.1p | ethernet_type} | ip {vlan | source_ip_mask <netmask> | destination_ip_mask <netmask> | dscp | [icmp {type | code} | igmp {type} | tcp {src_port_mask <hex 0x0-0xffff> | dst_port_mask <hex 0x0-0xffff> | flag_mask [all | {urg | ack | psh | rst
| syn | fin}]} | udp {src_port_mask <hex 0x0-0xffff> | dst_port_mask <hex 0x0-0xffff>} | protocol_id_mask
<hex 0x0-0xff> {user_define_mask <hex 0x0-0xffffffff>}]} | packet_content_mask {offset_0-15 <hex 0x0-
0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> | offset_16-31 <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex
0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> | offset_32-47 <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff>
<hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> | offset_48-63 <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-
0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> | offset_64-79 <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex
0x0-0xffffffff>} | ipv6 {class | flowlabel | source_ipv6_mask <ipv6mask> | destination_ipv6_mask
<ipv6mask>}]
Parameters
profile_id - Specify the profile ID used here.
<value 1-5> - Enter the profile ID value here. This value must be between 1 and 5.
170
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
ethernet - Specify that the profile type will be Ethernet.
vlan - (Optional) Specify a VLAN mask.
source_mac - (Optional) Specify the source MAC mask.
<macmask> - Enter the source MAC mask here.
destination_mac - (Optional) Specify the destination mac mask.
<macmask> - Enter the destination MAC mask here.
802.1p - (Optional) Specify 802.1p priority tag mask.
ethernet_type - (Optional) Specify the ethernet type mask.
ip - Specify that the profile type will be IP.
vlan - (Optional) Specify a VLAN mask.
source_ip_mask - (Optional) Specify an IP source submask.
<netmask> - Enter the IP source submask here.
destination_ip_mask - (Optional) Specify an IP destination submask.
<netmask> - Enter the IP destination submask here.
dscp - (Optional) Specify the DSCP mask.
icmp - (Optional) Specify that the rule applies to ICMP traffic.
type - (Optional) Specify that the rule applies to ICMP type traffic.
code - (Optional) Specify that the rule applies to ICMP code traffic.
igmp - (Optional) Specify that the rule applies to IGMP traffic.
type - (Optional) Specify that the rule applies to IGMP type traffic.
tcp - Specify that the rule applies to TCP traffic.
src_port_mask - (Optional) Specify the TCP source port mask.
<hex 0x0-0xffff> - Enter the source TCP port mask here.
dst_port_mask - (Optional) Specify the TCP destination port mask.
<hex 0x0-0xffff> - Enter the destination TCP port mask here.
flag_mask - (Optional) Specify the TCP flag field mask.
all - Specify that the TCP flag field mask will be set to all.
urg - (Optional) Specify that the TCP flag field mask will be set to urg.
ack - (Optional) Specify that the TCP flag field mask will be set to ack.
psh - (Optional) Specify that the TCP flag field mask will be set to psh.
rst - (Optional) Specify that the TCP flag field mask will be set to rst.
syn - (Optional) Specify that the TCP flag field mask will be set to syn.
fin - (Optional) Specify that the TCP flag field mask will be set to fin.
udp - (Optional) Specify that the rule applies to UDP traffic.
src_port_mask - (Optional) Specify the UDP source port mask.
<hex 0x0-0xffff> - Enter the source UDP port mask here.
dst_port_mask - (Optional) Specify the UDP destination port mask.
<hex 0x0-0xffff> - Enter the destination UDP port mask here.
protocol_id_mask - (Optional) Specify that the rule applies to the IP protocol ID traffic.
<hex 0x0-0xff> - Enter the IP protocol ID mask here.
user_define_mask - (Optional) Specify that the rule applies to the IP protocol ID and the mask options behind the first 4 bytes of the IP payload.
<hex 0x0-0xffffffff> - Enter the user-defined IP protocol ID mask here.
packet_content_mask - Specify the frame content mask, there are 5 offsets in maximum could be configured.
Each offset presents 16 bytes, the range of mask of frame is 80 bytes (5 offsets) in the first eighty bytes of frame.
offset_0-15 - (Optional) Specify that the mask pattern offset of the frame will be between 0 and 15.
<hex 0x0-0xffffffff> - Enter the mask pattern offset of the frame between 0 and 15 here.
offset_16-31 - (Optional) Specify that the mask pattern offset of the frame will be between 16 and 31.
<hex 0x0-0xffffffff> - Enter the mask pattern offset of the frame between 16 and 31 here.
offset_32-47 - (Optional) Specify that the mask pattern offset of the frame will be between 32 and 47.
<hex 0x0-0xffffffff> - Enter the mask pattern offset of the frame between 32 and 47 here.
offset_48-63 - (Optional) Specify that the mask pattern offset of the frame will be between 48 and 63.
<hex 0x0-0xffffffff> - Enter the mask pattern offset of the frame between 48 and 63 here.
offset_64-79 - (Optional) Specify that the mask pattern offset of the frame will be between 64 and 79.
<hex 0x0-0xffffffff> - Enter the mask pattern offset of the frame between 64 and 79 here.
ipv6 - Specify IPv6 filtering mask.
class - (Optional) Specify the IPv6 class.
flowlabel - (Optional) Specify the IPv6 flowlabel.
source_ipv6_mask - (Optional) Specify an IPv6 source submask.
<ipv6mask> - Enter the IPv6 source submask here.
destination_ipv6_mask - (Optional) Specify an IPv6 destination submask.
<ipv6mask> - Enter the IPv6 destination submask here.
171
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To create CPU access list rules:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#create cpu access_profile profile_id 1 ethernet vlan source_mac 00-00-00-
00-00-01 destination_mac 00-00-00-00-00-02 802.1p ethernet_type
Command: create cpu access_profile profile_id 1 ethernet vlan source_mac 00-00-00-00-00-01 destination_mac 00-00-00-00-00-02 802.1p ethernet_type
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#create cpu access_profile profile_id 2 ip vlan source_ip_mask 20.0.0.0 destination_ip_mask 10.0.0.0 dscp icmp type code
Command: create cpu access_profile profile_id 2 ip vlan source_ip_mask 20.0.0.0 destination_ip_mask 10.0.0.0 dscp icmp type code
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
17-2 delete cpu access_profile
Description
This command is used to delete CPU access list rules.
Format delete cpu access_profile [profile_id <value 1-5> | all]
Parameters
profile_id - Specify the index of access list profile.
<value 1-5> - Enter the profile ID value here. This value must be between 1 and 5.
all - Specify that al the access list profiles will be deleted.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To delete CPU access list rules:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#delete cpu access_profile profile_id 1
Command: delete cpu access_profile profile_id 1
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
172
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
17-3 config cpu access_profile
Description
This command is used to configure CPU access list entry.
Format config cpu access_profile profile_id <value 1-5> [add access_id [auto_assign | <value 1-100>] [ethernet
{[vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlan_id <vlanid 1-4094>] | source_mac <macaddr> | destination_mac <macaddr> |
802.1p <value 0-7> | ethernet_type <hex 0x0-0xffff>} | ip {[vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlan_id <vlanid 1-4094>] | source_ip <ipaddr> | destination_ip <ipaddr> | dscp <value 0-63> | [icmp {type <value 0-255> | code <value
0-255>} | igmp {type <value 0-255>} | tcp {src_port <value 0-65535> | dst_port <value 0-65535> | flag [all |
{urg | ack | psh | rst | syn | fin}]} | udp {src_port <value 0-65535> | dst_port <value 0-65535>} | protocol_id
<value 0-255> {user_define <hex 0x0-0xffffffff>}]} | packet_content {offset_0-15 <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex
0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> | offset_16-31 <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff>
<hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> | offset_32-47 <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-
0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> | offset_48-63 <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex
0x0-0xffffffff> | offset_64-79 <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff>} | ipv6 {class <value 0-255> | flowlabel <hex 0x0-0xfffff> | source_ipv6 <ipv6addr> | destination_ipv6
<ipv6addr>}] port [<portlist> | all] [permit | deny] {time_range <range_name 32>} | delete access_id <value
1-100>]
Parameters
profile_id - Specify the index of access list profile.
<value 1-5> - Enter the profile ID value here. This value must be between 1 and 5.
add - Specify that a profile or a rule will be added.
access_id - Specify the index of access list entry. The range of this value is 1-100.
<value 1-100> - Enter the access ID here. This value must be between 1 and 100.
ethernet - Specify that the profile type will be Ethernet.
vlan - (Optional) Specify the VLAN name used.
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the name of the VLAN here. This name can be up to 32 characters long.
vlan_id - (Optional) Specify the VLAN ID used.
<vlanid 1-4094> - Enter the VLAN ID used here.
source_mac - (Optional) Specify the source MAC address.
<macaddr> - Enter the source MAC address used for this configuration here.
destination_mac - (Optional) Specify the destination MAC.
<macaddr> - Enter the destination MAC address used for this configuration here.
802.1p - (Optional) Specify the value of 802.1p priority tag.
<value 0-7> - Enter the 802.1p priority tag value here. This value must be between 0 and 7.
ethernet_type - (Optional) Specify the Ethernet type.
<hex 0x0-0xffff> - Enter the Ethernet type value here.
ip - Specify that the profile type will be IP.
vlan - (Optional) Specify the VLAN name used.
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the name of the VLAN here. This name can be up to 32 characters long.
vlan_id - (Optional) Specify the VLAN ID used.
<vlanid 1-4094> - Enter the VLAN ID used here.
source_ip - (Optional) Specify an IP source address.
<ipaddr> - Enter the source IP address used for this configuration here.
destination_ip - (Optional) Specify an IP destination address.
<ipaddr> - Enter the destination IP address used for this configuration here.
dscp - (Optional) Specify the value of DSCP, the value can be configured 0 to 63.
<value 0-63> - Enter the DSCP value used here.
icmp - (Optional) Specify that the rule applies to ICMP traffic.
type - (Optional) Specify that the rule applies to the value of ICMP type traffic.
<value 0-255> - Enter the ICMP type value here. This value must be between 0 and 255.
code - (Optional) Specify that the rule applies to the value of ICMP code traffic.
<value 0-255> - Enter the ICMP code value here. This value must be between 0 and 255.
igmp - (Optional) Specify that the rule applies to IGMP traffic.
type - (Optional) Specify that the rule applies to the value of IGMP type traffic.
<value 0-255> - Enter the IGMP type value here. This value must be between 0 and 255.
tcp - (Optional) Specify that the rule applies to TCP traffic.
src_port - (Optional) Specify that the rule applies the range of TCP source port.
173
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
<value 0-65535> - Enter the source port value here. This value must be between 0 and 65535.
dst_port - (Optional) Specify the range of TCP destination port range.
<value 0-65535> - Enter the destination port value here. This value must be between 0 and 65535.
flag - (Optional) Specify the TCP flag fields .
all - Specify that the TCP flag field mask will be set to all.
urg - (Optional) Specify that the TCP flag field mask will be set to urg.
ack - (Optional) Specify that the TCP flag field mask will be set to ack.
psh - (Optional) Specify that the TCP flag field mask will be set to psh.
rst - (Optional) Specify that the TCP flag field mask will be set to rst.
syn - (Optional) Specify that the TCP flag field mask will be set to syn.
fin - (Optional) Specify that the TCP flag field mask will be set to fin.
udp - Specify that the rule applies to UDP traffic.
src_port - (Optional) Specify the range of UDP source port range.
<value 0-65535> - Enter the source port value here. This value must be between 0 and 65535.
dst_port - (Optional) Specify the range of UDP destination port mask.
<value 0-65535> - Enter the destination port value here. This value must be between 0 and 65535.
protocol_id - Specify that the rule applies to the value of IP protocol ID traffic.
<value 0-255> - Enter the protocol ID value here. This value must be between 0 and 255.
user_define - (Optional) Specify that the rule applies to the IP protocol ID and the mask options behind the first 4 bytes of the IP payload.
<hex 0x0-0xffffffff> - Enter the user-defined IP protocol ID mask here.
packet_content - Specify the frame content pattern, there are 5 offsets in maximum could be configure. Each offset presents 16 bytes, the range of content of frame is 80 bytes(5 offsets) in the first eighty bytes of frame.
offset_0-15 - (Optional) Specify that the mask pattern offset of the frame will be between 0 and 15.
<hex 0x0-0xffffffff> - Enter the mask pattern offset of the frame between 0 and 15 here.
offset_16-31 - (Optional) Specify that the mask pattern offset of the frame will be between 16 and 31.
<hex 0x0-0xffffffff> - Enter the mask pattern offset of the frame between 16 and 31 here.
offset_32-47 - (Optional) Specify that the mask pattern offset of the frame will be between 32 and 47.
<hex 0x0-0xffffffff> - Enter the mask pattern offset of the frame between 32 and 47 here.
offset_48-63 - (Optional) Specify that the mask pattern offset of the frame will be between 48 and 63.
<hex 0x0-0xffffffff> - Enter the mask pattern offset of the frame between 48 and 63 here.
offset_64-79 - (Optional) Specify that the mask pattern offset of the frame will be between 64 and 79.
<hex 0x0-0xffffffff> - Enter the mask pattern offset of the frame between 64 and 79 here.
ipv6 - Specify the rule applies to IPv6 fields.
class - (Optional) Specify the value of IPv6 class.
<value 0-255> - Enter the IPv6 class value here. This value must be between 0 and 255.
flowlabel - (Optional) Specify the value of IPv6 flowlabel.
<hex 0x0-0xffff> - Enter the IPv6 flowlabel here.
source_ipv6 - (Optional) Specify the value of IPv6 source address.
<ipv6addr> - Enter the IPv6 source address used for this configuration here.
destination_ipv6 - (Optional) Specify the value of IPv6 destination address.
<ipv6addr> - Enter the IPv6 destination address used for this configuration here.
port - Specify the list of ports to be included in this configuration.
<portlist> - Enter a list of ports used for the configuration here.
all - Specify that all the ports will be used for this configuration.
permit - Specify the packets that match the access profile are permit by the Switch.
deny - Specify the packets that match the access profile are filtered by the Switch.
time_range - (Optional) Specify name of this time range entry.
<range_name 32> - Enter the time range here.
delete - Specify to delete a rule from the profile ID entered.
access_id - Specify the index of access list entry. The range of this value is 1-100.
<value 1-100> - Enter the access ID here. This value must be between 1 and 100.
Restrictions
Only Administrators and Operators can issue this command.
Example
To configure CPU access list entry:
174
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config cpu access_profile profile_id 1 add access_id 1 ip vlan default source_ip 20.2.2.3 destination_ip 10.1.1.252 dscp 3 icmp type 11 code 32 port 1 deny
Command: config cpu access_profile profile_id 1 add access_id 1 ip vlan default source_ip
20.2.2.3 destination_ip 10.1.1.252 dscp 3 icmp type 11 code 32 port 1 deny
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
17-4 enable cpu interface filtering
Description
This command is used to enable CPU interface filtering control.
Format enable cpu_interface_filtering
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators and Operators can issue this command.
Example
To enable CPU interface filtering:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#enable cpu_interface_filtering
Command: enable cpu_interface_filtering
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
17-5 disable cpu interface filtering
Description
This command is used to disable CPU interface filtering control.
Format disable cpu_interface_filtering
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators and Operators can issue this command.
175
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Example
To disable CPU interface filtering:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#disable cpu_interface_filtering
Command: disable cpu_interface_filtering
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
17-6 show CPU access_profile
Description
This command is used to display current access list table.
Format show cpu access_profile {profile_id <value 1-5>}
Parameters
profile_id - (Optional) Specify the index of access list profile.
<value 1-5> - Enter the profile ID used here. This value must be between 1 and 5.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display current CPU access list table:
176
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show cpu access_profile
Command: show cpu access_profile
CPU Interface Filtering State: Disabled
CPU Interface Access Profile Table
Total Unused Rule Entries : 500
Total Used Rule Entries : 0
===============================================================================
Profile ID: 1 Type: Ethernet
MASK on
VLAN : 0xFFF
Source MAC : 00-00-00-00-00-01
Destination MAC : 00-00-00-00-00-02
802.1p
Ethernet Type
Unused Rule Entries: 100
===============================================================================
===============================================================================
Profile ID: 2 Type: IPv4
MASK on
VLAN : 0xFFF
Source IP : 20.0.0.0
Dest IP : 10.0.0.0
DSCP
ICMP
Type
Code
Unused Rule Entries: 100
===============================================================================
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
177
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 18 Debug Software Command List
debug error_log [dump | clear | upload_toTFTP {<ipaddr> <path_filename 64>}]
debug buffer [utilization | dump | clear | upload_toTFTP <ipaddr> <path_filename 64>]
debug output [module <module_list> | all] [buffer | console]
debug config error_reboot [enable | disable]
debug config state [enable | disable] debug show error_reboot state
debug show status {module <module_list>}
debug dhcpv6_relay hop_count state [enable | disable]
debug dhcpv6_relay output [buffer | console]
debug dhcpv6_relay packet [all | receiving | sending] state [enable | disable] debug dhcpv6_relay state disable debug dhcpv6_relay state enable
debug dhcpv6_server packet [all | receiving | sending] state [enable | disable] debug dhcpv6_server state disable debug dhcpv6_server state enable
18-1 debug error_log
Description
This command is used to dump, clear or upload the software error log to a TFTP server.
Format debug error_log [dump | clear | upload_toTFTP {<ipaddr> <path_filename 64>}]
Parameters
dump - Displays the debug message of the debug log.
clear - Clears the debug log.
upload_toTFTP - Specify to upload the debug log to a TFTP server specified by IP address.
<ipaddr> - (Optional) Enter the IPv4 address of the TFTP server.
<path_filename 64> - (Optional) Enter the DOS pathname on the TFTP server. It can be a relative pathname or an absolute pathname. This value can be up to 64 characters long.
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To dump the error log:
178
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#debug error_log dump
Command: debug error_log dump
**************************************************************************
# debug log: 1
# level: fatal
# clock: 10000ms
# time : 2009/03/11 13:00:00
====================== SOFTWARE FATAL ERROR =======================
Invalid mutex handle : 806D6480
Current TASK : bcmARL.0
------------------------- TASK STACKTRACE ------------------------
->802ACE98
->8018C814
->8028FF44
->8028352C
->801D703C
->8013B8A4
->802AE754
->802A5E0C
To clear the error log:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#debug error_log clear
Command: debug error_log clear
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To upload the error log to TFTP server:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#debug error_log upload_toTFTP 10.0.0.90 debug-log.txt
Command: debug error_log upload_toTFTP 10.0.0.90 debug-log.txt
Connecting to server................Done.
Upload error log ..................Done.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
18-2 debug buffer
Description
This command is used to show the debug buffer’s state, or dump, clear, or upload the debug buffer to a TFTP server.
Format debug buffer [utilization | dump | clear | upload_toTFTP <ipaddr> <path_filename 64>]
179
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Parameters
utilization - Displays the debug buffer’s state.
dump - Displays the debug message in the debug buffer.
clear - Clears the debug buffer.
upload_toTFTP - Specify to upload the debug buffer to a TFTP server specified by IP address.
<ipaddr> - Enter the IPv4 address of the TFTP server.
<path_filename 64> - Enter the DOS pathname on the TFTP server. It can be a relative pathname or an absolute pathname. This value can be up to 64 characters long.
Restrictions
Only Administrator users can issue this command.
Example
To show the debug buffer’s state:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#debug buffer utilization
Command: debug buffer utilization
Allocate from
Total size
:
:
System memory pool
2 MB
30% Utilization rate :
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To clear the debug buffer:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#debug buffer clear
Command: debug buffer clear
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To upload the messages stored in debug buffer to TFTP server:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#debug buffer upload_toTFTP 10.0.0.90 debugcontent.txt
Command: debug buffer upload_toTFTP 10.0.0.90 debugcontent.txt
Connecting to server................... Done.
Upload debug file ................... Done.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
18-3 debug output
Description
This command is used to set a specified module’s debug message output to debug buffer or local console. If the user uses the command in a Telnet session, the error message also is output to the local console.
Format debug output [module <module_list> | all] [buffer | console]
180
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Parameters
module - Specify the module list.
<module_list> - Enter the module list here.
all - Controls output method of all modules.
buffer - Directs the debug message of the module output to debug buffer. This is the default.
console - Directs the debug message of the module output to local console.
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To set all module debug message outputs to local console:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#debug output all console
Command: debug output all console
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
18-4 debug config error_reboot
Description
This command is used to set if the Switch needs to be rebooted when a fatal error occurs. When the error occurs, the watchdog timer will be disabled by the system first, and then all debug information will be saved in NVRAM. If the error_reboot is enabled, the watchdog shall be enabled after all information is stored into NVRAM.
Format debug config error_reboot [enable | disable]
Parameters
enable - If enabled, the Switch will reboot when a fatal error happens.
disable - If disabled the Switch will not reboot when a fatal error happens, system will hang-up for debug and enter the debug shell mode for debug.
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To set the Switch to not need a reboot when a fatal error occurs:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#debug config error_reboot disable
Command: debug config error_reboot disable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
181
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
18-5 debug config state
Description
This command is used to set the state of the debug.
Format debug config state [enable | disable]
Parameters
enable - Enables the debug state.
disable - Disables the debug state.
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To set the debug state to disabled:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#debug config state disable
Command: debug config state disable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
18-6 debug show error_reboot state
Description
This command is used to display debug error reboot state.
Format debug show error_reboot state
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To show the debug error reboot state:
182
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#debug show error_reboot state
Command: debug show error_reboot state
Error Reboot: Enabled
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
18-7 debug show status
Description
This command is used to display the specified module’s debug status.
Format debug show status {module <module_list>}
Parameters
module - (Optional) Specify the module to be displayed.
<module_list> - Enter the module to be displayed.
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To show the specified module’s debug state:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#debug show status module MSTP
Command: debug show status module MSTP
Debug Global State : Enabled
MSTP : Disabled
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To show the debug state:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#debug show status
Command: debug show status
Debug Global State : Enabled
MSTP : Disabled
IMPB : Disabled
DHCPv6_RELAY : Disabled
DHCPv6_SERVER : Disabled
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
183
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
18-8 debug dhcpv6_relay hop_count state
Description
This command is used to enable or disable debug information flag about the hop count.
Format debug dhcpv6_relay hop_count state [enable | disable]
Parameters
enable - Specify that the hop count state will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the hop count state will be disabled.
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To enable debug information flag about the hop count:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# debug dhcpv6_relay hop_count state enable
Command: debug dhcpv6_relay hop_count state enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
18-9 debug dhcpv6_relay output
Description
This command is used to set debug message to output to buffer or console.
Format debug dhcpv6_relay output [buffer | console]
Parameters
buffer - Let the debug message output to buffer.
console - Let the debug message output to console.
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To set debug information to output to console:
184
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# debug dhcpv6_relay output console
Command: debug dhcpv6_relay output console
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
18-10 debug dhcpv6_relay packet
Description
This command is used to enable or disable debug information flag for DHCPv6 relay packet, including packet receiving and sending.
Format debug dhcpv6_relay packet [all | receiving | sending] state [enable | disable]
Parameters
all - Set packet receiving and sending debug flags.
receiving - Set packet receiving debug flag.
sending - Set packet sending debug flag.
state - Specify if the designated flags function will be enabled or disabled.
enable - Enable the designated flags.
disable - Disable the designated flags.
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To enabled DHCPv6 relay packet sending debug:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# debug dhcpv6_relay packet sending state enable
Command: debug dhcpv6_relay packet sending state enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
18-11 debug dhcpv6_relay state disable
Description
This command is used to disable the DHCPv6 relay Debug function.
Format debug dhcpv6_relay state disable
Parameters
None.
185
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To disabled DHCPv6 relay debug function:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# debug dhcpv6_relay state disable
Command: debug dhcpv6_relay state disable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
18-12 debug dhcpv6_relay state enable
Description
This command is used to enable the DHCPv6 relay Debug function.
Format debug dhcpv6_relay state enable
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To enabled DHCPv6 relay debug function:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# debug dhcpv6_relay state enable
Command: debug dhcpv6_relay state enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
18-13 debug dhcpv6_server packet
Description
This command is used to enable or disable the debug information flag of the DHCPv6 server packet, including packets receiving and sending.
Format debug dhcpv6_server packet [all | receiving | sending] state [enable | disable]
186
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Parameters
all - Set packet receiving and sending debug flags.
receiving - Set packet receiving debug flag.
sending - Set packet sending debug flag.
state - Specify the state of the designated flags.
enable - Enable the designated flags.
disable - Disable the designated flags.
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To enabled the DHCPv6 server packet sending debug:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# debug dhcpv6_server packet sending state enable
Command: debug dhcpv6_server packet sending state enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
18-14 debug dhcpv6_server state disable
Description
This command is used to disable the DHCPv6 server debug function.
Format debug dhcpv6_server state disable
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To disabled the DHCPv6 server debug function:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# debug dhcpv6_server state disable
Command: debug dhcpv6_server state disable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
187
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
18-15 debug dhcpv6_server state enable
Description
This command is used to enable the DHCPv6 server debug function.
Format debug dhcpv6_server state enable
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To enabled the DHCPv6 server debug function:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# debug dhcpv6_server state enable
Command: debug dhcpv6_server state enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
188
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 19 DHCP Local Relay Command List
config dhcp_local_relay vlan <vlan_name 32> state [enable | disable]
config dhcp_local_relay vlan vlanid <vlan_id> state [enable | disable]
config dhcp_local_relay option_82 circuit_id [default | vendor1 | vendor6]
config dhcp_local_relay option_82 ports <portlist> policy [replace | drop | keep]
config dhcp_local_relay option_82 remote_id [default | user_define <desc 32>] enable dhcp_local_relay disable dhcp_local_relay show dhcp_local_relay
show dhcp_local_relay option_82 ports {<portlist>}
19-1 config dhcp_local_relay vlan
Description
This command is used to enable or disable DHCP local relay function for specified VLAN name.
When DHCP local relay is enabled for the VLAN, the DHCP packet will be relayed in broadcast way without change of the source MAC address and gateway address. DHCP option 82 will be automatically added.
Format config dhcp_local_relay vlan <vlan_name 32> state [enable | disable]
Parameters
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the VLAN name. This name can be up to 32 characters long.
state - Enables or disables DHCP local relay for specified vlan.
enable - Specify to enable the DHCP local relay function.
disable - Specify to disable the DHCP local relay function.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To enable DHCP local relay for default VLAN:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config dhcp_local_relay vlan default state enable
Command: config dhcp_local_relay vlan default state enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
19-2 config dhcp_local_relay vlan vlanid
Description
This command is used to enable or disable DHCP local relay function for specified VLAN ID.
189
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Format config dhcp_local_relay vlan vlanid <vlan_id> state [enable | disable]
Parameters
vlanid - Specify the VLAN ID.
<vlan_id> - Enter the VLAN ID used here.
state - Enables or disables DHCP local relay for specified vlan.
enable - Specify that the DHCP local relay function will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the DHCP local relay function will be disabled.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To enable DHCP local relay for default VLAN:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config dhcp_local_relay vlan vlanid 1 state enable
Command: config dhcp_local_relay vlan vlanid 1 state enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
19-3 config dhcp_local_relay option_82 circuit_id
Description
This command is used to configure the circuit id of DHCP relay agent information option 82 of the switch.
Format config dhcp_local_relay option_82 circuit_id [default | vendor1 | vendor6]
Parameters
default - - If configured to default, the circuit ID use the original format: a. b. c. d. e.
1
1 byte
0x6
1 byte
0
1 byte a. Sub-option type (1 means circuit ID)
4
1 byte
VLAN
2 bytes f.
Module ID
1 byte g.
Port ID
1 byte b. Length, it should be 6. c. Circuit ID’s sub-option, it should be 0. d. Sub-option’s length, it should be 4 e. VLAN ID (S-VID) f. Module ID, for standalone switch, it is 0; for stacking switch, it is the box ID that assigned by stacking. g. Port ID: port number of each box.
vendor1 - If configured to vendor1, the circuit ID uses the following format to communicate with Alcatel-Lucent’s server: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j.
1 0x10 0 6 VLAN Slot ID Port ID 1 6 MAC
1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes 1 byte 1 byte 6 bytes a. Sub-option type (1 means circuit ID). b. Length. c. Circuit ID’s sub-option’s first tag, it should be 0. d. First tag’s length, it should be 6.
190
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide e. VLAN ID. f. Slot ID, for standalone switch, it is 1; for stacking switch, it is the box ID that assigned by stacking. g. Port ID: port number of each box. h. Circuit ID’s sub-option’s second tag, it should be 1. i. Second tag’s length, it should be 6. j. MAC address: System’s MAC address.
vendor6 - If configured to vendor6, the circuit ID uses the following:
F01 F02 F03 F04 F05
1 Length E
(0x45) t
(0x74) h
(0x68)
1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte
F09 e
(0x45)
1 byte
F10 t
(0x74)
1 byte
F11
Chassis
ID
F12
/
(0x2F)
1-2 bytes 1 byte
F13
0
(0x30)
1 byte
F06 e
(0x65)
1 byte
F14
/
(0x2F)
1 byte
F07 r
(0x72)
1 byte
F15
Port number
F08 n
(0x6E)
1 byte
F16
:
(0x3A)
1-2 bytes 1 byte
F17 cvlan
F18
.
(0x2E)
1-4 bytes 1 byte
F19
0
(0x30)
1 byte
F20
Space
(0x20)
1 byte
F21
System
Name
1-128 bytes
F22
/
(0x2F)
1 byte
F23
0
(0x30)
1 byte
F24
/
(0x2F)
1 byte
F25
0
(0x30)
1 byte
F26
/
(0x2F)
1 byte
F27
Chassis
ID
F28
/
(0x2F)
1-2 bytes 1 byte
F01: Sub-option type (1 means circuit ID).
F02: Length.
F03: Character ‘E’.
F04: Character ‘t’.
F29
0
(0x30)
1 byte
F30
/
(0x2F)
1 byte
F31
Port number
1-2 bytes
F05: Character ‘h’.
F06: Character ‘e’.
F07: Character ‘r’.
F08: Character ‘n’.
F09: Character ‘e’.
F10: Character ‘t’.
F11: Chassis ID. The number of the chassis. For stand-alone devices, the chassis ID will always be 1.
For stacked devices, the chassis ID will be the unit ID.
F12: Slash (/).
F13: ASCII format string ‘0’.
F14: Slash (/).
F15: Port number. The incoming port number DHCP client packets. ASCII format string.
F16: Colon (:)
F17: ‘cvlan’ is the client’s VLAN ID. The value ranges from 1 to 4094. ASCII format string.
F18: Dot (.).
F19: ASCII format string ‘0’.
F20: Space.
F21: System name of the Switch. NOTE: If the System name exceeds 128 bytes, it will only use the first
128 bytes.
F22: Slash (/).
F23: ASCII format string ‘0’.
F24: Slash (/).
F25: ASCII format string ‘0’.
F26: Slash (/).
F27: Chassis ID. This value is the same as F11.
F28: Slash (/).
F29: ASCII format string ‘0’.
F30: Slash (/).
F31: Port number. The incoming port number of DHCP client packets. ASCII format string.
191
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure the circuit id of DHCP relay agent as default:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config dhcp_local_relay option_82 circuit_id default
Command: config dhcp_local_relay option_82 circuit_id default
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
19-4 config dhcp_local_relay option_82 ports
Description
This command is used to configure the settings of the specified ports for the policy of the option 82.
Format config dhcp_local_relay option_82 ports <portlist> policy [replace | drop | keep]
Parameters
<portlist> - Enter a list of ports to be configured.
policy - Specify how to process the packets coming from the client side which have the option 82 field.
replace - Specify to replace the existing option 82 field in the packet.
drop - Specify to discard if the packet has the option 82 field.
keep - Specify to retain the existing option 82 field in the packet.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure port 1 to 5 for the policy of the option 82:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config dhcp_local_relay option_82 ports 1-5 policy keep
Command: config dhcp_local_relay option_82 ports 1-5 policy keep
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
19-5 config dhcp_local_relay option_82 remote_id
Description
This command is used to configure the remote ID.
Format config dhcp_local_relay option_82 remote_id [default | user_define <desc 32>]
192
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Parameters
default - Uses the Switch’s system MAC address as the remote ID.
user_define - Uses user-defined string as the remote ID.
<desc 32> - Enter the maximum of 32 characters. Space is allowed in the string.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure the remote ID:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config dhcp_local_relay option_82 remote_id user_define D-Link L2Switch
Command: config dhcp_local_relay option_82 remote_id user_define D-Link L2Switch
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
19-6 enable dhcp_local_relay
Description
This command is used to globally enable the DHCP local relay function on the Switch.
Format enable dhcp_local_relay
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To enable the DHCP local relay function:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#enable dhcp_local_relay
Command: enable dhcp_local_relay
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
19-7 disable dhcp_local_relay
Description
This command is used to globally disable the DHCP local relay function on the Switch.
193
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Format disable dhcp_local_relay
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To disable the DHCP local relay function:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#disable dhcp_local_relay
Command: disable dhcp_local_relay
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
19-8 show dhcp_local_relay
Description
This command is used to display the current DHCP local relay configuration.
Format show dhcp_local_relay
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display local DHCP relay status:
194
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show dhcp_local_relay
Command: show dhcp_local_relay
DHCP/BOOTP Local Relay Status : Disabled
DHCP/BOOTP Local Relay VID List : 1
DHCP Relay Agent Information Option 82 Circuit ID : Default
DHCP Relay Agent Information Option 82 Remote ID : D-Link L2Switch
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
19-9 show dhcp_local_relay option_82 ports
Description
This command is used to display the current DHCP local relay option 82 configuration of each port.
Format show dhcp_local_relay option_82 ports {<portlist>}
Parameters
<portlist> - (Optional) Enter a list of ports to be displayed.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display DHCP local relay option 82 configuration of port 1 to 5:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show dhcp_local_relay option_82 ports 1-5
Command: show dhcp_local_relay option_82 ports 1-5
Port Option 82
Policy
---- ---------
1 keep
2 keep
3 keep
4 keep
5 keep
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
195
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 20 DHCP Relay Command List
config dhcp_relay {hops <int 1-16> | time <sec 0-65535>}
config dhcp_relay add ipif <ipif_name 12> <ipaddr>
config dhcp_relay add vlanid <vlan_id_list> <ipaddr>
config dhcp_relay delete ipif <ipif_name 12> <ipaddr>
config dhcp_relay delete vlanid <vlan_id_list> <ipaddr>
config dhcp_relay option_82 {state [enable | disable] | check [enable | disable] | policy [replace | drop | keep] | remote_id [default | user_define <desc 32>]}
config dhcp_relay option_82 circuit_id [default | vendor1 | vendor6] enable dhcp_relay disable dhcp_relay
show dhcp_relay {ipif <ipif_name 12>}
config dhcp_relay option_60 state [enable | disable]
config dhcp_relay option_60 add string <multiword 255> relay <ipaddr> [exact-match | partial-match]
config dhcp_relay option_60 default [relay <ipaddr> | mode [relay | drop]]
config dhcp_relay option_60 delete [string <multiword 255> {relay <ipaddr>} | ipaddress <ipaddr> | all | default
{<ipaddr>}]
show dhcp_relay option_60 {[string <multiword 255> | ipaddress <ipaddr> | default]}
config dhcp_relay option_61 state [enable | disable]
config dhcp_relay option_61 add [mac_address <macaddr> | string <multiword 255>] [relay <ipaddr> | drop]
config dhcp_relay option_61 default [relay <ipaddr> | drop]
config dhcp_relay option_61 delete [mac_address <macaddr> | string <multiword 255> | all] show dhcp_relay option_61
config dhcp_relay ports [<portlist> | all] state [enable | disable]
show dhcp_relay ports {<portlist>}
config dhcp_relay option_125 add enterprise_number <int> [string <multiword 255> | hex <string 255>] relay
<ipaddr> [exact-match | partial-match]
config dhcp_relay option_125 default [relay <ipaddr> | mode [relay | drop]]
config dhcp_relay option_125 delete [enterprise_number <int> {[string <multiword 255> | hex <string 255>]}
{relay <ipaddr>} | [string <multiword 255> | hex <string 255>] {relay <ipaddr>} | ipaddress <ipaddr> | all | default {<ipaddr>}]
config dhcp_relay option_125 state [enable|disable]
show dhcp_relay option_125 {[enterprise_number <int> | [string <multiword 255> | hex <string 255>] | ipaddress
<ipaddr> | default]}
20-1 config dhcp_relay
Description
This command is used to configure the DHCP relay feature of the Switch.
Format config dhcp_relay {hops <int 1-16> | time <sec 0-65535>}
Parameters
hops - (Optional) Specify the maximum number of relay hops that the DHCP/BOOTP packets can cross. The range is 1 to 16. The default value is 4. The DHCP packet will be dropped when the relay hop count in the received packet is equal to or greater than this setting.
<int 1-16> - Enter the maximum number of relay hops here. This value must be between 1 and 16.
time - (Optional) The time field in the DHCP packet must be equal to or greater than this setting to be relayed by the router. The default value is 0.
196
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
<sec 0-65535> - Enter the relay time here. This value must be between 0 and 65535 seconds.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure the DHCP relay hops and time parameters:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config dhcp_relay hops 4 time 2
Command: config dhcp_relay hops 4 time 2
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
20-2 config dhcp_relay add ipif
Description
This command is used to add an IP destination address of the DHCP server for relay of DHCP/BOOTP packets.
Format config dhcp_relay add ipif <ipif_name 12> <ipaddr>
Parameters
ipif_name - The name of the IP interface which contains the IP address below.
<ipif_name 12> - Enter the IP interface name used here. This name can be up to 12 characters long.
<ipaddr> - The DHCP/BOOTP server IP address.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To add a DHCP/BOOTP server to the relay table:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config dhcp_relay add ipif System 10.43.21.12
Command: config dhcp_relay add ipif System 10.43.21.12
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
20-3 config dhcp_relay add vlanid
Description
This command is used to add an IP address as a destination to forward (relay) DHCP/BOOTP packets. If there is an IP interface in the VLAN and it has configured a DHCP server at the interface level, then the configuration at the interface level has higher priority. In this case, the DHCP server configured on the VLAN will not be used to forward the DHCP packets.
197
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Format config dhcp_relay add vlanid <vlan_id_list> <ipaddr>
Parameters
vlanid - Specify the VLAN ID list used for this configuration.
<vlan_id_list> - Enter the VLAN ID list used for this configuration here.
<ipaddr> - Enter the DHCP/BOOTP server IP address used here.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To add a DHCP/BOOTP server 10.43.21.12 to VLAN 1 to 10:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config dhcp_relay add vlanid 1-10 10.43.21.12
Command: config dhcp_relay add vlanid 1-10 10.43.21.12
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
20-4 config dhcp_relay delete ipif
Description
This command is used to delete one of the IP destination addresses in the Switch’s relay table.
Format config dhcp_relay delete ipif <ipif_name 12> <ipaddr>
Parameters
ipif - The name of the IP interface which contains the IP address below.
<ipif_name 12> - Enter the IP interface name used here. This name can be up to 12 characters long.
<ipaddr> - The DHCP/BOOTP server IP address.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To delete a DHCP/BOOTP server to the relay table:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config dhcp_relay delete ipif System 10.43.21.12
Command: config dhcp_relay delete ipif System 10.43.21.12
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
198
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
20-5 config dhcp_relay delete vlanid
Description
This command is used to delete an IP address as a destination to forward (relay) DHCP/BOOTP packets.
Format config dhcp_relay delete vlanid <vlan_id_list> <ipaddr>
Parameters
vlanid - Specify the VLAN ID list used for this configuration.
<vlan_id_list> - Enter the VLAN ID list used for this configuration here.
<ipaddr> - Enter the DHCP/BOOTP server IP address used here.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To delete a DHCP/BOOTP server 10.43.21.12 from VLAN 2 and VLAN 3:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config dhcp_relay delete vlanid 2-3 10.43.21.12
Command: config dhcp_relay delete vlanid 2-3 10.43.21.12
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
20-6 config dhcp_relay option_82
Description
This command is used to configure the processing of DHCP option 82 for the DHCP relay function.
Format config dhcp_relay option_82 {state [enable | disable] | check [enable | disable] | policy [replace | drop | keep] | remote_id [default | user_define <desc 32>]}
Parameters
state - (Optional) Specify that the DHCP relay option 82 state will be enabled or disabled.
enable - Specify that the option 82 processing will be enabled. When the state is enabled, the DHCP packet will be inserted with the option 82 field before being relayed to server. The DHCP packet will be processed based on the behavior defined in check and policy setting.
disable - Specify that the option 82 processing will be disabled. When the state is disabled, the DHCP packet will be relayed directly to server without further check and processing on the packet. The default setting is disabled.
check - (Optional) When the state is enabled, For packet come from client side, the packet should not have the option 82’s field. If the packet has this option field, it will be dropped. The default setting is disabled.
enable - Specify that checking will be enabled.
disable - Specify that checking will be disabled.
policy - (Optional) Specify the policy used. This option takes effect only when the check status is disabled. The default setting is set to ‘replace’.
replace - Specify to replace the existing option 82 field in the packet. The Switch will use its own option 82
199
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide value to replace the old option 82 value in the packet.
drop - Specify to discard if the packet has the option 82 field. If the packet, that comes from the client side, contains an option 82 value, then the packet will be dropped. If the packet from the client side does not contain an option 82 value, its own option 82 value will be inserted into the packet.
keep - Specify to retain the existing option 82 field in the packet. If the packet from the client side contains an option 82 value, the old option 82 value will be kept. If the packet from the client side does not contain an option 82 value, its own option 82 value will be inserted into the packet.
remote_id - (Optional) Specify the content in Remote ID suboption.
default - Uses switch’s system MAC address as remote ID.
user_define - Uses user-defined string as remote ID. The space character is allowed in the string.
<desc 32> - Enter the user defined description here. This value can be up to 32 characters long.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure DHCP relay option 82:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config dhcp_relay option_82 state enable
Command: config dhcp_relay option_82 state enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config dhcp_relay option_82 check disable
Command: config dhcp_relay option_82 check disable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config dhcp_relay option_82 policy replace
Command: config dhcp_relay option_82 policy replace
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config dhcp_relay option_82 remote_id user_define “D-Link L2 Switch”
Command: config dhcp_relay option_82 remote_id user_define "D-Link L2 Switch"
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
20-7 config dhcp_relay option_82 circuit_id
Description
This command is used to configure the circuit id of DHCP relay agent information option 82 of the Switch.
Format config dhcp_relay option_82 circuit_id [default | vendor1 | vendor6]
Parameters
default - If configured to default, the circuit ID use the original format: a. b. c. d.
1
1 byte
0x6
1 byte
0
1 byte
4
1 byte e.
VLAN
2 bytes f. g.
Module ID Port ID
1 byte 1 byte
200
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide a. Sub-option type (1 means circuit ID) b. Length, it should be 6. c. Circuit ID’s sub-option, it should be 0. d. Sub-option’s length, it should be 4. e. VLAN ID (S-VID). f. Module ID, for standalone switch, it is 0; for stacking switch, it is the box ID that assigned by stacking. g. Port ID: port number of each box.
vendor1 - If configured to vendor1, the circuit ID uses the following format to communicate with Alcatel-Lucent’s server: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j.
1 0x10 0 6 VLAN Slot ID Port ID 1 6 MAC
1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes 1 byte 1 byte 6 bytes a. Sub-option type (1 means circuit ID). b. Length. c. Circuit ID’s sub-option’s first tag, it should be 0. d. First tag’s length, it should be 6. e. VLAN ID. f. Slot ID, for standalone switch, it is 1; for stacking switch, it is the box ID that assigned by stacking. g. Port ID: port number of each box. h. Circuit ID’s sub-option’s second tag, it should be 1. i. Second tag’s length, it should be 6. j. MAC address: System’s MAC address.
vendor6 - If configured to vendor6, the circuit ID uses the following:
F01 F02 F03 F04 F05
1 Length E
(0x45) t
(0x74) h
(0x68)
1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte
F06 e
(0x65)
1 byte
F07 r
(0x72)
1 byte
F08 n
(0x6E)
1 byte
F09 e
(0x45)
1 byte
F10 t
(0x74)
1 byte
F11
Chassis
ID
F12
/
(0x2F)
1-2 bytes 1 byte
F13
0
(0x30)
1 byte
F14
/
(0x2F)
1 byte
F15
Port number
F16
:
(0x3A)
1-2 bytes 1 byte
F17 cvlan
F18
.
(0x2E)
1-4 bytes 1 byte
F19
0
(0x30)
1 byte
F20
Space
(0x20)
1 byte
F21
System
Name
1-128 bytes
F22
/
(0x2F)
1 byte
F23
0
(0x30)
1 byte
F24
/
(0x2F)
1 byte
F25
0
(0x30)
1 byte
F26
/
(0x2F)
1 byte
F27
Chassis
ID
F28
/
(0x2F)
1-2 bytes 1 byte
F01: Sub-option type (1 means circuit ID).
F02: Length.
F03: Character ‘E’.
F04: Character ‘t’.
F29
0
(0x30)
1 byte
F30
/
(0x2F)
1 byte
F31
Port number
1-2 bytes
F05: Character ‘h’.
F06: Character ‘e’.
F07: Character ‘r’.
F08: Character ‘n’.
F09: Character ‘e’.
F10: Character ‘t’.
F11: Chassis ID. The number of the chassis. For stand-alone devices, the chassis ID will always be 1.
For stacked devices, the chassis ID will be the unit ID.
F12: Slash (/).
F13: ASCII format string ‘0’.
F14: Slash (/).
F15: Port number. The incoming port number DHCP client packets. ASCII format string.
F16: Colon (:)
F17: ‘cvlan’ is the client’s VLAN ID. The value ranges from 1 to 4094. ASCII format string.
F18: Dot (.).
F19: ASCII format string ‘0’.
201
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
F20: Space.
F21: System name of the Switch. NOTE: If the System name exceeds 128 bytes, it will only use the first
128 bytes.
F22: Slash (/).
F23: ASCII format string ‘0’.
F24: Slash (/).
F25: ASCII format string ‘0’.
F26: Slash (/).
F27: Chassis ID. This value is the same as F11.
F28: Slash (/).
F29: ASCII format string ‘0’.
F30: Slash (/).
F31: Port number. The incoming port number of DHCP client packets. ASCII format string.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure the circuit ID as default:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config dhcp_relay option_82 circuit_id default
Command: config dhcp_relay option_82 circuit_id default
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
20-8 enable dhcp_relay
Description
This command is used to enable the DHCP relay function on the Switch.
Format enable dhcp_relay
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To enable the DHCP relay function.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#enable dhcp_relay
Command: enable dhcp_relay
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
202
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
20-9 disable dhcp_relay
Description
This command is used to disable the DHCP relay function on the Switch.
Format disable dhcp_relay
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To disable the DHCP relay function:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#disable dhcp_relay
Command: disable dhcp_relay
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
20-10 show dhcp_relay
Description
This command is used to display the current DHCP relay configuration.
Format show dhcp_relay {ipif <ipif_name 12>}
Parameters
ipif - (Optional) Specify the IP interface name.
<ipif_name 12> - Enter the IP interface name used here. This name can be up to 12 characters long.
If no parameter is specified , the system will display all DHCP relay configuration.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display all DHCP relay configuration:
203
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show dhcp_relay
Command: show dhcp_relay
DHCP/BOOTP Relay Status : Disabled
DHCP/BOOTP Hops Count Limit : 4
DHCP/BOOTP Relay Time Threshold : 2
DHCP Vendor Class Identifier Option 60 State: Disabled
DHCP Client Identifier Option 61 State: Disabled
DHCP Vendor-Specific Information Option 125 State: Disabled
DHCP Relay Agent Information Option 82 State : Disabled
DHCP Relay Agent Information Option 82 Check : Disabled
DHCP Relay Agent Information Option 82 Policy : Replace
DHCP Relay Agent Information Option 82 Circuit ID : Default
DHCP Relay Agent Information Option 82 Remote ID : F0-7D-68-30-00-10
Interface Server 1 Server 2 Server 3 Server 4
------------ --------------- --------------- --------------- ---------------
System 10.43.21.12
Server VLAN ID List
--------------- -----------------------------------------------------------
10.43.21.12 1-10
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To display DHCP relay configuration of the interface, System:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show dhcp_relay ipif System
Command: show dhcp_relay ipif System
DHCP/BOOTP Relay Status : Disabled
DHCP/BOOTP Hops Count Limit : 4
DHCP/BOOTP Relay Time Threshold : 2
DHCP Vendor Class Identifier Option 60 State: Disabled
DHCP Client Identifier Option 61 State: Disabled
DHCP Vendor-Specific Information Option 125 State: Disabled
DHCP Relay Agent Information Option 82 State : Disabled
DHCP Relay Agent Information Option 82 Check : Disabled
DHCP Relay Agent Information Option 82 Policy : Replace
DHCP Relay Agent Information Option 82 Circuit ID : Default
DHCP Relay Agent Information Option 82 Remote ID : F0-7D-68-30-00-10
Interface Server 1 Server 2 Server 3 Server 4
------------ --------------- --------------- --------------- ---------------
System 10.43.21.12
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
20-11 config dhcp_relay option_60 state
Description
This command is used to decide whether DHCP relay will process the DHCP option 60 or not.
204
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
When option_60 is enabled, if the packet does not have option 60, then the relay servers cannot be determined based on option 60. The relay servers will be determined based on either option 61 or per IPIF configured servers.
If the relay servers are determined based on option 60 or option 61, then per IPIF configured servers will be ignored.
If the relay servers are not determined either by option 60 or option 61, then per IPIF configured servers will be used to determine the relay servers.
Format config dhcp_relay option_60 state [enable | disable]
Parameters
state - Specify that the DHCP relay function should use the option 60 rule to relay the DHCP packets.
enable - Specify that the option 60 rule will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the option 60 rule will be disabled.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure the state of dhcp_relay option 60:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config dhcp_relay option_60 state enable
Command: config dhcp_relay option_60 state enable
Success
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
20-12 config dhcp_relay option_60 add string
Description
This command is used to configure the option 60 relay rules. Note that different string can be specified with the same relay server, and the same string can be specified with multiple relay servers.
The system will relay the packet to all the matching servers.
Format config dhcp_relay option_60 add string <multiword 255> relay <ipaddr> [exact-match | partial-match]
Parameters
<multiword 255> - Enter the string value here. This value can be up to 255 characters long.
relay - Specify a relay server IP address.
<ipaddr> - Enter the IP address used for this configuration here.
exact-match - The option 60 string in the packet must full match with the specified string.
partial-match - The option 60 string in the packet only need partial match with the specified string.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
205
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Example
To configure the DHCP relay option 60 option:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config dhcp_relay option_60 add string "abc" relay 10.90.90.1 exact-match
Command: config dhcp_relay option_60 add string "abc" relay 10.90.90.1 exact-match
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
20-13 config dhcp_relay option_60 default
Description
This command is used to configure the DHCP relay option 60 default drop option.
When there are no match servers found for the packet based on option 60, the relay servers will be determined by the default relay server setting.
When there is no matching found for the packet, the relay servers will be determined based on the default relay servers.
When drop is specified, the packet with no matching rules found will be dropped without further process.
If the setting is no- drop, then the packet will be processed further based on option 61. The final relay servers will be the union of option 60 default relay servers and the relay servers determined by option 61.
Format config dhcp_relay option_60 default [relay <ipaddr> | mode [relay | drop]]
Parameters
relay - Specify the IP address used for the DHCP relay forward function.
<ipaddr> - Enter the IP address used for this configuration here.
mode - Specify the DHCP relay option 60 mode.
relay - Specify to relay the packet based on the relay rules.
drop - Specify to drop the packet that has no matching option 60 rules.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure the DHCP relay option 60 default drop option:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config dhcp_relay option_60 default mode drop
Command: config dhcp_relay option_60 default mode drop
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
20-14 config dhcp_relay option_60 delete
Description
This command is used to delete DHCP relay option 60 entry.
206
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Format config dhcp_relay option_60 delete [string <multiword 255> {relay <ipaddr>} | ipaddress <ipaddr> | all | default {<ipaddr>}]
Parameters
string - Deletes all the entries, of which the string is equal to the specified string, if the IP address is not specified.
<multiword 255> - Enter the DHCP option 60 string to be removed here. This value can be up to 255 characters long.
relay - (Optional) Deletes one entry, of which the string and the IP address are equal to the string and IP address specified by the user.
<ipaddr> - Enter the IP address used for this configuration here.
ipaddress - Deletes all the entry of which the IP address is equal to the specified IP address.
<ipaddr> - Enter the IP address used for this configuration here.
all - Deletes all the entry. Default relay servers are excluded.
default - Deletes the default relay IP address that is specified by the user.
<ipaddr> - (Optional) Enter the IP address used for this configuration here.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To delete the DHCP relay option 60 string called ‘abc’:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config dhcp_relay option_60 delete string "abc" relay 10.90.90.1
Command: config dhcp_relay option_60 delete string "abc" relay 10.90.90.1
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
20-15 show dhcp_relay option_60
Description
This command is used to show DHCP relay Option 60 entry specified by the user.
Format show dhcp_relay option_60 {[string <multiword 255> | ipaddress <ipaddr> | default]}
Parameters
string - (Optional) Displays the DHCP relay Option 60 string specified by the user.
<multiword 255> - Enter the entry's string value here. This value can be up to 255 characters long.
ipadddress - (Optional) Displays the IP address specified by the user.
<ipaddr> - Enter the IP address here.
default - (Optional) Displays the default DHCP relay Option 60 information.
If no parameter is specified then all the DHCP option 60 entries will be displayed.
Restrictions
None.
207
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Example
To show DHCP option 60 information:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show dhcp_relay option_60
Command: show dhcp_relay option_60
Default Processing Mode: Drop
Default Servers:
Matching Rules:
String Match Type IP Address
------- --------- --------- abc Exact Match 10.90.90.1
Total Entries : 1
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
20-16 config dhcp_relay option_61 state
Description
This command is used to decide whether the DHCP relay will process the DHCP option 61 or not.
When option 61 is enabled, if the packet does not have option 61, then the relay servers cannot be determined based on option 61.
If the relay servers are determined based on option 60 or option 61, then per IPIF configured servers will be ignored.
If the relay servers are not determined either by option 60 or option 61, then per IPIF configured servers will be used to determine the relay servers.
Format config dhcp_relay option_61 state [enable | disable]
Parameters
enable - Enables the function DHCP relay use option 61 ruler to relay DHCP packet.
disable - Disables the function DHCP relay use option 61 ruler to relay DHCP packet.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure the state of dhcp_relay option 61:
208
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config dhcp_relay option_61 state enable
Command: config dhcp_relay option_61 state enable
Success
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
20-17 config dhcp_relay option_61 add
Description
This command is used to add a rule to determine the relay server based on option 61. The match rule can base on either MAC address or a user-specified string. Only one relay server can be specified for a MAC-address or a string.
If relay servers are determined based on option 60, and one relay server is determined based on option 61, the final relay servers will be the union of these two sets of the servers.
Format config dhcp_relay option_61 add [mac_address <macaddr> | string <multiword 255>] [relay <ipaddr> | drop]
Parameters
mac_address - The client’s client-ID which is the hardware address of client.
<macaddr> - Enter the client's MAC address here.
string - The client’s client-ID, which is specified by administrator.
<multiword 255> - Enter the client's description here. This value can be up to 255 characters long.
relay - Specify to relay the packet to a IP address.
<ipaddr> - Enter the IP address used for this configuration here.
drop - Specify to drop the packet.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure the DHCP relay option 61 function:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config dhcp_relay option_61 add mac_address 00-11-22-33-44-55 drop
Command: config dhcp_relay option_61 add mac_address 00-11-22-33-44-55 drop
Success
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
20-18 config dhcp_relay option_61 default
Description
This command is used to configure the default ruler for option 61.
Format config dhcp_relay option_61 default [relay <ipaddr> | drop]
209
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Parameters
relay - Specify to relay the packet that has no option matching 61 matching rules to an IP address.
<ipaddr> - Enter the IP address used for this configuration here.
drop - Specify to drop the packet that have no option 61 matching rules.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure the DHCP relay option 61 function:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config dhcp_relay option_61 default drop
Command: config dhcp_relay option_61 default drop
Success
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
20-19 config dhcp_relay option_61 delete
Description
This command is used to delete an option 61 rule.
Format config dhcp_relay option_61 delete [mac_address <macaddr> | string <multiword 255> | all]
Parameters
mac_address - The entry with the specified MAC address will be deleted.
<macaddr> - Enter the MAC address here.
string - The entry with the specified string will be deleted.
<multiword 255> - Enter the string value here. This value can be up to 255 characters long.
all - All rules excluding the default rule will be deleted.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To remove a DHCP relay option 61 entry:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config dhcp_relay option_61 delete mac_address 00-11-22-33-44-55
Command: config dhcp_relay option_61 delete mac_address 00-11-22-33-44-55
Success
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
210
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
20-20 show dhcp_relay option_61
Description
This command is used to show all rulers for option 61.
Format show dhcp_relay option_61
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display DHCP relay rulers for option 61:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show dhcp_relay option_61
Command: show dhcp_relay option_61
Default Relay Rule:Drop
Matching Rules:
Client-ID Type Relay Rule
----------- ---- ---------
00-11-22-33-44-55 MAC Address Drop
Total Entries : 1
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
20-21 config dhcp_relay ports
Description
This command is used to configure the DHCP relay of the ports.
Format config dhcp_relay ports [<portlist> | all] state [enable | disable]
Parameters
<portlist> - Enter a list of ports to be configured.
all - Specify all ports to be configured.
state - Specify the DHCP relay state of the ports.
enable - Enables the DHCP relay.
disable - Disables the DHCP relay.
211
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To enable the DCHP relay on port 1-3:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config dhcp_relay ports 1-3 state enable
Command: config dhcp_relay ports 1-3 state enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
20-22 show dhcp_relay ports
Description
This command is used to display the DHCP relay of each port.
Format show dhcp_relay ports {<portlist>}
Parameters
<portlist> - (Optional) Enter a list of ports to be displayed.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the DHCP relay state of port 1-10:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show dhcp_relay ports 1-10
Command: show dhcp_relay ports 1-10
Port State
---- ---------------
1 Enabled
2 Enabled
3 Enabled
4 Enabled
5 Enabled
6 Enabled
7 Enabled
8 Enabled
9 Enabled
10 Enabled
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
212
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
20-23 config dhcp_relay option_125 add enterprise_number
Description
This command is used to configure the Option 125 relay rules. Note that different rules can be specified with the same relay server and the same match rule can be specified with multiple relay servers. The system will relay the packets to all the matching servers.
Format config dhcp_relay option_125 add enterprise_number <int> [string <multiword 255> | hex <string 255>] relay <ipaddr> [exact-match | partial-match]
Parameters
<int> - Enter the enterprise number.
string - Specify the DHCP relay Option 125 string used.
<multiword 255> - Enter the DHCP relay Option 125 string used. This string can be up to 255 characters long.
hex - Specify the DHCP relay Option 125 HEX string used. The system will add a 0 after the last HEX character.
<string 255> - Enter the DHCP relay Option 125 HEX string used. This string can be up to 255 characters long.
relay - Specify the relay server IP address.
<ipaddr> - Enter the relay server IP address
exact match - Specify that the Option 125 string in the packet must fully match with the specified string.
partial-match - Specify that the Option 125 string in the packet only needs a partial match with the specified string.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To add option 125 with enterprise number125 and hex “0123” relay entry to 1.1.1.1:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# config dhcp_relay option_125 add enterprise_number 0123 hex 0123 relay
1.1.1.1 exact-match
Command: config dhcp_relay option_125 add enterprise_number 123 hex 0123 relay 1.1.1.1 exactmatch
Success
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
20-24 config dhcp_relay option_125 default
Description
This command is used to when there are no matching servers found for the packet based on option 125, the relay servers to use will be determined by the default relay server setting.
When drop is specified, the packet with no matching rules found will be dropped without further processing. If the setting is configured to relay it will not drop and then the packet will be processed further based on option 60 and option 61. The final relay servers to be used will be a combination of option 60 default relay servers, the relay servers determined by option 61 and the relay servers determined by option 125.
Format config dhcp_relay option_125 default [relay <ipaddr> | mode [relay | drop]]
213
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Parameters
relay - Specify the IP address for DHCP relay forwarding.
<ipaddr> - Enter a relay server IP for packets that match the option 125 rules set.
mode - Specify to drop the packet that matches option 125 rules set.
relay - Specify which packet will be relayed based on the relay rules.
drop - Specify to drop the packet that matches option 125 rules set.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure the DHCP relay option 125 default to drop:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config dhcp_relay option_125 default mode drop
Command: config dhcp_relay option_125 default mode drop
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
20-25 config dhcp_relay option_125 delete
Description
This command is used to delete the entry specified by the user.
Format config dhcp_relay option_125 delete [enterprise_number <int> {[string <multiword 255> | hex <string 255>]}
{relay <ipaddr>} | [string <multiword 255> | hex <string 255>] {relay <ipaddr>} | ipaddress <ipaddr> | all | default {<ipaddr>}]
Parameters
enterprise_number - Specify the DHCP relay Option 125 enterprise number.
<int> - Enter the DHCP relay Option 125 enterprise number.
string - (Optional) Specify to delete all the entries with a string equal to the string specified if no other parameter is specified.
<multiword 255> - Enter the DHCP relay Option 125 string here. This string can be up to 255 characters long.
hex - (Optional) Specify to delete all the entries with a HEX equal to the HEX specified if no other parameter is specified.
<string 255> - Enter the DHCP relay Option 125 HEX string here. This string can be up to 255 characters long.
relay - (Optional) Specify to delete all the entries with the IP address equal to the IP address specified if no other parameter is specified.
<ipaddr> - Enter the IP address here.
string - Specify to delete all the entries with a string equal to the string specified if no other parameter is specified.
<multiword 255> - Enter the DHCP relay Option 125 string here. This string can be up to 255 characters long.
hex - Specify to delete all the entries with a HEX equal to the HEX specified if no other parameter is specified.
<string 255> - Enter the DHCP relay Option 125 HEX string here. This string can be up to 255 characters long.
relay - (Optional) Specify to delete all the entries with the IP address equal to the IP address specified if no other parameter is specified.
<ipaddr> - Enter the IP address here.
ipadddress - Specify to delete all the entries whose IP address is equal to the specified IP address.
214
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
<ipaddr> - Enter to IP address used here.
all - Specify to delete all the entries. Default relay servers are excluded.
default - Specify to delete the default relay IP address that is specified by the user. If the IP address is not specified, delete all default relay IP addresses.
<ipaddr> - (Optional) Enter the specified IP address here.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To delete a DHCP relay option 125 specified entry:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# config dhcp_relay option_125 delete enterprise_number 171 string "test" relay 192.168.0.2
Command: config dhcp_relay option_125 delete enterprise_number 171 string "test" relay
192.168.0.2Success.
Success
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
20-26 config dhcp_relay option_125 state
Description
This command is used to configure whether the DHCP relay will process packets using the DHCP option 125 or not.
Format config dhcp_relay option_125 state [enable | disable]
Parameters
enable - Specify to enable the DHCP relay Option 125 feature’s global state.
disable - Specify to disable the DHCP relay Option 125 feature’s global state.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure the state of the DHCP relay option 125 to enabled:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# config dhcp_relay option_125 state enable
Command: config dhcp_relay option_125 state enable.
Success
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
215
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
20-27 show dhcp_ relay option_125
Description
This command is used to show dhcp_relay option_125 command displays the option 125 entry specified by the user.
Format show dhcp_relay option_125 {[enterprise_number <int> | [string <multiword 255> | hex <string 255>] | ipaddress <ipaddr> | default]}
Parameters
enterprise number - (Optional) Enter the entry with the enterprise number that matched the enterprise number specified.
<int> - Enter the matching enterprise number.
string - (Optional) Specify the entry with the string that matches the string specified.
<multiword 255> - Enter the multiword 255 string.
hex - (Optional) Specify the entry with the hex that matches the hex specified.
<string 255> - Enter hex string 255.
ipadddress - (Optional) Specify the entry with the IP address matching the specified IP address.
<ipaddr> - Enter the matching IP address.
default - (Optional) Specify the default behavior of DHCP relay option 125.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display DHCP relay option 125 information:
216
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show dhcp_relay option_125
Command: show dhcp_relay option_125
Default Processing Mode: Drop
Default Servers:
192.168.0.1
Enterprise ID : 171
---------------------------------------------------------------------
Match Data Data Type Match Type IP Address
---------- --------- ---------- ------------- test String Exact 192.168.0.2 test String Exact 192.168.0.3 test String Partial 192.168.0.4
Enterprise ID : 172
---------------------------------------------------------------------
Match Data Data Type Match Type IP Address
---------- --------- ---------- -------------
01020304 Hex Partial 192.168.0.2
01020304 Hex Partial 192.168.0.3
Total Entries : 5
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
217
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 21 DHCP Server Command List
enable dhcp_server enable dhcp class disable dhcp_server disable dhcp class
create dhcp excluded_address begin_address <ipaddr> end_address <ipaddr>
create dhcp class <class_name 12>
create dhcp pool <pool_name 12>
create dhcp pool manual_binding <pool_name 12> <ipaddr> hardware_address <macaddr> {type [ethernet | ieee802]}
create dhcp option_profile <profile_name 12>
config dhcp class <class_name 12> [add option <int> [string <multiword 255> | hex <string255>] | delete option
<int>]
config dhcp pool network_addr <pool_name 12> <network_address>
config dhcp pool domain_name <pool_name 12> {<domain_name 64>}
config dhcp pool dns_server <pool_name 12> {<ipaddr>} {<ipaddr>} {<ipaddr>}
config dhcp pool netbios_name_server <pool_name 12> {<ipaddr>} {<ipaddr>} {<ipaddr>}
config dhcp pool netbios_node_type <pool_name 12> [broadcast | peer_to_peer | mixed | hybrid]
config dhcp pool default_router <pool_name 12> {<ipaddr>} {<ipaddr>} {<ipaddr>}
config dhcp pool lease <pool_name 12> [<day 0-365> <hour 0-23> <minute 0-59> | infinite]
config dhcp pool boot_file <pool_name 12> {<file_name 64>}
config dhcp pool next_server <pool_name 12> {<ipaddr>}
config dhcp ping_packets <number 0-10>
config dhcp ping_timeout <millisecond 10-2000>
config dhcp option_profile <profile_name 12> [add option <value 1-254> [string <multiword 255> | hex <string
254>] | delete option <value 1-254>]
config dhcp pool option_43 <pool_name 12> [add string <multiword 255> | delete]
config dhcp pool option_profile <pool_name 12> [add | delete] <profile_name 12>
config dhcp pool class <pool_name 12> [add | delete] <class_name 12> {begin_address <ipaddr> end_address
<ipaddr>}
clear dhcp binding [<pool_name 12> [<ipaddr> | all] | all]
clear dhcp conflict_ip [<ipaddr> | all]
delete dhcp excluded_address [begin_address <ipaddr> end_address <ipaddr> | all]
delete dhcp pool [<pool_name 12> | all]
delete dhcp pool manual_binding <pool_name 12> [<ipaddr> | all]
delete dhcp option_profile <profile_name 12>
delete dhcp class <class_name 12> show dhcp excluded_address
show dhcp binding {<pool_name 12>}
show dhcp pool {<pool_name 12>}
show dhcp pool manual_binding {<pool_name 12>} show dhcp_server
show dhcp conflict_ip {<ipaddr>}
show dhcp option_profile {<profile_name 12>}
show dhcp class {<class_name 12>}
21-1 enable dhcp_server
Description
This command is used to enable the DHCP server to distribute IP addresses, subnet masks, gateway addresses, and DNS server addresses to your network.
218
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Note: The DHCP server, DHCP client, DHCP relay and the DHCP local relay features are mutually exclusive. This means that if one of these features are enabled on an interface, the other three features mentioned cannot be enabled on that interface.
Format enable dhcp_server
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To enable DHCP server:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#enable dhcp_server
Command: enable dhcp_server
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
21-2 enable dhcp class
Description
This command is used to enable DHCP class function on the Switch.
Format enable dhcp class
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To enable DHCP class:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#enable dhcp class
Command: enable dhcp class
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
219
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
21-3 disable dhcp_server
Description
This command is used to disable the DHCP server function on the switch.
Format disable dhcp_server
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To disable the Switch’s DHCP server:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#disable dhcp_server
Command: disable dhcp_server
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
21-4 disable dhcp class
Description
This command is used to disable DHCP class function on the Switch.
Format disable dhcp class
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To disable DHCP class:
220
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#disable dhcp class
Command: disable dhcp class
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
21-5 create dhcp excluded_address
Description
This command is used to create a DHCP server exclude address. The DHCP server assumes that all IP addresses in a DHCP pool subnet are available for assigning to DHCP clients. Use this command to specify the IP address that the DHCP server should not assign to clients. This command can be used multiple times in order to define multiple groups of excluded addresses.
Format create dhcp excluded_address begin_address <ipaddr> end_address <ipaddr>
Parameters
begin_address - Specify the starting address of the IP address range.
<ipaddr> - Enter the starting address of the IP address range.
end_address - Specify the ending address of the IP address range.
<ipaddr> - Enter the ending address of the IP address range.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To specify the IP address that DHCP server should not assign to clients:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#create dhcp excluded_address begin_address 10.10.10.1 end_address
10.10.10.10
Command: create dhcp excluded_address begin_address 10.10.10.1 end_address 10.10.10.10
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
21-6 create dhcp class
Description
This command is used to create DHCP class.
Format create dhcp class <class_name 12>
Parameters
<class_name 12> - Enter the DHCP class’s name.
221
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Restrictions
Only Administrators and Operators can issue this command.
Example
To create a DHCP class:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#create dhcp class class1
Command: create dhcp class class1
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
21-7 create dhcp pool
Description
This command is used to create a DHCP pool by specifying a name. After creating a DHCP pool, use other DHCP pool configuration commands to configure parameters for the pool.
Format create dhcp pool <pool_name 12>
Parameters
<pool_name 12> - Enter the name of the DHCP pool.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To create a DHCP pool:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#create dhcp pool engineering
Command: create dhcp pool engineering
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# #
21-8 create dhcp pool manual_binding
Description
This command is used to specify the distinct identification of the client in dotted-hexadecimal notation or hardware address.
An address binding is a mapping between the IP address and MAC address of a client. The IP address of a client can be assigned manually by an administrator or assigned automatically from a pool by a DHCP server.
The IP address specified in the manual binding entry must be in a range within that the network uses for the DHCP pool. If the user Specify a conflict IP address, an error message will be returned. If a number of manual binding
222
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide entries are created, and the network address for the pool is changed such that conflicts are generated, those manual binding entries which conflict with the new network address will be automatically deleted.
Format create dhcp pool manual_binding <pool_name 12> <ipaddr> hardware_address <macaddr> {type [ethernet
| ieee802]}
Parameters
<pool_name 12> - Enter the DHCP pool name.
<ipaddr> - Enter the IP address which will be assigned to a specified client.
hardware_address - Specify the hardware MAC address.
<macaddr> - Enter the MAC address here.
type - (Optional) Specify the DHCP pool manual binding type. If it's not specified, the type will be “ethernet".
ethernet - Specify Ethernet type.
ieee802 - Specify IEEE 802 type.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure manual bindings:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#create dhcp pool manual_binding engineering 10.10.10.1 hardware_address
00-80-C8-02-02-02 type ethernet
Command: create dhcp pool manual_binding engineering 10.10.10.1 hardware_address 00-80-C8-02-
02-02 type ethernet
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
21-9 create dhcp option_profile
Description
This command is used to create a DHCP profile option. Users can create up to 10 DHCP profile options.
Format create dhcp option_profile <profile_name 12>
Parameters
<profile_name 12> - Enter the DHCP option profile name here. This name can be up to 12 characters long.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To create a DHCP option profile:
223
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#create dhcp option_profile profile1
Command: create dhcp option_profile profile1
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
21-10 config dhcp class
Description
This command is used to configure DHCP class options.
Note: This command adds DHCP class options. If a user enables the DHCP class feature, the Switch would check the corresponding part in the DHCP request packet. A user can use the string <multiword 255> or hex
<string 255> to add value for this option, the value of the DHCP client packet’s option needs to match exactly. Use wildcard character “*” for a partial match of a specified string. Currently it only supports option
60,61, 82 and 125. If an administrator enters a value other than those mentioned, it will give an error prompt message.
Format config dhcp class <class_name 12> [add option <int> [string <multiword 255> | hex <string255>] | delete option <int>]
Parameters
<class_name 12> - Enter the DHCP class’s name.
add option - Specify to add the DHCP class option.
<int> - Option index.
string - The character string about DHCP class options.
<multiword 255> - Enter the string.
hex - The hexadecimal of string about DHCP class options.
<string255> - Enter the hexadecimal of the string.
delete option - Specify to select the DHCP class option.
<int> - Option index.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To add option 60 using hex format and not using wildcard character “*”, DHCP client packet’s option 60 should have 8 bytes matching the specified hex pattern:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config dhcp class class1 add option 60 hex 4d53465420352e30
Command: config dhcp class class1 add option 60 hex 4d53465420352e30
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To delete DHCP class option 60:
224
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config dhcp class class1 delete option 60
Command: config dhcp class class1 delete option 60
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
21-11 config dhcp pool network_addr
Description
This command is used to specify the network for the DHCP pool. The addresses in the network are free to be assigned to the DHCP client. The prefix length Specify the number of bits that comprise the address prefix. The prefix is an alternative way of specifying the network mask of the client. The prefix length must be preceded by a forward slash (/). When the DHCP server receives a request from the client, the server will automatically find a pool to allocate the address. If the request is relayed to the server by the intermediate device, the server will match the gateway IP address carried in the packet against the network of each DHCP pool. The pool which has the longest match will be selected. If the request packet is not through relay, then the server will match the IP address of the
IPIF that received the request packet against the network of each DHCP pool.
Format config dhcp pool network_addr <pool_name 12> <network_address>
Parameters
<pool_name 12> - Enter the DHCP pool name.
<network_address> - Enter the IP address that the DHCP server may assign to clients.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure the address range of the DHCP address pool:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config dhcp pool network_addr engineering 10.10.10.0/24
Command: config dhcp pool network_addr nyknicks 10.10.10.0/24
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
21-12 config dhcp pool domain_name
Description
This command is used to specify the domain name for the client if the server allocates the address for the client from this pool. The domain name configured here will be used as the default domain name by the client. By default, the domain name is empty. If the domain name is empty, the domain name information will not be provided to the client.
Format config dhcp pool domain_name <pool_name 12> {<domain_name 64>}
225
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Parameters
<pool_name 12> - Enter the DHCP pool name.
<domain_name 64> - (Optional) Enter the domain name of the client.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure the domain name option of the DHCP pool:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config dhcp pool domain_name engineering abc.com
Command: config dhcp pool domain_name engineering abc.com
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
21-13 config dhcp pool dns_server
Description
This command is used to specify the IP address of a DNS server that is available to a DHCP client. Up to three IP addresses can be specified on one command line. If DNS server is not specified, the DNS server information will not be provided to the client. If this command is input twice for the same pool, the second command will overwrite the first command.
Format config dhcp pool dns_server <pool_name 12> {<ipaddr>} {<ipaddr>} {<ipaddr>}
Parameters
<pool_name 12> - Enter the DHCP pool name.
<ipaddr> - (Optional) Enter the IP address of the DNS server. Up to three IP addresses can be specified on one command line.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure the DNS server’s IP address:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config dhcp pool dns_server engineering 10.10.10.1
Command: config dhcp pool dns_server engineering 10.10.10.1
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
226
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
21-14 config dhcp pool netbios_name_server
Description
This command is used to specify the NetBIOS WINS server that is available to a Microsoft DHCP client. Up to three IP addresses can be specified on one command line.
Windows Internet Naming Service (WINS) is a name resolution service that Microsoft DHCP clients use to correlate host names to IP addresses within a general grouping of networks. If a NetBIOS name server is not specified, the NetBIOS name server information will not be provided to the client. If this command is input twice for the same pool, the second command will overwrite the first command.
Format config dhcp pool netbios_name_server <pool_name 12> {<ipaddr>} {<ipaddr>} {<ipaddr>}
Parameters
<pool_name 12> - Enter the DHCP pool name.
<ipaddr> - (Optional) Enter the IP address of the WINS server. Up to three IP addresses can be specified on one command line.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure a WINS server IP address:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config dhcp pool netbios_name_server engineering 10.10.10.5
Command: config dhcp pool netbios_name_server engineering 10.10.10.5
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
21-15 config dhcp pool netbios_node_type
Description
This command is used to specify the NetBIOS node type for a Microsoft DHCP client.
The NetBIOS node type for Microsoft DHCP clients can be one of four settings: broadcast, peer-to-peer, mixed, or hybrid. Use this command to configure a NetBIOS over TCP/IP device that is described in RFC 1001/1002. By default, the NetBIOS node type is broadcast.
Format config dhcp pool netbios_node_type <pool_name 12> [broadcast | peer_to_peer | mixed | hybrid]
Parameters
<pool_name 12> - Enter the DHCP pool name.
broadcast - Specify the NetBIOS node type for Microsoft DHCP clients as broadcast.
peer_to_peer - Specify the NetBIOS node type for Microsoft DHCP clients as peer_to_peer.
mixed - Specify the NetBIOS node type for Microsoft DHCP clients as mixed.
hybrid - Specify the NetBIOS node type for Microsoft DHCP clients as hybrid.
227
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure the NetBIOS node type:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config dhcp pool netbios_node_type engineering hybrid
Command: config dhcp pool netbios_node_type engineering hybrid
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
21-16 config dhcp pool default_router
Description
This command is used to specify the IP address of the default router for a DHCP client. Up to three IP addresses can be specified on one command line.
After a DHCP client has booted, the client begins sending packets to its default router. The IP address of the default router should be on the same subnet as the client. If the default router is not specified, the default router information will not be provided to the client. If this command is input twice for the same pool, the second command will overwrite the first command. The default router must be within the range the network defined for the
DHCP pool.
Format config dhcp pool default_router <pool_name 12> {<ipaddr>} {<ipaddr>} {<ipaddr>}
Parameters
<pool_name 12> - Enter the DHCP pool name.
<ipaddr> - (Optional) Enter the IP address of the default router. Up to three IP addresses can be specified on one command line.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure the default router:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config dhcp pool default_router engineering 10.10.10.10
Command: config dhcp pool default_router engineering 10.10.10.10
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
21-17 config dhcp pool lease
Description
This command is used to specify the duration of the DHCP pool lease.
228
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
By default, each IP address assigned by a DHCP server comes with a one-day lease, which is the amount of time that the address is valid.
Format config dhcp pool lease <pool_name 12> [<day 0-365> <hour 0-23> <minute 0-59> | infinite]
Parameters
<pool_name 12> - Enter the DHCP pool’s name.
<day 0-365> - Enter the number of days of the lease.
<hour 0-23> - Enter the number of hours of the lease.
<minute 0-59> - Enter the number of minutes of the lease.
infinite - Specify a lease of unlimited duration.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure the lease of a pool:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config dhcp pool lease engineering infinite
Command: config dhcp pool lease engineering infinite
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
21-18 config dhcp pool boot_file
Description
This command is used to specify the name of the file that is used as a boot image.
The boot file is used to store the boot image for the client. The boot image is generally the operating system the client uses to load. If this command is input twice for the same pool, the second command will overwrite the first command. If the bootfile is not specified, the boot file information will not be provided to the client.
Format config dhcp pool boot_file <pool_name 12> {<file_name 64>}
Parameters
<pool_name 12> - Enter the DHCP pool name.
<file_name 64> - (Optional) Enter the file name of the boot image.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure the boot file:
229
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config dhcp pool boot_file engineering boot.had
Command: config dhcp pool boot_file engineering boot.had
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
21-19 config dhcp pool next_server
Description
This command is used by the DHCP client boot process, typically a TFTP server. If next server information is not specified, it will not be provided to the client. If this command is input twice for the same pool, the second command will overwrite the first command.
Format config dhcp pool next_server <pool_name 12> {<ipaddr>}
Parameters
<pool_name 12> - Enter the DHCP pool name.
<ipaddr> - (Optional) Enter the IP address of the next server.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure the next server:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config dhcp pool next_server engineering 192.168.0.1
Command: config dhcp pool next_server engineering 192.168.0.1
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
21-20 config dhcp ping_packets
Description
This command is used to specify the number of ping packets the DHCP server sends to an IP address before assigning this address to a requesting client.
By default, the DHCP server pings a pool address twice before assigning the address to a DHCP client. If the ping is unanswered, the DHCP server assumes (with a high probability) that the address is not in use and assigns the address to the requesting client. If the ping is answered, the server will discard the current IP address and try another IP address.
Format config dhcp ping_packets <number 0-10>
230
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Parameters
<number 0-10> - Enter the number of ping packets. 0 means there is no ping test. The default value is 2.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure ping packets:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config dhcp ping_packets 4
Command: config dhcp ping_packets 4
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
21-21 config dhcp ping_timeout
Description
This command is used to specify the amount of time the DHCP server must wait before timing out a ping packet.
By default, the DHCP server waits 100 milliseconds before timing out a ping packet.
Format config dhcp ping_timeout <millisecond 10-2000>
Parameters
<millisecond 10-2000> - Enter the amount of time the DHCP server must wait before timing out a ping packet.
The default value is 100.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure the time out value for ping packets:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config dhcp ping_timeout 500
Command: config dhcp ping_timeout 500
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
21-22 config dhcp option_profile
Description
This command is used to configure an option to and from a DHCP server option profile. When you apply this profile to a DHCP pool, the DHCP server will carry the DHCP option(s) in all packets. Each profile can contain up to 10
231
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide different DHCP options and can be applied to multiple DHCP pools. However, each DHCP pool can only assign one DHCP option profile. Any option exceeding 312 bytes will be removed. When a user configures the option set by another command (except option 43) or cannot be set like DHCP Message Type, it will return an error message.
Format config dhcp option_profile <profile_name 12> [add option <value 1-254> [string <multiword 255> | hex
<string 254>] | delete option <value 1-254>]
Parameters
<profile_name 12> - Enter the DHCP server option profile name here. This name can be up to 12 characters long.
add - Specify to add an option to the DHCP server option profile.
option - Specify the option value used.
<value 1-254> - Enter the option value used here. This must be between 1 and 254.
string - Specify the character string associated with the option.
<multiword 255> - Enter the option association string here. This can be up to 255 characters long.
hex - Specify the hexadecimal value of the option string.
<string 254> - Enter the hexadecimal value of the option string here. This can be up to 254 hexadecimal characters long.
delete - Specify to delete an option from the DHCP server option profile.
option - Specify the option value used.
<value 1-254> - Enter the option value used here. This must be between 1 and 254.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To add option 69 using HEX format:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config dhcp option_profile profile1 add option 69 hex c0a800fe
Command: config dhcp option_profile profile1 add option 69 hex c0a800fe
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To add option 72 using string format:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config dhcp option_profile profile1 add option 72 string "192.168.0.254"
Command: config dhcp option_profile profile1 add option 72 string "192.168.0.254"
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To delete DHCP option profile option 69:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config dhcp option_profile profile1 delete option 69
Command: config dhcp option_profile profile1 delete option 69
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
232
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
21-23 config dhcp pool option_43
Description
This command is used to add or delete a DHCP option 43 for a DHCP server pool.
Format config dhcp pool option_43 <pool_name 12> [add string <multiword 255> | delete]
Parameters
<pool_name 12> - Enter the DHCP pool name here. This name can be up to 12 characters long.
add - Specify to add an option profile to the DHCP pool, configured on this Switch.
string – Specify the DHCP pool option_43 string variable.
<multiword 255> - Enter a multiword 255 long character ASCII string.
delete - Specify to delete an option profile from a DHCP pool, configured on this switch.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To add an option profile for DHCP option 43 in pool1:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config dhcp pool option_43 pool1 add profile1
Command: config dhcp pool option_43 pool1 add profile1
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To delete an option profile from a DHCP pool:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config dhcp pool option_43 pool1 delete profile1
Command: config dhcp pool option_43 pool1 delete profile1
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
21-24 config dhcp pool option_profile
Description
This command is used to apply an option profile to a specific DHCP pool.
Format config dhcp pool option_profile <pool_name 12> [add | delete] <profile_name 12>
Parameters
<pool_name 12> - Enter the DHCP pool name here. This name can be up to 12 characters long.
add - Specify to add an option profile to a DHCP pool, configured on this switch.
delete - Specify to delete an option profile from a DHCP pool, configured on this switch.
233
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
<profile_name 12> - Enter the DHCP server option profile name here. This name can be up to 12 characters long.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To add an option profile for DHCP profile1 in pool1:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config dhcp pool option_profile pool1 add profile1
Command: config dhcp pool option_profile pool1 add profile1
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To delete an option profile from a DHCP pool:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config dhcp pool option_profile pool1 delete profile1
Command: config dhcp pool option_profile pool1 delete profile1
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
21-25 config dhcp pool class
Description
This command is used to configure the address range of a specific DHCP pool class. User can only configure one address range per DHCP class.
Format config dhcp pool class <pool_name 12> [add | delete] <class_name 12> {begin_address <ipaddr> end_address <ipaddr>}
Parameters
<pool_name 12> - Enter the DHCP pool name.
add - Add an address range to the Switch’s DHCP pool class table.
delete - Delete an address range to the Switch’s DHCP pool class table.
<class_name12> - Enter DHCP class’s name. The class must be created through the create dhcp class command.
begin_address - (Optional) The beginning IP address of the range.
<ipaddr> - (Optional) Enter the IP address.
end_address - (Optional) The end IP address of the range
<ipaddr> - Enter the IP address.
Restrictions
Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
234
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Example
To add an address range for DHCP class1 in pool1, and display DHCP pool information:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config dhcp pool class pool1 add class1 begin_address 20.0.0.20 end_address 20.0.0.50
Command: config dhcp pool class pool1 add class1 begin_address 20.0.0.20 end_address
20.0.0.50
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
21-26 clear dhcp binding
Description
This command is used to clear a binding entry or all binding entries in a pool or clears all binding entries in all pools.
Note that this command will not clear the dynamic binding entry which matches a manual binding entry.
Format clear dhcp binding [<pool_name 12> [<ipaddr> | all] | all]
Parameters
<pool_name 12> - Enter the DHCP pool name to clear.
<ipaddr> - Enter the IP address to clear.
all - Specify to clear all IP addresses for the specified pool.
all - Specify to clear all binding entries in all pools
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To clear dynamic binding entries in the pool named “engineering”:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#clear dhcp binding engineering 10.48.74.121
Command: clear dhcp binding engineering 10.48.74.121
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
21-27 clear dhcp conflict_ip
Description
This command is used to clear an entry or all entries from the conflict IP database.
Format clear dhcp conflict_ip [<ipaddr> | all]
235
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Parameters
<ipaddr> - Enter the IP address to be cleared.
all - Specify that all IP addresses will be cleared.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To clear an IP address 10.20.3.4 from the conflict database:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#clear dhcp conflict_ip 10.20.3.4
Command: clear dhcp conflict_ip 10.20.3.4
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
21-28 delete dhcp excluded_address
Description
This command is used to delete a DHCP server exclude address.
Format delete dhcp excluded_address [begin_address <ipaddr> end_address <ipaddr> | all]
Parameters
begin_address - Specify the starting address of the IP address range.
<ipaddr> - Enter the starting address of the IP address range.
end_address - Specify the ending address of the IP address range.
<ipaddr> - Enter the ending address of the IP address range.
all - Specify to delete all IP addresses.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To delete a DHCP server exclude address:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#delete dhcp excluded_address begin_address 10.10.10.1 end_address
10.10.10.10
Command: delete dhcp excluded_address begin_address 10.10.10.1 end_address 10.10.10.10
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
236
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
21-29 delete dhcp pool
Description
This command is used to delete a DHCP pool.
Format delete dhcp pool [<pool_name 12> | all]
Parameters
<pool_name 12> - Enter the name of the DHCP pool.
all - Specify to delete all the DHCP pools.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To delete a DHCP pool:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#delete dhcp pool nyknicks
Command: delete dhcp pool nyknicks
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
21-30 delete dhcp pool manual_binding
Description
This command is used to delete DHCP server manual binding.
Format delete dhcp pool manual_binding <pool_name 12> [<ipaddr> | all]
Parameters
<pool_name 12> - Enter the DHCP pool name.
<ipaddr> - Enter the IP address which will be assigned to a specified client.
all - Specify to delete all IP addresses.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To delete DHCP server manual binding:
237
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#delete dhcp pool manual_binding engineering 10.10.10.1
Command: delete dhcp pool manual_binding engineering 10.10.10.1
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
21-31 delete dhcp option_profile
Description
This command is used to delete a DHCP option profile.
Format delete dhcp option_profile <profile_name 12>
Parameters
<profile_name 12> - Enter the DHCP server option profile name here. This name can be up to 12 characters long.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To delete a DHCP option profile:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#delete dhcp option_profile profile1
Command: delete dhcp option_profile profile1
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
21-32 delete dhcp class
Description
This command is used to delete a DHCP class.
Format delete dhcp class <class_name 12>
Parameters
<class_name 12> - Enter the DHCP class’s name.
Restrictions
Only Administrators and Operators can issue this command.
238
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Example
To delete DHCP class:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#delete dhcp class class1
Command: delete dhcp class class1
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
21-33 show dhcp excluded_address
Description
This command is used to display the groups of IP addresses which are excluded from being a legal assigned IP address.
Format show dhcp excluded_address
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the DHCP server excluded addresses:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show dhcp excluded_address
Command: show dhcp excluded_address
Index Begin Address End Address
----- ------------- --------------
1 192.168.0.1 192.168.0.100
2 10.10.10.10 10.10.10.11
Total Entries : 2
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
21-34 show dhcp binding
Description
This command is used to display dynamic binding entries.
Format show dhcp binding {<pool_name 12>}
239
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Parameters
<pool_name 12> - (Optional) Enter a DHCP pool name.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display dynamic binding entries for “engineering”:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show dhcp binding engineering
Command: show dhcp binding engineering
Pool Name IP Address Hardware Address Type Status Lifetime
------------ -------------- ------------------ -------- ------- --------- engineering 192.168.0.1 00-80-C8-08-13-88 Ethernet Manual 86400 engineering 192.168.0.2 00-80-C8-08-13-99 Ethernet Automatic 86400 engineering 192.168.0.3 00-80-C8-08-13-A0 Ethernet Automatic 86400 engineering 192.168.0.4 00-80-C8-08-13-B0 Ethernet Automatic 86400
Total Entries: 4
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
21-35 show dhcp pool
Description
This command is used to display the information for DHCP pool. If pool name is not specified, information for all pools will be displayed.
Format show dhcp pool {<pool_name 12>}
Parameters
<pool_name 12> - (Optional) Enter the DHCP pool name.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the current DHCP pool information for “engineering”:
240
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show dhcp pool engineering
Command: show dhcp pool engineering
Pool Name :engineering
Network Address :10.10.10.0/24
Domain Name :abc.com
DNS Server :10.10.10.1
NetBIOS Name Server :10.10.10.5
NetBIOS Node Type :Hybrid
Default Router :10.10.10.10
Pool Lease :Infinite
Boot File :boot.had
Next Server :192.168.0.1
Option 43 :
Option Profile :
DHCP Class Begin Address End Address
---------- --------------- ---------------
Total Entries: 1
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
21-36 show dhcp pool manual_binding
Description
This command is used to display the configured manual binding entries.
Format show dhcp pool manual_binding {<pool_name 12>}
Parameters
<pool_name 12> - (Optional) Enter the DHCP pool name.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the configured manual binding entries:
241
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show dhcp pool manual_binding
Command: show dhcp pool manual_binding
Pool Name IP Address Hardware Address Type
------------ ------------- ------------------ -------- p1 192.168.0.1 00-80-C8-08-13-88 Ethernet p1 192.168.0.2 00-80-C8-08-13-99 Ethernet
Total Entries : 2
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
21-37 show dhcp_server
Description
This command is used to display the current DHCP server configuration.
Format show dhcp_server
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the DHCP server status:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show dhcp_server
Command: show dhcp_server
DHCP Server Global State: Disabled
Ping Packet Number : 2
Ping Timeout : 100 ms
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
21-38 show dhcp conflict_ip
Description
This command is used to display the IP address that has been identified as being in conflict.
The DHCP server will use ping packet to determine whether an IP address is conflicting with other hosts before binding this IP. The IP address which has been identified in conflict will be moved to the conflict IP database. The system will not attempt to bind the IP address in the conflict IP database unless the user clears it from the conflict
IP database.
242
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Format show dhcp conflict_ip {<ipaddr>}
Parameters
<ipaddr> - (Optional) Enter the IP address to be displayed.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the entries in the DHCP conflict IP database:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show dhcp conflict_ip
Command: show dhcp conflict_ip
IP Address Detection Method Detection Time
----------- ---------------- --------------------
172.16.1.32 Ping 2007/08/30 17:06:59
172.16.1.32 Gratuitous ARP 2007/09/10 19:38:01
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
21-39 show dhcp option_profile
Description
This command is used to display the current DHCP option profile configuration.
Format show dhcp option_profile {<profile_name 12>}
Parameters
<profile_name 12> - (Optional) Enter the DHCP server option profile name here. This name can be up to 12 characters long.
If no parameter is specified, the system will display all DHCP option profile configurations.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the current DHCP option profile configuration:
243
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show dhcp option_profile
Command: show dhcp option_profile
DHCP Option Profile Name : profile1
Option Type Value
------ ------ ------------------------------------------------------------
69 hex c0a800fe
72 string 192.168.0.254
Total Entries: 1
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
21-40 show dhcp class
Description
This command is used to display the current DHCP class configuration.
Format show dhcp class {<class_name 12>}
Parameters
<class_name 12> - (Optional) Enter the DHCP class’s name.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the current DHCP class configuration:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show dhcp class
Command: show dhcp class
DHCP Class Status : Disabled
DHCP Class Name : class1
Option Type Value
--------- ------------ ------------------
60 hex 4d53465420352e30
Total Entries: 1
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
244
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 22 DHCP Server Screening Command
List
create filter dhcpv6_server permit sip <ipv6addr> ports [<portlist> | all]
create filter icmpv6_ra_all_node permit sip <ipv6addr> ports [<portlist> | all]
config filter dhcp_server [add permit server_ip <ipaddr> {client_mac <macaddr>} ports [<portlist> | all] | delete permit server_ip <ipaddr> {client_mac <macaddr>} ports [<portlist> | all] | ports [<portlist> | all] state [enable | disable] | illegal_server_log_suppress_duration [1min | 5min | 30min] | trap_log [enable | disable]]
config filter dhcpv6_server log [enable | disable]
config filter dhcpv6_server ports [<portlist> | all] state [enable | disable]
config filter dhcpv6_server trap [enable | disable]
config filter icmpv6_ra_all_node log [enable | disable]
config filter icmpv6_ra_all_node ports [<portlist> | all] state [enable | disable]
config filter icmpv6_ra_all_node trap [enable | disable]
delete filter dhcpv6_server permit sip <ipv6addr>
delete filter icmpv6_ra_all_node permit sip <ipv6addr> show filter dhcp_server show filter dhcpv6_server show filter icmpv6_ra_all_node
22-1 create filter dhcpv6_server permit sip
Description
This command is used to create a permit entry for DHCPv6 server filtering. The specific DHCPv6 server packets, with the source IPv6 address, will be forwarded on the specified port(s).
Format create filter dhcpv6_server permit sip <ipv6addr> ports [<portlist> | all]
Parameters
<ipv6addr> - Enter the source address of the entry which will be created into the Filter DHCPv6 server forward list.
ports - Specify the list of ports used for this configuration.
<portlist> - Enter the list of ports, used for this configuration, here.
all - Specify that all ports will be used for this configuration.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To create a Filter DHCPv6 server permit entry on port 5:
245
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#create filter dhcpv6_server permit sip 2200::5 ports 5
Command: create filter dhcpv6_server permit sip 2200::5 ports 5
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
22-2 create filter icmpv6_ra_all_node permit sip
Description
This command is used to create a permit entry. The specific ICMPv6 RA All-nodes packets with source IPv6 address can be forwarded on the specified port(s).
Format create filter icmpv6_ra_all_node permit sip <ipv6addr> ports [<portlist> | all]
Parameters
<ipv6addr> - Enter the source address of entry which will be created into the Filter ICMPv6 RA All-nodes forward list.
ports - Specify a list of ports which apply to icmpv6_ra_all_node permit entry.
<portlist> - Enter a range of ports that the permit entry will apply to.
all - Specify all the existing ports that apply to the permit entry.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To create a filter ICMPv6 RA All-nodes permit entry on port 5:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#create filter icmpv6_ra_all_node permit sip 2200::5 ports 5
Command: create filter icmpv6_ra_all_node permit sip 2200::5 ports 5
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
22-3 config filter dhcp_server
Description
This command is used to configure filters on a DHCP server.
You can use DHCP Filtering as a security measure against unauthorized DHCP servers. A known attack can occur when an unauthorized DHCP server responds to a client that is requesting an IP address. The unauthorized server can configure the gateway for the client to be equal to the IP address of the server. At that point, the client sends all of its IP traffic destined to other networks to the unauthorized machine, giving the attacker the possibility of filtering traffic for passwords or employing a ‘man-in-the-middle’ attack.
DHCP filtering works by allowing the administrator to configure each port as a trusted or untrusted port. The port that has the authorized DHCP server should be configured as a trusted port. Any DHCP responses received on a trusted port will be forwarded. All other ports should be configured as untrusted. Any DHCP (or BOOTP) responses received on the ingress side will be discarded.
This command has three purposes:
246
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
1. Specify to filter all DHCP server packets on the specific port.
2. Specify to allow some DHCP server packets with pre-defined server IP addresses.
3. Deny all DHCPOFFER requests by using the default DHCP Server filtering method to specify explicit “permit” rules for the (DHCP server IP, client’s MAC address, and port list from the DHCP server). With this function, we can restrict the DHCP server to service specific DHCP clients. This is useful when two DHCP servers are present on the network, one of them provides the private IP address, and the other provides the public IP address.
Enabling DHCP server port state filtering will create one access profile and create one access rule per port (UDP port = 67). Filter commands in this file will share the same access profile.
Addition of a permit DHCP entry will create one access profile and create one access rule. Filtering commands in this file will share the same access profile.
Format config filter dhcp_server [add permit server_ip <ipaddr> {client_mac <macaddr>} ports [<portlist> | all] | delete permit server_ip <ipaddr> {client_mac <macaddr>} ports [<portlist> | all] | ports [<portlist> | all] state [enable | disable] | illegal_server_log_suppress_duration [1min | 5min | 30min] | trap_log [enable | disable]]
Parameters
add - Specify to add a DHCP filter.
permit - Specify a permission DHCP filter.
server_ip - The IP address of the DHCP server to be filtered.
<ipaddr> - Enter the DHCP server IP address here.
client_mac - (Optional) The MAC address of the DHCP client.
<macaddr> - Enter the DHCP client MAC address here.
ports - The port number of filter DHCP server.
<portlist> - Enter the list of ports to be configured here.
all - Specify that all the port will be used for this configuration.
delete - Specify to delete the DHCP filter.
permit - Specify the permission DHCP filter.
server_ip - The IP address of the DHCP server to be filtered.
<ipaddr> - Enter the DHCP server IP address here.
client_mac - (Optional) The MAC address of the DHCP client.
<macaddr> - Enter the DHCP client MAC address here.
ports - The port number of filter DHCP server.
<portlist> - Enter the list of ports to be configured here.
all - Specify that all the port will be used for this configuration.
state - Specify to enable or disable the filter DHCP server state.
enable - Specify that the filter DHCP server state will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the filter DHCP server state will be disabled.
illegal_server_log_suppress_duration - Specify the same illegal DHCP server IP address detected will be logged only once within the duration. The default value is 5 minutes.
1min - Specify that illegal server log suppress duration value will be set to 1 minute.
5min - Specify that illegal server log suppress duration value will be set to 5 minutes.
30min - Specify that illegal server log suppress duration value will be set to 30 minutes.
trap_log - Specify to enable or disable the trap and log function.
enable - Enables the trap and log function.
disable - Disables the trap and log function.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To add an entry from the DHCP server filter list in the Switch’s database:
247
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config filter dhcp_server add permit server_ip 10.90.90.20 ports 1-20
Command: config filter dhcp_server add permit server_ip 10.90.90.20 ports 1-20
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config filter dhcp_server ports 1-10 state enable
Command: config filter dhcp_server ports 1-10 state enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# config filter dhcp_server add permit_server_ip 10.1.1.1 client_mac 00-
00-00-00-00-01 port 1-26
Command: config filter dhcp_server add permit_server_ip 10.1.1.1 client_mac 00-00-00-00-00-01 port 1-26
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
22-4 config filter dhcpv6_server log
Description
This command is used to enable or disable the Filter DHCPv6 server log state.
Format config filter dhcpv6_server log [enable | disable]
Parameters
enable - Specify that the log for the Filter DHCPv6 server will be enabled. The log for Filter DHCPv6 server will be generated.
disable - Specify that the log for the Filter DHCPv6 server will be disabled.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To enable the Filter DHCPv6 Server log state:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config filter dhcpv6_server log enable
Command: config filter dhcpv6_server log enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
248
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
22-5 config filter dhcpv6_server ports
Description
This command is used to configure the state of filter DHCPv6 server packets on the switch. The filter DHCPv6 server function is used to filter the DHCPv6 server packets on the specific port(s) and receive the trust packets from the specific source. This feature can be protected network usable when a malicious host sends the DHCPv6 server packets.
Format config filter dhcpv6_server ports [<portlist> | all] state [enable | disable]
Parameters
<portlist> - Enter a range of ports to configure the Filter DHCPv6 server state.
all - Specify all the existing ports on the switch for configuring the Filter DHCPv6 server state.
state - Specify whether the port’s filter DHCPv6 server function is enabled or disabled.
enable - Specify that the filter option is enabled.
disable - Specify that the filter option is disabled.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure enabling all port states:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config filter dhcpv6_server ports all state enable
Command: config filter dhcpv6_server ports all state enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
22-6 config filter dhcpv6_server trap
Description
This command is used to enable or disable the filter DHCPv6 server trap state.
Format config filter dhcpv6_server trap [enable | disable]
Parameters
enable - Specify that the trap for the filter DHCPv6 server will be enabled. The trap for filter DHCPv6 server will be sent out.
disable - Specify that the trap for the filter DHCPv6 server will be disabled.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
249
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Example
To enable the filter DHCPv6 server trap state:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config filter dhcpv6_server trap enable
Command: config filter dhcpv6_server trap enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
22-7 config filter icmpv6_ra_all_node log
Description
This command is used to enable or disable the filter ICMPv6 RA All-nodes log state.
Format config filter icmpv6_ra_all_node log [enable | disable]
Parameters
enable - Specify that the log for the filter ICMPv6 RA will be enabled. The log for filter ICMPv6 RA all-nodes will be generated.
disable - Specify that the log for the filter ICMPv6 RA will be disabled.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To enable the filter ICMPv6 RA all-nodes log state:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config filter icmpv6_ra_all_node log enable
Command: config filter icmpv6_ra_all_node log enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
22-8 config filter icmpv6_ra_all_node ports
Description
This command is used to configure the state of the filter ICMPv6 RA all-nodes packets on the switch. The filter
ICMPv6 RA all-nodes function is used to filter the ICMPv6 RA all-nodes packets on the specific port(s) and receive the trust packets from the specific source. This feature can be protected network usable when a malicious host sends ICMPv6 RA all-nodes packets.
NOTE: It only needs to filter the packet of which the destination address is the all-nodes multicast address
(FF02::1).
250
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Format config filter icmpv6_ra_all_node ports [<portlist> | all] state [enable | disable]
Parameters
<portlist> - Enter a range of ports for configuring the Filter icmpv6_ra_all_node state.
all - Specify all the existing ports on the switch for configuring the Filter icmpv6_ra_all_node state.
state - Specify whether the port’s filter ICMPv6 RA all-nodes packets function is enabled or disabled.
enable - Specify that the filter ICMPv6 RA all-nodes packets function is be enabled.
disable - Specify that the filter ICMPv6 RA all-nodes packets function is be disabled.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To enable the filter ICMPv6 RA all-nodes state for port 1:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config filter icmpv6_ra_all_node ports 1 state enable
Command: config filter icmpv6_ra_all_node ports 1 state enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
22-9 config filter icmpv6_ra_all_node trap
Description
This command is used to enable or disable the filter ICMPv6 RA all-nodes trap state. If the ICMPv6 RA all-nodes server trap state is disabled, no trap will be sent out.
Format config filter icmpv6_ra_all_node trap [enable | disable]
Parameters
enable - Specify that the trap for the filter ICMPv6 RA all-nodes will be enabled. The trap for filter ICMPv6 RA allnodes will be sent out.
disable - Specify that the trap for the filter ICMPv6 RA all-nodes will be disabled.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To enable the filter ICMPv6 RA all-nodes trap state:
251
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config filter icmpv6_ra_all_node trap enable
Command: config filter icmpv6_ra_all_node trap enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
22-10 delete filter dhcpv6_server permit sip
Description
This command is used to delete a filter DHCPv6 server permit entry.
Format delete filter dhcpv6_server permit sip <ipv6addr>
Parameters
<ipv6addr> - Enter the source IPv6 address of the entry here.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To delete permit entry from the filter DHCPv6 server forward list:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#delete filter dhcpv6_server permit sip 2200::4
Command: delete filter dhcpv6_server permit sip 2200::4
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
22-11 delete filter icmpv6_ra_all_node permit sip
Description
This command is used to delete a filter ICMPv6 RA all-nodes permit entry.
Format delete filter icmpv6_ra_all_node permit sip <ipv6addr>
Parameters
<ipv6addr> - Enter the source IPv6 address of the entry which will be deleted in the filter ICMPv6 RA all-nodes forward list.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
252
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Example
To delete permit entry from the filter ICMPv6 RA all-nodes forward list:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#delete filter icmpv6_ra_all_node permit sip 2200::4
Command: delete filter icmpv6_ra_all_node permit sip 2200::4
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
22-12 show filter dhcp_server
Description
This command is used to display the DHCP server filter list created on the Switch.
Format show filter dhcp_server
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the DHCP server/client filter list created on the Switch:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show filter dhcp_server
Command: show filter dhcp_server
Enabled Ports: 1-10
Trap & Log State: Disabled
Illegal Server Log Suppress Duration:5 minutes
Permit DHCP Server/Client Table:
Server IP Address Client MAC Address Port
----------------- ------------------ --------------------
10.90.90.20 All Client MAC 1-20
Total Entries: 1
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
22-13 show filter dhcpv6_server
Description
This command is used to display the filter DHCPv6 server information.
253
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Format show filter dhcpv6_server
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display filter DHCPv6 server information:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show filter dhcpv6_server
Command: show filter dhcpv6_server
Enabled ports:1-8
Trap State: Disabled
Log State: Enabled
Permit Source Address Table:
Source IP Address Port
--------------------------------------- ---------------
Total Entries:0
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
22-14 show filter icmpv6_ra_all_node
Description
This command is used to display the filter ICMPv6 RA all-nodes information.
Format show filter icmpv6_ra_all_node
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display filter ICMPv6 RA all-nodes information:
254
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show filter icmpv6_ra_all_node
Command: show filter icmpv6_ra_all_node
Enabled ports:1
Trap State: Disabled
Log State: Enabled
Permit Source Address Table:
Source IP Address Port
--------------------------------------- ---------------
3FFE::1 1
Total Entries:1
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
255
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 23 DHCPv6 Relay Command List
enable dhcpv6_relay enable dhcpv6_local_relay disable dhcpv6_relay disable dhcpv6_local_relay
config dhcpv6_relay [add | delete] ipif <ipif_name 12> <ipv6addr>
config dhcpv6_relay hop_count <value 1-32>
config dhcpv6_relay ipif [<ipif_name 12> | all] state [enable | disable]
config dhcpv6_local_relay vlan [<vlan_name 32> |vlanid <vlan_id>] state [enable | disable]
config dhcpv6_relay option_18 {state [enable | disable] | check [enable | disable] | interface_id [default | cid | vendor1]}(1)
config dhcpv6_relay option_37 {state [enable | disable] | check [enable | disable] | remote_id [default | cid_with_user_define <desc 128> | user_define <desc 128> | vendor1]}(1)
show dhcpv6_relay {ipif <ipif_name 12>} show dhcpv6_local_relay
23-1 enable dhcpv6_relay
Description
This command is used to enable the DHCPv6 relay function on the Switch.
Format enable dhcpv6_relay
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure the DHCPv6 relay global state to enable:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# enable dhcpv6_relay
Command: enable dhcpv6_relay
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
23-2 disable dhcpv6_relay
Description
This command is used to disable the DHCPv6 relay function on the Switch.
256
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Format disable dhcpv6_relay
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure the DHCPv6 relay global state to disable:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# disable dhcpv6_relay
Command: disable dhcpv6_relay
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
23-3 enable dhcpv6_local_relay
Description
This command is used to enable the DHCPv6 local relay function of the Switch.
Format enable dhcpv6_local_relay
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators and Operators can issue this command.
Example
To configure the DHCPv6 local relay global state to enable:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# enable dhcpv6_local_relay
Command: enable dhcpv6_local_relay
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
23-4 disable dhcpv6_local_relay
Description
This command is used to disable the DHCPv6 local relay function of the switch
257
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Format disable dhcpv6_local_relay
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators and Operators can issue this command.
Example
To configure the DHCPv6 local relay global state to disable:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# disable dhcpv6_local_relay
Command: disable dhcpv6_local_relay
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
23-5 config dhcpv6_relay
Description
This command is used to add/delete an IPv6 address which is a destination to forward (relay) DHCPv6 packets.
Format config dhcpv6_relay [add | delete] ipif <ipif_name 12> <ipv6addr>
Parameters
add - Add an IPv6 destination to the DHCPv6 relay table.
delete - Delete an IPv6 destination from the DHCPv6 relay table.
ipif - The name of the IP interface in which DHCPv6 relay is to be enabled.
<ipif_name 12> - Enter the IP interface name here. This name can be up to 12 characters long.
<ipv6addr> - Enter the DHCPv6 server IP address.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To add a DHCPv6 server to the relay table:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# config dhcpv6_relay add ipif System 2001:DB8:1234:0:218:FEFF:FEFB:CC0E
Command: config dhcpv6_relay add ipif System 2001:DB8:1234:0:218:FEFF:FEFB:CC0E
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
258
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
23-6 config dhcpv6_relay hop_count
Description
This command is used to configure the DHCPv6 relay hop_count of the switch.
Format config dhcpv6_relay hop_count <value 1-32>
Parameters
<value 1-32> - Enter the number of relay agents that have relayed this message. The default value is 4.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure the maximum hops of a DHCPv6 relay packet could be transferred to 4:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# config dhcpv6_relay hop_count 4
Command: config dhcpv6_relay hop_count 4
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
23-7 config dhcpv6_relay ipif
Description
This command is used to configure the DHCPv6 relay state of one specific interface or all interfaces.
Format config dhcpv6_relay ipif [<ipif_name 12> | all] state [enable | disable]
Parameters
<ipif_name 12> - Enter the IP interface name used here. This name can be up to 12 characters long.
all - Specify that all the configured IP interfaces will be used.
state - Specify if the DHCPv6 relay state will be enabled or disabled.
enable - Choose this parameter to enable the DHCPv6 relay state of the interface.
disable - Choose this parameter to disable the DHCPv6 relay state of the interface.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure the DHCPv6 relay state of the System interface to enable:
259
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# config dhcpv6_relay ipif System state enable
Command: config dhcpv6_relay ipif System state enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
23-8 config dhcpv6_local_relay vlan
Description
This command is used to enable or disable the DHCPv6 local relay function for a specified VLAN.
Format config dhcpv6_local_relay vlan [<vlan_name 32> |vlanid <vlan_id>] state [enable | disable]
Parameters
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the VLAN name that will be used for this configuration
vlanid - Specify the VLAN ID that will be used for this configuration. It supports up to 48 VLANs.
<vlan_id> - Enter the VLAN ID that will be used for this configuration. It supports up to 48 VLANs.
state - Specify the DHCPv6 local relay function's state for the specified VLAN.
enable - Specify to enable the DHCPv6 local relay function's state for the specified VLAN.
disable - Specify to disable the DHCPv6 local relay function's state for the specified VLAN.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators, and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To enable the DHCPv6 local relay function for the default VLAN:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# config dhcpv6_local_relay vlan default state enable
Command: config dhcpv6_local_relay vlan default state enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
23-9 config dhcpv6_relay option_18
Description
This command is used to configure the DHCPv6 relay agent information for processing option 18 within the switch.
Format config dhcpv6_relay option_18 {state [enable | disable] | check [enable | disable] | interface_id [default | cid
| vendor1]}(1)
Parameters
state - Specify the DHCPv6 relay Option 18's state.
enable - Specify that the DHCPv6 relay Option 18's state is enabled. When the state is enabled, the DHCP
260
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide packet will be inserted with the Option 18 field before being relayed to server.
disable - Specify that the DHCPv6 relay Option 18's state is disabled. When the state is disabled, the DHCP packet will be relayed directly to server without further checks and inserted with the Option 18.
check - Specify whether or not to check for the Option 18 field in incoming packets. If the incoming packets contains an Option 18 field, then it will be dropped.
enable - Specify to enable the check function.
disable - Specify to disable the check function.
interface_id - Specify the format of the Interface ID.
default - Specify to use the default formation for the Interface ID.
F01 F02
Sub Type VLAN ID
1 byte 2 bytes
F01: Sub-type is 1 by default.
F02: VLAN ID. The incoming VLAN ID of the DHCP client packet.
cid - Specify to use the CID format for the Interface ID.
F01 F02 F03 F04
Sub Type VLAN ID Module ID Port ID
1 byte 2 byte 1 byte 1 byte
F01: Sub-option type 2.
F02: VLAN ID. The VLAN ID of the incoming DHCP client packet.
F03: Module ID. For a stand-alone switch, it is 0. For a stacked switch, it is the box ID of that switch.
F04: Port ID. The port number of the incoming DHCP client packet. The port number starts from 1.
vendor1 - Specify to use the Vendor 1 format for the Interface ID.
F01 F02 F03 F04 F05 F06 F07 F08
E
(0x45) t
(0x74)
1 byte 1 byte
F09 h
(0x68)
1 byte e
(0x65)
1 byte r
(0x72)
1 byte n
(0x65)
1 byte e
(0x65)
1 byte t
(0x74)
1 byte
Chassis
ID
F10
/
(0x2F)
F11
0
(0x30)
1 byte
F12
/
(0x2F)
1 byte
F13
Port
Number
F14
:
(0x3A)
1~2 bytes 1 byte
F15 cvlan
F16
.
(0x2E)
1~4 bytes 1 byte 1~2 bytes 1 byte
F17 F18
0
(0x30)
1 byte
Space
(0x20)
1 byte
F19
System
Name
1~128 bytes
F20
/
(0x2F)
1 byte
F21
0
(0x30)
1 byte
F22
/
(0x2F)
1 byte
F23
0
(0x30)
1 byte
F24
/
(0x2F)
1 byte
F25 F26
Chassis ID /
(0x2F)
F27
0
(0x30)
F28
/
(0x2F)
F29
Port
Number
1~2 bytes 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1~2 bytes
F01: Character ‘E’.
F02: Character ‘t’.
F03: Character ‘h’.
F04: Character ‘e’.
F05: Character ‘r’.
F06: Character ‘n’.
F07: Character ‘e’.
F08: Character ‘t’.
F09: Chassis ID. The number of the chassis. The format is ASCII string.
1. For a stand-alone switch, it is 0.
261
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
2. For a stacked switch, it is the box ID of that switch.
F10: Slash (/).
F11: ASCII format string ‘0’.
F12: Slash (/).
F13: Port number. The incoming port number DHCP client packets. ASCII format string.
F14: Colon (:)
F15: ‘cvlan’ is the client’s VLAN ID. The value ranges from 1 to 4094. ASCII format string.
F16: Dot (.).
F17: ASCII format string ‘0’.
F18: Space.
F19: System name of the Switch. NOTE: If the System name exceeds 128 bytes, it will only use the first
128 bytes.
F20: Slash (/).
F21: ASCII format string ‘0’.
F22: Slash (/).
F23: ASCII format string ‘0’.
F24: Slash (/).
F25: Chassis ID. This value is the same as F09.
F26: Slash (/).
F27: ASCII format string ‘0’.
F28: Slash (/).
F29: Port number. The incoming port number of DHCP client packets. ASCII format string.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators, and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure the DHCPv6 relay option 18:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config dhcpv6_relay option_18 state enable
Command: config dhcpv6_relay option_18 state enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config dhcpv6_relay option_18 check enable
Command: config dhcpv6_relay option_18 check enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config dhcpv6_relay option_18 interface_id default
Command: config dhcpv6_relay option_18 interface_id default
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config dhcpv6_relay option_18 interface_id cid
Command: config dhcpv6_relay option_18 interface_id cid
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config dhcpv6_relay option_18 interface_id vendor1
Command: config dhcpv6_relay option_18 interface_id vendor1
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
262
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
23-10 config dhcpv6_relay option_37
Description
This command is used to configure the processing of option 37 for the DHCPv6 relay function
Format config dhcpv6_relay option_37 {state [enable | disable] | check [enable | disable] | remote_id [default | cid_with_user_define <desc 128> | user_define <desc 128> | vendor1]}(1)
Parameters
state - When the state is enabled, the DHCP packet will be inserted with the option 37 field before being relayed to server. When the state is disabled, the DHCP packet will be relayed directly to server without further checks and inserted with the option 37.
enable - Specify that the DHCPv6 relay Option 37's state is enabled. When the state is enabled, the DHCP packet will be inserted with the Option 37 field before being relayed to server.
disable - Specify that the DHCPv6 relay Option 37's state is disabled. When the state is disabled, the DHCP packet will be relayed directly to server without further checks and inserted with the Option 37.
check - When the check state is enabled, packets coming from client side should not have the option 37 field. If client originating packets have the option 37 field set they will be dropped.
enable - Specify to enable the check function.
disable - Specify to disable the check function.
remote_id Specify the content in the Remote ID.
default - The remote ID will be VLAN ID + Module + Port +System MAC address of the device.
cid_with_user_define - The remote ID will be VLAN ID + Module + Port + user defined string.
<desc 128> - Enter the user defined cid. The page title description can be up to 128 characters long.
user_define - The remote ID will be user defined string.
<desc 128> - Enter the user defined spec up to 128 characters long.
vendor1 - The remote ID will be System MAC address of the device
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure the DHCPv6 relay option 37:
263
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config dhcpv6_relay option_37 state enable
Command: config dhcpv6_relay option_37 state enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config dhcpv6_relay option_37 check enable
Command: config dhcpv6_relay option_37 check enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config dhcpv6_relay option_37 remote_id default
Command: config dhcpv6_relay option_37 remote_id default
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config dhcpv6_relay option_37 remote_id cid_with_user_define D-link
DGS3200 Series
Command: config dhcpv6_relay option_37 remote_id cid_with_user_define D-link DGS3200 Series
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config dhcpv6_relay option_37 remote_id user_define D-link DGS3200 Series
Command: config dhcpv6_relay option_37 remote_id user_define D-link DGS3200 Series
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config dhcpv6_relay option_37 remote_id vendor1
Command: config dhcpv6_relay option_37 remote_id vendor1
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
23-11 show dhcpv6_relay
Description
This command is used to display the current DHCPv6 relay configuration of all interfaces, or if an IP interface name is specified, the DHCPv6 relay configuration for that IP interface.
Format show dhcpv6_relay {ipif <ipif_name 12>}
Parameters
ipif - (Optional) The name of the IP interface for which to display the current DHCPv6 relay configuration.
<ipif_name 12> - Enter the IP interface name used here. This name can be up to 12 characters long.
If no IP interface is specified, all configured DHCPv6 relay interfaces are displayed.
264
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display local DHCPv6 relay configuration:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show dhcpv6_relay
Command: show dhcpv6_relay
DHCPv6 Relay Global State : Disabled
DHCPv6 Hops Count Limit : 4
DHCPv6 Relay Information Option 18 State : Disabled
DHCPv6 Relay Information Option 18 Check : Disabled
DHCPv6 Relay Information Option 18 Interface ID Type : Default
DHCPv6 Relay Information Option 37 State : Disabled
DHCPv6 Relay Information Option 37 Check : Disabled
DHCPv6 Relay Information Option 37 Remote ID Type : Default
DHCPv6 Relay Information Option 37 Remote ID :
---------------------------------------------------------------
IP Interface : System
DHCPv6 Relay Status : Enabled
Server Address :
Total Entries : 1
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
23-12 show dhcpv6_local_relay
Description
This command is used to display the current DHCPv6 local relay configuration.
Format show dhcpv6_local_relay
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display local DHCPv6 relay configuration:
265
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#oper#show dhcpv6_local_relay
Command: show dhcpv6_local_relay
DHCPv6 Local Relay Status : Disabled
DHCPv6 Local Relay VID List : 1,3-4
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
266
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 24 DHCPv6 Server Command List
create dhcpv6 pool <pool_name 12>
delete dhcpv6 pool [<pool_name 12> | all]
show dhcpv6 pool {<pool_name 12>}
config dhcpv6 pool ipv6network_addr <pool_name 12> begin <ipv6networkaddr> end <ipv6networkaddr>
config dhcpv6 pool domain_name <pool_name 12> <domain_name 255>
config dhcpv6 pool dns_server <pool_name 12> <ipv6addr> {<ipv6addr>}
config dhcpv6 pool lifetime <pool_name 12> preferred_lifetime <sec 60-4294967295> valid_lifetime <sec 60-
4294967295>
config dhcpv6 pool manual_binding <pool_name 12> [add < ipv6addr> client_duid <string 28> | delete
[<ipv6addr> | all] ]
show dhcpv6 manual_binding {<pool_name 12>}
show dhcpv6 binding {<pool_name 12>}
clear dhcpv6 binding {<pool_name 12>} enable dhcpv6_server disable dhcpv6_server
show dhcpv6_server {ipif <ipif_name 12>}
config dhcpv6 pool excluded_address <pool_name 12> [add begin <ipv6addr> end <ipv6addr> | delete [begin
<ipv6addr> end <ipv6addr> | all]]
show dhcpv6 excluded_address {<pool_name 12>}
config dhcpv6_server ipif [<ipif_name 12> | all] state [enable | disable]
24-1 create dhcpv6 pool
Description
This command is used to create a DHCPv6 pool for the DHCPv6 server.
Format create dhcpv6 pool <pool_name 12>
Parameters
<pool_name 12> - Enter the pool name here. This name can be up to 12 characters long.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To create a DHCPv6 pool pool1:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# create dhcpv6 pool pool1
Command : create dhcpv6 pool pool1 success
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
267
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
24-2 delete dhcpv6 pool
Description
This command is used to delete one or all DHCPv6 pools.
Format delete dhcpv6 pool [<pool_name 12> | all]
Parameters
<pool_name 12> - Enter the DHCPv6 pool name to be removed here. This name can be up to 12 characters long.
all - Specify that all the DHCPv6 pools will be removed.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To delete the DHCPv6 pool by specifying the pool name pool1:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# delete dhcpv6 pool pool1
Command: delete dhcpv6 pool pool1
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
24-3 show dhcpv6 pool
Description
This command is used to display one or all DHCPv6 pools configuration.
Format show dhcpv6 pool {<pool_name 12>}
Parameters
<pool_name 12> - (Optional) Enter the DHCPv6 pool name to be displayed here. This name can be up to 12 characters long.
If no parameters are specified, all the DHCPv6 pools will be displayed.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show the DHCPv6 pool by specifying the pool name pool1:
268
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# show dhcpv6 pool pool1
Command: show dhcpv6 pool pool1
Pool Name : pool1
Begin Network Address : 2000::1/64
End Network Address : 2000::200/64
Domain Name : domain.com
DNS Server Address : 2000::ff
: 2000::fe
Preferred Lifetime : 604800 (sec)
Valid Lifetime : 2592000 (sec)
Total Pool Entries: 1
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
24-4 config dhcpv6 pool ipv6network_addr
Description
This command is used to configure the range of IPv6 network addresses for the DHCPv6 pool. The IPv6 addresses in the range are free to be assigned to any DHCPv6 client. When the DHCPv6 server receives a request from the client, the server will automatically find an available pool to allocate an IPv6 address.
The begin_networkaddr and end_networkaddr must observer some rules as followed:
The prefix of the begin_networkaddr and end_networkaddr are not consistence, otherwise, the switch will print an error message: The prefix of begin_networkaddr and end_networkaddr must be consistence.(e.g.: the begin_networkaddr is 2000::1/64, and the end_networkaddr is 3000::100/64)
The begin address must not be large than end address, otherwise, the switch will print an error message: The begin IPv6 address must be lower than or equal to the end IPv6 address.(e.g.: the begin_networkaddr is
2000::200/64, and the end_networkaddr is 2000::100/64)
There must not be intersection between the IPv6 address ranges of two pools, otherwise, the Switch will print an error message: IPv6network address collision. (e.g.: pool1: 2000::1/64 --- 2000::100/64, pool2: 2000::50/64 ---
2000::200/64)
The IPv6 network address can’t be Link-local address and Multicast address, otherwise, the Switch will print an error message: “The IPv6 network address can’t be Link-local address or Multicast address. “ (e.g.:: pool1:
FE80::1/64 --- FE80::100/64, pool2: FE80::200/64 --- FE80::300/64
Format config dhcpv6 pool ipv6network_addr <pool_name 12> begin <ipv6networkaddr> end <ipv6networkaddr>
Parameters
<pool_name 12> - Enter the DHCPv6 pool name used here. This name can be up to 12 characters long.
begin - Specify the beginning IPv6 network address of the DHCPv6 pool.
<ipv6networkaddr> - Enter the beginning IPv6 network address of the DHCPv6 pool here.
end - Specify the ending IPv6 network address of the DHCPv6 pool.
<ipv6networkaddr> - Enter the ending IPv6 network address of the DHCPv6 pool here.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure the range of IPv6 network address for the DHCPv6 pool pool1:
269
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# config dhcpv6 pool ipv6network_addr pool1 begin 2000::1/64 end
2000::32/64
Command: config dhcpv6 pool ipv6network_addr pool1 begin 2000::1/64 end 2000::32/64 success
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
24-5 config dhcpv6 pool domain_name
Description
This command is used to configure the domain name for the DHCPv6 pool of the Switch. The domain name configured here will be used as the default domain name by the client.
By default, the domain name is empty. If domain name is empty, the domain name information will not be provided to the client.
Format config dhcpv6 pool domain_name <pool_name 12> <domain_name 255>
Parameters
<pool_name 12> - Enter the DHCPv6 pool name used here. This name can be up to 12 characters long.
<domain_name 255> - Enter the domain name used here. This name can be up to 255 characters long.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure the domain name for the DHCPv6 pool pool1:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# config dhcpv6 pool domain_name pool1 dlink.com
Command: config dhcpv6 pool domain_name pool1 dlink.com
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
24-6 config dhcpv6 pool dns_server
Description
This command is used to configure the DNS server’s IPv6 addresses for a specific DHCPv6 pool. Users may add up to two DNS Server addresses. If DNS server is not specified, the DNS server information will not be provided to the client. Users could delete a DNS server address in the method of setting the DNS server address to zero.
Format config dhcpv6 pool dns_server <pool_name 12> <ipv6addr> {<ipv6addr>}
270
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Parameters
<pool_name 12> - Enter the DHCPv6 pool name used here. This name can be up to 12 characters long.
<ipv6addr> - Enter the primary DNS Server IPv6 address used for this pool here.
<ipv6addr> - (Optional) Enter the secondary DNS Server IPv6 address used for this pool here.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure the DNS server address for a DHCPv6 pool:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# config dhcpv6 pool dns_server pool1 2000::200 2000::201
Command: config dhcpv6 pool dns_server pool1 2000::200 2000::201
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
24-7 config dhcpv6 pool lifetime
Description
This command is used to configure the preferred-lifetime and valid-lifetime of IPv6 address within a DHCPv6 pool.
• Preferred lifetime - This is the length of time a valid address is preferred (i.e. the time until deprecation)
When the preferred lifetime expires, the address becomes deprecated.
• Valid lifetime - This is the length of time an address remains in its valid state (i.e. the time until invalidation).
When the valid lifetime expires, the address becomes invalid.
The valid lifetime must be greater than or equal to the preferred lifetime.
Format config dhcpv6 pool lifetime <pool_name 12> preferred_lifetime <sec 60-4294967295> valid_lifetime <sec
60-4294967295>
Parameters
<pool_name 12> - Enter the DHCPv6 pool name used here. This name can be up to 12 characters long.
preferred_lifetime - Specify the length of time that a valid address is preferred to.
<sec 60-4294967295> - Enter the preferred lifetime value here. This value must be between 60 and
4294967295 seconds.
valid_lifetime - Specify the length of time an address remains in the valid state.
<sec 60-4294967295> - Enter the valid lifetime value here. This value must be between 60 and 4294967295 seconds.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure the preferred-lifetime and valid-lifetime for the DHCPv6 pool:
271
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# config dhcpv6 pool lifetime pool1 preferred_lifetime 80 valid_lifetime
100
Command: config dhcpv6 pool lifetime pool1 preferred_lifetime 80 valid_lifetime 100
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
24-8 config dhcpv6 pool manual_binding
Description
This command is used to configure a DHCPv6 pool manual binding entry. An address binding is a mapping between the IPv6 address and DUID (A DHCPv6 Unique Identifier for a DHCPv6 participant) of a client. The IPv6 address specified in the manual binding entry must be in the range of the DHCPv6 pool.
Format config dhcpv6 pool manual_binding <pool_name 12> [add < ipv6addr> client_duid <string 28> | delete
[<ipv6addr> | all] ]
Parameters
<pool_name 12> - Enter the DHCPv6 pool name used here. This name can be up to 12 characters long.
add - Specify the IPv6 address that will statically be bound to a device.
<ipv6addr> - Enter the IPv6 address used for the static bind here.
client_duid - Specify the DUID of the device that will statically be bound to the IPv6 address entered in the previous field.
<string 28> - Enter the client DUID used here. This string can be up to 28 characters long and must also contain characters 0-9, letters a-f or A-F.
delete - Specify to delete the manual binding entry.
<ipv6addr> - Enter the IPv6 address of the manual binding entry to be deleted here.
all - Specify that all manual binding entries will be deleted.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To add a manual binding DHCPv6 entry:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# config dhcpv6 pool manual_binding pool1 add 2000::3 client_duid
00010006124dd5840021918d4d9f
Command: config dhcpv6 pool manual_binding pool1 add 2000::3 client_duid
00010006124dd5840021918d4d9f success
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
24-9 show dhcpv6 manual_binding
Description
This command is used to display the manual binding entries for the selected or all DHCPv6 pools.
272
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Format show dhcpv6 manual_binding {<pool_name 12>}
Parameters
<pool_name 12> - (Optional) Enter the DHCPv6 pool name used here. This name can be up to 12 characters long.
If no parameter is specified, then all the entries will be displayed.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the manual binding entries of the DHCPv6 pool:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# show dhcpv6 manual_binding
Command: show dhcpv6 manual_binding
Pool Name :net100
Entry 1
IPv6 Address: 3000:100:1::ABCD
DUID : 00030006001572200700
Pool Name :net91
Entry 1
IPv6 Address: 3000:91:1::100
DUID : 00030006aabbcc000000
Entry 2
IPv6 Address: 3000:91:1::101
DUID : 00030006aabbcc000001
Total Entries: 3
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
24-10 show dhcpv6 binding
Description
This command is used to show the DHCPv6 dynamic binding information. Entering the command without the pool name will display all information regarding DHCPv6 dynamic binding on the switch. This command only displays the dynamic binding information, not including manual binding information.
Format show dhcpv6 binding {<pool_name 12>}
Parameters
<pool_name 12> - (Optional) Enter the DHCPv6 pool name used here. This name can be up to 12 characters long.
273
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the DHCPv6 dynamic binding information on the Switch:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# show dhcpv6 binding
Command: show dhcpv6 binding
Pool Name: net90 IPv6 Address: 3000:90:1::7
DUID : 0003000600cd14517000
Preferred(s): 120 Valid(s): 240
Pool Name: net100-2 IPv6 Address: 3000:100:1::1
DUID : 00030006001572200300
Preferred(s): 120 Valid(s): 240
Total Entries : 2
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
24-11 clear dhcpv6 binding
Description
This command is used to clear the DHCPv6 dynamic binding information.
Format clear dhcpv6 binding {<pool_name 12>}
Parameters
<pool_name 12> - (Optional) Enter the DHCPv6 pool name used here. This name can be up to 12 characters long.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To clear the DHCPv6 dynamic binding information on the Switch:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# clear dhcpv6 binding
Command: clear dhcpv6 binding
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
274
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
24-12 enable dhcpv6_server
Description
This command is used to enable the DHCPv6 server function on the Switch.
Format enable dhcpv6_server
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure the DHCPv6 server global state to enable:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# enable dhcpv6_server
Command: enable dhcpv6_server
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
24-13 disable dhcpv6_server
Description
This command is used to disable the DHCPv6 server function on the Switch.
Format disable dhcpv6_server
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure the DHCPv6 server global state to disable:
275
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# disable dhcpv6_server
Command: disable dhcpv6_server
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
24-14 show dhcpv6_server
Description
This command is used to display the DHCPv6 server setting.
Format show dhcpv6_server {ipif <ipif_name 12>}
Parameters
ipif - (Optional) Specify the IP interface name to be displayed.
<ipif_name 12> - Enter the IP interface name to be displayed here. This name can be up to
12 characters long.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the DHCPv6 server setting:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# show dhcpv6_server
Command: show dhcpv6_server
DHCPv6 Server Global State: Disabled
---------------------------------------------------------------
IP Interface : System
DHCPv6 Server State : Enabled
IP Interface : ipif1
DHCPv6 Server State : Enabled
Total Entries : 2
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
24-15 config dhcpv6 pool excluded_address
Description
This command is used to configure the reserved IPv6 addresses on the DHCPv6 server. This command will configure the IPv6 addresses range that the DHCPv6 server should not assign to DHCPv6 client. The exclude address range must be the subset of the specified pool.
276
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Format config dhcpv6 pool excluded_address <pool_name 12> [add begin <ipv6addr> end <ipv6addr> | delete
[begin <ipv6addr> end <ipv6addr> | all]]
Parameters
<pool_name 12> - Enter the DHCPv6 pool name used here. This name can be up to 12 characters long.
add - Specify to add an excluded address range for a specified pool.
begin - Specify the beginning IPv6 address of the range of IPv6 addresses to be excluded from the DHCPv6 pool.
<ipv6addr> - Enter the beginning IPv6 address used here.
end - Specify the ending IPv6 address of the range of IPv6 addresses to be excluded from the DHCPv6 pool.
<ipv6addr> - Enter the ending IPv6 address used here.
delete - Specify to delete one or all excluded address ranges of a specified pool.
begin - Specify the beginning IPv6 address of the range of IPv6 addresses to be excluded from the DHCPv6 pool.
<ipv6addr> - Enter the beginning IPv6 address used here.
end - Specify the ending IPv6 address of the range of IPv6 addresses to be excluded from the DHCPv6 pool.
<ipv6addr> - Enter the ending IPv6 address used here.
all - Specify to delete all excluded address ranges of a specified pool.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To add the IPv6 addresses range that DHCPv6 server should not assign to clients:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# config dhcpv6 pool excluded_address pool1 add begin 2000::3 end 2000::8
Command: config dhcpv6 pool excluded_address pool1 add begin 2000::3 end 2000::8
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
24-16 show dhcpv6 excluded_address
Description
This command is used to display the groups of IPv6 addresses which are excluded from the legal assigned IPv6 address
Format show dhcpv6 excluded_address {<pool_name 12>}
Parameters
<pool_name 12> - (Optional) Enter the DHCPv6 pool name used here. This name can be up to 12 characters long.
Restrictions
None.
277
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Example
To display the excluded address information:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# show dhcpv6 excluded_address
Command: show dhcpv6 excluded_address
Pool Name: net100
Range 1
Begin Address: 3000:110:1::1
End Address : 3000:110:1::7
Range 2
Begin Address: 3000:110:1::9
End Address : 3000:110:1::9
Range 3
Begin Address: 3000:110:1::11
End Address : 3000:110:1::11
Range 4
Begin Address: 3000:110:1::13
End Address : 3000:110:1::13
Total Entries : 5
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
24-17 config dhcpv6_server ipif
Description
This command is used to configure the DHCPv6 Server state per interface.
Format config dhcpv6_server ipif [<ipif_name 12> | all] state [enable | disable]
Parameters
<ipif_name 12> - Enter the IP interface name used. This name can be up to 12 characters long.
all - Specify that all the IP interfaces will used.
state - Specify the DHCPv6 server state for the specified interface.
enable - Specify that the DHCPv6 server state for the specified interface will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the DHCPv6 server state for the specified interface will be disabled.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure the DHCPv6 Server state of System Interface to enable:
278
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# config dhcpv6_server ipif System state enable
Command: config dhcpv6_server ipif System state enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
279
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 25 Digital Diagnostic Monitoring
(DDM) Command List
config ddm [trap | log] [enable | disable]
config ddm ports [<portlist> | all] [[temperature_threshold {high_alarm <degrees> | low_alarm <degrees> | high_warning<degrees> | low_warning <degrees>}(1) | voltage_threshold {high_alarm <voltage> | low_alarm<voltage> | high_warning<voltage> | low_warning<voltage>}(1) | bias_current_threshold
{high_alarm <milliampere> | low_alarm <milliampere> | high_warning <milliampere> | low_warning<milliampere>}(1) | tx_power_threshold {high_alarm <mw_or_dbm> | low_alarm <mw_or_dbm> | high_warning <mw_or_dbm> | low_warning <mw_or_dbm>}(1) | rx_power_threshold {high_alarm
<mw_or_dbm> | low_alarm <mw_or_dbm> | high_warning <mw_or_dbm> | low_warning <mw_or_dbm>}(1)] |
{state [enable | disable] | shutdown [alarm | warning | none]}(1) | reload_threshold] show ddm
show ddm ports {<portlist>} [status | configuration]
config ddm power_unit [mw | dbm]
25-1 config ddm
Description
This command is used to configure the DDM log and trap action when encountering an exceeding alarm or warning thresholds event.
Format config ddm [trap | log] [enable | disable]
Parameters
trap - Specify whether to send traps, when the operating parameter exceeds the corresponding threshold. The
DDM trap is disabled by default.
log - Specify whether to send a log, when the operating parameter exceeds the corresponding threshold. The
DDM log is enabled by default.
enable - Specify to enable the log or trap sending option.
disable - Specify to disable the log or trap sending option.
Restrictions
Only Administrators and Operators can issue this command.
Example
To configure DDM log state to enable:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config ddm log enable
Command: config ddm log enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To configure DDM trap state to enable:
280
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config ddm trap enable
Command: config ddm trap enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
25-2 config ddm ports
Description
This command is used to configure the DDM settings of the specified ports.
Format config ddm ports [<portlist> | all] [[temperature_threshold {high_alarm <degrees> | low_alarm <degrees> | high_warning<degrees> | low_warning <degrees>}(1) | voltage_threshold {high_alarm <voltage> | low_alarm<voltage> | high_warning<voltage> | low_warning<voltage>}(1) | bias_current_threshold
{high_alarm <milliampere> | low_alarm <milliampere> | high_warning <milliampere> | low_warning<milliampere>}(1) | tx_power_threshold {high_alarm <mw_or_dbm> | low_alarm
<mw_or_dbm> | high_warning <mw_or_dbm> | low_warning <mw_or_dbm>}(1) | rx_power_threshold
{high_alarm <mw_or_dbm> | low_alarm <mw_or_dbm> | high_warning <mw_or_dbm> | low_warning
<mw_or_dbm>}(1)] | {state [enable | disable] | shutdown [alarm | warning | none]}(1) | reload_threshold]
Parameters
<portlist> - Enter the range of ports to be configured here.
all - Specify that all the optic ports’ operating parameters will be configured.
temperature_threshold - Specify the threshold of the optic module’s temperature in centigrade. At least one parameter shall be specified for this threshold. The range is from -128 to 127.996
°C.
high_alarm - Specify the high threshold value for the temperature alarm. When the operating parameter rises above this value, the action associated with the alarm is taken.
<degrees> - Enter the high threshold alarm value used here.
low_alarm - Specify the low threshold value for the temperature alarm. When the operating parameter falls below this value, the action associated with the alarm is taken.
<degrees> - Enter the low threshold alarm value used here.
high_warning - Specify the high threshold for the warning. When the operating parameter rises above this value, the action associated with the warning is taken.
<degrees> - Enter the high threshold warning value here.
low_warning - Specify the low threshold for the warning. When the operating parameter falls below this value, the action associated with the warning is taken.
<degrees> - Enter the low threshold warning value here.
voltage_threshold - Specify the threshold of optic module’s voltage. The range is from 0 to 6.5535 V.
high_alarm - Specify the high threshold value for the voltage alarm. When the operating parameter rises above this value, the action associated with the alarm is taken.
<voltage> - Enter the high threshold alarm value used here.
low_alarm - Specify the low threshold value for the voltage alarm. When the operating parameter falls below this value, the action associated with the alarm is taken.
<voltage> - Enter the low threshold alarm value used here.
high_warning - Specify the high threshold for the warning. When the operating parameter rises above this value, the action associated with the warning is taken.
<voltage> - Enter the high threshold warning value here.
low_warning - Specify the low threshold for the warning. When the operating parameter falls below this value, the action associated with the warning is taken.
<voltage> - Enter the low threshold warning value here.
bias_current_threshold - Specify the threshold of the optic module’s bias current. The range is from 0 to 131 mA.
high_alarm - Specify the threshold of the optic module’s output current.
<milliampere> - Enter the high threshold alarm value used here.
low_alarm - Specify the threshold of optic module’s received current.
<milliampere> - Enter the low threshold alarm value used here.
281
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
high_warning - Specify the high threshold for the warning. When the operating parameter rises above this value, the action associated with the warning is taken.
<milliampere> - Enter the high threshold warning value here.
low_warning - Specify the low threshold for the warning. When the operating parameter falls below this value, the action associated with the warning is taken.
<milliampere> - Enter the low threshold warning value here.
tx_power_threshold - Specify the threshold of the optic module’s output power. If the unit is mW, the range ois from 0 to 6.5535 mW. If the unit is dBm, the range is form -40 to 8.1647 dBm.
high_alarm - Specify the high threshold for the alarm. When the operating parameter rises above this value, the action associated with the alarm is taken.
<mw_or_dbm> - Enter the high threshold alarm value used here.
low_alarm - Specify the low threshold for the alarm. When the operating parameter falls below this value, the action associated with the alarm is taken.
<mw_or_dbm> - Enter the low threshold alarm value used here.
high_warning - Specify the high threshold for the warning. When the operating parameter rises above this value, the action associated with the warning is taken.
<mw_or_dbm> - Enter the high threshold warning value here.
low_warning - Specify the low threshold for the warning. When the operating parameter falls below this value, the action associated with the warning is taken.
<mw_or_dbm> - Enter the low threshold warning value here.
rx_power_threshold - Specify the threshold of optic module’s received power. If the unit is mW, the range ois from 0 to 6.5535 mW. If the unit is dBm, the range is form -40 to 8.1647 dBm.
high_alarm - Specify the high threshold for the alarm. When the operating parameter rises above this value, the action associated with the alarm is taken.
<mw_or_dbm> - Enter the high threshold alarm value used here.
low_alarm - Specify the low threshold for the alarm. When the operating parameter falls below this value, the action associated with the alarm is taken.
<mw_or_dbm> - Enter the low threshold alarm value used here.
high_warning - Specify the high threshold for the warning. When the operating parameter rises above this value, the action associated with the warning is taken.
<mw_or_dbm> - Enter the high threshold warning value here.
low_warning - Specify the low threshold for the warning. When the operating parameter falls below this value, the action associated with the warning is taken.
<mw_or_dbm> - Enter the low threshold warning value here.
state - Specify the DDM state to enable or disable. If the state is disabled, no DDM action will take effect.
enable - Specify to enable the DDM state.
disable - Specify to disable the DDM state.
shutdown - Specify whether or not to shutdown the port when the operating parameter exceeds the corresponding alarm threshold or warning threshold. The default value is none.
alarm - Shuts down the port when the configured alarm threshold range is exceeded.
warning - Shuts down the port when the configured warning threshold range is exceeded.
none - The port will never shut down regardless if the threshold ranges are exceeded or not.
reload_threshold - Specify the reloading threshold limit. Manually reload the DDM threshold configuration.
Restrictions
Only Administrators and Operators can issue this command.
Example
To configure the port 25’s temperature threshold:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config ddm ports 25 temperature_threshold high_alarm 84.9532 low_alarm -
10 high_warning 70 low_warning 2.25
Command: config ddm ports 25 temperature_threshold high_alarm 84.9532 low_alarm -10 high_warning 70 low_warning 2.25
According to the DDM precision definition, closest value 84.9531 is chosen.
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
282
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
To configure the port 25’s voltage threshold:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config ddm ports 25 voltage_threshold high_alarm 4.25 low_alarm 2.5 high_warning 3.5 low_warning 3
Command: config ddm ports 25 voltage_threshold high_alarm 4.25 low_alarm 2.5 high_warning 3.5 low_warning 3
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To configure the port 25’s bias current threshold:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config ddm ports 25 bias_current_threshold high_alarm 7.25 low_alarm
0.004 high_warning 0.5 low_warning 0.008
Command: config ddm ports 25 bias_current_threshold high_alarm 7.25 low_alarm 0.004 high_warning 0.5 low_warning 0.008
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To configure the port 25’s transmit power threshold:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config ddm ports 25 bias_current_threshold high_alarm 7.25 low_alarm
0.004 high_warning 0.5 low_warning 0.008
Command: config ddm ports 25 bias_current_threshold high_alarm 7.25 low_alarm 0.004 high_warning 0.5 low_warning 0.008
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To configure the port 25’s receive power threshold:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config ddm ports 25 rx_power_threshold high_alarm 4.55 low_alarm 0.01 high_warning 3.5 low_warning 0.03
Command: config ddm ports 25 rx_power_threshold high_alarm 4.55 low_alarm 0.01 high_warning
3.5 low_warning 0.03
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To configure the port 25’s actions associate with the alarm:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config ddm ports 25 state enable shutdown alarm
Command: config ddm ports 25 state enable shutdown alarm
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
283
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
25-3 show ddm
Description
This command is used to display the DDM global settings.
Format show ddm
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the DDM global settings:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show ddm
Command: show ddm
DDM Log :Enabled
DDM Trap :Disabled
DDM Tx/Rx Power Unit : mw
DGS-3000-26TC:admin
25-4 show ddm ports
Description
This command is used to show the current operating DDM parameters and configuration values of the optic module of the specified ports. There are two types of thresholds: the administrative configuration and the operation configuration threshold.
For the optic port, when a particular threshold was configured by user, it will be shown in this command with a tag indicating that it is a threshold that user configured, else it would be the threshold read from the optic module that is being inserted.
Format show ddm ports {<portlist>} [status | configuration]
Parameters
<portlist> - (Optional) Enter the range of ports to be displayed here.
status - Specify that the operating parameter will be displayed.
configuration - Specify that the configuration values will be displayed.
Restrictions
None.
284
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Example
To display ports 25-26’s operating parameters:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show ddm ports 25-26 status
Command: show ddm ports 25-26 status
Port Temperature Voltage Bias Current TX Power RX Power
(in Celsius) (V) (mA) (mW) (mW)
------- ------------- ---------- -------------- ---------- ------------
25 - - - - -
26 - - - - -
CTRL+C ESC q Quit SPACE n Next Page p Previous Page r Refresh
25-5 config ddm power_unit
Description
This command is used to configure the unit of DDM TX and RX power.
Format config ddm power_unit [mw | dbm]
Parameters
mw - Specify the DDM TX and RX power unit as mW.
dbm - Specify the DDM TX and RX power unit as dBm.
Restrictions
Only Administrators and Operators can issue this command.
Example
To configure the DDM TX and RX power unit as dBm:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config ddm power_unit dbm
Command: config ddm power_unit dbm
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
285
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 26 D-Link Unidirectional Link
Detection (DULD) Command List
config duld ports [<portlist> | all] {state [enable | disable] | mode [shutdown | normal] | discovery_time <sec 5-
65535>}(1)
show duld ports {<portlist>}
26-1 config duld ports
Description
This command is used to configure unidirectional link detection on ports. Unidirectional link detection provides discovery mechanism based on 802.3ah to discovery its neighbor. If the OAM discovery can complete in configured discovery time, it concludes the link is bidirectional. Otherwise, it starts detecting task to detect the link status.
Format config duld ports [<portlist> | all] {state [enable | disable] | mode [shutdown | normal] | discovery_time
<sec 5-65535>}(1)
Parameters
<portlist> - Enter a range of ports.
all - Specify to select all ports.
state - Specify these ports unidirectional link detection status.
enable - Enables unidirectional link detection status.
disable - Disables unidirectional link detection status.
mode - Specify the mode when detecting unidirectional link.
shutdown - If any unidirectional link is detected, disables the port and logs an event.
normal - Only logs an event when a unidirectional link is detected.
discovery_time - Specify these ports neighbor discovery time. If OAM discovery cannot complete in the discovery time, the unidirectional link detection will start.
<sec 5-65535> - Enter a time in second. The default discovery time is 5 seconds.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To enable unidirectional link detection on port 1:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config duld ports 1 state enable
Command: config duld ports 1 state enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
286
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
26-2 show duld ports
Description
This command is used to show unidirectional link detection information.
Format show duld ports {<portlist>}
Parameters
<portlist> - (Optional) Enter a range of ports.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show ports 1-4 unidirectional link detection information:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show duld ports 1-4
Command: show duld ports 1-4
Port Admin State Oper Status Mode Link Status Discovery Time(Sec)
----- ----------- ----------- -------- -------------- -------------------
1 Enabled Disabled Normal Unknown 5
2 Disabled Disabled Normal Unknown 5
3 Disabled Disabled Normal Unknown 5
4 Disabled Disabled Normal Unknown 5
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
287
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 27 Domain Name System (DNS)
Resolver Command List
config name_server add [<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr>] {primary}
config name_server delete [<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr>] {primary}
config name_server timeout <second 1-60> show name_server
create host_name <name 255> [<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr>]
delete host_name [<name 255> | all]
show host_name {static | dynamic} enable dns_resolver disable dns_resolver
27-1 config name_server add
Description
This command is used to add a DNS resolver name server to the Switch.
Format config name_server add [<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr>] {primary}
Parameters
<ipaddr> - Enter the IPv4 address of the DNS Resolver name server.
<ipv6addr> - Enter the IPv6 address of the DNS Resolver name server.
primary - (Optional) Specify that the name server is a primary name server.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To add DNS Resolver primary name server 10.10.10.10:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config name_server add 10.10.10.10 primary
Command: config name_server add 10.10.10.10 primary
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
27-1 config name_server delete
Description
This command is used to delete a DNS resolver name server from the Switch.
288
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Format config name_server delete [<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr>] {primary}
Parameters
<ipaddr> - Enter the IPv4 address of the DNS Resolver name server.
<ipv6addr> - Enter the IPv6 address of the DNS Resolver name server.
primary - (Optional) Specify that the name server is a primary name server.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To delete DNS Resolver name server 10.10.10.1:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config name_server delete 10.10.10.1
Command: config name_server delete 10.10.10.1
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
27-2 config name_server timeout
Description
This command is used to configure the timeout value of a DNS Resolver name server.
Format config name_server timeout <sec 1-60>
Parameters
<sec 1-60> - Enter the maximum time waiting for a response from a specified name server.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure DNS Resolver name server time out to 10 seconds:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config name_server timeout 10
Command: config name_server timeout 10
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
289
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
27-3 show name_server
Description
This command is used to display the current DNS Resolver name servers and name server time out on the Switch.
Format show name_server
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the current DNS Resolver name servers and name server time out:
Static Name Server Table:
Server IP Address Priority
------------------------------------------- -----------
10.10.10.10 Primary
10.1.1.1 Secondary
Dynamic Name Server Table:
Server IP Address Priority
------------------------------------------- -----------
10.48.74.122 Primary
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
27-4 create host_name
Description
This command is used to create the static host name entry of the Switch.
Format create host_name <name 255> [<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr>]
Parameters
<name 255> - Enter the hostname used. This name can be up to 255 characters long.
<ipaddr> - Enter the host IP address.
<ipv6addr> - Enter the host IPv6 address.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
290
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Example
To create static host name “www.example.com”:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#create host_name www.example.com 10.10.10.10
Command: create host_name www.example.com 10.10.10.10
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
27-5 delete host_name
Description
This command is used to delete the static or dynamic host name entries of the Switch.
Format delete host_name [<name 255> | all]
Parameters
<name 255> - Enter the hostname. This name can be up to 255 characters long.
all - Specify that all the hostnames will be deleted.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To delete the static host name entry “www.example.com”:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#delete host_name www.example.com
Command: delete host_name www.example.com
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
27-6 show host_name
Description
This command is used to display the current host name.
Format show host_name {static | dynamic}
Parameters
static - (Optional) Specify to display the static host name entries.
dynamic - (Optional) Specify to display the dynamic host name entries.
291
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the static and dynamic host name entries:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show host_name
Command: show host_name
Static Host Name Table
Host Name : www.example.com
IP Address : 10.10.10.10
Total Static Entries: 1
Dynamic Host Name Table
Total Dynamic Entries: 0
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
27-7 enable dns_resolver
Description
This command is used to enable the DNS Resolver state of the Switch.
Format enable dns_resolver
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure the DNS Resolver state to enabled:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#enable dns_resolver
Command: enable dns_resolver
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
292
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
27-8 disable dns_resolver
Description
This command is used to disable the DNS Resolver state of the Switch.
Format disable dns_resolver
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure the DNS Resolver state to disabled:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#disable dns_resolver
Command: disable dns_resolver
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
293
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 28 DoS Attack Prevention Command
List
config dos_prevention dos_type [{land_attack | blat_attack | tcp_null_scan | tcp_xmasscan | tcp_synfin | tcp_syn_srcport_less_1024 | ping_death_attack | tcp_tiny_frag_attack} | all] {action [drop] | state [enable | disable]}
show dos_prevention {land_attack | blat_attack | tcp_null_scan | tcp_xmasscan | tcp_synfin | tcp_syn_srcport_less_1024 | ping_death_attack | tcp_tiny_frag_attack}
config dos_prevention trap [enable | disable]
config dos_prevention log [enable | disable]
28-1 config dos_prevention dos_type
Description
This command is used to configure the prevention of each Denial-of-Service (DoS) attack, including state and action. The packet matching will be done by hardware. For a specific type of attack, the content of the packet will be matched against a specific pattern.
Format config dos_prevention dos_type [{land_attack | blat_attack | tcp_null_scan | tcp_xmasscan | tcp_synfin | tcp_syn_srcport_less_1024 | ping_death_attack | tcp_tiny_frag_attack} | all] {action [drop] | state [enable | disable]}
Parameters
land_attack - (Optional) Checks whether the source address is equal to destination address of a received IP packet.
blat_attack - (Optional) Checks whether the source port is equal to destination port of a received TCP packet.
tcp_null_scan - (Optional) Checks whether a received TCP packet contains a sequence number of 0 and no flags
tcp_xmasscan - (Optional) Checks whether a received TCP packet contains URG, Push and FIN flags.
tcp_synfin - (Optional) Checks whether a received TCP packet contains FIN and SYN flags.
tcp_syn_srcport_less_1024 - (Optional) Checks whether the TCP packets source ports are less than 1024 packets.
ping_death_attack - (Optional) Detects whether received packets are fragmented ICMP packets.
tcp_tiny_frag_attack - (Optional) Checks whether the packets are TCP tiny fragment packets.
all - Specify all DoS attack type.
action - (Optional) When enabling DoS prevention, the following actions can be taken.
drop - Drops DoS attack packets.
state - (Optional) Specify the DoS attack prevention state.
enable - Enables DoS attack prevention.
disable - Disables DoS attack prevention.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure land attack and blat attack prevention, the action is drop:
294
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config dos_prevention dos_type land_attack blat_attack action drop state enable
Command: config dos_prevention dos_type land_attack blat_attack action drop state enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
28-2 show dos_prevention
Description
This command is used to display DoS prevention information, including the Trap/Log state, the type of DoS attack, the prevention state, the corresponding action if the prevention is enabled and the counter information of the DoS packet.
Format show dos_prevention {land_attack | blat_attack | tcp_null_scan | tcp_xmasscan | tcp_synfin | tcp_syn_srcport_less_1024 | ping_death_attack | tcp_tiny_frag_attack}
Parameters
land_attack - (Optional) Checks whether the source address is equal to destination address of a received IP packet.
blat_attack - (Optional) Checks whether the source port is equal to destination port of a received TCP packet.
tcp_null_scan - (Optional) Checks whether a received TCP packet contains a sequence number of 0 and no flags
tcp_xmasscan - (Optional) Checks whether a received TCP packet contains URG, Push and FIN flags.
tcp_synfin - (Optional) Checks whether a received TCP packet contains FIN and SYN flags.
tcp_syn_srcport_less_1024 - (Optional) Checks whether the TCP packets source ports are less than 1024 packets.
ping_death_attack - (Optional) Detects whether received packets are fragmented ICMP packets.
tcp_tiny_frag_attack - (Optional) Checks whether the packets are TCP tiny fragment packets.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display DoS prevention information:
295
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show dos_prevention
Command: show dos_prevention
Trap:Disabled Log:Disabled Function Version : 1.01
DoS Type State Action Frame Counts
-------------------------- -------- ---------------- ------------
Land Attack Enabled Drop -
Blat Attack Enabled Drop -
TCP Null Scan Disabled Drop -
TCP Xmas Scan Disabled Drop -
TCP SYNFIN Disabled Drop -
TCP SYN SrcPort Less 1024 Disabled Drop -
Ping of Death Attack Disabled Drop -
TCP Tiny Fragment Attack Disabled Drop -
CTRL+C ESC q Quit SPACE n Next Page p Previous Page r Refresh
28-3 config dos_prevention trap
Description
This command is used to enable or disable DoS prevention trap state.
Format config dos_prevention trap [enable | disable]
Parameters
enable - Enables DoS prevention trap state.
disable - Disables DoS prevention trap state.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To disable DoS prevention trap:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config dos_prevention trap disable
Command: config dos_prevention trap disable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
28-4 config dos_prevention log
Description
This command is used to enable or disable dos prevention log state.
296
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Format config dos_prevention log [enable | disable]
Parameters
enable - Enables DoS prevention log state.
disable - Disables DoS prevention log state.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To enable DoS prevention log:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config dos_prevention log enable
Command: config dos_prevention log enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
297
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 29 Energy Efficient Ethernet (EEE)
Command List
config eee ports [<portlist> | all] state [enable | disable]
show eee ports {<portlist>}
29-1 config eee ports
Description
This command is used to enable or disable the EEE function on the specified port(s) on the Switch.
NOTE: The two functions, EEE and ERPS, are mutually exclusive.
Format config eee ports [<portlist> | all] state [enable | disable]
Parameters
<portlist> - Enter a range of ports to be configured.
all - Specify to configure all ports.
state - Specify the EEE state. The default is disabled.
enable - Enable the EEE function for the specified port(s).
disable - Disable the EEE function for the specified port(s).
Restrictions
Only Administrators and Operators can issue this command.
Example
To enable the EEE state on ports 2-5:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config eee ports 2-5 state enable
Command: config eee ports 2-5 state enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
29-2 show eee ports
Description
This command is used to display the EEE function state on the specified port(s).
Format show eee ports {<portlist>}
298
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Parameters
<portlist> - (Optional) Enter a list of ports to be displayed.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the EEE state:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show eee ports 1-6,9
Command: show eee ports 1-6,9
Port State
--------- -----------
1 Disabled
2 Enabled
3 Enabled
4 Enabled
5 Enabled
6 Disabled
9 Disabled
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
299
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 30 Ethernet Ring Protection
Switching (ERPS) Command List
enable erps disable erps
create erps raps_vlan <vlanid 1-4094>
delete erps raps_vlan <vlanid 1-4094>
config erps raps_vlan <vlanid> [state [enable | disable] | ring_mel <value 0-7> | ring_port [west [<port> | virtual_channel] | east [<port> | virtual_channel]] | rpl_port [west | east | none] | rpl_owner [enable | disable] | protected_vlan [add | delete] vlanid <vidlist> | sub_ring raps_vlan <vlanid> tc_propagation state [enable | disable] | [add | delete] sub_ring raps_vlan <vlanid> | revertive [enable | disable] | timer {holdoff_time
<millisecond 0 - 10000> | guard_time <millisecond 10 - 2000 > | wtr_time <min 5 - 12>}(1)]
config erps log [enable | disable]
show erps {raps_vlan <vlanid> {sub_ring}}
config erps trap [enable | disable]
30-1 enable erps
Description
This command is used to enable the global ERPS function on a switch. When both the global state and the specified ring ERPS state are enabled, the specified ring will be activated. The default state is disabled.
The global ERPS function cannot be enabled, when any ERPS ring on the device is enabled and the integrity of any ring parameter is not available.
For each ring with the ring state enabled when ERPS is enabled, the following integrity will be checked:
1. R-APS VLAN is created.
2. The Ring port is a tagged member port of the R-APS VLAN.
3. The RPL port is specified if the RPL owner is enabled.
4. The RPL port is not specified as virtual channel.
NOTE: The two functions, EEE and ERPS, are mutually exclusive.
Format enable erps
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To enable ERPS:
300
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#enable erps
Command: enable erps
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
30-2 disable erps
Description
This command is used to disable the global ERPS function on a switch.
Format disable erps
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To disable ERPS:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#disable erps
Command: disable erps
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
30-3 create erps raps_vlan
Description
This command is used to create an R-APS VLAN on a switch. Only one R-APS VLAN should be used to transfer
R-APS messages.
Note that the R-APS VLAN must already have been created by the create vlan command.
Format create erps raps_vlan <vlanid 1-4094>
Parameters
<vlanid 1-4094> - Enter the VLAN which will be the R-APS VLAN.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
301
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Example
To create an R-APS VLAN:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#create erps raps_vlan 4094
Command: create erps raps_vlan 4094
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
30-4 delete erps raps_vlan
Description
This command is used to delete an R-APS VLAN on a switch. When an R-APS VLAN is deleted, all parameters related to this R-APS VLAN will also be deleted. This command can only be issued when the ring is not active.
Format delete erps raps_vlan <vlanid 1-4094>
Parameters
<vlanid 1-4094> - Enter the VLAN which will be the R-APS VLAN.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To delete an R-APS VLAN:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#delete erps raps_vlan 4094
Command: delete erps raps_vlan 4094
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
30-5 config erps raps_vlan
Description
This command is used to configure the ERPS R-APS VLAN settings.
The ring MEL is one field in the R-APS PDU. Note that if CFM (Connectivity Fault Management) and ERPS are used at the same time, the R-APS PDU is one of a suite of Ethernet OAM PDU. The behavior for forwarding of R-
APS PDU should follow the Ethernet OAM. If the MEL of R-APS PDU is not higher than the level of the MEP with the same VLAN on the ring ports, the R-APS PDU cannot be forwarded on the ring.
Restrictions apply for ports that are included in a link aggregation group. A link aggregation group can be configured as a ring port by specifying the master port of the link aggregation port. Only the master port can be specified as a ring port. If the specified link aggregation group is eliminated, the master port retains its ring port status. If the ring port configured on virtual channel, the ring which the port connects to will be considered as a subring.
302
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
RPL port - Specify one of the R-APS VLAN ring ports as the RPL port. To remove an RPL port from an R-APS
VLAN, use the none designation for rpl_port.
RPL owner - Specify the node as the RPL owner.
Note that the virtual channel cannot be configured as RPL. For example, if a ring port is configured on the virtual channel and the ring port is configured as an RPL port, an error message will be display and the configuration will fail.
The R-APS VLAN cannot be the protected VLAN. The protected VLAN can be one that has already been created, or it can be used for a VLAN that has not yet been created.
Holdoff timer - The Holdoff timer is used to filter out intermittent link faults when link failures occur during the protection switching process. When a ring node detects a link failure, it will start the holdoff timer and report the link failure event (R-APS BPDU with SF flag) after the link failure is confirmed within period of time specified.
Guard timer - Guard timer is used to prevent ring nodes from receiving outdated R-APS messages. This timer is used during the protection switching process after the link failure recovers. When the link node detects the recovery of the link, it will report the link failure recovery event (R-APS PDU with NR flag) and start the guard timer.
Before the guard timer expires, all received R-APS messages are ignored by this ring node, except in the case where a burst of three R-APS event messages that indicates the topology of a sub-ring has changed and the node needs to flush FDB are received on the node. In this case the recovered link does not go into a blocking state. The
Guard Timer should be greater than the maximum expected forwarding delay for which one R-APS message circles around the ring.
WTR timer - WTR timer is used to prevent frequent operation of the protection switch due to an intermittent defect.
This timer is used during the protection switching process when a link failure recovers. It is only used by the RPL owner. When the RPL owner in protection state receives R-APS PDU with an NR flag, it will start the WTR timer.
The RPL owner will block the original unblocked RPL port and start to send R-APS PDU with an RB flag after the link recovery is confirmed within this period of time.
Revertive mode- When revertive is enabled, the traffic link is restored to the working transport link. When revertive is disabled, the traffic link is allowed to use the RPL, after recovering from a failure.
When both the global state and the specified ring ERPS state are enabled, the specified ring will be activated. EEE,
STP and LBD should be disabled on the ring ports before the specified ring is activated.
The ring cannot be enabled before the R-APS VLAN is created, and ring ports, RPL port, RPL owner, are configured. Note that these parameters cannot be changed when the ring is activated.
In order to guarantee correct operation, the following integrity will be checked when the ring is enabled and the global ERPS state is enabled.
1. R-APS VLAN is created.
2. The Ring port is the tagged member port of the R-APS VLAN.
3. The RPL port is specified if RPL owner is enabled.
Format config erps raps_vlan <vlanid> [state [enable | disable] | ring_mel <value 0-7> | ring_port [west [<port> | virtual_channel] | east [<port> | virtual_channel]] | rpl_port [west | east | none] | rpl_owner [enable | disable]
| protected_vlan [add | delete] vlanid <vidlist> | sub_ring raps_vlan <vlanid> tc_propagation state [enable | disable] | [add | delete] sub_ring raps_vlan <vlanid> | revertive [enable | disable] | timer {holdoff_time
<millisecond 0 - 10000> | guard_time <millisecond 10 - 2000 > | wtr_time <min 5 - 12>}(1)]
Parameters
<vlanid 1-4094> - Enter the VLAN ID used here.
state - Specify to enable or disable the specified ring.
enable - Enable the state of the specified ring.
disable - Disable the state of the specified ring. The default value is disabled.
ring_mel - Specify the ring MEL of the R-APS function. The default ring MEL is 1.
<value 0-7> - Enter the ring MEL value here. This value should be between 0 and 7.
ring_port - Specify the ring port used.
west - Specify that the port or the virtual channel will be associated with the west ring port.
303
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
<port> - Enter the port number here.
virtual_channel - Specify that the virtual channel will be associated with the west ring port.
east - Specify that the port or the virtual channel will be associated with the east ring port.
<port> - Enter the port number here.
virtual_channel - Specify that the virtual channel will be associated with the east ring port.
rpl_port - Specify the RPL port used.
west - Specify the west ring port as the RPL port.
east - Specify the east ring port as the RPL port.
none - No RPL port on this node. By default, the node has no RPL port.
rpl_owner - Specify to enable or disable the RPL owner node.
enable - Specify the device as an RPL owner node.
disable - This node is not an RPL owner. By default, the RPS owner is disabled.
protected_vlan - Specify to add or delete the protected VLAN group.
add - Add VLANs to the protected VLAN group.
delete - Delete VLANs from the protected VLAN group.
vlanid - Specify the VLAN ID to be removed or added.
<vidlist> - Enter the VLAN ID list here.
sub_ring - Specify that the sub-ring is being configured.
raps_vlan - Specify the R-APS VLAN.
<vlanid> - Enter the VLAN ID used here.
tc_propogation - Specify to configure the state of the topology change propagation for the sub-ring.
state - Specify the propagation state of the topology change for the sub-ring.
enable - Enable the propagation state of the topology change for the sub-ring.
disable - Disable the propagation state of the topology change for the sub-ring.
add - Specify to add a topology change propagation rule.
delete - Specify to delete a topology change propagation rule.
sub_ring - Specify the sub-ring configuration information.
raps_vlan - Specify the R-APS VLAN.
<vlanid> - Enter the R-APS VLAN ID used here
revertive - Specify the state of the R-APS revertive option.
enable - Specify that the R-APS revertive option will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the R-APS revertive option will be disabled.
timer - Specify the R-APS timer used.
holdoff_time - Specify the holdoff time of the R-APS function. The default holdoff time is 0 millisecond.
<millisecond 0-10000> - Enter the hold off time value here. This value must be in the range of 0 to 10000 milliseconds.
guard_time - Specify the guard time of the R-APS function. The default guard time is 500 milliseconds.
<millisecond 10-2000> - Enter the guard time value here. This value must be in the range of 0 to 2000 milliseconds.
wtr_time - Specify the WTR time of the R-APS function.
<min 5 - 12> - Enter the WTR time range value here. The range is from 5 to 12 minutes. The default WTR time is 5 minutes.
Restrictions
Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command.
Example
To configure the MEL of the ERPS ring for a specific R-APS VLAN:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config erps raps_vlan 4094 ring_mel 2
Command: config erps raps_vlan 4094 ring_mel 2
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To set the R-APS east ring port parameter to 7:
304
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config erps raps_vlan 4094 ring_port east 7
Command: config erps raps_vlan 4094 ring_port east 7
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To configure the RPL port for a specific R-APS VLAN:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config erps raps_vlan 4094 rpl_port west
Command: config erps raps_vlan 4094 rpl_port west
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To configure the protected VLAN for a specific R-APS VLAN:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# config erps raps_vlan 4094 protected_vlan add vlanid 10-20
Command: config erps raps_vlan 4094 protected_vlan add vlanid 10-20
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To configure the ERPS timers for a specific R-APS VLAN:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config erps raps_vlan 4094 timer holdoff_time 100 guard_time 1000 wtr_time 10
Command: config erps raps_vlan 4094 timer holdoff_time 100 guard_time 1000 wtr_time 10
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To configure the ring state of the ERPS:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config erps raps_vlan 4094 state enable
Command: config erps raps_vlan 4094 state enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To configure a sub-ring connected to another ring:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# config erps raps_vlan 4094 add sub_ring raps_vlan 4093
Command: config erps raps_vlan 4094 add sub_ring raps_vlan 4093
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To configure the state of topology change propagation:
305
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# config erps raps_vlan 4094 sub_ring raps_vlan 4093 tc_propagation state enable
Command: config erps raps_vlan 4094 sub_ring raps_vlan 4093 tc_propagation state enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
30-6 config erps log
Description
This command is used to configure the log state of the ERPS events.
Format config erps log [enable | disable]
Parameters
enable - Specify to enable an ERPS event in the log state.
disable - Specify to disable an ERPS event in the log state.
Restrictions
Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command.
Example
To enable the ERPS log state:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# config erps log enable
Command: config erps log enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
30-7 show erps
Description
This command is used to display ERPS configuration and operation information.
The port state of the ring port may be as "Forwarding", "Blocking", and "Signal Fail". "Forwarding" indicates that traffic is able to be forwarded. "Blocking" indicates that traffic is blocked by ERPS and a signal failure is not detected on the port. "Signal Fail" indicates that a signal failure is detected on the port and traffic is blocked by
ERPS.
This command displays both admin value and operational value of ring port. The admin value is the latest user configuration. The operational value is actual running configuration. Sometimes, modifying a ring needs more than one command. Before user configure complete, the current configuration may invalid. In this case, to avoid temporary loop, user configuration will not apply to state machine immediately. The ERPS will run protocol by previous configuration which is valid. If the admin value is different from the operational value, it means that the new configuration is not applied.
Both RPL port and RPL owner have admin value and operational value, the reason is same as ring port.
Save function will record the operational value if the operational value is different form the admin value.
306
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Format show erps {raps_vlan <vlanid> {sub_ring}}
Parameters
raps_vlan - (Optional) Specify the R-APS VLAN.
<vlanid> - Enter the VLAN ID used here.
sub_ring - (Optional) Display the sub-ring configuration information.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display ERPS information:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show erps
Command: show erps
ERPS Information
Global Status : Enabled
Log Status : Disabled
Trap Status : Disabled
------------------------
R-APS VLAN : 4092
Ring Status : Enabled
Admin West Port : 5
Operational West Port : 5 (Blocking)
Admin East Port : 7
Operational East Port : 7 (Forwarding)
Admin RPL Port : None
Operational RPL Port : West Port
Admin RPL Owner : Enabled
Operational RPL Owner : Enabled
Protected VLANs : 100-300, 4093, 4094
Ring MEL : 2
Revertive : Enabled
Holdoff Time : 0 milliseconds
Guard Time : 500 milliseconds
WTR Time : 5 minutes
Current Ring State : Idle
------------------------
R-APS VLAN : 4093
Ring Status : Enabled
Admin West Port : 5
Operational West Port : Virtual Channel
Admin East Port : 10
Operational East Port : 10 (Forwarding)
Admin RPL Port : None
Operational RPL Port : None
Admin RPL Owner : Enabled
Operational RPL Owner : Disabled
Protected VLANs : 200-220
Ring MEL : 2
Revertive : Enabled
307
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Holdoff Time : 0 milliseconds
Guard Time : 500 milliseconds
WTR Time : 5 minutes
Current Ring State : Idle
------------------------
R-APS VLAN : 4094
Ring Status : Enabled
Admin West Port : Virtual Channel
Operational West Port : Virtual Channel
Admin East Port : 12
Operational East Port : 12 (Forwarding)
Admin RPL Port : None
Operational RPL Port : None
Admin RPL Owner : Disabled
Operational RPL Owner : Disabled
Protected VLANs : 250-300
Ring MEL : 2
Revertive : Enabled
Holdoff Time : 0 milliseconds
Guard Time : 500 milliseconds
WTR Time : 5 minutes
Current Ring State : Idle
------------------------
Total Ring: 3
DGS-3000:N#show erps raps_vlan 4092 sub_ring
Command: show erps raps_vlan 4092 sub_ring
R-APS VLAN: 4092
Sub-Ring R-APS VLAN TC Propagation State
------------------- ---------------------
4093 Enabled
4094 Enabled
--------------------------------------------
Total Sub-Ring Connected: 2
DGS-30000-26TC:admin#
30-8 config erps trap
Description
This command is used to configure the trap state of ERPS events.
Format config erps trap [enable | disable]
Parameters
enable - Specify to enable the ERPS trap state. The default value is disabled.
disable – Specify to disable the ERPS trap state
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
308
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Example
To enable the ERPS trap state:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# config erps trap enable
Command: config erps trap enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
309
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 31 External Alarm Command List
config external_alarm channel <value 1-2> message <sentence 1-128> show external_alarm
31-1 config external_alarm channel
Description
This command is used to configure external alarm message for a channel.
Format config external_alarm channel <value 1-2> message <sentence 1-128>
Parameters
<value 1-2> - Enter the channel value to be configured.
message - Specify the message to be displayed on the console, log and trap.
<sentence 1-128> - Enter the message to be displayed on the console, log and trap.
Restrictions
Only Administrators and Operators can issue this command.
Example
To configure alarm message for channel 1:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config external_alarm channel 1 message External Alarm: UPS is Exhausted.
Command: config external_alarm channel 1 message External Alarm: UPS is Exhausted.
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
31-2 show external_alarm
Description
This command is used to display the status of external alarm.
Format show external_alarm
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
310
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Example
To display the real-time status of external alarm:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show external_alarm
Command: show external_alarm
Channel Status Alarm Message
----------- --------- -----------------------------------------------------
1 Normal External Alarm: UPS is Exhausted.
2 Normal External Alarm 2
CTRL+C ESC q Quit SPACE n Next Page p Previous Page r Refresh
311
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 32 Filter Command List
config filter netbios [<portlist> | all] state [enable | disable] show filter netbios
config filter extensive_netbios [<portlist> | all] state [enable | disable] show filter extensive_netbios
32-1 config filter netbios
Description
This command is used to configure the Switch to deny the NETBIOS packets on specific ports.
Format config filter netbios [<portlist> | all] state [enable | disable]
Parameters
<portlist> - Enter the list of ports used.
all - Specify that all the ports will be used for the configuration.
state- - Specify the state of the filter to block the NETBIOS packet.
enable - Specify that the state will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the state will be disabled.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure filter netbios state:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config filter netbios 1-10 state enable
Command: config filter netbios 1-10 state enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
32-2 show filter netbios
Description
This command is used to display the NETBIOS filter state on the Switch.
Format show filter netbios
Parameters
None.
312
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the filter netbios list created on the Switch:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show filter netbios
Command: show filter netbios
Enabled ports: 1-3
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
32-3 config filter extensive_netbios
Description
This command is used to configure the Switch to filter NETBIOS packets over 802.3 frame on the specific ports.
Format config filter extensive_netbios [<portlist> | all] state [enable | disable]
Parameters
<portlist> - Enter the list of ports used for this configuration here.
all - Specify that all the ports will be used this configuration.
state - Specify to enable or disable the filter to block the NETBIOS packet over 802.3 frame.
enable - Specify that the filter state will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the filter state will be disabled.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure filter extensive netbios state.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config filter extensive_netbios 1-10 state enable
Command: config filter extensive_netbios 1-10 state enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
32-4 show filter extensive_netbios
Description
This command is used to display the extensive netbios state on the Switch.
Format show filter extensive_netbios
313
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the extensive_state created on the Switch:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show filter extensive_netbios
Command: show filter extensive_netbios
Enabled ports: 1-3
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
314
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 33 Filter Database (FDB) Command
List
create fdb <vlan_name 32> <macaddr> [port <port> | drop]
create fdb vlanid <vidlist> <macaddr> [port <port> | drop]
create multicast_fdb <vlan_name 32> <macaddr>
config multicast_fdb <vlan_name 32> <macaddr> [add | delete] <portlist>
config fdb aging_time <sec 10-1000000>
config multicast vlan_filtering_mode [vlanid <vidlist> | vlan <vlan_name 32> | all] [forward_all_groups | forward_unregistered_groups | filter_unregistered_groups]
delete fdb <vlan_name 32> <macaddr>
clear fdb [vlan <vlan_name 32> | port <port> | all]
show multicast_fdb {[vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vidlist>] | mac_address <macaddr>}
show fdb {[port <port> | vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vidlist> | mac_address <macaddr> | static | aging_time | security]}
show multicast vlan_filtering_mode {[ vlanid < vidlist> | vlan <vlan_name 32>]}
33-1 create fdb
Description
This command is used to create a static entry in the unicast MAC address forwarding table (database).
Format create fdb <vlan_name 32> <macaddr> [port <port> | drop]
Parameters
<vlan_name 32> - Enter a VLAN name associated with a MAC address. The maximum length of the VLAN name is 32 bytes.
<macaddr> - Enter the MAC address to be added to the static forwarding table.
port - The port number corresponding to the MAC destination address. The switch will always forward traffic to the specified device through this port.
<port> - Enter the port number corresponding to the MAC destination address here.
drop - Specify the action drop to be taken.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To create a unicast MAC forwarding entry:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#create fdb default 00-00-00-00-01-02 port 5
Command: create fdb default 00-00-00-00-01-02 port 5
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To filter a unicast MAC:
315
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#create fdb default 00-00-00-00-01-02 drop
Command: create fdb default 00-00-00-00-01-02 drop
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
33-2 create fdb vlanid
Description
This command is used to create a static entry in the unicast MAC address forwarding table (database).
Format create fdb vlanid <vidlist> <macaddr> [port <port> | drop]
Parameters
<vidlist> - Enter a VLAN ID associated with a MAC address.
<macaddr> - Enter the MAC address to be added to the static forwarding table.
port - The port number corresponding to the MAC destination address. The switch will always forward traffic to the specified device through this port.
<port> - Enter the port number corresponding to the MAC destination address here.
drop - Specify the action drop to be taken.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To create a unicast MAC forwarding entry:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#create fdb vlanid 1 00-00-00-00-02-02 port 5
Command: create fdb vlanid 1 00-00-00-00-02-02 port 5
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To filter a unicast MAC:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#create fdb vlanid 1 00-00-00-00-02-02 drop
Command: create fdb vlanid 1 00-00-00-00-02-02 drop
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
33-3 create multicast_fdb
Description
This command is used to create a static entry in the multicast MAC address forwarding table (database).
316
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Format create multicast_fdb <vlan_name 32> <macaddr>
Parameters
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the VLAN name on which the MAC address resides. The maximum name length is 32.
<macaddr> - Enter the multicasts MAC address to be added to the static forwarding table.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To create a multicast MAC forwarding entry to the default VLAN:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#create multicast_fdb default 01-00-5E-00-00-00
Command: create multicast_fdb default 01-00-5E-00-00-00
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
33-4 config multicast_fdb
Description
This command is used to configure the Switch’s multicast MAC address forwarding database.
Format config multicast_fdb <vlan_name 32> <macaddr> [add | delete] <portlist>
Parameters
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the VLAN name on which the MAC address resides. The maximum name length is 32.
<macaddr> - Enter the MAC address that will be added or deleted to the forwarding table.
add - Specify to add ports to the multicast forwarding table.
delete - Specify to remove ports from the multicast forwarding table.
<portlist> - Enter a range of ports to be configured.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To add a multicast MAC forwarding entry to the default VLAN on port 1 to 5:
317
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config multicast_fdb default 01-00-5E-00-00-00 add 1-5
Command: config multicast_fdb default 01-00-5E-00-00-00 add 1-5
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
33-5 config fdb aging_time
Description
This command is used to configure the MAC address table aging time. The aging time affects the learning process of the Switch. Dynamic forwarding table entries, which are made up of the source MAC addresses and their associated port numbers, are deleted from the table if they are not accessed within the aging time. The aging time can be from 10 to 1000000 seconds with a default value of 300 seconds. A very long aging time can result in dynamic forwarding table entries that are out-of-date or no longer exist. This may cause incorrect packet forwarding decisions by the Switch. If the aging time is too short however, many entries may be aged out too soon.
This will result in a high percentage of received packets whose source addresses cannot be found in the forwarding table, in which case the Switch will broadcast the packet to all ports, negating many of the benefits of having a switch.
Format config fdb aging_time <sec 10-1000000>
Parameters
<sec 10-1000000> - Enter the FDB age out time between 10 to 1000000 seconds.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure the MAC address table aging time to 600 seconds:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config fdb aging_time 600
Command: config fdb aging_time 600
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
33-6 config multicast vlan_filtering_mode
Description
This command is used to configure the multicast packet filtering mode for VLANs.
The registered group will be forwarded to the range of ports in the multicast forwarding database.
Format config multicast vlan_filtering_mode [vlanid <vidlist> | vlan <vlan_name 32> | all] [forward_all_groups | forward_unregistered_groups | filter_unregistered_groups]
318
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Parameters
vlanid - Specify a list of VLANs to be configured.
<vidlist> - Enter the VLAN ID list here.
vlan - Specify the name of the VLAN. The maximum name length is 32.
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the VLAN name can be up to 32 characters long.
all - Specify all configured VLANs.
forward_all_groups - Both the registered group and the unregistered group will be forwarded to all member ports of the specified VLAN where the multicast traffic comes in.
forward_unregistered_groups - The unregistered group will be forwarded to all member ports of the VLAN where the multicast traffic comes in.
filter_unregistered_groups - The unregistered group will be filtered.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure the multicast packet filtering mode to filter all unregistered multicast groups for the VLAN 200 to 300:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config multicast vlan_filtering_mode vlanid 200-300 filter_unregistered_groups
Command: config multicast vlan_filtering_mode vlanid 200-300 filter_unregistered_groups
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
33-7 delete fdb
Description
This command is used to delete a static entry from the forwarding database.
Format delete fdb <vlan_name 32> <macaddr>
Parameters
<vlan_name 32> - Enter VLAN name on which the MAC address resides. The maximum name length is 32.
<macaddr> - Enter the multicast MAC address to be deleted from the static forwarding table.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To delete a static FDB entry:
319
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#delete fdb default 00-00-00-00-01-02
Command: delete fdb default 00-00-00-00-01-02
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
33-8 clear fdb
Description
This command is used to clear the Switch’s forwarding database for dynamically learned MAC addresses.
Format clear fdb [vlan <vlan_name 32> | port <port> | all]
Parameters
vlan - Clears the FDB entry by specifying the VLAN name.
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the VLAN name on which the MAC address resides. The maximum name length is
32.
port - Clears the FDB entry by specifying the port number.
<port> - Enter the port number corresponding to the MAC destination address. The switch will always forward traffic to the specified device through this port.
all - Clears all dynamic entries in the Switch’s forwarding database.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To clear all FDB dynamic entries:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#clear fdb all
Command: clear fdb all
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
33-9 show multicast_fdb
Description
This command is used to display the multicast forwarding database of the Switch.
Format show multicast_fdb {[vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vidlist>] | mac_address <macaddr>}
Parameters
vlan - (Optional) The name of the VLAN on which the MAC address resides.
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the VLAN name here. The VLAN name can be up to 32 characters long.
320
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
vlanid - (Optional) Displays the entries for the VLANs indicated by VID list.
<vidlist> - Enter the VLAN ID list here.
mac_address - (Optional) Specify a MAC address, for which FDB entries will be displayed.
<macaddr> - Enter the MAC address here.
If no parameter is specified, all multicast FDB entries will be displayed.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the multicast MAC address table:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show multicast_fdb
Command: show multicast_fdb
VLAN Name : default
MAC Address : 01-00-5E-00-00-00
Egress Ports : 1-5
Mode : Static
Total Entries: 1
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
33-10 show fdb
Description
This command is used to display the current unicast MAC address forwarding database.
Format show fdb {[port <port> | vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vidlist> | mac_address <macaddr> | static | aging_time | security]}
Parameters
port - (Optional) Displays the entries for a specified port.
<port> - Enter the port number here.
vlan - (Optional) Displays the entries for a specific VLAN. The maximum name length is 32.
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the VLAN name here. The VLAN name can be up to 32 characters long.
vlanid - (Optional) Displays the entries for the VLANs indicated by VID list.
<vidlist> - Enter the VLAN ID list here.
mac_address - (Optional) Displays a specific MAC address.
<macaddr> - Enter the MAC address here.
static - (Optional) Displays all permanent entries.
aging_time - (Optional) Displays the unicast MAC address aging time.
security - (Optional) Displays the FDB entries that are created by the security module.
If no parameter is specified, system will display the unicast address table.
Restrictions
None.
321
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Example
To display the FDB table:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show fdb
Command: show fdb
Unicast MAC Address Aging Time = 300
VID VLAN Name MAC Address Port Type Status
---- -------------------------------- ----------------- ----- ------- -------
1 default 00-01-02-03-04-00 cpu Self Forward
1 default 00-23-7D-BC-08-44 1 Dynamic Forward
1 default 00-23-7D-BC-2E-18 1 Dynamic Forward
1 default 00-26-5A-AE-CA-1C 1 Dynamic Forward
1 default 60-33-4B-C4-52-1A 1 Dynamic Forward
Total Entries: 5
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To display the security FDB table:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show fdb security
Command: show fdb security
VID MAC Address Port Type Status Security Module
---- ---------------- ----- ------- -------- ---------------
1 00-00-00-10-00-01 1 Dynamic Drop 802.1X
1 00-00-00-10-00-02 2 Static Forward WAC
1 00-00-00-10-00-04 4 Static Forward Port Security
1 00-00-00-10-00-0A 5 Static Forward MAC-based Access Control
1 00-00-00-10-00-06 6 Dynamic Drop Compound Authentication
Total Entries: 5
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
33-11 show multicast vlan_filtering_mode
Description
This command is used to show the multicast packet filtering mode for VLANs.
NOTE: A product supports the multicast VLAN filtering mode could not support the port filtering mode at the same time.
Format show multicast vlan_filtering_mode {[vlanid < vidlist> | vlan <vlan_name 32>]}
Parameters
vlanid - (Optional) Specify a list of VLANs to be configured.
<vidlist> - Enter the VLAN ID list here.
322
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
vlan - (Optional) Specify the name of the VLAN. The maximum name length is 32.
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the VLAN name here. The VLAN name can be up to 32 characters long.
If no parameter is specified, the device will show all multicast filtering settings in the device.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show the multicast vlan_filtering_mode for VLANs:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show multicast vlan_filtering_mode
Command: show multicast vlan_filtering_mode
VLAN ID/VLAN Name Multicast Filter Mode
---------------------------------------- -----------------------------
1 /default forward_unregistered_groups
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
323
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 34 Flash File System (FFS) Command
List
show storage_media_info
md {<drive_id>} <pathname>
rd {<drive_id>} <pathname>
cd {<pathname>}
dir {<drive_id>} {<pathname>}
rename {<drive_id>} <pathname> <filename>
del {<drive_id>} <pathname> {recursive}
erase {<drive_id>} <pathname>
move {<drive_id>} <pathname> {<drive_id>} <pathname>
copy {<drive_id>} <pathname> {<drive_id>} <pathname>
34-1 show storage_media_info
Description
This command is used to display the information of the storage media available on the system. The information for a media includes the drive number, the media identification.
Format show storage_media_info
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the storage media’s information:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show storage_media_info
Command: show storage_media_info
Drive Media Type Size Label FS Type
----- ---------- -------- ----------- ------- c:/ Flash 28 MB FFS
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
34-2 md
Description
This command is used to create a directory.
324
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Format md {<drive_id>} <pathname>
Parameters
<drive_id> - (Optional) Enter the drive ID used, for example, C:.
<pathname> - Enter the directory. The path name can be specified either as a full path name or partial name. For partial path name, it indicates the file is in the current directory. The drive ID also included in this parameter, for example, c:/config/boot-up.cfg.
Restrictions
Only Administrators and Operators can issue this command.
Example
To make a directory:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#md c:/abc
Command: md c:/abc
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
34-3 rd
Description
This command is used to remove a directory. If there are files still existing in the directory, this command will fail and return error message.
Format rd {<drive_id>} <pathname>
Parameters
<drive_id> - (Optional) Enter the drive ID used, for example, C:.
<pathname> - Enter the directory to be removed. The path name can be specified either as a full path name or partial name. For partial path name, it indicates the file is in the current directory.
Restrictions
Only Administrators and Operators can issue this command.
Example
To remove a directory:
325
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#rd c:/abc
Command: rd c:/abc
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
34-4 cd
Description
This command is used to change the current directory. The current directory is changed under the current drive. If you want to change the working directory to the directory in another drive, then you need to change the current drive to the desired drive, and then change the current directory. The current drive and current directory will be displayed if the <pathname> is not specified.
Format cd {<pathname>}
Parameters
<pathname> - (Optional) Enter the directory to be navigated to. The path name can be specified either as a full path name or partial name. For partial path name, it indicates the file is in the current directory.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To change to other directory or display current directory path:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#cd
Command: cd
Current work directory: "/c:".
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
34-5 dir
Description
This command is used to list all the files located in a directory of a drive.
If pathname is not specified, then all of the files in the specified drive will be displayed. If none of the parameters are specified, the files in the current drive will be displayed.
Format dir {<drive_id>} {<pathname>}
Parameters
<drive_id> - (Optional) Enter the drive ID used, for example, C:.
326
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
<pathname> - (Optional) Enter the directory to be displayed. The path name can be specified either as a full path name or partial name. For partial path name, it indicates the file is in the current directory.
Restrictions
None.
Example
List the files:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#dir
Command: dir
Directory of /c:
Idx Info Attr Size Update Time Name
--- ------- ---- -------- ------------------- ----------------
1 RUN(*) -rw- 5491536 2000/01/01 00:41:03 runtime.had
2 CFG(*) -rw- 31142 2000/01/01 02:19:40 config.cfg
3 d--- 2000/01/01 00:00:16 system
29618 KB total (24127 KB free)
(*) -with boot-up info (b) -with backup info
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
34-6 rename
Description
This command is used to rename a file. Note that for standalone device, the unit argument is not needed. This command is used to rename a file in the file system. The pathname Specify the file (in path form) to be renamed and the filename Specify the new filename. If the pathname is not a full path, then it refers to a path under the current directory for the drive. The renamed file will stay in the same directory.
Format rename {<drive_id>} <pathname> <filename>
Parameters
<drive_id> - (Optional) Enter the drive ID used, for example, C:.
<pathname> - Enter the file (in path form) to be renamed.
<filename> - Enter the new name of the file.
Restrictions
Only Administrators and Operators can issue this command.
Example
To rename a file:
327
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#rename run.had run1.had
Command: rename run.had run1.had
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
34-7 del
Description
This command is used to delete a file, either physically or softly. It is also used to delete a directory and its contents. If two files with the same name under the same directory are softly deleted sequentially, only the last one will exist. Deleting, copying, renaming or moving the already softly deleted file is not acceptable.
System will prompt if the target file is a firmware or configuration file of which the type is boot-up.
Format del {<drive_id>} <pathname> {recursive}
Parameters
<drive_id> - (Optional) Enter the drive ID used, for example, C:.
<pathname> - Enter the file or directory to be deleted. If it is specified in the associated form, then it is related to the current directory.
recursive - (Optional) Specify to delete a directory and its contents, even if it’s not empty.
Restrictions
Only Administrators and Operators can issue this command.
Example
Delete a directory with parameter “recursive”:
328
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#dir
Command: dir
Directory of / c:
Idx Info Attr Size Update Time Name
--- ------- ---- -------- ------------------- ----------------
1 drw- 0 2000/04/02 06:02:04 12
2 CFG(*) -rw- 29661 2000/04/01 05:54:38 config.cfg
3 RUN(*) -rw- 4879040 2000/03/26 03:15:11 runtime.had
4 d--- 0 2000/04/01 05:17:36 system
29618 KB total (24727 KB free)
(*) -with boot-up info (b) -with backup info
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#del 12 recursive
Command: del 12 recursive
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#dir
Command: dir
Directory of / c:
Idx Info Attr Size Update Time Name
--- ------- ---- -------- ------------------- ----------------
1 CFG(*) -rw- 29661 2000/04/01 05:54:38 config.cfg
2 RUN(*) -rw- 4879040 2000/03/26 03:15:11 runtime.had
3 d--- 0 2000/04/01 05:17:36 system
29618 KB total (24727 KB free)
(*) -with boot-up info (b) -with backup info
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
34-8 erase
Description
This command is used to delete a file stored in the file system.
System will prompt if the target file is a FW or configuration whose type is boot-up.
Format erase {<drive_id>} <pathname>
Parameters
<drive_id> - (Optional) Enter the drive ID used, for example, C:.
<pathname> - Enter the file to be deleted. If it is specified in the associated form, then it is related to the current directory.
Restrictions
Only Administrators and Operators can issue this command.
329
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Example
To erase a file:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#dir
Command: dir
Directory of /c:
Idx Info Attr Size Update Time Name
--- ------- ---- -------- ------------------- ----------------
1 CFG(b) -rw- 29661 2000/04/02 06:03:19 config2.cfg
2 CFG(*) -rw- 29661 2000/04/01 05:54:38 config.cfg
3 RUN(*) -rw- 4879040 2000/03/26 03:15:11 runtime.had
4 d--- 0 2000/04/01 05:17:36 system
29618 KB total (24697 KB free)
(*) -with boot-up info (b) -with backup info
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#erase config2.cfg
Command: erase config2.cfg
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#dir
Command: dir
Directory of /c:
Idx Info Attr Size Update Time Name
--- ------- ---- -------- ------------------- ----------------
1 CFG(*) -rw- 29661 2000/04/01 05:54:38 config.cfg
2 RUN(*) -rw- 4879040 2000/03/26 03:15:11 runtime.had
3 d--- 0 2000/04/01 05:17:36 system
29618 KB total (24727 KB free)
(*) -with boot-up info (b) -with backup info
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
34-9 move
Description
This command is used to move a file around the file system. Note that when a file is moved, it can be specified whether to rename at the same time.
Format move {<drive_id>} <pathname> {<drive_id>} <pathname>
Parameters
<drive_id> - (Optional) Enter the drive ID, for example, C:.
<pathname> - Enter the file to be moved. The path name can be specified either as a full path name or partial name. Specify either as a full path name or partial name. For partial path name, it indicates the file is in the
330
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide current directory.
<drive_id> - (Optional) Enter the drive ID, for example, C:.
<pathname> - Enter the new path where the file will be moved. The path name can be. For partial path name, it indicates the file is in the current directory.
Restrictions
Only Administrators and Operators can issue this command.
Example
To move a file from one location to another location:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#move c:/log.txt c:/log1.txt
Command: move c:/log.txt c:/log1.txt
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
34-10 copy
Description
This command is used to copy a file to another file in the file system.
Format copy {<drive_id>} <pathname> {<drive_id>} <pathname>
Parameters
<drive_id> - (Optional) Enter the drive ID, for example, C:.
<pathname> - Enter the file to be copied. The path name can be specified either as a full path name or partial name. For partial path name, it indicates the file is in the current directory.
<drive_id> - (Optional) Enter the drive ID, for example, C:.
<pathname> - Enter the file to copy to. The path name can be specified either as a full path name or partial name. For partial path name, it indicates the file is in the current directory.
Restrictions
Only Administrators and Operators can issue this command.
Example
To copy a file:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#copy c:/log.txt c:/log1.txt
Command: copy c:/log.txt c:/log1.txt
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
331
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 35 Flex Link Command List
create flex_link group_id <value> primary_port <port> backup_port <port>
delete flex_link group_id <value>
show flex_link {group_id <value>}
35-1 create flex_link group_id
Description
This command is used to create a Flex Link group, and define a port or the master port in a link aggregation group as the primary or backup port in the Flex Link group.
NOTE: Flex Links does not interact with STP or LBD.
Format create flex_link group_id <value> primary_port <port> backup_port <port>
Parameters
<value> - Enter the group ID of the Flex Link. The value is from 1 to 4.
primary_port - Specify a port or the master port in a link aggregation group to act as the primary port in the Flex
Link group.
<port> - Enter a port to be the primary port in the Flex Link group.
backup_port - Specify a port or the master port in a link aggregation group to act as the primary port in the Flex
Link group.
<port> - Enter a port to be the backup port in the Flex Link group.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power users can issue this command.
Examples
To create a Flex Link group:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#create flex_link group_id 1 primary_port 1 backup_port 2
Command: create flex_link group_id 1 primary_port 1 backup_port 2
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
35-2 delete flex_link group_id
Description
This command is used to delete a Flex Link group. When the link aggregation group is removed, the master port of that link aggregation group will still remain the primary or backup port of the Flex Link group.
Format delete flex_link group_id <value>
332
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Parameters
<value> - Enter the group ID of the Flex Link. The value is from 1 to 4.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power users can issue this command.
Examples
To remove a flext link group:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#delete flex_link group_id 1
Command: delete flex_link group_id 1
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
35-3 show flex_link
Description
This command is used to display Flex Link configuration.
Format show flex_link {group_id <value>}
Parameters
group_id - (Optional) Specify the group ID of the Flex Link.
<value> - Enter the group ID of the Flex Link. The value is from 1 to 4.
Restrictions
None.
Examples
To display the Flex Link configuration:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show flex_link
Command: show flex_link
Group Primary Port Backup Port Status(Primary/Backup)
----- ----------------------- ----------------------- --------------------------
1 1 2 Active/Inactive
Total Entries:1
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
333
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 36 FTP Client Command List
download firmware_fromFTP [[<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr>] {tcp_port <tcp_port_number 1-65535>} src_file
<path_filename 64> | ftp:<string 128 >] {dest_file <path_filename 64> {boot_up}}
upload firmware_toFTP [[<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr>] {tcp_port <tcp_port_number 1-65535>} dest_file
<path_filename 64> | ftp: <string 128>] {src_file <pathname 64>}
download cfg_fromFTP [[<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr>] {tcp_port < tcp_port_number 1-65535>} src_file <path_filename
64> | ftp:<string 128 >] {dest_file <path_filename 64>}
upload cfg_toFTP [[<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr>] {tcp_port <tcp_port_number 1-65535>} dest_file <path_filename 64>
| ftp: <string 128>] {src_file <path_filename 64>} {[include | exclude | begin] <filter_string 80> {<filter_string 80>
{<filter_string 80>}} {[include | exclude | begin] <filter_string 80> {<filter_string 80> {<filter_string 80>}} {[include
| exclude | begin] <filter_string 80> {<filter_string 80> {<filter_string 80>}}}}}
upload log_toFTP [[<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr>] {tcp_port <tcp_port_number 1-65535>} dest_file <path_filename 64>
| ftp: <string 128>]
upload attack_log_toFTP [[<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr>] {tcp_port <tcp_port_number 1-65535>} dest_file
<path_filename 64> | ftp: <string 128>]
36-1 download firmware_fromFTP
Description
This command is used to download a firmware image file from the FTP server.
Format download firmware_fromFTP [[<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr>] {tcp_port <tcp_port_number 1-65535>} src_file
<path_filename 64> | ftp:<string 128 >] {dest_file <path_filename 64> {boot_up}}
Parameters
<ipaddr> - Enter the IPv4 address of the FTP server here.
<ipv6addr> - Enter the IPv6 address of the FTP server here.
tcp_port - (Optional) Specify the TCP port number used for the FTP connection.
<tcp_port_number 1-65535> - Enter the TCP port number here. This value must be between 1 and 65535.
src_file - Specify the source file's name and path.
<path_filename 64> - Enter the source file's name and path here. This can be up to 64 characters long.
ftp - Specify the FTP connection details.
<string 128> - Enter the FTP connection details here. For example, john:[email protected]:21/image/cfg.txt.
dest_file - (Optional) Specify the destination file name and path.
<path_filename 64> - Enter the destination file name and path here. This can be up to 64 characters long.
boot_up - (Optional) Specify that the firmware will be used as the boot-up firmware after the download was completed successfully.
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Examples
This example shows how to download a firmware file from an FTP server.
334
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# download firmware_fromFTP 10.54.71.1 tcp_port 21 px.had
Command: download firmware_fromFTP 10.54.71.1 tcp_port 21 px.had
Connecting to server................... Done.
User(Anonymous): john
Pass:******
Download firmware...................... Done. Do not power off!
Please wait, programming flash......... Done.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
This example shows how to download a firmware form an FTP server using a string.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# download firmware_fromFTP ftp: john:[email protected]:21/image/px.had
Command: download firmware_fromFTP ftp: john:[email protected]:21/image/px.had
Connecting to server................... Done.
Download firmware...................... Done. Do not power off!
Please wait, programming flash......... Done.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
36-2 upload firmware_toFTP
Description
This command is used to upload a firmware from the Switch to an FTP server.
Format upload firmware_toFTP [[<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr>] {tcp_port <tcp_port_number 1-65535>} dest_file
<path_filename 64> | ftp: <string 128>] {src_file <pathname 64>}
Parameters
<ipaddr> - Enter the IPv4 address of the FTP server here.
<ipv6addr> - Enter the IPv6 address of the FTP server here.
tcp_port - (Optional) Specify the TCP port number used for the FTP connection.
<tcp_port_number 1-65535> - Enter the TCP port number here. This value must be between 1 and 65535.
dest_file - Specify the destination file name and path.
<path_filename 64> - Enter the destination file name and path here. This can be up to 64 characters long.
ftp - Specify the FTP connection details.
<string 128> - Enter the FTP connection details here. For example, john:[email protected]:21/image/cfg.txt.
src_file - (Optional) Specify the source file's name and path.
<pathname 64> - Enter the source file's name and path here. This can be up to 64 characters long.
Restrictions
Only Administrators and Operators can issue this command.
Example
This example shows how to upload a firmware file from the Switch to an FTP server.
335
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# upload firmware_toFTP ftp: john:[email protected]:21/image/image.had runtime.had
Command: upload firmware_toFTP ftp: john:[email protected]:21/image/image.had runtime.had
Connecting to server................... Done.
Upload firmware........................ Done.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
36-3 download cfg_fromFTP
Description
This command is used to download a configuration file from an FTP server.
Format download cfg_fromFTP [[<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr>] {tcp_port <tcp_port_number 1-65535>} src_file
<path_filename 64> | ftp: <string 128>] {dest_file <path_filename 64>}
Parameters
<ipaddr> - Enter the IPv4 address of the FTP server here.
<ipv6addr> - Enter the IPv6 address of the FTP server here.
tcp_port - (Optional) Specify the TCP port number used for the FTP connection.
<tcp_port_number 1-65535> - Enter the TCP port number here. This value must be between 1 and 65535.
src_file - Specify the source file's name and path.
<path_filename 64> - Enter the source file's name and path here. This can be up to 64 characters long.
ftp: - Specify the FTP connection details.
<string 128> - Enter the FTP connection details here. For example, john:[email protected]:21/image/cfg.txt.
dest_file - (Optional) Specify the destination file name and path.
<path_filename 64> - Enter the destination file name and path here. This can be up to 64 characters long.
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Examples
This example shows how to download the configuration file from an FTP server.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# download cfg_fromFTP 10.54.71.1 cfg01.txt 1
Command: download cfg_fromFTP 10.54.71.1 cfg01.txt 1
Connecting to server................... Done.
User(Anonymous): john
Pass:******
Download configuration................. Done.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
This example shows how to download the configuration file from an FTP server using a string.
336
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# download cfg_fromFTP ftp: john:[email protected]:21/cfg.txt 2
Command: download cfg_fromFTP ftp: john:[email protected]:21/cfg.txt 2
Connecting to server................... Done.
Download configuration................. Done.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
36-4 upload cfg_toFTP
Description
This command is used to upload a configuration file from the Switch to an FTP server.
Format upload cfg_toFTP [[<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr>] {tcp_port <tcp_port_number 1-65535>} dest_file <path_filename
64> | ftp: <string 128>] {src_file <path_filename 64>} {[include | exclude | begin] <filter_string 80>
{<filter_string 80> {<filter_string 80>}} {[include | exclude | begin] <filter_string 80> {<filter_string 80>
{<filter_string 80>}} {[include | exclude | begin] <filter_string 80> {<filter_string 80> {<filter_string 80>}}}}}
Parameters
<ipaddr> - Enter the IPv4 address of the FTP server here.
<ipv6addr> - Enter the IPv6 address of the FTP server here.
tcp_port - (Optional) Specify the TCP port number used for the FTP connection.
<tcp_port_number 1-65535> - Enter the TCP port number here. This value must be between 1 and 65535.
dest_file - Specify the destination file name and path.
<path_filename 64> - Enter the destination file name and path here. This can be up to 64 characters long.
ftp: - Specify the FTP connection details.
<string 128> - Enter the FTP connection details here. For example, john:[email protected]:21/image/cfg.txt.
src_file – (Optional) Specify the source file's name and path.
<path_filename 64> - Enter the source file's name and path here. This can be up to 64 characters long.
include – (Optional) Specify to include a filter string.
exclude - (Optional) Specify to exclude a filter string.
begin - (Optional) Specify to use a filter string that begins with the string specified.
<filter_string 80> - Enter a filter string enclosed by the quotation mark symbol. Thus, the filter string itself cannot contain the quotation mark character. The filter string is case sensitive.
<filter_string 80> - Enter a filter string enclosed by the quotation mark symbol.
<filter_string 80> - Enter a filter string enclosed by the quotation mark symbol.
Restrictions
Only Administrators and Operators can issue this command.
Examples
This example shows how to upload the configuration file to an FTP server in the interactive mode.
337
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# upload cfg_toFTP 10.90.90.15 cfg.txt
Command: upload cfg_toFTP 10.90.90.15 cfg.txt
Connecting to server................... Done.
User(Anonymous): john
Password:******
Upload configuration................... Done.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
This example shows how to upload the configuration file to an FTP server using a string.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# download cfg_fromFTP ftp: john:[email protected]:21/cfg/ cfg.txt config_id 2
Command: download cfg_fromFTP ftp: john:[email protected]:21/cfg/cfg.txt config_id 2
Connecting to server................... Done.
Download configuration................. Done.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
This example shows how to upload the configuration file to an FTP server using a string and the filter expression.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# download cfg_fromFTP ftp: john:[email protected]:21/cfg/cfg.txt config_id 2 include “VLAN” “ipif” exclude “fdb”
Command: download cfg_fromFTP ftp: john:[email protected]:21/cfg/cfg.txt config_id 2 include
“VLAN” “ipif” exclude “fdb”
Connecting to server................... Done.
Download configuration................. Done.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
36-5 upload log_toFTP
Description
This command is used to upload a log file from the Switch to an FTP server.
Format upload log_toFTP [[<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr>] {tcp_port <tcp_port_number 1-65535>} dest_file <path_filename
64> | ftp: <string 128>]
Parameters
<ipaddr> - Enter the IPv4 address of the FTP server here.
<ipv6addr> - Enter the IPv6 address of the FTP server here.
tcp_port - (Optional) Specify the TCP port number used for the FTP connection.
<tcp_port_number 1-65535> - Enter the TCP port number here. This value must be between 1 and 65535.
dest_file - Specify the destination file name and path.
<path_filename 64> - Enter the destination file name and path here. This can be up to 64 characters long.
ftp - Specify the FTP connection details.
<string 128> - Enter the FTP connection details here. For example, john:[email protected]:21/image/cfg.txt.
338
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Restrictions
Only Administrators and Operators can issue this command.
Examples
This example shows how to upload the log file to an FTP server.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# upload log_toFTP 10.90.90.15 d:/log.txt
Command: upload log_toFTP 10.90.90.15 d:/log.txt
Connecting to server................... Done.
User(Anonymous): john
Pass:******
Upload log............................. Done.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
This example shows how to upload the log file to an FTP server using a string.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# upload log_toFTP ftp: john:[email protected]:21/log/log.txt
Command: upload log_toFTP ftp: john:[email protected]:21/log/log.txt
Connecting to server................... Done.
Upload log............................. Done.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
36-6 upload attack_log_toFTP
Description
This command is used to upload the attack log from the Switch to an FTP server.
Format upload attack_log_toFTP [[<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr>] {tcp_port <tcp_port_number 1-65535>} dest_file
<path_filename 64> | ftp: <string 128>]
Parameters
<ipaddr> - Enter the IPv4 address of the FTP server here.
<ipv6addr> - Enter the IPv6 address of the FTP server here.
tcp_port - (Optional) Specify the TCP port number used for the FTP connection.
<tcp_port_number 1-65535> - Enter the TCP port number here. This value must be between 1 and 65535.
dest_file - Specify the destination file name and path.
<path_filename 64> - Enter the destination file name and path here. This can be up to 64 characters long.
ftp - Specify the FTP connection details.
<string 128> - Enter the FTP connection details here. For example, john:[email protected]:21/image/cfg.txt.
Restrictions
Only Administrators and Operators can issue this command.
Examples
This example shows how to upload the attack log to an FTP server.
339
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# upload attack_log_toFTP 10.90.90.15 log.txt
Command: upload attack_log_toFTP 10.90.90.15 log.txt
Connecting to server................... Done.
User(Anonymous): john
Pass:******
Upload Log............................. Done.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
This example shows how to upload the attack log to an FTP server using a string.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# upload attack_log_toFTP ftp: john:[email protected]:21/log.txt
Command: upload attack_log_toFTP ftp: john:[email protected]:21/log.txt
Connecting to server................... Done.
Upload log............................. Done.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
340
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 37 Gratuitous ARP Command List
config gratuitous_arp send ipif_status_up [enable | disable]
config gratuitous_arp send dup_ip_detected [enable | disable]
config gratuitous_arp learning [enable | disable]
config gratuitous_arp send periodically ipif <ipif_name 12> interval <value 0-65535>
enable gratuitous_arp {ipif <ipif_name 12>} {trap | log}(1)
disable gratuitous_arp {ipif <ipif_name 12>} {trap | log}(1)
show gratuitous_arp {ipif <ipif_name 12>}
37-1 config gratuitous_arp send ipif_status_up
Description
This command is used to enable or disable the sending of gratuitous ARP packets when the IP interface’s status is up. This is used to automatically announce the interface’s IP address to other nodes. Only one gratuitous ARP packet will be broadcasted.
Format config gratuitous_arp send ipif_status_up [enable | disable]
Parameters
enable - Enables the sending of gratuitous ARP packets when the IP interface’s status is up. This is the default value.
disable - Disables the sending of gratuitous ARP packets when the IP interface’s status is up.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To enable send gratuitous ARP request in normal situation:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config gratuitous_arp send ipif_status_up enable
Command: config gratuitous_arp send ipif_status_up enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
37-2 config gratuitous_arp send dup_ip_detected
Description
This command is used to enable or disable the sending of gratuitous ARP request packets while the duplicate IP is detected. The duplicate IP detectection means that the system received an ARP request packet that is sent by an
IP address that matches the system’s own IP address. In this case, the system knows that somebody out there uses an IP address that is conflict with the system. In order to reclaim the correct host of this IP address, the system can send out the gratuitous ARP request packet for this duplicate IP address.
341
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Format config gratuitous_arp send dup_ip_detected [enable | disable]
Parameters
enable - Enables the sending of gratuitous ARP request packet when duplicate IP is detected. This is the default value.
disable - Disables the sending of gratuitous ARP request packet when duplicate IP is detected.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To enable send gratuitous ARP request when duplicate IP is detected:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config gratuitous_arp send dup_ip_detected enable
Command: config gratuitous_arp send dup_ip_detected enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
37-3 config gratuitous_arp learning
Description
This command is used to configure gratuitous ARP learning. Normally, the system only learns the ARP reply packet or a normal ARP request packet that asks for the MAC address that corresponds to the system’s IP address. This command is used to enable or disable the learning of ARP entry in the ARP cache based on the received gratuitous ARP packet. The gratuitous ARP packet is sent by a source IP address that is identical to the
IP that the packet is queried for. Note that, with the gratuitous ARP learning, the system will not learn new entry but only do the update on the ARP table based on the received gratuitous ARP packet.
Format config gratuitous_arp learning [enable | disable]
Parameters
enable - Enables the learning of ARP entry based on the received gratuitous ARP packet. This is the default value.
disable - Disables the learning of ARP entry based on the received gratuitous ARP packet.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To show the global GratuitousARP state:
342
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config gratuitous_arp learning enable
Command: config gratuitous_arp learning enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
37-4 config gratuitous_arp send periodically
Description
This command is used to configure the interval for the periodical sending of gratuitous ARP request packet. By default, the interval is 0.
Format config gratuitous_arp send periodically ipif <ipif_name 12> interval <value 0-65535>
Parameters
ipif - Specify the interface name of L3 interface.
<ipif_name 12> - Enter the IP interface name here. This name can be up to 12 characters long.
interval - Specify the periodically sending gratuitous ARP interval time in seconds. 0 means not to send gratuitous ARP periodically.
<value 0-65535> - Enter the gratuitous ARP interval time here. This value must be between 0 and 65535 seconds.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure gratuitous ARP interval to 5 for IPIF System:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config gratuitous_arp send periodically ipif System interval 5
Command: config gratuitous_arp send periodically ipif System interval 5
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
37-5 enable gratuitous_arp
Description
This command is used to enable gratuitous ARP trap and log state. The switch can trap and log the IP conflict event to inform the administrator. By default, trap is disabled and event log is enabled.
Format enable gratuitous_arp {ipif <ipif_name 12>} {trap | log}(1)
Parameters
ipif - (Optional) Specify the interface name of L3 interface
343
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
<ipif_name 12> - Enter the IP interface name here. This name can be up to 12 characters long.
trap - Specify to enable the trap function.
log - Specify to enable the log function.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To enable system interface’s gratuitous ARP log and trap:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#enable gratuitous_arp ipif System trap log
Command: enable gratuitous_arp ipif System trap log
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
37-6 disable gratuitous_arp
Description
This command is used to disable gratuitous ARP trap and log state. The switch can trap and log the IP conflict event to inform the administrator. By default, trap is disabled and event log is enabled.
Format disable gratuitous_arp {ipif <ipif_name 12>} {trap | log}(1)
Parameters
ipif - (Optional) Specify the interface name of L3 interface
<ipif_name 12> - Enter the IP interface name here. This name can be up to 12 characters long.
trap - Specify to disable the trap function.
log - Specify to disable the log function.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To disable system interface’s gratuitous ARP log and trap:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#disable gratuitous_arp ipif System trap log
Command: disable gratuitous_arp ipif System trap log
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
344
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
37-7 show gratuitous_arp
Description
This command is used to display gratuitous ARP configuration.
Format show gratuitous_arp {ipif <ipif_name 12>}
Parameters
ipif - (Optional) Specify the interface name of L3 interface.
<ipif_name> - Enter the IP interface name here.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display gratuitous ARP log and trap state:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show gratuitous_arp
Command: show gratuitous_arp
Send on IPIF Status Up : Enabled
Send on Duplicate IP Detected : Enabled
Gratuitous ARP Learning : Enabled
IP Interface Name : System
Gratuitous ARP Trap : Enabled
Gratuitous ARP Log : Enabled
Gratuitous ARP Periodical Send Interval : 5
Total Entries: 1
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
345
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 38 Historical Counter Command List
show historical_counter [packet | error] [ports <portlist>] [15_minute {slot <index 1-5>} | 1_day {slot <index 1-
2>}]
show historical_utilization [cpu | memory] [15_minute {slot <index 1-5>} | 1_day {slot <index 1-2>}]
clear historical_counters ports [<portlist> | all]
38-1 show historical_counter
Description
This command is used to display the historical statistics count for the packets sent and received by the Switch.
There are two kinds of statistics offered, 15-minute based and 1-day based. For statistics based on 15 minutes, there are five counting slots for the historical statistic count. Suppose that the system has been up for more than 75 mins, then slot 1 refers to the time since 15 minutes ago until now, and slot 2 refers to the time since 30 minutes ago until 15 minutes ago. For statistics based on a day, there are two counting slots for the historical statistic count.
The counter for a slot represents statistics count of occurrence in that time slot.
Format show historical_counter [packet | error] [ports <portlist>] [15_minute {slot <index 1-5>} | 1_day {slot <index
1-2>}]
Parameters
packet - Specify to display valid packets.
error - Specify to display error packets.
ports - Specify the port number.
<portlist> - Enter a port or range of ports to be displayed.
15_minute - Specify to display the 15-minute based statistics count. If there is no option specified, all 15-minutes time slots will be displayed.
slot - (Optional)Specify the slot number to display from 1 to 5.
<index 1-5> - Enter the slot number to display from 1 to 5.
1_day - Specify to display the daily based statistics count. If there is no option specified, all 1-day time slots will be displayed.
slot - (Optional) Specify the slot number to display from 1 to 2.
<index 1-2> - Enter the slot number to display from 1 to 2.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the statistics count of packets for the slot of the last 15 minutes:
346
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show historical_counter packet ports 1 15_minute slot 1
Command: show historical_counter packet ports 1 15_minute slot 1
Port 1 15-Minute Slot 1
Starttime : 27 Jan 2000 22:32:51
Endtime : 27 Jan 2000 22:18:11
Frame Size/Type Frame Count
--------------- -----------
Pkts TX 0
Bytes TX 0
Pkts RX 43
Bytes RX 3437
64 RX 37
65-127 RX 3
128-255 RX 0
256-511 RX 3
512-1023 RX 0
1024-1518 RX 0
Unicast RX 0
Multicast RX 0
Broadcast RX 43
CTRL+C ESC q Quit SPACE n Next Page p Previous Page r Refresh
To display the statistics count of error packets for slot 2:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show historical_counter error ports 1 15_minute slot 2
Command: show historical_counter error ports 1 15_minute slot 2
Port 1 15-Minute Slot 2
Starttime : 27 Jan 2000 22:32:51
Endtime : 27 Jan 2000 22:18:11
Frame Size/Type Frame Count
--------------- -----------
Fragment RX 0
JabberPktsRX 0
Oversize Pkts RX 0
Undersize Pkts RX 0
Unknown Ctrl Pkts RX 0
Collision TX 0
Dropped Pkts 0
CTRL+C ESC q Quit SPACE n Next Page p Previous Page r Refresh
38-2 show historical_utilization
Description
This command is used to display the historical utilization of CPU and memory. There are two kinds of statistics offered, 15-minute based and 1-day based. For statistics based on 15 minutes, there are five counting slots for the historical statistic count. Suppose that the system has been up for more than 75 mins, then slot 1 refers to the time since 15 minutes ago until now, and slot 2 refers to the time since 30 minutes ago until 15 minutes ago. For
347
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide statistics based on a day, there are two counting slots for the historical statistic count. The statistics for the utilization count the average of CPU utilization and average of memory usage rate in that time slot.
Format show historical_utilization [cpu | memory] [15_minute {slot <index 1-5>} | 1_day {slot <index 1-2>}]
Parameters
cpu - Specify to display the utilization of CPU.
memory - Specify to display the utilization of memory.
15_minute - Specify to display the 15-minute based statistics count. If there is no option specified, all 15-minutes time slots will be displayed.
slot - (Optional) Specify the slot number to display from 1 to 5.
<index 1-5> - Enter the slot number to display from 1 to 5.
1_day - Specify to display the daily based statistics count. If there is no option specified, all 1-day time slots will be displayed.
slot - (Optional) Specify the slot number to display from 1 to 2.
<index 1-2> - Enter the slot number to display from 1 to 2.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the CPU utilization of the 15-minutes based slot:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show historical_utilization cpu 15_minute
Command: show historical_utilization cpu 15_minute
CPU Utilization
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
15-Minute Slot 1 (27 Jan 2000 23:00:51 – 27 Jan 2000 22:45:51) : 1 %
15-Minute Slot 2 (27 Jan 2000 22:45:51 – 27 Jan 2000 22:30:51) : 1 %
15-Minute Slot 3 (27 Jan 2000 22:30:51 – 27 Jan 2000 22:15:51) : 0 %
15-Minute Slot 4 (27 Jan 2000 22:15:51 – 27 Jan 2000 22:00:51) : 48 %
15-Minute Slot 5 (27 Jan 2000 22:00:51 – 27 Jan 2000 21:45:51) : 0 %
CTRL+C ESC q Quit SPACE n Next Page p Previous Page r Refresh
To display the CPU utilization of the recent daily-based slot:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show historical_utilization cpu 1_day
Command: show historical_utilization cpu 1_day
CPU Utilization
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1-Day Slot 1 (27 Jan 2000 23:06:16 – 27 Jan 2000 23:06:16) : 1 %
1-Day Slot 2 (26 Jan 2000 23:06:16 – 25 Jan 2000 23:06:16) : 0 %
CTRL+C ESC q Quit SPACE n Next Page p Previous Page r Refresh
To display the memory utilization of the 15-minutes based slot:
348
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show historical_utilization memory 15_minute
Command: show historical_utilization memory 15_minute
Memory Utilization
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
15-Minute Slot 1 (27 Jan 2000 23:00:51 – 27 Jan 2000 22:45:51) : 49 %
15-Minute Slot 2 (27 Jan 2000 22:45:51 – 27 Jan 2000 22:30:51) : 49 %
15-Minute Slot 3 (27 Jan 2000 22:30:51 – 27 Jan 2000 22:15:51) : 49 %
15-Minute Slot 4 (27 Jan 2000 22:15:51 – 27 Jan 2000 22:00:51) : 49 %
15-Minute Slot 5 (27 Jan 2000 22:00:51 – 27 Jan 2000 21:45:51) : 48 %
CTRL+C ESC q Quit SPACE n Next Page p Previous Page r Refresh
To display the memory utilization of the daily-based slot:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show historical_utilization memory 1_day
Command: show historical_utilization memory 1_day
Memory Utilization
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1-Day Slot 1 (27 Jan 2000 23:06:16 – 27 Jan 2000 23:06:16) : 48 %
1-Day Slot 2 (26 Jan 2000 23:06:16 – 25 Jan 2000 23:06:16) : 0 %
CTRL+C ESC q Quit SPACE n Next Page p Previous Page r Refresh
38-3 clear historical_counters ports
Description
This command is used to clear port historical counter statistics.
Format clear historical_counters ports [<portlist> | all]
Parameters
<portlist> - Enter a port or range of ports to be selected.
all - Specify that all ports will be selected.
Restrictions
Only Administrators and Operators can issue this command.
Example
To clear the historical counter for all ports:
349
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#clear historical_counters all
Command: clear historical_counters all
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin
350
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 39 IGMP Snooping Command List
The Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) is a L3 protocol used to manage the membership of Internet
Protocol multicast groups. IGMP is used by IP hosts and adjacent multicast routers to establish multicast group memberships. IGMP snooping is the process of listening to IGMP network traffic. IGMP snooping, as implied by the name, is a feature that allows a layer 2 switch to "listen in" on the IGMP conversation between hosts and routers by processing the layer 3 IGMP packets sent in a multicast network.
When IGMP snooping is enabled in a switch it analyzes all IGMP packets between hosts connected to the Switch and multicast routers in the network. When a switch hears an IGMP report from a host for a given multicast group, the Switch adds the host's port number to the multicast list for that group. And, when the Switch hears an IGMP
Leave, it removes the host's port from the table entry.
config igmp_snooping [vlan_name <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list> | all ] {state [enable | disable] | fast_leave [enable | disable] | report_suppression [enable | disable] | proxy_reporting {state [enable | disable] | source_ip <ipaddr>}(1)}(1)
config igmp_snooping rate_limit [ports <portlist> | vlanid <vlanid_list>] [<value 1-1000> | no_limit]
config igmp_snooping querier [vlan_name <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list> | all] {query_interval <sec 1-
65535> | max_response_time <sec 1-25> | robustness_variable <value 1-7> | last_member_query_interval
<sec 1-25> | state [enable | disable] | version <value 1-3>}(1)
config igmp access_authentication ports [all | <portlist>] state [enable | disable]
config router_ports [<vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list> ] [add | delete] <portlist>
config router_ports_forbidden [ <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list> ] [add | delete] <portlist> enable igmp_snooping disable igmp_snooping
create igmp_snooping static_group [vlan<vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list>] <ipaddr>
delete igmp_snooping static_group [vlan<vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list>] <ipaddr>
config igmp_snooping static_group [vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list>] <ipaddr> [add | delete]
<portlist>
show igmp_snooping static_group {[vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list>] <ipaddr>}
config igmp_snooping data_driven_learning [all | vlan_name <vlan_name> | vlanid <vlanid_list>] {state
[enable | disable] | aged_out [enable | disable] | expiry_time <sec 1-65535>}
config igmp_snooping data_driven_learning max_learned_entry <value 1-1024>
clear igmp_snooping data_driven_group [all | [vlan_name <vlan_name> | vlanid <vlanid_list>] [<ipaddr> | all]]
show igmp_snooping {[vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list>]}
show igmp_snooping rate_limit [ports <portlist> | vlanid <vlanid_list>]
show igmp_snooping group {[vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list> | ports <portlist>] {<ipaddr>}}
{data_driven}
show igmp_snooping forwarding {[vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list>]}
show router_ports [vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list> | all ] {[static | dynamic | forbidden]}
show igmp_snooping statistic counter [vlan <vlan_name> | vlanid <vlanid_list> | ports <portlist>]
show igmp access_authentication ports [all | <portlist>] clear igmp_snooping statistics counter
show igmp_snooping host {[vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list> | ports <portlist> | group <ipaddr>]}
39-1 config igmp_snooping
Description
This command is used to configure IGMP snooping on the Switch.
351
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Format config igmp_snooping [vlan_name <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list> | all ] {state [enable | disable] | fast_leave [enable | disable] | report_suppression [enable | disable] | proxy_reporting {state [enable | disable] | source_ip <ipaddr>}(1)}(1)
Parameters
vlan_name - Specify the name of the VLAN for which IGMP snooping is to be configured.
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the VLAN name here. The VLAN name can be up to 32 characters long.
vlanid - Specify the VLAN ID for which IGMP snooping is to be configured.
<vlanid_list> - Enter the VLAN ID here.
all - Specify to use all configured VLANs.
state - (Optional) Specify to enable or disable IGMP snooping for the chosen VLAN.
enable - Specify to enable IGMP snooping for the chosen VLAN.
disable - Specify to disable IGMP snooping for the chosen VLAN.
fast_leave - Specify to enable or disable the IGMP snooping fast leave function.
enable - Specify to enable the IGMP snooping fast leave function. If enabled, the membership is immediately removed when the system receives the IGMP leave message.
disable - Specify to disable the IGMP snooping fast leave function.
report_suppression - Specify whether to use IGMP report suppression to forward only one IGMP report per multicast router query to multicast devices.
enable - Specify to use IGMP report suppression to forward only one IGMP report per multicast router query to multicast devices.
disable - Disables IGMP report suppression to forward only one IGMP report per multicast router query to multicast devices.
proxy reporting - Specify IGMP proxy reporting. If enabled, multiple IGMP reports or leave for a specific (S, G) will be integrated into one report only before sending to the router port.
state - Specify to enable or disable the proxy reporting.
enable - Specify to enable the proxy reporting.
disable - Specify to disable the proxy reporting.
source_ip - Specify the source IP of proxy reporting integrated report. Default value is zero IP.
<ipaddr> - Enter the IP address.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure IGMP snooping:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config igmp_snooping vlan_name default state enable
Command: config igmp_snooping vlan_name default state enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
39-2 config igmp_snooping rate_limit
Description
This command is used to configure the rate of IGMP control packet that is allowed per port or per VLAN.
Format config igmp_snooping rate_limit [ports <portlist> | vlanid <vlanid_list>] [<value 1-1000> | no_limit]
352
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Parameters
ports - Specify a range of ports to be configured.
<portlist> - Enter the range of ports to be configured here.
vlanid - Specify a range of VLANs to be configured.
<vlanid_list> - Enter the VLAN ID list here.
<value 1-1000> - Enter the rate of the IGMP control packet that the Switch can process on a specific port/VLAN.
The rate is specified in packets per second. The packets that exceed the limit will be dropped.
no_limit - Specify the rate of the IGMP control packet to be unlimited that the Switch can process on a specific port/VLAN. The rate is specified in packets per second. The packets that exceed the limit will be dropped. The default setting is no_limit.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure the IGMP snooping per port rate_limit:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config igmp_snooping rate_limit ports 1 100
Command: config igmp_snooping rate_limit ports 1 100
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
39-3 config igmp_snooping querier
Description
This command is used to configure the time in seconds between general query transmissions, the maximum time in seconds to wait for reports from members, and the permitted packet loss that guarantees IGMP snooping.
Format config igmp_snooping querier [vlan_name <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list> | all] {query_interval <sec
1-65535> | max_response_time <sec 1-25> | robustness_variable <value 1-7> | last_member_query_interval
<sec 1-25> | state [enable | disable] | version <value 1-3>}(1)
Parameters
vlan_name - Specify the name of the VLAN for which IGMP snooping querier is to be configured.
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the VLAN name here. The VLAN name can be up to 32 characters long.
vlanid - Specify the VLAN ID for which IGMP snooping querier is to be configured.
<vlanid_list> - Enter the VLAN ID list here.
all - Specify all VLANs for which IGMP snooping querier is to be configured.
query_interval - (Optional) Specify the amount of time in seconds between general query transmissions
<sec 1-65535> - Enter the query interval value here. This value is from 1 to 65535 seconds. . The default setting is 125 seconds.
max_reponse_time - (Optional) Specify the maximum time in seconds to wait for reports from members. The default setting is 10 seconds.
<sec 1-25> - Enter the maximum response time value here. This value is from 1 to 25 seconds.
robustness_variable - (Optional) Provides fine-tuning to allow for expected packet loss on a subnet. The value of the robustness variable is used in calculating the following IGMP message intervals:
<value 1-7> - Enter the robustness variable value here. This value is from 1 to 7. By default, the robustness variable is set to 2. You might want to increase this value if you expect a subnet to be more loose.
• Group member interval—Amount of time that must pass before a multicast router decides there are no more members of a group on a network. This interval is calculated as follows: (robustness variable x query interval) + (1 x query response interval).
353
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
• Other querier present interval—Amount of time that must pass before a multicast router decides that there is no longer another multicast router that is the querier. This interval is calculated as follows: (robustness variable x query interval) + (0.5 x query response interval).
• Last member query count—Number of group-specific queries sent before the router assumes there are no local members of a group. The default number is the value of the robustness variable.
last_member_query_interval - (Optional) Specify the maximum amount of time between group-specific query messages, including those sent in response to leave-group messages. You might lower this interval to reduce the amount of time it takes a router to detect the loss of the last member of a group. On receiving a leave message, the router will assume there are no local members on the interface if there are no reports received after the response time (which is last member query interval * robustness variable)
<sec 1-25> - Enter the last member query interval value here. This value is from 1 to 25 seconds.
state - (Optional) If the state is enabled, it allows the Switch to be selected as an IGMP Querier (sends IGMP query packets). It the state is disabled, then the Switch cannot play the role as a querier. Note that if the Layer
3 router connected to the Switch provide only the IGMP proxy function but does not provide the multicast routing function, then this state must be configured as disabled. Otherwise, if the Layer 3 router is not selected as the querier, it will not send the IGMP query packet. Since it will not send the multicast-routing protocol packet, the port will be timed out as a router port.
enable - Specify to enable this state.
disable - Specify to disable this state.
version - (Optional) Specify the version of IGMP packet that will be sent by this device. If an IGMP packet received by the interface has a version higher than the specified version, this packet will be dropped.
<value 1-3> - Enter the version number here. This value is from 1 to 3.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure the IGMP snooping querier:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config igmp_snooping querier vlan_name default query_interval 125 state enable
Command: config igmp_snooping querier vlan_name default query_interval 125 state enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
39-4 config igmp access_authentication ports
Description
This command is used to enable or disable the IGMP Access Control function for the specified ports. If the IGMP
Access Control function is enabled and the Switch receives an IGMP JOIN message, the Switch will send the access request to the RADIUS server for authentication.
Format config igmp access_authentication ports [all | <portlist>] state [enable | disable]
Parameters
all - Specify all ports to be configured.
<portlist> - Enter a range of ports to be configured.
state - Specify the state of the RADIUS authentication function on the specified ports.
enable - Enables the RADIUS authentication function on the specified ports.
disable - Disables the RADIUS authentication function on the specified ports.
354
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To enable IGMP Access Control for all ports:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config igmp access_authentication ports all state enable
Command: config igmp access_authentication ports all state enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
39-5 config router_ports
Description
This command is used to designate a range of ports as being connected to multicast-enabled routers. This will ensure that all packets with such a router as its destination will reach the multicast-enabled router, regardless of protocol, etc.
Format config router_ports [<vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list> ] [add | delete] <portlist>
Parameters
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the name of the VLAN on which the router port resides.
vlanid - Specify the ID of the VLAN on which the router port resides.
<vlanid_list> - Enter the VLAN ID here.
add - Specify to add the router ports.
delete - Specify to delete the router ports.
<portlist> - Enter a range of ports to be configured.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To set up static router ports:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config router_ports default add 1-10
Command: config router_ports default add 1-10
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
39-6 config router_ports_forbidden
Description
This command is used to designate a range of ports as being not connected to multicast-enabled routers. This ensures that the forbidden router port will not propagate routing packets out.
355
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Format config router_ports_forbidden [ <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list> ] [add | delete] <portlist>
Parameters
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the name of the VLAN on which the router port resides.
vlanid - Specify the ID of the VLAN on which the router port resides.
<vlanid_list> - Enter the VLAN ID list here.
add - Specify to add the router ports.
delete - Specify to delete the router ports.
<portlist> - Enter a range of ports to be configured.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To set up port range 1-10 to forbidden router ports of default VLAN:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config router_ports_forbidden default add 11-12
Command: config router_ports_forbidden default add 11-12
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
39-7 enable igmp_snooping
Description
This command is used to enable IGMP snooping on the Switch.
Format enable igmp_snooping
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To enable IGMP snooping on the Switch:
356
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#enable igmp_snooping
Command: enable igmp_snooping
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
39-8 disable igmp_snooping
Description
This command is used to disable IGMP snooping on the Switch. Disabling IGMP snooping allows all IGMP and IP multicast traffic to flood within a given IP interface.
Format disable igmp_snooping
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To disable IGMP snooping on the Switch:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#disable igmp_snooping
Command: disable igmp_snooping
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
39-9 create igmp_snooping static_group
Description
This command is used to create an IGMP snooping static group. Member ports can be added to the static group.
The static member and the dynamic member port form the member ports of a group.
The static group will only take effect when IGMP snooping is enabled on the VLAN. For those static member ports, the device needs to emulate the IGMP protocol operation to the querier, and forward the traffic destined to the multicast group to the member ports.
For a layer 3 device, the device is also responsible to route the packet destined for this specific group to static member ports.
The static member port will only affect V2 IGMP operation.
The Reserved IP multicast address 224.0.0.X must be excluded from the configured group.
The VLAN must be created first before a static group can be created.
357
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Format create igmp_snooping static_group [vlan<vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list>] <ipaddr>
Parameters
vlan - Specify the name of the VLAN on which the router port resides.
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the VLAN name here. The VLAN name can be up to 32 characters long.
vlanid - Specify the ID of the VLAN on which the router port resides.
<vlanid_list> - Enter the VLAN ID here.
<ipaddr> - Enter the multicast group IP address.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To create an IGMP snooping static group for VLAN 1, group 239.1.1.1:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#create igmp_snooping static_group vlan default 239.1.1.1
Command: create igmp_snooping static_group vlan default 239.1.1.1
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
39-10 delete igmp_snooping static_group
Description
This command is used to delete an IGMP snooping multicast static group. The deletion of an IGMP snooping static group will not affect the IGMP snooping dynamic member ports for a group.
Format delete igmp_snooping static_group [vlan<vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list>] <ipaddr>
Parameters
vlan - Specify the name of the VLAN on which the router port resides.
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the VLAN name here. The VLAN name can be up to 32 characters long.
vlanid - Specify the ID of the VLAN on which the router port resides.
<vlanid_list> - Enter the VLAN ID list here.
<ipaddr> - Enter the multicast group IP address.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To delete an IGMP snooping static group for VLAN 1, group 239.1.1.1:
358
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#delete igmp_snooping static_group vlan default 239.1.1.1
Command: delete igmp_snooping static_group vlan default 239.1.1.1
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
39-11 config igmp_snooping static_group
Description
This command is used to configure IGMP snooping static group. When a port is configured as a static member port, the IGMP protocol will not operate on this port. For example, suppose that a port is a dynamic member port learned by IGMP. If this port is configured as a static member later, then the IGMP protocol will stop operating on this port. The IGMP protocol will resume once this port is removed from static member ports.
The static member port will only affect V2 IGMP operation.
Format config igmp_snooping static_group [vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list>] <ipaddr> [add | delete]
<portlist>
Parameters
vlan - Specify the name of the VLAN on which the static group resides.
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the VLAN name here. The VLAN name can be up to 32 characters long.
vlanid - Specify the ID of the VLAN on which the static group resides.
<vlanid_list> - Enter the VLAN ID here.
<ipaddr> - Enter the multicast group IP address (for Layer 3 switch).
add - Specify to add the member ports.
delete - Specify to delete the member ports.
<portlist> - Enter a range of ports to be configured.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To unset port range 9-10 from IGMP snooping static member ports for group 239.1.1.1 on default VLAN:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config igmp_snooping static_group vlan default 239.1.1.1 delete 9-10
Command: create igmp_snooping static_group vlan default 239.1.1.1 delete 9-10
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
39-12 show igmp_snooping static_group
Description
This command is used to display the IGMP snooping multicast group static members.
359
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Format show igmp_snooping static_group {[vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list>] <ipaddr>}
Parameters
vlan - Specify the name of the VLAN on which the static group resides.
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the VLAN name here. The VLAN name can be up to 32 characters long.
vlanid - Specify the ID of the VLAN on which the static group resides.
<vlanid_list> - Enter the VLAN ID here.
<ipaddr> - Enter the multicast group IP address.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display all the IGMP snooping static groups:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show igmp_snooping static_group
VLAN ID/Name IP Address Static Member Ports
-------------- ------------------ ------------------------
1 / Default 239.1.1.1 9-10
Total Entries : 1
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
39-13 config igmp_snooping data_driven_learning
Description
This command is used to enable or disable the data driven learning of an IGMP snooping group.
When data-driven learning is enabled for the VLAN, when the Switch receives the IP multicast traffic on this VLAN, an IGMP snooping group will be created. That is, the learning of an entry is not activated by IGMP membership registration, but activated by the traffic. For an ordinary IGMP snooping entry, the IGMP protocol will take care of the aging out of the entry. For a data-driven entry, the entry can be specified not to be aged out or to be aged out by the aged timer.
When data driven learning is enabled, and the data driven table is not full, the multicast filtering mode for all ports is ignored. That is, the multicast packets will be forwarded to router ports. If the data driven learning table is full, the multicast packets will be forwarded according to the multicast filtering mode.
Note that if a data-driven group is created and IGMP member ports are learned later, the entry will become an ordinary IGMP snooping entry. That is, the aging out mechanism will follow the ordinary IGMP snooping entry.
Format config igmp_snooping data_driven_learning [all | vlan_name <vlan_name> | vlanid <vlanid_list>] {state
[enable | disable] | aged_out [enable | disable] | expiry_time <sec 1-65535>}(1)
Parameters
all - Specify all VLANs to be configured.
vlan_name - Specify the VLAN name to be configured.
<vlan_name> - Enter the VLAN name here.
360
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
vlanid - Specify the VLAN ID to be configured.
<vlanid_list> - Enter the VLAN ID here.
state - (Optional) Specify to enable or disable the data driven learning of an IGMP snooping group.
enable - Specify to enable the data driven learning option. By default, the state is enabled.
disable - Specify to disable the data driven learning option.
aged_out - (Optional) Specify to enable or disable the aging out of the entry.
enable - Specify to enable the aging out of the entry.
disable - Specify to disable the aging out of the entry. By default, the state is disabled state.
expiry_time - (Optional) Specify the data driven group lifetime in seconds. This parameter is valid only when aged_out is enabled.
<sec 1-65535> - Enter the expiry time here. This value must be between 1 and 65535 seconds.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To enable the data driven learning of an IGMP snooping group on the default VLAN:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config igmp_snooping data_driven_learning vlan_name default state enable
Command: config igmp_snooping data_driven_learning vlan_name default state enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
39-14 config igmp_snooping data_driven_learning max_learned_entry
Description
This command is used to configure the maximum number of groups that can be learned by data driven. When the table is full, the system will stop the learning of the new data-driven groups. Traffic for the new groups will be dropped.
Format config igmp_snooping data_driven_learning max_learned_entry <value 1-1024>
Parameters
<value 1-1024> - Enter the maximum number of groups that can be learned by data driven. This value must be between 1 and 1024. The default setting is 128.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To set the maximum number of groups that can be learned by data driven:
361
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config igmp_snooping data_driven_learning max_learned_entry 50
Command: config igmp_snooping data_driven_learning max_learned_entry 50
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
39-15 clear igmp_snooping data_driven_group
Description
This command is used to delete the IGMP snooping group(s) learned by data driven.
Format clear igmp_snooping data_driven_group [all | [vlan_name <vlan_name> | vlanid <vlanid_list>] [<ipaddr> | all]]
Parameters
all - Specify all VLANs to which IGMP snooping groups will be deleted.
vlan_name - Specify the VLAN name.
<vlan_name> - Enter the VLAN name here.
vlanid - Specify the VLAN ID.
<vlanid_list> - Enter the VLAN ID here.
<ipaddr> - Enter the group’s IP address learned by data driven.
all - Deletes all IGMP snooping groups of specified VLANs.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To delete all the groups learned by data-driven:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#clear igmp_snooping data_driven_group all
Command: clear igmp_snooping data_driven_group all
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
39-16 show igmp_snooping
Description
This command is used to display the current IGMP snooping configuration on the Switch.
Format show igmp_snooping {[vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list>]}
Parameters
vlan - (Optional) Specify the name of the VLAN for which you want to view the IGMP snooping configuration.
362
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the VLAN name here. The VLAN name can be up to 32 characters long.
vlanid - (Optional) Specify the ID of the VLAN for which you want to view the IGMP snooping configuration.
<vlanid_list> - Enter the VLAN ID list here.
If the VLAN is not specified, the system will display all current IGMP snooping configurations.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show IGMP snooping:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show igmp_snooping
Command: show igmp_snooping
IGMP Snooping Global State : Enabled
Data Driven Learning Max Entries : 128
VLAN Name : default
Query Interval : 125
Max Response Time : 10
Robustness Value : 2
Last Member Query Interval : 1
Querier State : Disabled
Querier Role : Non-Querier
Querier IP : 0.0.0.0
Querier Expiry Time : 0 secs
State : Disabled
Fast Leave : Disabled
Rate Limit : No Limitation
Report Suppression : Enabled
Version : 3
Data Driven Learning State : Enabled
Data Driven Learning Aged Out : Disabled
Data Driven Group Expiry Time : 260
Total Entries: 1
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
39-17 show igmp_snooping rate_limit
Description
This command is used to display the IGMP snooping rate limit setting.
Format show igmp_snooping rate_limit [ports <portlist> | vlanid <vlanid_list>]
Parameters
ports - Specify the port range.
<portlist> - Enter the range of ports here.
vlanid - Specify the VLAN range..
363
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
<vlanid_list> - Enter the VLAN ID list here.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the IGMP snooping rate limit for ports 1 to 15:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show igmp_snooping rate_limit ports 1-15
Command: show igmp_snooping rate_limit ports 1-15
Port Rate Limit
-------- -----------
1 No Limit
2 100
3 No Limit
4 No Limit
5 No Limit
Total Entries: 5
39-18 show igmp_snooping group
Description
This command is used to display the current IGMP snooping group configuration on the Switch.
Format show igmp_snooping group {[vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list> | ports <portlist>] {<ipaddr>}}
{data_driven}
Parameters
vlan - (Optional) Specify the name of the VLAN for which you want to view IGMP snooping group information. If
VLAN, ports and IP address are not specified, the system will display all current IGMP snooping group information.
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the VLAN name here. The VLAN name can be up to 32 characters long.
vlanid - (Optional) Specify the ID of the VLAN for which you want to view IGMP snooping group information.
<vlanid_list> - Enter the VLAN ID list here.
ports - (Optional) Specify a list of ports for which you want to view IGMP snooping group information.
<portlist> - Enter the list of ports here.
<ipaddr> - (Optional) Enter the group IP address for which you want to view IGMP snooping group information.
data_driven - (Optional) If data_driven is specified, only data driven groups will be displayed.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show IGMP snooping groups when IGMP v3 is supported:
364
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show igmp_snooping group
Command: show igmp_snooping group
Source/Group : 10.0.0.1/225.0.0.1
VLAN Name/VID : default/1
Member Ports : 5
UP Time : 6
Expiry Time : 254
Filter Mode : INCLUDE
Source/Group : 10.0.0.10/225.0.0.1
VLAN Name/VID : default/1
Member Ports : 5
UP Time : 6
Expiry Time : 254
Filter Mode : INCLUDE
Source/Group : NULL/239.255.255.250
VLAN Name/VID : default/1
Member Ports : 5
UP Time : 2
Expiry Time : 258
Filter Mode : EXCLUDE
Total Entries: 3
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show igmp_snooping group data_driven
Command: show igmp_snooping group data_driven
Source/Group : NULL/225.0.0.5
VLAN Name/VID : default/1
Reports : 0
Member Ports :
Router Ports : 24
UP Time : 3 days 50 mins
Expiry Time : 120 secs
Filter Mode : EXCLUDE
Total Entries : 1
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To show IGMP snooping groups when only IGMP v2 is supported: The third item is a data-driven learned entry. If the member port list is empty, the multicast packets will be forwarded to the router ports. If the router port list is empty, the packets will be dropped.
365
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show igmp_snooping group
Command: show igmp_snooping group
Source/Group : NULL/226.0.0.1
VLAN Name/VID : default/1
Member Ports : 5
UP Time : 10
Expiry Time : 258
Filter Mode : EXCLUDE
Source/Group : NULL/226.0.0.2
VLAN Name/VID : default/1
Member Ports : 5
UP Time : 9
Expiry Time : 259
Filter Mode : EXCLUDE
Source/Group : NULL/226.0.0.3
VLAN Name/VID : default/1
Member Ports :
Router Ports :
UP Time : 1
Expiry Time : 259
Filter Mode : EXCLUDE
Source/Group : NULL/239.255.255.250
VLAN Name/VID : default/1
Member Ports : 5
UP Time : 1
Expiry Time : 259
Filter Mode : EXCLUDE
Total Entries: 4
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
39-19 show igmp_snooping forwarding
Description
This command is used to display the Switch’s current IGMP snooping forwarding table. It provides an easy way for users to check the list of ports that the multicast group that comes from a specific sources will be forwarded to. The packet comes from the source VLAN. They will be forwarded to the forwarding VLAN. The IGMP snooping further restricts the forwarding ports.
Format show igmp_snooping forwarding {[vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list>]}
Parameters
vlan - (Optional) Specify the name of the VLAN for which you want to view IGMP snooping forwarding table information.
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the VLAN name here. The VLAN name can be up to 32 characters long.
vlanid - (Optional) Specify the ID of the VLAN for which you want to view IGMP snooping forwarding table information.
<vlanid_list> - Enter the VLAN ID list here.
366
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
If no parameter is specified, the system will display all current IGMP snooping forwarding table entries of the
Switch.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show all IGMP snooping forwarding entries located on the Switch:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show igmp_snooping forwarding
Command: show igmp_snooping forwarding
VLAN Name : default
Source IP : *
Multicast Group: 225.0.0.0
Port Member : 2,7
VLAN Name : default
Source IP : *
Multicast Group: 225.0.0.1
Port Member : 2,5
VLAN Name : default
Source IP : *
Multicast Group: 225.0.0.2
Port Member : 2,8
Total Entries : 3
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
39-20 show router_ports
Description
This command is used to display the currently configured router ports on the Switch.
Format show router_ports [vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list> | all ] {[static | dynamic | forbidden]}
Parameters
vlan - Specify the name of the VLAN on which the router port resides.
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the VLAN name here. The VLAN name can be up to 32 characters long.
vlanid - Specify the ID of the VLAN on which the router port resides.
<vlanid_list> - Enter the VLAN ID list here.
all - Specify all VLANs on which the router port resides.
static - (Optional) Displays router ports that have been statically configured.
dynamic - (Optional) Displays router ports that have been dynamically configured.
forbidden - (Optional) Displays forbidden router ports that have been statically configured.
If no parameter is specified, the system will display all currently configured router ports on the Switch.
367
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display router ports:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show router_ports all
Command: show router_ports all
VLAN Name : default
Static Router Port : 1-10
Dynamic Router Port :
Router IP : 10.0.0.1, 10.0.0.2, 10.0.0.3
Forbidden router port :
VLAN Name : vlan2
Static router port :
Dynamic router port : 13
Router IP : 10.0.0.4, 10.0.0.5, 10.0.0.6
Forbidden router port :
Total Entries : 2
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
39-21 show igmp_snooping statistics counter
Description
This command is used to display the statistics counter for IGMP protocol packets that are received by the Switch since IGMP snooping was enabled.
Format show igmp_snooping statistic counter [vlan <vlan_name> | vlanid <vlanid_list> | ports <portlist>]
Parameters
vlan - Specify a VLAN to be displayed.
<vlan_name> - Enter the VLAN name here.
vlanid - Specify a list of VLANs to be displayed.
<vlanid_list> - Enter the VLAN ID list here.
ports - Specify a list of ports to be displayed.
<portlist> - Enter the list of port to be displayed here.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the IGMP snooping statistics counter:
368
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show igmp_snooping statistic counter vlanid 67
Command: show igmp_snooping statistic counter vlanid 67
VLAN Name : VLAN67
--------------------------------------------------
Group Number : 0
Receive Statistics
Query
IGMP v1 Query : 0
IGMP v2 Query : 0
IGMP v3 Query : 0
Total : 0
Dropped By Rate Limitation : 0
Dropped By Multicast VLAN : 0
Report & Leave
IGMP v1 Report : 0
IGMP v2 Report : 0
IGMP v3 Report : 0
IGMP v2 Leave : 0
Total : 0
Dropped By Rate Limitation : 0
Dropped By Max Group Limitation : 0
Dropped By Group Filter : 0
Dropped By Multicast VLAN : 0
Transmit Statistics
Query
IGMP v1 Query : 0
IGMP v2 Query : 44
IGMP v3 Query : 0
Total : 44
Report & Leave
IGMP v1 Report : 0
IGMP v2 Report : 0
IGMP v3 Report : 0
IGMP v2 Leave : 0
Total : 0
Total Entries : 1
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To display the IGMP snooping statistics counter for a port:
369
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show igmp_snooping statistic counter ports 1
Command: show igmp_snooping statistic counter ports 1
Port # : 1
--------------------------------------------------
Group Number : 0
Receive Statistics
Query
IGMP v1 Query : 0
IGMP v2 Query : 0
IGMP v3 Query : 0
Total : 0
Dropped By Rate Limitation : 0
Dropped By Multicast VLAN : 0
Report & Leave
IGMP v1 Report : 0
IGMP v2 Report : 0
IGMP v3 Report : 0
IGMP v2 Leave : 0
Total : 0
Dropped By Rate Limitation : 0
Dropped By Max Group Limitation : 0
Dropped By Group Filter : 0
Dropped By Multicast VLAN : 0
Transmit Statistics
Query
IGMP v1 Query : 0
IGMP v2 Query : 0
IGMP v3 Query : 0
Total : 0
Report & Leave
IGMP v1 Report : 0
IGMP v2 Report : 0
IGMP v3 Report : 0
IGMP v2 Leave : 0
Total : 0
Total Entries : 1
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
39-22 show igmp access_authentication ports
Description
This command is used to display the current IGMP Access Control configuration.
Format show igmp access_authentication ports [all | <portlist>]
370
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Parameters
all - Specify all ports to be displayed.
<portlist> - Enter a range of ports to be displayed.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the IGMP Access Control status for ports 1-4:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show igmp access_authentication ports 1-4
Command: show igmp access_authentication ports 1-4
Port State
----- ---------
1 Enabled
2 Disabled
3 Disabled
4 Disabled
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To display the IGMP Access Control status for all ports:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show igmp access_authentication ports all
Command: show igmp access_authentication ports all
Port State
----- ---------
1 Enabled
2 Disabled
3 Disabled
4 Disabled
5 Disabled
6 Disabled
7 Disabled
8 Disabled
9 Disabled
10 Disabled
11 Disabled
12 Disabled
13 Disabled
14 Disabled
15 Disabled
16 Disabled
17 Disabled
18 Disabled
19 Disabled
20 Disabled
CTRL+C ESC q Quit SPACE n Next Page ENTER Next Entry a All
371
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
39-23 clear igmp_snooping statistics counter
Description
This command is used to clear the IGMP snooping statistics counter.
Format clear igmp_snooping statistics counter
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To clear the IGMP snooping statistics counter:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#clear igmp_snooping statistic counter
Command: clear igmp_snooping statistic counter
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
39-24 show igmp_snooping host
Description
This command is used to display the IGMP hosts that have joined groups on specific ports or specific VLANs.
Format show igmp_snooping host {[vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list> | ports <portlist> | group <ipaddr>]}
Parameters
vlan - (Optional) Specify the VLAN name.
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the VLAN name here. This name can be up to 32 characters long.
vlanid - (Optional) Specify the VLAN ID.
<vlanid_list> - Enter the VLAN ID here.
ports - (Optional) Specify that list of port that will be displayed.
<portlist> - Enter the list of ports here.
group - (Optional) Specify the group.
<ipaddr> - Enter the group IP address here.
If no parameter is specified, all joining hosts will be displayed.
Restrictions
None.
372
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Example
To display the host IP information:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show igmp_snooping host vlan default
Command: show igmp_snooping host vlan default
VLAN ID Group Port No IGMP Host
-------- ----------------- --------- ------------
1 225.0.1.0 2 198.19.1.2
1 225.0.1.0 2 198.19.1.3
1 225.0.1.0 3 198.19.1.4
1 225.0.1.2 2 198.19.1.3
1 225.0.2.3 3 198.19.1.4
1 225.0.3.4 3 198.19.1.5
1 225.0.4.5 5 198.19.1.6
1 225.0.5.6 5 198.19.1.7
1 225.0.6.7 4 198.19.1.8
1 225.0.7.8 4 198.19.1.9
1 239.255.255.250 7 10.90.90.90
Total Entries : 11
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To display the host IP information for the group 225.0.1.0:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show igmp_snooping host group 225.0.1.0
Command: show igmp_snooping host group 225.0.1.0
VLAN ID Group Port No IGMP Host
-------- ----------------- --------- ------------
1 225.0.1.0 2 198.19.1.2
1 225.0.1.0 2 198.19.1.3
1 225.0.1.0 3 198.19.1.4
Total Entries : 3
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
373
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 40 IP-MAC-Port Binding (IMPB)
Command List
create address_binding ip_mac ipaddress <ipaddr> mac_address <macaddr> {ports [<portlist> | all]}
config address_binding ip_mac ports [<portlist> | all] {arp_inspection [strict | loose | disable] | ip_inspection
[enable | disable] | protocol [ipv4 | ipv6 | all] | allow_zeroip [enable | disable] | forward_dhcppkt [enable | disable] | stop_learning_threshold <int 0-500>}
create address_binding ip_mac ipv6address <ipv6addr> mac_address <macaddr> {ports [ <portlist>| all]}
config address_binding ip_mac ipv6address <ipv6addr> mac_address <macaddr> {ports [<portlist>| all]}
delete address_binding blocked [all | vlan_name <vlan_name> mac_address <macaddr>]
delete address_binding ip_mac [all | ipaddress <ipaddr> mac_address <macaddr> | ipv6address <ipv6addr> mac_address <macaddr>]
config address_binding ip_mac ipaddress <ipaddr> mac_address <macaddr> {ports [<portlist> | all]}
show address_binding {ports {<portlist>}}
show address_binding blocked [all | vlan_name <vlan_name> mac_address <macaddr>]
show address_binding ip_mac [all | [[ipaddress <ipaddr> | ipv6address <ipv6addr>] {mac_address <macaddr>}| mac_address <macaddr>]]
enable address_binding dhcp_snoop {[ipv6 | all]}
disable address_binding dhcp_snoop {[ipv6 | all]}
clear address_binding dhcp_snoop binding_entry ports [<portlist> | all] {[ipv6 | all]}
show address_binding dhcp_snoop {max_entry {ports <portlist>}}
show address_binding dhcp_snoop binding_entry {port <port>}
config address_binding dhcp_snoop max_entry ports [<portlist> | all] limit [<value 1-50> | no_limit] {ipv6} enable address_binding nd_snoop disable address_binding nd_snoop
config address_binding nd_snoop ports [<portlist> | all] max_entry [<value 1-50> | no_limit]
show address_binding nd_snoop {ports <portlist>}
show address_binding nd_snoop binding_entry {port <port>}
clear address_binding nd_snoop binding_entry ports [<portlist> | all] enable address_binding trap_log disable address_binding trap_log
config address_binding recover_learning ports [<portlist> | all]
debug address_binding [event | dhcp | all] state [enable | disable] no debug address_binding enable address_binding roaming disable address_binding roaming
40-1 create address_binding ip_mac
Description
This command is used to create an IMPB entry.
Format create address_binding ip_mac ipaddress <ipaddr> mac_address <macaddr> {ports [<portlist> | all]}
Parameters
ipaddress - Specify the IP address used for the IMPB entry.
<ipaddr> - Enter the IP address used here.
mac_address - Specify the MAC address used for the IMPB entry.
374
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
<macaddr> - Enter the MAC address used here.
ports - (Optional) Specify the portlist the entry will apply to. If not ports are specified, the settings will be applied to all ports.
<portlist> - Enter a list of ports used for this configuration here.
all - Specify that all the ports will be included.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To create an IMPB entry:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#create address_binding ip_mac ipaddress 10.1.1.1 mac_address 00-00-00-00-
00-11
Command: create address_binding ip_mac ipaddress 10.1.1.1 mac_address 00-00-00-00-00-11
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
40-2 config address_binding ip_mac ports
Description
This command is used to configure the state of IMPB on the Switch for each port.
Format config address_binding ip_mac ports [<portlist> | all] {arp_inspection [strict | loose | disable] | ip_inspection [enable | disable] | protocol [ipv4 | ipv6 | all] | allow_zeroip [enable | disable] | forward_dhcppkt [enable | disable] | stop_learning_threshold <int 0-500>}
Parameters
ports - Specify the ports used for this configuration.
<portlist> - Enter the list of ports used for this configuration here.
all - Specify that all the ports will be used.
arp_inspection - (Optional) Specify that the ARP inspection option will be configured.
strict - In this mode, all packets are dropped by default until a legal ARP or IP packets are detected.
loose - In this mode, all packets are forwarded by default until an illegal ARP or broadcast IP packets are detected. If not specified strict or loose, default is strict.
disable - Disable ARP inspection function. The default value is disabled.
ip_inspection - (Optional) Specify that the IP inspection option will be configured.
enable - Enables the IP inspection function. The legal IP packets will be forwarded, while the illegal IP packets will be dropped.
disable - Disables the IP inspection function. The default value is disabled.
protocol - (Optional) Specify the version used.
ipv4 - Specify that only IPv4 packets will be checked.
ipv6 - Specify that only IPv6 packets will be checked.
all - Specify that all packets will be checked.
allow_zeroip - (Optional) Specify whether to allow ARP packets with a source IP address of 0.0.0.0. If the IP address 0.0.0.0 is not configured in the binding list and this setting is enabled, ARP packets with the source IP address of 0.0.0.0 will be allowed; If the IP address 0.0.0.0 is not configured in the binding list and this setting is disabled, ARP packets with the source IP address of 0.0.0.0 will not be allowed. This option does not affect the IMPB ACL Mode.
enable - Specify to enable the allow zero IP option.
disable - Specify to disable the allow zero IP option.
forward_dhcppkt - (Optional) By default, DHCP packets with a broadcast DA will be flooded. When set to
375
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide disabled, the broadcast DHCP packet received by the specified port will not be forwarded. This setting is effective when DHCP Snooping is enabled, in this case DHCP packets trapped by the CPU must be forwarded by the software. This setting controls the forwarding behavior in this situation.
enable - Specify to enable the forward DHCP packets option.
disable - Specify to disable the forward DHCP packets option.
stop_learning_threshold - (Optional) When the number of blocked entries exceeds the threshold, the port will stop learning new addresses. Packets with a new address will be dropped.
<int 0-500> - Enter the stop learning threshold value here. This value must be between 0 and 500.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To enable IMPB on port 1:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config address_binding ip_mac ports 1 arp_inspection strict
Command: config address_binding ip_mac ports 1 arp_inspection strict
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
40-3 create address_binding ip_mac ipv6address
Description
This command is used to create an IP-MAC-Port binding entry using IPv6.
Format create address_binding ip_mac ipv6address <ipv6addr> mac_address <macaddr> {ports [<portlist>| all]}
Parameters
<ipv6addr> - Enter the IPv6 address.
mac_address - Specify the MAC address.
<macaddr> - Enter the MAC address here.
ports - (Optional) Specify a range of ports or all ports.
<portlist> - Enter a range of ports to be configured.
all - Specify to apply to all the ports.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To create a static IPv6 IMPB entry that binds the IPv6 address fe80::240:5ff:fe00:28 to the MAC address 00-00-00-
00-00-11:
376
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#create address_binding ip_mac ipv6address fe80::240:5ff:fe00:28 mac_address 00-00-00-00-00-11
Command: create address_binding ip_mac ipv6address FE80::240:5FF:FE00:28 mac_address 00-00-
00-00-00-11
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
40-4 config address_binding ip_mac ipv6address
Description
This command is used to update an address binding entry using IPv6.
Format config address_binding ip_mac ipv6address <ipv6addr> mac_address <macaddr> {ports [<portlist>| all]}
Parameters
<ipv6addr> - Enter the IPv6 address used here.
mac_address - Specify the MAC address.
<macaddr> - Enter the MAC address here.
ports - (Optional) Specify a range of ports to be configured. If the ports are not specified, it will apply to all ports.
<portlist> - Enter a range of ports to be applied to.
all - Specify all ports to be applied to.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure a static IPv6 IMPB entry so that that IPv6 address fe80::240:5ff:fe00:28 is bound to the MAC address
00-00-00-00-00-11:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config address_binding ip_mac ipv6address fe80::240:5ff:fe00:28 mac_address 00-00-00-00-00-11
Command: config address_binding ip_mac ipv6address FE80::240:5FF:FE00:28 mac_address 00-00-
00-00-00-11
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
40-5 delete address_binding blocked
Description
This command is used to delete a blocked entry.
Format delete address_binding blocked [all | vlan_name <vlan_name> mac_address <macaddr>]
377
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Parameters
all - Specify that all the entries the address database that the system has automatically blocked to be deleted.
vlan_name - Specify the name of the VLAN to which the blocked MAC address belongs.
<vlan_name> - Enter the VLAN name.
mac_address - Specify the MAC address of the entry or the blocked MAC address.
<macaddr> - Enter the MAC address used.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To delete a blocked address:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#delete address_binding blocked vlan_name v31 mac_address 00-00-00-00-00-
11
Command: delete address_binding blocked vlan_name v31 mac_address 00-00-00-00-00-11
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
40-6 delete address_binding ip_mac
Description
This command is used to delete an IMPB entry.
Format delete address_binding ip_mac [all | ipaddress <ipaddr> mac_address <macaddr> | ipv6address
<ipv6addr> mac_address <macaddr>]
Parameters
all - Specify that all the MAC address will be used.
ipaddress - Specify the learned IP address of the entry in the database.
<ipaddr> - Enter the IP address used.
mac_address - Specify the MAC address used for this configuration.
<macaddr> - Enter the MAC address used.
ipv6address - Specify the learned IPv6 address of the entry in the database.
<ipv6addr> - Enter the IPv6 address used.
mac_address - Specify the MAC address used for this configuration.
<macaddr> - Enter the MAC address used.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To delete a specified IMPB entry:
378
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#delete address_binding ip_mac ipaddress 10.1.1.1 mac_address 00-00-00-00-
00-11
Command: delete address_binding ip_mac ipaddress 10.1.1.1 mac_address 00-00-00-00-00-11
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
40-7 config address_binding ip_mac ipaddress
Description
This command is used to update an IMPB entry.
Format config address_binding ip_mac ipaddress <ipaddr> mac_address <macaddr> {ports [<portlist> | all]}
Parameters
ipaddress - Specify the IP address of the entry being updated.
<ipaddr> - Enter the IP address used here.
mac_address - Specify the MAC address of the entry being updated
<macaddr> - Enter the MAC address used here.
ports - (Optional) Specify which ports are used for the IMPB entry being updated. If not specified, then it is applied to all ports.
<portlist> - Enter the list of port used here.
all - Specify that all the ports will be used.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure an IMPB entry:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config address_binding ip_mac ipaddress 10.1.1.1 mac_address 00-00-00-00-
00-11
Command: config address_binding ip_mac ipaddress 10.1.1.1 mac_address 00-00-00-00-00-11
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
40-8 show address_binding
Description
This command is used to display the IMPB global settings or IMPB settings on specified ports.
Format show address_binding {ports {<portlist>}}
379
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Parameters
ports - (Optional) Specify the ports for which the information is displayed. If not specified, all ports are displayed.
<portlist> - (Optional) Enter the list of ports used here.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show the IMPB global configuration:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show address_binding
Command: show address_binding
Roaming state : Enabled
Trap/Log : Disabled
DHCP Snoop(IPv4) : Disabled
DHCP Snoop(IPv6) : Disabled
ND Snoop : Disabled
Function Version : 3.93
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To show the IMPB ports:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show address_binding ports
Command: show address_binding ports
ARP: ARP Inspection IP: IP Inspection
Port ARP IP Protocol Zero IP DHCP Packet Stop Learning
Threshold/Mode
----- -------- -------- ----- --------- ----------- --------------
1 Disabled Disabled All Not Allow Forward 500/Normal
2 Disabled Disabled All Not Allow Forward 500/Normal
3 Disabled Disabled All Not Allow Forward 500/Normal
4 Disabled Disabled All Not Allow Forward 500/Normal
5 Disabled Disabled All Not Allow Forward 500/Normal
6 Disabled Disabled All Not Allow Forward 500/Normal
7 Disabled Disabled All Not Allow Forward 500/Normal
8 Disabled Disabled All Not Allow Forward 500/Normal
9 Disabled Disabled All Not Allow Forward 500/Normal
10 Disabled Disabled All Not Allow Forward 500/Normal
11 Disabled Disabled All Not Allow Forward 500/Normal
12 Disabled Disabled All Not Allow Forward 500/Normal
13 Disabled Disabled All Not Allow Forward 500/Normal
14 Disabled Disabled All Not Allow Forward 500/Normal
15 Disabled Disabled All Not Allow Forward 500/Normal
16 Disabled Disabled All Not Allow Forward 500/Normal
CTRL+C ESC q Quit SPACE n Next Page ENTER Next Entry a All
380
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
40-9 show address_binding blocked
Description
This command is used to display the blocked MAC entries.
Format show address_binding blocked [all | vlan_name <vlan_name> mac_address <macaddr>]
Parameters
all - Specify that all the addresses in the database that the system has auto learned and blocked to be displayed.
vlan_name - Specify the name of the VLAN to which the blocked MAC address belongs.
<vlan_name> - Enter the VLAN name used.
mac_address - Specify the MAC address of the entry or the blocked MAC address.
<macaddr> - Enter the MAC address of the entry or the blocked MAC address.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show the IMPB entries that are blocked:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show address_binding blocked all
Command: show address_binding blocked all
VID VLAN Name MAC Address Port
---- -------------------------------- ----------------- ----
1 default 00-0C-6E-AA-B9-C0 1
Total Entries : 1
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
40-10 show address_binding ip_mac
Description
This command is used to display the IMPB entries.
Format show address_binding ip_mac [all | [[ipaddress <ipaddr> | ipv6address <ipv6addr>] {mac_address
<macaddr>} | mac_address <macaddr>]]
Parameters
all - Specify that all the IP addresses to be displayed.
ipaddress - Specify the learned IP address of the entry in the database.
<ipaddr> - Enter the learned IP address.
ipv6address - Specify the learned IPv6 address of the entry in the database.
<ipv6addr> - Enter the learned IPv6 address.
mac_address - (Optional) Specify the MAC address of the entry in the database.
<macaddr> - Enter the MAC address here.
381
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
mac_address - Specify the MAC address in the database.
<macaddr> - Enter the binding IP MAC address.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show IMPB entries:
GS-3000-26TC:admin#show address_binding ip_mac all
Command: show address_binding ip_mac all
M(Mode) - D:DHCP, N:ND S:Static ACL - A:Active I:Inactive
IP Address MAC Address M ACL Ports
--------------------------------------- ----------------- -- --- -------------
10.1.1.1 00-00-00-00-00-11 S I 1-26
FE80::240:5FF:FE00:28 00-00-00-00-00-11 S I 1-26
Total Entries : 2
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
40-11 enable address_binding dhcp_snoop
Description
This command is used to enable DHCP snooping mode.
By default, DHCP snooping is disabled.
If a user enables DHCP Snooping mode, all ports which have IMPB disabled will become server ports. The switch will learn the IP addresses through server ports (by using DHCP Offer and DHCP ACK packets).
Note that the DHCP discover packet cannot be passed thru the user ports if the allow_zeroip function is disabled on the port.
The auto-learned IMPB entry will be mapped to a specific source port based on the MAC address learning function.
This entry will be created as an IP-Inspection mode binding entry for this specific port. Each entry is associated with a lease time. When the lease time has expires, the expired entry will be removed from the port. The autolearned binding entry can be moved from one port to another port if the DHCP snooping function has learned that the MAC address has moved to a different port.
If a situation occurs where a binding entry learned by DHCP snooping conflicts with a statically configured entry.
The binding relation has conflicted. For example, if IP A is bound to MAC X with a static configuration and suppose that the binding entry learned by DHCP snooping is that IP A is bound to MAC Y, and then it is conflict. When the
DHCP snooping learned entry binds with the static configured entry, and the DHCP snooping learned entry will not be created.
In a situation where the same IMPB pair has been statically configured, the auto-learned entry will not be created.
In a situation where the learned information is consistent with the statically configured entry the auto-learned entry will not be created. In a situation where the entry is statically configured in ARP mode the auto learned entry will not be created. In a situation where the entry is statically configured on one port and the entry is auto-learned on another port, the auto-learned entry will not be created.
Format enable address_binding dhcp_snoop {[ipv6 | all]}
382
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Parameters
ipv6 - (Optional) Specify to enable the IPv6 entries.
all - (Optional) Specify to enable all DHCP snooping mode.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To enable DHCP IPv4 snooping mode:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#enable address_binding dhcp_snoop
Command: enable address_binding dhcp_snoop
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
40-12 disable address_binding dhcp_snoop
Description
This command is used to disable DHCP snooping mode. When the DHCP snooping function is disabled, all of the auto-learned binding entries will be removed.
Format disable address_binding dhcp_snoop {[ipv6 | all]}
Parameters
ipv6 - (Optional) Specify to disable the IPv6 entries.
all - (Optional) Specify to disable all DHCP snooping mode.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To disable DHCP IPv4 snooping mode:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#disable address_binding dhcp_snoop
Command: disable address_binding dhcp_snoop
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
40-13 clear address_binding dhcp_snoop binding_entry ports
Description
This command is used to clear the DHCP snooping entries learned for the specified ports.
383
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Format clear address_binding dhcp_snoop binding_entry ports [<portlist> | all] {[ipv6 | all]}
Parameters
<portlist> - Enter the list of ports used.
all - Specify that all the ports will be used.
ipv6 - (Optional) Specify to clear the IPv6 entries.
all - (Optional) Specify to clear all entries.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To clear DHCP IPv4 snooping entries on ports 1-3:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#clear address_binding dhcp_snoop binding_entry ports 1-3
Command: clear address_binding dhcp_snoop binding_entry ports 1-3
Success. s
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
40-14 show address_binding dhcp_snoop
Description
This command is used to display the DHCP snooping configuration and learning database.
Format show address_binding dhcp_snoop {max_entry {ports <portlist>}}
Parameters
max_entry - (Optional) Displays the maximum number of entries per port.
ports - (Optional) Specify the ports used for this configuration.
<portlist> - Enter a list of ports used here.
If no parameters are specified, show DHCP snooping displays the enable/disable state.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show the DHCP snooping state:
384
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show address_binding dhcp_snoop
Command: show address_binding dhcp_snoop
DHCP Snoop(IPv4) : Disabled
DHCP Snoop(IPv6) : Disabled
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To display DHCP snooping maximum entry configuration:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show address_binding dhcp_snoop max_entry
Command: show address_binding dhcp_snoop max_entry
Port Max Entry Max IPv6 Entry
---- --------- --------------
1 No Limit No Limit
2 No Limit No Limit
3 No Limit No Limit
4 No Limit No Limit
5 No Limit No Limit
6 No Limit No Limit
7 No Limit No Limit
8 No Limit No Limit
9 No Limit No Limit
10 No Limit No Limit
11 No Limit No Limit
12 No Limit No Limit
13 No Limit No Limit
14 No Limit No Limit
15 No Limit No Limit
16 No Limit No Limit
17 No Limit No Limit
18 No Limit No Limit
19 No Limit No Limit
20 No Limit No Limit
CTRL+C ESC q Quit SPACE n Next Page ENTER Next Entry a All
40-15 show address_binding dhcp_snoop binding_entry
Description
This command is used to display the DHCP snooping binding entries.
Format show address_binding dhcp_snoop binding_entry {port <port>}
Parameters
port - (Optional) Specify the port used for this configuration.
<port> - Enter the port number used here.
Restrictions
None.
385
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Example
To display the DHCP snooping binding entries:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show address_binding dhcp_snoop binding_entry
Command: show address_binding dhcp_snoop binding_entry
S (Status) - A: Active, I: Inactive
Time - Left Time (sec)
IP Address MAC Address S Time Port
--------------------------------------- --------------------- -- ----- ------
10.62.58.35 00-0B-5D-05-34-0B A 35964 1
10.33.53.82 00-20-c3-56-b2-ef I 2590 2
Total entries : 2
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
40-16 config address_binding dhcp_snoop max_entry
Description
This command is used to specify the maximum number of entries that can be learned by a specified port.
Format config address_binding dhcp_snoop max_entry ports [<portlist> | all] limit [<value 1-50> | no_limit] {ipv6}
Parameters
ports - Specify the list of ports you would like to set the maximum number of entries that can be learned.
<portlist> - Enter the list of ports used here.
all - Specify that all the ports will be used.
limit - Specify the maximum number. The default value is no_limit.
<value 1-50> - Enter the limit value here. This value must be between 1 and 50.
no_limit - Specify that the maximum number of learned entries is unlimited.
ipv6 - (Optional) Specify the IPv6 address used for this configuration.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To set the maximum number of DHCP IPv4 snooping entries that ports 1–3 can learned to 10:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config address_binding dhcp_snoop max_entry ports 1-3 limit 10.
Command: config address_binding dhcp_snoop max_entry ports 1-3 limit 10.
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
386
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
40-17 enable address_binding nd_snoop
Description
This command is used to enable ND snooping on the Switch.
Format enable address_binding nd_snoop
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To enable the ND snooping function on the switch:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#enable address_binding nd_snoop
Command: enable address_binding nd_snoop
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
40-18 disable address_binding nd_snoop
Description
This command is used to disable ND snooping on the Switch.
Format disable address_binding nd_snoop
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To disable the ND snooping function on the switch:
387
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#disable address_binding nd_snoop
Command: disable address_binding nd_snoop
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
40-19 config address_binding nd_snoop ports
Description
This command is used to specify the maximum number of entries that can be learned with ND snooping. By default, there is no limit on the maximum number of entries that can be learned on a port with ND snooping.
Format config address_binding nd_snoop ports [<portlist> | all] max_entry [<value 1-50> | no_limit]
Parameters
<portlist> - Enter the list of ports used for this configuration.
all - Specify that all the ports will be used for this configuration.
max_entry - Specify the maximum number of entries.
<value 1-50> - Enter the maximum number of entries used here. This value must be between 1 and 50.
no_limit - Specify that the maximum number of learned entries is unlimited.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To have a maximum of 10 entries can be learned by ND snooping on ports 1 to 3:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config address_binding nd_snoop ports 1-3 max_entry 10
Command: config address_binding nd_snoop ports 1-3 max_entry 10
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
40-20 show address_binding nd_snoop
Description
This command is used to display the status of ND snooping on the Switch.
Format show address_binding nd_snoop {ports <portlist>}
Parameters
ports - (Optional) Specify the list of ports used for this display.
<portlist> - Enter the list of ports used for this display here.
388
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show the ND snooping state:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show address_binding nd_snoop
Command: show address_binding nd_snoop
ND Snoop : Enabled
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To show the ND snooping maximum entry information for ports 1-5:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show address_binding nd_snoop ports 1-5
Command: show address_binding nd_snoop ports 1-5
Port Max Entry
---- ---------
1 10
2 10
3 10
4 No Limit
5 No Limit
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
40-21 show address_binding nd_snoop binding_entry
Description
This command is used to show the ND snooping binding entries on the Switch.
Format show address_binding nd_snoop binding_entry {port <port>}
Parameters
port - (Optional) Specify a port used for this display.
<port> - Enter the port number used for this display here.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show the ND snooping binding entry:
389
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show address_binding nd_snoop binding_entry
Command: show address_binding nd_snoop binding_entry
S (Status) - A: Active, I: Inactive
Time - Left Time (sec)
IP Address MAC Address S LT(sec) Port
--------------------------------------- ----------------- -- ---------- -----
2001:2222:1111:7777:5555:6666:7777:8888 00-00-00-00-00-02 I 50 5
2001::1 00-00-00-00-03-02 A 100 6
Total Entries : 2
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
40-22 clear address_binding nd_snoop binding_entry ports
Description
This command is used to clear the ND snooping entries on specified ports.
Format clear address_binding nd_snoop binding_entry ports [<portlist> | all]
Parameters
<portlist> - Enter the list of ports that you would like to clear the ND snoop learned entry.
all - Specify to clear all ND snooping learned entries.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To clear ND snooping entry on ports 1-3:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#clear address_binding nd_snoop binding_entry ports 1-3
Command: clear address_binding nd_snoop binding_entry ports 1-3
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
40-23 enable address_binding trap_log
Description
This command is used to send traps and logs when the IMPB module detects an illegal IP and MAC address.
Format enable address_binding trap_log
390
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To enable the IMPB traps and logs:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#enable address_binding trap_log
Command: enable address_binding trap_log
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
40-24 disable address_binding trap_log
Description
This command is used to disable the IMPB traps and logs.
Format disable address_binding trap_log
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To disable IMPB traps and logs:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#disable address_binding trap_log
Command: disable address_binding trap_log
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
40-25 config address_binding recover_learning ports
Description
This command is used to recover IMPB checking.
391
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Format config address_binding recover_learning ports [<portlist> | all]
Parameters
<portlist> - Enter the list of port to recover the IMPB check.
all - Specify all the ports to recover the IMPB check.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To recover IMPB checking for ports 6 to 7:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config address_binding recover_learning ports 6-7
Command: config address_binding recover_learning ports 6-7
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
40-26 debug address_binding
Description
This command is used to start the IMPB debug when the IMPB module receives an ARP/IP packet or a DHCP packet.
Format debug address_binding [event | dhcp | all] state [enable | disable]
Parameters
event - Prints out the debug messages when IMPB module receives ARP/IP packets.
dhcp - Prints out the debug messages when the IMPB module receives the DHCP packets.
all - Prints out all debug messages.
state - Specify the IMPB debug state to be enabled or disabled.
enable - Specify to enable the state.
disable - Specify to disable the state.
Restrictions
Only Administrator users can issue this command.
Example
To print out all debug IMPB messages:
392
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#debug address_binding all state enable
Command: debug address_binding all state enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
40-27 no debug address_binding
Description
This command is used to stop the IMPB debug starting when the IMPB module receives an ARP/IP packet or a
DHCP packet.
Format no debug address_binding
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrator users can issue this command.
Example
To stop IMPB debug: starting when the IMPB module receives an ARP/IP or DHCP packet:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#no debug address_binding
Command: no debug address_binding
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
40-28 enable address_binding roaming
Description
This command is used to enable the IMPB roaming.
Format enable address_binding roaming
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
393
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Example
To enable the IMPB roaming:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#enable address_binding roaming
Command: enable address_binding roaming
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
40-29 disable address_binding roaming
Description
This command is used to disable the IMPB roaming.
Format disable address_binding roaming
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To disable the IMPB roaming:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#disable address_binding roaming
Command: disable address_binding roaming
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
394
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 41 IPv6 Neighbor Discover Command
List
create ipv6 neighbor_cache ipif <ipif_name 12> <ipv6addr> <macaddr>
delete ipv6 neighbor_cache ipif [<ipif_name 12> | all] [<ipv6addr> | static | dynamic | all]
show ipv6 neighbor_cache ipif [<ipif_name 12> | all] [ipv6address <ipv6addr> | static | dynamic | all]
config ipv6 nd ns ipif <ipif_name 12> retrans_time <millisecond 0-4294967295>
show ipv6 nd {ipif <ipif_name 12>}
41-1 create ipv6 neighbor_cache
Description
This command is used to add a static neighbor on an IPv6 interface.
Format create ipv6 neighbor_cache ipif <ipif_name 12> <ipv6addr> <macaddr>
Parameters
ipif - Specify the interface’s name.
<ipif_name 12> - Enter the IP interface name here. This name can be up to 12 characters long.
<ipv6addr> - Enter the IPv6 address of the neighbor.
<macaddr> - Enter the MAC address of the neighbor.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
Create a static neighbor cache entry:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#create ipv6 neighbor_cache ipif System 3ffc::1 00-01-02-03-04-05
Command: create ipv6 neighbor_cache ipif System 3ffc::1 00-01-02-03-04-05
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
41-2 delete ipv6 neighbor_cache
Description
This command is used to delete a neighbor cache entry or static neighbor cache entries from the address cache or all address cache entries on this IP interface. Both static and dynamic entries can be deleted.
Format delete ipv6 neighbor_cache ipif [<ipif_name 12> | all] [<ipv6addr> | static | dynamic | all]
395
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Parameters
ipif - Specify the IPv6 interface name.
<ipif_name 12> - Enter the IP interface name here. This name can be up to 12 characters long.
all - Specify that all the interfaces will be used in this configuration.
<ipv6addr> - Enter the neighbor’s IPv6 address.
static - Deletes the static entry.
dynamic - Deletes those dynamic entries.
all - Deletes all entries include static and dynamic entries.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
Delete a neighbor cache entry on IP interface “System”:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#delete ipv6 neighbor_cache ipif System 3ffc::1
Command: delete ipv6 neighbor_cache ipif System 3FFC::1
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
41-3 show ipv6 neighbor_cache
Description
This command is used to display the neighbor cache entry for the specified interface. You can display a specific entry, all entries, or all static entries.
Format show ipv6 neighbor_cache ipif [<ipif_name 12> | all] [ipv6address <ipv6addr> | static | dynamic | all]
Parameters
ipif - Specify the IPv6 interface name.
<ipif_name 12> - Enter the IP interface name here. This name can be up to 12 characters long.
all - Specify that all the interface will be displayed.
ipv6address - Specify the neighbor’s address.
<ipv6addr> - Enter the IPv6 address here.
static - Static neighbor cache entry.
dynamic - Dynamic entries.
all - All entries include static and dynamic entries.
Restrictions
None
Example
Show all neighbor cache entries of IP interface “System”:
396
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show ipv6 neighbor_cache ipif System all
Command: show ipv6 neighbor_cache ipif System all
3FFC::1 State: Static
MAC Address : 00-01-02-03-04-05 Port : NA
Interface : System VID : 1
Total Entries: 1
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
41-4 config ipv6 nd ns retrans_time
Description
This command is used to configure the IPv6 ND neighbor solicitation retransmit time, which is between retransmissions of neighbor solicitation messages to a neighbor when resolving the address or when probing the reachability of a neighbor.
Format config ipv6 nd ns ipif <ipif_name 12> retrans_time <millisecond 0-4294967295>
Parameters
ipif - The IPv6 interface name.
<ipif_name 12> - Enter the IP interface name here. This name can be up to 12 characters long.
retrans_time - Neighbor solicitation’s re-transmit timer in millisecond.
<millisecond 0-4294967295> - Enter the re-transmit timer value here. This value must be between 0 and
4294967295 milliseconds.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure the retrans_time of IPv6 ND neighbor solicitation:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config ipv6 nd ns ipif Zira retrans_time 1000000
Command: config ipv6 nd ns ipif Zira retrans_time 1000000
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
41-5 show ipv6 nd
Description
This command is used to display information regarding neighbor detection on the Switch.
397
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Format show ipv6 nd {ipif <ipif_name 12>}
Parameters
ipif - (Optional) The name of the interface.
<ipif_name 12> - Enter the IP interface name here. This name can be up to 12 characters long.
If no IP interface is specified, it will show the IPv6 ND related configuration of all interfaces.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To show IPv6 ND related configuration:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show ipv6 nd ipif System
Command: show ipv6 nd ipif System
Interface Name : System
NS Retransmit Time : 0 (ms)
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
398
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 42 IPv6 Route Command List
create ipv6route [default | <ipv6networkaddr>] [<ipif_name 12> <ipv6addr> | <ipv6addr>] {<metric 1-65535>}
{[primary | backup]}
delete ipv6route [[default | <ipv6networkaddr>] [<ipif_name 12> <ipv6addr> | <ipv6addr>] | all]
show ipv6route {[<ipv6networkaddr> | <ipv6addr>]} {static}
42-1 create ipv6route
Description
This command is used to create an IPv6 static route. The next hop can be an IPv6 router or an IP tunnel. These two types of next hop are mutually exclusive. The primary route has higher priority than backup. When primary route is inactive, the backup route will be used. One static route will be primary route by default if there is no primary route to this destination yet
Format create ipv6route [default | <ipv6networkaddr>] [<ipif_name 12> <ipv6addr> | <ipv6addr>] {<metric 1-65535>}
{[primary | backup]}
Parameters
default - Specify an IPv6 default route.
<ipv6networkaddr> - Enter the IPv6 address and prefix of the destination of the route.
<ipif_name 12> - Enter the interface name to specify the IP interface for this route from an existing interface.
Enter the IPv6 route name using a maximum of 12 characters.
<ipv6addr> - Enter the next hop address of the route.
<ipv6addr> - Specify the next ipv6 address hop of the route.
<metric 1-65535> - (Optional) Enter the metric value here. The default value is 1.
primary - (Optional) Specify the route as the primary route to the destination.
backup - (Optional) Specify the route as the backup route to the destination
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To create an IPv6 static route with outgoing interface System:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# create ipv6route 5000::/64 System FE80::1
Command: create ipv6route 5000::/64 System FE80::1
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
42-2 delete ipv6route
Description
This command is used to delete an IPv6 static route. If the next hop is a global address, it is not needed to indicate the interface name. If the next hop is a link local address, then the interface name must be specified.
399
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Format delete ipv6route [[default | <ipv6networkaddr>] [<ipif_name 12> <ipv6addr> | <ipv6addr>] | all]
Parameters
default - Specify the default route.
<ipv6networkaddr> - Enter the destination network route.
<ipif_name 12> - Enter the IP interface name used here. This name can be up to 12 characters long.
<ipv6addr> - Enter the next hop address for the route.
<ipv6addr> - Enter the next hop address for the route.
all - Specify to delete all created static routes.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
Delete an IPv6 static route:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#delete ipv6route default System 3FFC::1
Command: delete ipv6route default System 3FFC::1
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
42-3 show ipv6route
Description
This command is used to display IPv6 routes.
Format show ipv6route {[<ipv6networkaddr> | <ipv6addr>]} {static}
Parameters
<ipv6networkaddr> - (Optional) Enter the destination network address of the route to be displayed.
<ipv6addr> - (Optional) Enter the destination IPv6 address of the route to be displayed. The longest prefix matched route will be displayed
static - (Optional) Specify to display only static routes. One static route may be active or inactive.
Restrictions
None.
Example
Show all the IPv6 routes:
400
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show ipv6route
Command: show ipv6route
IPv6 Prefix: 2002::/16 Protocol: Static Metric: 1
Next Hop : :: IPIF : tn2
IPv6 Prefix: 2002:404:104:1::/64 Protocol: Local Metric: 1
Next Hop : :: IPIF : tn2
Total Entries: 2
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show ipv6route static
Command: show ipv6route static
IPv6 Prefix: 3000:62:1::/64 Protocol: Static Metric: 1
Next Hop : :: IPIF : tn1
Backup : Primary Status : Active
Total Entries: 1
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
401
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 43 Japanese Web-Based Access
Control (JWAC) Command List
enable jwac disable jwac
config jwac [quarantine_server_url [<string 128> | ipv6 <string 128>] | clear_quarantine_server_url {ipv6}] show jwac enable jwac redirect disable jwac redirect
config jwac redirect {destination [quarantine_server | jwac_login_page] | delay_time <sec 0-10>}(1) enable jwac forcible_logout disable jwac forcible_logout enable jwac udp_filtering disable jwac udp_filtering enable jwac quarantine_server_monitor disable jwac quarantine_server_monitor
config jwac quarantine_server_error_timeout <sec 5-300>
config jwac virtual_ip [<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr>] {url [<string 128> | clear]}
config jwac update_server [add | delete] [ipaddress <network_address> | ipv6address <ipv6networkaddr>]
{[tcp_port <port_number 1-65535> | udp_port <port_number 1-65535>]}
config jwac switch_http_port <tcp_port_number 1-65535> {[http | https]}
config jwac ports [<portlist> | all] {state [enable | disable] | max_authenticating_host <value 0-50> | aging_time
[infinite | <min 1-1440>] | idle_time [infinite | <min 1-1440>] | block_time [<sec 0-300>] | auth_mode
[host_based | port_based]}(1)
show jwac ports {<portlist>}
config jwac radius_protocol [local | eap_md5 | pap | chap | ms_chap | ms_chapv2]
create jwac user <username 15> {vlan <vlanid 1-4094>}
config jwac user <username 15> {vlan <vlanid 1-4094>}
delete jwac [user <username 15> | all_users] show jwac user
clear jwac auth_state [ports [all | <portlist>] {authenticated | authenticating | blocked} | mac_addr <macaddr>]
show jwac auth_state ports {<portlist>}
config jwac authorization attributes {radius [enable | disable] | local [enable | disable]}(1) show jwac update_server
config jwac authentication_page element [japanese | english] [default | page_title <desc 128> | login_window_title <desc 32> | user_name_title <desc 16> | password_title <desc 16> | logout_window_title
<desc 32> | notification_line <value 1-5> <desc 128>]
config jwac authenticate_page [japanese | english] show jwac authenticate_page
43-1 enable jwac
Description
This command is used to enable the Japanese Web-based access control (JWAC) function.
Using the JWAC function, PC users need to pass two stages of authentication. The first stage is to do the authentication with the quarantine server and the second stage is the authentication with the Switch.
Format enable jwac
402
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To enable JWAC:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#enable jwac
Command: enable jwac
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
43-2 disable jwac
Description
This command is used to disable JWAC.
Format disable jwac
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To disable JWAC:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#disable jwac
Command: disable jwac
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
43-3 config jwac
Description
This command is used to configure the quarantine server URL. If the redirection is enabled and the redirection destination is a quarantine server, when a HTTP request from an unauthenticated host which is not headed to a quarantine server reaches the Switch, the Switch will handle this HTTP packet and send back a message to the host to make it access the quarantine server with the configured URL. When the PC connected to the specified
URL, the quarantine server will request the PC user to input the user name and password to authenticate.
403
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
NOTE: If the quarantine server is linked to the JWAC enabled port on the switch, it must be added to the static
FDB correctly before it can work properly.
Format config jwac [quarantine_server_url [<string 128> | ipv6 <string 128>] | clear_quarantine_server_url {ipv6}]
Parameters
quarantine_server_url - Specify the entire URL of the authentication page on the quarantine server.
<string 128> - Enter the entire URL of the authentication page on the quarantine server. The quarantine server URL can be up to 128 characters long.
ipv6 - Specify the entire URL of authentication page on Quarantine Server of IPv6.
<string 128> - Enter up to 128 characters for the quarantine server URL.
clear_quarantine_server_url - Specify to clear the current quarantine server URL.
ipv6 - (Optional) Clear the Quarantine Server URL of IPv6.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure the Quarantine Server URL:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# config jwac quarantine_server_url http://10.90.90.88/authpage.html
Command: config jwac quarantine_server_url http://10.90.90.88/authpage.html
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To configure IPv6 Quarantine Server URL:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# config jwac quarantine_server_url ipv6 http://[3000::2]/authpage.html
Command: config jwac quarantine_ server_url ipv6 http://[3000::2]/authpage.html
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
43-4 show jwac
Description
This command is used to display the JWAC configuration settings..
Format show jwac
Parameters
None.
404
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the current JWAC configuration:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show jwac
Command: show jwac
State : Disabled
Enabled Ports :
Virtual IP/URL : 1.1.1.1/-
Virtual IPv6/URL : ::/-
Switch HTTP Port : 80 (HTTP)
UDP Filtering : Enabled
Forcible Logout : Enabled
Redirect State : Enabled
Redirect Delay Time : 1 Seconds
Redirect Destination : Quarantine Server
Quarantine Server :
Quarantine Server IPv6 :
Q-Server Monitor : Disabled
Q-Server Error Timeout : 60 Seconds
RADIUS Auth-Protocol : PAP
RADIUS Authorization : Enabled
Local Authorization : Enabled
Function Version : 2.11
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
43-5 enable jwac redirect
Description
This command is used to enable JWAC redirect. When redirect quarantine_server is enabled, the unauthenticated host will be redirected to a quarantine server when it tries to access a random URL. When redirect
jwac_login_page is enabled, the unauthenticated host will be redirected to the jwac_login_page on the Switch to finish authentication.
When enable redirect to quarantine server is in effect, a quarantine server must be configured first.
Format enable jwac redirect
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To enable JWAC redirect:
405
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#enable jwac redirect
Command: enable jwac redirect
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
43-6 disable jwac redirect
Description
This command is used to disable JWAC redirect. When redirect is disabled, only access to quarantine_server and the jwac_login_page from an unauthenticated host is allowed, all other Web access will be denied.
Format disable jwac redirect
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To disable JWAC redirect:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#disable jwac redirect
Command: disable jwac redirect
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
43-7 config jwac redirect
Description
This command is used to configure redirect destination and delay time before an unauthenticated host is redirected to the quarantine server or the JWAC login web page. The unit of delay time is seconds. 0 means no delaying the redirect.
Format config jwac redirect {destination [quarantine_server | jwac_login_page] | delay_time <sec 0-10>}(1)
Parameters
destination - Specify the destination which the unauthenticated host will be redirected to.
quarantine_server - Specify the unauthenticated host will be redirected to the quarantine_server.
jwac_login_page - Specify the unauthenticated host will be redirected to the jwac_login_page.
delay_time - Specify the time interval after which the unauthenticated host will be redirected.
<sec 0-10> - Enter the time interval after which the unauthenticated host will be redirected. The delay time
406
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide must be between 0 and 10 seconds.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure JWAC redirect destination to JWAC login web page and a delay time of 5 seconds:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config jwac redirect destination jwac_login_page delay_time 5
Command: config jwac redirect destination jwac_login_page delay_time 5
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
43-8 enable jwac forcible_logout
Description
This command is used to enable JWAC forcible logout. When enabled, a Ping packet from an authenticated host to the JWAC Switch with TTL=1 will be regarded as a logout request, and the host will be moved back to unauthenticated state.
Format enable jwac forcible_logout
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To enable JWAC forcible logout:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#enable jwac forcible_logout
Command: enable jwac forcible_logout
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
43-9 disable jwac forcible_logout
Description
This command is used to disable JWAC forcible logout.
407
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Format disable jwac forcible_logout
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To disable JWAC forcible logout:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#disable jwac forcible_logout
Command: disable jwac forcible_logout
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
43-10 enable jwac udp_filtering
Description
This command is used to enable the JWAC UDP filtering function. When UDP filtering is enabled, all UDP and
ICMP packets except DHCP and DNS packets from unauthenticated hosts will be dropped.
Note: ICMPv6 packets will not be dropped because they utilize the Neighbor Discovery Protocol (NDP).
Format enable jwac udp_filtering
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To enable JWAC UDP filtering:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#enable jwac udp_filtering
Command: enable jwac udp_filtering
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
408
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
43-11 disable jwac udp_filtering
Description
This command is used to disable JWAC UDP filtering.
Format disable jwac udp_filtering
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To disable JWAC UDP filtering:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#disable jwac udp_filtering
Command: disable jwac udp_filtering
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
43-12 enable jwac quarantine_server_monitor
Description
This command is used to enable the JWAC quarantine server monitor. When enabled, the JWAC switch will monitor the quarantine server to ensure the server is okay. If the Switch detects no quarantine server, it will redirect all unauthenticated HTTP accesses to the JWAC Login Page forcibly if the redirect is enabled and the redirect destination is configured to be quarantine server.
Format enable jwac quarantine_server_monitor
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To enable JWAC quarantine server monitoring:
409
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#enable jwac quarantine_server_monitor
Command: enable jwac quarantine_server_monitor
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
43-13 disable jwac quarantine_server_monitor
Description
This command is used to disable JWAC quarantine server monitoring.
Format disable jwac quarantine_server_monitor
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To disable JWAC quarantine server monitoring:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#disable jwac quarantine_server_monitor
Command: disable jwac quarantine_server_monitor
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
43-14 config jwac quarantine_server_error_timeout
Description
This command is used to set the quarantine server error timeout. When the quarantine server monitor is enabled, the JWAC switch will periodically check if the quarantine works okay. If the Switch does not receive any response from quarantine server during the configured error timeout, the Switch then regards it as not working properly.
Format config jwac quarantine_server_error_timeout <sec 5-300>
Parameters
<sec 5-300> - Enter the error timeout interval.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
410
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Example
To set the quarantine server error timeout:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config jwac quarantine_server_error_timeout 60
Command: config jwac quarantine_server_error_timeout 60
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
43-15 config jwac virtual_ip
Description
This command is used to accept authentication request from unauthenticated host. Only requests sent to this IP will get response correctly. This IP does not respond to ARP request or ICMP packet!
Format config jwac virtual_ip [<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr>] {url [<string 128> | clear]}
Parameters
<ipaddr> - Enter the IP address of the virtual IP.
<ipv6addr> - Enter the IPv6 address of the virtual IP.
url - (Optional) Specify the URL of the virtual IP.
<string 128> - Enter the URL of the virtual IP.
clear - Clear the URL of the virtual IP.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure a JWAC virtual IP address of 1.1.1.1 to accept authentication requests from an unauthenticated host:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# config jwac virtual_ip 1.1.1.1 url www.kyoto.ac.jp
Command: config jwac virtual_ip 1.1.1.1 url www.kyoto.ac.jp
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To set the virtual IPv6 as “2000::2” and URL as www.kyotov6.ac.jp:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# config jwac virtual_ip 2000::2 url www.kyotov6.ac.jp Command: config jwac virtual_ip 2000::2 url www.kyotov6.ac.jp
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
411
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
43-16 config jwac update_server
Description
This command is used to add or delete a server network address to which the traffic from an unauthenticated client host will not be blocked by the JWAC Switch. Any servers running ActiveX need to be able to have access to accomplish authentication. Before the client passes authentication, it should be added to the Switch with its IP address. For example, the client may need to access update.microsoft.com or some sites of the Anti-Virus software companies to check whether the OS or Anti-Virus software of the client are the latest; and so IP addresses of update.microsoft.com and of Anti-Virus software companies need to be added in the Switch.
NOTE: If the update server is linked to the JWAC enabled port on the switch, it must be added to the static FDB before it can work properly.
Format config jwac update_server [add | delete] [ipaddress <network_address> | ipv6address <ipv6networkaddr>]
{[tcp_port <port_number 1-65535> | udp_port <port_number 1-65535>]}
Parameters
add - Specify to add a network address to which the traffic will not be blocked. Up to 100 network addresses can be added.
delete - Specify to delete a network address to which the traffic will not be blocked.
ipadddress - Specify the network address for the update server.
<network address> - Enter the network IP address here.
ipv6address - Specify the IPv6 network address for the update server network. To set a specific IPv6 network address, please use “/” to separate the IPv6 address and the number of network mask bits. If TCP port or UDP port number is not specified, all TCP/UDP ports are accessible
<ipv6networkaddr> - Enter the IPv6 network address here.
tcp_port - (Optional) Specify a TCP port number between 1 and 65535.
<port_number 1-65535> - Enter a TCP port value between 1 and 65535.
udp_port - (Optional) Specify a UDP port number between 1 and 65535.
<port_number 1-65535> - Enter a UDP port value between 1 and 65535.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure the update servers:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config jwac update_server add ipaddress 10.1.1.1/8
Command: config jwac update_server add ipaddress 10.1.1.1/8
Update Server 10.0.0.0/8 is added.
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
43-17 config jwac switch_http_port
Description
This command is used to configure the TCP port which the JWAC switch listens to. This port number is used in the second stage of the authentication. PC users will connect to the page on the Switch to input the user name and password. If not specified, the default port number is 80. If no protocol is specified, the protocol is HTTP.
412
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
HTTP cannot run on TCP port 443, and HTTPS cannot run on TCP port 80.
Format config jwac switch_http_port <tcp_port_number 1-65535> {[http | https]}
Parameters
<tcp_port_number 1-65535> - Enter a TCP port which the JWAC switch listens to and uses to finish the authenticating process.
http - (Optional) Specify the JWAC run HTTP protocol on this TCP port.
https - (Optional) Specify the JWAC run HTTPS protocol on this TCP port.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure the TCP port which the JWAC switch listens to:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config jwac switch_http_port 8888 http
Command: config jwac switch_http_port 8888 http
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
43-18 config jwac ports
Description
This command is used to configure port state of JWAC.
Format config jwac ports [<portlist> | all] {state [enable | disable] | max_authenticating_host <value 0-50> | aging_time [infinite | <min 1-1440>] | idle_time [infinite | <min 1-1440>] | block_time [<sec 0-300>] | auth_mode [host_based | port_based]}(1)
Parameters
<portlist> - Enter a port range for setting the JWAC state.
all - Specify to configure all switch ports’ JWAC state.
state - Specify the port state of JWAC.
enable - Specify to enable the JWAC port state.
disable - Specify to disable the JWAC port state.
max_authenticating_host - Specify the maximum number of hosts that can process authentication on each port at the same time. The default value is 50.
<value 0-50> - Enter the maximum number of authenticating hosts, between 0 and 50.
aging_time - Specify a time period during which an authenticated host will keep in authenticated state.
infinite - Specify to indicate the authenticated host on the port will never ageout.
<min 1-1440> - Enter an aging time between 1 and 1440 minutes. The default value is 1440 minutes.
idle_time - If there is no traffic during idle time, the host will be moved back to unauthenticated state.
infinite - Specify to indicate the idle state of the authenticated host on the port will never be checked. The default value is infinite.
<min 1-1440> - Enter an idle time between 1 and 1440 minutes.
block_time - If a host fails to pass the authentication, it will be blocked for a period specified by the blocking time.
The default value is 60 seconds.
413
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
<sec 0-300> - Enter a blocking time value between 0 and 300.
auth_mode - Specify the port authentication mode.
host_based - Specify the port authentication mode as host-based.
port_based - Specify the port authentication mode as port-based.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure the JWAC port state:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config jwac ports 1-9 state enable
Command: config jwac ports 1-9 state enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
43-19 show jwac ports
Description
This command is used to display the port configuration of JWAC.
Format show jwac ports {<portlist>}
Parameters
<portlist> - (Optional) Enter a port range to show the configuration of JWAC.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display JWAC ports 1 to 4:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show jwac ports 1-4
Command: show jwac ports 1-4
Port State Aging Time Idle Time Block Time Auth Mode Max
(min) (min) (sec) Hosts
----- -------- ---------- --------- ---------- ---------- -----
1 Enabled 1440 Infinite 60 Host-based 50
2 Enabled 1440 Infinite 60 Host-based 50
3 Enabled 1440 Infinite 60 Host-based 50
4 Enabled 1440 Infinite 60 Host-based 50
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
414
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
43-20 config jwac radius_protocol
Description
This command is used to specify the RADIUS protocol used by JWAC to complete RADIUS authentication.
JWAC shares other RADIUS configurations with 802.1X. When using this command to set the RADIUS protocol, make sure the RADIUS server added by the config radius command supports the protocol.
Format config jwac radius_protocol [local | eap_md5 | pap | chap | ms_chap | ms_chapv2]
Parameters
local - Specify the JWAC switch uses the local user DB to complete the authentication.
eap_md5 - Specify the JWAC switch uses EAP MD5 to communicate with the RADIUS server.
pap - Specify the JWAC switch uses PAP to communicate with the RADIUS server.
chap - Specify the JWAC switch uses CHAP to communicate with the RADIUS server.
ms_chap - Specify the JWAC switch uses MS-CHAP to communicate with the RADIUS server.
ms_chapv2 - Specify the JWAC switch uses MS-CHAPv2 to communicate with the RADIUS server.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure the RADIUS protocol used by JWAC:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config jwac radius_protocol ms_chapv2
Command: config jwac radius_protocol ms_chapv2
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
43-21 create jwac user
Description
This command is used to create JWAC users in the local database. When “local” is chosen while configuring the
JWAC RADIUS protocol, the local database will be used.
Format create jwac user <username 15> {vlan <vlanid 1-4094>}
Parameters
<username 15> - Enter the user name to be created.
vlan - (Optional) Specify the target VLAN ID for the authenticated host which uses this user account to pass authentication.
<vlanid 1-4094> - Enter the target VLAN ID for the authenticated host which uses this user account to pass authentication. The VLAN ID value must be between 1 and 4094.
415
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To create a JWAC user in the local database:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#create jwac user 112233
Command: create jwac user 112233
Enter a case-sensitive new password:******
Enter the new password again for confirmation:******
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
43-22 config jwac user
Description
This command is used to configure a JWAC user.
Format config jwac user <username 15> {vlan <vlanid 1-4094>}
Parameters
<username 15> - Enter the user name to be configured.
vlan - (Optional) Specify the target VLAN ID for the authenticated host which uses this user account to pass authentication.
<vlanid 1-4094> - Enter the target VLAN ID for the authenticated host which uses this user account to pass authentication. The VLAN ID value must be between 1 and 4094.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure a JWAC user:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config jwac user 112233
Command: config jwac user 112233
Enter a old password:****
Enter a case-sensitive new password: ****
Enter the new password again for confirmation: ****
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin
416
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
43-23 delete jwac
Description
This command is used to delete JWAC users from the local database.
Format delete jwac [user <username 15> | all_users]
Parameters
user - Specify the user name to be deleted.
<username 15> - Enter the user name to be deleted. The user name can be up to 15 characters long.
all_users - Specify all user accounts in the local database will be deleted.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To delete a JWAC user from the local database:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#delete jwac user 112233
Command: delete jwac user 112233
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
43-24 show jwac user
Description
This command is used to display JWAC users in the local database.
Format show jwac user
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the current JWAC local users:
417
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show jwac user
Command: show jwac user
User Name Password VID
---------------- ---------------- ----------
112233 112233 -
123 123 1
Total Entries:2
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
43-25 clear jwac auth_state
Description
This command is used to clear authentication entries.
Format clear jwac auth_state [ports [all | <portlist>] {authenticated | authenticating | blocked} | mac_addr
<macaddr>]
Parameters
ports - Specify the port range to delete hosts on.
all - Specify to delete all ports.
<portlist> - Enter range of ports to delete.
authenticated - (Optional) Specify the state of host to delete.
authenticating - (Optional) Specify the state of host to delete.
blocked - (Optional) Specify the state of host to delete.
mac_addr - Deletes a specified host with this MAC address.
<macaddr> - Enter the MAC address here.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To delete authentication entries:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#clear jwac auth_state ports all blocked
Command: clear jwac auth_state ports all blocked
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
43-26 show jwac auth_state ports
Description
This command is used to display information for JWAC client hosts.
418
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Format show jwac auth_state ports {<portlist>}
Parameters
<portlist> - (Optional) Enter a port range to show the JWAC authentication entries.
If no port is specified, the JWAC authentication state will be displayed for all ports.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display JWAC authentication entries for ports 1 to 4:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show jwac auth_state ports 1-4
Command: show jwac auth_state ports 1-4
Pri - Priority. State - A:Authenticated, B:Blocked, -:Authenticating
Time - Aging Time/Idle Time for authenticated entries.
Port MAC Address State VID Pri Time IP User Name
----- -------------------- ---- ---- --- ------- --------------- ---------------
1 00-00-00-00-00-01 A 20 3 1440/30 192.168.101.239 jack
1 00-00-00-00-00-02 A 1234 - 1440/30 172.18.61.242 tom
1 00-00-00-00-00-03 B - - -/40 172.18.61.243 user
1 00-00-00-00-00-04 - - - 10 - -
2 00-00-00-00-00-10(P) A 1234 - 1440/30 10.10.10.90 admin
3 00-00-00-00-00-20(P) - - - 1440/30 10.10.10.131 -
3 00-00-00-00-00-21(P) B - - -/29 172.18.61.133 lina
4 00-00-00-00-00-21(P) A 1234 5 1440/30 3000:2000:3000:aabb:bbcc:ccdd:d dee:eeff name
Total Authenticating Hosts
Total Authenticated Hosts
Total Blocked Hosts
: 2
: 4
: 2
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
43-27 config jwac authorization attributes
Description
This command is used to enable or disable acceptation of authorized configuration. When the authorization is enabled for JWAC’s RADIUS, the authorized data assigned by the RADUIS server will be accepted if the global authorization network is enabled. When the authorization is enabled for JWAC’s local, the authorized data assigned by the local database will be accepted.
Format config jwac authorization attributes {radius [enable | disable] | local [enable | disable]}(1)
Parameters
radius - If Specify to enable, the authorized data assigned by the RADUIS server will be accepted if the global authorization network is enabled. The default state is enabled.
enable - Specify to enable authorized data assigned by the RADUIS server to be accepted.
419
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
disable - Specify to disable authorized data assigned by the RADUIS server from being accepted.
local - If Specify to enable, the authorized data assigned by the local database will be accepted if the global authorization network is enabled. The default state is enabled.
enable - Specify to enable authorized data assigned by the local database to be accepted.
disable - Specify to disable authorized data assigned by the local database from being accepted.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To disable the configuration authorized from the local database:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config jwac authorization attributes local disable
Command: config jwac authorization attributes local disable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
43-28 show jwac update_server
Description
This command is used to display the JWAC update server.
Format show jwac update_server
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the JWAC update server:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show jwac update_server
Command: show jwac update_server
Index IP TCP/UDP Port State
----- ------------------------------------------ ------- ----- --------
1 10.0.0.0/8 TCP 80 Inactive
2 10.1.1.1/32 UDP 90 Inactive
3 3000::/8 - - Inactive
4 3001::/16 - - Inactive
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
420
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
43-29 config jwac authentication_page element
Description
This command is used by administrators to customize the JWAC authenticate page.
Format config jwac authentication_page element [japanese | english] [default | page_title <desc 128> | login_window_title <desc 32> | user_name_title <desc 16> | password_title <desc 16> | logout_window_title <desc 32> | notification_line <value 1-5> <desc 128>]
Parameters
japanese - Specify to change to the Japanese page.
english - Specify to change to the English page.
default - Specify to reset the page element to default.
page_title - Specify the title of the authenticate page.
<desc 128> - Enter the title of the authenticate page. The page title description can be up to 128 characters long.
login_window_title - Specify the login window title of the authenticate page.
<desc 32> - Enter the login window title of the authenticate page. The login window title description can be up to 32 characters long.
user_name_title - Specify the user name title of the authenticate page.
<desc 16> - Enter the user name title of the authenticate page. The user name title description can be up to
16 characters long.
password_title - Specify the password title of the authenticate page.
<desc 16> - Enter the password title of the authenticate page. The password title description can be up to 16 characters long.
logout_window_title - Specify the logout window title mapping of the authenticate page.
<desc 32> - Enter the logout window title mapping of the authenticate page. The logout window title description can be up to 32 characters long.
notification_line - Specify this parameter to set the notification information by line in authentication Web pages.
<value 1-5> - Enter a notification line value between 1 and 5.
<desc 128> - Enter a notification line description up to 128 characters long.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To customize the authenticate page:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# config jwac authentication_page element japanese page_title "ディーリンク
ジャパン株式会社" login_window_title "JWAC 认证" user_name_title "ユーザ名" password_title "パスワ
ード" logout_window_title "ログアウト"
Command: config jwac authentication_page element japanese page_title "ディーリンクジャパン株式会社
" login_window_title "JWAC 认证" user_name_title "ユーザ名" password_title "パスワード" logout_window_title "ログアウト"
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
43-30 config jwac authenticate_page
Description
This command is used by administrators to decide which authenticate page to use.
421
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Format config jwac authenticate_page [japanese | english]
Parameters
japanese - Specify to change to the Japanese page.
english - Specify to change to the English page. This is the default page.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To customize the authenticate page:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config jwac authenticate_page japanese
Command: config jwac authenticate_page japanese
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
43-31 show jwac authenticate_page
Description
This command is used to display the element mapping of the customized authenticate page.
Format show jwac authenticate_page
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the element mapping of the customized authenticate page:
422
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show jwac authenticate_page
Command: show jwac authenticate_page
Current Page : English Version
English Page Element
-----------------------------------------------------------
Page Title :
Login Window Title : Authentication Login
User Name Title : User Name
Password Title : Password
Logout Window Title : Logout from the network
Notification :
Japanese Page Element
-----------------------------------------------------------
Page Title :
Login Window Title : 社内 LAN 認証ログイン
User Name Title : ユーザ ID
Password Title : パスワード
CTRL+C ESC q Quit SPACE n Next Page ENTER Next Entry a All
423
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 44 Jumbo Frame Command List
enable jumbo_frame disable jumbo_frame show jumbo_frame
44-1 enable jumbo_frame
Description
This command is used to configure the jumbo frame setting as enable.
Format enable jumbo_frame
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators and Operators can issue this command.
Example
To enable the Jumbo frame:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#enable jumbo_frame
Command: enable jumbo_frame
The maximum size of jumbo frame is 12288 bytes.
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
44-2 disable jumbo_frame
Description
This command is used to configure the jumbo frame setting as disable.
Format disable jumbo_frame
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators and Operators can issue this command.
424
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Example
To disable the Jumbo frame:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#disable jumbo_frame
Command: disable jumbo_frame
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
44-3 show jumbo_frame
Description
This command is used to display the current configuration of jumbo frame.
Format show jumbo_frame
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show the Jumbo frame:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show jumbo_frame
Command: show jumbo_frame
Jumbo Frame State : Disabled
Maximum Frame Size : 1536 Bytes
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
425
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 45 Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling (L2PT)
Command List
enable l2protocol_tunnel disable l2protocol_tunnel
config l2protocol_tunnel ports [<portlist> | all] type [uni tunneled_protocol [{stp | gvrp | protocol_mac [01-00-0C-
CC-CC-CC | 01-00-0C-CC-CC-CD]}(1) | all] {threshold <value 0-65535>} | nni | none]
show l2protocol_tunnel {[uni | nni]}
45-1 enable l2protocol_tunnel
Description
This command is used to enable the Layer 2 protocol tunneling function.
Format enable l2protocol_tunnel
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators and Operators can issue this command.
Example
To enable the Layer 2 protocol tunneling function:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#enable l2protocol_tunnel
Command: enable l2protocol_tunnel
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
45-2 disable l2protocol_tunnel
Description
This command is used to disable the L2PT function globally on the Switch.
Format disable l2protocol_tunnel
Parameters
None.
426
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Restrictions
Only Administrators and Operators can issue this command.
Example
To disable the Layer 2 protocol tunneling function:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#disable l2protocol_tunnel
Command: disable l2protocol_tunnel
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
45-3 config l2protocol_tunnel ports
Description
This command is used to configure Layer 2 protocol tunneling on ports. Layer 2 protocol tunneling is used to tunnel
Layer 2 protocol packet. If a Layer 2 protocol is tunnel-enabled on an UNI, once received the PDU on this port, the multicast destination address of the PDU will be replaced by Layer 2 protocol tunneling multicast address. The
Layer 2 protocol tunneling multicast address for STP is 01-05-5D-00-00-00, for GVRP is 01-05-5D-00-00-21, for
Layer 2 protocols MAC 01-00-0C-CC-CC-CC is 01-05-5D-00-00-10 and for protocol MAC 01-00-0C-CC-CC-CD is
01-05-5D-00-00-11.
When QinQ is enabled, an S-TAG will be added to the Layer 2 PDU too. The S-TAG is assigned according QinQ
VLAN configuration.
Format config l2protocol_tunnel ports [<portlist> | all] type [uni tunneled_protocol [{stp | gvrp | protocol_mac [01-
00-0C-CC-CC-CC | 01-00-0C-CC-CC-CD]}(1) | all] {threshold <value 0-65535>} | nni | none]
Parameters
<portlist> - Enter a list of ports on which the Layer 2 protocol tunneling to be configured.
all - Specify to have all ports to be configured
type - Specify the type of the ports.
uni - Specify the ports as UNI ports.
tunneled_protocol - Specify tunneled protocols on the UNI ports.
stp - Specify to use the STP protocol.
gvrp - Specify to use the GVRP protocol.
protocol_mac - Specify the destination MAC address of the L2 protocol packets that will tunneled on these UNI ports.
01-00-0C-CC-CC-CC - Specify the MAC address as 01-00-0C-CC-CC-CC.
01-00-0C-CC-CC-CD - Specify the MAC address as 01-00-0C-CC-CC-CD.
all - All tunnel-abled Layer 2 protocols will be tunneled on the ports.
threshold - (Optional) Specify the drop threshold for packets-per-second accepted on the UNI ports. The ports drop the PDU if the protocol’s threshold is exceeded.
<value 0-65535> - Enter the threshold range value between 0 to 65535 (packet/second). 0 means no limit. By default, the value is 0.
nni - Specify the ports as NNI ports.
none - Disables tunnel on it.
Restrictions
Only Administrators and Operators can issue this command.
427
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Example
To configure the STP tunneling on ports 1-4:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config l2protocol_tunnel ports 1-4 type uni tunneled_protocol stp
Command: config l2protocol_tunnel ports 1-4 type uni tunneled_protocol stp
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
45-4 show l2protocol_tunnel
Description
This command is used to display Layer 2 protocol tunneling information.
Format show l2protocol_tunnel {[uni | nni]}
Parameters
uni - (Optional) Specify to show UNI detail information, include tunneled and dropped PDU statistic.
nni - (Optional) Specify to show NNI detail information, include de-capsulated Layer 2 PDU statistic.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show Layer 2 protocol tunneling information summary:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show l2protocol_tunnel
Command: show l2protocol_tunnel
Global State : Enabled
UNI Ports : 1-4
NNI Ports :
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To show Layer 2 protocol tunneling information summary:
428
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show l2protocol_tunnel uni
Command: show l2protocol_tunnel uni
UNI Tunneled Threshold
Port Protocol (packet/sec)
---- ----------------- ------------
1 STP 0
2 STP 0
3 STP 0
4 STP 0
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
429
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 46 Link Aggregation Command List
create link_aggregation group_id <value> {type [lacp | static]}
delete link_aggregation group_id <value>
config link_aggregation group_id <value> {master_port <port> | ports <portlist> | state [enable | disable]
config link_aggregation algorithm [mac_source | mac_destination|mac_source_dest | ip_source | ip_destination | ip_source_dest]
show link_aggregation {group_id <value> | algorithm}
config lacp_port <portlist> mode [active | passive]
show lacp_port <portlist>
46-1 create link_aggregation group_id
Description
This command is used to create a link aggregation group on the Switch.
Format create link_aggregation group_id <value> {type [lacp | static]}
Parameters
<value> - Enter the group ID value here. The value is from 1 to 13.
type - (Optional) Specify the group type is belong to static or LACP. If type is not specified, the default is static type.
lacp - Specify to use LACP as the group type.
static - Specify to use static as the group type.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To create link aggregation group:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#create link_aggregation group_id 1 type lacp
Command: create link_aggregation group_id 1 type lacp
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
46-2 delete link_aggregation group_id
Description
This command is used to delete a previously configured link aggregation group.
Format delete link_aggregation group_id <value>
430
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Parameters
<value> - Enter the group ID value here.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To delete link aggregation group:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#delete link_aggregation group_id 3
Command: delete link_aggregation group_id 3
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
46-3 config link_aggregation group_id
Description
This command is used to configure a previously created link aggregation group.
Format config link_aggregation group_id <value> {master_port <port> | ports <portlist> | state [enable | disable]
Parameters
group_id - Specify the group ID. The group number identifies each of the groups.
<value> - Enter the group ID value here. For the DGS-3000-10TC, this value must be between 1 and 5. For the DGS-3000-24TC, this value must be between 1 and 12. For the DGS-3000-26TC, this value must be between 1 and 13.
master_port - (Optional) Master port ID. Specify which port (by port number) of the link aggregation group will be the master port. All of the ports in a link aggregation group will share the port configuration with the master port.
<port> - Enter the master port number here.
ports - (Optional) Specify a range of ports that will belong to the link aggregation group.
<portlist> - Enter the list of port used for the configuration here.
state - (Optional) Specify to enable or disable the specified link aggregation group. If not specified, the group will keep the previous state, the default state is disabled. If configure LACP group, the ports’ state machine will start.
enable - Enables the specified link aggregation group.
disable - Disables the specified link aggregation group.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To define a load-sharing group of ports:
431
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config link_aggregation group_id 1 master_port 5 ports 5-7
Command: config link_aggregation group_id 1 master_port 5 ports 5-7
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
46-4 config link_aggregation algorithm
Description
This command is used to configure the part of the packet examined by the Switch when selecting the egress port for transmitting load-sharing data. This feature is available using the address-based load-sharing algorithm, only.
Format config link_aggregation algorithm [mac_source | mac_destination|mac_source_dest | ip_source | ip_destination | ip_source_dest]
Parameters
mac_source - Indicates that the Switch should examine the MAC source address.
mac_destination - Indicates that the Switch should examine the MAC destination address.
mac_source_dest - Indicates that the Switch should examine the MAC source and destination address.
ip_source - Indicates that the Switch should examine the IP source address.
ip_destination - Indicates that the Switch should examine the IP destination address.
ip_source_dest - Indicates that the Switch should examine the IP source address and destination address.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure link aggregation algorithm for mac-source-dest:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config link_aggregation algorithm mac_source_dest
Command: config link_aggregation algorithm mac_source_dest
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
46-5 show link_aggregation
Description
This command is used to display the current link aggregation configuration on the Switch.
Format show link_aggregation {group_id <value> | algorithm}
Parameters
group_id - (Optional) Specify the group ID. The group number identifies each of the groups.
432
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
<value > - Enter the group ID value here.
algorithm - (Optional) Allows you to specify the display of link aggregation by the algorithm in use by that group.
If no parameter specified, system will display all link aggregation information.
Restrictions
None.
Example
Link aggregation group enable:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show link_aggregation
Command: show link_aggregation
Link Aggregation Algorithm = MAC-Source-Dest
Group ID : 1
Type : LACP
Master Port : 5
Member Port : 5-7
Active Port :
Status : Enabled
Flooding Port : 7
Total Entries : 1
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
Link aggregation group enable and no member linkup:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show link_aggregation
Command: show link_aggregation
Link Aggregation Algorithm = MAC-Source-Dest
Group ID : 1
Type : LACP
Master Port : 5
Member Port : 5-7
Active Port :
Status : Enabled
Flooding Port :
Total Entries : 1
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
Link aggregation group disabled:
433
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show link_aggregation
Command: show link_aggregation
Link Aggregation Algorithm = MAC-Source-Dest
Group ID : 1
Type : LACP
Master Port : 5
Member Port : 5-7
Active Port :
Status : Disabled
Flooding Port : 7
Total Entries : 1
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
46-6 config lacp_port
Description
This command is used to configure per-port LACP mode.
Format config lacp_port <portlist> mode [active | passive]
Parameters
<portlist> - Enter the list of port used for the configuration here.
mode - Specify the LACP mode used.
active - Specify to set the LACP mode as active.
passive - Specify to set the LACP mode as passive.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To config port LACP mode:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config lacp_port 1-12 mode active command: config lacp_port 1-12 mode active
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
46-7 show lacp_port
Description
This command is used to display the current mode of LACP of the ports.
434
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Format show lacp_port <portlist>
Parameters
<portlist> - Enter the list of ports used for this configuration here.
If no parameter specified, the system will display current LACP and all port status.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show port lacp mode:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show lacp_port
Command: show lacp_port
Port Activity
------ --------
1 Active
2 Active
3 Active
4 Active
5 Active
6 Active
7 Active
8 Active
9 Active
10 Active
11 Active
12 Active
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
435
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 47 Link Layer Discovery Protocol
(LLDP) Command List
enable lldp disable lldp
config lldp [message_tx_interval <sec 5-32768> | message_tx_hold_multiplier <int 2-10> | tx_delay <sec 1-
8192> | reinit_delay <sec 1-10>]
config lldp notification_interval <sec 5-3600>
config lldp ports [<portlist> | all] [notification [enable | disable] | admin_status [tx_only | rx_only | tx_and_rx | disable] | mgt_addr [ipv4 <ipaddr> | ipv6 <ipv6addr>] [enable | disable] | basic_tlvs [{all} | {port_description | system_name | system_description | system_capabilities}] [enable | disable] | dot1_tlv_pvid [enable| disable] | dot1_tlv_protocol_vid [vlan [all | <vlan_name 32> ] | vlanid <vidlist>] [enable | disable] | dot1_tlv_vlan_name
[vlan [all | <vlan_name 32>] | vlanid <vidlist>] [enable | disable] | dot1_tlv_protocol_identity [all | {eapol | lacp | gvrp | stp }] [enable | disable] | dot3_tlvs [{all} | {mac_phy_configuration_status | link_aggregation | power_via_mdi|maximum_frame_size}] [enable | disable]]
config lldp forward_message [enable | disable] show lldp
show lldp mgt_addr {[ipv4 <ipaddr> | ipv6 <ipv6addr>]}
show lldp ports {<portlist>}
show lldp local_ports {<portlist>} {mode [brief | normal | detailed]}
show lldp remote_ports {<portlist>} {mode [brief | normal | detailed]} show lldp statistics
show lldp statistics ports {<portlist>}
config lldp_med fast_start repeat_count <value 1 - 10>
config lldp_med log state [enable | disable]
config lldp_med notification topo_change ports [<portlist> | all] state [enable | disable]
config lldp_med ports [<portlist> | all] med_transmit_capabilities [all | {capabilities | network_policy | power_pse | inventory}] state [enable | disable]
show lldp_med ports {<portlist>} show lldp_med
show lldp_med local_ports {<portlist>}
show lldp_med remote_ports {<portlist>}
47-1 enable lldp
Description
This command is used to globally enable the LLDP function.
When this function is enabled, the Switch can start to transmit LLDP packets and receive and process the LLDP packets. The specific function of each port will depend on the per-port LLDP setting.
For the advertisement of LLDP packets, the Switch announces the information to its neighbor through ports. For the receiving of LLDP packets, the Switch will learn the information from the LLDP packets advertised from the neighbor in the neighbor table. The default state for LLDP is disabled.
Format enable lldp
Parameters
None.
436
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To enable LLDP:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#enable lldp
Command: enable lldp
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
47-2 disable lldp
Description
This command is used to stop sending and receiving of LLDP advertisement packet.
Format disable lldp
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To disable LLDP:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#disable lldp
Command: disable lldp
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
47-3 config lldp
Description
This command is used to change the packet transmission interval.
Format config lldp [message_tx_interval <sec 5-32768> | message_tx_hold_multiplier <int 2-10> | tx_delay <sec 1-
8192> | reinit_delay <sec 1-10>]
437
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Parameters
message_tx_interval - Changes the interval between consecutive transmissions of LLDP advertisements on any given port. The default setting 30 seconds.
<sec 5-32768> - Enter the message transmit interval value here. This value must be between 5 and 32768 seconds.
message_tx_hold_multiplier - Specify to configure the message hold multiplier. The default setting 4.
<2-10> - Enter the message transmit hold multiplier value here. This value must be between 2 and 10.
tx_delay - Specify the minimum interval between sending of LLDP messages due to constantly change of MIB content. The default setting 2 seconds.
<sec 1-8192> - Enter the transmit delay value here. This value must be between 1 and 8192 seconds.
reinit_delay - Specify the minimum time of reinitialization delay interval. The default setting 2 seconds.
<sec 1-10> - Enter the re-initiate delay value here. This value must be between 1 and 10 seconds.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To change the packet transmission interval:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config lldp message_tx_interval 30
Command: config lldp message_tx_interval 30
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
47-4 config lldp notification_interval
Description
This command is used to configure the timer of notification interval for sending notification to configured SNMP trap receiver(s).
Format config lldp notification_interval <sec 5-3600>
Parameters
notification_interval - Specify the timer of notification interval for sending notification to configured SNMP trap receiver(s). The default setting is 5 seconds.
<sec 5-3600> - Enter the notification interval value here. This value must be between 5 and 3600 seconds.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To changes the notification interval to 10 second:
438
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config lldp notification_interval 10
Command: config lldp notification_interval 10
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
47-5 config lldp ports
Description
This command is used to configure each port for sending a notification to configure the SNMP trap receiver(s).
Format config lldp ports [<portlist> | all] [notification [enable | disable] | admin_status [tx_only | rx_only | tx_and_rx | disable] | mgt_addr [ipv4 <ipaddr> | ipv6 <ipv6addr>] [enable | disable] | basic_tlvs [{all} |
{port_description | system_name | system_description | system_capabilities}] [enable | disable] | dot1_tlv_pvid [enable| disable] | dot1_tlv_protocol_vid [vlan [all | <vlan_name 32> ] | vlanid <vidlist>]
[enable | disable] | dot1_tlv_vlan_name [vlan [all | <vlan_name 32>] | vlanid <vidlist>] [enable | disable] | dot1_tlv_protocol_identity [all | {eapol | lacp | gvrp | stp }] [enable | disable] | dot3_tlvs [{all} |
{mac_phy_configuration_status | link_aggregation | power_via_mdi | maximum_frame_size}] [enable | disable]]
Parameters
<portlist> - Enter a list of ports used for the configuration here.
all - Specify that all the ports will be used for this configuration.
notification - Enables or disables the SNMP trap notification of LLDP data changes detected on advertisements received from neighbor devices. The default notification state is disabled.
enable - Specify that the SNMP trap notification of LLDP data changes detected will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the SNMP trap notification of LLDP data changes detected will be disabled.
admin_status - Specify the per-port transmit and receive modes.
tx_only - Configure the specified port(s) to transmit LLDP packets.
rx_only - Configures the specified port(s) to receive LLDP packets from neighbors.
tx_and_rx - Configures the specified port(s) to both transmit and receive LLDP packets.
disable - Disable LLDP packet transmit and receive on the specified port(s).
mgt_addr - Specify the management address used.
ipv4 - Specify the IPv4 address used.
<ipaddr> - Enter the IP address used for this configuration here.
ipv6 - Specify the IPv6 address used.
<ipv6addr> - Enter the IPv6 address used for this configuration here.
enable - Specify that the advertising indicated management address instance will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the advertising indicated management address instance will be disabled.
basic_tlvs - Specify the basic TLV data types used from outbound LLDP advertisements.
all - (Optional) Specify that all the basic TLV data types will be used.
port_description - (Optional) This TLV optional data type indicates that LLDP agent should transmit Port
Description TLV on the port. The default state is disabled.
system_name - (Optional) This TLV optional data type includes indicates that LLDP agent should transmit
System Name TLV. The default state is disabled.
system_description - (Optional) This TLV optional data type includes indicates that LLDP agent should transmit System Description TLV. The default state is disabled.
system_capabilities - (Optional) This TLV optional data type includes indicates that LLDP agent should transmit System Capabilities TLV. The system capability will indicate whether the device provides repeater, bridge, or router function, and whether the provided functions are currently enabled. The default state is disabled.
enable - Specify that the basic TLV data types used from outbound LLDP advertisements will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the basic TLV data types used from outbound LLDP advertisements will be disabled.
dot1_tlv_pvid - This TLV optional data type determines whether the IEEE 802.1 organizationally defined port
VLAN ID TLV transmission is allowed on a given LLDP transmission capable port. The default state is disable.
enable - Specify that the Dot1 TLV PVID option will be enabled.
439
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
disable - Specify that the Dot1 TLV PVID option will be disabled.
dot1_tlv_protocol_vid - This TLV optional data type determines whether the IEEE 802.1 organizationally defined port and protocol VLAN ID TLV transmission is allowed on a given LLDP transmission capable port. The default state is disable.
vlan - Specify the VLAN used for this configuration.
all - Specify that all the configured VLANs will be used for this configuration.
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the name of the VLAN here. This name can be up to 32 characters long.
vlanid - Specify the VLAN ID used for this configuration.
<vlanid_list> - Enter the ID of the VLAN here.
enable - Specify that the Dot1 TLV protocol VID will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the Dot1 TLV protocol VID will be disabled.
dot1_tlv_vlan_name - This TLV optional data type indicates whether the corresponding Local System’s VLAN name instance will be transmitted on the port. If a port is associated with multiple VLANs. those enabled VLAN
ID will be advertised. The default state is disable.
vlan - Specify the VLAN used for this configuration.
all - Specify that all the configured VLANs will be used for this configuration.
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the name of the VLAN here. This name can be up to 32 characters long.
vlanid - Specify the VLAN ID used for this configuration.
<vlanid_list> - Enter the ID of the VLAN here.
enable - Specify that the Dot1 TLV VLAN name will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the Dot1 TLV VLAN name will be disabled.
dot1_tlv_protocol_identity - This TLV optional data type indicates whether the corresponding Local System's
Protocol Identity instance will be transmitted on the port. The Protocol Identity TLV provides a way for stations to advertise protocols that are important to the operation of the network. Such as Spanning Tree Protocol, the
Link Aggregation Control Protocol, and numerous vendor proprietary variations are responsible for maintaining the topology and connectivity of the network. If EAPOL, GVRP, STP (including MSTP), and LACP protocol identity is enabled on this port and it is enabled to be advertised, then this protocol identity will be advertised.
The default state is disabled.
all - Specify that all the vendor proprietary protocols will be advertised.
eapol - (Optional) Specify that the EAPOL protocol will be advertised.
lacp - (Optional) Specify that the LACP protocol will be advertised.
gvrp - (Optional) Specify that the GVRP protocol will be advertised.
stp - (Optional) Specify that the STP protocol will be advertised.
enable - Specify that the protocol identity TLV according to the protocol specified will be advertised.
disable - Specify that the protocol identity TLV according to the protocol specified will not be advertised.
dot3_tlvs - Specify that the IEEE 802.3 specific TLV data type will be configured.
all - (Optional) Specify that all the IEEE 802.3 specific TLV data type will be used.
mac_phy_configuration_status - (Optional) This TLV optional data type indicates that LLDP agent should transmit MAC/PHY configuration/status TLV. This type indicates it is possible for two ends of an IEEE
802.3 link to be configured with different duplex and/or speed settings and still establish some limited network connectivity. More precisely, the information includes whether the port supported the autonegotiation function, whether the function is enabled, the auto-negotiated advertised capability, and the operational MAU type. The default state is disabled.
link_aggregation - (Optional) This TLV optional data type indicates that LLDP agent should transmit Link
Aggregation TLV. This type indicates the current link aggregation status of IEEE 802.3 MACs. More precisely, the information should include whether the port is capable of doing link aggregation, whether the port is aggregated in a aggregated link, and the aggregated port ID. The default state is disabled.
power_via_mdi - (Optional) This TLV optional data type indicates that LLDP agent should transmit Power via
MDI TLV. Three IEEE 802.3 PMD implementations (10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX, and 1000BASE-T) allow power to be supplied over the link for connected non-powered systems. The Power Via MDI TLV allows network management to advertise and discover the MDI power support capabilities of the sending IEEE
802.3 LAN station. The default state is disabled.
maximum_frame_size - (Optional) This TLV optional data type indicates that LLDP agent should transmit
'Maximum-frame-size TLV. The default state is disabled.
enable - Specify that the IEEE 802.3 specific TLV data type selected will be advertised.
disable - Specify that the IEEE 802.3 specific TLV data type selected will be not advertised.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To enable SNMP notifications from port 1-5:
440
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config lldp ports 1-5 notification enable
Command: config lldp ports 1-5 notification enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To configure port 1-5 to transmit and receive:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config lldp ports 1-5 admin_status tx_and_rx
Command: config lldp ports 1-5 admin_status tx_and_rx
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To enable ports 1-2 for manage address entry:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config lldp ports 1-2 mgt_addr ipv4 10.90.90.90 enable
Command: config lldp ports 1-2 mgt_addr ipv4 10.90.90.90 enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To configure exclude the system name TLV from the outbound LLDP advertisements for all ports:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config lldp ports all basic_tlvs system_name enable
Command: config lldp ports all basic_tlvs system_name enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To configure exclude the VLAN ID TLV from the outbound LLDP advertisements for all ports:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config lldp ports all dot1_tlv_pvid enable
Command: config lldp ports all dot1_tlv_pvid enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To configure exclude the port and protocol VLAN ID 1-3 from the outbound LLDP advertisements for all ports:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config lldp ports all dot1_tlv_protocol_vid vlanid 1-3 enable
Command: config lldp ports all dot1_tlv_protocol_vid vlanid 1-3 enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To configure exclude the VLAN name TLV from the outbound LLDP advertisements for all ports:
441
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config lldp ports all dot1_tlv_vlan_name vlanid 1-3 enable
Command: config lldp ports all dot1_tlv_vlan_name vlanid 1-3 enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To configure exclude the protocol identity TLV from the outbound LLDP advertisements for all ports:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config lldp ports all dot1_tlv_protocol_identity all enable
Command: config lldp ports all dot1_tlv_protocol_identity all enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To configure exclude the MAC/PHY configuration/status TLV from the outbound LLDP advertisements for all ports:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config lldp ports all dot3_tlvs mac_phy_configuration_status enable
Command: config lldp ports all dot3_tlvs mac_phy_configuration_status enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
47-6 config lldp forward_ message
Description
This command is used to configure forwarding of LLDP PDU packet when LLDP is disabled.
Format config lldp forward_message [enable | disable]
Parameters
enable - Enable the forwarding of LLDP PDU configuration events.
disable - Disable the forwarding of LLDP-PDU events. By default it is disabled.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure LLDP to forward LLDP PDUs:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config lldp forward_message enable
Command: config lldp forward_message enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
442
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
47-7 show lldp
Description
This command is used to display the Switch’s general LLDP configuration status.
Format show lldp
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the LLDP system level configuration status:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show lldp
Command: show lldp
LLDP System Information
Chassis ID Subtype : MAC Address
Chassis ID : 00-01-02-03-04-00
System Name :
System Description : Gigabit Ethernet Switch
System Capabilities : Repeater, Bridge
LLDP Configurations
LLDP Status : Enabled
LLDP Forward Status : Enabled
Message TX Interval : 30
Message TX Hold Multiplier: 4
ReInit Delay : 2
TX Delay : 2
Notification Interval : 5
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
47-8 show lldp mgt_addr
Description
This command is used to display the LLDP management address information.
Format show lldp mgt_addr {[ipv4 <ipaddr> | ipv6 <ipv6addr>]}
Parameters
ipv4 - (Optional) Specify the IPv4 address used for the display.
<ipaddr> - Enter the IPv4 address used for this configuration here.
443
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
ipv6 - (Optional) Specify the IPv6 address used for the display.
<ipv6addr> - Enter the IPv6 address used for this configuration here.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display management address information:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show lldp mgt_addr ipv4 10.90.90.90
Command: show lldp mgt_addr ipv4 10.90.90.90
Address 1 :
------------------------------------------------
Subtype : IPv4
Address : 10.90.90.90
IF Type : IfIndex
OID : 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.10.133.2.1
Advertising Ports : 1-2,5
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
47-9 show lldp ports
Description
This command is used to display the LLDP per port configuration for advertisement options.
Format show lldp ports {<portlist>}
Parameters
<portlist> - (Optional) Enter a range of ports to be displayed.
If the port list is not specified, information for all the ports will be displayed.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the LLDP port 1 TLV option configuration:
444
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show lldp ports 1
Command: show lldp ports 1
Port ID : 1
-----------------------------------------------------------------
Admin Status : TX_and_RX
Notification Status : Enabled
Advertised TLVs Option :
Port Description Disabled
System Name Enabled
System Description Disabled
System Capabilities Disabled
Enabled Management Address
10.90.90.90
Port VLAN ID Enabled
Enabled Port_and_Protocol_VLAN_ID
1, 2, 3
Enabled VLAN Name
1-3
Enabled Protocol_Identity
(None)
MAC/PHY Configuration/Status Disabled
Power Via MDI Disabled
Link Aggregation Disabled
Maximum Frame Size Disabled
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
47-10 show lldp local_ports
Description
This command is used to display the per-port information currently available for populating outbound LLDP advertisements.
Format show lldp local_ports {<portlist>} {mode [brief | normal | detailed]}
Parameters
<portlist> - (Optional) Enter a range of ports to be configured. When port list is not specified, information for all ports will be displayed.
mode - (Optional) Specify the display mode.
brief - Display the information in brief mode.
normal - Display the information in normal mode. This is the default display mode.
detailed - Display the information in detailed mode.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display outbound LLDP advertisements for port 1 in detailed mode. Port description on the display should use the same value as ifDescr.
445
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show lldp local_ports 1 mode detailed
Command: show lldp local_ports 1 mode detailed
Port ID : 1
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Port ID Subtype : MAC Address
Port ID : 00-01-02-03-04-01
Port Description : D-Link DGS-3000-26TC R2.00.004
Port 1
Port PVID : 1
Management Address Count : 1
Subtype : IPv4
Address : 10.90.90.90
IF Type : IfIndex
OID : 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.10.133.2.1
PPVID Entries Count : 0
(None)
VLAN Name Entries Count : 1
Entry 1 :
VLAN ID : 1
VLAN Name : default
Protocol Identity Entries Count : 0
CTRL+C ESC q Quit SPACE n Next Page ENTER Next Entry a All
To display outbound LLDP advertisements for port 1 in normal mode:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show lldp local_ports 1 mode normal
Command: show lldp local_ports 1 mode normal
Port ID : 1
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Port ID Subtype : MAC Address
Port ID : 00-01-02-03-04-01
Port Description : D-Link DGS-3000-26TC R2.00.004
Port 1
Port PVID : 1
Management Address Count : 1
PPVID Entries Count : 0
VLAN Name Entries Count : 1
Protocol Identity Entries Count : 0
MAC/PHY Configuration/Status : (See Detail)
Link Aggregation : (See Detail)
Maximum Frame Size : 1536
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To display outbound LLDP advertisements for port 1 in brief mode:
446
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show lldp local_ports 1 mode brief
Command: show lldp local_ports 1 mode brief
Port ID : 1
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Port ID Subtype : MAC Address
Port ID : 00-01-02-03-04-01
Port Description : D-Link DGS-3000-26TC R2.00.004
Port 1
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
47-11 show lldp remote_ports
Description
This command is used to display the information learned from the neighbor parameters.
Format show lldp remote_ports {<portlist>} {mode [brief | normal | detailed]}
Parameters
<portlist> - (Optional) Enter a range of ports to be configured. When port list is not specified, information for all ports will be displayed.
mode - (Optional) Specify to display the information in various modes.
brief - Display the information in brief mode.
normal - Display the information in normal mode. This is the default display mode.
detailed - Display the information in detailed mode.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display remote table in brief mode:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show lldp remote_ports 3 mode brief
Command: show lldp remote_ports 3 mode brief
Port ID : 3
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Remote Entities Count : 1
Entity 1
Chassis ID Subtype : MAC Address
Chassis ID : 00-12-13-04-05-00
Port ID Subtype : MAC Address
Port ID : 00-12-13-04-05-03
Port Description : D-Link DGS-3000-26TC R2.00.004
Port 3
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
447
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
To display remote table in normal mode:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# show lldp remote_ports 3 mode normal
Command: show lldp remote_ports 3 mode normal
Port ID : 3
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Remote Entities Count : 1
Entity 1
Chassis ID Subtype : MAC Address
Chassis ID : 00-12-13-04-05-00
Port ID Subtype : MAC Address
Port ID : 00-12-13-04-05-03
Port Description : D-Link DGS-3000-26TC R2.00.004
Port 3
System Name :
System Description : Fast Ethernet Switch
System Capabilities : Repeater, Bridge
Management Address Count : 1
Port PVID : 1
PPVID Entries Count : 0
VLAN Name Entries Count : 0
Protocol ID Entries Count : 0
MAC/PHY Configuration/Status : (See Detail)
Power Via MDI : (None)
Link Aggregation : (See Detail)
Maximum Frame Size : 1536
Unknown TLVs Count : 0
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To display remote table in detailed mode:
448
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# show lldp remote_ports 3 mode detailed
Command: show lldp remote_ports 3 mode detailed
Port ID : 3
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Remote Entities Count : 1
Entity 1
Chassis ID Subtype : MAC Address
Chassis ID : 00-12-13-04-05-00
Port ID Subtype : MAC Address
Port ID : 00-12-13-04-05-03
Port Description : D-Link DGS-3000-26TC R2.00.004
Port 3
System Name :
System Description : Fast Ethernet Switch
System Capabilities : Repeater, Bridge
Management Address Count : 1
Entry 1 :
Subtype : IPv4
Address : 10.90.90.90
IF Type : IfIndex
OID : 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.10.113.9.1
Port PVID : 1
PPVID Entries Count : 0
(None)
VLAN Name Entries Count : 0
(None)
Protocol ID Entries Count : 0
(None)
MAC/PHY Configuration/Status :
Auto-Negotiation Support : Supported
Auto-Negotiation Status : Enabled
Auto-Negotiation Advertised Capability : 6c00(hex)
Auto-Negotiation Operational MAU Type : 0010(hex)
Power Via MDI : (None)
Link Aggregation :
Aggregation Capability : Aggregated
Aggregation Status : Not Currently in Aggregation
Aggregation Port ID : 0
Maximum Frame Size : 1536
Unknown TLVs Count : 0
(None)
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
449
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
47-12 show lldp statistics
Description
This command is used to display an overview of neighbor detection activity on the Switch.
Format show lldp statistics
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display global statistics information:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show lldp statistics
Command: show lldp statistics
Last Change Time : 1792
Number of Table Insert : 0
Number of Table Delete : 0
Number of Table Drop : 0
Number of Table Ageout : 0
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
47-13 show lldp statistics ports
Description
This command is used to display per-port LLDP statistics
Format show lldp statistics ports {<portlist>}
Parameters
<portlist> - (Optional) Enter a range of ports to be configured.
If the port list is not specified, information for all the ports will be displayed.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display statistics information of port 1:
450
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show lldp statistics ports 1
Command: show lldp statistics ports 1
Port ID : 1
---------------------------------------------
LLDPStatsTXPortFramesTotal : 23
LLDPStatsRXPortFramesDiscardedTotal : 0
LLDPStatsRXPortFramesErrors : 0
LLDPStatsRXPortFramesTotal : 0
LLDPStatsRXPortTLVsDiscardedTotal : 0
LLDPStatsRXPortTLVsUnrecognizedTotal : 0
LLDPStatsRXPortAgeoutsTotal : 0
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
47-14 config lldp_med fast_start repeat_count
Description
This command is used to configure the fast start repeat count. When an LLDP-MED Capabilities TLV is detected for an MSAP identifier not associated with an existing LLDP remote system MIB, the application layer shall start the fast start mechanism and set the ‘medFastStart’ timer to ‘medFastStartRepeatCount’ times 1.
Format config lldp_med fast_start repeat_count <value 1-10>
Parameters
<value 1-10> - Enter a fast start repeat count value between 1 and 10. The default value is 4.
Restrictions
Only Administrators and Operators can issue this command.
Example
To configure a LLDP-MED fast start repeat count of 5:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config lldp_med fast_start repeat_count 5
Command: config lldp_med fast_start repeat_count 5
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
47-15 config lldp_med log state
Description
This command is used to configure the log state of LLDP-MED events.
Format config lldp_med log state [enable | disable]
451
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Parameters
enable - Enables the log state for LLDP-MED events.
disable - Disables the log state for LLDP-MED events. The default is disabled.
Restrictions
Only Administrators and Operators can issue this command.
Example
To enable the log state of LLDP-MED events:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config lldp_med log state enable
Command: config lldp_med log state enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
47-16 config lldp_med notification topo_change ports
Description
This command is used to enable or disable each port for sending topology change notification to configured SNMP trap receiver(s) if an endpoint device is removed or moved to another port.
Format config lldp_med notification topo_change ports [<portlist> | all] state [enable | disable]
Parameters
<portlist> - Enter a range of ports to be configured.
all - Specify to set all ports in the system.
state - Specify to enable or disable the SNMP trap notification of topology change detected state.
enable - Enables the SNMP trap notification of topology change detected.
disable - Disables the SNMP trap notification of topology change detected. The default notification state is disabled.
Restrictions
Only Administrators and Operators can issue this command.
Example
To enable topology change notification on ports 1-2:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config lldp_med notification topo_change ports 1-2 state enable
Command: config lldp_med notification topo_change ports 1-2 state enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
452
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
47-17 config lldp_med ports
Description
This command is used to enable or disable transmitting LLDP-MED TLVs. It effectively disables LLDP-MED on a per-port basis by disabling transmission of TLV capabilities. In this case, the remote table’s objects in the LLDP-
MED MIB corresponding to the respective port will not be populated.
Format config lldp_med ports [<portlist> | all] med_transmit_capabilities [all | {capabilities | network_policy | power_pse | inventory}(1)] state [enable | disable]
Parameters
<portlist> - Enter a range of ports to be configured.
all - Specify to set all ports in the system.
med_transit_capabilities - Specify to send the LLDP-MED TLV capabilities.
all - Specify to send capabilities, network policy, and inventory.
capabilities - Specify that the LLDP agent should transmit LLDP-MED capabilities TLV. If a user wants to transmit LLDP-MED PDU, this TLV type should be enabled. Otherwise, this port cannot transmit LLDP-
MED PDU.
network_policy - Specify that the LLDP agent should transmit LLDP-MED network policy TLV.
power_pse - Specify that the LLDP agent should transmit LLDP-MED extended Power via MDI TLV, if the local device is a PSE device.
inventory - Specify that the LLDP agent should transmit “LLDP-MED inventory TLV.”
state - Specify to enable or disable the transmitting of LLDP-MED TLVs.
enable - Enables the transmitting of LLDP-MED TLVs.
disable - Disables the transmitting of LLDP-MED TLVs.
Restrictions
Only Administrators and Operators can issue this command.
Example
To enable transmitting all capabilities on all ports:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config lldp_med ports all med_transmit_capabilities all state enable
Command: config lldp_med ports all med_transmit_capabilities all state enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
47-18 show lldp_med ports
Description
This command is used to display LLDP-MED per port configuration for advertisement options.
Format show lldp_med ports {<portlist>}
Parameters
<portlist> - (Optional) Enter a range of ports to be displayed.
453
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
If a port list is not specified, information for all ports will be displayed.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display LLDP-MED configuration information for port 1:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show lldp_med ports 1
Command: show lldp_med ports 1
Port ID : 1
-----------------------------------------------------------------
Topology Change Notification Status :Enabled
LLDP-MED Capabilities TLV :Enabled
LLDP-MED Network Policy TLV :Enabled
LLDP-MED Extended Power Via MDI PSE TLV :Enabled
LLDP-MED Inventory TLV :Enabled
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
47-19 show lldp_med
Description
This command is used to display the Switch’s general LLDP-MED configuration status.
Format show lldp_med
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the Switch’s general LLDP-MED configuration status:
454
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show lldp_med
Command: show lldp_med
LLDP-MED System Information:
Device Class : Network Connectivity Device
Hardware Revision : A2
Firmware Revision : 2.00.001
Software Revision : 2.00.004
Serial Number :
Manufacturer Name : D-Link
Model Name : DGS-3000-26TC Gigabit Ethernet S
Asset ID :
LLDP-MED Configuration:
Fast Start Repeat Count : 4
LLDP-MED Log State:Disabled
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
47-20 show lldp_med local_ports
Description
This command is used to display the per-port LLDP-MED information currently available for populating outbound
LLDP-MED advertisements.
Format show lldp_med local_ports {<portlist>}
Parameters
<portlist> - (Optional) Enter a range of ports to be displayed.
If the port list is not specified, information for all the ports will be displayed.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display LLDP-MED information currently available for populating outbound LLDP-MED advertisements for port
1:
455
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show lldp_med local_ports 1
Command: show lldp_med local_ports 1
Port ID : 1
-----------------------------------------------------------------
LLDP-MED Capabilities Support:
Capabilities :Support
Network Policy :Support
Location Identification :Not Support
Extended Power Via MDI PSE :Not Support
Extended Power Via MDI PD :Not Support
Inventory :Support
Network Policy:
None
Extended Power Via MDI:
None
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
47-21 show lldp_med remote_ports
Description
This command is used to display LLDP-MED information learned from neighbors.
Format show lldp_med remote_ports {<portlist>}
Parameters
<portlist> - (Optional) Enter a range of ports to be displayed.
If the port list is not specified, information for all the ports will be displayed.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display remote entry information:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show lldp_med remote_ports 1
Command: show lldp_med remote_ports 1
Port ID : 1
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Remote Entities Count : 1
Entity 1
Chassis ID Subtype : MAC Address
Chassis ID : 00-01-02-03-04-00
Port ID Subtype : Net Address
Port ID : 172.18.10.11
456
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
LLDP-MED capabilities:
LLDP-MED Device Class: Endpoint Device Class III
LLDP-MED Capabilities Support:
Capabilities : Support
Network Policy : Support
Location Identification : Support
Extended Power Via MDI : Support
Inventory : Support
LLDP-MED Capabilities Enabled:
Capabilities : Enabled
Network Policy : Enabled
Location Identification : Enabled
Extended Power Via MDI : Enabled
Inventory : Enabled
Network Policy:
Application Type : Voice
VLAN ID :
Priority :
DSCP :
Unknown : True
Tagged :
Application Type : Softphone Voice
VLAN ID : 200
Priority : 7
DSCP : 5
Unknown : False
Tagged : True
Location Identification:
Location Subtype: CoordinateBased
Location Information :
Location Subtype: CivicAddress
Location Information :
Extended Power Via MDI
Power Device Type: PD Device
Power Priority : High
Power Source : From PSE
Power Request : 8 Watts
Inventory Management:
Hardware Revision :
Firmware Revision :
Software Revision :
Serial Number :
Manufacturer Name :
Model Name :
Asset ID :
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
457
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 48 Loop Back Detection (LBD)
Command List
config loopdetect {recover_timer [<value 0> | <sec 60-1000000>] | interval <sec 1-32767> | mode [port-based | vlan-based]}(1)
config loopdetect ports [<portlist> | all] state [enable | disable] enable loopdetect disable loopdetect show loopdetect
show loopdetect ports {<portlist>}
config loopdetect trap [none | loop_detected | loop_cleared | both]
config loopdetect log state [enable | disable]
48-1 config loopdetect
Description
This command is used to setup the loop-back detection function (LBD) for the entire Switch.
Format config loopdetect {recover_timer [<value 0> | <sec 60-1000000>] | interval <sec 1-32767> | mode [portbased | vlan-based]}(1)
Parameters
recover_timer - The time interval (in seconds) used by the Auto-Recovery mechanism to decide how long to check before determining that the loop status has gone. The valid range is from 60 to 1000000. 0 is a special value that Specify that the auto-recovery mechanism should be disabled. When the auto-recovery mechanism is disabled, a user would need to manually recover a disabled port. The default value for the recover timer is
60 seconds.
<value 0> - Enter 0 to specify that the auto-recovery mechanism should be disabled. When the auto-recovery mechanism is disabled, a user would need to manually recover a disabled port.
<sec 60-1000000> - Enter the recovery timer value here. This value must be between 60 and 1000000 seconds.
interval - The time interval (in seconds) that the device will transmit all the CTP (Configuration Test Protocol) packets to detect a loop-back event. The default setting is 10 seconds. The valid range is from 1 to 32767 seconds.
<sec - 1-32767> - Enter the time interval value here. This value must be between 1 and 32767 seconds.
mode - Specify the loop-detection operation mode. In port-based mode, the port will be shut down (disabled) when loop has been detected In VLAN-based mode, the port cannot process the packets of the VLAN that has detected the loop.
port-based - Specify that the loop-detection operation mode will be set to port-based mode.
vlan-based - Specify that the loop-detection operation mode will be set to vlan-based mode.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To set the auto-recover time to 0, which disables the auto-recovery mechanism, the interval to 20 seconds and specify VLAN-based mode:
458
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config loopdetect recover_timer 0 interval 20 mode vlan-based
Command: config loopdetect recover_timer 0 interval 20 mode vlan-based
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
48-2 config loopdetect ports
Description
This command is used to setup the loop-back detection function for the interfaces on the Switch.
Format config loopdetect ports [<portlist> | all] state [enable | disable]
Parameters
<portlist> - Enter a list of ports to be configured.
all - Specify all ports to be configured.
state - Specify whether the LBD function should be enabled or disabled on the ports specified in the port list. The default state is disabled.
enable - Specify to enable the LBD function.
disable - Specify to disable the LBD function.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To enable the LBD function on ports 1-5:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config loopdetect ports 1-5 state enable
Command: config loopdetect ports 1-5 state enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
48-3 enable loopdetect
Description
This command is used to enable the LBD function globally on the Switch. The default state is disabled.
Format enable loopdetect
Parameters
None.
459
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To enable the LBD function globally:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#enable loopdetect
Command: enable loopdetect
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
48-4 disable loopdetect
Description
This command is used to disable the LBD function globally on the Switch.
Format disable loopdetect
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To disable the LBD function globally:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#disable loopdetect
Command: disable loopdetect
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
48-5 show loopdetect
Description
This command is used to display the LBD global configuration.
Format show loopdetect
460
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show the LBD global settings:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show loopdetect
Command: show loopdetect
LBD Global Settings
---------------------------
Status : Disabled
Mode : Port-based
Interval : 10 sec
Recover Time : 60 sec
Trap State : None
Log State : Enabled
Function Version : 4.04
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
48-6 show loopdetect ports
Description
This command is used to display the LBD per-port configuration.
Format show loopdetect ports {<portlist>}
Parameters
<portlist> - (Optional) Enter the list of port to be displayed.
If no port is specified, the configuration for all ports will be displayed.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show the LBD settings on ports 1-9:
461
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show loopdetect ports 1-9
Command: show loopdetect ports 1-9
Port Loopdetect State Loop Status
------ ------------------ ----------
1 Enabled Normal
2 Enabled Normal
3 Enabled Normal
4 Enabled Normal
5 Enabled Loop!
6 Enabled Normal
7 Enabled Loop!
8 Enabled Normal
9 Enabled Normal
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
48-7 config loopdetect trap
Description
This command is used to configure the trap modes for LBD.
Format config loopdetect trap [none | loop_detected | loop_cleared | both]
Parameters
none - There is no trap in the LBD function.
loop_detected - Trap will only be sent when the loop condition is detected.
loop_cleared - Trap will only be sent when the loop condition is cleared.
both - Trap will either be sent when the loop condition is detected or cleared.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To specify that traps will be sent when the loop condition is detected or cleared:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config loopdetect trap both
Command: config loopdetect trap both
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
48-8 config loopdetect log state
Description
This command is used to configure the log state for LBD. The default value is enabled.
462
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Format config loopdetect log state [enable | disable]
Parameters
enable - Enables the LBD log feature.
disable - Disables the LBD log feature. All LBD-related logs will not be recorded.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To enable the log state for LBD:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config loopdetect log state enable
Command: config loopdetect log state enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
463
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 49 MAC Notification Command List
enable mac_notification disable mac_notification
config mac_notification {interval <sec 1-2147483647> | historysize <int 1-500>}
config mac_notification ports [<portlist> | all] [enable | disable] show mac_notification
show mac_notification ports {<portlist>}
49-1 enable mac_notification
Description
This command is used to enable global MAC address table notification on the Switch.
Format enable mac_notification
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To enable mac_notification function:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#enable mac_notification
Command: enable mac_notification
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
49-2 disable mac_notification
Description
This command is used to disable global MAC address table notification on the Switch.
Format disable mac_notification
Parameters
None.
464
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To disable mac_notification function:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#disable mac_notification
Command: disable mac_notification
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
49-3 config mac_notification
Description
This command is used to configure the Switch’s MAC address table notification global settings.
Format config mac_notification {interval <sec 1-2147483647> | historysize <int 1-500>}
Parameters
interval - (Optional) Specify the time in seconds between notifications.
<sec 1-2147483647> - Enter the interval time here. This value must be between 1 and 2147483647 seconds.
historysize - (Optional) Specify the maximum number of entries listed in the history log used for notification. Up to 500 entries can be specified.
<int 1-500> - Enter the history log size here. This value must be between 1 and 500.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To config the Switch’s Mac address table notification global settings:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config mac_notification interval 1 historysize 500
Command: config mac_notification interval 1 historysize 500
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
49-4 config mac_notification ports
Description
This command is used to configure the port’s MAC address table notification status settings.
Format config mac_notification ports [<portlist> | all] [enable | disable]
465
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Parameters
<portlist> - Enter a list of ports used for the configuration here.
all - Specify that all the ports will be used for this configuration.
enable - Enables the port’s MAC address table notification.
disable - Disables the port’s MAC address table notification.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To enable 7th port’s mac address table notification:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config mac_notification ports 7 enable
Command: config mac_notification ports 7 enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
49-5 show mac_notification
Description
This command is used to display the Switch’s Mac address table notification global settings.
Format show mac_notification
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show the Switch’s Mac address table notification global settings:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show mac_notification
Command: show mac_notification
Global MAC Notification Settings
State : Disabled
Interval : 1
History Size : 1
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
466
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
49-6 show mac_notification ports
Description
This command is used to display the port’s Mac address table notification status settings.
Format show mac_notification ports {<portlist>}
Parameters
<portlist> - (Optional) Enter a list of ports used for the configuration here.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display all port’s Mac address table notification status settings:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show mac_notification ports
Command: show mac_notification ports
Port MAC Address Table Notification State
------ ------------------------------------
1 Disabled
2 Disabled
3 Disabled
4 Disabled
5 Disabled
6 Disabled
7 Disabled
8 Disabled
9 Disabled
10 Disabled
11 Disabled
12 Disabled
13 Disabled
14 Disabled
15 Disabled
16 Disabled
17 Disabled
18 Disabled
19 Disabled
20 Disabled
CTRL+C ESC q Quit SPACE n Next Page p Previous Page r Refresh
467
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 50 MAC-based Access Control
Command List
enable mac_based_access_control disable mac_based_access_control
config mac_based_access_control password <passwd 16>
config mac_based_access_control password_type [manual_string | client_mac_address]
config mac_based_access_control method [local | radius]
config mac_based_access_control guest_vlan ports <portlist>
config mac_based_access_control ports [<portlist> | all] {state [enable | disable] | mode [port_based | host_based] | aging_time [infinite | <min 1-1440>] | block_time <sec 0-300> | max_users [<value 1-1000> | no_limit]}(1)
create mac_based_access_control [guest_vlan <vlan_name 32> | guest_vlanid <vlanid 1-4094>]
delete mac_based_access_control [guest_vlan <vlan_name 32> | guest_vlanid <vlanid 1-4094>]
clear mac_based_access_control auth_state [ports [all | <portlist>] | mac_addr <macaddr>]
create mac_based_access_control_local mac <macaddr> {[vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid < vlanid 1-4094>]}
config mac_based_access_control_local mac <macaddr> [vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid 1-4094> | clear_vlan]
delete mac_based_access_control_local [mac <macaddr> | vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid 1-4094>]
show mac_based_access_control {ports {<portlist>}}
show mac_based_access_control_local {[mac <macaddr> | vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid 1-4094>]}
show mac_based_access_control auth_state ports {<portlist>}
config mac_based_access_control max_users [<value 1-1000> | no_limit]
config mac_based_access_control trap state [enable | disable]
config mac_based_access_control log state [enable | disable]
50-1 enable mac_based_access_control
Description
This command is used to enable MAC-based Access Control.
Format enable mac_based_access_control
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To enable the MAC-based Access Control global state:
468
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#enable mac_based_access_control
Command: enable mac_based_access_control
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
50-2 disable mac_based_access_control
Description
This command is used to disable MAC-based Access Control.
Format disable mac_based_access_control
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To disable the MAC-based Access Control global state:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#disable mac_based_access_control
Command: disable mac_based_access_control
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
50-3 config mac_based_access_control password
Description
This command is used to configure the RADIUS authentication password for MAC-based Access Control.
Format config mac_based_access_control password <passwd 16>
Parameters
<passwd 16> - Enter the password used here. In RADIUS mode, the Switch will communicate with the RADIUS server using this password. The maximum length of the key is 16. The default password is “default”.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
469
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Example
To set the MAC-based Access Control password:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config mac_based_access_control password switch
Command: config mac_based_access_control password switch
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
50-4 config mac_based_access_control password_type
Description
This command is used to configure the password type used for authentication via the RADIUS server.
Format config mac_based_access_control password_type [manual_string | client_mac_address]
Parameters
manual_string - Use the same password for all clients to communicate with the RADIUS server.
client_mac_address - Use the client’s MAC address as the password to communicate with the RADIUS server.
Restrictions
Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command.
Example
To configure the MAC-based Access Control using client’s MAC address as authentication password:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config mac_based_access_control password_type client_mac_address
Command: config mac_based_access_control password_type client_mac_address
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
50-5 config mac_based_access_control method
Description
This command is used to configure the MAC-based Access Control authentication method.
Format config mac_based_access_control method [local | radius]
Parameters
local - Specify to authenticate via the local database.
radius - Specify to authenticate via a RADIUS server.
470
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To set the MAC-based Access Control authentication method as local:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config mac_based_access_control method local
Command: config mac_based_access_control method local
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
50-6 config mac_based_access_control guest_vlan ports
Description
This command is used to assign a specified port list to the MAC-based Access Control guest VLAN. Ports that are not contained in port list will be removed from the MAC-based Access Control guest VLAN.
For detailed information on the operation of MAC-based Access Control guest VLANs, please see the description for the “config mac_based_access_control ports” command.
Format config mac_based_access_control guest_vlan ports <portlist>
Parameters
<portlist> - Enter the list of port as MAC-based Access Control guest VLAN membership.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To set the MAC-based Access Control guest VLAN membership:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config mac_based_access_control guest_vlan ports 1-8
Command: config mac_based_access_control guest_vlan ports 1-8
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
50-7 config mac_based_access_control ports
Description
This command is used to configure MAC-based Access Control port’s setting.
When the MAC-based Access Control function is enabled for a port and the port is not a MAC-based Access
Control guest VLAN member, the user who is attached to this port will not be forwarded unless the user passes the authentication.
• A user that does not pass the authentication will not be serviced by the Switch.
471
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
• If the user passes the authentication, the user will be able to forward traffic operated under the assigned
VLAN.
When the MAC-based Access Control function is enabled for a port, and the port is a MAC-based Access Control guest VLAN member, the port(s) will be removed from the original VLAN(s) member ports, and added to MACbased Access Control guest VLAN member ports.
• Before the authentication process starts, the user is able to forward traffic under the guest VLAN.
• After the authentication process, the user will be able to access the assigned VLAN.
If the port authorize mode is port based mode, when the port has been moved to the authorized VLAN, the subsequent users will not be authenticated again. They will operate in the current authorized VLAN.
If the port authorize mode is host based mode, then each user will be authorized individually and be capable of getting its own assigned VLAN.
If port’s block time is set to” infinite”, it means that a failed authentication client will never be blocked. Block time will be set to “0”.
Format config mac_based_access_control ports [<portlist> | all] {state [enable | disable] | mode [port_based | host_based] | aging_time [infinite | <min 1-1440>] | block_time <sec 0-300> | max_users [<value 1-1000> | no_limit]}(1)
Parameters
<portlist> - Enter the list of port used for this configuration here.
all - Specify all existed ports of switch for configuring the MAC-based Access Control function parameters.
state - Specify whether the port’s MAC-based Access Control function is enabled or disabled.
enable - Specify that the port's MAC-based Access Control states will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the port's MAC-based Access Control states will be disabled.
mode - Specify the MAC-based access control port mode used.
port_based - Specify that the MAC-based access control port mode will be set to port-based.
host_based - Specify that the MAC-based access control port mode will be set to host-based.
aging_time - A time period during which an authenticated host will be kept in an authenticated state. When the aging time has timed-out, the host will be moved back to unauthenticated state.
infinite - Specify that the authorized clients will not be aged out automatically.
<min 1-1440> - Enter the aging time value here. This value must be between 1 and 1440 minutes.
block_time - If a host fails to pass the authentication, the next authentication will not start within the block time unless the user clears the entry state manually. If the block time is set to 0, it means do not block the client that failed authentication.
<sec 0-300> -Enter the block time value here. This value must be between 0 and 300 seconds.
max_users - Specify maximum number of users per port.
<value 1-1000> - Enter the maximum number of users per port here. This value must be between 1 and 1000.
no_limit - Specify to not limit the maximum number of users on the port. The default value is 128.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure an unlimited number of maximum users for MAC-based Access Control on ports 1 to 8:
472
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config mac_based_access_control ports 1-8 max_users no_limit
Command: config mac_based_access_control ports 1-8 max_users no_limit
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To configure the MAC-based Access Control timer parameters to have an infinite aging time and a block time of
120 seconds on ports 1 to 8:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config mac_based_access_control ports 1-8 aging_time infinite block_time
120
Command: config mac_based_access_control ports 1-8 aging_time infinite block_time 120
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
50-8 create mac_based_access_control
Description
This command is used to assign a static 802.1Q VLAN as a MAC-based Access Control guest VLAN.
Format create mac_based_access_control [guest_vlan <vlan_name 32> | guest_vlanid <vlanid 1-4094>]
Parameters
guest_vlan - Specify MAC-based Access Control guest VLAN by name, it must be a static 1Q VLAN.
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the VLAN name here. This name can be up to 32 characters long.
guest_vlanid - Specify MAC-based Access Control guest VLAN by VID, it must be a static 1Q VLAN.
<vlanid 1-4094> - Enter the VLAN ID here. This value must be between 1 and 4094.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To create a MAC-based Access Control guest VLAN:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#create mac_based_access_control guest_vlan VLAN8
Command: create mac_based_access_control guest_vlan VLAN8
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
50-9 delete mac_based_access_control
Description
This command is used to remove a MAC-based Access Control guest VLAN.
473
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Format delete mac_based_access_control [guest_vlan <vlan_name 32> | guest_vlanid <vlanid 1-4094>]
Parameters
guest_vlan - Specify the name of the MAC-based Access Control’s guest VLAN.
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the VLAN name here. This name can be up to 32 characters long.
guest_vlanid - Specify the VID of the MAC-based Access Control’s guest VLAN.
<vlanid 1-4094> - Enter the VLAN ID here. This value must be between 1 and 4094.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To delete the MAC-based Access Control guest VLAN called default:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#delete mac_based_access_control guest_vlan default
Command: delete mac_based_access_control guest_vlan default
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
50-10 clear mac_based_access_control auth_state
Description
This command is used to clear the authentication state of a user (or port). The port (or the user) will return to an un-authenticated state. All the timers associated with the port (or the user) will be reset.
Format clear mac_based_access_control auth_state [ports [all | <portlist>] | mac_addr <macaddr>]
Parameters
ports - Specify the port range to delete MAC addresses on them.
all - Specify to delete the MAC addresses of all MAC-based Access Control enabled ports.
<portlist> - Enter the list of port used for this configuration here.
mac_addr - Specify to delete a specified host with this MAC address.
<macaddr> - Enter the MAC address used here.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To clear MAC-based Access Control clients’ authentication information for all ports:
474
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#clear mac_based_access_control auth_state ports all
Command: clear mac_based_access_control auth_state ports all
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To delete the MAC-based Access Control authentication information for the host that has a MAC address of 00-00-
00-47-04-65:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#clear mac_based_access_control auth_state mac_addr 00-00-00-47-04-65
Command: clear mac_based_access_control auth_state mac_addr 00-00-00-47-04-65
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
50-11 create mac_based_access_control_local mac
Description
This command is used to create a MAC-based Access Control local database entry that will be used for authentication. This command can also specify the VLAN that an authorized host will be assigned to.
Format create mac_based_access_control_local mac <macaddr> {[vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid < vlanid 1-4094>]}
Parameters
<macaddr> - Enter the MAC address that can pass local authentication here.
vlan - (Optional) Specify the target VLAN by using the VLAN name. When this host is authorized, it will be assigned to this VLAN.
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the VLAN name here. This name can be up to 32 characters long.
vlanid - (Optional) Specify the target VLAN by using the VID. When this host is authorized, it will be assigned to this VLAN if the target VLAN exists.
<vlanid 1-4094> - Enter the VLAN ID here. This value must be between 1 and 4094.
If no vlanid or vlan parameter is specified, not specify the target VLAN for this host.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To create one MAC-based Access Control local database entry for MAC address 00-00-00-00-00-01 and specify that the host will be assigned to the “default” VLAN after the host has been authorized:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#create mac_based_access_control_local mac 00-00-00-00-00-01 vlan default
Command: create mac_based_access_control_local mac 00-00-00-00-00-01 vlan default
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
475
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
50-12 config mac_based_access_control_local mac
Description
This command is used to configure a MAC-based Access Control local database entry.
Format config mac_based_access_control_local mac <macaddr> [vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid 1-4094> | clear_vlan]
Parameters
<macaddr> - Enter the MAC address of the authenticated host.
vlan - Specify the target VLAN by VLAN name. When this host is authorized, the host will be assigned to this
VLAN.
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the VLAN name here. This name can be up to 32 characters long.
vlanid - Specify the target VLAN by VID. When this host is authorized, the host will be assigned to this VLAN if the target VLAN exists.
<vlanid 1-4094> - Enter the VLAN ID here. This value must be between 1 and 4094.
clear_vlan - Not specify the target VLAN. When this host is authorized, will not assign target VLAN.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure the target VLAN “default” for the MAC-based Access Control local database entry 00-00-00-00-00-01:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config mac_based_access_control_local mac 00-00-00-00-00-01 vlan default
Command: config mac_based_access_control_local mac 00-00-00-00-00-01 vlan default
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
50-13 delete mac_based_access_control_local
Description
This command is used to delete a MAC-based Access Control local database entry.
Format delete mac_based_access_control_local [mac <macaddr> | vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid 1-4094>]
Parameters
mac - Deletes local database entry by specific MAC address.
<macaddr> - Enter the MAC address used here.
vlan - Deletes local database entries by specific target VLAN name.
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the VLAN name here. This name can be up to 32 characters long.
vlanid - Deletes local database entries by specific target VLAN ID.
<vlanid 1-4094> - Enter the VLAN ID here. This value must be between 1 and 4094.
476
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To delete the MAC-based Access Control local database entry for MAC address 00-00-00-00-00-01:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#delete mac_based_access_control_local mac 00-00-00-00-00-01
Command: delete mac_based_access_control_local mac 00-00-00-00-00-01
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To delete the MAC-based Access Control local database entry for the VLAN name VLAN3:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#delete mac_based_access_control_local vlan VLAN3
Command: delete mac_based_access_control_local vlan VLAN3
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
50-14 config mac_based_access_control authorization attributes
Description
This command is used to enable or disable the acceptation of an authorized configuration.
When authorization is enabled for MAC-based Access Controls with RADIUS authentication, the authorized attributes (for example VLAN, 802.1p default priority, and ACL) assigned by the RADUIS server will be accepted if the global authorization status is enabled.
When authorization is enabled for MAC-based Access Controls with local authentication, the authorized attributes assigned by the local database will be accepted.
Format config mac_based_access_control authorization attributes {radius [enable | disable] | local [enable | disable]}(1)
Parameters
radius - If specified to enable, the authorized attributes (for example VLAN, 802.1p default priority, and ACL) assigned by the RADUIS server will be accepted if the global authorization status is enabled. The default state is enabled.
enable - Specify that the RADIUS attributes will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the RADIUS attributes will be disabled.
local - If specified to enable, the authorized attributes assigned by the local database will be accepted if the global authorization status is enabled. The default state is enabled.
enable - Specify that the local attributes will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the local attributes will be disabled.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
477
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Example
The following example will disable the configuration authorized from the local database:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config mac_based_access_control authorization attributes local disable
Command: config mac_based_access_control authorization attributes local disable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
50-15 show mac_based_access_control
Description
This command is used to display the MAC-based Access Control setting.
Format show mac_based_access_control {ports {<portlist>}}
Parameters
ports - (Optional) Displays the MAC-based Access Control settings for a specific port or range of ports.
<portlist> - (Optional) Enter the list of port used for this configuration here.
If no parameter is specified, the global MAC-based Access Control settings will be displayed.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show the MAC-based Access Control port configuration for ports 1 to 4:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show mac_based_access_control ports 1-4
Command: show mac_based_access_control ports 1-4
Port State Aging Time Block Time Auth Mode Max User
(min) (sec)
----- -------- ---------- --------- ---------- --------
1 Disabled 1440 300 Host-based 128
2 Disabled 1440 300 Host-based 128
3 Disabled 1440 300 Host-based 128
4 Disabled 1440 300 Host-based 128
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
50-16 show mac_based_access_control_local
Description
This command is used to display the MAC-based Access Control local database entry(s).
478
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Format show mac_based_access_control_local {[mac <macaddr> | vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid 1-4094>]}
Parameters
mac - (Optional) Displays MAC-based Access Control local database entries for a specific MAC address.
<macaddr> - Enter the MAC address used here.
vlan - (Optional) Displays MAC-based Access Control local database entries for a specific target VLAN name.
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the VLAN name here. This name can be up to 32 characters long.
vlanid - (Optional) Displays MAC-based Access Control local database entries for a specific target VLAN ID.
<vlanid 1-4094> - Enter the VLAN ID here. This value must be between 1 and 4094.
If the parameter is no specified, displays all MAC-based Access Control local database entries.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show MAC-based Access Control local database for the VLAN called ‘default’:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show mac_based_access_control_local vlan default
Command: show mac_based_access_control_local vlan default
MAC Address VID
----------------- ----
00-00-00-00-00-01 1
00-00-00-00-00-04 1
Total Entries:2
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
50-17 show mac_based_access_control auth_state ports
Description
This command is used to display the MAC-based Access Control authentication status.
Format show mac_based_access_control auth_state ports {<portlist>}
Parameters
<portlist> - (Optional) Enter a range of ports to be displayed.
If the portlist is not specified, all of MAC-based Access Control ports authentication status will be displayed.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the MAC-based Access Control authentication status on port 1-4
479
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show mac_based_access_control auth_state ports 1-4
Command: show mac_based_access_control auth_state ports 1-4
(P): Port-based
Port MAC Address State VID Priority Aging Time/
Block Time
---- -------------------- -------------- ---- -------- ------------
Total Authenticating Hosts : 0
Total Authenticated Hosts : 0
Total Blocked Hosts : 0
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
50-18 config mac_based_access_control max_users
Description
This command is used to configure the maximum number of authorized clients.
Format config mac_based_access_control max_users [<value 1-1000> | no_limit]
Parameters
max_users - Specify to set the maximum number of authorized clients on the whole device.
<value 1-1000> - Enter the maximum users here. This value must be between 1 and 1000.
no_limit - Specify to not limit the maximum number of users on the system. By default, there is no limit on the number of users.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure the maximum number of users of the MAC-based Access Control system supports to 128:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config mac_based_access_control max_users 128
Command: config mac_based_access_control max_users 128
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
50-19 config mac_based_access_control trap state
Description
This command is used to enable or disable sending of MAC-based Access Control traps.
480
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Format config mac_based_access_control trap state [enable | disable]
Parameters
enable - Enables trap for MAC-based Access Control. The trap of MAC-based Access Control will be sent out.
disable - Disables trap for MAC-based Access Control.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To enable trap state of MAC-based Access Control:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config mac_based_access_control trap state enable
Command: config mac_based_access_control trap state enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
50-20 config mac_based_access_control log state
Description
This command is used to enable or disable generating of MAC-based Access Control logs.
Format config mac_based_access_control log state [enable | disable]
Parameters
enable - Enables log for MAC-based Access Control. The log of MAC-based Access Control will be generated.
disable - Disables log for MAC-based Access Control.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To disable log state of MAC-based Access Control:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config mac_based_access_control log state disable
Command: config mac_based_access_control log state disable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
481
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 51 MAC-based VLAN Command List
create mac_based_vlan mac_address <macaddr> [vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid 1-4094>]
delete mac_based_vlan {mac_address <macaddr> [vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid 1-4094>]}
show mac_based_vlan {mac_address <macaddr> | [vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid 1-4094>]}
51-1 create mac_based_vlan mac_address
Description
This command is used to create a static MAC-based VLAN entry.
This command only needs to be supported by the model which supports MAC-based VLAN.
There is a global limitation of the maximum entries supported for the static MAC-based entry.
Format create mac_based_vlan mac_address <macaddr> [vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid 1-4094>]
Parameters
mac_address - Specify the MAC address used.
<macaddr> - Enter the MAC address here.
vlan - The VLAN to be associated with the MAC address.
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the VLAN name here. This name can be up to 32 characters long.
vlanid - Specify the VLAN by VLAN ID.
<vlanid 1-4094> - Enter the VLAN ID here. This value must be between 1 and 4094.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To create a static MAC-based VLAN entry:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#create mac_based_vlan mac_address 00-11-22-33-44-55 vlanid 100
Command: create mac_based_vlan mac_address 00-11-22-33-44-55 vlanid 100
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
51-2 delete mac_based_vlan
Description
This command is used to delete the static MAC-based VLAN entry.
Format delete mac_based_vlan {mac_address <macaddr> [vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid 1-4094>]}
482
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Parameters
mac_address - (Optional) Specify the MAC address used.
<macaddr> - Enter the MAC address used here.
vlan - (Optional) The VLAN to be associated with the MAC address.
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the VLAN name here. This name can be up to 32 characters long.
vlanid - (Optional) Specify the VLAN by VLAN ID.
<vlanid 1-4094> - Enter the VLAN ID here. This value must be between 1 and 4094.
If no parameter is specified, ALL static configured entries will be removed.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To delete a static MAC-based VLAN entry:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#delete mac_based_vlan mac_address 00-11-22-33-44-55 vlanid 100
Command: delete mac_based_vlan mac_address 00-11-22-33-44-55 vlanid 100
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
51-3 show mac_based_vlan
Description
This command is used to display the static or dynamic MAC-Based VLAN entry. If the MAC address and VLAN is not specified, all static and dynamic entries will be displayed.
Format show mac_based_vlan {mac_address <macaddr> | [vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid 1-4094>]}
Parameters
mac_address - (Optional) Specify the entry that you would like to display.
<macaddr> - Enter the MAC address used here.
vlan - (Optional) Specify the VLAN that you would like to display.
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the VLAN name here. This name can be up to 32 characters long.
vlanid - (Optional) Specify the VLAN by VLAN ID.
<vlanid 1-4094> - Enter the VLAN ID here. This value must be between 1 and 4094.
Restrictions
None.
Example
In the following example, MAC address “00-80-c2-33-c3-45” is assigned to VLAN 300 by manual config. It is assigned to VLAN 400 by Voice VLAN. Since Voice VLAN has higher priority than manual configuration, the manual configured entry will become inactive. To display the MAC-based VLAN entry:
483
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show mac_based_vlan
MAC Address VLAN ID Status Type
----------------- ------- -------- -------------------
00-80-e0-14-a7-57 200 Active Static
00-80-c2-33-c3-45 300 Inactive Static
00-80-c2-33-c3-45 400 Active Voice VLAN
Total Entries : 3
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
484
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 52 Mirror Command List
config mirror port <port> {[add | delete] source ports <portlist> [rx | tx {forwarding} | both]} enable mirror disable mirror show mirror
52-1 config mirror port
Description
This command is used to configure a mirror port − source port pair on the Switch. Traffic from any source port to a target port can be mirrored for real-time analysis. A logic analyzer or an RMON probe then can be attached to study the traffic crossing the source port in a completely unobtrusive manner. If the target port is operating at a lower speed, the source port will be forced to drop its operating speed to match that of the target port.
Format config mirror port <port> {[add | delete] source ports <portlist> [rx | tx {forwarding} | both]}
Parameters
<port> - Enter the port number that will receive the packets duplicated at the mirror port.
add - (Optional) The mirror entry to be added.
delete - (Optional) The mirror entry to be deleted.
source ports - (Optional) The port that will be mirrored. All packets entering and leaving the source port can be duplicated in the mirror port.
<portlist> - Enter the list of port to be configured here.
rx - (Optional) Specify to allow the mirroring packets received (flowing into) by the port or ports in the port list.
tx - (Optional) Specify to allow the mirroring packets sent (flowing out of) by the port or ports in the port list.
forwarding - (Optional) Specify to add the port to hardware egress mirroring port bitmap only when the port states of all the STP are forwarding. The default value of TX is without forwarding.
both - (Optional) Specify to mirro all the packets received or sent by the port or ports in the port list.
Restrictions
Only Administrators and Operators can issue this command.
Example
To add the mirroring ports:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config mirror port 3 add source ports 7-12 both
Command: config mirror port 3 add source ports 7-12 both
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
52-2 enable mirror
Description
This command is used to enable mirror function without having to modify the mirror session configuration.
485
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Format enable mirror
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators and Operators can issue this command.
Example
To enable mirroring function:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#enable mirror
Command: enable mirror
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
52-3 disable mirror
Description
This command is used to disable mirror function without having to modify the mirror session configuration.
Format disable mirror
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators and Operators can issue this command.
Example
To disable mirroring function:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#disable mirror
Command: disable mirror
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
Restrictions
None.
486
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
52-4 show mirror
Description
This command is used to display the current mirror function state and mirror session configuration on the Switch.
Format show mirror
Parameters
None.
Example
To display mirroring configuration:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show mirror
Command: show mirror
Current Settings
Mirror Status: Enabled
Target Port : 3
Mirrored Port
RX: 7-12
TX: 7-12
TX Forwarding:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
487
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 53 MLD Snooping Command List
The Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) is used by IPv6 routers to discover multicast listeners on a directly attached link, much as IGMP is used in IPv4. The protocol is embedded in ICMPv6 instead of using a separate protocol. MLDv1 is similar to IGMPv2 and MLDv2 similar to IGMPv3.
config mld_snooping [vlan_name <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list> | all ] {state [enable | disable] | fast_done [enable | disable] | report_suppression [enable | disable] | proxy_reporting {state [enable | disable] | source_ip <ipv6addr>}(1)}(1)
config mld_snooping querier [vlan_name <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list> | all] {query_interval <sec 1-
65535> | max_response_time <sec 1-25> | robustness_variable <value 1-7> | last_listener_query_interval
<sec 1-25> | state [enable | disable] | version <value 1-2>}(1)
config mld_snooping mrouter_ports [vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list>] [add | delete] <portlist>
config mld_snooping mrouter_ports_forbidden [vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list>] [add | delete]
<portlist> enable mld_snooping disable mld_snooping
show mld_snooping {[vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list>]}
show mld_snooping group {[vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list> | ports <portlist>] {<ipv6addr>}}
{data_driven}
show mld_snooping forwarding {[vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list>]}
show mld_snooping mrouter_ports [vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list> | all] {[static | dynamic | forbidden]}
create mld_snooping static_group [vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list>] <ipv6addr>
delete mld_snooping static_group [vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list>] <ipv6addr>
config mld_snooping static_group [vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list>] <ipv6addr> [add | delete]
<portlist>
show mld_snooping static_group {[vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list>] <ipv6addr>}
config mld_snooping data_driven_learning [all | vlan_name <vlan_name> | vlanid <vlanid_list>] {state [enable
| disable] | aged_out [enable | disable] | expiry_time <sec 1-65535>}(1)
config mld_snooping data_driven_learning max_learned_entry <value 1-1024>
clear mld_snooping data_driven_group [all | [vlan_name <vlan_name> | vlanid <vlanid_list>] [<ipv6addr>| all]]
show mld_snooping statistic counter [vlan <vlan_name> | vlanid <vlanid_list> | ports <portlist>] clear mld_snooping statistics counter
config mld_snooping rate_limit [ports <portlist> | vlanid <vlanid_list>] [<value 1-1000> | no_limit]
show mld_snooping rate_limit [ports <portlist> | vlanid <vlanid_list>]
show mld_snooping host {[vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list> | ports <portlist> | group <ipv6addr>]}
53-1 config mld_snooping
Description
This command is used to configure MLD snooping on the Switch.
Format config mld_snooping [vlan_name <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list> | all ] {state [enable | disable] | fast_done [enable | disable] | report_suppression [enable | disable] | proxy_reporting {state [enable | disable] | source_ip <ipv6addr>}(1)}(1)
Parameters
vlan_name - Specify the name of the VLAN for which MLD snooping is to be configured.
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the VLAN name here. The VLAN name can be up to 32 characters long.
vlanid - Specify the ID of the VLAN for which MLD snooping is to be configured.
<vlanid_list> - Enter the VLAN ID list here.
488
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
all - Specify all VLANs for which MLD snooping is to be configured.
state - Specify to enable or disable MLD snooping for the chosen VLAN.
enable - Specify to enable MLD snooping for the chosen VLAN.
disable - Specify to disable MLD snooping for the chosen VLAN.
fast_done - Specify to enable or disable MLD snooping fast_leave function.
enable - Specify to enable MLD snooping fast_leave function. If enable, the membership is immediately removed when the system receive the MLD leave message.
disable - Specify to disable MLD snooping fast_leave function.
report_suppression - Specify whether to send the first MLD report from all hosts for a group to all the multicast routers.
enable - When MLD report suppression is enabled, the Switch sends the first MLD report from all hosts for a group to all the multicast routers. The Switch does not send the remaining MLD reports for the group to the multicast routers. If the multicast router query includes requests only for MLDv1 reports, the Switch forwards only the first MLDv1 report from all hosts for a group to all the multicast routers. If the multicast router query also includes requests for MLDv2 reports, the Switch forwards all MLDv2 reports for a group to the multicast devices. This is the default.
disable - Specify not to send any MLD report from all hosts for a group to all the multicast routers.
proxy reporting - Specify MLD proxy reporting.
state - Specify to enable or disable the proxy reporting.
enable - Enables the proxy reporting.
disable - Disables the proxy reporting.
source_ip - Specify the source IP of proxy reporting integrated report. Default value is zero IP.
<ipv6addr> - Enter the Ipv6 address.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure MLD snooping:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config mld_snooping vlan_name default state enable
Command: config mld_snooping vlan_name default state enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
53-2 config mld_snooping querier
Description
This command is used to configure the timer in seconds between general query transmissions, the maximum time in seconds to wait for reports from listeners, and the permitted packet loss that is guaranteed by MLD snooping.
Format config mld_snooping querier [vlan_name <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list> | all] {query_interval <sec
1-65535> | max_response_time <sec 1-25> | robustness_variable <value 1-7> | last_listener_query_interval
<sec 1-25> | state [enable | disable] | version <value 1-2>}
Parameters
vlan_name - Specify the name of the VLAN for which MLD snooping querier is to be configured.
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the VLAN name here. The VLAN name can be up to 32 characters long.
vlanid - Specify the ID of the VLAN for which MLD snooping querier is to be configured.
<vlanid_list> - Enter the VLAN ID list here.
all - Specify all VLANs for which MLD snooping querier is to be configured.
query_interval - Specify the amount of time in seconds between general query transmissions. The default
489
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide setting is 125 seconds.
<sec 1-65535> - Enter the query interval value here. This value must be between 1 and 65535 seconds.
max_reponse_time - Specify the maximum time in seconds to wait for reports from listeners. The default setting is 10 seconds.
<sec 1-25> - Enter the maximum response time value here. This value must be between 1 and 25 seconds.
robustness_variable - Provides fine-tuning to allow for expected packet loss on a subnet. The value of the robustness variable is used in calculating the following MLD message intervals:
<value 1-7> - Enter the robustness variable value here. This value must be between 1 and 7.
• Group listener interval—Amount of time that must pass before a multicast router decides there are no more listeners of a group on a network. This interval is calculated as follows: (robustness variable * query interval) + (1 * query response interval).
• Other querier present interval—Amount of time that must pass before a multicast router decides that there is no longer another multicast router that is the querier. This interval is calculated as follows: (robustness variable * query interval) + (0.5 * query response interval).
• Last listener query count—Number of group-specific queries sent before the router assumes there are no local listeners of a group. The default number is the value of the robustness variable.
• By default, the robustness variable is set to 2. You might want to increase this value if you expect a subnet to be loosely.
last_listener_query_interval - (Optional) Specify the maximum amount of time between group-specific query messages, including those sent in response to done-group messages. You might lower this interval to reduce the amount of time it takes a router to detect the loss of the last listener of a group. The default setting is 1 second.
<sec 1-25> - Enter the last listener query interval value here. This value must be between 1 and 25 seconds.
state - (Optional) This allows the Switch to be specified as an MLD Querier (sends MLD query packets) or a Non-
Querier (does not send MLD query packets). Set to enable or disable.
enable - Enables the MLD querier state.
disable - Disables the MLD querier state.
version - (Optional) Specify the version of MLD packet that will be sent by the Switch.
<value 1-2> - Enter the version number value here. This value must be between 1 and 2.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure the MLD snooping querier:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config mld_snooping querier vlan_name default query_interval 125 state enable
Command: config mld_snooping querier vlan_name default query_interval 125 state enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
53-3 config mld_snooping router_ports
Description
This command is used to designate a range of ports as being connected to multicast-enabled routers. This will ensure that all packets with such a router as its destination will reach the multicast-enabled router, regardless of protocol.
Format config mld_snooping mrouter_ports [vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list>] [add | delete] <portlist>
490
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Parameters
vlan - Specify the name of the VLAN on which the router port resides.
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the VLAN name here. The VLAN name can be up to 32 characters long.
vlanid - Specify the ID of the VLAN on which the router port resides.
<vlanid_list> - Enter the VLAN ID list here.
add - Specify to add the router ports.
delete - Specify to delete the router ports.
<portlist> - Enter a range of ports to be configured.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To set up static router ports:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config mld_snooping mrouter_ports vlan default add 1-10
Command: config mld_snooping mrouter_ports vlan default add 1-10
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
53-4 config mld_snooping router_ports_forbidden
Description
This command is used to designate a range of ports as being not connected to multicast-enabled routers. This ensures that the forbidden router port will not propagate routing packets out.
Format config mld_snooping mrouter_ports_forbidden [vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list>] [add | delete]
<portlist>
Parameters
vlan - Specify the name of the VLAN on which the forbidden router port resides.
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the VLAN name here. The VLAN name can be up to 32 characters long.
vlanid - Specify the ID of the VLAN on which the forbidden router port resides.
<vlanid_list> - Enter the VLAN ID list here.
add - Specify to add the forbidden router ports.
delete - Specify to delete the forbidden router ports.
<portlist> - Enter a range of ports to be configured.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To set up port 11 as the forbidden router port of the default VLAN:
491
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config mld_snooping mrouter_ports_forbidden vlan default add 11
Command: config mld_snooping mrouter_ports_forbidden vlan default add 11
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
53-5 enable mld_snooping
Description
This command is used to enable MLD snooping on the Switch. MLD snooping is disabled by default. When the
Switch receives an MLD report packet from a port, this port will be learned as a member port of the multicast group that the port is reported, and the router will be a default member of this multicast group. The multicast packet destined for this multicast group will be forwarded to all the members of this multicast group.
Format enable mld_snooping
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To enable MLD snooping on the Switch:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#enable mld_snooping
Command: enable mld_snooping
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
53-6 disable mld_snooping
Description
This command is used to disable MLD snooping on the Switch. Disabling MLD snooping allows all MLD and IP multicast traffic to flood within a given IP interface. Note that disabling MLD snooping will also disable the forward multicast router only function.
Format disable mld_snooping
Parameters
None.
492
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To disable MLD snooping on the Switch:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#disable mld_snooping
Command: disable mld_snooping
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
53-7 show mld_snooping
Description
This command is used to display the current MLD snooping configuration on the Switch.
Format show mld_snooping {[vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list>]}
Parameters
vlan - (Optional) Specify the name of the VLAN for which you want to view the MLD snooping configuration.
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the VLAN name here. The VLAN name can be up to 32 characters long.
vlanid - (Optional) Specify the ID of the VLAN for which you want to view the MLD snooping configuration.
<vlanid_list> - Enter the VLAN ID list here.
If VLAN is not specified, the system will display all current MLD snooping configurations.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show MLD snooping:$$$
493
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# show mld_snooping
Command: show mld_snooping
MLD Snooping Global State : Enabled
Data Driven Learning Max Entries : 128
VLAN Name : default
Query Interval : 125
Max Response Time : 10
Robustness Value : 2
Last Listener Query Interval : 1
Querier State : Enabled
Querier Role : Querier
Querier IP : FE80::201:2FF:FE03:400
Querier Expiry Time : 0 secs
State : Enabled
Fast Done : Disabled
Rate Limit : No Limitation
Report Suppression : Enabled
Version : 2
Data Driven Learning State : Enabled
Data Driven Learning Aged Out : Disabled
Data Driven Group Expiry Time : 260
Total Entries: 1
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
53-8 show mld_snooping group
Description
This command is used to display the current MLD snooping group information on the Switch.
Format show mld_snooping group {[vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list> | ports <portlist>] {<ipv6addr>}}
{data_driven}
Parameters
vlan - (Optional) Specify the name of the VLAN for which you want to view MLD snooping group information. If
VLAN and ports and IP address are not specified, the system will display all current MLD snooping group information.
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the VLAN name here. The VLAN name can be up to 32 characters long.
vlanid - (Optional) Specify the ID of the VLAN for which you want to view MLD snooping group information.
<vlanid_list> - Enter the VLAN ID list here.
ports - (Optional) Specify a list of ports for which you want to view MLD snooping group information.
<portlist> - Enter the list of port here.
<ipv6addr> - (Optional) Enter the group IPv6 address for which you want to view MLD snooping group information.
data_driven - (Optional) Displays the data driven groups.
Restrictions
None.
494
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Example
To show an MLD snooping group when MLD v2 is supported:
The first two items mean that for ports 1-2 / port 3, the data from the FE1E::1 will be forwarded.
The third item means that for ports 4-5, the data from FE1E::2 will be forwarded.
The fourth item is a data-driven learned entry. The member port list is empty. The multicast packets will be forwarded to the router ports. If the router port list is empty, the packet will be dropped.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show mld_snooping group
Command: show mld_snooping group
Source/Group
VLAN Name/VID
: 2001::1/FE1E::1
: default/1
Member Ports : 1-2
UP Time : 26
Expiry Time : 258
Filter Mode : INCLUDE
Source/Group : 2002::2/FE1E::1
VLAN Name/VID: : default/1
Member Ports : 3
UP Time : 29
Expiry Time : 247
Filter Mode : EXCLUDE
Source/Group
VLAN Name/VID
: NULL/FE1E::2
: default/1
Member Ports
Filter Mode
: 4-5
UP Time : 40
Expiry Time : 205
: EXCLUDE
Source/Group
VLAN Name/VID
Member Ports
: NULL/FF1E::5
: default/1
:
Router Ports : 24
UP Time : 100
Expiry Time : 200
Filter Mode : EXCLUDE
Total Entries : 4
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
495
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show mld_snooping group data_driven
Command: show mld_snooping group data_driven
Source/Group
VLAN Name/VID
: NULL/FF1E::5
: default/1
Member Ports :
Router Ports : 24
UP Time : 100
Expiry Time : 200
Filter Mode : EXCLUDE
Total Entries : 1
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
53-9 show mld_snooping forwarding
Description
This command is used to display the Switch’s current MLD snooping forwarding table. It provides an easy way for users to check the list of ports that the multicast group that comes from specific sources will be forwarded to. The packet comes from the source VLAN. They will be forwarded to the forwarding VLAN.
Format show mld_snooping forwarding {[vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list>]}
Parameters
vlan - (Optional) Specify the name of the VLAN for which you want to view MLD snooping forwarding table information.
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the VLAN name here. The VLAN name can be up to 32 characters long.
vlanid - (Optional) Specify the ID of the VLAN for which you want to view MLD snooping forwarding table information.
<vlanid_list> - Enter the VLAN ID list here.
If no parameter is specified, the system will display all current MLD snooping forwarding table entries of the
Switch.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show all MLD snooping forwarding entries located on the Switch.
496
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show mld_snooping forwarding
Command: show mld_snooping forwarding
VLAN Name : default
Source IP : *
Multicast Group: FE1E::1
Port Member : 2,7
VLAN Name : default
Source IP : *
Multicast Group: FF1E::1
Port Member : 5
Total Entries : 2
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
53-10 show mld_snooping mrouter_ports
Description
This command is used to display the currently configured router ports on the Switch.
Format show mld_snooping mrouter_ports [vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list> | all] {[static | dynamic | forbidden]}
Parameters
vlan - Specify the name of the VLAN on which the router port resides.
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the VLAN name here. The VLAN name can be up to 32 characters long.
vlanid - Specify the ID of the VLAN on which the router port resides.
<vlanid_list> - Enter the VLAN ID list here.
all - Specify all VLANs on which the router port resides.
static - (Optional) Displays router ports that have been statically configured.
dynamic - (Optional) Displays router ports that have been dynamically configured.
forbidden - (Optional) Displays forbidden router ports that have been statically configured.
If no parameter is specified, the system will display all currently configured router ports on the Switch.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the mld_snooping mrouter ports:
497
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show mld_snooping mrouter_ports vlan default
Command: show mld_snooping mrouter_ports vlan default
VLAN Name : default
Static Router Port : 1-10
Dynamic Router Port :
Router IP :
Forbidden Router Port : 11
Total Entries: 1
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
53-11 create mld_snooping static_group
Description
This command is used to create an MLD snooping static group. Member ports can be added to the static group.
The static member and the dynamic member ports form the member ports of a group.
The static group will only take effect when MLD snooping is enabled on the VLAN. An active static group must be equal to a static MLD group with a link-up member port. For those static member ports, the device needs to emulate the MLD protocol operation to the querier, and forward the traffic destined to the multicast group to the member ports.
The Reserved IP multicast addresses FF0x::/16 must be excluded from the configured group.
The VLAN must be created first before a static group can be created.
Format create mld_snooping static_group [vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list>] <ipv6addr>
Parameters
vlan - Specify the name of the VLAN on which the static group resides.
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the VLAN name here. The VLAN name can be up to 32 characters long.
vlanid - Specify the ID of the VLAN on which the static group resides.
<vlanid_list> - Enter the VLAN ID list here.
<ipv6addr> - Enter the multicast group IPv6 address.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To create an MLD snooping static group for VLAN 1, group FF1E::1:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#create mld_snooping static_group vlan default FF1E::1
Command: create mld_snooping static_group vlan default FF1E::1
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
498
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
53-12 delete mld_snooping static_group
Description
This command is used to delete a MLD Snooping multicast static group.
Format delete mld_snooping static_group [vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list>] <ipv6addr>
Parameters
vlan - Specify the name of the VLAN on which the static group resides.
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the VLAN name here. The VLAN name can be up to 32 characters long.
vlanid - Specify the ID of the VLAN on which the static group resides.
<vlanid_list> - Enter the VLAN ID list here.
<ipv6addr> - Enter the multicast group IP address.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To delete an MLD snooping static group for VLAN 1, group FF1E::1:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#delete mld_snooping static_group vlan default FF1E::1
Command: delete mld_snooping static_group vlan default FF1E::1
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
53-13 config mld_snooping static_group
Description
This command is used to configure an MLD snooping multicast group static member port. When a port is configured as a static member port, the MLD protocol will not operate on this port. For example, suppose that a port is a dynamic member port learned by MLD. If this port is configured as a static member later, then the MLD protocol will stop operating on this port. The MLD protocol will resume once this port is removed from static member ports.
Format config mld_snooping static_group [vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list>] <ipv6addr> [add | delete]
<portlist>
Parameters
vlan - Specify the name of the VLAN on which the static group resides.
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the VLAN name here. The VLAN name can be up to 32 characters long.
vlanid - Specify the ID of the VLAN on which the static group resides.
<vlanid_list> - Enter the VLAN ID list here.
<ipv6addr> - Enter the multicast group IPv6 address.
add - Specify to add the member ports.
delete - Specify to delete the member ports.
<portlist> - Enter a range of ports to be configured.
499
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To unset port range 9-10 from MLD snooping static member ports for group FF1E::1 on default VLAN:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config mld_snooping static_group vlan default FF1E::1 delete 9-10
Command: config mld_snooping static_group vlan default FF1E::1 delete 9-10
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
53-14 show mld_snooping static_group
Description
This command used to display the MLD snooping multicast group static members.
Format show mld_snooping static_group {[vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list>] <ipv6addr>}
Parameters
vlan - (Optional) Specify the name of the VLAN on which the static group resides.
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the VLAN name here. The VLAN name can be up to 32 characters long.
vlanid - (Optional) Specify the ID of the VLAN on which the static group resides.
<vlanid_list> - Enter the VLAN ID list here.
<ipv6addr> - (Optional) Enter the multicast group IPv6 address.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display all the MLD snooping static groups:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# show mld_snooping static_group
Command: show mld_snooping static_group
VLAN ID/Name IP Address Static Member Ports
-------------- ------------------ ------------------------
1 / Default FF1E ::1 9-10
Total Entries : 1
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
53-15 config mld_snooping data_driven_learning
Description
This command is used to enable or disable the data-driven learning of an MLD snooping group.
500
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
When data-driven learning is enabled for the VLAN, when the Switch receives the IP multicast traffic, on this VLAN, an MLD snooping group will be created. That is, the learning of an entry is not activated by MLD membership registration, but activated by the traffic. For an ordinary MLD snooping entry, the MLD protocol will take care the aging out of the entry. For a data-driven entry, the entry can be specified not to be aged out or to be aged out by the aged timer.
When the data driven learning is enabled, and the data driven table is not full, the multicast filtering mode for all ports is ignored. That is, the multicast packets will be forwarded to router ports. If the data driven learning table is full, the multicast packets will be forwarded according to the multicast filtering mode.
Note that if a data-driven group is created and MLD member ports are learned later, the entry will become an ordinary MLD snooping entry. That is, the aging out mechanism will follow the ordinary MLD snooping entry.
Format config mld_snooping data_driven_learning [all | vlan_name <vlan_name> | vlanid <vlanid_list>] {state
[enable | disable] | aged_out [enable | disable] | expiry_time <sec 1-65535>}(1)
Parameters
all - Specify that all VLANs are to be configured.
vlan_name - Specify the VLAN name to be configured.
<vlan_name> - Enter the VLAN name here.
vlanid - Specify the VLAN ID to be configured.
<vlanid_list> - Enter the VLAN ID list here.
state - Specify to enable or disable the data driven learning of MLD snooping groups. By default, the state is enabled.
enable - Enter enable to enable the data driven learning state.
disable - Enter disable to disable the data driven learning state.
aged_out - Specify to enable or disable the aging out of entries. By default, the state is disabled.
enable - Specify to enable the aged out option.
disable - Specify to disable the aged out option.
expiry_time - Specify the data driven group lifetime, in seconds. This parameter is valid only when aged_out is enabled.
<sec 1-65535> - Enter the expiry time value here. This value must be between 1 and 65535 seconds.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To enable the data driven learning of an MLD snooping group on the default VLAN:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config mld_snooping data_driven_learning vlan default state enable
Command: config mld_snooping data_driven_learning vlan default state enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
53-16 config mld_snooping data_driven_learning max_learned_entry
Description
This command is used to configure the maximum number of groups that can be learned by data driven.
When the table is full, the system will stop the learning of the new data-driven groups. Traffic for the new groups will be dropped.
501
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Format config mld_snooping data_driven_learning max_learned_entry <value 1-1024>
Parameters
<value 1-1024> - Enter the maximum of groups that can be learned by data driven here. This value must be between 1 and 1024. The default setting is 128.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To set the maximum number of groups that can be learned by data driven:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config mld_snooping data_driven_learning max_learned_entry 50
Command: config mld_snooping data_driven_learning max_learned_entry 50
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
53-17 clear mld_snooping data_driven_group
Description
This command is used to delete the MLD snooping groups learned by data driven.
Format clear mld_snooping data_driven_group [all | [vlan_name <vlan_name> | vlanid <vlanid_list>] [<ipv6addr>| all]]
Parameters
all - Specify all VLANs to which MLD snooping groups will be deleted.
vlan_name - Specify the VLAN name.
<vlan_name> - Enter the VLAN name here.
vlanid - Specify the VLAN ID.
<vlanid_list> - Enter the VLAN ID list here.
<ipv6addr> - Enter the group’s IP address learned by data driven.
all - Specify to clear all data driven groups of the specified VLAN.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To clear all the groups learned by data-driven:
502
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#clear mld_snooping data_driven_group all
Command: clear mld_snooping data_driven_group all
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
53-18 show mld_snooping statistic counter
Description
This command is used to display the statistics counter for MLD protocol packets that are received by the Switch since MLD snooping was enabled.
Format show mld_snooping statistic counter [vlan <vlan_name> | vlanid <vlanid_list> | ports <portlist>]
Parameters
vlan - Specify a VLAN to be displayed.
<vlan_name> - Enter the VLAN name here.
vlanid - Specify a list of VLANs to be displayed.
<vlanid_list> - Enter the VLAN ID list here.
ports - Specify a list of ports to be displayed.
<portlist> - Enter the list of port here.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show MLD snooping statistics counters:
503
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show mld_snooping statistic counter vlanid 1
Command: show mld_snooping statistic counter vlanid 1
VLAN name : default
--------------------------------------------------
Group Number : 0
Receive Statistics
Query
MLD v1 Query : 0
MLD v2 Query : 0
Total : 0
Dropped By Rate Limitation : 0
Dropped By Multicast VLAN : 0
Report & Done
MLD v1 Report : 0
MLD v2 Report : 0
MLD v1 Done : 0
Total : 0
Dropped By Rate Limitation : 0
Dropped By Max Group Limitation : 0
Dropped By Group Filter : 0
Dropped By Multicast VLAN : 0
Transmit Statistics
Query
MLD v1 Query : 0
MLD v2 Query : 0
Total : 0
Report & Done
MLD v1 Report : 0
MLD v2 Report : 0
MLD v1 Done : 0
Total : 0
Total Entries : 1
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
53-19 clear mld_snooping statistics counter
Description
This command is used to clear MLD snooping statistics counters.
Format clear mld _snooping statistics counter
504
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To clear MLD snooping statistics counter:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#clear mld_snooping statistics counter
Command: clear mld_snooping statistics counter
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
53-20 config mld_snooping rate_limit
Description
This command is used to configure the rate limit of MLD control packets that are allowed by each port or VLAN.
Format config mld_snooping rate_limit [ports <portlist> | vlanid <vlanid_list>] [<value 1-1000> | no_limit]
Parameters
ports - Specify a range of ports to be configured.
<portlist> - Enter the range of ports to be configured here.
vlanid - Specify a range of VLANs to be configured.
<vlanid_list> - Enter the VLAN ID list here.
<value 1-1000> - Enter a value between 1-1000 to configures the rate limit of MLD control packets that the
Switch can process on a specific port or VLAN. The rate is specified in packet per second. The packets that exceed the limited rate will be dropped.
no_limit - Configures the rate limit of MLD control packets that the Switch can process on a specific port or
VLAN. The rate is specified in packet per second. The packets that exceed the limited rate will be dropped.
The default setting is no_limit.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure the MLD snooping per port rate limit:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config mld_snooping rate_limit ports 1 100
Command: config mld_snooping rate_limit ports 1 100
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
505
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
53-21 show mld_snooping rate_limit
Description
This command is used to display the rate limit of MLD control packets that are allowed by each port or VLAN.
Format show mld_snooping rate_limit [ports <portlist> | vlanid <vlanid_list>]
Parameters
ports - Specify a list of ports.
<portlist> - Enter the range of ports to be configured here.
vlanid - Specify a list of VLANs.
<vlanid_list> - Enter the VLAN ID list here.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the MLD snooping rate limit from port 1 to 5:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show mld_snooping rate_limit ports 1-5
Command: show mld_snooping rate_limit ports 1-5
Port Rate Limit
-------- ---------------
1 100
2 No Limit
3 No Limit
4 No Limit
5 No Limit
Total Entries: 5
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
53-22 show mld_snooping host
Description
This command is used to display the MLD hosts that have joined groups on specific ports or specific VLANs.
Format show mld_snooping host {[vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list> | ports <portlist> | group
<ipv6addr>]}
Parameters
vlan - (Optional) Specify the VLAN name.
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the VLAN name here. This name can be up to 32 characters long.
vlanid - (Optional) Specify the VLAN ID.
<vlanid_list> - Enter the VLAN ID here.
506
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
ports - (Optional) Specify that list of port that will be displayed.
<portlist> - Enter the list of ports here.
group - (Optional) Specify the group.
<ipv6addr> - Enter the group IPv6 address here.
If no parameter is specified, all joining hosts will be displayed.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the host IP information:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show mld_snooping host vlan default
Command: show mld_snooping host vlan default
VLAN ID: 1
Group: FF1E::1
Port: 2
Host: 2001::1
VLAN ID: 1
Group: FF1E::2
Port: 3
Host: 2001::1
VLAN ID: 1
Group: FF1E::3
Port: 4
Host: 2001::1
VLAN ID: 1
Group: FF1E::1
Port: 5
Host: 2001::2
Total Entries : 4
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To display the host’s IP information for the group “FF1E::1”:
507
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# show mld_snooping host group FF1E::1
Command: show mld_snooping host group FF1E::1
VLAN ID: 1
Group: FF1E::1
Port: 2
Host: 2001::1
VLAN ID: 1
Group: FF1E::1
Port: 5
Host: 2001::2
Total Entries : 2
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
508
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 54 MSTP debug enhancement
Command List
debug stp config ports [<portlist> | all] [event | bpdu | state_machine | all] state [disable | brief | detail] debug stp show information
debug stp show flag {ports <portlist>}
debug stp show counter {ports [<portlist> | all]}
debug stp clear counter {ports[<portlist> | all]}
debug stp state [enable | disable]
54-1 debug stp config ports
Description
This command is used to configure per-port STP debug level on the specified ports.
Format debug stp config ports [<portlist> | all] [event | bpdu | state_machine | all] state [disable | brief | detail]
Parameters
<portlist> - Enter the STP port range to debug.
all - Specify to debug all ports on the Switch.
event - Specify to debug the external operation and event processing.
bpdu - Specify to debug the BPDU’s that have been received and transmitted.
state_machine - Specify to debug the state change of the STP state machine.
all - Specify to debug all of the above.
state - Specify the state of the debug mechanism.
disable - Disables the debug mechanism.
brief - Sets the debug level to brief.
detail - Sets the debug level to detail.
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To configure all STP debug flags to brief level on all ports:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#debug stp config ports all all state brief
Command: debug stp config ports all all state brief
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
54-2 debug stp show information
Description
This command is used to display STP detailed information.
509
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Format debug stp show information
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To show STP debug information:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#debug stp show information
Command: debug stp show information
Warning: only support local device.
Spanning Tree Debug Information:
----------------------------------------
Port Status In Hardware Table:
Instance 0:
Port 1 : FOR Port 2 : FOR Port 3 : FOR Port 4 : FOR Port 5 : FOR
Port 6 : FOR
Port 7 : FOR Port 8 : FOR Port 9 : FOR Port 10 : FOR Port 11 : FOR
Port 12 : FOR
Port 13 : FOR Port 14 : FOR Port 15 : FOR Port 16 : FOR Port 17 : FOR
Port 18 : FOR
Port 19 : FOR Port 20 : FOR Port 21 : FOR Port 22 : FOR Port 23 : FOR
Port 24 : FOR
Port 25 : FOR Port 26 : FOR
--------------------------------------
Root Priority And Times:
Instance 0:
Designated Root Bridge : 36795/FD-7F-C3-FF-EF-12
External Root Cost : -139756361
Regional Root Bridge : 65447/3D-D5-7D-35-D8-FF
Internal Root Cost : 1466613107
Designated Bridge : 61882/9F-F3-FF-C7-EB-B5
CTRL+C ESC q Quit SPACE n Next Page ENTER Next Entry a All
54-3 debug stp show flag
Description
This command is used to display the STP debug level on specified ports.
Format debug stp show flag {ports <portlist>}
Parameters
ports - (Optional) Specify the STP ports to display.
510
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
<portlist> - (Optional) Enter the list of port used for this configuration here.
If no parameter is specified, all ports on the Switch will be displayed.
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To display the debug STP levels on all ports:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#debug stp show flag
Command: debug stp show flag
Global State: Disabled
Port Index Event Flag BPDU Flag State Machine Flag
----------------------------------------------------------
1 Disabled Disabled Disabled
2 Disabled Disabled Disabled
3 Disabled Disabled Disabled
4 Disabled Disabled Disabled
5 Disabled Disabled Disabled
6 Disabled Disabled Disabled
7 Disabled Disabled Disabled
8 Disabled Disabled Disabled
9 Disabled Disabled Disabled
10 Disabled Disabled Disabled
11 Disabled Disabled Disabled
12 Disabled Disabled Disabled
13 Disabled Disabled Disabled
14 Disabled Disabled Disabled
15 Disabled Disabled Disabled
16 Disabled Disabled Disabled
17 Disabled Disabled Disabled
18 Disabled Disabled Disabled
19 Disabled Disabled Disabled
20 Disabled Disabled Disabled
21 Disabled Disabled Disabled
22 Disabled Disabled Disabled
23 Disabled Disabled Disabled
24 Disabled Disabled Disabled
25 Disabled Disabled Disabled
26 Disabled Disabled Disabled
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
54-4 debug stp show counter
Description
This command is used to display the STP counters.
Format debug stp show counter {ports [<portlist> | all]}
511
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Parameters
ports - (Optional) Specify the STP ports for display.
<portlist> - Enter the list of port used for this configuration here.
all - Display all port’s counters.
If no parameter is specified, display the global counters.
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To show the STP counters for port 9:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#debug stp show counter ports 9
Command: debug stp show counter ports 9
STP Counters
--------------------------------------
Port 9 :
Receive: Transmit:
Total STP Packets : 0 Total STP Packets : 0
Configuration BPDU : 0 Configuration BPDU : 0
TCN BPDU : 0 TCN BPDU : 0
RSTP TC-Flag : 0 RSTP TC-Flag : 0
RST BPDU : 0 RST BPDU : 0
Discard:
Total Discarded BPDU : 0
Global STP Disabled : 0
Port STP Disabled : 0
Invalid packet Format : 0
Invalid Protocol : 0
Configuration BPDU Length : 0
TCN BPDU Length : 0
RST BPDU Length : 0
Invalid Type : 0
Invalid Timers : 0
CTRL+C ESC q Quit SPACE n Next Page p Previous Page r Refresh
54-5 debug stp clear counter
Description
This command is used to clear the STP counters.
Format debug stp clear counter {ports[<portlist> | all]}
Parameters
ports - (Optional)Specify the port range.
<portlist> - Enter the list of port used for this configuration here.
512
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
all - Clears all port counters.
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To clear all STP counters on the Switch:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#debug stp clear counter ports all
Command: debug stp clear counter ports all
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
54-6 debug stp state
Description
This command is used to enable or disable the STP debug state.
Format debug stp state [enable | disable]
Parameters
enable - Enables the STP debug state.
disable - Disables the STP debug state.
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To configure the STP debug state to enable, and then disable the STP debug state:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#debug stp state enable
Command: debug stp state enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#debug stp state disable
Command: debug stp state disable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
513
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 55 Multicast Filter Command List
create mcast_filter_profile {[ipv4 | ipv6]} profile_id <value 1-24> profile_name <name 1-32>
config mcast_filter_profile [profile_id <value 1-24> | profile_name <name 1-32> ] {profile_name <name 1-32> |
[add | delete] <mcast_address_list>}(1)
config mcast_filter_profile ipv6 [profile_id <value 1-24> | profile_name <name 1-32> ] {profile_name <name 1-
32> | [add | delete] <mcastv6_address_list>}(1)
delete mcast_filter_profile {[ipv4 | ipv6]} [profile_id [<value 1-24> | all] | profile_name <name 1-32>]
show mcast_filter_profile {[ipv4 | ipv6]} {[profile_id <value 1-24> | profile_name <name 1-32>]}
config limited_multicast_addr [ports <portlist> | vlanid <vlanid_list>] {[ipv4 | ipv6]} { [add | delete] [profile_id
<value 1-24> | profile_name <name 1-32>] | access [permit | deny]}
config max_mcast_group [ports <portlist> | vlanid <vlanid_list] {[ipv4 | ipv6]} {max_group [<value 1-1024> | infinite] | action [ drop | replace]}(1)
show max_mcast_group [ports <portlist> | vlanid <vlanid_list>] {[ipv4 | ipv6]}
show limited_multicast_addr [ports <portlist> | vlanid <vlanid_list>] {[ipv4 | ipv6]}
config cpu_filter l3_control_pkt <portlist> [{dvmrp|pim|igmp_query |ospf | rip | vrrp} | all] state [enable | disable]
show cpu_filter l3_control_pkt ports {<portlist>}
config control_pkt [ipv4 [{igmp | vrrp | rip | pim | dvmrp | ospf}(1) | all] | ipv6 [{mld | pim | ospf | ripng | nd}(1) | all]] replace {priority [<value 0-7> | none] | dscp [<value 0-63> | none]}(1)
show control_pkt {[ipv4| ipv6]}
55-1 create mcast_filter_profile
Description
This command is used to configure a multicast address profile. Multiple ranges of multicast addresses can be defined in the profile. If the IPv4 or ipv6 option is not specified, IPv4 is implied.
Format create mcast_filter_profile {[ipv4 | ipv6]} profile_id <value 1-24> profile_name <name 1-32>
Parameters
ipv4 - (Optional) Adds an IPv4 multicast profile.
ipv6 - (Optional) Adds an IPv6 multicast profile.
profile_id - The ID of the profile.
<value 1-24> - Enter the profile ID value here. This value must be between 1 and 24.
profile_name - Provides a meaningful description for the profile.
<name 1-32> - Enter the profile name here. The profile name can be up to 32 characters long.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To create a multicast address profile with a profile ID of 2 and a profile name of MOD:
514
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#create mcast_filter_profile profile_id 2 profile_name MOD
Command: create mcast_filter_profile profile_id 2 profile_name MOD
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
55-2 config mcast_filter_profile
Description
This command is used to add or delete a range of multicast IP addresses to or from the profile.
Format config mcast_filter_profile [profile_id <value 1-24> | profile_name <name 1-32> ] {profile_name <name 1-
32> | [add | delete] <mcast_address_list>}(1)
Parameters
profile_id - ID of the profile.
<value 1-24> - Enter the profile ID value here. This value must be between 1 and 24.
profile_name - Provides a meaningful description for the profile.
<name 1-32> - Enter the profile name here. The profile name can be up to 32 characters long.
profile_name - (Optional) Provides a meaningful description for the profile.
<name 1-32> - Enter the profile name here. The profile name can be up to 32 characters long.
add - (Optional) Specify to add a multicast address.
delete - (Optional) Specify to delete a multicast address.
<mcast_address_list> - (Optional) List of the multicast addresses to be put in the profile. You can either specify a single multicast IP address or a range of multicast addresses using “-“.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To add the multicast address range 225.1.1.1 to 225.1.1.10 to the profile:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config mcast_filter_profile profile_id 2 add 225.1.1.1 - 225.1.1.10
Command: config mcast_filter_profile profile_id 2 add 225.1.1.1 - 225.1.1.10
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
55-3 config mcast_filter_profile ipv6
Description
This command is used to add or delete a range of IPv6 multicast addresses to the profile.
Format config mcast_filter_profile ipv6 [profile_id <value 1-24> | profile_name <name 1-32> ] {profile_name <name
1-32> | [add | delete] <mcastv6_address_list>}(1)
515
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Parameters
profile_id - ID of the profile.
<value 1-24> - Enter the profile ID value here. This value must be between 1 and 24.
profile_name - Provides a meaningful description for the profile.
<name 1-32> - Enter the profile name here. The profile name can be up to 32 characters long.
profile_name - (Optional) Provides a meaningful description for the profile.
<name 1-32> - Enter the profile name here. The profile name can be up to 32 characters long.
add - (Optional) Specify to add an IPv6 multicast address.
delete - (Optional) Specify to delete an IPv6 multicast address.
<mcastv6_address_list> - (Optional) Enter a single IPv6 multicast IP address or a range of IPv6 multicast addresses This lists the IPv6 multicast addresses to put in the profile.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To add the IPv6 multicast address range FFF0E::100:0:0:20 – FFF0E::100:0:0:22 to profile ID 3:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config mcast_filter_profile ipv6 profile_id 3 add FF0E::100:0:0:20–
FFF0E::100:0:0:22
Command: config mcast_filter_profile ipv6 profile_id 3 add FF0E::100:0:0:20–
FFF0E::100:0:0:22
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
55-4 delete mcast_filter_profile
Description
This command is used to delete a multicast address profile. If the IPv4 or IPv6 option is not specified, IPv4 is implied.
Format delete mcast_filter_profile {[ipv4 | ipv6]} [profile_id [<value 1-24> | all] | profile_name <name 1-32>]
Parameters
ipv4 - (Optional) Specify to delete an IPv4 multicast profile.
ipv6 - (Optional) Specify to delete an IPv6 multicast profile.
profile_id - Specify the ID of the profile
<value 1-24> - Enter the profile ID value here. This value must be between 1 and 24.
all - All multicast address profiles will be deleted.
profile_name - Specify to display a profile based on the profile name.
<name 1-32> - Enter the profile name value here. The profile name can be up to 32 characters long.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To delete the multicast address profile with a profile ID of 3:
516
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#delete mcast_filter_profile profile_id 3
Command: delete mcast_filter_profile profile_id 3
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To delete the multicast address profile called MOD:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#delete mcast_filter_profile profile_name MOD
Command: delete mcast_filter_profile profile_name MOD
Total entries: 2
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
55-5 show mcast_filter_profile
Description
This command is used to display the defined multicast address profiles. If the IPv4 or IPv6 option is not specified,
IPv4 is implied.
Format show mcast_filter_profile {[ipv4 | ipv6]} {[profile_id <value 1-24> | profile_name <name 1-32>]}
Parameters
ipv4 - (Optional) Specify to display an IPv4 multicast profile.
ipv6 - (Optional) Specify to display an IPv6 multicast profile.
profile_id - (Optional) Specify the ID of the profile
<value 1-24> - Enter the profile ID value here. This value must be between 1 and 24.
profile_name - (Optional) Specify to display a profile based on the profile name.
<name 1-32> - Enter the profile name here. The profile name can be up to 32 characters long.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display all the defined multicast address profiles:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show mcast_filter_profile
Command: show mcast_filter_profile
Profile ID Name Multicast Addresses
---- ---------------- ---------------- ----------------
1 MOD 234.1.1.1 - 238.244.244.244
234.1.1.1 - 238.244.244.244
2 customer 224.19.62.34 - 224.19.162.200
Total Entries : 2
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
517
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
55-6 config limited_multicast_addr
Description
This command is used to configure the multicast address filtering function on a port or VLAN. When there are no profiles specified with a port or VLAN, the limited function is not effective. When the function is configured on a port, it limits the multicast group operated by the IGMP or MLD snooping function. When this function is configured on a
VLAN, the multicast group is limited to only operate the IGMP or MLD layer 3 functions. If the IPv4 or IPv6 option is not specified, IPv4 is implied.
Format config limited_multicast_addr [ports <portlist> | vlanid <vlanid_list>] {[ipv4 | ipv6]} {[add | delete]
[profile_id <value 1-24> | profile_name <name 1-32> ] | access [permit | deny]}
Parameters
ports - Specify the range of ports to configure the multicast address filtering function.
<portlist> - Enter the list of port to be configured here.
vlanid - Specify the VLAN ID of the VLAN that the multicast address filtering function will be configured on.
<vlanid_list> - Enter the VLAN ID list here.
ipv4 - (Optional) Specify the IPv4 multicast profile.
ipv6 - (Optional) Specify the IPv6 multicast profile.
add - (Optional) Adds a multicast address profile to a port.
delete - (Optional) Deletes a multicast address profile to a port.
profile_id - (Optional) A profile to be added to or deleted from the port.
<value 1-24> - Enter the profile ID value here. This value must be between 1 and 24.
profile_name - (Optional) Specify the profile name used.
<name 1-32> - Enter the profile name here. The profile name can be up to 32 characters long.
access - (Optional) Specify the access of packets matching the addresses defined in the profiles.
permit - Specify that packets matching the addresses defined in the profiles will be permitted. The default mode is permit.
deny - Specify that packets matching the addresses defined in the profiles will be denied.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To add multicast address profile 2 to ports 1 and 3:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config limited_multicast_addr ports 1,3 add profile_id 2
Command: config limited_multicast_addr ports 1,3 add profile_id 2
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
55-7 config max_mcast_group
Description
This command is used to configure the maximum number of multicast groups that a port can join.
If the IPv4 or IPv6 option is not specified, IPv4 is implied.
When the joined groups for a port or a VLAN have reached the maximum number, the newly learned group will be dropped if the action is specified as drop. The newly learned group will replace the eldest group if the action is specified as replace.
518
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Format config max_mcast_group [ports <portlist> | vlanid <vlanid_list] {[ipv4 | ipv6]} {max_group [<value 1-1024> | infinite] | action [ drop | replace]}(1)
Parameters
ports - Specify the range of ports to configure the max_mcast_group.
<portlist> - Enter the list of ports to be configured here.
vlanid - Specify the VLAN ID to configure max_mcast_group.
<vlanid_list> - Enter the VLAN ID list here.
ipv4 - (Optional) Specify that the maximum number of IPv4 learned addresses should be limited.
ipv6 - (Optional) Specify that the maximum number of IPv6 learned addresses should be limited.
max_group - (Optional) Specify the maximum number of multicast groups.
<value 1-1024> - Enter the maximum group value here. This value must be between 1 and 1024.
infinite - Specify that the maximum group value will be set to infinite. Infinite means that the maximum number of multicast groups per port or VLAN is not limited by the Switch.
action - (Optional) Specify the action for handling newly learned groups when the register is full.
drop - The new group will be dropped.
replace - The new group will replace the eldest group in the register table.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure the maximum number of multicast group that ports 1 and 3 can join to 100:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config max_mcast_group ports 1, 3 max_group 100
Command: config max_mcast_group ports 1, 3 max_group 100
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
55-8 show max_mcast_group
Description
This command is used to display the maximum number of multicast groups that a port can join. If the IPv4 or IPv6 option is not specified, IPv4 is implied.
Format show max_mcast_group [ports <portlist> | vlanid <vlanid_list>] {[ipv4 | ipv6]}
Parameters
ports - Specify the range of ports for displaying information about the maximum number of multicast groups that the specified ports can join.
<portlist> - Enter the list of ports to be configured here.
vlanid - Specify the VLAN ID for displaying the maximum number of multicast groups.
<vlanid_list> - Enter the VLAN ID list here.
ipv4 - (Optional) Specify to display the maximum number of IPv4 learned addresses.
ipv6 - (Optional) Specify to display the maximum number of IPv6 learned addresses.
519
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the maximum number of multicast groups that ports 1 and 2 can join:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show max_mcast_group ports 1-2
Command: show max_mcast_group ports 1-2
Port Max Multicast Group Number Action
------ ---------------------------- ---------
1 100 Drop
2 Infinite Drop
Total Entries: 2
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To display the maximum number of multicast groups that VLANs 1 and 2 can join:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show max_mcast_group vlanid 1-2
Command: show max_mcast_group vlanid 1-2
VLAN Max Multicast Group Number Action
------ ---------------------------- ---------
1 Infinite Drop
2 10 Drop
Total Entries: 2
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
55-9 show limited_multicast_addr
Description
This command is used to display the multicast address range by port or by VLAN.
When the function is configured on a port, it limits the multicast groups operated by the IGMP or MLD snooping function and layer 3 functions. When the function is configured on a VLAN, it limits the multicast groups operated by the IGMP or MLD layer 3 functions.
If the IPv4 or IPv6 option is not specified, IPv4 is implied.
Format show limited_multicast_addr [ports <portlist> | vlanid <vlanid_list>] {[ipv4 | ipv6]}
Parameters
ports - Specify the range of ports that require information displaying about the multicast address filtering function.
<portlist> - Enter the list of port to be configured here.
vlanid - Specify the VLAN ID of VLANs that require information displaying about the multicast address filtering function.
<vlanid_list> - Enter the VLAN ID list here.
ipv4 - (Optional) Specify to display the IPv4 multicast profile associated with the port.
520
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
ipv6 - (Optional) Specify to display the IPv6 multicast profile associated with the port.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show the limited multicast address range on ports 1 and 3:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show limited_multicast_addr ports 1,3
Command: show limited_multicast_addr ports 1,3
Port : 1
Access : Deny
Profile ID Name Multicast Addresses
---------- -------------------------------- -------------------------------
2 MOD 225.1.1.1-225.1.1.10
Port : 3
Access : Permit
Profile ID Name Multicast Addresses
---------- -------------------------------- -------------------------------
2 MOD 225.1.1.1-225.1.1.10
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To show the limited multicast settings configured on VLAN 1:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show limited_multicast_addr vlan 1
Command: show limited_multicast_addr vlanid 1
VLAN ID : 1
Access : Permit
Profile ID Name Multicast Addresses
---------- -------------------------------- -------------------------------
2 MOD 225.1.1.1-225.1.1.10
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
55-10 config cpu_filter l3_control_pkt
Description
This command is used to configure the port state for the Layer 3 control packet filter.
Format config cpu_filter l3_control_pkt <portlist> [{dvmrp|pim|igmp_query |ospf | rip | vrrp} | all] state [enable | disable]
521
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Parameters
<portlist> - Enter the port list to filter control packets.
dvmrp – (Optional) Specify to filter the DVMRP control packets.
pim - (Optional) Specify to filter the PIM control packets.
igmp_query - (Optional) Specify to filter the IGMP query control packets.
ospf - (Optional) Specify to filter the OSPF control packets.
rip - (Optional) Specify to filter the RIP control packets.
vrrp - (Optional) Specify to filter the VRRP control packets.
all - Specify to filter all the L3 protocol control packets.
state - Specify the filter function status. The default is disabled.
enable - Enables the filtering function.
disable - Disables the filtering function.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To filter the DVMRP control packets on ports 1 to 2:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config cpu_filter l3_control_pkt 1-2 dvmrp state enable
Command: config cpu_filter l3_control_pkt 1-2 dvmrp state enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
55-11 show cpu_filter l3_control_pkt ports
Description
This command is used to display the L3 control packet CPU filtering state.
Format show cpu_filter l3_control_pkt ports {<portlist>}
Parameters
<portlist> - (Optional) Enter the port list to display the L3 control packet CPU filtering state.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the filtering status for port 1 and 2:
522
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show cpu_filter l3_control_pkt ports 1-2
Command: show cpu_filter l3_control_pkt ports 1-2
Port IGMP Query DVMRP PIM OSPF RIP VRRP
---- ---------- -------- -------- -------- -------- --------
1 Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabl ed
2 Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabl ed
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
55-12 config control_pkt
Description
This command is used to change the priority and/or Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) fields for specific control packets which are forwarded by software.
Format config control_pkt [ipv4 [{igmp | vrrp | rip | pim | dvmrp | ospf}(1) | all] | ipv6 [{mld | pim | ospf | ripng | nd}(1)
| all]] replace {priority [<value 0-7> | none] | dscp [<value 0-63> | none]}(1)
Parameters
ipv4 - Specify IPv4 protocols.
igmp - Specify that the Switch will examine the Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) field within each packet.
vrrp - Specify that the Switch will examine the Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) field within each packet.
rip - Specify that the Switch will examine the Routing Information Protocol (RIP) field within each packet.
pim - Specify that the Switch will examine the Protocol-Independent Multicast (PIM) field within each packet.
dvmrp - Specify that the Switch will examine the Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol (DVMRP) field within each packet.
ospf - Specify that the Switch will examine the Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) field within each packet.
all - Specify that the Switch will examine all above field within each packet.
ipv6 - Specify the IPv6 protocols.
mld - Specify that the Switch will examine the Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) field within each packet.
pim - Specify that the Switch will examine the Protocol-Independent Multicast (PIM) field within each packet.
ospf - Specify that the Switch will examine the Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) field within each packet.
ripng - Specify that the Switch will examine the IP Version 6 (IPv6) Routing Information Protocol - next generation (RIPng) field within each packet.
nd - Specify that the Switch will examine the IP Version 6 (IPv6) Neighbor Discovery (ND) field within each packet.
all - Specify that the Switch will examine all above field within each packet.
replace - Specify to change the priority or DSCP.
priority - Specify the priority value
<value 0-7> - Enter the value between 0 and 7.
none - Specify not to change the priority.
dscp - Specify the DSCP.
<value 0-63> - Enter the value between 0 and 63
none - Specify not to change the DSCP.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
523
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Example
To change the priority of DVMRP packets to 3:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config control_pkt ipv4 dvmrp replace priority 3
Command: config control_pkt ipv4 dvmrp replace priority 3
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
55-13 show control_pkt
Description
This command is used to display the priority and DSCP values configured for specific control packets.
Format show control_pkt {[ipv4| ipv6]}
Parameters
ipv4 - Displays the IPv4 protocols.
ipv6 - Displays the IPv6 protocols.
If no parameter is specified the system will display all protocols.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the priority and DSCP values configured for all protocols:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show control_pkt
Command: show control_pkt
Protocol Priority DSCP
--------- -------- ------ igmp None None vrrp None None rip None None pim None None dvmrp 3 None ospf None None mld None None ipv6 pim None None ipv6 ospf None None ripng None None nd None None
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
524
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 56 Multicast VLAN Command List
enable igmp_snooping multicast_vlan enable mld_snooping multicast_vlan disable igmp_snooping multicast_vlan disable mld_snooping multicast_vlan
create igmp_snooping multicast_vlan <vlan_name 32> <vlanid 2-4094> {remap_priority [<value 0-7> | none]
{replace_priority}}
create igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile <profile_name 1-32>
create mld_snooping multicast_vlan <vlan_name 32> <vlanid 2-4094> {remap_priority [<value 0-7> | none]
{replace_priority}}
create mld_snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile <profile_name 1-32>
config igmp_snooping multicast_vlan <vlan_name 32> {[add | delete] [member_port <portlist> | [source_port
<portlist> | untag_source_port <portlist>] | tag_member_port <portlist>] | state [enable | disable] | replace_source_ip <ipaddr> | remap_priority [<value 0-7> | none] {replace_priority}}(1)
config igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile <profile_name 1-32> [add | delete]
<mcast_address_list>
config igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group <vlan_name 32> [add | delete] profile_name <profile_name 1-
32>
config igmp_snooping multicast_vlan forward_unmatched [disable | enable]
config mld_snooping multicast_vlan <vlan_name 32> {[add | delete] [member_port <portlist> | [source_port
<portlist> | untag_source_port <portlist>] | tag_member_port <portlist>] | state [enable | disable] | replace_source_ipv6 <ipv6addr> | remap_priority [<value 0-7> | none] {replace_priority}}
config mld_snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile <profile_name 1-32> [add | delete]
<mcastv6_address_list>
config mld_snooping multicast_vlan_group <vlan_name 32> [add | delete] profile_name <profile_name 1-32>
config mld_snooping multicast_vlan forward_unmatched [disable | enable]
delete igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile [profile_name <profile_name 1-32> | all]
delete igmp_snooping multicast_vlan <vlan_name 32>
delete mld_snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile [profile_name <profile_name 1-32> | all]
delete mld_snooping multicast_vlan <vlan_name 32>
show igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile {< profile_name 1-32>}
show igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group {<vlan_name 32>}
show igmp_snooping multicast_vlan {<vlan_name 32>}
show mld_snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile {<profile_name 1-32>}
show mld_snooping multicast_vlan_group {<vlan_name 32>}
show mld_snooping multicast_vlan {<vlan_name 32>}
56-1 enable igmp_snooping multicast_vlan
Description
This command is used to control the status of the multicast VLAN function.
Format enable igmp_snooping multicast_vlan
Parameters
None.
525
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To enable the IGMP snooping multicast VLAN function globally:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#enable igmp_snooping multicast_vlan
Command: enable igmp_snooping multicast_vlan
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
56-2 enable mld_snooping multicast_vlan
Description
This command is used to enable the MLD snooping multicast VLAN function. By default, the multicast VLAN is disabled.
Format enable mld_snooping multicast_vlan
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To enable MLD snooping multicast VLAN:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#enable mld_snooping multicast_vlan
Command: enable mld_snooping multicast_vlan
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
56-3 disable igmp_snooping multicast_vlan
Description
This command is used to disable the IGMP multicast VLAN function. The command disable igmp_snooping is used to disable the ordinary IGMP snooping function. By default, the multicast VLAN is disabled.
Format disable igmp_snooping multicast_vlan
526
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To disable the IGMP snooping multicast VLAN function:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#disable igmp_snooping multicast_vlan
Command: disable igmp_snooping multicast_vlan
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
56-4 disable mld_snooping multicast_vlan
Description
This command is used to disable the MLD snooping multicast VLAN function. By default, the multicast VLAN is disabled.
Format disable mld_snooping multicast_vlan
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To disable MLD snooping multicast VLAN:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#disable mld_snooping multicast_vlan
Command: disable mld_snooping multicast_vlan
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
56-5 create igmp_snooping multicast_vlan
Description
This command is used to create a multicast VLAN and implements relevant parameters as specified. More than one multicast VLANs can be configured. The maximum number of configurable VLANs is 5.
Newly created IGMP snooping multicast VLANs must use a unique VLAN ID and name, i.e. they cannot use the
VLAN ID or name of any existing 802.1Q VLAN.
527
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Also keep in mind the following conditions:
• Multicast VLANs cannot be configured or displayed using 802.1Q VLAN commands.
• An IP interface cannot be bound to a multicast VLAN.
• The multicast VLAN snooping function co-exists with the 802.1Q VLAN snooping function.
Format create igmp_snooping multicast_vlan <vlan_name 32> <vlanid 2-4094> {remap_priority [<value 0-7> | none]
{replace_priority}}
Parameters
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the multicast VLAN here. The VLAN name can be up to 32 characters long.
<vlanid 2-4094> - Enter the multicast VLAN ID to be created. This value must be between 2 and 4094.
remap_priority - (Optional) The remap priority (0 to 7) to be associated with the data traffic to be forwarded on the multicast VLAN. If none is specified, the packet’s original priority will be used. The default setting is none.
<value 0-7> - Enter the remap priority value here. This value must be between 0 and 7.
none - Specify that the remap priority value will be set to none.
replace_priority - (Optional) Specify that packet’s priority will be changed by the Switch, based on the remap priority. This flag will only take effect when the remap priority is set.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To create an IGMP snooping multicast VLAN with the VLAN name mv1 and the VID 2:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#create igmp_snoop multicast_vlan mv1 2
Command: create igmp_snoop multicast_vlan mv1 2
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
56-6 create igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile
Description
This command is used to create an IGMP snooping multicast group profile on the Switch.
Format create igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile <profile_name 1-32>
Parameters
<profile_name 1-32> - Enter the multicast VLAN group profile name here. The name can be up to 32 characters long.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
528
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Example
To create an IGMP snooping multicast group profile with the name “test”:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#create igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile test
Command: create igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile test
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
56-7 create mld_snooping multicast_vlan
Description
This command is used to create an MLD snooping multicast VLAN and implements relevant parameters as specified. More than one multicast VLAN can be configured. Newly created MLD snooping multicast VLANs must use a unique VLAN ID and name, i.e. they cannot use the VLAN ID or name of any existing 802.1Q VLAN. Also keep in mind the following conditions: multicast VLANs cannot be configured or displayed using 802.1Q VLAN commands; an IP interface cannot be bound to a multicast VLAN; and the multicast VLAN snooping function coexists with the 802.1Q VLAN snooping function.
Format create mld_snooping multicast_vlan <vlan_name 32> <vlanid 2-4094> {remap_priority [<value 0-7> | none]
{replace_priority}}
Parameters
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the name of the multicast VLAN to be created. Each multicast VLAN is given a name that can be up to 32 characters.
<vlanid 2-4094> - Enter the VLAN ID of the multicast VLAN to be created. The range is from 2 to 4094.
remap_priority - (Optional) Specify the remap priority here.
<value 0-7> - Enter the remap priority (0 to 7) to be associated with the data traffic to be forwarded on the multicast VLAN.
none - If none is specified, the packet’s original priority will be used. The default setting is none.
replace_priority - (Optional) Specify that the packet’s priority will be changed by the switch, based on the remap priority. This flag will only take effect when the remap priority is set.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To create an MLD snooping multicast VLAN with the VLAN name mv1 and the VID 2:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#create mld_snooping multicast_vlan mv1 2
Command: create mld_snooping multicast_vlan mv1 2
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
529
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
56-8 create mld_snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile
Description
This command is used to create a multicast group profile. The profile name for MLD snooping must be unique.
Format create mld_snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile <profile_name 1-32>
Parameters
<profile_name 1-32> - Enter the multicast VLAN profile name. The maximum length is 32 characters.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To create an MLD snooping multicast group profile with the name “Knicks”:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#create mld_snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile Knicks
Command: create mld_snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile Knicks
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
56-9 config igmp_snooping multicast_vlan
Description
This command is used to add member ports and source ports to a list of multicast VLAN member ports. Member ports automatically become untagged members of the multicast VLAN and source ports automatically become tagged members of the multicast VLAN. However, member ports of one multicast VLAN are allowed to overlap with member ports on a different multicast VLAN.
A multicast VLAN must first be created using the create igmp_snooping multicast_vlan command before the multicast VLAN can be configured.
Format config igmp_snooping multicast_vlan <vlan_name 32> {[add | delete] [member_port <portlist> |
[source_port <portlist> | untag_source_port <portlist>] | tag_member_port <portlist>] | state
[enable|disable] | replace_source_ip <ipaddr> | remap_priority [<value 0-7> | none] {replace_priority}}(1)
Parameters
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the multicast VLAN here. The VLAN name can be up to 32 characters long.
add - Specify that the port will be added to the specified multicast VLAN.
delete - Specify that the port will be deleted from the specified multicast VLAN.
member_port - A member port or range of member ports to be added to the multicast VLAN. The specified range of ports will become untagged members of the multicast VLAN.
<portlist> - Enter the list of port to be configured here.
source_port - A port or range of ports to be added to the multicast VLAN.
<portlist> - Enter the list of port to be configured here.
untag_source_port - Specify the source port or range of source ports as untagged members of the multicast
VLAN. The PVID of the untagged source port is automatically changed to the multicast VLAN. Source ports
530
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide must be either tagged or untagged for any single multicast VLAN, i.e. both types cannot be members of the same multicast VLAN.
<portlist> - Enter the list of port to be configured here.
tag_member_port - Specify the port or range of ports that will become tagged members of the multicast VLAN.
<portlist> - Enter the list of port to be configured here.
state - Specify that the multicast VLAN for a chosen VLAN should be enabled or disabled.
enable - Specify to enable the multicast VLAN for a chosen VLAN.
disable - Specify to disable the multicast VLAN for a chosen VLAN.
replace_source_ip - Before forwarding the report packet sent by the host, the source IP address in the join packet must be replaced by this IP address. If 0.0.0.0 is specified, the source IP address will not be replaced.
<ipaddr> - Enter the replace source IP address here.
remap_priority - The remap priority value to be associated with the data traffic to be forwarded on the multicast
VLAN. If none is specified, the packet’s original priority is used. The default setting is none.
<value 0-7> - Enter the remap priority value here. This value must be between 0 and 7.
none - Specify that the remap priority value will be set to none.
replace_priority - (Optional) Specify that the packet priority will be changed to the remap_priority, but only if remap_priority is set.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure an IGMP snooping multicast VLAN with the name “v1”, make ports 1 and 3 members of the VLAN, and set the state to enable:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config igmp_snooping multicast_vlan mv1 add member_port 1,3 state enable
Command: config igmp_snooping multicast_vlan mv1 add member_port 1,3 state enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
56-10 config igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile
Description
This command is used to configure an IGMP snooping multicast group profile on the Switch and add or delete multicast addresses for the profile.
Format config igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile <profile_name 1-32> [add | delete]
<mcast_address_list>
Parameters
<profile_name 1-32> - Enter the multicast VLAN group name here. This name can be up to 32 characters long.
add - Adds a multicast address list to or from this multicast VLAN profile.
delete - Deletes a multicast address list to or from this multicast VLAN profile.
<mcast_address_list> - Enter the multicast VLAN IP address here. It can be a continuous single multicast address, such as 225.1.1.1, 225.1.1.3, 225.1.1.8, a multicast address range, such as 225.1.1.1-225.2.2.2, or both of types, such as 225.1.1.1, 225.1.1.18-225.1.1.20.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
531
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Example
To add the single multicast address 225.1.1.1 to the IGMP snooping multicast VLAN profile named “test”:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile test add 225.1.1.1
Command: config igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile test add 225.1.1.1
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
56-11 config igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group
Description
This command is used to configure the multicast group learned with the specific multicast VLAN. The following cases can be considered for examples:
• Case 0 - If the IGMP Snooping is enabled on the VLAN of the join packet, the multicast VLAN won't process the packet.
• Case 1 - The multicast group is not configured, multicast VLANs do not have any member ports overlapping and the join packet received by the member port is learned on only the multicast VLAN that this port is a member of.
• Case 2 - The join packet is learned with the multicast VLAN that contains the destination multicast group. If the destination multicast group of the join packet cannot be classified into any multicast VLAN to which this port belongs, it will be forwarded or dropped according to forward unmatched mode.
Note that a profile cannot overlap in different multicast VLANs. Multiple profiles can be added to a multicast VLAN.
Format config igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group <vlan_name 32> [add | delete] profile_name <profile_name 1-
32>
Parameters
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the multicast VLAN name here. The VLAN name can be up to 32 characters long.
add - Specify to associate a profile to a multicast VLAN.
delete - Specify to de-associate a profile from a multicast VLAN.
profile_name - Specify the multicast VLAN profile name.
<profile_name 1-32> - Enter the multicast VLAN profile name here. The name can be up to 32 characters long.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To add an IGMP snooping profile to a multicast VLAN group with the name “v1”:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group v1 add profile_name channel_1
Command: config igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group v1 add profile_name channel_1
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
532
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
56-12 config igmp_snooping multicast_vlan forward_unmatched
Description
This command is used to configure the forwarding mode for multicast VLAN unmatched packets. When the Switch receives an IGMP snooping packet, it will match the packet against the multicast profile to determine which multicast VLAN to associate with. If the packet does not match all profiles, the packet will be forwarded or dropped based on this setting.
By default, the packet will be dropped.
Format config igmp_snooping multicast_vlan forward_unmatched [disable | enable]
Parameters
enable - The packet will be flooded on the VLAN.
disable - The packet will be dropped.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure the forwarding mode for multicast VLAN unmatched packets：
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config igmp_snooping multicast_vlan forward_unmatched enable
Command: config igmp_snooping multicast_vlan forward_unmatched enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
56-13 config mld_snooping multicast_vlan
Description
This command is used to configure MLD snooping multicast VLAN parameters. The member port list and source port list cannot overlap. However, the member port of one multicast VLAN can overlap with another multicast
VLAN. The multicast VLAN must be created first using the create mld_snooping multicast_vlan command before the multicast VLAN can be configured.
Format config mld_snooping multicast_vlan <vlan_name 32> {[add | delete] [member_port <portlist> |
[source_port <portlist> | untag_source_port <portlist>] | tag_member_port <portlist>] | state [enable | disable] | replace_source_ipv6 <ipv6addr> | remap_priority [<value 0-7> | none] {replace_priority}}(1)
Parameters
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the name of the multicast VLAN to be configured. Each multicast VLAN is given a name that can be up to 32 characters.
add - Specify to add a port.
delete - Specify to delete a port.
member_port - Specify member port of the multicast VLAN. The specified range of ports will become untagged members of the multicast VLAN.
<portlist> - Enter a range of ports to be configured.
533
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
source_port - Specify source port where the multicast traffic is entering the Switch.
<portlist> - Enter a range of ports to be configured.
untag_source_port - Specify the untagged source port where the multicast traffic is entering the Switch. The
PVID of the untagged source port is automatically changed to the multicast VLAN. Source ports must be either tagged or untagged for any single multicast VLAN, i.e. both types cannot be members of the same multicast
VLAN
<portlist> - Enter a range of ports to be configured.
tag_member_port - Specify the tagged member port of the multicast VLAN.
<portlist> - Enter a range of ports to be configured.
state - Specify if the multicast VLAN for a chosen VLAN should be enabled or disabled.
enable - Enable multicast VLAN for the chosen VLAN.
disable - Disable multicast VLAN for the chosen VLAN.
replace_source_ipv6 - With the MLD snooping function, the MLD report packet sent by the host will be forwarded to the source port. Before forwarding of the packet, the source IP address in the join packet needs to be replaced by this IP address. If none is specified, the source IP address will not be replaced.
<ipv6addr> - Enter the IP address here.
remap_priority - Specify the remap priority here.
<value 0-7> - Enter a remap priority value (0 to 7) to be associated with the data traffic forwarded on the multicast VLAN.
none - If none is specified, the packet’s original priority is used. The default setting is none.
replace_priority - (Optional) Specify that the packet priority will be changed to the remap priority, when remap priority is set.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure an MLD snooping multicast VLAN with the name “v1”, make ports 1 and 3 members of the VLAN, and set the state to enable:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config mld_snooping multicast_vlan v1 add member_port 1,3 state enable
Command: config mld_snooping multicast_vlan v1 add member_port 1,3 state enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
56-14 config mld_snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile
Description
This command is used to configure an MLD snooping multicast group profile on the switch.
Format config mld_snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile <profile_name 1-32> [add | delete]
<mcastv6_address_list>
Parameters
<profile_name 32> - Enter the multicast VLAN profile name. The maximum length is 32 characters.
add - Specify to add a multicast address list to this multicast VLAN profile.
delete - Specify to delete a multicast address list from this multicast VLAN profile.
<mcastv6_address_list> - Enter a multicast address list. This can be a continuous single multicast address, such as FF1E::1, FF1E::2, a multicast address range, such as FF1E::3-FF1E::9, or both types, such as
FF1E::11, FF1E::12-FF1E::20.
534
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To add the single multicast address FF1E::11 and multicast range FF1E::12-FF1E::20 to the MLD snooping multicast VLAN profile named “Knicks”:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config mld_snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile Knicks add FF1E::11,
FF1E::12-FF1E::20
Command: config mld_snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile Knicks add FF1E::11, FF1E::12-
FF1E::20
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
56-15 config mld_snooping multicast_vlan_group
Description
This command is used to configure the multicast group which is used with the specific multicast VLAN. The following two cases can be considered as examples:
Case 1 - The multicast group is not configured, multicast VLANs do not have any member ports overlapping and the packets that are received by the member port is used only by the multicast VLAN that this port is a member of.
Case 2 - The packets are used with the multicast VLAN which contains the destination multicast group. If the destination multicast group of the added packets cannot be classified into any multicast VLAN (to which this port belongs), then the added packets will be used on the natural VLAN of the packet.
Note: A profile cannot overlap in different multicast VLANs. Multiple profiles can be added to a multicast VLAN.
Format config mld_snooping multicast_vlan_group <vlan_name 32> [add | delete] profile_name <profile_name 1-
32>
Parameters
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the name of the multicast VLAN to be configured, each multicast VLAN is given a name that can be up to 32 characters.
add - Specify to be used to associate a profile to a multicast VLAN.
delete - Specify to de-associate a profile from a multicast VLAN.
profile_name – Specify to add a multicast VLAN profile name.
<profile_name 1-32> - The name of the MLD multicast VLAN group profile to be associated or de- associated to the specified multicast VLAN.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure the forwarding mode for MLD snooping multicast VLAN unmatched packets:
535
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# config igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group v1 add profile_name channel_1
Command: config igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group v1 add profile_name channel_1
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
56-16 config mld_snooping multicast_vlan forward_unmatched
Description
This command is used to configure the forwarding mode for MLD snooping multicast VLAN unmatched packets.
When the switch receives an MLD snooping packet, it will match the packet against the multicast profile to determine which multicast VLAN to associate with. If the packet does not match all profiles, the packet will be forwarded in the natural VLAN of the packet, or dropped based on this setting. By default, the packet will be dropped.
Format config mld_snooping multicast_vlan forward_unmatched [disable | enable]
Parameters
disable - The packet will be dropped.
enable - The packet will be flooded on the VLAN.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure the forwarding mode for MLD snooping multicast VLAN unmatched packets:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config mld_snooping multicast_vlan forward_unmatched enable
Command: config mld_snooping multicast_vlan forward_unmatched enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
56-17 delete igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile
Description
This command is used to delete an IGMP snooping multicast group profile on the Switch. Specify a profile name to delete it. Specify all to remove all profiles along with the groups that belong to that profile.
Format delete igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile [profile_name <profile_name 1-32> | all]
Parameters
profile_name - Specify the multicast VLAN profile name.
<profile_name 1-32> - Enter the multicast VLAN profile name here. This name can be up to 32 characters long.
536
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
all - Specify to delete all the multicast VLAN profiles.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To delete an IGMP snooping multicast group profile with the name “MOD”:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#delete igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile profile_name MOD
Command: delete igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile profile_name MOD
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
56-18 delete igmp_snooping multicast_vlan
Description
This command is used to delete an IGMP snooping multicast VLAN.
Format delete igmp_snooping multicast_vlan <vlan_name 32>
Parameters
<vlan_name 32> -Enter the VLAN name here. The VLAN name can be up to 32 characters long.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To delete an IGMP snooping multicast VLAN called “v1”:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#delete igmp_snooping multicast_vlan v1
Command: delete igmp_snooping multicast_vlan v1
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
56-19 delete mld_snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile
Description
This command is used to delete an existing MLD snooping multicast group profile on the switch. Specify a profile name to delete it.
Format delete mld_snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile [profile_name <profile_name 1-32> | all]
537
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Parameters
profile_name - Specify the multicast VLAN group profile name. The maximum length is 32 characters.
<profile_name 1-32> - Enter the multicast VLAN group profile name. The profile name can be up to 32 characters long.
all - Specify to delete all the profiles.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To delete an MLD snooping multicast group profile named “Knicks”:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#delete mld_snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile profile_name Knicks
Command: delete mld_snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile profile_name Knicks
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
56-20 delete mld_snooping multicast_vlan
Description
This command is used to delete an MLD snooping multicast VLAN.
Format delete mld_snooping multicast_vlan <vlan_name 32>
Parameters
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the name of the multicast deleted VLAN.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To delete an MLD snooping multicast VLAN called “v1”:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#delete mld_snooping multicast_vlan v1
Command: delete mld_snooping multicast_vlan v1
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
538
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
56-21 show igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile
Description
This command is used to show the IGMP snooping multicast group profiles.
Format show igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile {< profile_name 1-32>}
Parameters
<profile_name 1-32> - (Optional) Enter the multicast VLAN group profile name here. The name can be up to 32 characters long.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display all IGMP snooping multicast VLAN profiles:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile
Command: show igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile
Profile Name Multicast Addresses
--------------------- --------------------------------
MOD 234.1.1.1 - 238.244.244.244
239.1.1.1 - 239.2.2.2
Customer 224.19.62.34 - 224.19.162.200
Total Entries : 2
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
56-22 show igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group
Description
This command is used to show an IGMP snooping multicast VLAN group.
Format show igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group {<vlan_name 32>}
Parameters
<vlan_name 32> - (Optional) Enter the VLAN name here. The VLAN name can be up to 32 characters long.
Restrictions
None.
539
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Example
To show all IGMP snooping multicast VLAN groups setup on the Switch:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group
Command: show igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group
VLAN Name VLAN ID Multicast Group Profiles
------------------------------- ------- --------------------------------- mv1 2 test
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
56-23 show igmp_snooping multicast_vlan
Description
This command is used to display information for IGMP snooping multicast VLANs.
Format show igmp_snooping multicast_vlan {<vlan_name 32>}
Parameters
<vlan_name 32> - (Optional) Enter the VLAN name here. The VLAN name can be up to 32 characters long.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display all IGMP snooping multicast VLANs:
540
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show igmp_snooping multicast_vlan
Command: show igmp_snooping multicast_vlan
IGMP Multicast VLAN Global State : Disabled
IGMP Multicast VLAN Forward Unmatched : Disabled
VLAN Name
VID
Member(Untagged) Ports
Tagged Member Ports
Source Ports
Untagged Source Ports
Status
Replace Source IP
Remap Priority
Total Entries: 1
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
: test
: 100
: 1
:
: 3
:
: Disabled
: 0.0.0.0
: None
56-24 show mld_snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile
Description
This command is used to display an MLD snooping multicast group profile.
Format show mld_snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile {<profile_name 1-32>}
Parameters
<profile_name 1-32> - (Optional) Enter the multicast VLAN profile name. The maximum length is 32 characters.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display all MLD snooping multicast VLAN profiles:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show mld_snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile
Command: show mld_snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile
Profile Name Multicast Addresses
----------------------- -------------------------------- rock FF1E::1
FF1E::10-FF1E::20
Total Entries : 1
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
541
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
56-25 show mld_snooping multicast_vlan_group
Description
This command is used to allow group profile information for a specific multicast VLAN to be displayed.
Format show mld_snooping multicast_vlan_group {<vlan_name 32>}
Parameters
<vlan_name 32> - (Optional) Enter the name of the group profile’s multicast VLAN to be displayed.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display all MLD snooping multicast VLANs’ group profile information:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show mld_snooping multicast_vlan_group
Command: show mld_snooping multicast_vlan_group
VLAN Name VLAN ID Multicast Group Profiles
------------------------------- ------- --------------------------------- test2 20 test1 100
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
56-26 show mld_snooping multicast_vlan
Description
This command is used to allow information for a specific multicast VLAN to be displayed.
Format show mld_snooping multicast_vlan {<vlan_name 32>}
Parameters
<vlan_name 32> - (Optional) Enter the name of the multicast VLAN to be displayed.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display all MLD snooping multicast VLANs:
542
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show mld_snooping multicast_vlan
Command: show mld_snooping multicast_vlan
MLD Multicast VLAN Global State : Disabled
MLD Multicast VLAN Forward Unmatched : Disabled
VLAN Name :test
VID :100
Member(Untagged) Ports :1
Tagged Member Ports :
Source Ports :3
Untagged Source Ports :
Status :Disabled
Replace Source IP :::
Remap Priority :None
Total Entries: 1
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
543
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 57 Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol
(MSTP) Command List
enable stp disable stp
config stp {maxage <value 6-40> | maxhops <value 6-40> | hellotime <value 1-2> | forwarddelay <value 4-30> | txholdcount <value 1-10> | fbpdu [enable | disable] | nni_bpdu_addr [dot1d | dot1ad]} show stp
create stp instance_id <value 1-7>
config stp instance_id <value 1-7> [add_vlan | remove_vlan] <vidlist>
delete stp instance_id <value 1-7>
config stp mst_config_id {revision_level <int 0-65535> | name <string>} show stp mst_config_id
config stp mst_ports <portlist> instance_id <value 0-7> { internalCost [auto | <value 1-200000000>] | priority
<value 0-240>}
config stp ports <portlist> {externalCost [auto | <value 1-200000000>] | hellotime <value 1-2> | migrate [yes | no]
|edge [true | false | auto] | p2p [true | false | auto] | state [enable | disable] | restricted_role [true | false] | restricted_tcn [true | false] | fbpdu [enable | disable]}
show stp ports {<portlist>}
config stp priority <value 0-61440> instance_id <value 0-7>
config stp version [mstp | rstp | stp]
show stp instance {<value 0-7>}
57-1 enable stp
Description
This command is used to enable STP globally.
Format enable stp
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To enable STP:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#enable stp
Command: enable stp
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
544
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
57-2 disable stp
Description
This command is used to disable STP globally.
Format disable stp
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To disable STP:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#disable stp
Command: disable stp
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
57-3 config stp
Description
This command is used to configure the bridge parameters global settings.
Format config stp {maxage <value 6-40> | maxhops <value 6-40> | hellotime <value 1-2> | forwarddelay <value 4-
30> | txholdcount <value 1-10> | fbpdu [enable | disable] | nni_bpdu_addr [dot1d | dot1ad]}
Parameters
maxage - (Optional) Specify to determine if a BPDU is valid. The default value is 20.
<value 6-40> - Enter the maximum age value here. This value must be between 6-40.
maxhops - (Optional) Specify to restrict the forwarded times of one BPDU. The default value is 20.
<value 6-40> - Enter the maximum hops value here. This value must be between 6 and 40.
hello_time - (Optional) The time interval for sending configuration BPDUs by the Root Bridge. The default value is 2 seconds. This parameter is for STP and RSTP version. MSTP version uses per-port hellotime parameter.
<value 1-2> - Enter the hello time value here. This value must be between 1 and 2.
forwarddelay - (Optional) The maximum delay time for one BPDU to be transmitted by a bridge and received from another bridge. The default value is 15.
<value 4-30> - Enter the maximum delay time here. This value must be between 4 and 30.
txholdcount - (Optional) Specify to restrict the numbers of BPDU transmitted in a time interval.
<value 1-10> - Enter the transmitted BPDU restriction value here. This value must be between 1 and 10.
fbpdu - (Optional) Specify whether the bridge will flood STP BPDU when STP functionality is disabled.
enable - Specify that the bridge will flood STP BPDU when STP functionality is disabled
disable - Specify that the bridge will not flood STP BPDU when STP functionality is disabled
nni_bpdu_addr – (Optional) This address is used to determine the BPDU protocol address for an STP in service provider site. It can use either an 802.1d STP address (0180C2000000) or an 802.1ad service provider STP
545
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide address (0180C2000008).
dot1d - Specify that the NNI BPDU protocol address value will be set to Dot1d.
dot1ad - Specify that the NNI BPDU protocol address value will be set to Dot1ad.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure STP:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config stp maxage 25
Command: config stp maxage 25
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
57-4 show stp
Description
This command is used to show the bridge parameters global settings.
Format show stp
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show STP:
546
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show stp
Command: show stp
STP Bridge Global Settings
---------------------------
STP Status : Enabled
STP Version : RSTP
Max Age : 25
Hello Time : 2
Forward Delay : 15
Max Hops : 20
TX Hold Count : 6
Forwarding BPDU : Disabled
NNI BPDU Address : dot1d
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
57-5 create stp instance_id
Description
This command is used to create an MST Instance without mapping the corresponding VLANs.
Format create stp instance_id <value 1-7>
Parameters
<value 1-7> - Enter the MSTP instance ID here. This value must be between 1 and 7.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To create MSTP instance:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#create stp instance_id 2
Command: create stp instance_id 2
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
57-6 config stp instance_id
Description
This command is used to map or remove the VLAN range of the specified MST instance for the existed MST instances.
547
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Format config stp instance_id <value 1-7> [add_vlan | remove_vlan] <vidlist>
Parameters
<value 1-7> - Enter the MSTP instance ID here. This value must be between 1 and 7.
add_vlan - Specify to map the specified VLAN list to an existing MST instance.
remove_vlan - Specify to delete the specified VLAN list from an existing MST instance.
<vidlist> - Enter a list of VLANs by VLAN ID.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To map a VLAN ID to an MSTP instance:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config stp instance_id 2 add_vlan 1-3
Command: config stp instance_id 2 add_vlan 1-3
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To remove a VLAN ID from an MSTP instance:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config stp instance_id 2 remove_vlan 2
Command: config stp instance_id 2 remove_vlan 2
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
57-7 delete stp instance_id
Description
This command is used to delete an MST Instance.
Format delete stp instance_id <value 1-7>
Parameters
<value 1-7> - Enter the MSTP instance ID here. This value must be between 1 and 7.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To delete an MSTP instance:
548
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#delete stp instance_id 2
Command: delete stp instance_id 2
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
57-8 config stp mst_config_id
Description
This command is used to change the name or the revision level of the MST configuration identification.
Format config stp mst_config_id {revision_level <int 0-65535> | name <string>}
Parameters
revision_level - (Optional) The same given name with different revision level also represents different MST regions.
<int 0-65535> - Enter the revision level here. This value must be between 0 and 65535.
name - (Optional) Specify the name given for a specific MST region.
<string> - Enter the MST region name here.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To change the name and revision level of the MST configuration identification:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config stp mst_config_id name R&D_BlockG revision_level 1
Commands: config stp mst_config_id name R&D_BlockG revision_level 1
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
57-9 show stp mst_config_id
Description
This command is used to show the MST configuration identification.
Format show stp mst_config_id
Parameters
None.
549
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Restrictions
None.
Example show STP MST configuration ID:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show stp mst_config_id
Command: show stp mst_config_id
Current MST Configuration Identification
----------------------------------------
Configuration Name : 00-22-22-22-22-00 Revision Level :0
MSTI ID Vid list
------- -----------
CIST 1-4094
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
57-10 config stp mst_ports
Description
This command is used to configure the ports management parameters.
Format config stp mst_ports <portlist> instance_id <value 0-7> {internalCost [auto | <value 1-200000000>] | priority
<value 0-240>}
Parameters
mst_ports - Specify to be distinguished from the parameters of ports only at CIST level.
<portlist> - Enter a list of ports used for the configuration here.
instance_id - Specify the instance ID used.
<value 0-7> - Enter the instance ID used here. This value must be between 0 and 7.
internalCost - (Optional) Specify the port path cost used in MSTP.
auto - Specify that the internal cost value will be set to auto.
<value 1-200000000> - Enter the internal cost value here. This value must be between 1 and 200000000.
priority - (Optional) Specify the port priority value.
<value 0-240> - Enter the port priority value here. This value must be between 0 and 240.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure STP MST ports:
550
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config stp mst_ports 1 instance_id 0 internalCost auto
Command: config stp mst_ports 1 instance_id 0 internalCost auto
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
57-11 config stp ports
Description
This command is used to configure all the parameters of ports, except for Internal Path Cost and Port Priority.
Format config stp ports <portlist> {externalCost [auto | <value 1-200000000>] | hellotime <value 1-2> | migrate [yes
| no] | edge [true | false | auto] | p2p [true | false | auto] | state [enable | disable]| restricted_role [true | false]
| restricted_tcn [true | false] | fbpdu [enable | disable]}
Parameters
<portlist> - Enter a list of ports used for the configuration here.
externalCost - (Optional) The path cost between MST regions from the transmitting Bridge to the CIST Root
Bridge. It is only used at CIST level.
auto - Specify that the external cost value will be set to automatic.
<value 1-200000000> - Enter the external cost value here. This value must be between 1 and 200000000.
hellotime - (Optional) The default value is 2 . This parameter is for MSTP version. For STP and RSTP version, uses the per system hellotime parameter.
<value 1-2> - Enter the hello time value here. This value must be between 1 and 2.
migrate - (Optional) Operation of management in order to specify the port to send MSTP BPDU for a delay time.
yes - Specify that the MSTP BPDU for a delay time will be sent.
no - Specify that the MSTP BPDU for a delay time will not be sent.
edge - (Optional) To decide if this port is connected to a LAN or a Bridged LAN.
true - Specify that the specified port(s) is edge.
false - Specify that the specified port(s) is not edge.
auto - In auto mode, the bridge will delay for a period to become edge port if no bridge BPUD is received. The default is auto mode.
p2p - (Optional) To decide if this port is in Full-Duplex or Half-Duplex mode.
true - Specify that the port(s) is in Full-Duplex mode.
false - Specify that the port(s) is in Half-Duplex mode.
auto - Specify that the port(s) is in Full-Duplex and Half-Duplex mode.
state - (Optional) To decide if this port supports the STP functionality.
enable - Specify that STP functionality on the port(s) is enabled.
disable - Specify that STP functionality on the port(s) is disabled.
restricted_role - (Optional) To decide if this port not to be selected as Root Port. The default value is false.
true - Specify that the port can be specified as the root port.
false - Specify that the port can not be specified as the root port.
restricted_tcn - (Optional) To decide if this port not to propagate topology change. The default value is false.
true - Specify that the port can be set to propagate a topology change.
false - Specify that the port can not be set to propagate a topology change.
fbpdu - (Optional) To decide if this port will flood STP BPDU when STP functionality is disabled. When the state is set to enable, the received BPDU will be forwarded. When the state is set to disable, the received BPDU will be dropped.
enable - Specify that the port can be set to flood the STP BPDU when the STP functionality is disabled.
disable - Specify that the port can not be set to flood the STP BPDU when the STP functionality is disabled.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
551
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Example
To configure STP ports:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config stp ports 1 externalCost auto
Command: config stp ports 1 externalCost auto
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
57-12 show stp ports
Description
This command is used to show the port information includes parameters setting and operational value.
Format show stp ports {<portlist>}
Parameters
<portlist> - (Optional) Enter a list of ports to be displayed.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show STP ports:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show stp ports
Command: show stp ports
MSTP Port Information
----------------------
Port Index : 1 , Hello Time: 2 /2 , Port STP : Enabled ,
External PathCost : Auto/200000 , Edge Port : Auto /No , P2P : Auto /Yes
Port RestrictedRole : False, Port RestrictedTCN : False
Port Forward BPDU : Disabled
MSTI Designated Bridge Internal PathCost Prio Status Role
----- ------------------ ----------------- ---- ---------- ----------
0 N/A 200000 128 Forwarding NonStp
CTRL+C ESC q Quit SPACE n Next Page p Previous Page r Refresh
57-13 config stp priority
Description
This command is used to configure the instance priority.
552
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Format config stp priority <value 0-61440> instance_id <value 0-7>
Parameters
<value 0-61440> - Enter the bridge priority value here. This value must be divisible by 4096. This value must be between 0 and 61440.
instance_id - Identifier to distinguish different STP instances.
<value 0-7> - Enter the STP instance ID here. This value must be between 0 and 7.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure the STP instance ID:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config stp priority 61440 instance_id 0
Command: config stp priority 61440 instance_id 0
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
57-14 config stp version
Description
This command is used to configure the STP version.
Format config stp version [mstp | rstp | stp]
Parameters
mstp - Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol.
rstp - Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol. This is the default option.
stp - Spanning Tree Protocol.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure STP version:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config stp version mstp
Command: config stp version mstp
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
553
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
To config STP version with the same value of old configuration:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config stp version mstp
Command: config stp version mstp
Configure value is the same with current value.
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
57-15 show stp instance
Description
This command is used to display each instance parameters settings. Value means the instance ID, if there is no input of this value, all instance will be shown.
Format show stp instance {<value 0-7>}
Parameters
<value 0-7> - (Optional) Enter the MSTP instance ID value here. This value must be between 0 and 7.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show STP instance:
554
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show stp instance
Command: show stp instance
STP Instance Settings
---------------------------
Instance Type : CIST
Instance Status : Enabled
Instance Priority : 32768(bridge priority : 32768, sys ID ext : 0 )
STP Instance Operational Status
--------------------------------
Designated Root Bridge : 32768/00-22-22-22-22-00
External Root Cost : 0
Regional Root Bridge : 32768/00-22-22-22-22-00
Internal Root Cost : 0
Designated Bridge : 32768/00-22-22-22-22-00
Root Port : None
Max Age : 20
Forward Delay : 15
Last Topology Change : 2430
Topology Changes Count : 0
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
555
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 58 ND Spoofing Prevention Command
List
config nd_spoofing_prevention [add gateway_ip <ipv6addr> gateway_mac <macaddr> ports [<portlist> | all] | delete gateway_ip <ipv6addr>] show nd_spoofing_prevention
58-1 config nd_spoofing_prevention
Description
This command is used to configure the spoofing prevention entry to prevent spoofing of MAC for the protected gateway.
Format config nd_spoofing_prevention [add gateway_ip <ipv6addr> gateway_mac <macaddr> ports [<portlist> | all] | delete gateway_ip <ipv6addr>]
Parameters
add - Specify to add an ND spoofing prevention entry.
gateway_ip - Specify the gateway IP address to be added.
<ipv6addr> - Enter the IPv6 gateway IP address.
gateway_mac - Specify the gateway MAC address to be added.
<macaddr> - Enter the gateway MAC address.
ports - Specify a port range.
<portlist> - Enter a range of ports to be configured.
all - Specify all of ports to be configured.
delete - Specify to delete an ND spoofing prevention entry.
gateway_ip - Specify the gateway IP address to be deleted.
<ipv6address> - Enter the gateway IPv6 address.
Restrictions
Only Administrators and Operators can issue this command.
Example
This command is used to display the ND spoofing prevention entry.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# config nd_spoofing_prevention add gateway_ip
2001:2002:2003:2004:2005:2006:2007:2008 gateway_mac 00-00-00-22-33-44 ports 2
Command: config nd_spoofing_prevention add gateway_ip 2001:2002:2003:2004:2005:2006:2007:2008 gateway_mac 00-00-00-22-33-44 ports 2
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
58-2 show nd_spoofing_prevention
Description
This command is used to display the nd spoofing prevention entry.
556
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Format show nd_spoofing_prevention
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show the command logging configuration status:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show nd_spoofing_prevention
Command: show nd_spoofing_prevention
Gateway IP Gateway MAC Ports
--------------------------------------- ----------------- ---------------------
FF::11 00-01-02-03-04-06 3
Total Entries: 1
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
557
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 59 Network Load Balancing (NLB)
Command List
create nlb unicast_fdb <macaddr>
config nlb unicast_fdb <macaddr>[add|delete]<portlist>
delete nlb unicast_fdb <macaddr>
create nlb multicast_fdb [<vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid>] <macaddr>
config nlb multicast_fdb [<vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid>] <macaddr> [add | delete] <portlist>
delete nlb multicast_fdb [<vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid>] <macaddr> show nlb fdb
59-1 create nlb unicast_fdb
Description
This command is used to create the NLB unicast FDB entry.
The network load balancing command set is used to support the Microsoft server load balancing application where multiple servers can share the same IP address and MAC address. The requests from clients will be forwarded to all servers, but will only be processed by one of them. The server can work in two different modes – unicast mode and multicast mode. In unicast mode, the client use unicast MAC address as the destination MAC to reach the server. In multicast mode, the client use the multicast MAC address as the destination MAC to reach the server.
Regarding of the mode, this destination Mac is the named the shared MAC. The server uses its own MAC address
(rather than the shared MAC) as the source MAC address of the reply packet.
Format create nlb unicast_fdb <macaddr>
Parameters
<macaddr> - Enter the MAC address of the NLB unicast FDB entry to be created.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To create an NLB unicast MAC forwarding entry, for the product that support the VLAN information on the unicast forwarding:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#create nlb unicast_fdb 02-bf-01-01-01-01
Command: create nlb unicast_fdb 02-BF-01-01-01-01
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
59-2 config nlb unicast_fdb
Description
This command is used to add or delete the forwarding ports for the specified NLB unicast FDB entry.
558
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Format config nlb unicast_fdb <macaddr> [add | delete] <portlist>
Parameters
<macaddr> - Enter the MAC address of the NLB unicast FDB entry to be configured.
add - Specify to add the ports.
delete - Specify to delete the ports.
<portlist> - Enter a list of forwarding ports to be added or removed.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure NLB unicast FDB entry, for the product that support the VLAN information on the unicast forwarding:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config nlb unicast_fdb 02-bf-01-01-01-01 add 1-5
Command: config nlb unicast_fdb 02-BF-01-01-01-01 add 1-5
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
59-3 delete nlb unicast_fdb
Description
This command is used to delete the NLB unicast FDB entry.
Format delete nlb unicast_fdb <macaddr>
Parameters
<macaddr> - Enter the MAC address of the NLB unicast FDB entry to be deleted.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To delete the NLB unicast FDB entry, for the product that support the VLAN information on the unicast forwarding:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#delete nlb unicast_fdb 02-bf-01-01-01-01
Command: delete nlb unicast_fdb 02-BF-01-01-01-01
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
559
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
59-4 create nlb multicast_fdb
Description
This command is used to create a NLB multicast FDB entry.
The NLB multicast FDB entry will be mutual exclusive with the L2 multicast entry.
Format create nlb multicast_fdb [<vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid>] <macaddr>
Parameters
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the VLAN name here. The VLAN name can be up to 32 characters long.
vlanid - Specify the VLAN by the VLAN ID.
<vlanid> - Enter the VLAN ID here.
<macaddr> - Enter the MAC address of the NLB multicast FDB entry to be created.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To create a NLB multicast FDB entry:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#create nlb multicast_fdb default 03-bf-01-01-01-01
Command: create nlb multicast_fdb default 03-bf-01-01-01-01
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
59-5 config nlb multicast_fdb
Description
This command is used to add or delete the forwarding ports for the specified NLB multicast FDB entry.
Format config nlb multicast_fdb [<vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid>] <macaddr> [add | delete] <portlist>
Parameters
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the VLAN of the NLB multicast FDB entry to be configured.
vlanid - Specify the VLAN by the VLAN ID.
<vlanid> - Enter the VLAN ID here.
<macaddr> - Enter the Mac address of the NLB multicast FDB entry to be configured.
add - Specify a list of forwarding ports to be added.
delete - Specify a list of forwarding ports to be deleted.
<portlist> - Enter the list of ports used for this configuration.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
560
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Example
To configure NLB multicast MAC forwarding database:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config nlb multicast_fdb default 03-bf-01-01-01-01 add 1-5
Command: config nlb multicast_fdb default 03-bf-01-01-01-01 add 1-5
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
59-6 delete nlb multicast_fdb
Description
This command is used to delete the NLB multicast FDB entry.
Format delete nlb multicast_fdb [<vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid>] <macaddr>
Parameters
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the VLAN of the NLB multicast FDB entry to be deleted.
vlanid - Specify the VLAN by VLAN ID.
<vlanid> - Enter the VLAN ID here.
<macaddr> - Enter the MAC address of the NLB multicast FDB entry to be deleted.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To delete NLB multicast FDB entry:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#delete nlb multicast_fdb default 03-bf-01-01-01-01
Command: delete nlb multicast_fdb default 03-bf-01-01-01-01
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
59-7 show nlb fdb
Description
This command is used to show the NLB Configured entry.
Format show nlb fdb
Parameters
None.
561
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the NLB forwarding table:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show nlb fdb
Command: show nlb fdb
MAC Address VLAN ID Egress Ports
----------------- ---------- ---------------------------------------------
02-BF-01-01-01-01 - 1-5
Total Entries :1
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
562
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 60 Network Monitoring Command
List
clear counters {ports <portlist>}
show error ports <portlist>
show packet ports <portlist>
show utilization [cpu | ports] show utilization dram show utilization flash
60-1 clear counters
Description
This command is used to clear the Switch’s statistics counters.
Format clear counters {ports <portlist>}
Parameters
ports - (Optional) Specify a range of ports to be configured.
<portlist> - Enter a list of ports used for the configuration here.
If no parameter is specified, system will display counters of all the ports .
Restrictions
Only Administrators and Operators can issue this command.
Example
To clear the Switch’s statistics counters:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#clear counters ports 7-9
Command: clear counters ports 7-9
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
60-2 show error ports
Description
This command is used to display the error statistics for a range of ports.
Format show errors ports <portlist>
563
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Parameters
<portlist> - Enter a range of ports to be displayed.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the errors of the port:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show error ports 3
Command: show error ports 3
Port Number : 3
RX Frames TX Frames
--------- ---------
CRC Error 0 Excessive Deferral 0
Undersize 0 CRC Error 0
Oversize 0 Late Collision 0
Fragment 0 Excessive Collision 0
Jabber 0 Single Collision 0
Drop Pkts 0 Collision 0
Symbol Error 0
CTRL+C ESC q Quit SPACE n Next Page p Previous Page r Refresh
60-3 show packet ports
Description
This command is used to display statistics about the packets sent and received by the Switch.
Format show packet ports <portlist>
Parameters
<portlist> - Enter a range of ports to be displayed.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the packets analysis for port 7:
564
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show packet ports 7
Command: show packet ports 7
Port Number : 7
==================================================================
Frame Size/Type Frame Counts Frames/sec
--------------- ---------------------- -----------
64 0 0
65-127 0 0
128-255 0 0
256-511 0 0
512-1023 0 0
1024-1518 0 0
Unicast RX 0 0
Multicast RX 0 0
Broadcast RX 0 0
Frame Type Total Total/sec
--------------- ---------------------- -----------
RX Bytes 0 0
RX Frames 0 0
TX Bytes 0 0
TX Frames 0 0
CTRL+C ESC q Quit SPACE n Next Page p Previous Page r Refresh
60-4 show utilization
Description
This command is used to display real-time CPU or port utilization statistics.
Format show utilization [cpu | ports]
Parameters
cpu - Specify to display information regarding the CPU.
ports - Specify all ports to be displayed.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the ports utilization:
565
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show utilization ports
Command: show utilization ports
Port TX/sec RX/sec Util Port TX/sec RX/sec Util
----- ---------- ---------- ---- ----- ---------- ---------- ----
1 0 0 0 21 0 0 0
2 0 0 0 22 0 0 0
3 0 0 0 23 0 0 0
4 0 0 0 24 0 0 0
5 0 0 0 25 0 0 0
6 0 0 0 26 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
8 0 0 0
9 0 0 0
10 0 0 0
11 0 0 0
12 0 0 0
13 0 0 0
14 0 0 0
15 0 0 0
16 0 0 0
17 0 0 0
18 0 0 0
19 0 0 0
20 0 0 0
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To display the CPU utilization:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show utilization cpu
Command: show utilization cpu
CPU Utilization
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Five seconds - 10 % One minute - 10 % Five minutes - 10 %
CTRL+C ESC q Quit SPACE n Next Page p Previous Page r Refresh
60-5 show utilization dram
Description
This command is used to show DRAM memory utilization.
Format show utilization dram
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
566
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Example
To display DRAM utilization:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show utilization dram
Command: show utilization dram
DRAM Utilization :
Total DRAM : 262144 KB
Used DRAM : 129628 KB
Utilization : 49 %
CTRL+C ESC q Quit SPACE n Next Page p Previous Page r Refresh
60-6 show utilization flash
Description
This command is used to show the flash memory utilization.
Format show utilization flash
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display FLASH utilization:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show utilization flash
Command: show utilization flash
Flash Memory Utilization :
Total Flash : 29618 KB
Used Flash : 5784 KB
Utilization : 19 %
CTRL+C ESC q Quit SPACE n Next Page p Previous Page r Refresh
567
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 61 OAM Command List
config ethernet_oam ports [<portlist> | all ] [mode [active | passive] | state [enable | disable] | link_monitor
[error_symbol {threshold <range 0-4294967295> | window <millisecond 1000-60000> | notify_state [enable | disable]}(1) | error_frame {threshold <range 0-4294967295> | window <millisecond 1000-60000> | notify_state
[enable | disable]}(1) | error_frame_seconds {threshold <range 1-900> | window <millisecond 10000-900000> | notify_state [enable | disable]}(1) | error_frame_period {threshold <range 0-4294967295> | window <number
148810-100000000> | notify_state [enable | disable]}(1) ]| critical_link_event [dying_gasp | critical_event] notify_state [enable | disable] | remote_loopback [start | stop] | received_remote_loopback [process | ignore]]
show ethernet_oam ports {<portlist>} [status | configuration | statistics | event_log {index <value_list>}]
clear ethernet_oam ports [<portlist> | all] [event_log | statistics]
61-1 config ethernet_oam ports
Description
This command is used to configure Ethernet OAM. The parameter to configure port Ethernet OAM mode operates in active or passive mode. The following two actions are allowed by ports in active mode, but disallowed by ports in passive mode: Initiate OAM discovery and start or stop remote loopback. Note that when a port is OAM-enabled, changing the OAM mode will cause the OAM discovery to be re-started.
The command used to enable or disable port’s Ethernet OAM function. The parameter enabling a port’s OAM will cause the port to start OAM discovery. If a port’s is active, it initiates the discovery. Otherwise it reacts to the discovery received from peer. Disabling a port’s OAM will cause the port to send out a dying gasp event to peers and then disconnect the established OAM link.
The link monitoring parameter is used to configure port Ethernet OAM link monitoring error symbols. The link monitoring function provides a mechanism to detect and indicate link faults under a variety of conditions. OAM monitors the statistics on the number of frame errors as well as the number of coding symbol errors. When the number of symbol errors is equal to or greater than the specified threshold in a period and the event notification state is enabled, it generates an error symbol period event to notify the remote OAM peer. The Ethernet OAM link monitoring error frames parameter provides a mechanism to detect and indicate link faults under a variety of conditions. OAM monitors the counter on the number of frame errors as well as the number of coding symbol errors. When the number of frame errors is equal to or greater than the specified threshold in a period and the event notification state is enabled, it generates an error frame event to notify the remote OAM peer.
The link event parameter configures the capability of the Ethernet OAM critical link event. If the capability for an event is disabled, the port will never send out the corresponding critical link event. This command is used to configure the client to process or to ignore the received Ethernet OAM remote loopback command. In remote loopback mode, all user traffic will not be processed. Ignoring the received remote loopback command will prevent the port from entering remote loopback mode.
Format config ethernet_oam ports [<portlist> | all ] [mode [active | passive] | state [enable | disable] | link_monitor
[error_symbol {threshold <range 0-4294967295> | window <millisecond 1000-60000> | notify_state [enable | disable]}(1) | error_frame {threshold <range 0-4294967295> | window <millisecond 1000-60000> | notify_state [enable | disable]}(1) | error_frame_seconds {threshold <range 1-900> | window <millisecond
10000-900000> | notify_state [enable | disable]}(1) | error_frame_period {threshold <range 0-4294967295> | window <number 148810-100000000> | notify_state [enable | disable]}(1) ]| critical_link_event [dying_gasp | critical_event] notify_state [enable | disable] | remote_loopback [start | stop] | received_remote_loopback
[process | ignore]]
Parameters
<portlist> - Enter a range of ports to be configured.
all - Specify all ports to be configured.
mode - Specify the operation mode. The default mode is active.
active - Specify to operate in active mode.
passive - Specify to operate in passive mode.
state - Specify the OAM function status.
568
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
enable - Specify to enable the OAM function.
disable - Specify to disable the OAM function.
link_monitor - Specify to detect and indicate link faults under a variety of conditions.
error_symbol - Specify to generate an error symbol period event to notify the remote OAM peer.
threshold - Specify the number of symbol errors in the period that is required to be equal to or greater than in order for the event to be generated. The default value of threshold is 1 symbol error.
<range 0-4294967295> - Enter the range from 0 to 4294967295.
window - The range is 1000 to 60000 ms. The default value is 1000ms.
<millisecond 1000-60000> - Enter a value in a range from 1000 to 60000 ms.
notify_state - Specify the event notification status. The default state is enable.
enable - Specify to enable event notification.
disable - Specify to disable event notification.
error_frame - Specify the error frame.
threshold - Specify a threshold range.
<range 0-4294967295> - Enter a threshold range between 0 and 4294967295.
window - The range is 1000 to 60000 ms. The default value is 1000ms.
<millisecond 1000-60000> - Enter a value within the range between 1000 to 60000 ms.
notify_state - Specify the event notification status. The default state is enable.
enable - Specify to enable event notification.
disable - Specify to disable event notification.
error_frame_seconds - Specify error frame time.
threshold - Specify a threshold range between 1 and 900.
<range 1-900> - Enter a threshold range between 1 and 900.
window - The range is 1000 to 900000 ms.
<millisecond 10000-900000> - Enter a value between the range 1000 to 900000 ms.
notify_state - Specify the event notification status. The default state is enable.
enable - Specify to enable event notification.
disable - Specify to disable event notification.
error_frame_period - Specify error frame period.
threshold - Specify a threshold range between 0 and 4294967295.
<range 0-4294967295> - Enter a threshold range between 0 and 4294967295.
window - The range is 148810 to 100000000 ms.
<number 148810-100000000> - Enter a range between 148810 to 100000000 ms.
notify_state - Specify the event notification status. The default state is enable.
enable - Specify to enable event notification.
disable - Specify to disable event notification.
critical_link_event - Specify critical link event.
dying_gasp - An unrecoverable local failure condition has occurred.
critical_event - An unspecified critical event has occurred.
notify_state - Specify the event notification status. The default state is enable.
enable - Specify to enable event notification.
disable - Specify to disable event notification.
remote_loopback - Specify remote loop.
start - If start is specified, it will request the peer to change to the remote loopback mode.
stop - If stop is specified, it will request the peer to change to the normal operation mode.
received_remote_loopback - Specify receive remote loop-back.
process - Specify to process the received Ethernet OAM remote loopback command.
ignore - Specify to ignore the received Ethernet OAM remote loopback command. This is the default.
Restrictions
Only Administrators and Operators can issue this command.
Example
To configure Ethernet OAM on ports 1 to 2 in active mode:
569
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config ethernet_oam ports 1-2 mode active
Command: config ethernet_oam ports 1-2 mode active
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To enable Ethernet OAM on port 1:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config ethernet_oam ports 1 state enable
Command: config ethernet_oam ports 1 state enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To configure the error symbol threshold to 2 and period to 1000ms for port 1:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config ethernet_oam ports 1 link_monitor error_symbol threshold 2 window
1000 notify_state enable
Command: config ethernet_oam ports 1 link_monitor error_symbol threshold 2 window 1000 notify_state enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To configure the error frame threshold to 2 and period to 1000 ms for port 1:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config ethernet_oam ports 1 link_monitor error_frame threshold 2 window
1000 notify_state enable
Command: config ethernet_oam ports 1 link_monitor error_frame threshold 2 window 1000 notify_state enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To configure the error frame seconds threshold to 2 and period to 10000 ms for port 1:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config ethernet_oam ports 1 link_monitor error_frame_seconds threshold 2 window 10000 notify_state enable
Command: config ethernet_oam ports 1 link_monitor error_frame_seconds threshold 2 window
10000 notify_state enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To configure the error frame threshold to10 and period to 1000000 ms for port 1:
570
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config ethernet_oam ports 1 link_monitor error_frame_period threshold 10 window 1000000 notify_state enable
Command: config ethernet_oam ports 1 link_monitor error_frame_period threshold 10 window
1000000 notify_state enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To configure a dying gasp event for port 1:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config ethernet_oam ports 1 critical_link_event dying_gasp notify_state enable
Command: config ethernet_oam ports 1 critical_link_event dying_gasp notify_state enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To start remote loopback on port 1:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config ethernet_oam ports 1 remote_loopback start
Command: config ethernet_oam ports 1 remote_loopback start
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To configure the method of processing the received remote loopback command as “process” on port 1:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config ethernet_oam ports 1 received_remote_loopback process
Command: config ethernet_oam ports 1 received_remote_loopback process
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
61-2 show ethernet_oam ports
Description
This command is used to display Ethernet OAM information, including status, configuration, statistics, and event log, on specified ports.
The status information includes:
• OAM administration status: enabled or disabled.
• OAM operation status. It maybe the below value: o Disable: OAM is disabled on this port. o LinkFault: The link has detected a fault and is transmitting OAMPDUs with a link fault indication. o PassiveWait: The port is passive and is waiting to see if the peer device is OAM capable. o ActiveSendLocal: The port is active and is sending local information. o SendLocalAndRemote: The local port has discovered the peer but has not yet accepted or rejected the configuration of the peer. o SendLocalAndRemoteOk: The local device agrees the OAM peer entity. o PeeringLocallyRejected: The local OAM entity rejects the remote peer OAM entity. o PeeringRemotelyRejected: The remote OAM entity rejects the local device. o Operational: The local OAM entity learns that both it and the remote OAM entity have accepted the peering.
571
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide o NonOperHalfDuplex: Since Ethernet OAM functions are not designed to work completely over halfduplex port. This value indicates Ethernet OAM is enabled but the port is in half-duplex operation.
• OAM mode: passive or active.
• Maximum OAMPDU size: The largest OAMPDU that the OAM entity supports. OAM entities exchange maximum OAMPDU sizes and negotiate to use the smaller of the two maximum OAMPDU sizes between the peers.
• OAM configuration revision: The configuration revision of the OAM entity as reflected in the latest
OAMPDU sent by the OAM entity. The config revision is used by OAM entities to indicate that configuration changes have occurred, which might require the peer OAM entity to re-evaluate whether
OAM peering is allowed.
• OAM mode change.
• OAM Functions Supported: The OAM functions supported on this port. These functions include: o Unidirectional: It indicates that the OAM entity supports the transmission of OAMPDUs on links that are operating in unidirectional mode (traffic flowing in one direction only). o Loopback: It indicates that the OAM entity can initiate and respond to loopback commands. o Link Monitoring: It indicates that the OAM entity can send and receive Event Notification
OAMPDUs. o Variable: It indicates that the OAM entity can send and receive variable requests to monitor the attribute value as described in the IEEE 802.3 Clause 30 MIB.
The event log displays Ethernet OAM event log information. The switch can buffer 1000 event logs. The event log is different from sys-log as it provides more detailed information than sys-log. Each OAM event will be recorded in both OAM event log and syslog.
Format show ethernet_oam ports {<portlist>} [status | configuration | statistics | event_log {index <value_list>}]
Parameters
<portlist> - (Optional) Enter the range of ports to display.
status - Specify to display the Ethernet OAM status.
configuration - Specify to display the Ethernet OAM configuration.
statistics - Specify to display Ethernet OAM statistics.
event_log - Specify to display the Ethernet OAM event log information.
index - (Optional) Specify an index range to display.
<value_list> - (Optional) Enter an index range to display.
Restrictions
Only Administrators and Operators can issue this command.
Example
To display Ethernet OAM statistics information for port 1:
572
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show ethernet_oam ports 1 statistics
Command: show ethernet_oam ports 1 statistics
Port 1
------------------------------------------------------------
Information OAMPDU TX : 0
Information OAMPDU RX : 0
Unique Event Notification OAMPDU TX : 0
Unique Event Notification OAMPDU RX : 0
Duplicate Event Notification OAMPDU TX: 0
Duplicate Event Notification OAMPDU RX: 0
Loopback Control OAMPDU TX : 0
Loopback Control OAMPDU RX : 0
Variable Request OAMPDU TX : 0
Variable Request OAMPDU RX : 0
Variable Response OAMPDU TX : 0
Variable Response OAMPDU RX : 0
Organization Specific OAMPDUs TX : 0
Organization Specific OAMPDUs RX : 0
Unsupported OAMPDU TX : 0
Unsupported OAMPDU RX : 0
Frames Lost Due To OAM : 0
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
61-3 clear ethernet_oam ports
Description
This command is used to clear Ethernet OAM information.
Format clear ethernet_oam ports [<portlist> | all] [event_log | statistics]
Parameters
<portlist> - Enter a range of Ethernet OAM ports to be cleared.
all - Specify to clear all Ethernet OAM ports.
event_log - Specify to clear Ethernet OAM event log information.
statistics - Specify to clear Ethernet OAM statistics.
Restrictions
Only Administrators and Operators can issue this command.
Example
To clear port 1 OAM statistics:
573
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#clear ethernet_oam ports 1 statistics
Command: clear ethernet_oam ports 1 statistics
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To clear port 1 OAM events:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#clear ethernet_oam ports 1 event_log
Command: clear ethernet_oam ports 1 event_log
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
574
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 62 Password Recovery Command List
enable password_recovery disable password_recovery show password_recovery
62-1 enable password_recovery
Description
This command is used to enable the password recovery mode.
Format enable password_recovery
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To enable the password recovery mode:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#enable password_recovery
Command: enable password_recovery
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
62-2 disable password_recovery
Description
This command is used to disable the password recovery mode.
Format disable password_recovery
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
575
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Example
To disable the password recovery mode:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#disable password_recovery
Command: disable password_recovery
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
62-3 show password_recovery
Description
This command is used to display the password recovery state.
Format show password_recovery
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To display the password recovery state:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show password_recovery
Command: show password_recovery
Running Configuration : Enabled
NV-RAM Configuration : Enabled
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
576
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 63 Peripherals Command List
show device_status show environment
config temperature threshold {high <temperature -500-500> | low <temperature -500-500>}
config temperature [trap | log] state [enable | disable]
63-1 show device_status
Description
This command is used to display current status of fans on the system. An “OK” message is displayed when all of the fans are working properly. A “Fail” message is displayed when any of the fans failed. The failed fan number is included in the fail message.
Format show device_status
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show device status:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show device_status
Command: show device_status
Right Fan : OK
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
63-2 show environment
Description
This command is used to display the temperature status of the system.
Format show environment
Parameters
None.
577
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the device environment:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show environment
Command: show environment
Temperature Trap State : Enabled
Temperature Log State : Enabled
Current Temperature(Celsius) : 27
High Warning Temperature Threshold(Celsius) : 79
Low Warning Temperature Threshold(Celsius) : 11
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
63-3 config temperature threshold
Description
This command is used to configure the warning threshold for high and low temperature.
Format config temperature threshold {high <temperature -500-500> | low <temperature -500-500>}
Parameters
high - (Optional) Specify to configure high threshold value. The high threshold must bigger than the low threshold.
<temperature -500-500> - Enter the high threshold temperature.
low - (Optional) Specify to configure low threshold value.
<temperature -500-500> - Enter the low threshold temperature.
Restrictions
Only Administrators and Operators can issue this command.
Example
To configure the warning temperature threshold:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config temperature threshold high 80
Command: config temperature threshold high 80
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
63-4 config temperature
Description
This command is used to configure the trap state for temperature warning event.
578
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Format config temperature [trap | log] state [enable | disable]
Parameters
trap - Specify to enable or disable the trap state of the temperature warning event.
log - Specify to enable or disable the log state of the temperature warning event.
state - Specify to enable or disable the trap or log state of the temperature warning event.
enable - Specify to enable the trap or log state of the temperature warning event. This is the default option.
disable - Specify to disable the trap or log state of the temperature warning event.
Restrictions
Only Administrators and Operators can issue this command.
Example
To configure the warning temperature trap state:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config temperature trap state enable
Command: config temperature trap state enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
579
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 64 Ping Command List
ping [<ipaddr> | <domain_name 255>] {times <value 1-255> | timeout <sec 1-99> | source_ip <ipaddr>}
ping6 [<ipv6addr> | <domain_name 255>] {times <value 1-255> | size <value 1-6000> | timeout <sec 1-99> | source_ip <ipv6addr>}
64-1 ping
Description
This command is used to send Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) echo messages to a remote IP address.
The remote IP address will then “echo” or return the message. This is used to confirm connectivity between the
Switch and the remote device.
Format ping [<ipaddr> | <domain_name 255>] {times <value 1-255> | timeout <sec 1-99> | source_ip <ipaddr>}
Parameters
<ipaddr> - Enter the IP address of the host.
<domain_name 255> - Enter the domain name of the host.
times - (Optional) The number of individual ICMP echo messages to be sent. A value of 0 will send an infinite
ICMP echo messages. The maximum value is 255. The default is 0, indicating infinity. Press the "CTRL+C” to break the ping test.
<value 1-255> - Enter the number of individual ICMP echo messages to be sent here. This value must be between 1 and 255.
timeout - (Optional) Defines the time-out period while waiting for a response from the remote device. A value of 1 to 99 seconds can be specified. The default is 1 second.
<sec 1-99> - Enter the time-out period here. This value must be between 1 and 99 seconds.
source_ip - (Optional) Specify the source IP of the ping packets. The IP address is used as the source IP address of the packets that send to the remote host.
<ipaddr> - Enter the IP address.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To send ICMP echo message to “10.51.17.1” for 4 times:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#ping 10.51.17.1 times 4
Command: ping 10.51.17.1 times 4
Reply from 10.51.17.1, time<10ms
Reply from 10.51.17.1, time<10ms
Reply from 10.51.17.1, time<10ms
Reply from 10.51.17.1, time<10ms
Ping Statistics for 10.51.17.1
Packets: Sent =4, Received =4, Lost =0
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
580
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
64-2 ping6
Description
This command is used to send IPv6 Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMPv6) echo messages to a remote IPv6 address. The remote IPv6 address will then “echo” or return the message. This is used to confirm the IPv6 connectivity between the Switch and the remote device.
Format ping6 [<ipv6addr> | <domain_name 255>] {times <value 1-255> | size <value 1-6000> | timeout <sec 1-99> | source_ip <ipv6addr>}
Parameters
<ipv6addr> - Enter the IPv6 address here.
<domain_name 255> - Enter the domain name of the host.
times - (Optional) The number of individual ICMPv6 echo messages to be sent. A value of 0 will send an infinite
ICMPv6 echo messages. The maximum value is 255. The default is 0, indicating infinity. Press the "CTRL+C” to break the ping test.
<value 1-255> - Enter the number of individual ICMPv6 echo messages to be sent here. This value must be between 1 and 255.
size - (Optional) Size of the test packet.
<value 1-6000> - Enter the size of the test packet here. This value must be between 1 and 6000.
timeout - (Optional) Defines the time-out period while waiting for a response from the remote device.
<sec 1-99> - Enter the time-out period here. This value must be between 1 and 99 seconds. The default is 1 second.
source_ip - (Optional) Specify the source IPv6 of the ping packets. The IPv6 address is used as the source IPv6 address of the packets that send to the remote host.
<ipv6addr> - Enter the IPv6 address.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To send ICMPv6 echo message to “3000::1” for 4 times:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#ping6 3000::1 times 4
Command: ping6 3000::1 times 4
Reply from 3000::1, bytes=200, time<10ms
Reply from 3000::1, bytes=200, time<10ms
Reply from 3000::1, bytes=200, time<10ms
Reply from 3000::1, bytes=200, time<10ms
Ping Statistics for 3000::1
Packets: Sent =4, Received =4, Lost =0
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
581
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 65 Port Security Command List
config port_security system max_learning_addr [<max_lock_no 1-3328> | no_limit]
config port_security ports [<portlist> | all] [{admin_state [enable | disable] | max_learning_addr <max_lock_no
0-3328> | lock_address_mode [permanent | deleteontimeout | deleteonreset]} (1)| {vlan [<vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vidlist>] max_learning_addr [<max_lock_no 0-3328> | no_limit]}(1)]
config port_security vlan [<vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vidlist>] max_learning_addr [<max_lock_no 0-3328> | no_limit]
delete port_security_entry [vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid 1-4094>] mac_address <macaddr>
clear port_security_entry {ports [<portlist> | all] {[vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vidlist>]}}
show port_security_entry {ports {<portlist>} {[vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vidlist>]}}
show port_security {ports {<portlist>} {[vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vidlist>]}} enable port_security trap_log disable port_security trap_log
65-1 config port_security system max_learning_addr
Description
This command is used to set the maximum number of port security entries that can be authorized system wide.
There are four levels of limitations on the learned entry number; for the entire system, for a port, for a VLAN, and for a specific VLAN on a port. If any limitation is exceeded, the new entry will be discarded.
The setting for system level maximum learned users must be greater than the total of maximum learned users allowed on all ports.
Format config port_security system max_learning_addr [<max_lock_no 1-3328> | no_limit]
Parameters
<max_lock_no 1-3328> - Enter the maximum number of port security entries that can be learned by the system.
If the setting is smaller than the number of current learned entries on all enabled ports, the command will be rejected. This value must be between 1 and 3328.
no_limit - No limitation on the number of port security entries that can be learned by the system. By default, the number is set to no_limit.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure the maximum number of port security entries on the Switch to be 256:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config port_security system max_learning_addr 256
Command: config port_security system max_learning_addr 256
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
582
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
65-2 config port_security ports
Description
This command is used to configure the admin state, the maximum number of addresses that can be learnt and the lock address mode.
There are four levels that limit the number of learned entries; the entire system, a port, a VLAN, and a specific
VLAN on a port. If any limitation is exceeded, the new entry will be discarded.
Format config port_security ports [<portlist> | all] [{admin_state [enable | disable] | max_learning_addr < max_lock_no 0-3328> | lock_address_mode [permanent | deleteontimeout | deleteonreset]} (1)| {vlan
[<vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vidlist>] max_learning_addr [<max_lock_no 0-3328> | no_limit]}(1)]
Parameters
<portlist> - Enter the list of port used for this configuration here.
all - Specify that all ports will be configured.
admin_state - (Optional) Specify the state of the port security function on the port.
enable - Specify to enable the port security function on the port.
disable - Specify to disable the port security function on the port. By default, the setting is disabled.
max_learning_addr - (Optional) Specify the maximum number of port security entries that can be learned on this port. If the value is set to 0, it means that no user can be authorized by the port security function on this port. If the setting is smaller than the number of current learned entries on the port, the command will be rejected. The default value is 32.
<max_lock_no 0-3328> - Enter the maximum number of port security entries that can be learned here. This value must be between 0 and 3328.
lock_address_mode - (Optional) Indicates the lock address mode. The default mode is deleteonreset.
permanent - The address will never be deleted unless the user removes it manually, the VLAN of the entry is removed, the port is removed from the VLAN, or port security is disabled on the port where the address resides.
deleteontimeout - This entry will be removed if the entry is idle for the specified aging time.
deleteonreset - This address will be removed if the Switch is reset or rebooted. Events that cause permanent entries to be deleted also apply to the deleteonreset entries.
vlan - (Optional) Specify the VLAN name used here.
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the VLAN name used here. This name can be up to 32 characters long.
vlanid - (Optional) Specify the VLAN ID used here.
<vidlist> - Enter the VLAN ID used here.
max_learning_addr - (Optional) Specify the maximum learning address value.
<max_lock_no 0-3328> - Enter the maximum learning address value here. This value must be between 0 and
3328.
no_limit - Specify that the maximum learning address value will be set to no limit.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure the port-based port security setting so that the maximum number of port security entries is restricted to 10, and the lock_address mode is set to permanent on port 6:
583
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config port_security ports 6 admin_state enable max_learning_addr 10 lock_address_mode permanent
Command: config port_security ports 6 admin_state enable max_learning_addr 10 lock_address_mode permanent
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
65-3 config port_security vlan
Description
This command is used to set the maximum number of port security entries that can be learned on a specific VLAN.
There are four levels that limit the number of learned entries; the entire system, a port, a VLAN, and a specific
VLAN on a port. If any limitation is exceeded, the new entry will be discarded.
Format config port_security vlan [<vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vidlist>] max_learning_addr [<max_lock_no 0-3328> | no_limit]
Parameters
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the VLAN name here. This name can be up to 32 characters long.
vlanid - Specify a list of VLANs by VLAN ID.
<vidlist> - Enter the VLAN ID list here.
max_learning_addr - Specify the maximum number of port security entries that can be learned by this VLAN. If this parameter is set to 0, it means that no user can be authorized on this VLAN. If the setting is lower than the number of current learned entries on the VLAN, the command will be rejected. The default value is “no_limit”
<max_lock_no 0-3328> - Enter the maximum number of port security entries that can be learned here. This value must be between 0 and 3328.
no_limit - No limitation on the number of port security entries that can be learned by a specific VLAN.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure the maximum number of VLAN-based port security entries on VLAN 1 to be 64:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config port_security vlan vlanid 1 max_learning_addr 64
Command: config port_security vlan vlanid 1 max_learning_addr 64
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
65-4 delete port_security_entry
Description
This command is used to delete a port security entry.
584
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Format delete port_security_entry [vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid 1-4094>] mac_address <macaddr>
Parameters
vlan - Specify the VLAN by VLAN name.
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the VLAN name here. This name can be up to 32 characters long.
vlanid - Specify the VLAN by VLAN ID.
<vlanid 1-4094> - Enter the VLAN ID list here. This value must be between 1 and 4094.
mac_address - Specify the MAC address of the entry.
<macaddr> - Enter the MAC address used here.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To delete the port security entry with a MAC address of 00-00-00-00-00-01 on VLAN 1:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#delete port_security_entry vlanid 1 mac_address 00-00-00-00-00-01
Command: delete port_security_entry vlanid 1 mac_address 00-00-00-00-00-01
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
65-5 clear port_security_entry
Description
This command is used to clear the MAC entries learned by the port security function.
Format clear port_security_entry {ports [<portlist> | all] {[vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vidlist>]}}
Parameters
ports - (Optional) Specify the range of ports to be configured.
<portlist> - Enter the port security entries learned on the specified port.
all - All the port security entries learned by the system will be cleared.
vlan - (Optional) The port security entries learned on the specified VLANs will be cleared.
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the VLAN name here. This name can be up to 32 characters long.
vlanid - (Optional) Specify a list of VLANs by VLAN ID.
<vidlist> - Enter the VLAN ID list here.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To clear the port security entries on port 6:
585
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#clear port_security_entry ports 6
Command: clear port_security_entry ports 6
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
65-6 show port_security_entry
Description
This command is used to display the port security entries.
If more than one parameter is selected, only the entries matching all the selected parameters will be displayed.
If the user Specify ports and VLAN (either the VLAN name or VLAN ID list), only the entries matching all the parameters will be displayed.
Format show port_security_entry {ports {<portlist>} {[vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vidlist>]}}
Parameters
ports - (Optional) Specify the range of ports that will display the port security entries. While this parameter is null, to show the entries on all of the ports.
<portlist> - Enter the list of port used for this configuration here.
vlan - (Optional) Specify the name of the VLAN that the port security settings will be displayed for.
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the VLAN name here. This name can be up to 32 characters long.
vlanid - (Optional) Specify the ID of the VLAN that the port security entries will be displayed for.
<vidlist> - Enter the VLAN ID list here.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show all the port security entries:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show port_security_entry
Command: show port_security_entry
MAC Address VID Port Lock Mode
----------------- ---- ----- ---------------
00-00-00-00-00-01 1 25 DeleteOnTimeout
Total Entries: 1
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
65-7 show port_security
Description
This command is used to display the port security related information, including state, maximum learned addresses and lock address mode on a port and/or on a VLAN.
586
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
If both ports and vlanid (or vlan_name) are specified, configurations matching any of these parameters will be displayed.
Format show port_security {ports {<portlist>} {[vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vidlist>]}}
Parameters
ports - (Optional) Specify the range of ports that will show their configuration. While this parameter is null, to show the entries on all of the ports.
<portlist> - Enter the list of port used for this configuration here.
vlan - (Optional) Specify the name of the VLAN that will show its configuration.
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the VLAN name here. This name can be up to 32 characters long.
vlanid - (Optional) Specify the ID of the VLAN that will show its configuration.
<vidlist> - Enter the VLAN ID list here.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the global configuration of port security:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show port_security
Command: show port_security
Port Security Trap/Log : Disabled
System Maximum Address : 256
VLAN Configuration (Only VLANs with limitation are displayed)
VID VLAN Name Max. Learning Addr.
---- -------------------------------- ------------------
1 default 64
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
65-8 enable port_security trap_log
Description
This command is used to enable port security traps/logs. When this command is enabled, if there's a new MAC that violates the pre-defined port security configuration, a trap will be sent out with the MAC and port information and the relevant information will be logged.
Format enable port_security trap_log
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
587
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Example
To enable a port security trap:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#enable port_security trap_log
Command: enable port_security trap_log
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
65-9 disable port_security trap_log
Description
This command is used to disable a port security trap/log. If the port security trap is disabled, no trap will be sent out for MAC violations, and no log will be recorded.
Format disable port_security trap_log
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To prevent a port security trap from being sent from the switch:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#disable port_security trap_log
Command: disable port_security trap_log
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
588
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 66 Power Saving Command List
config power_saving mode {length_detection | link_detection | led | port | hibernation} [enable | disable]
config power_saving hibernation [[add | delete] time_range <range_name 32> | clear_time_range]
config power_saving led [[add | delete] time_range <range_name 32> | clear_time_range]
config power_saving port [<portlist> | all] [[add | delete] time_range <range_name 32> | clear_time_range]
show power_saving {length_detection | link_detection | led | port | hibernation}
config led state [enable | disable] show led
66-1 config power_saving mode
Description
This command is used to set the power saving state.
For link detection and length detection function, they apply to the ports with copper media. If the power saving link detection state is enabled, the power is saved by following mechanisms:
• When no links are detected on the port, the port will automatically turn off and will only wake up the second a single link pulse is sent. While the port is turned off, a simple energy-detect circuit will continuously monitor energy on the cable. The moment energy is detected; the port will turn on fully as to the IEEE specification’s requirements. The power saving function is performed while no link is detected and it will not affect the port capabilities while the link is up.
• When a link is detected on the port, for a shorter cable, the power consumption will be reduced by lowering the signal amplitude, since the signal attenuation is proportional to the cable length. The port will adjust the power based on the cable length and still maintain error free applications from both sides of the link. This mechanism is only available using the hardware support cable diagnostics function.
If the power saving state of port is disabled, all power saving schedules of port will not take effect.
If the power saving state of port LED is disabled, all power saving schedules of port LED will not take effect.
If the power saving state of system hibernation is disabled, all power saving schedules of system hibernation will not take effect.
Format config power_saving mode {length_detection | link_detection | led | port | hibernation} [enable | disable]
Parameters
length_detection - (Optional) Specify the length detection used.
link_detection - (Optional) Specify the power saving link detection state.
led - (Optional) Specify to configure the power saving state of port LED.
port - (Optional) Specify to configure the power saving state of port.
hibernation - (Optional) Specify to configure the power saving state of system hibernation.
enable - Specify to enable power saving state.
disable - Specify to disable power saving state.
Restrictions
Only Administrators and Operators can issue this command.
Example
To enable the power saving state of port, hibernation:
589
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config power_saving mode port hibernation enable
Command: config power_saving mode port hibernation enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
66-2 config power_saving hibernation
Description
This command is used to add or delete the power saving schedule on system hibernation. When the system enters hibernation mode, the Switch changes to a low power state and is idle. It shuts down all the ports, and all network function does not work. Only the console connection will work via the RS232 port.
Format config power_saving hibernation [[add | delete] time_range <range_name 32> | clear_time_range]
Parameters
add - Specify to add a time range.
delete - Specify to delete a time range.
time_range - Specify the name of the time range.
<range_name32> - Enter a name for maximum 32 characters.
clear_time_range - Specify to clear all the time range of system hibernation.
Restrictions
Only Administrators and Operators can issue this command.
Example
To add a time range named “range_1” on system hibernation:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config power_saving hibernation add time_range range_1
Command: config power_saving hibernation add time_range range_1
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
66-3 config power_saving led
Description
This command is used to add or delete the power saving schedule on the LED of all ports. When any schedule is up, all port’s LED will be turned off even device’s LED working on PoE mode.
NOTE: The port LED admin state (configured using the command ‘config led state’) gets high priority. If the port
LED admin state is disabled, all ports’ LED will always be turned off. Currently only three time ranges are supported.
Format config power_saving led [[add | delete] time_range <range_name 32> | clear_time_range]
590
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Parameters
add - Specify to add a time range.
delete - Specify to delete a time range.
time_range - Specify the name of the time range.
<range_name32> - Enter a name for maximum 32 characters.
clear_time_range - Specify to clear all the time range of port LED.
Restrictions
Only Administrators and Operators can issue this command.
Example
To add a time range named “range_1” on port LED:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config power_saving led add time_range range_1
Command: config power_saving led add time_range range_1
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
66-4 config power_saving port
Description
This command is used to add or delete the power saving schedule on the port. When any schedule is up, the specific port will be shut down (disabled).
NOTE: The port’s admin state has high priority. If the port’s admin state is disabled, the specific port will always be shut down (disabled). Currently only three time ranges are supported.
Format config power_saving port [<portlist> | all] [[add | delete] time_range <range_name 32> | clear_time_range]
Parameters
<portlist> - Enter a range of ports.
all - Specify all ports.
add - Specify to add a time range.
delete - Specify to delete a time range.
time_range - Specify the name of the time range.
<range_name32> - Enter a name for maximum 32 characters.
clear_time_range - Specify to clear all the time range of port.
Restrictions
Only Administrators and Operators can issue this command.
Example
To add a time range named “range_1” on port 1:
591
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config power_saving port 1 add time_range range_1
Command: config power_saving port 1 add time_range range_1
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To delete a time range named “range_2” on port 1:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config power_saving port 1 delete time_range range_2
Command: config power_saving port 1 delete time_range range_2
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
66-5 show power_saving
Description
This command is used to display the current state of power saving.
Format show power_saving {length_detection | link_detection | led | port | hibernation}
Parameters
length_detection - (Optional) Displays the length detection configuration of power saving.
link_detection - (Optional) Displays the link detection configuration of power saving.
led - (Optional) Displays the port LED configuration of power saving.
port - (Optional) Displays the port configuration of power saving.
hibernation - (Optional) Displays the system hibernation configuration of power saving.
If no parameter is specified, all configurations of power saving will be displayed.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the power saving function setting:
592
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show power_saving
Command: show power_saving
Function Version: 3.00
Link Detection State: Enabled
Length Detection State: Disabled
Power Saving Configuration On System Hibernation
----------------------------------------------------
State: Enabled
Time Range
--------------------------------
range_1
Power Saving Configuration On Port LED
------------------------------------------
State: Disabled
Time Range
--------------------------------
range_1
Power Saving Configuration On Port
------------------------------------------
State: Enabled
Port Time Range
------- --------------------------------
1 range_1
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
66-6 config led state
Description
This command is used to configure the LED admin state of all ports. When the port LED admin state is disabled, the LEDs of all ports are turned off. If the port LED admin state is enabled, the port LEDs are controlled by the ports' link status.
Format config led state [enable | disable]
Parameters
enable - Specify to enable the LED admin state of all ports.
disable - Specify to disable the LED admin state of all ports.
Restrictions
Only Administrators and Operators can issue this command.
Example
To disable the LED admin state:
593
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config led state disable
Command: config led state disable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
66-7 show led
Description
This command is used to display the setting of all port’s LED admin state.
Format show led
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the setting of all port’s LED admin state:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show led
Command: show led
Port LED State: Disabled
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
594
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 67 PPPoE Circuit ID Insertions
Command List
config pppoe circuit_id_insertion state [enable | disable]
config pppoe circuit_id_insertion ports <portlist> {state [enable | disable] | circuit_id [mac | ip | udf <string
32>]}(1) show pppoe circuit_id_insertion
show pppoe circuit_id_insertion ports {<portlist>}
67-1 config pppoe circuit_id_insertion state
Description
This command is used to enable or disable PPPoE circuit ID insertion function. When both port and global state are enabled, the system will insert the circuit ID tag to the received PPPoE discover and request packet if the tag is absent, and remove the circuit ID tag from the received PPPoE offer and session confirmation packet. The insert circuit ID contains the following information: Client MAC address, Device ID and Port number. By default, Switch IP address is used as the device ID to encode the circuit ID option.
Format config pppoe circuit_id_insertion state [enable | disable]
Parameters
enable - Specify to enable the PPPoE circuit ID insertion on the Switch.
disable - Specify to disable the PPPoE circuit ID insertion on the Switch. This is the default.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To enable the PPPoE circuit insertion state:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config pppoe circuit_id_insertion state enable
Command: config pppoe circuit_id_insertion state enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
67-2 config pppoe circuit_id_insertion ports
Description
This command is used to configure port’s PPPoE Circuit ID insertion function. When the port’s state and the global state are enabled, the system will insert the Circuit ID TAG to the received PPPoE discovery initiation and request packet if the TAG is absent, and remove the Circuit ID TAG from the received PPPoE offer and session confirmation packet.
595
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Format config pppoe circuit_id_insertion ports <portlist> {state [enable | disable] | circuit_id [mac | ip | udf <string
32>]}(1)
Parameters
<portlist> - Enter a list of ports to be configured.
state - Specify to enable or disable port’s PPPoE circuit ID insertion function. The default setting is enable.
enable - Enables port’s PPPoE circuit ID insertion function.
disable - Disables port’s PPPoE circuit ID insertion function.
circuit_id - Specify to configure the device ID part for encoding of the circuit ID option.
mac - The MAC address of the Switch will be used to encode the circuit ID option.
ip - The Switch’s IP address will be used to encode the circuit ID option. This is the default.
udf - A user specified string to be used to encode the circuit ID option.
<string 32> - Enter a string with the maximum length of 32.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To enable port 5 PPPoE circuit ID insertion function:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config pppoe circuit_id_insertion ports 5 state enable
Command: config pppoe circuit_id_insertion ports 5 state enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
67-3 show pppoe circuit_id_insertion
Description
This command is used to display PPPoE circuit ID insertion status.
Format show pppoe circuit_id_insertion
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display PPPoE circuit ID insertion status:
596
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show pppoe circuit_id_insertion
Command: show pppoe circuit_id_insertion
Global PPPoE State: Enabled
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
67-4 show pppoe circuit_id_insertion ports
Description
This command is used to display Switch’s port PPPoE Circuit ID insertion configuration.
Format show pppoe circuit_id_insertion ports {<portlist>}
Parameters
<portlist> - (Optional) Enter a list of ports to be displayed.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display port 2-5 PPPoE circuit ID insertion configuration:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show pppoe circuit_id_insertion ports 2-5
Command: show pppoe circuit_id_insertion ports 2-5
Port State Circuit ID
---- -------- ---------------------------------------------
2 Enabled Switch IP
3 Enabled Switch IP
4 Enabled Switch IP
5 Enabled Switch IP
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
597
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 68 Protocol VLAN Command List
create dot1v_protocol_group group_id <id> {group_name <name 32>}
config dot1v_protocol_group [group_id <id> | group_name <name 32>] [add protocol [ethernet_2 | ieee802.3_snap | ieee802.3_llc] <protocol_value> | delete protocol [ethernet_2 | ieee802.3_snap | ieee802.3_llc] <protocol_value>]
delete dot1v_protocol_group [group_id <id> | group_name <name 32> | all]
show dot1v_protocol_group {[group_id <id> | group_name <name 32>]}
config port dot1v ports [<portlist> | all] [add protocol_group [group_id <id> | group_name <name 32>] [vlan
<vlan_name 32> | vlanid <id>] {priority <value 0-7>} | delete protocol_group [group_id <id> | all]]
show port dot1v {ports <portlist>}
68-1 create dot1v_protocol_group_id
Description
This command is used to create a protocol group for protocol VLAN function.
Format create dot1v_protocol_group group_id < id> {group_name <name 32>}
Parameters
<id> - Enter the group ID used here.
group_name - (Optional) The name of the protocol group. The maximum length is 32 chars.
<name 32> - Enter the group name here. This name can be up to 32 characters long.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To create a protocol group:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#create dot1v_protocol_group group_id 10 group_name General_Group
Command: create dot1v_protocol_group group_id 10 group_name General_Group
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
68-2 config dot1v_protocol_group add protocol
Description
This command is used to add a protocol to a protocol group. The selection of a protocol can be a pre-defined protocol type or a user defined protocol.
598
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Format config dot1v_protocol_group [group_id <id> | group_name <name 32>] [add protocol [ethernet_2 | ieee802.3_snap | ieee802.3_llc] <protocol_value> | delete protocol [ethernet_2 | ieee802.3_snap | ieee802.3_llc] <protocol_value>]
Parameters
group_id - The ID of the protocol group which is used to identify a set of protocols.
<id> - Enter the group ID used here.
group_name - The name of the protocol group.
<name 32> - Enter the group name here. This name can be up to 32 characters long.
add - Specify that the protocol will be added to the specified group.
protocol - The protocol value is used to identify a protocol of the frame type specified.
ethernet_2 - Specify that the Ethernet 2 protocol will be used.
ieee802.3_snap - Specify that the IEEE 802.3 Snap protocol will be used.
ieee802.3_llc - Specify that the IEEE 802.3 LLC protocol will be used.
<protocol_value> - Enter the protocol value here.
delete - Specify that the protocol will be removed from the specified group.
protocol - The protocol value is used to identify a protocol of the frame type specified.
ieee802.3_snap - Specify that the IEEE 802.3 Snap protocol will be used.
ieee802.3_llc - Specify that the IEEE 802.3 LLC protocol will be used.
<protocol_value> - Enter the protocol value here.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To add a protocol IPv6 to protocol group 10:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config dot1v_protocol_group group_id 10 add protocol ethernet_2 86dd
Command: config dot1v_protocol_group group_id 10 add protocol ethernet_2 86DD
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
68-3 delete dot1v_protocol_group
Description
This command is used to delete a protocol group.
Format delete dot1v_protocol_group [group_id <id> | group_name <name 32> | all]
Parameters
group_id - Specify the group ID to be deleted.
<id> - Enter the group ID used here.
group_name - Specify the name of the group to be deleted.
<name 32> - Enter the group name here. This name can be up to 32 characters long.
all - Specify that all the protocol group will be deleted.
599
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To delete protocol group 100:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#delete dot1v_protocol_group group_id 100
Command: delete dot1v_protocol_group group_id 100
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
68-4 show dot1v_protocol_group
Description
This command is used to display the protocols defined in a protocol group.
Format show dot1v_protocol_group {[group_id <id> | group_name <name 32>]}
Parameters
group_id - (Optional) Specify the ID of the group to be displayed.
<id> - Enter the group ID used here.
group_name - (Optional) Specify the name of the protocol group to be displayed.
<name 32> - Enter the group name here. This name can be up to 32 characters long.
If no group ID is specified, all the configured protocol groups will be displayed.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the protocol group ID 10:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show dot1v_protocol_group group_id 10
Command: show dot1v_protocol_group group_id 10
Protocol Group ID Protocol Group Name Frame Type Protocol Value
----------------- -------------------------------- -------------- --------------
10 General_Group EthernetII 86DD
Total Entries: 1
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
600
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
68-5 config port dot1v ports
Description
This command is used to assign the VLAN for untagged packets ingress from the port list based on the protocol group configured. This assignment can be removed by the delete protocol_group option.
When priority is not specified in the command, the port default priority will be the priority for those untagged packets classified by the protocol VLAN.
Format config port dot1v ports [<portlist> | all] [add protocol_group [group_id <id> | group_name <name 32>]
[vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <id>] {priority <value 0-7>} | delete protocol_group [group_id <id> | all]]
Parameters
<portlist> - Enter a list of ports used for the configuration here.
all - Specify that all the ports will be used for this configuration.
add - Specify that the group specified will be added.
protocol_group - Specify that parameters for the group will follow.
group_id - Specify the group ID of the protocol group.
<id> - Enter the group ID used here.
group_name - Specify the name of the protocol group.
<name 32> - Enter the name of the group used here. This name can be up to 32 characters long.
vlan - The VLAN that is to be associated with this protocol group on this port.
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the name of the VLAN here. This name can be up to 32 characters long.
vlanid - Specify the VLAN ID.
<id> - Enter the VLAN ID used here.
priority - (Optional) Specify the priority to be associated with the packet which has been classified to the specified VLAN by the protocol.
<value 0-7> - Enter the priority value here. This value must be between 0 and 7.
delete - Specify that the group specified will be deleted.
protocol_group - Specify that parameters for the group will follow.
group_id - Specify the group ID of the protocol group.
<id> - Enter the group ID used here.
all - Specify that all the groups will be deleted.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure the group ID 10 on port 3 to be associated with VLAN marketing-1:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config port dot1v ports 3 add protocol_group group_id 10 vlan marketing-1
Command: config port dot1v ports 3 add protocol_group group_id 10 vlan marketing-1
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
68-6 show port dot1v
Description
This command is used to display the VLAN to be associated with untagged packet ingressed from a port based on the protocol group.
601
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Format show port dot1v {ports <portlist>}
Parameters
ports - (Optional) Specify a range of ports to be displayed.
<portlist> - Enter a list of ports used for the configuration here.
If no port is specified, information for all ports will be displayed.
Restrictions
None.
Example
The example display the protocol VLAN information for ports 1:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show port dot1v ports 1
Command: show port dot1v ports 1
Port: 1
Protocol Group ID VLAN Name Protocol Priority
------------------- --------------------------------- -----------------
1 default -
2 VLAN2 -
3 VLAN3 -
4 VLAN4 -
Total Entries: 4
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
602
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 69 QinQ Command List
enable qinq disable qinq
config qinq inner_tpid <hex 0x1 - 0xffff>
config qinq ports [<portlist> | all] {role [uni | nni] | missdrop [enable | disable] | outer_tpid <hex 0x1 - 0xffff> | add_inner_tag [<hex 0x1 - 0xffff> | disable]} show qinq show qinq inner_tpid
show qinq ports {<portlist>}
create vlan_translation ports [<portlist> | all] [add cvid <vidlist> | replace cvid <vlanid 1-4094>] svid <vlanid 1-
4094> {priority <priority 0-7>}
delete vlan_translation ports [<portlist> | all] {cvid <vidlist>}
show vlan_translation {[ports <portlist> | cvid <vidlist>]}
69-1 enable qinq
Description
This command is used to enable QinQ. When QinQ is enabled, all network port roles will be NNI ports and outer
TPID will be set to 0x88A8; all existing static VLANs will run as S-VLAN; all dynamic learned L2 address will be cleared; all dynamic registered VLAN entries will be cleared; and GVRP will be disabled.
To run GVRP on the Switch, the administrator should enable GVRP manually. In QinQ mode, GVRP protocol will employ reserve address 01-80-C2-00-00-0D.
Format enable qinq
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To enable QinQ:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#enable qinq
Command: enable qinq
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
603
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
69-2 disable qinq
Description
This command is used to disable the QinQ. When QinQ is disabled, all dynamic learned L2 addresses will be cleared, all dynamic registered VLAN entries will be cleared, and GVRP will be disabled. To run GVRP on the
Switch, the administrator should enable GVRP manually.
Format disable qinq
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To disable QinQ:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#disable qinq
Command: disable qinq
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
69-3 config qinq inner_tpid
Description
This command is used to configure the inner TPID of the system. The inner TPID is used to decide if the ingress packet is c-tagged. Inner tag TPID is per system configurable.
Format config qinq inner_tpid <hex 0x1-0xffff>
Parameters
<hex 0x1-0xffff> - Enter the inner-TPID of the system here.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure the inner TPID in the system to 0x9100:
604
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config qinq inner_tpid 0x9100
Command: config qinq inner_tpid 0x9100
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
69-4 config qinq ports
Description
This command is used to configure the QinQ port's parameters.
Format config qinq ports [<portlist> | all] {role [uni | nni] | missdrop [enable | disable] | outer_tpid <hex 0x1 - 0xffff>
| add_inner_tag [<hex 0x1 - 0xffff> | disable]}
Parameters
<portlist> - Enter the list of ports to be configured here.
all - Specify that all the ports will be used for the configuration.
role - (Optional) Specify the port role in QinQ mode.
uni - Specify that the port is connecting to the customer network.
nni - Specify that the port is connecting to the service provider network.
missdrop - (Optional) Specify the state of the miss drop of ports option.
enable - Specify that the miss drop of ports option will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the miss drop of ports option will be disabled.
outer_tpid - (Optional) Specify the outer-TPID of a port.
<hex 0x1 - 0xffff> - Enter the outer-TPID value used here.
add_inner_tag - (Optional) Specify to add an inner tag for ingress untagged packets. If set, the inner tag will be added for the ingress untagged packets and therefore the packets that egress to the NNI port will be double tagged. If disable, only the s-tag will be added for ingress untagged packets.
<hex 0x1 - 0xffff> - Enter the inner tag value used here.
disable - Specify that the add inner tag option will be disabled.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure port list 1-4 as NNI port and set the TPID to 0x88A8:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config qinq ports 1-4 role nni outer_tpid 0x88A8
Command: config qinq ports 1-4 role nni outer_tpid 0x88A8
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
69-5 show qinq
Description
This command is used to display the global QinQ status.
605
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Format show qinq
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the global QinQ status:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show qinq
Command: show qinq
QinQ Status : Enabled
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
69-6 show qinq inner_tpid
Description
This command is used to display the inner-TPID of a system.
Format show qinq inner_tpid
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the inner-TPID of a system:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show qinq inner_tpid
Command: show qinq inner_tpid
Inner TPID: 0x9100
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
606
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
69-7 show qinq ports
Description
This command is used to display the QinQ configuration of the ports.
Format show qinq ports {<portlist>}
Parameters
<portlist> - (Optional) Enter the list of ports to be displayed here.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show the QinQ mode for ports 1-2:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show qinq ports 1-2
Command: show qinq ports 1-2
Port ID: 1
---------------------------------------------------------
Role: NNI
Miss Drop: Disabled
Outer Tpid: 0x8100
Add Inner Tag: Disabled
Port ID: 2
---------------------------------------------------------
Role: NNI
Miss Drop: Disabled
Outer Tpid: 0x8100
Add Inner Tag: Disabled
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
69-8 create vlan_translation ports
Description
This command is used to create a VLAN translation rule. This setting will not be effective when the QinQ mode is disabled.
This configuration is only effective for a UNI port. At UNI port, the ingress C-VLAN tagged packets will be translated to S-VLAN tagged packets by adding or replacing according the configured rule. The S-VLAN Tag of egress packets at this port will be recovered to C-VLAN Tag or stripped.
Format create vlan_translation ports [<portlist> | all] [add cvid <vidlist> | replace cvid <vlanid 1-4094>] svid <vlanid
1-4094> {priority <priority 0-7>}
607
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Parameters
<portlist> - Enter the list of ports to be configured here.
all - Specify that all the ports will be used for the configuration.
add - Specify to add an S-Tag to the packet.
cvid - Specify the customer VLAN ID used.
<vidlist> - Enter the customer VLAN ID used here.
replace - Specify to replace the C-Tag with the S-Tag.
cvid - Specify the customer VLAN ID used.
<vlanid 1-4094> - Enter the customer VLAN ID used here.
svid - Specify the service provider VLAN ID used.
<vlanid 1-4094> - Enter the service provider VLAN ID used here.
priority - (Optional) Specify to assign an 802.1p priority to the S-Tag. If the priority is not specified, the priority of the ports will be set to S-TAG by default.
<priority 0-7> - Enter the 802.1p S-Tag priority value here. This value must be between 0 and 7.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To replace the C-Tag in which the CVID is 20, with the S-Tag and the S-VID is 200 at UNI Port 1:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#create vlan_translation ports 1 replace cvid 20 svid 200
Command: create vlan_translation ports 1 replace cvid 20 svid 200
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To add S-Tag, when the S-VID is 300, to a packet in which the CVID is 30 at UNI Port 1:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#create vlan_translation ports 1 add cvid 30 svid 300
Command: create vlan_translation ports 1 add cvid 30 svid 300
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
69-9 delete vlan_translation ports
Description
This command is used to delete translation relationships between the C-VLAN and the S-VLAN.
Format delete vlan_translation ports [<portlist> | all] {cvid <vidlist>}
Parameters
<portlist> - Enter the list of ports to be configured here.
all - Specify that all the ports will be used for the configuration.
cvid - (Optional) Specify the rules for the specified CVIDs. If the CVID is not specified, all rules configured for the port will be deleted.
<vidlist> - Enter the CVID value here.
608
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To delete a VLAN translation rule on ports 1-4:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#delete vlan_translation ports 1-4
Command: delete vlan_translation ports 1-4
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
69-10 show vlan_translation
Description
This command is used to display the existing C-VLAN-based VLAN translation rules.
Format show vlan_translation {[ports <portlist> | cvid <vidlist>]}
Parameters
ports - (Optional) Specify a list of ports to be displayed.
<portlist> - Enter the list of ports to be displayed here.
cvid - (Optional) Specify the rules for the specified CVIDs.
<vidlist> - Enter the CVID value used here.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show C-VLANs based on VLAN translation rules in the system:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show vlan_translation
Command: show vlan_translation
Port CVID SPVID Action Priority
----- -------- -------- ------- ---------
1 20 200 Replace -
1 30 300 Add -
Total Entries: 2
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
609
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 70 Quality of Service (QoS) Command
List
config bandwidth_control [<portlist> | all] {rx_rate [no_limit | <value 64-10240000>] | tx_rate [no_limit | <value
64-10240000>]}
show bandwidth_control {<portlist>}
config per_queue bandwidth_control {ports [<portlist> | all]} <cos_id_list 0-7> {{min_rate [no_limit | <value 64-
10240000>]} max_rate [no_limit | <value 64-10240000>]}(1)
show per_queue bandwidth_control {<portlist>}
config scheduling {ports [<portlist> | all]} <class_id 0-7> [strict | weight <value 1-127>]
config scheduling_mechanism {ports [<portlist> | all]} [strict | wrr | wdrr]
show scheduling {<portlist>}
show scheduling_mechanism {<portlist>}
config 802.1p user_priority <priority 0-7> <class_id 0-7> show 802.1p user_priority
config 802.1p default_priority [<portlist> | all] <priority 0-7>
show 802.1p default_priority {<portlist>}
config 802.1p map {[<portlist> | all]} 1p_color <priority_list> to [green | red | yellow]
show 802.1p map 1p_color {<portlist>}
config dscp trust [<portlist> | all] state [enable | disable]
show dscp trust {<portlist>}
config dscp map {[<portlist> | all]} [dscp_priority <dscp_list> to <priority 0-7> | dscp_dscp <dscp_list> to <dscp 0-
63> | dscp_color <dscp_list> to [green | red | yellow]]
show dscp map {<portlist>} [dscp_priority | dscp_dscp | dscp_color] {dscp <dscp_list>}
show 802.1p queue statistics port <port>
70-1 config bandwidth_control
Description
This command is used to configure the port bandwidth limit control.
Format config bandwidth_control [<portlist> | all] {rx_rate [no_limit | <value 64-10240000>] | tx_rate [no_limit |
<value 64-10240000>]}
Parameters
<portlist> - Enter a range of ports to be configured.
all - Specify that all the ports will be used for this configuration.
rx_rate - (Optional) Specify the limitation applied to receive data rate.
no_limit - Indicates there is no limit on receiving bandwidth of the configured ports. An integer value from m to n sets a maximum limit in Kbits/sec. The actual bandwidth will be an adjusted value based on the user specified bandwidth. The actual limit may be equal to the user specified limit, but will not exceed it. The actual limit recognized by the device, will be displayed when the command is executed.
<value 64-10240000> - Enter the receiving data rate here. This value must be between 64 and 10240000.
tx_rate - (Optional) Specify the limitation applied to transmit data rate.
no_limit - Indicates there is no limit on port tx bandwidth. An integer value from m to n sets a maximum limit in
Kbits/sec. The actual bandwidth will be an adjusted value based on the user specified bandwidth. The actual limit may be equal to the user specified limit, but will not exceed it. The actual limit recognized by the device, will be displayed when the command is executed.
<value 64-10240000> - Enter the transmitting data rate here. This value must be between 64 and 10240000.
610
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure the port bandwidth:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config bandwidth_control 1-10 tx_rate 100
Command: config bandwidth_control 1-10 tx_rate 100
Success
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
70-2 show bandwidth_control
Description
This command is used to display the port bandwidth configurations.
The bandwidth can also be assigned by the RADIUS server through the authentication process. If RADIUS server has assigned the bandwidth, then the RADIUS-assigned bandwidth will be the effective bandwidth. The authentication with the RADIUS sever can be per port or per user. For per-user authentication, there may be multiple bandwidth control values assigned when there are multiple users attached to this specific port. In this case, the largest assigned bandwidth value will be applied to the effective bandwidth for this specific port. Note that only devices that support MAC-based VLAN can provide per user authentication.
Format show bandwidth_control {<portlist>}
Parameters
<portlist> - (Optional) Enter a range of ports to be displayed.
If no parameter specified, system will display all ports bandwidth configurations.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display port bandwidth control table:
611
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show bandwidth_control 1-10
Command: show bandwidth_control 1-10
Bandwidth Control Table
Port RX Rate TX Rate Effective RX Effective TX
(Kbit/sec) (Kbit/sec) (Kbit/sec) (Kbit/sec)
----- ---------- ---------- ---------------- ----------------
1 No Limit 64 No Limit 64
2 No Limit 64 No Limit 64
3 No Limit 64 No Limit 64
4 No Limit 64 No Limit 64
5 No Limit 64 No Limit 64
6 No Limit 64 No Limit 64
7 No Limit 64 No Limit 64
8 No Limit 64 No Limit 64
9 No Limit 64 No Limit 64
10 No Limit 64 No Limit 64
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
70-3 config per_queue bandwidth_control
Description
This command is used to configure per port CoS bandwidth control.
Format config per_queue bandwidth_control {ports [<portlist> | all]} <cos_id_list 0-7> {{min_rate [no_limit | <value
64-10240000>]} max_rate [no_limit | <value 64-10240000>]}(1)
Parameters
ports - (Optional) Specify a range of ports to be configured.
<portlist> - Enter the list of port used for this configuration here.
all - For set all ports in the system, you may use “all” parameter. If no parameter is specified, system will set all ports.
<cos_id_list 0-7> - Enter a list of priority queues. The priority queue number is ranged from 0 to 7.
min_rate - (Optional) Specify that one of the parameters below (no_limit or <value m-n) will be applied to the mini-rate at which the above specified class will be allowed to receive packets.
no_limit - Specify that there will be no limit on the rate of packets received by the above specified class.
<value 64-10240000> - Enter the packet limit, in Kbps, that the above ports will be allowed to receive. If the specified rate is not multiple of minimum granularity, the rate will be adjusted.
max_rate - Specify that one of the parameters below (no_limit or <value m-n >) will be applied to the maximum rate at which the above specified class will be allowed to transmit packets.
no_limit - Specify that there will be no limit on the rate of packets received by the above specified class.
<value 64-10240000> - Enter the packet limit, in Kbps, that the above ports will be allowed to receive. If the specified rate is not multiple of minimum granularity, the rate will be adjusted.
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To configure the ports 1-10 CoS bandwidth queue 1 min rate to 130 and max rate to 100000:
612
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config per_queue bandwidth_control ports 1-10 1 min_rate 130 max_rate
1000
Command: config per_queue bandwidth_control ports 1-10 1 min_rate 130 max_rate 1000
Granularity: TX: 64. Actual Rate: MIN: 128, MAX: 960.
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
70-4 show per_queue bandwidth_control
Description
This command is used to display per port CoS bandwidth control settings.
Format show per_queue bandwidth_control {<portlist>}
Parameters
<portlist> - (Optional) Enter a range of ports to be displayed.
If no parameter is specified, system will display all ports CoS bandwidth configurations.
Restrictions
None.
Example
Display per port CoS bandwidth control table:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show per_queue bandwidth_control 10
Command: show per_queue bandwidth_control 10
Queue Bandwidth Control Table On Port: 10
Queue Min Rate(Kbit/sec) Max Rate(Kbit/sec)
0 640 No Limit
1 640 No Limit
2 640 No Limit
3 640 No Limit
4 No Limit No Limit
5 No Limit No Limit
6 No Limit No Limit
7 No Limit No Limit
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
70-5 config scheduling
Description
This command is used to configure the traffic scheduling mechanism for each CoS queue.
613
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Format config scheduling {ports [<portlist> | all]} <class_id 0-7> [strict | weight <value 1-127>]
Parameters
ports – (Optional) Specify a range of ports to be configured.
<portlist> - Enter the list of port used for this configuration here.
all – Specify all the ports to be configured.
<class_id 0-7> - Enter the 8 hardware priority queues which the config scheduling command will apply to. The four hardware priority queues are identified by number from 0 to 7 with the 0 queue being the lowest priority.
strict - The queue will operate in strict mode.
weight - Specify the weights for weighted round robin. A value between 0 and n can be specified.
<value 1-127> - Enter the weights for weighted round robin value here. This value must be between 1 and
127.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure the traffic scheduling CoS queue 1 to weight 25 on port 10:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config scheduling ports 10 1 weight 25
Command: config scheduling ports 10 1 weight 25
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
70-6 config scheduling_mechanism
Description
This command is used to configure the traffic scheduling mechanism for each CoS queue.
Format config scheduling_mechanism {ports [<portlist> | all]} [strict | wrr | wdrr]
Parameters
ports - (Optional) Specify a range of ports to be configured.
<portlist> - Enter the list of port used for this configuration here.
all - Specify to set all ports in the system. If no port is specified, system will set all ports.
strict - The highest class of service is the first to process traffic. That is, the highest class of service will finish before other queues empty.
wrr - Use the weighted round-robin algorithm to handle packets in an even distribution in priority classes of service.
wdrr - Use the weighted deficit round-robin algorithm to handle packets in an even distribution in priority classes of service.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
614
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Example
To configure the traffic scheduling mechanism for each CoS queue:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config scheduling_mechanism strict
Command: config scheduling_mechanism strict
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To configure the traffic scheduling mechanism for CoS queue on port 1:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config scheduling_mechanism ports 1 strict
Command: config scheduling_mechanism ports 1 strict
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
70-7 show scheduling
Description
This command is used to display the current traffic scheduling parameters.
Format show scheduling {<portlist>}
Parameters
<portlist> - (Optional) Enter a range of ports to be displayed.
If no parameter specified, system will display all ports scheduling configurations.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the traffic scheduling parameters for each CoS queue on port 1(take eight hardware priority queues for example):
615
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show scheduling 1
Command: show scheduling 1
QOS Output Scheduling On Port: 1
Class ID Weight
-------- ------
Class-0 1
Class-1 2
Class-2 3
Class-3 4
Class-4 5
Class-5 6
Class-6 7
Class-7 8
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
70-8 show scheduling_mechanism
Description
This command is used to show the traffic scheduling mechanism.
Format show scheduling_mechanism {<portlist>}
Parameters
<portlist> - (Optional) Enter a range of ports to be displayed.
If no parameter specified, system will display all ports scheduling mechanism configurations.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show scheduling mechanism:
616
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show scheduling_mechanism
Command: show scheduling_mechanism
Port Mode
----- ------
1 Strict
2 Strict
3 Strict
4 Strict
5 Strict
6 Strict
7 Strict
8 Strict
9 Strict
10 Strict
11 Strict
12 Strict
13 Strict
14 Strict
15 Strict
16 Strict
17 Strict
18 Strict
19 Strict
20 Strict
21 Strict
22 Strict
23 Strict
24 Strict
25 Strict
26 Strict
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
70-9 config 802.1p user_priority
Description
This command is used to map the 802.1p user priority of an incoming packet to one of the eight hardware queues available on the Switch.
Format config 802.1p user_priority <priority 0-7> <class_id 0-7>
Parameters
<priority 0-7> - Enter a priority class value to associate with.
<class_id 0-7> - Enter the Switch’s class hardware priority queue ID. The switch has 8 hardware priority queues available. They are numbered between 0 (the lowest priority) and 7 (the highest priority).
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
617
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Example
To configure the 802.1p user priority:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config 802.1p user_priority 1 3
Command: config 802.1p user_priority 1 3
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
70-10 show 802.1p user_priority
Description
This command is used to display 802.1p user priority for ports.
Format show 802.1p user_priority
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the 802.1p user priority:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show 802.1p user_priority
Command: show 802.1p user_priority
QOS Class of Traffic:
Priority-0 -> <Class-2>
Priority-1 -> <Class-0>
Priority-2 -> <Class-1>
Priority-3 -> <Class-3>
Priority-4 -> <Class-4>
Priority-5 -> <Class-5>
Priority-6 -> <Class-6>
Priority-7 -> <Class-7>
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
70-11 config 802.1p default_priority
Description
This command is used to configure the 802.1p default priority settings on the Switch. If an untagged packet is received by the Switch, the priority configured with this command will be written to the packet’s priority field.
618
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Format config 802.1p default_priority [<portlist> | all] <priority 0-7>
Parameters
<portlist> - Enter a range of ports for which the default priority is to be configured. That is, a range of ports for which all untagged packets received will be assigned the priority specified below. The port list is specified by listing the beginning port number on the Switch, separated by a colon. Then highest port number of the range
(also separated by a colon) are specified. The beginning and end of the port list range are separated by a dash.
all - Specify that the command apply to all ports on the Switch.
<priority 0-7> - Enter the priority value (0 to 7) assigned to untagged packets received by the Switch or a range of ports on the Switch.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure the 802.1p default priority settings on the Switch:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config 802.1p default_priority all 5
Command: config 802.1p default_priority all 5
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
70-12 show 802.1p default_priority
Description
This command is used to display the current configured default priority settings on the Switch.
The default priority can also be assigned by the RADIUS server through the authentication process. The authentication with the RADIUS sever can be per port or port user. For per port authentication, the priority assigned by RADIUS server will be the effective port default priority. For per user authentication, the priority assigned by RADIUS will not be the effective port default priority whereas it will become the priority associated with
MAC address. Note that only devices supporting MAC-based VLAN can provide per user authentication.
Format show 802.1p default_priority {<portlist>}
Parameters
<portlist> - (Optional) Enter a range of ports to be displayed.
If no parameter is specified, all ports for 802.1p default priority will be displayed.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display 802.1p default priority:
619
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show 802.1p default_priority 1-10
Command: show 802.1p default_priority 1-10
Port Priority Effective Priority
---- ----------- ------------------
1 5 5
2 5 5
3 5 5
4 5 5
5 5 5
6 5 5
7 5 5
8 5 5
9 5 5
10 5 5
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
70-13 config dscp trust
Description
This command is used to configure the state of DSCP trust per port. When DSCP is not trusted, 802.1p is trusted.
Format config dscp trust [<portlist> | all] state [enable | disable]
Parameters
<portlist> - Enter the list of port used for this configuration.
all - Specify that the command apply to all ports on the Switch.
state - Specify to enable or disable to trust DSCP. By default, DSCP trust is disabled.
enable - Specify to enable the DSCP trust state.
disable - Specify to disable the DSCP trust state.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
Enable DSCP trust on ports 1-8.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config dscp trust 1-8 state enable
Command: config dscp trust 1-8 state enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
620
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
70-14 config 802.1p map
Description
This command is used to configure the mapping of 802.1p to the packet’s initial color. The mapping of 802.1p to a color is used to determine the initial color of the packet when the policing function of the packet is color aware and the packet is 1p-trusted.
Format config 802.1p map {[<portlist> | all]} 1p_color <priority_list> to [green | red | yellow]
Parameters
<portlist> - (Optional) Enter the list of port used for this configuration.
all - (Optional) Specify that the command apply to all ports on the Switch.
1p_color - The list of source priority for incoming packets.
<priority_list> - Enter the list of source priority for incoming packets.
to - The mapped color for a packet.
green - Specify green as the mapped color.
red - Specify red as the mapped color.
yellow - Specify yellow as the mapped color.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
If a product supports per-port 802.1p mapping configuration, configure the mapping of 802.1p priority 1 to red on ports 1-8.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config 802.1p map 1-8 1p_color 1 to red
Command: config 802.1p map 1-8 1p_color 1 to red
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
70-15 show 802.1p map 1p_color
Description
This command is used to display the 802.1p to color mapping.
Format show 802.1p map 1p_color {<portlist>}
Parameters
<portlist> - (Optional) Enter a list of ports.
Restrictions
None.
621
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Example
To show the 802.1p color mapping on port 1:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show 802.1p map 1p_color 1
Command: show 802.1p map 1p_color 1
802.1p to Color Mapping:
----------------------------------------------------------------
Port 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
---- ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------
1 Green Green Green Green Green Green Green Green
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
70-16 show dscp trust
Description
This command is used to display DSCP trust state for the specified ports on the Switch.
Format show dscp trust {<portlist>}
Parameters
<portlist> - (Optional) A range of ports to display.
If not specify the port, all ports for DSCP trust status on the Switch will be displayed.
Restrictions
None.
Example
Display DSCP trust status on ports 1-8.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show dscp trust 1-8
Command: show dscp trust 1-8
Port DSCP-Trust
---- ----------
1 Disabled
2 Disabled
3 Disabled
4 Disabled
5 Disabled
6 Disabled
7 Disabled
8 Disabled
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
622
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
70-17 config dscp map
Description
This command is used to configure DSCP mapping. The mapping of DSCP to priority will be used to determine the priority of the packet (which will be then used to determine the scheduling queue) when the port is in DSCP trust state.
The mapping of DSCP to color will be used to determine the initial color of the packet when the policing function of the packet is color aware and the packet is DSCP-trusted.
The DSCP-to-DSCP mapping is used in the swap of DSCP of the packet when the packet is ingresses to the port.
The remaining processing of the packet will base on the new DSCP. By default, the DSCP is mapped to the same
DSCP.
These DSCP mapping will take effect at the same time when IP packet ingress from a DSCP-trusted port.
Format config dscp map {[<portlist> | all]} [dscp_priority <dscp_list> to <priority 0-7> | dscp_dscp <dscp_list> to
<dscp 0-63> | dscp_color <dscp_list> to [green | red | yellow]]
Parameters
<portlist> - (Optional) Enter the list of port used for this configuration here.
all – (Optional) Specify that all the ports will be included in this configuration.
dscp_priority - Specify a list of DSCP value to be mapped to a specific priority.
<dscp_list> - Enter the DSCP priority list here.
to - Specify that the above or following parameter will be mapped to the previously mentioned parameter.
<priority 0-7> - Enter the result priority of mapping.
dscp_dscp - Specify a list of DSCP value to be mapped to a specific DSCP.
<dscp_list> - Enter the DSCP to DSCP list here.
to - Specify that the above or following parameter will be mapped to the previously mentioned parameter.
<dscp 0-63> - Enter the result DSCP of mapping.
dscp_color - Specify a list of DSCP value to be mapped to a specific color.
<dscp_list> - Enter the DSCP to color list here.
to - Specify that the above or following parameter will be mapped to the previously mentioned parameter.
green - Specify the result color of mapping to be green.
red - Specify the result color of mapping to be red.
yellow - Specify the result color of mapping to be yellow.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure the mapping of the DSCP priority to priority 1:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config dscp map 1-8 dscp_priority 1 to 1
Command: config dscp map 1-8 dscp_priority 1 to 1
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To configure the global mapping of the DSCP priority to priority 1:
623
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config dscp map dscp_priority 1 to 1
Command: config dscp map dscp_priority 1 to 1
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
70-18 show dscp map
Description
This command is used to show DSCP trusted port list and mapped color, priority and DSCP.
Format show dscp map {<portlist>} [dscp_priority | dscp_dscp | dscp_color] {dscp <dscp_list>}
Parameters
<portlist> - (Optional) Enter a range of ports to show. If no port is specified, all ports’ DSCP mapping will be displayed.
dscp_priority - Specify a list of DSCP value to be mapped to a specific priority.
dscp_dscp - Specify a list of DSCP value to be mapped to a specific DSCP.
dscp_color - Specify a list of DSCP value to be mapped to a specific color.
dscp - (Optional) This Specify DSCP value that will be mapped.
<dscp_list> - Enter the DSCP list here.
Restrictions
None.
Example
In case of project support per port configure, show DSCP map configuration on port 1.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show dscp map 1 dscp_dscp
Command: show dscp map 1 dscp_dscp
DSCP to DSCP Mapping:
--------------------------------------------------------------
Port 1 | 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-----------+--------------------------------------------------
0 | 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 | 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
2 | 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
3 | 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
4 | 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49
5 | 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59
6 | 60 61 62 63
--------------------------------------------------------------
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
624
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
70-19 show 802.1p queue statistics port
Description
This command is used to display the per queue counters for each port.
Format show 802.1p queue statistics port <port>
Parameters
<port> - Enter the port to be displayed.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the per queue counters for port 10:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show 802.1p queue statistics port 10
Command: show 802.1p queue statistics port 10
Notes:
(1)Min Bandwidth: minimum bandwidth setting, associated with per queue bandwidth control, if user doesn't configure it, the min bandwidth will be 0.
(2)Max Bandwidth: maximum bandwidth setting, associated with per queue bandwidth control, if user doesn't configure it, the max bandwidth will be the current port's link speed.
Queue Min Bandwidth Packets/sec Total packets
Max Bandwidth Bytes/sec Total Bytes
-----------------------------------------------------------
0 0 0 0
0 0 0
-----------------------------------------------------------
1 0 0 0
0 0 0
-----------------------------------------------------------
2 0 0 0
0 0 0
-----------------------------------------------------------
3 0 0 0
0 0 0
-----------------------------------------------------------
4 0 0 0
0 0 0
-----------------------------------------------------------
5 0 0 0
0 0 0
-----------------------------------------------------------
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
625
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 71 RADIUS Client Command List
config radius add <server_index 1-3> [<server_ip> | <ipv6addr>] [key <password 32> | encryption_key
<password 56>] [default | {auth_port <udp_port_number 1-65535> | acct_port <udp_port_number 1-65535> | timeout <sec 1-255> | retransmit <int 1-20>}(1)]
config radius delete <server_index 1-3>
config radius <server_index 1-3> {ipaddress [<server_ip> | <ipv6addr>] | [key <password 32> | encryption_key
<password 56 >] | auth_port [<udp_port_number 1-65535 >| default] | acct_port [<udp_port_number 1-65535>
| default ] | timeout [<sec 1-255> | default] | retransmit [<int 1-20> | default]}(1) show radius show auth_client show acct_client
71-1 config radius add
Description
This command is used to add a new RADIUS server. The server with lower index has higher authenticated priority.
Format config radius add <server_index 1-3> [<server_ip> | <ipv6addr>] [key <password 32> | encryption_key
<password 56>] [default | {auth_port <udp_port_number 1-65535> | acct_port <udp_port_number 1-65535>
| timeout <sec 1-255> | retransmit <int 1-20>}(1)]
Parameters
<server_index 1-3> - Enter the RADIUS server index. This value must be between 1 and 3.
<server_ip> - Enter the IP address of the RADIUS server here.
<ipv6addr> - Enter the IPv6 address of the RADIUS server here.
key - The key pre-negotiated between switch and the RADIUS server. It is used to encrypt user’s authentication data before being transmitted over internet. The maximum length of the key is 32.
<password 32> - Enter the password here. The password can be up to 32 characters long.
encryption_key - Specify the key pre-negotiated between the switch and the RADIUS server. It is used to encrypt the user’s authentication data before being transmitted over the Internet.
<password 56> - Enter the encryption key.
default - Sets the authentication UDP port number to 1812 accounting UDP port number to 1813, timeout to 5 seconds and retransmit to 2.
auth_port - Specify the UDP port number which is used to transmit RADIUS authentication data between the
Switch and the RADIUS server. The range is 1 to 65535.
<udp_port_number 1-65535> - Enter the authentication port number here. This value must be between 1 and
65535.
acct_port - Specify the UDP port number which is used to transmit RADIUS accounting statistics between the
Switch and the RADIUS server. The range is 1 to 65535.
<udp_port_number 1-65535> - Enter the accounting port number here. This value must be between 1 and
65535.
timeout - The waiting time in second for the server to reply. The default value is 5 seconds.
<sec 1-255> - Enter the timeout value here. This value must be between 1 and 255 seconds.
retransmit - The count for re-transmitting. The default value is 2.
<int 1-20> - Enter the re-transmit value here. This value must be between 1 and 20.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
626
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Example
To add a new RADIUS server:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config radius add 1 10.48.74.121 key dlink default
Command: config radius add 1 10.48.74.121 key dlink default
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
71-2 config radius delete
Description
This command is used to delete a RADIUS server.
Format config radius delete <server_index 1-3>
Parameters
<server_index 1-3> - Enter the RADIUS server index.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To delete a RADIUS server:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config radius delete 1
Command: config radius delete 1
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
71-3 config radius
Description
This command is used to configure a RADIUS server.
Format config radius <server_index 1-3> {ipaddress [<server_ip> | <ipv6addr>] | [key <password 32> | encryption_key <password 56 >] | auth_port [<udp_port_number 1-65535 >| default] | acct_port
[<udp_port_number 1-65535> | default ] | timeout [<sec 1-255> | default] | retransmit [<int 1-20> | default]}(1)
Parameters
<server_index 1-3> - Enter the RADIUS server index here. This value must be between 1 and 3.
ipaddress - The IP address of the RADIUS server.
<server_ip> - Enter the RADIUS server IP address here.
627
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
<ipv6addr> - Enter the RADIUS server IPv6 address used here.
key - The key pre-negotiated between switch and RADIUS server. It is used to encrypt user’s authentication data before being transmitted over internet. The maximum length of the key is 32.
<password 32> - Enter the key here. The key can be up to 32 characters long.
encryption_key - Specify the key pre-negotiated between the switch and the RADIUS server. It is used to encrypt the user’s authentication data before being transmitted over the Internet.
<password 56> - Enter the encryption key.
auth_port - Specify the UDP port number which is used to transmit RADIUS authentication data between the
Switch and the RADIUS server. The range is 1 to 65535. The default value is 1812.
<udp_port_number 1-65535> - Enter the authentication port number here. This value must be between 1 and
65535.
default - Specify that the default port number will be used.
acct_port - Specify the UDP port number which is used to transmit RADIUS accounting statistics between the
Switch and the RADIUS server. The range is 1 to 65535. The default value is 1813.
<udp_port_number 1-65535> - Enter the accounting port number here. This value must be between 1 and
65535.
default - Specify that the default port number will be used.
timeout - The time in second for waiting server reply. The default value is 5 seconds.
<sec 1-255> - Enter the timeout value here. This value must be between 1 and 255 seconds.
default - Specify that the default timeout value will be used.
retransmit - The count for re-transmitting. The default value is 2.
<int 1-20> - Enter the re-transmit value here. This value must be between 1 and 20.
default - Specify that the default re-transmit value will be used.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure a RADIUS server:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config radius 1 auth_port 60
Command: config radius 1 auth_port 60
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
71-4 show radius
Description
This command is used to display RADIUS server configurations.
Format show radius
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
628
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Example
To display RADIUS server configurations:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show radius
Command: show radius
Index IP Address Auth-Port Acct-Port Timeout Retransmit Key
(sec)
----- --------------- --------- --------- ------- ---------- ----------------
1 10.48.74.121 60 1813 5 2 dlink
Total Entries : 1
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
71-5 show auth_client
Description
This command is used to display information of RADIUS authentication client.
Format show auth_client
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display authentication client information:
629
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show auth_client
Command: show auth_client radiusAuthClient ==>
radiusAuthClientInvalidServerAddresses 0
radiusAuthClientIdentifier
radiusAuthServerEntry ==>
radiusAuthServerIndex :1
radiusAuthServerAddress 0.0.0.0
radiusAuthClientServerPortNumber 0
radiusAuthClientRoundTripTime 0
radiusAuthClientAccessRequests 0
radiusAuthClientAccessRetransmissions 0
radiusAuthClientAccessAccepts 0
radiusAuthClientAccessRejects 0
radiusAuthClientAccessChallenges 0
radiusAuthClientMalformedAccessResponses 0
radiusAuthClientBadAuthenticators 0
radiusAuthClientPendingRequests 0
radiusAuthClientTimeouts 0
radiusAuthClientUnknownTypes 0
radiusAuthClientPacketsDropped 0
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
71-6 show acct_client
Description
This command is used to display information of RADIUS accounting client.
Format show acct_client
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display information of RADIUS accounting client:
630
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show acct_client
Command: show acct_client radiusAcctClient ==>
radiusAcctClientInvalidServerAddresses 0
radiusAcctClientIdentifier
radiusAuthServerEntry ==>
radiusAccServerIndex : 1
radiusAccServerAddress 0.0.0.0
radiusAccClientServerPortNumber 0
radiusAccClientRoundTripTime 0
radiusAccClientRequests 0
radiusAccClientRetransmissions 0
radiusAccClientResponses 0
radiusAccClientMalformedResponses 0
radiusAccClientBadAuthenticators 0
radiusAccClientPendingRequests 0
radiusAccClientTimeouts 0
radiusAccClientUnknownTypes 0
radiusAccClientPacketsDropped 0
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
631
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 72 Remote Copy Protocol (RCP)
Command List
download firmware_fromRCP [{ username <username 15>} {<ipaddr>} src_file <path_filename 64> |rcp: <string
{user@}ipaddr/path_filename>] {dest_file <pathname 64>} {boot_up}
upload firmware_toRCP [{username <username 15>} {<ipaddr>} dest_file <path_filename 64> | rcp: <string
{user@}ipaddr/path_filename>] {src_file <pathname 64>}
download cfg_fromRCP [{ username <username 15>} {<ipaddr>} src_file <path_filename 64> |rcp: <string
{user@}ipaddr/path_filename>] {dest_file <pathname 64>}
upload cfg_toRCP [{ username <username 15>} {<ipaddr>} dest_file <path_filename 64> |rcp: <string
{user@}ipaddr/path_filename>] {src_file <pathname 64>} {[include | exclude | begin] <filter_string 80>
{<filter_string 80> {<filter_string 80>}} {[include | exclude | begin ] <filter_string 80> {<filter_string 80>
{<filter_string 80>} } {[include | exclude | begin ] <filter_string 80> {<filter_string 80> {<filter_string 80>}}}}}
upload log_toRCP [{username <username 15>} {<ipaddr>} dest_file <path_filename 64> | rcp: <string
{user@}ipaddr/path_filename>]
upload attack_log_toRCP [{username <username 15>} {<ipaddr>} dest_file <path_filename 64> | rcp: <string
{user@}ipaddr/path_filename>]
config rcp server {ipaddress <ipaddr> | username <username>}(1)
config rcp server clear [ipaddr | username | both] show rcp server
72-1 download firmware_fromRCP
Description
This command is used to download a firmware file from a Remote Copy Protocol (RCP) server.
Format download firmware_fromRCP [{username <username 15>} {<ipaddr>} src_file <path_filename 64> | rcp:
<string {user@}ipaddr/path_filename>] {dest_file <pathname 64>} {boot_up}
Parameters
username - (Optional) Specify the remote user name on the RCP server.
<username 15> - Enter the remote user name on the RCP server.
<ipaddr> - (Optional) Enter the IP address of the RCP server.
src_file - Specify the path name on the RCP server or local.
<path_filename 64> - Enter the path name on the RCP server or local.
rcp: - Specify the path and the login credentials on the RCP server that will be used for the download.
<string {user@}ipaddr/path_filename> - Enter the path and the login credentials on the RCP server that will be used for the download. No spaces are allowed. For example, [email protected]/home/user_name/firmware.had.
dest_file - (Optional) Specify the path and file name of the destination file on the device.
<pathname 64> - Enter the path and file name of the destination file.
boot_up - Specify it as a boot-up file.
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To download firmware from an RCP server:
632
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#download firmware_fromRCP username rcp_user 10.90.90.90 src_file /home/
Command: download firmware_fromRCP username rcp_user 10.90.90.90 src_file /home/
Connecting to server................... Done.
Download firmware...................... Done. Do not power off !!
Please wait, programming flash......... Done.
Saving current settings to NV-RAM...... Done.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
72-2 upload firmware_toRCP
Description
This command is used to upload firmware from this Switch to a Remote Copy Protocol (RCP) server.
Format upload firmware_toRCP [{username <username 15>} {<ipaddr>} dest_file <path_filename 64> | rcp: <string
{user@}ipaddr/path_filename>] {src_file <pathname 64>}]
Parameters
username - (Optional) Specify the remote user name on the RCP server.
<username 15> - Enter the remote user name on the RCP server.
<ipaddr> - (Optional) Enter the IP address of the RCP server.
dest_file - Specify the path name on the RCP server.
<path_filename 64> - Enter the path name on the RCP server.
rcp: - Specify the path and the login credentials on the RCP server that will be used for the upload.
<string {user@}ipaddr/path_filename> - Enter the path and the login credentials on the RCP server that will be used for the upload. No spaces are allowed. For example, [email protected]/home/user_name/firmware.had.
src_file - (Optional) Specify the path name of the source file. If not specified, the boot-up image on the device will be uploaded.
<pathname 64> - Enter the path name of the source file.
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To upload firmware image to an RCP server:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#upload firmware_toRCP rcp: [email protected]/DGS-3000-1.12.had src_file 1.12.had
Command: upload firmware_toRCP rcp: [email protected]/DGS-3000-1.12.had src_file
1.12.had
Connecting to server............... Done.
Upload firmware.................... Done.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
633
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
72-3 download cfg_fromRCP
Description
This command is used to download the configuration file from a Remote Copy Protocol (RCP) server to the Switch.
Format download cfg_fromRCP [{username <username 15>} {<ipaddr>} src_file <path_filename 64> | rcp: <string
{user@}ipaddr/path_filename>] {dest_file <pathname 64>}
Parameters
username - (Optional) Specify the remote user name on the RCP server.
<username 15> - Enter the remote user name on the RCP server.
<ipaddr> - (Optional) Enter the IP address of the RCP server.
src_file - Specify the path and file name of the switch configuration file on the RCP server. The maximum length is 64.
<path_filename 64> - Enter the path and file name of the switch configuration file on the RCP server. The maximum length is 64.
rcp: - Specify the path and the login credentials of the configuration file located on the RCP server that will be used for the download.
<string {user@}ipaddr/path_filename> - Enter the path and the login credentials of the firmware file located on the RCP server that will be used for the download. The string may contain up to 128 characters.
dest_file - (Optional) Specify the path and file name of the destination file on the device.
<pathname 64> - Enter the path and file name of the destination file.
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To download a configuration file from an RCP server:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#download cfg_fromRCP username rcp_user 172.18.212.106 src_file /home/DGS-
3000.cfg
Command: download cfg_fromRCP username rcp_user 172.18.212.106 src_file /home/DGS-3000.cfg
Connecting to server................... Done.
Download configuration................. Done.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
72-4 upload cfg_toRCP
Description
This command is used to upload a configuration file from the device to an RCP server. If the remote filename is not specified, the default file name will be modelname-image-id.
Format upload cfg_toRCP [{username <username 15>} {<ipaddr>} dest_file <path_filename 64> | rcp: <string
{user@}ipaddr/path_filename>] {src_file <pathname 64>} {[include | exclude | begin] <filter_string 80>
{<filter_string 80> {<filter_string 80>}} {[include | exclude | begin ] <filter_string 80> {<filter_string 80>
{<filter_string 80>} } {[include | exclude | begin ] <filter_string 80> {<filter_string 80> {<filter_string 80>}}}}}
634
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Parameters
username - (Optional) Specify the remote user name on the RCP server.
<username 15> - Enter the remote user name on the RCP server.
<ipaddr> - (Optional) Enter the IP address of the RCP server.
dest_file - Specify the path name on the RCP server.
<path_filename 64> - Enter the path name on the RCP server or local RCP client.
rcp: - Specify the path and the login credentials of the configuration file located on the RCP server that will be used for the upload.
<string {user@}ipaddr/path_filename> - Enter the path and the login credentials of the firmware file located on the RCP server that will be used for the upload. No spaces are allowed. For example, [email protected]/home/user_name/firmware.had.
src_file - (Optional) Specify the path name of the source file.
<pathname 64> - Enter the path name of the source file. Note that if no path name is Specify, only the current device configuration will be uploaded.
include - (Optional) Includes lines that contain the specified filter string.
exclude - (Optional) Excludes lines that contain the specified filter string.
begin - (Optional) The first line that contains the specified filter string will be the first line of the output.
<filter_string 80> - Enter a filter string enclosed by the quotation mark symbol. Thus, the filter string itself cannot contain the quotation mark character. The filter string is case sensitive.
<filter_string 80> - (Optional) Enter a filter string enclosed by the quotation mark symbol.
<filter_string 80> - (Optional) Enter a filter string enclosed by the quotation mark symbol.
include - (Optional) Includes lines that contain the specified filter string.
exclude - (Optional) Excludes lines that contain the specified filter string.
begin - (Optional) The first line that contains the specified filter string will be the first line of the output.
<filter_string 80> - Enter a filter string enclosed by the quotation mark symbol. Thus, the filter string itself cannot contain the quotation mark character. The filter string is case sensitive.
<filter_string 80> - (Optional) Enter a filter string enclosed by the quotation mark symbol.
<filter_string 80> - (Optional) Enter a filter string enclosed by the quotation mark symbol.
include - (Optional) Includes lines that contain the specified filter string.
exclude - (Optional) Excludes lines that contain the specified filter string.
begin - (Optional) The first line that contains the specified filter string will be the first line of the output.
<filter_string 80> - Enter a filter string enclosed by the quotation mark symbol. Thus, the filter string itself cannot contain the quotation mark character. The filter string is case sensitive.
<filter_string 80> - (Optional) Enter a filter string enclosed by the quotation mark symbol.
<filter_string 80> - (Optional) Enter a filter string enclosed by the quotation mark symbol.
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To upload the current configuration from the device to an RCP server:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# upload cfg_toRCP username rcp_user 172.18.212.104 dest_file
/home/config.cfg
Command: upload cfg_toRCP username rcp_user 172.18.212.104 dest_file /home/config.cfg
Connecting to server... Done.
Upload configuration... Done.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To upload the configuration from a file system supported device to an RCP Server:
635
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# upload cfg_toRCP username rcp_user 172.18.212.104 dest_file
/home/rcp_user/bone_switch.cfg src_file c:\config.cfg
Command: upload cfg_toRCP username rcp_user 172.18.212.104 dest_file
/home/rcp_user/bone_switch.cfg src_file c:\config.cfg
Connecting to server... Done.
Upload configuration... Done.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
72-5 upload log_toRCP
Description
This command is used to upload a log file from the device to a Remote Copy Protocol (RCP) server.
Format upload log_toRCP [{username <username 15>} {<ipaddr>} dest_file <path_filename 64> | rcp:<string
{user@}ipaddr/path_filename>]
Parameters
username - (Optional) Specify the remote user name on the RCP server.
<username 15> - Enter the remote user name on the RCP server.
<ipaddr> - (Optional) Enter the IP address of the RCP server.
dest_file - Specify the path name of the RCP server.
<path_filename 64> - Enter the path name of the RCP server.
rcp - Specify the path name on the RCP server.
<string {user@}ipaddr/path_filename> - Enter the path name on the RCP server. Syntax: rcp: username@ipaddr/directory/filename. Example for full path: [email protected]/home/user_name/dgs3000.had. Example for relative path: [email protected]./dgs3000.had.
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To upload the log from the device to an RCP server:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#upload log_toRCP rcp_user 172.18.212.104 dest_file /home/system-log.log
Command: upload log_toRCP rcp_user 172.18.212.104 dest_file /home/system-log.log
Connecting to server... Done.
Upload log............. Done.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To upload log from the device to an RCP server using an RCP string:
636
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#upload log_toRCP rcp: rcp_user 172.18.212.104/home/system-log.log
Command: upload log_toRCP rcp: rcp_user 172.18.212.104/home/system-log.log
Connecting to server... Done.
Upload log............. Done.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
72-6 upload attack_log_toRCP
Description
This command is used to upload the attack log file from the device to an RCP server.
NOTE: If a user Specify the relative file path, the path search strategy will depend on the server system. For some systems, it will search the current user working directory first, and then search the environment paths.
Format upload attack_log_toRCP [{username <username 15>} {<ipaddr>} dest_file <path_filename 64> | rcp:
<string {user@}ipaddr/path_filename>]
Parameters
username - (Optional) Specify the remote user name on the RCP Server.
<username 15> - Enter the remote username used here. This name can be up to 15 characters long.
<ipaddr> - (Optional) Enter the IP address used for the configuration here.
dest_file - Specify the destination file used.
<path_filename 64> - Enter the pathname on the RCP server or local device.
rcp: - Specify the path of the log configuration file located on the RCP server that will be used for the upload.
<string {user@}ipaddr/path_filename> - Enter the path and the login credentials of the firmware file located on the RCP server that will be used for the upload. No spaces are allowed. For example, [email protected]/home/user_name/firmware.had.
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To upload the attack log from the device to an RCP server:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# upload attack_log_toRCP username rcp_user 172.18.212.104 /home/attacklog.log
Command: upload attack_log_toRCP username rcp_user 172.18.212.104 /home/attack-log.log
Connecting to server.......... Done.
Upload attack log............. Done.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
637
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
72-7 config rcp server
Description
This command is used to configure Remote Copy Protocol (RCP) global server information. This global RCP server setting can be used when the server or remote user name is not specified. Only one RCP server can be configured for each system. If a user does not specify the RCP server in the CLI command, and the global RCP server was not configured, the switch will ask the user to input the server IP address or remote user name while executing the RCP commands.
Format config rcp server {ipaddress <ipaddr> | username <username>}(1)
Parameters
ipaddress - Specify the IP address of the global RCP server. By default, the server is unspecified.
<ipaddr> - Enter the IP address of the RCP server.
username - Specify the remote user name on the RCP server.
<username> - Enter the remote user name on the RCP server.
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To configure RCP global server information for the username “travel”:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config rcp server username travel
Command: config rcp server username travel
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
72-8 config rcp server clear
Description
This command is used to clear Remote Copy Protocol (RCP) global server information.
Format config rcp server clear [ipaddr | username | both]
Parameters
ipaddr - Clear the IP address of the RCP server.
username - Clear the username of the RCP server.
both - Clear both the IP address and the username of the RCP server.
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
638
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Example
To clear the current username of the RCP global server:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config rcp server clear username
Command: config rcp server clear username
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
72-9 show rcp server
Description
This command is used to display Remote Copy Protocol (RCP) global server information.
Format show rcp server
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To display RCP global server information:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show rcp server
Command: show rcp server
RCP Server Address :
RCP Server Username : travel
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
639
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 73 RSPAN Command List
enable rspan disable rspan
create rspan vlan [vlan_name <vlan_name> | vlan_id <vlanid 1-4094>]
delete rspan vlan [vlan_name <vlan_name> | vlan_id <vlanid 1-4094>]
config rspan vlan [vlan_name <vlan_name> | vlan_id <vlanid 1-4094>] [redirect [add | delete] ports <portlist> | source {[add | delete] ports <portlist> [rx | tx | both]}]
show rspan {[vlan_name <vlan_name> | vlan_id <vlanid 1-4094>]}
73-1 enable rspan
Description
This command is used to enable all previously entered RSPAN configurations.
Format enable rspan
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators and Operators can issue this command.
Example
To enable all previously entered RSPAN configurations:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#enable rspan
Command: enable rspan
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
73-2 disable rspan
Description
This command is used to disable all previously entered RSPAN configurations.
Format disable rspan
Parameters
None.
640
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Restrictions
Only Administrators and Operators can issue this command.
Example
To disable all previously entered RSPAN configurations:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#disable rspan
Command: disable rspan
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
73-3 create rspan vlan
Description
This command is used to create an RSPAN VLAN. Up to 16 RSPAN VLANs can be created.
Format create rspan vlan [vlan_name <vlan_name> | vlan_id <vlanid 1-4094>]
Parameters
vlan_name - Create the RSPAN VLAN by VLAN name.
<vlan_name> - Enter the VLAN name.
vlan_id - Create the RSPAN VLAN by VLAN ID.
<vlanid 1-4094> - Enter the VLAN ID between 1 and 4094.
Restrictions
Only Administrators and Operators can issue this command.
Example
To create an RSPAN VLAN entry by VLAN name “v2”:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#create rspan vlan vlan_name v2
Command: create rspan vlan vlan_name v2
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To create an RSPAN VLAN entry by VLAN ID “3”:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#create rspan vlan vlan_id 3
Command: create rspan vlan vlan_id 3
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
641
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
73-4 delete rspan vlan
Description
This command is used to delete RSPAN VLANs.
Format delete rspan vlan [vlan_name <vlan_name> | vlan_id <vlanid 1-4094>]
Parameters
vlan_name - Specify the RSPAN VLAN by VLAN name.
<vlan_name> - Enter the VLAN name.
vlan_id - Specify the RSPAN VLAN by VLAN ID.
<vlanid 1-4094> - Enter the VLAN ID between 1 and 4094.
Restrictions
Only Administrators and Operators can issue this command.
Example
To delete an RSPAN VLAN entry by VLAN name “v2”:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#delete rspan vlan vlan_name v2
Command: delete rspan vlan vlan_name v2
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To delete an RSPAN VLAN entry by VLAN ID “3”:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#delete rspan vlan vlan_id 3
Command: delete rspan vlan vlan_id 3
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
73-5 config rspan vlan
Description
This command is used by the source switch to configure the source setting for the RSPAN VLAN. The redirect command is used by the intermediate or last switch to configure the output port of the RSPAN VLAN packets, and makes sure that the RSPAN VLAN packets can egress to the redirect ports. In addition, the VLAN setting must be correctly configured to make the RSPAN VLAN work correctly. That is, for the intermediate switch, the redirect port must be a tagged member port of the RSPAN VLAN. For the last switch, the redirect port must be either a tagged member port or an untagged member port of the RSPAN VLAN based on the users’ requirements. If untagged membership is specified, the RSPAN VLAN tag will be removed. The redirect function will only work when RSPAN is enabled. Multiple RSPAN VLANs can be configured with the redirect setting at the same time.
A RSPAN VLAN can be configured with the source setting and the redirect setting at the same time.
642
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Format config rspan vlan [vlan_name <vlan_name> | vlan_id <vlanid 1-4094>] [redirect [add | delete] ports
<portlist> | source {[add | delete] ports <portlist> [rx | tx | both]}]
Parameters
vlan_name - Specify the RSPAN VLAN by VLAN name.
<vlan_name> - Enter the VLAN name.
vlan_id - Specify the RSPAN VLAN by VLAN ID.
<vlanid 1-4094> - Enter the VLAN ID between 1 and 4094.
redirect - Specify output port list for the RSPAN VLAN packets. If the redirect port is a Link Aggregation port, the
Link Aggregation behavior will apply to the RSPAN packets.
add - Specify to add the redirect port.
delete - Specify to delete the redirect port.
ports - Specify the output port list to add to or delete from the RSPAN packets.
<portlist> - Enter a range of ports to be configured.
source - If the ports are not specified by this command, the source of RSPAN will come from the source specified by the mirror command or the flow-based source specified by an ACL. If no parameter is specified for source, it deletes the configured source parameters.
add - (Optional) Specify to add source ports.
delete - (Optional) Specify to delete source ports.
ports - (Optional) Specify source port list to add to or delete from the RSPAN source.
<portlist> - Enter a range of ports to be configured.
rx - (Optional) Specify to only monitor ingress packets.
tx - (Optional) Specify to only monitor egress packets.
both - (Optional) Specify to monitor both ingress and egress packets.
Restrictions
Only Administrators and Operators can issue this command.
Example
To configure an RSPAN source entry without source target port:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config rspan vlan vlan_name vlan2 source add ports 2-5 rx
Command: config rspan vlan vlan_name vlan2 source add ports 2-5 rx
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To configure an RSPAN source entry for per flow RSPAN, without any source ports:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config rspan vlan vlan_id 2 source
Command: config rspan vlan vlan_id 2 source
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To configure RSPAN redirect for “VLAN 2” to ports 18 and 19:
643
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config rspan vlan vlan_name vlan2 redirect add ports 18-19
Command: config rspan vlan vlan_name vlan2 redirect add ports 18-19
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
73-6 show rspan
Description
This command is used to display RSPAN VLAN configuration.
Format show rspan {[vlan_name <vlan_name> | vlan_id <vlanid 1-4094>]}
Parameters
vlan_name - (Optional)Specify the RSPAN VLAN by VLAN name.
<vlan_name> - Enter the VLAN name.
vlan_id - (Optional)Specify the RSPAN VLAN by VLAN ID.
<vlanid 1-4094> - Enter the VLAN ID between 1 and 4094.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display specific RSPAN VLAN settings:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show rspan vlan_id 2
Command: show rspan vlan_id 2
RSPAN : Enabled
RSPAN VLAN ID : 2
--------------------
Source Port
RX : 10
TX : 10
Redirect Port : 11
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To display all RSPAN VLAN settings:
644
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show rspan
Command: show rspan
RSPAN : Enabled
RSPAN VLAN ID : 2
--------------------
Source Port
RX : 10
TX : 10
Redirect Port : 11
Total RSPAN VLAN :1
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
645
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 74 Safeguard Engine Command List
config safeguard_engine {state [enable | disable]| utilization {rising <20-100> | falling <20-100>} | trap_log
[enable | disable] | mode [strict | fuzzy]} show safeguard_engine
74-1 config safeguard_engine
Description
This command is used to configure the CPU protection control for the system.
Format config safeguard_engine {state [enable | disable]| utilization {rising <20-100> | falling <20-100>} | trap_log
[enable | disable] | mode [strict | fuzzy]}
Parameters
state - (Optional) Specify to configure CPU protection state to enable or disable.
enable - Specify that CPU protection will be enabled.
disable - Specify that CPU protection will be enabled.
utilization - (Optional) Specify to configure the CPU protection threshold.
rising - Specify utilization rising threshold. The range is between 20%-100%. If the CPU utilization is over the rising threshold, the Switch enters exhausted mode.
<20-100> - Enter the utilization rising value here. This value must be between 20 and 100.
falling - Specify utilization falling threshold. The range is between 20%-100%. If the CPU utilization is lower than the falling threshold, the Switch enters normal mode.
<20-100> - Enter the utilization falling value here. This value must be between 20 and 100.
trap_log - (Optional) Specify to enable or disable the trap and log mechanism.
enable - Specify that the trap and log mechanism will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the trap and log mechanism will be disabled.
mode - (Optional) Determines the control method of broadcasting traffic.
strict - In strict mode, the Switch will stop receiving all ‘IP broadcast’ packets, packets from the untrusted IP address, and reduce the bandwidth of ‘ARP-not-to-me’ packets (the protocol address of the target in the
ARP packet is the Switch itself) to the Switch. That means that no matter what the reasons for high CPU utilization are (may not be caused by an ARP storm), the Switch reluctantly processes the specified traffic, mentioned previously in the Exhausted mode.
fuzzy - In fuzzy mode, the Switch will adjust the bandwidth dynamically.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure CPU protection:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config safeguard_engine state enable utilization rising 50 falling 30 trap_log enable
Command: config safeguard_engine state enable utilization rising 50 falling 30 trap_log enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
646
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
74-2 show safeguard_engine
Description
This command is used to show safeguard engine information.
Format show safeguard_engine
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show safeguard_engine information:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show safeguard_engine
Command: show safeguard_engine
Safeguard Engine State : Disabled
Safeguard Engine Current Status : Normal Mode
=======================================================
CPU Utilization Information:
Rising Threshold : 30%
Falling Threshold : 20%
Trap/Log State : Disabled
Mode : Fuzzy
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
NOTE: Safeguard engine current status has two modes: exhausted and normal mode.
647
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 75 Secure Shell (SSH) Command List
config ssh algorithm [3DES | AES128 | AES192 | AES256 | arcfour | blowfish | cast128 | twofish128 | twofish192
| twofish256 | MD5| SHA1 | RSA | DSA] [enable | disable] show ssh algorithm
config ssh authmode [password | publickey | hostbased] [enable | disable] show ssh authmode
config ssh user <username 15> authmode [hostbased [hostname <domain_name 32> | hostname_IP
<domain_name 32> [<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr>]] | password | publickey] show ssh user authmode
config ssh server {maxsession <int 1-8> | contimeout <sec 120-600> | authfail <int 2-20> | rekey [10min | 30min
| 60min | never] | port <tcp_port_number 1-65535>} enable ssh disable ssh show ssh server
75-1 config ssh algorithm
Description
This command is used to configure SSH service algorithm.
Format config ssh algorithm [3DES | AES128 | AES192 | AES256 | arcfour | blowfish | cast128 | twofish128 | twofish192 | twofish256 | MD5| SHA1 | RSA | DSA] [enable | disable]
Parameters
3DES - The 3DES cipher is three-key triple-DES (encrypt-decrypt-encrypt), where the first 8 bytes of the key are used for the first encryption, the next 8 bytes for the decryption, and the following 8 bytes for the final encryption.
AES128 - Specify that the AES, 128-bit encryption method will be used.
AES192 - Specify that the AES, 192-bit encryption method will be used.
AES256 - Specify that the AES, 256-bit encryption method will be used.
arcfour - RC4 (also known as ARC4 or ARCFOUR meaning Alleged RC4) is the most widely-used software stream cipher.
blowfish - Blowfish is a keyed, symmetric block cipher.
cast128 - CAST-128 is a 12- or 16-round feistel network with a 64-bit block size and a key size of between 40 to
128 bits.
twofish128 - Specify that the Twofish, 128-bit encryption method will be used.
twofish192 - Specify that the Twofish, 192-bit encryption method will be used.
twofish256 - Specify that the Twofish, 256-bit encryption method will be used.
MD5 - Message-Digest Algorithm 5.
SHA1 - Secure Hash Algorithm.
RSA - RSA encryption algorithm is a non-symmetric encryption algorithm.
DSA - Digital Signature Algorithm.
enable - Enables the algorithm.
disable - Disables the algorithm.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
648
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Example
To enable SSH server public key algorithm:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config ssh algorithm DSA enable
Command: config ssh algorithm DSA enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
75-2 show ssh algorithm
Description
This command is used to show the SSH service algorithm.
Format show ssh algorithm
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show server algorithm:
649
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show ssh algorithm
Command: show ssh algorithm
Encryption Algorithm
--------------------------
3DES : Enabled
AES128 : Enabled
AES192 : Enabled
AES256 : Enabled
Arcfour : Enabled
Blowfish : Enabled
Cast128 : Enabled
Twofish128 : Enabled
Twofish192 : Enabled
Twofish256 : Enabled
Data Integrity Algorithm
--------------------------
MD5 : Enabled
SHA1 : Enabled
Public Key Algorithm
--------------------------
RSA : Enabled
DSA : Enabled
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
75-3 config ssh authmode
Description
This command is used to configure user authentication method for SSH.
Format config ssh authmode [password | publickey | hostbased] [enable | disable]
Parameters
password - Specify the user authentication method using password.
publickey - Specify the user authentication method using public key.
hostbased - Specify the user authentication method using host-based.
enable - Enables the user authentication method.
disable - Disables the user authentication method.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure user authentication method:
650
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config ssh authmode publickey enable
Command: config ssh authmode publickey enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
75-4 show ssh authmode
Description
This command is used to show the user authentication method.
Format show ssh authmode
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show user authentication method:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show ssh authmode
Command: show ssh authmode
The SSH Authentication Method:
Password : Enabled
Public Key : Enabled
Host-based : Enabled
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
75-5 config ssh user
Description
This command is used to update user information for SSH configuration.
Format config ssh user <username 15> authmode [hostbased [hostname <domain_name 32> | hostname_IP
<domain_name 32> [<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr>]] | password | publickey]
Parameters
<username 15> - Enter the user name. This name can be up to 15 characters long.
authmode - Specify the authentication method.
651
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
hostbased - Specify user authentication method.
hostname - Specify host domain name.
<domain_name 32> - Enter the domain name here. This name can be up to 32 characters long.
hostname_IP - Specify host domain name and IP address.
<domain_name 32> - Enter host name if configuring Host-based method.
<ipaddr> - Enter host IP address if configuring Host-based method.
<ipv6addr> - Enter host IPv6 address if configuring Host-based method.
password - Specify user authentication method.
publickey - Specify user authentication method.
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To update user “test” authentication method:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config ssh user test authmode publickey
Command: config ssh user test authmode publickey
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
75-6 show ssh user authmode
Description
This command is used to show the SSH user information.
Format show ssh user authmode
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To show user information about SSH configuration:
652
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show ssh user authmode
Command: show ssh user authmode
Current Accounts:
User Name Authentication Host Name Host IP
--------------- --------- -------------------------------- ---------------
User1 Password
User2 Public Key
User3 Host-based domain.com 10.70.89.111
User4 Password
Total Entries : 4
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
75-7 config ssh server
Description
This command is used to configure the SSH server general information.
Format config ssh server {maxsession <int 1-8> | contimeout <sec 120-600> | authfail <int 2-20> | rekey [10min |
30min | 60min | never] | port <tcp_port_number 1-65535>}
Parameters
maxsession - (Optional) Specify SSH server maximum session at the same time, maximum 8 sessions.
<int 1-8> - Enter the maximum session value here. This value must be between 1 and 8.
contimeout - (Optional) Specify SSH server connection time-out, in the unit of second.
<sec 120-600> - Enter the connection time-out value here. This value must be between 120 and 600 seconds.
authfail - (Optional) Specify user maximum fail attempts.
<int 2-20> - Enter the user maximum fail attempts value here. This value must be between 2 and 20.
rekey - (Optional) Specify time to re-generate session key. There are 10 minutes, 30 minutes, 60 minutes and never for the selection, which the never means do NOT re- generate session key
10min - Specify that the re-generate session key time will be 10 minutes.
30min - Specify that the re-generate session key time will be 30 minutes.
60min - Specify that the re-generate session key time will be 60 minutes.
never - Specify that the re-generate session key time will be set to never.
port - (Optional) Specify the TCP port used to communication between SSH client and server. The default value is 22.
<tcp_port_number 1-65535> - Enter the TCP port number here. This value must be between 1 and 65535.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure SSH server maximum session number is 3:
653
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config ssh server maxsession 3
Command: config ssh server maxsession 3
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
75-8 enable ssh
Description
This command is used to enable SSH server services.
Format enable ssh
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To enable SSH server:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#enable ssh
Command: enable ssh
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
75-9 disable ssh
Description
This command is used to disable SSH server services.
Format disable ssh
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
654
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Example
To disable the SSH server services:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#disable ssh
Command: disable ssh
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
75-10 show ssh server
Description
This command is used to show the SSH server general information.
Format show ssh server
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show SSH server:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show ssh server
Command: show ssh server
The SSH Server Configuration
Maximum Session : 8
Connection Timeout : 120
Authentication Fail Attempts : 2
Rekey Timeout : Never
TCP Port Number : 22
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
655
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 76 Secure Sockets Layer (SSL)
Command List
download ssl certificate {<ipaddr> certfilename <path_filename 64> keyfilename <path_filename 64>}
enable ssl {ciphersuite {RSA_with_RC4_128_MD5 | RSA_with_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA |
DHE_DSS_with_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA | RSA_EXPORT_with_RC4_40_MD5}}
disable ssl {ciphersuite {RSA_with_RC4_128_MD5 | RSA_with_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA |
DHE_DSS_with_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA | RSA_EXPORT_with_RC4_40_MD5}}
show ssl {certificate} show ssl cachetimeout
config ssl cachetimeout <value 60-86400>
76-1 download ssl certificate
Description
This command is used to download the certificate to the device according to the certificate level. The user can download the specified certificate to the device which must, according to desired key exchange algorithm. For RSA key exchange, the user must download RSA type certificate and for DHS_DSS is using the DSA certificate for key exchange.
Format download ssl certificate {<ipaddr> certfilename <path_filename 64> keyfilename <path_filename 64>}
Parameters
<ipaddr> - (Optional) Enter the TFTP server IP address used for this configuration here.
certfilename - (Optional) Specify the desired certificate file name.
<path_filename 64> - Enter the certificate file path with respect to the TFTP server root path. This can be up to 64 characters long.
keyfilename - (Optional) Specify the private key file name which accompany with the certificate.
<path_filename 64> - Enter the private key file path with respect to the TFTP server root path. This can be up to 64 characters long.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To download certificate from TFTP server:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#download ssl certificate 10.55.47.1 certfilename cert.der keyfilename pkey.der
Command: download ssl certificate 10.55.47.1 certfilename cert.der keyfilename pkey.der
Certificate Loaded Successfully!
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
656
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
76-2 enable ssl
Description
This command is used to enable SSL status and it’s ciphersuites. Using “enable ssl” command will enable SSL feature which means enable SSLv3 and TLSv1. For each ciphersuites, user must specify it by this command.
Format enable ssl {ciphersuite {RSA_with_RC4_128_MD5 | RSA_with_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA |
DHE_DSS_with_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA | RSA_EXPORT_with_RC4_40_MD5}}
Parameters
ciphersuite - (Optional) Specify the cipher suite combination used for this configuration.
RSA_with_RC4_128_MD5 - Indicates RSA key exchange with RC4 128 bits encryption and MD5 hash.
RSA_with_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA - Indicates RSA key exchange with 3DES_EDE_CBC encryption and SHA hash.
DHE_DSS_with_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA - Indicates DH key exchange with 3DES_EDE_CBC encryption and
SHA hash.
RSA_EXPORT_with_RC4_40_MD5 - Indicates RSA_EXPORT key exchange with RC4 40 bits encryption and
MD5 hash.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To enable the SSL ciphersuite for RSA_with_RC4_128_MD5:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#enable ssl
Command: enable ssl
Note: Web will be disabled if SSL is enabled.
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To enable SSL:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#enable ssl
Command: enable ssl
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
NOTE: Web will be disabled when SSL is enabled.
76-3 disable ssl
Description
This command is used to disable SSL feature and supported ciphersuites.
657
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Format disable ssl {ciphersuite {RSA_with_RC4_128_MD5 | RSA_with_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA |
DHE_DSS_with_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA | RSA_EXPORT_with_RC4_40_MD5}}
Parameters
ciphersuite - (Optional) Specify the cipher suite combination used for this configuration.
RSA_with_RC4_128_MD5 - Indicates RSA key exchange with RC4 128 bits encryption and MD5 hash.
RSA_with_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA - Indicates RSA key exchange with 3DES_EDE_CBC encryption and SHA hash.
DHE_DSS_with_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA - Indicates DH key exchange with 3DES_EDE_CBC encryption and
SHA hash.
RSA_EXPORT_with_RC4_40_MD5 - Indicates RSA_EXPORT key exchange with RC4 40 bits encryption and
MD5 hash.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To disable SSL ciphersuite for RSA_with_RC4_128_MD5:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#disable ssl ciphersuite RSA_with_RC4_128_MD5
Command: disable ssl ciphersuite RSA_with_RC4_128_MD5
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To disable SSL:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#disable ssl
Command: disable ssl
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
76-4 show ssl
Description
This command is used to display the certificate status. User must download specified certificate type according to desired key exchange algorithm. The options may be no certificate, RSA type or DSA type certificate
Format show ssl {certificate}
Parameters
certificate - (Optional) Specify that the SSL certificate will be displayed.
658
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show SSL:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show ssl
Commands: show ssl
SSL Status Enabled
RSA_WITH_RC4_128_MD5 0x0004 Enabled
RSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA 0x000A Enabled
DHE_DSS_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA 0x0013 Enabled
RSA_EXPORT_WITH_RC4_40_MD5 0x0003 Enabled
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To show certificate:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show ssl certificate
Command: show ssl certificate
Loaded with RSA Certificate!
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
76-5 show ssl cachetimeout
Description
This command is used to show cache timeout value which is designed for dlktimer library to remove the session id after expired. In order to support the resume session feature, the SSL library keep the session id in web server, and invoking the dlktimer library to remove this session id by cache timeout value.
Format show ssl cachetimeout
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show SSL cache timeout:
659
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show ssl cachetimeout
Commands: show ssl cachetimeout
Cache timeout is 600 second(s)
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
76-6 config ssl cachetimeout
Description
This command is used to configure cache timeout value which is designed for dlktimer library to remove the session id after expired. In order to support the resume session feature, the SSL library keep the session id in web server, and invoking the dlktimer library to remove this session id by cache timeout value. The unit of argument’s value is second and it’s boundary is between 60 (1 minute) and 86400 (24 hours). Default value is 600 seconds.
Format config ssl cachetimeout <value 60-86400>
Parameters
<value 60-86400> - Enter the timeout value here. This value must be between 60 and 86400.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure the SSL cache timeout value to 60:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config ssl cachetimeout 60
Commands: config ssl cachetimeout 60
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
660
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 77 Show Technical Support
Command List
show tech_support
upload tech_support_toTFTP {<ipaddr> <path_filename 64>}
77-1 show tech_support
Description
This command is especially used by the technical support personnel to dump the device overall operation information.
• Basic System Information
• System Log
• Running Configuration
• Layer 1 Information
• Layer 2 Information
• Storm Control
• Layer 2 Multicast
• Layer 3 Information
• Security
• Application
• OS Status
• Management
This command can be interrupted by Ctrl-C or ESC when it is executing.
Format show tech_support
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators and Operators can issue this command.
Example
To show the information of technique’s support:
661
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show tech_support
Command: show tech_support
#-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
# DGS-3000-26TC Gigabit Ethernet Switch
# Technical Support Information
#
# Firmware: Build 2.00.004
# Copyright(C) 2016 D-Link Corporation. All rights reserved.
#-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
******************** Basic System Information ********************
[SYS 2016-2-20 03:09:28]
Boot Time : 20 Feb 2016 00:53:18
RTC Time : 2016/02/20 03:09:28
Boot PROM Version : Build 2.00.001
Firmware Version : Build 2.00.004
Hardware Version : A2
MAC Address : 00-01-02-03-04-00
[ERROR_LOG 2016-2-20 03:09:28]
**************************************************************************
# debug log: 1
# firmware version: 0.00.000
# level: CPU exception
# clock: 9710 ms
# time : 2016-01-01 00:00:10
77-2 upload tech_support_toTFTP
Description
This command is used to upload the information of technique’s support to TFTP server.
• Basic System Information
• System Log
• Running Configuration
• Layer 1 Information
• Layer 2 Information
• Storm Control
• Layer 2 Multicast
• Layer 3 Information
• Security
• Application
• OS Status
• Management
This command can be interrupted by Ctrl-C or ESC when it is executing.
Format upload tech_support_toTFTP {<ipaddr> <path_filename 64>}
662
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Parameters
<ipaddr> - (Optional) Enter the IP address of TFTP server.
<path_filename 64> - (Optional) Enter the file name to store the information of technique’s support in TFTP server. The max size of the file name is 64.
Restrictions
Only Administrators and Operators can issue this command.
Example
To upload the information of technique’s support:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#upload tech_support_toTFTP 10.0.0.66 tech_report.txt
Command: upload tech_support_toTFTP 10.0.0.66 tech_report.txt
Connecting to server................... Done.
Upload techsupport file................ Done.
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
663
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 78 Simple Mail Transfer Protocol
(SMTP) Command List
enable smtp disable smtp
config smtp {server <ipaddr> | server_port <tcp_port_number 1-65535> | self_mail_addr <mail_addr 64> | [add mail_receiver <mail_addr 64> | delete mail_receiver <index 1-8>] | server_ipv6 <ipv6addr> | server_port_ipv6
<tcp_port_number 1-65535>}(1) show smtp smtp send_testmsg
78-1 enable smtp
Description
This command is used to enable the SMTP status.
Format enable smtp
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To enable SMTP status:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#enable smtp
Command: enable smtp
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
78-2 disable smtp
Description
This command is used to disable SMTP status.
Format disable smtp
Parameters
None.
664
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To disable SMTP status:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#disable smtp
Command: disable smtp
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
78-3 config smtp
Description
This command is used to configure SMTP client parameters.
Format config smtp {server <ipaddr> | server_port <tcp_port_number 1-65535> | self_mail_addr <mail_addr 64> |
[add mail_receiver <mail_addr 64> | delete mail_receiver <index 1-8>] | server_ipv6 <ipv6addr> | server_port_ipv6 <tcp_port_number 1-65535>}(1)
Parameters
server - Specify the SMTP server IP address.
<ipaddr> - Enter the SMTP server IP address
server_port - Specify the SMTP server port.
<tcp_port_number 1-65535> - Enter the port number between 1 and 65535.
self_mail_addr - Specify the sender’s mail address.
<mail_addr 64> - Enter the mail address with maximum of 64 characters.
add mail_receiver - Specify to add mail receiver’s address.
<mail_addr 64> - Enter the mail address with maximum of 64 characters.
delete mail_receiver - Specify to delete mail receiver’s address.
<index 1-8> - Enter the index number.
server_ipv6 - Specify the SMTP server IPv6 address.
<ipv6addr> - Enter the IPv6 server IP address.
server_port_ipv6 - Specify the SMTP IPv6 server’s TCP port.
<tcp_port_number 1-65535> - Enter the TCP port number.
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To configure an SMTP server IP address, this demonstrates how to configure the server IP to 172.18.208.9 and the TCP port to 25:
665
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# config smtp server 172.18.208.9 server_port 25
Command: config smtp server 172.18.208.9 server_port 25
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To configure the mail’s sender address as: [email protected]:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# config smtp self_mail_addr [email protected]
Command: config smtp self_mail_addr [email protected]
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To configure how to add the mail’s receiver address as [email protected]:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# config smtp add mail_receiver [email protected]
Command: config smtp add mail_receiver [email protected]
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To demonstrates how to delete a mail receiver address:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# config smtp delete mail_receiver 2
Command: config smtp delete mail_receiver 2
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To configure the IPv6 server to 172:18:208::9 and the TCP port to 25:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# config smtp server 172:18:208::9 server_port_ipv6 25
Command: config smtp server 172:18:208::9 server_port_ipv6 25
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
78-4 show smtp
Description
This command is display the current SMTP information.
Format show smtp
666
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the current SMTPv6 information:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show smtp
Command: show smtp
SMTP Status : Enabled
SMTP Server Address : 172.18.208.9
SMTP Server Port : 25
SMTP IPv6 Server Address: 172:18:208::9
SMTP IPv6 Server Port : 25
Self Mail Address : [email protected]
Index Mail Receiver Address
----- ----------------------
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
78-5 smtp send_testmsg
Description
This command is used to test whether the SMTP server can be reached.
Format smtp send_testmsg
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To test whether the SMTP server can be reached:
667
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#smtp send_testmsg
Command: smtp send_testmsg
Subject:e-mail heading
Content:e-mail content
Sending mail, please wait...
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
668
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 79 Simple Network Management
Protocol (SNMP) Command List
enable community_encryption disable community_encryption show community encryption
create snmp community <community_string 32> view <view_name 32> [read_only | read_write]
delete snmp community <community_string 32>
show snmp community {<community_string 32>}
create snmp community_masking view <view_name 32> [read_only | read_write]
create snmp user <user_name 32> <groupname 32> {encrypted [by_password auth [md5 <auth_password 8-
16> | sha <auth_password 8-20>] priv [none | des <priv_password 8-16>] | by_key auth [md5 <auth_key 32-
32> | sha <auth_key 40-40>] priv [none | des <priv_key 32-32>]]}
delete snmp user <username 32> show snmp user
create snmp group <groupname 32> [v1 | v2c | v3 [noauth_nopriv | auth_nopriv | auth_priv]] {read_view
<view_name 32> | write_view <view_name 32> | notify_view <view_name 32>}
delete snmp group <groupname 32> show snmp groups
create snmp view <view_name 32> <oid> view_type [included | excluded]
delete snmp view <view_name 32> [all | <oid>]
show snmp view {<view_name 32>}
create snmp [host <ipaddr> | v6host <ipv6addr>] [v1 | v2c | v3 [noauth_nopriv | auth_nopriv | auth_priv]]
<auth_string 32>
delete snmp [host <ipaddr> | v6host <ipv6addr>]
show snmp host {<ipaddr>}
show snmp v6host {<ipv6addr>}
config snmp engineID <snmp_engineID 10-64> show snmp engineID enable snmp disable snmp
config snmp system_name {<sw_name>}
config snmp system_location {<sw_location>}
config snmp system_contact {<sw_contact>} enable snmp traps disable snmp traps enable snmp authenticate_traps disable snmp authenticate_traps enable snmp linkchange_traps disable snmp linkchange_traps
config snmp linkchange_traps ports [all | <portlist>] [enable | disable]
config snmp coldstart_traps [enable | disable]
config snmp warmstart_traps [enable | disable]
show snmp traps {linkchange_traps {ports <portlist>}}
config rmon trap {rising_alarm [enable | disable] | falling_alarm [enable | disable]} (1) show rmon
79-1 enable community_encryption
Description
This command is used to enable the encryption state on the SNMP community string.
669
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Format enable community_encryption
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To enable the encryption state on an SNMP community string:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# enable community_encryption
Command: enable community_encryption
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
79-2 disable community_encryption
Description
This command is used to disable the encryption state on the SNMP community string.
Format disable community_encryption
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To disable the encryption state on the SNMP community string:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# disable community_encryption
Command: disable community_encryption
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
670
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
79-3 show community_encryption
Description
This command is used to display the encryption state on the SNMP community string.
Format show community_encryption
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show the encryption state on the SNMP community string:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# show community_encryption
Command: show community_encryption
SNMP Community Encryption State : Enabled
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
79-4 create snmp community
Description
This command is used to create an SNMP community string.
Use an SNMP community string to define the relationship between the SNMP manager and the agent. The community string acts like a password to permit access to the agent on the Switch. You can specify one or more of the following characteristics associated with the string:
An access list of IP addresses of the SNMP managers that are permitted to use the community string to gain access to the agent.
A MIB view, which defines the subset of all MIB objects accessible to the given community.
Read and write or read-only permission for the MIB objects accessible to the community.
Format create snmp community <community_string 32> view <view_name 32> [read_only | read_write]
Parameters
<community_string 32> - Enter the community string value here. This string can be up to 32 characters long.
view_name - Specify the view name of the MIB.
<view_name 32> - Enter the MIB view name here. This name can be up to 32 characters long.
read_only - Allows the user to use the above mentioned community string to have read-only access to the
Switch’s SNMP agent. The default read-only community string is public.
read_write - Allows the user to use the above mentioned community string to have read and write access to the
Switch’s SNMP agent. The default read-write community string is private.
671
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To create a read-only level SNMP community “System” with a “CommunityView” view:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#create snmp community System view CommunityView read_only
Command: create snmp community System view CommunityView read_only
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
79-5 delete snmp community
Description
This command is used to delete an SNMP community string.
Format delete snmp community <community_string 32>
Parameters
<community_string 32> - Enter the community string value here. This value can be up to 32 characters long.
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To delete a SNMP community “System”:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#delete snmp community System
Command: delete snmp community System
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
79-6 show snmp community
Description
This command is used to display the community string configurations.
Format show snmp community {<community_string 32>}
672
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Parameters
<community_string 32> - (Optional) Enter the Community string.
If no parameter is specified, all community string information will be displayed.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display SNMP community:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show snmp community
Command: show snmp community
SNMP Community Table
Community Name View Name Access Right
------------------------------- ---------------------- ------------ private CommunityView read_write public CommunityView read_only
Total Entries : 2
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
79-7 create snmp community_masking view
Description
This command is used to choose a security method for creating an SNMP community string, but the community string encrypted or not depends on the SNMP community encryption state.
If users use this command to create an SNMP community string, the community string that the user inputs will be displayed as “*”, and the user will have to double input (confirm) the SNMP community string when creating an
SNMP community.
Format create snmp community_masking view <view_name 32> [read_only | read_write]
Parameters
<view_name 32> - Enter the MIB view name used here. This name can be up to 32 characters long.
read_only - Specify that the user, using the community string, will have read only access to the switch’s SNMP agent.
read_write - Specify that the user, using the community string, will have read/write access to the switch’s SNMP agent.
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To create an SNMP community string called “community123” with the “read_only” security method:
673
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# create snmp community_masking view CommunityView read_only
Command: create snmp community_masking view CommunityView read_only
Enter a case-sensitive community:************
Enter the community again for confirmation:************
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
79-8 create snmp user
Description
This command is used to create a new user to an SNMP group originated by this command.
Format create snmp user <user_name 32> <groupname 32> {encrypted [by_password auth [md5 <auth_password
8-16> | sha <auth_password 8-20>] priv [none | des <priv_password 8-16>] | by_key auth [md5 <auth_key
32-32> | sha <auth_key 40-40>] priv [none | des <priv_key 32-32>]]}
Parameters
<user_name 32> - (Optional) Enter the name of the user on the host that connects to the agent. The name can be up to 32 characters long.
<groupname 32> - (Optional) Enter the name of the group to which the user is associated. The name can be up to 32 characters long.
encrypted - Specify whether the password appears in encrypted format.
by_password - Indicates input password for authentication and privacy.
auth - Initiates an authentication level setting session. The options are md5 and sha.
md5 - The HMAC-MD5-96 authentication level.
<auth_password 8-16> - Enter the MD5 authentication password here. This value must be between
8 and 16 characters.
sha - The HMAC-SHA-96 authentication level.
<auth_password 8-20> - Enter the SHA authentication password here. This value must be between
8 and 20 characters.
priv - A privacy key used by DES. It is hex string type.
none - Specify that no encryption will be used for the privacy key.
des - Specify that the DES encryption will be used for the privacy key.
<priv_password 8-16> - Enter the DES password value here. This value must be between 8 and 16 characters long.
by_key - Indicates input key for authentication and privacy.
auth - An authentication string used by MD5 or SHA1.
md5 - An authentication key used by MD5, it is hex string type.
<auth_key 32-32> - Enter the MD5 authentication key here. This value must be 32 characters long.
sha - An authentication key used by SHA1, it is hex string type.
<auth_key 40-40> - Enter the SHA authentication key here. This value must be 32 characters long.
priv - A privacy key used by DES, it is hex string type.
none - Specify that no encryption will be used for the privacy key.
des - Specify that the DES encryption will be used for the privacy key.
<priv_key 32-32> - Enter the DES privacy key here. This value must be 32 characters long.
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
674
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Example
To create a SNMP user “user123” with group “group123”:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#create snmp user user123 group123 encrypted by_password auth md5 12345678 priv des 12345678
Command: create snmp user user123 group123 encrypted by_password auth md5 12345678 priv des
12345678
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
79-9 delete snmp user
Description
This command is used to remove a user from an SNMP group and delete the associated group in SNMP group.
Format delete snmp user <username 32>
Parameters
<username 32> - Enter the name of the user on the host that connects to the agent. The name can be up to 32 characters long.
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To delete a SNMP user “user123”:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#delete snmp user user123
Command: delete snmp user user123
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
79-10 show snmp user
Description
This command is used to display information on each SNMP username in the group username table.
Format show snmp user
Parameters
None.
675
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show SNMP user:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show snmp user
Command: show snmp user
Username Group Name VerAuthPriv
-------------------------------- -------------------------- ----------- initial initial V3 NoneNone user123 group123 V3 MD5 DES
Total Entries : 2
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
79-11 create snmp group
Description
This command is used to create a new SNMP group, or a table that maps SNMP users to SNMP views.
Format create snmp group <groupname 32> [v1 | v2c | v3 [noauth_nopriv | auth_nopriv | auth_priv]] {read_view
<view_name 32> | write_view <view_name 32> | notify_view <view_name 32>}
Parameters
<groupname 32> - Enter the group name here. This name can be up to 32 characters long.
v1 - The least secure of the possible security models.
v2c - The second least secure of the possible security models.
v3 - The most secure of the possible.
noauth_nopriv - Neither support packet authentication nor encrypting.
auth_nopriv - Support packet authentication.
auth_priv - Support packet authentication and encrypting.
read_view - (Optional) Specify that the view name would be read.
<view_name 32> - Enter the read view name here. This name can be up to 32 characters long.
write_view - (Optional) Specify that the view name would be written.
<view_name 32> - Enter the write view name here. This name can be up to 32 characters long.
notify_view - (Optional) Specify that the view name would be notified.
<view_name 32> - Enter the notify view name here. This name can be up to 32 characters long.
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To create SNMP group “group123”:
676
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#create snmp group group123 v3 auth_priv read_view CommunityView write_view CommunityView notify_view CommunityView
Command: create snmp group group123 v3 auth_priv read_view CommunityView write_view
CommunityView notify_view CommunityView
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
79-12 delete snmp group
Description
This command is used to remove a SNMP group.
Format delete snmp group <groupname 32>
Parameters
<groupname 32> - Enter the group name to be deleted.
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To delete SNMP group “group123”:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#delete snmp group group123
Command: delete snmp group group123
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
79-13 show snmp groups
Description
This command is used to display the names of groups on the Switch and the security model, level, the status of the different views.
Format show snmp groups
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
677
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Example
To show SNMP groups:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show snmp groups
Command: show snmp groups
Vacm Access Table Settings
Group Name : public
ReadView Name : CommunityView
WriteView Name :
Notify View Name : CommunityView
Securiy Model : SNMPv1
Securiy Level : NoAuthNoPriv
Group Name : public
ReadView Name : CommunityView
WriteView Name :
Notify View Name : CommunityView
Securiy Model : SNMPv2
Securiy Level : NoAuthNoPriv
Group Name : initial
ReadView Name : restricted
WriteView Name :
Notify View Name : restricted
Securiy Model : SNMPv3
Securiy Level : NoAuthNoPriv
Group Name : WriteGroup
ReadView Name : CommunityView
WriteView Name : CommunityView
Notify View Name : CommunityView
Securiy Model : SNMPv2
Securiy Level : NoAuthNoPriv
Total Entries: 10
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
79-14 create snmp view
Description
This command is used to assign views to community strings to limit which MIB objects an SNMP manager can access.
Format create snmp view <view_name 32> <oid> view_type [included | excluded]
Parameters
<view_name 32> - Enter the view name here. The name can be up to 32 characters long.
<oid> - Enter the object-Identified tree, or MIB tree.
678
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
view_type - Specify the access type of the MIB tree in this view.
included - Includes for this view.
excluded - Excludes for this view.
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To create SNMP view “view123”:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#create snmp view view123 1.3.6 view_type included
Command: create snmp view view123 1.3.6 view_type included
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
79-15 delete snmp view
Description
This command is used to remove a view record.
Format delete snmp view <view_name 32> [all | <oid>]
Parameters
<view_name 32> - Enter the view name to be deleted. The name can be up to 32 characters long.
all - Specify that all view records will be removed.
<oid> - Enter the Object-Identified tree, or MIB tree.
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To delete SNMP view “view123”:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#delete snmp view view123 all
Command: delete snmp view view123 all
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
79-16 show snmp view
Description
This command is used to display the SNMP view record.
679
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Format show snmp view {<view_name 32>}
Parameters
<view_name 32> - Enter the view name to be displayed. The name can be up to 32 characters long.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show SNMP view:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show snmp view
Command: show snmp view
Vacm View Table Settings
View Name Subtree View Type
--------------------- ------------------------ ---------- view123 1.3.6 Included restricted 1.3.6.1.2.1.1 Included restricted 1.3.6.1.2.1.11 Included restricted 1.3.6.1.6.3.10.2.1 Included restricted 1.3.6.1.6.3.11.2.1 Included restricted 1.3.6.1.6.3.15.1.1 Included
CommunityView 1 Included
CommunityView 1.3.6.1.6.3 Excluded
CommunityView 1.3.6.1.6.3.1 Included
Total Entries: 9
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
79-17 create snmp
Description
This command is used to create a recipient of an SNMP trap operation.
Format create snmp [host <ipaddr> | v6host <ipv6addr>] [v1 | v2c | v3 [noauth_nopriv | auth_nopriv | auth_priv]]
<auth_string 32>
Parameters
host - Specify the recipient for which the traps are targeted.
<ipaddr> - Enter the IP address of the recipient for which the traps are targeted.
v6host - Specify the IPv6 host address to which the trap packet will be sent.
<ipv6addr> - Enter the IPv6 address of the recipient for which the traps are targeted.
v1 - Specify that SNMPv1 will be used. The is the least secure of the possible security models.
v2c - Specify that SNMPv2c will be used. This is the second least secure of the possible security models.
v3 - Specify that SNMPv3 will be used. This is the most secure of the possible security models.
noauth_nopriv - Neither supports packet authentication nor encryption.
auth_nopriv - Supports packet authentication.
680
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
auth_priv - Supports packet authentication and encryption.
<auth_string 32> - Enter the authentication string. If the v1 or v2 is specified, the auth_string presents the community string, and it must be one of the entries in the community table. If the v3 is specified, the auth_string presents the user name, and it must be one of the entries in the user table.
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To create SNMP host “10.0.0.1” with community string “public”:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#create snmp host 10.0.0.1 v1 public
Command: create snmp host 10.0.0.1 v1 public
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
79-18 delete snmp
Description
This command is used to delete a recipient of an SNMP trap operation.
Format delete snmp [host <ipaddr> | v6host <ipv6addr>]
Parameters
host - The IP address of the recipient for which the traps are targeted.
<ipaddr> - Enter the IP address used for the configuration here.
v6host - The IPv6 address of the recipient for which the traps are targeted.
<ipv6addr> - Enter the IPv6 address used for the configuration here.
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To delete SNMP host “10.0.0.1”:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#delete snmp host 10.0.0.1
Command: delete snmp host 10.0.0.1
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
681
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
79-19 show snmp host
Description
This command is used to display the recipient for which the traps are targeted.
Format show snmp host {<ipaddr>}
Parameters
<ipaddr> - (Optional) Enter the IP address of the recipient for which the traps are targeted.
If no parameter specified, all SNMP hosts will be displayed.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show SNMP host:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show snmp host
Command: show snmp host
SNMP Host Table
Host IP Address SNMP Version Community Name / SNMPv3 User Name
--------------- --------------- ---------------------------------
10.90.90.3 V3 noauthnopriv initial
10.90.90.2 V2c private
10.90.90.1 V1 public
10.90.90.4 V3 authnopriv user123
10.90.90.5 V3 authpriv user234
Total Entries : 5
DGS-3000-26TC:
79-20 show snmp v6host
Description
This command is used to display the SNMP version 6 hosts.
Format show snmp v6host {<ipv6addr>}
Parameters
<ipv6addr> - (Optional) Enter the IPv6 host address used for the configuration here.
If no parameter specified, SNMP version 6 hosts will be displayed.
Restrictions
None.
682
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Example
To show SNMP v6 host:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show snmp v6host
Command: show snmp v6host
SNMP Host Table
------------------------------------------------------------------
Host IPv6 Address : 3FFE::3
SNMP Version : V3 na/np
Community Name/SNMPv3 User Name : initial
Host IPv6 Address : 3FFE::2
SNMP Version : V2c
Community Name/SNMPv3 User Name : private
Host IPv6 Address : 3FFE::1
SNMP Version : V1
Community Name/SNMPv3 User Name : public
Host IPv6 Address : 3FFE::3
SNMP Version : V3 a/np
Community Name/SNMPv3 User Name : user123
Host IPv6 Address : 3FFE::3
SNMP Version : V3 a/ p
Community Name/SNMPv3 User Name : user234
Total Entries: 5
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
79-21 config snmp engineID
Description
This command is used to configure a identifier for the SNMP engine on the Switch.
Format config snmp engineID <snmp_engineID 10-64>
Parameters
<snmp_engineID 10-64> - Enter the SNMP engine ID here. It is octet string type. It accepts the hex number directly. This value must be between 10 and 64.
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To configure SNMP engine ID to “1023457890”:
683
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config snmp engineID 1023457890
Command: config snmp engineID 1023457890
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
79-22 show snmp engineID
Description
This command is used to display the ID of the SNMP engine on the Switch. This ID consists out of 11 hexadecimal octets. The default value is suggested in RFC 2271. The first bit is 1 and the first four octets are set to the binary equivalent of the agent’s SNMP management private enterprise number as assigned by IANA, D-Link is 171. The fifth octet is 03 to indicate that the MAC address of the Switch will be used in octets 6 to 11.
Format show snmp engineID
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show SNMP engine ID:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show snmp engineID
Command: show snmp engineID
SNMP Engine ID : 800000ab03f07d68300020
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
79-23 enable snmp
Description
This command is used to enable the SNMP function.
Format enable snmp
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators and Operators can issue this command.
684
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Example
To enable SNMP:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#enable snmp
Command: enable snmp
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
79-24 disable snmp
Description
This command is used to disable the SNMP function.
Format disable snmp
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators and Operators can issue this command.
Example
To disable SNMP:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#disable snmp
Command: disable snmp
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
79-25 config snmp system_name
Description
This command is used to configure the name for the Switch.
Format config snmp system_name {<sw_name>}
Parameters
<sw_name> - (Optional) Enter the SNMP system name used here. This name can be up to 255 characters long.
685
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Restrictions
Only Administrators and Operators can issue this command.
Example
To configure the Switch name for “DGS-30xx”:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config snmp system_name DGS-30xx
Command: config snmp system_name DGS-30xx
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
79-26 config snmp system_location
Description
This command is used to enter a description of the location of the Switch.
Format config snmp system_location {<sw_location>}
Parameters
<sw_location> - (Optional) Enter the SNMP system location string here. This string can be up to 255 characters long.
Restrictions
Only Administrators and Operators can issue this command.
Example
To configure the Switch location for “HQ 5F”:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config snmp system_location HQ 5F
Command: config snmp system_location HQ 5F
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
79-27 config snmp system_contact
Description
This command is used to enter the name of a contact person who is responsible for the Switch.
Format config snmp system_contact {<sw_contact>}
686
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Parameters
<sw_contact> - (Optional) Enter the SNMP system contact string here. This name can be up to 255 characters long.
Restrictions
Only Administrators and Operators can issue this command.
Example
To configure the Switch contact to “MIS Department II”:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config snmp system_contact "MIS Department II"
Command: config snmp system_contact "MIS Department II"
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
79-28 enable snmp traps
Description
This command is used to enable SNMP trap support.
Format enable snmp traps
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators and Operators can issue this command.
Example
To enable SNMP trap support:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#enable snmp traps
Command: enable snmp traps
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
79-29 disable snmp traps
Description
This command is used to disable SNMP trap support on the Switch.
687
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Format disable snmp traps
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators and Operators can issue this command.
Example
To prevent SNMP traps from being sent from the Switch:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#disable snmp traps
Command: disable snmp traps
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
79-30 enable snmp authenticate_traps
Description
This command is used to enable SNMP authentication failure trap support.
Format enable snmp authenticate_traps
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators and Operators can issue this command.
Example
To enable SNMP authentication trap support:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#enable snmp authenticate_traps
Command: enable snmp authenticate_traps
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
688
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
79-31 disable snmp authenticate_traps
Description
This command is used to disable SNMP authentication failure trap support.
Format disable snmp authenticate_traps
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators and Operators can issue this command.
Example
To disable SNMP authentication trap support:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#disable snmp authenticate_traps
Command: disable snmp authenticate_traps
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
79-32 enable snmp linkchange_traps
Description
This command is used to configure the sending of linkchange traps.
Format enable snmp linkchange_traps
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators and Operators can issue this command.
Example
To enable the sending of linkchange traps:
689
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#enable snmp linkchange_traps
Command: enable snmp linkchange_traps
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
79-33 disable snmp linkchange_traps
Description
This command is used to configure the sending of linkchange traps.
Format disable snmp linkchange_traps
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators and Operators can issue this command.
Example
To disable the sending of linkchange traps:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#disable snmp linkchange_traps
Command: disable snmp linkchange_traps
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
79-34 config snmp linkchange_traps ports
Description
This command is used to configure the sending of linkchange traps and per port control for sending of change trap.
Format config snmp linkchange_traps ports [all | <portlist>] [enable | disable]
Parameters
all - Specify that all ports will be used.
<portlist> - Enter the range of ports used.
enable - Enables the sending of the link change trap for this port.
disable - Disables the sending of the link change trap for this port.
690
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To configure the sending of linkchange traps:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config snmp linkchange_traps ports 1-4 enable
Command: config snmp linkchange_traps ports 1-4 enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
79-35 config snmp coldstart_traps
Description
This command is used to configure the trap for coldstart event.
Format config snmp coldstart_traps [enable | disable]
Parameters
enable - Enables the trap of the coldstart event. The default state is enabled.
disable - Disables the trap of the coldstart event.
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To configure the trap for coldstart event:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config snmp coldstart_traps enable
Command: config snmp coldstart_traps enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
79-36 config snmp warmstart_traps
Description
This command is used to configure the trap state for warmstart event.
Format config snmp warmstart_traps [enable | disable]
691
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Parameters
enable - Enables the trap of the warmstart event. The default state is enabled.
disable - Disables the trap of the warmstart event.
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To configure the trap state for warmstart event:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config snmp warmstart_traps enable
Command: config snmp warmstart_traps enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
79-37 show snmp traps
Description
This command is used to display the SNMP trap sending status.
Format show snmp traps {linkchange_traps {ports <portlist>}}
Parameters
linkchange_traps - (Optional) Specify that the SNMP trap sending status will be displayed.
ports - (Optional) Specify the ports for the display.
<portlist> - Enter the list of ports used for the display here.
Restrictions
None.
Example
692
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show snmp traps
Command: show snmp traps
SNMP Traps : Enabled
Authenticate Trap : Enabled
Linkchange Traps : Enabled
Coldstart Traps : Enabled
Warmstart Traps : Enabled
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
79-38 config rmon trap
Description
This command is used to configure the trap state for RMON events.
Format config rmon trap {rising_alarm [enable | disable] | falling_alarm [enable | disable]} (1)
Parameters
rising_alarm - Specify the trap state for rising alarm. The default state is enabled.
enable - Specify that the rising alarm function will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the rising alarm function will be disabled.
falling_alarm - Specify the trap state for falling alarm. The default state is enabled.
enable - Specify that the falling alarm function will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the falling alarm function will be disabled.
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To configure the trap state for RMON events:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config rmon trap rising_alarm disable
Command: config rmon trap rising_alarm disable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
79-39 show rmon
Description
This command is used to display the RMON related setting.
Format show rmon
693
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the RMON related setting:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show rmon
Command: show rmon
RMON Rising Alarm Trap : Enabled
RMON Falling Alarm Trap : Enabled
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
694
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 80 Simple RED Command List
enable sred disable sred
config sred [<portlist> | all] [<class_id 0-7> | all] {threshold {low <value 0-100> | high <value 0-100>} | drop_rate
{low <value 1-8> | high <value 1-8>} | drop_green [enable | disable]}
show sred {<portlist> {<class_id 0-7>}}
show sred drop_counter {<portlist>}
80-1 enable sred
Description
This command is used to enable the sRED function. By default, sRED is disabled.
Format enable sred
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To enable sRED:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#enable sred
Command: enable sred
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
80-2 disable sred
Description
This command is used to disable the sRED function.
Format disable sred
Parameters
None.
695
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To disable sRED:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#disable sred
Command: disable sred
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
80-3 config sred
Description
This command is used to configure the sRED port’s queue settings.
Format config sred [<portlist> | all] [<class_id 0-7> | all] {threshold {low <value 0-100> | high <value 0-100>} | drop_rate {low <value 1-8> | high <value 1-8>} | drop_green [enable | disable]}
Parameters
<portlist> - Enter the list of ports, used for this configuration, here.
all - Specify that all the ports will be used.
<class_id 0-7> - Enter the CoS Class ID used here. This value must be between 0 and 7.
all - Specify that all the CoS Class ID will be used.
threshold - (Optional) Specify the threshold of the percent of space utilized.
low - (Optional) Specify the low threshold value used.
<value 0-100> - Enter the low threshold value used here. This value must be between 0 and 100.
high - (Optional) Specify the high threshold value used.
<value 0-100> - Enter the high threshold value used here. This value must be between 0 and 100.
drop_rate - (Optional) Specify the drop rate value used.
low - (Optional) Specify the low drop rate value used.
<value 1-8> - Enter the low drop rate value used here. This value must be between 1 and 8.
high - (Optional) Specify the high drop rate value used.
<value 1-8> - Enter the high drop rate value used here. This value must be between 1 and 8. (Note: There are 8 drop rates: 1=100%; 2=6.25%; 3=3.125%; 4= 1.5625%; 5= 0.78125%; 6=0.390625%; 7=
0.1953125%; 8= 0.09765625%)
drop_green - (Optional) Specify the drop green parameters.
enable - Probabilistic drop yellow and red colored packets if the queue depth is above the low threshold, and probabilistic drop green colored packets if the queue depth is above the high threshold.
disable - Probabilistic drop red colored packets if the queue depth is above the low threshold, and probabilistic drop yellow colored packets if the queue depth is above the high threshold.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power users can issue this command.
Example
To configure sRED:
696
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config sred all all threshold low 64 high 80 drop_rate low 8 high 8 drop_green disable
Command: config sred all all threshold low 64 high 80 drop_rate low 8 high 8 drop_green disable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
80-4 show sred
Description
This command is used to display the current thresholds (per port and per queue) parameters in use on the Switch
Format show sred {<portlist> {<class_id 0-7>}}
Parameters
<portlist> - (Optional) Enter the list of port used for the display.
<class_id 0-7> - (Optional) Enter which of the hardware CoS queues to display.
If no parameter is specified, then all information will be displayed.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display sRED information:
697
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show sred
Command: show sred
Simple RED Global Status: Enabled
Port Class Drop Green Threshold Drop Rate
Low High Low High
---- ----- --------- ---- ---- ---- ----
1 0 Disabled 64 80 8 8
1 1 Disabled 64 80 8 8
1 2 Disabled 64 80 8 8
1 3 Disabled 64 80 8 8
1 4 Disabled 64 80 8 8
1 5 Disabled 64 80 8 8
1 6 Disabled 64 80 8 8
1 7 Disabled 64 80 8 8
2 0 Disabled 64 80 8 8
2 1 Disabled 64 80 8 8
2 2 Disabled 64 80 8 8
2 3 Disabled 64 80 8 8
2 4 Disabled 64 80 8 8
2 5 Disabled 64 80 8 8
2 6 Disabled 64 80 8 8
2 7 Disabled 64 80 8 8
3 0 Disabled 64 80 8 8
CTRL+C ESC q Quit SPACE n Next Page ENTER Next Entry a All
80-5 show sred drop_counter
Description
This command is used to display the dropped packet count of egress ports.
Format show sred drop_counter {<portlist>}
Parameters
<portlist> - (Optional) Enter the list of port used for the display.
If no parameter is specified, then all information will be displayed.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the dropped packet count of egress ports:
698
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show sred drop_counter
Command: show sred drop_counter
Port Yellow Red
---- -------------- ---------------
1 0 0
2 0 0
3 0 0
4 0 0
5 0 0
6 0 0
7 0 0
8 0 0
9 0 0
10 0 0
11 0 0
12 0 0
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
699
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 81 Single IP Management Command
List
enable sim disable sim
show sim {[candidates {<candidate_id 1-100>} | members{<member_id 1-32>} | group {commander_mac
<macaddr>} | neighbor]}
reconfig {member_id <value 1-32> | exit}
config sim_group [add <candidate_id 1-100> {<password>} | delete <member_id 1-32>]
config sim [[commander {group_name <groupname 64>} | candidate] | dp_interval <sec 30-90> | hold_time <sec
100-255>]
download sim_ms [firmware_from_tftp | configuration_from_tftp] {[<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr>] <path_filename>
{[members <mslist 1-32> | all]}}
upload sim_ms [configuration_to_tftp | log_to_tftp] {[<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr>] <path_filename> {[members <mslist>
| all]}}
config sim trap [enable | disable]
81-1 enable sim
Description
This command is used to configure the single IP management on the Switch as enabled.
Format enable sim
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To enable SIM:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#enable sim
Command: enable sim
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
81-2 disable sim
Description
This command is used to disable single IP management on the Switch.
700
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Format disable sim
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To disable SIM:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#disable sim
Command: disable sim
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
81-3 show sim
Description
This command is used to display the current information of the specific sort of devices.
Format show sim {[candidates {<candidate_id 1-100>} | members{<member_id 1-32>} | group {commander_mac
<macaddr>} | neighbor]}
Parameters
candidates - (Optional) Specify the candidate devices.
<candidate_id 1-100> - (Optional) Enter the candidate device ID here. This value must be between 1 and
100.
members - (Optional) Specify the member devices.
<member_id 1-32> - (Optional) Enter the member device ID here. This value must be between 1 and 32.
group - (Optional) Specify other group devices.
commander_mac - (Optional) Specify the commander MAC address used.
<macaddr> - Enter the commander MAC address used here.
neighbor - (Optional) Specify other neighbor devices.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show the SIM information in detail:
701
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show sim
Command: show sim
SIM Version : VER-1.61
Firmware Version : 2.00.004
Device Name :
MAC Address : 00-01-02-03-04-00
Capabilities : L2
Platform : DGS-3000-26TC L2 Switch
SIM State : Disabled
Role State : Candidate
Discovery Interval : 30 sec
Hold Time : 100 sec
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To show the candidate information in summary, if user specify candidate id, it would show information in detail:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show sim candidates
Command: show sim candidates
ID MAC Address Platform / Hold Firmware Device Name
Capability Time Version
--- ----------------- ------------------------ ----- --------- ----------------
1 00-01-02-03-04-00 DGS-3000-26TC L2 Switch 40 2.00.004 Device
2 00-55-55-00-55-00 DGS-3000-26TC L2 Switch 140 2.00.004 Device2
Total Entries: 2
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To show the member information in summary, if user specify member id, it will show information in detail:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show sim members
Command: show sim members
ID MAC Address Platform / Hold Firmware Device Name
Capability Time Version
--- ----------------- ------------------------ ----- --------- ----------------
1 00-01-02-03-04-00 DGS-3000-26TC L2 Switch 40 2.00.004 Device
2 00-55-55-00-55-00 DGS-3000-26TC L2 Switch 140 2.00.004 Device2
Total Entries: 2
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To show other groups information in summary, if user specify group name, it will show information in detail:
702
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show sim group
Command: show sim group
SIM Group Name : default
ID MAC Address Platform / Hold Firmware Device Name
Capability Time Version
--- ----------------- ------------------------ ----- --------- ----------------
*1 00-01-02-03-04-00 DGS-3000-26TC L2 Switch 40 2.00.004 Device
2 00-55-55-00-55-00
SIM Group Name : SIM2
ID MAC Address Platform / Hold Firmware Device Name
Capability Time Version
--- ----------------- ------------------------ ----- --------- ----------------
*1 00-01-02-03-04-00 DGS-3000-26TC L2 Switch 40 2.00.004 Device
2 00-55-55-00-55-00
3 00-55-55-00-55-11
Total Entries: 2
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To show neighbor table of SIM:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show sim neighbor
Command: show sim neighbor
Neighbor Table
Port MAC Address Role
------ ------------------ ---------
23 00-35-26-00-11-99 Commander
23 00-35-26-00-11-91 Member
24 00-35-26-00-11-90 Candidate
Total Entries: 3
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
81-4 reconfig
Description
This command is used to re-Telnet to member.
Format reconfig {member_id <value 1-32> | exit}
Parameters
member_id - (Optional) Specify the serial number of the member.
<value 1-32> - Enter the serial number of the member here.
exit - (Optional) Specify to exit from the Telnet session.
703
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To re-Telnet to member:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#reconfig member_id 1
Command: reconfig member_id 1
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
Login:
81-5 config sim_group
Description
This command is used to configure group information.
Format config sim_group [add <candidate_id 1-100> {<password>} | delete <member_id 1-32>]
Parameters
add - Specify to add a specific candidate to the group.
<candidate_id 1-100> - Enter the candidate ID to be added to the group here. This value must be between 1 and 100.
<password> - (Optional) Enter the password of candidate if necessary.
delete - Specify to delete a member from the group.
<member_id 1-32> - Enter the member ID of the member to be removed from the group here. This value must be between 1 and 32.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To add a member:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config sim_group add 2
Command: config sim_group add 2
Please wait for ACK !!!
SIM Configure Success !!!
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To delete a member:
704
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config sim_group delete 1
Command: config sim_group delete 1
Please wait for ACK !!!
SIM Configure Success !!!
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
81-6 config sim
Description
This command is used to configure the role state and the parameters of the discovery protocol on the Switch.
Format config sim [[commander {group_name <groupname 64>} | candidate] | dp_interval <sec 30-90> | hold_time
<sec 100-255>]
Parameters
commander - Specify to transfer the role to the commander.
group_name - (Optional) Specify that if the user is the commander, the user can update the name of group.
<groupname 64> - Enter the group name here. This name can be up to 64 characters long.
candidate - Specify to transfer the role to the candidate.
dp_interval - The time in seconds between discoveries.
<sec 30-90> - Enter the discovery time here in seconds. This value must be between 30 and 90 seconds.
hold_time - The time in seconds the device holds the discovery result.
<sec 100-255> - Enter the hold time here in seconds. This value must be between 100 and 255.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To transfer to commander:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config sim commander
Command: config sim commander
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To transfer to candidate:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config sim candidate
Command: config sim candidate
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
705
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
To update name of group:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config sim commander group_name mygroup
Command: config sim commander group_name mygroup
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To change the time interval of discovery protocol:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config sim dp_interval 30
Command: config sim dp_interval 30
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To change the hold time of discovery protocol:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config sim hold_time 200
Command: config sim hold_time 200
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
81-7 download sim_ms
Description
This command is used to download firmware or configuration from TFTP server to indicated devices.
Format download sim_ms [firmware_from_tftp | configuration_from_tftp] {[<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr>] <path_filename>
{[members <mslist 1-32> | all]}}
Parameters
firmware_from_tftp - Specify to download firmware from a TFTP server.
configuration_from_tftp - Specify to download configuration from a TFTP server.
<ipaddr> - (Optional) Enter the IP address of the TFTP server.
<ipv6addr> - (Optional) Enter the IPv6 address of TFTP server.
<path_filename> - (Optional) Enter the file path of firmware or configuration in the TFTP server.
members - (Optional) Specify a range of members which download this firmware or configuration.
<mslist 1-32> - Enter a range of members which download this firmware or configuration.
all - (Optional) Specify all members which download this firmware or configuration.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To download firmware:
706
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26-TCS:admin# download sim_ms firmware_from_tftp 10.55.47.1 D:\firmware.had members
1
Commands: download sim_ms firmware_from_tftp 10.55.47.1 D:\firmware.had members 1
This device is updating firmware. Please wait...
Download Status :
ID MAC Address Result
--- ----------------- ----------------
1 00-01-02-03-04-00 Success
2 00-07-06-05-04-03 Fail
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To download configuration:
DGS-3000-25TC:admin# download sim_ms configuratin_from_tftp 10.55.47.1 D:\config.cfg 1
Commands: download sim_ms configuratin_from_tftp 10.55.47.1 D:\config.cfg 1
This device is updating configuration. Please wait...
Download Status :
ID MAC Address Result
--- ----------------- ----------------
1 00-01-02-03-04-00 Success
2 00-07-06-05-04-03 Fail
3 00-07-06-05-04-03 Fail
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To download configuration via IPv6:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# download sim_ms configuratin_from_tftp 2001::1234 D:\config.cfg 1
Commands: download sim_ms configuratin_from_tftp 2001::1234 D:\config.cfg 1
This device is updating configuration. Please wait several minutes ...
Download Status :
ID MAC Address Result
--- ----------------- ----------------
1 00-01-02-03-04-00 Success
2 00-07-06-05-04-03 Fail
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
81-8 upload sim_ms
Description
This command is used to upload configuration or logs from indicated devices to the TFTP server.
707
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Format upload sim_ms [configuration_to_tftp | log_to_tftp] {[<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr>] <path_filename> {[ members
<mslist> | all]}}
Parameters
configuration_to_tftp - Specify to upload configuration to a TFTP server.
log_to_tftp - Specify to upload a log to a TFTP server.
<ipaddr> - (Optional) Enter the IPv4 address of TFTP server.
<ipv6addr> - (Optional) Enter the IPv6 address of TFTP server.
<path_filename> - (Optional) Enter the file path to store configuration in TFTP server.
members - (Optional) Specify the members which upload its configuration.
<mslist> - Enter the members which upload its configuration. The value is from 1 to 32.
all - (Optional) Specify all members which upload its configuration.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To upload configuration:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#upload sim_ms configuration_to_tftp 10.55.47.1 D:\config.cfg members 1
Command: upload sim_ms configuration_to_tftp 10.55.47.1 D:\config.cfg members 1
Done.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To upload log via IPv6:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#upload sim_ms log_to_tftp 2001::1234 D:\log.txt members 1
Command: upload sim_ms log_to_tftp 2001::1234 D:\log.txt members 1
This device is uploading log. Please wait several minutes ...
Upload Status :
ID MAC Address Result
--- ----------------- ----------------
00-01-02-03-04-00 Success
DGS-3000-26TC:admin
81-9 config sim trap
Description
This command is used to control sending of traps issued from the member switch.
Format config sim trap [enable | disable]
708
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Parameters
enable - Enable the trap state.
disable - Disable the trap state.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To enable SIM trap:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config sim trap enable
Command: config sim trap enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
709
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 82 Super VLAN Command List
create super_vlan [<vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid 1-4094>] {sub_vlan <vidlist>}
config super_vlan [<vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid 1-4094>] [add | delete] sub_vlan <vidlist>
delete super_vlan [<vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid 1-4094>]
config sub_vlan [<vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid 1-4094>] [add | delete] ip_range <ipaddr> to <ipaddr>
show super_vlan {[<vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid 1-4094>]}
show sub_vlan {[<vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vidlist>]}
82-1 create super_vlan
Description
This command is used to create a super VLAN. The specified VLAN must be an 802.1Q VLAN. If the specified
VLAN does not exist, the operation will fail.
NOTE: A Layer 3 Routing Protocol, like VRRP, the Multicast Protocol, and the IPv6 Protocol cannot run on a super
VLAN interface.
Super VLANs are used to aggregate multiple sub-VLANs in the same IP subnet. A sub-VLAN is a Layer 2, separated broadcast domain. The super VLAN cannot have any physical member ports and hosts that resides within any sub-VLANs. Once an IP interface is bound to a super VLAN, the proxy ARP will be enabled automatically on the specified interface for the communication between its sub-VLANs. If an IP interface is bound to a super VLAN, it cannot be bound to any other VLANs. A super VLAN cannot be a sub-VLAN of other super
VLANs.
Format create super_vlan [<vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid 1-4094>] {sub_vlan <vidlist>}
Parameters
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the VLAN name used here. This name can be up to 32 characters long.
vlanid - Specify the VLAN ID used.
<vlanid 1-4094> - Enter the VLAN ID used here. This value must be between 1 and 4094.
sub_vlan - (Optional) Specify the sub-VLANs of the super VLAN. By default, a new created super VLAN has no sub-VLANs configured.
<vidlist> - Enter the VLAN ID of the sub-VLAN used here. This value must be between 1 and 4094.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To create super VLAN 10:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# create super_vlan vlanid 10
Command: create super_vlan vlanid 10
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
710
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
82-2 config super_vlan
Description
This command is used to configure the sub-VLANs of a super VLAN. A sub-VLAN only can belong to one super
VLAN and you cannot bind an IP interface on it.
Format config super_vlan [<vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid 1-4094>] [add | delete] sub_vlan <vidlist>
Parameters
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the VLAN name used here. This name can be up to 32 characters long.
vlanid - Specify the VLAN ID used.
<vlanid 1-4094> - Enter the VLAN ID used here. This value must be between 1 and 4094.
add - Specify the sub-VLAN ID list to add to the super VLAN. The sub-VLAN shall be an existent 802.1Q VLAN.
delete - Specify the sub-VLAN ID list to delete from the super VLAN.
sub_vlan - Specify the sub-VLANs of the super VLAN. By default, a new created super VLAN has no sub-VLANs configured.
<vidlist> - Enter the VLAN ID of the sub-VLAN used here. This value must be between 1 and 4094.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To add sub VLAN 2-4 into super VLAN 10:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# config super_vlan 10 add sub_vlan 2-4
Command: config super_vlan 10 add sub_vlan 2-4
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
82-3 delete super_vlan
Description
This command is used to delete a super VLAN.
Format delete super_vlan [<vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid 1-4094>]
Parameters
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the VLAN name used here. This name can be up to 32 characters long.
vlanid - Specify the VLAN ID used.
<vlanid 1-4094> - Enter the VLAN ID used here. This value must be between 1 and 4094.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
711
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Example
To delete the super VLAN by specify the VLAN ID 10:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# delete super_vlan vlanid 10
Command: delete super_vlan vlanid 10
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
82-4 config sub_vlan
Description
This command is used to configure the IP range of the sub-VLAN.
A sub-VLAN can has one or more IP ranges. Configuring IP range of sub-VLAN can reduce the ARP traffic in the super VLAN. That is multiple IP (ranges) is allowed to map to one sub-VLAN. One IP can not map to multiple sub-
VLANs, if one IP is mapped to multiple VLAN it may cause traffic forwarding to the wrong VLAN.
Format config sub_vlan [<vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid 1-4094>] [add | delete] ip_range <ipaddr> to <ipaddr>
Parameters
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the VLAN name used here. This name can be up to 32 characters long.
vlanid - Specify the VLAN ID used.
<vlanid 1-4094> - Enter the VLAN ID used here. This value must be between 1 and 4094.
add - Specify the IP range of the sub-VLAN that will be added.
delete - Specify the IP range of the sub-VLAN that will be deleted.
ip_range - Specify the IP range of the sub-VLAN that will be used.
<ipaddr> - Enter the starting IP address used here.
to - Specify that the next IP address will be the ending IP address.
<ipaddr> - Enter the ending IP address used here.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure IP range of sub VLAN 1 to 10.1.1.1-10.1.1.3:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# config sub_vlan vlanid 1 add ip_range 10.1.1.1 to 10.1.1.3
Command: config sub_vlan vlanid 1 add ip_range 10.1.1.1 to 10.1.1.3
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
82-5 show super_vlan
Description
This command is used to display the super VLAN parameters.
712
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Format show super_vlan {[<vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid 1-4094>]}
Parameters
<vlan_name 32> - (Optional) Enter the super VLAN name used here. This name can be up to 32 characters long.
vlanid - (Optional) Specify the super VLAN ID used.
<vlanid 1-4094> - Enter the super VLAN ID used here. This value must be between 1 and 4094. If the super
VLAN is not specified, all super VLANs will be displayed
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show super VLAN:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# show super_vlan
Command: show super_vlan
Super VID : 3
VLAN Name : super3
IP Subnet: 172.6.0.254/16
Status : Inactive
Sub VID : 200-204
Total Entries: 1
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
82-6 show sub_vlan
Description
This command is used to show sub_VLAN.
Format show sub_vlan {[<vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vidlist>]}
Parameters
<vlan_name 32> - (Optional) Enter the sub_VLAN name used here. This name can be up to 32 characters long.
vlanid - (Optional) Specify the sub_VLAN ID used.
<vidlist> - Enter the sub_VLAN ID used here. This value must be between 1 and 4094. If the sub_vlan VLAN is not specified, all sub_vlans will be displayed.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show all sub_VLAN:
713
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# show sub_vlan
Command: show sub_vlan
Sub VID Status Super VID IP Range
------- ------- ---------- ------------------------
1 Active 10 10.1.1.1-10.1.1.10
10.1.2.1-10.1.2.20
2 Active 10 10.1.3.0-10.1.3.100
3 Inactive 10 10.1.4.0-10.1.4.255
4 Active 20 10.1.5.0-10.1.5.255
5 Inactive 20 10.1.6.0-10.1.6.255
Total Entries: 5
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
714
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 83 Syslog and Trap Source-interface
Command List
config syslog source_ipif [<ipif_name 12> {<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr> } | none] show syslog source_ipif
config trap source_ipif [<ipif_name 12> {<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr> } | none] show trap source_ipif
83-1 config syslog source_ipif
Description
This command is used to configure syslog source IP interface.
Format config syslog source_ipif [<ipif_name 12> {<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr> } | none]
Parameters
<ipif_name 12> - Enter the IP interface name. If only specify this parameter, the least IPv4 address and the smallest IPv6 address of ipif_name will be used as source IP addresses. This name can be up to 12 characters long.
<ipaddr> - (Optional) Enter the IP address used for the configuration here.
<ipv6addr> - (Optional) Enter the IPv6 address used for the configuration here.
none - Specify to clear the configured source IP interface.
Restrictions
Only Administrators and Operators can issue this command.
Example
Configure syslog source IP interface:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config syslog source_ipif ipif3 14.0.0.5
Command: config syslog source_ipif ipif3 14.0.0.5
Success
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To clear the configured source IP interface for syslog:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config syslog source_ipif none
Command: config syslog source_ipif none
Success
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
715
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
83-2 show syslog source_ipif
Description
This command is used to display the syslog source IP interface.
Format show syslog source_ipif
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
Show syslog source IP interface:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show syslog source_ipif
Command: show syslog source_ipif
Syslog Source IP Interface Configuration:
IP Interface : ipif3
IPv4 Address : 14.0.0.5
IPv6 Address : None
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
83-3 config trap source_ipif
Description
This command is used to configure trap source IP interface.
Format config trap source_ipif [<ipif_name 12> {<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr> } | none]
Parameters
<ipif_name 12> - Enter the IP interface name here. This name can be up to 12 characters long.
<ipaddr> - (Optional) Enter the IP address used for the configuration here.
<ipv6addr> - (Optional) Enter the IPv6 address used for the configuration here.
none - Specify to clear the configured source IP interface.
Restrictions
Only Administrators and Operators can issue this command.
Example
Configure trap source IP interface:
716
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config trap source_ipif System
Command: config trap source_ipif System
Success
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To clear the configured trap source IP interface:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config trap source_ipif none
Command: config trap source_ipif none
Success
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
83-4 show trap source_ipif
Description
This command is used to display the trap source IP interface.
Format show trap source_ipif
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
Show trap source IP interface:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show trap source_ipif
Command: show trap source_ipif
Trap Source IP Interface Configuration:
IP Interface : System
IPv4 Address : None
IPv6 Address : None
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
717
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 84 System Log Command List
clear log
show log {[index <value_list> | severity {module <module_list>} {emergency | alert | critical | error | warning | notice | informational | debug | <level_list 0-7>} | module<module_list>]} show log_software_module enable syslog disable syslog show syslog
create syslog host <index 1-4> ipaddress [<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr>] {severity [emergency | alert | critical | error | warning | notice | informational | debug | <level 0-7>] | facility [local0 | local1 | local2 | local3 | local4 | local5 | local6 | local7] | udp_port <udp_port_number> | state [enable | disable]}
config syslog host [<index> | all] {severity [emergency | alert | critical | error | warning | notice | informational | debug| <level 0-7>] | facility [local0 | local1 | local2 | local3 | local4 | local5 | local6 | local7] | udp_port
<udp_port_number> | ipaddress [<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr>] | state [enable | disable]}(1)
delete syslog host [<index 1-4> | all]
show syslog host {<index 1-4>}
config log_save_timing [time_interval <min 1-65535> | on_demand | log_trigger] show log_save_timing
show attack_log {index <value_list>} clear attack_log
84-1 clear log
Description
This command is used to clear the Switch’s history log.
Format clear log
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators and Operators can issue this command.
Example
To clear the Switch’s history log:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#clear log
Command: clear log
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
718
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
84-2 show log
Description
This command is used to display the Switch’s history log.
Format show log {[index <value_list> | severity {module <module_list>} {emergency | alert | critical | error | warning | notice | informational | debug | <level_list 0-7>} | module<module_list>]}
Parameters
index - (Optional) Specify the index value of log entries that will be displayed. For example, specifying 1-5 will display the history log from 1 to 5.
<value_list> - Enter the index value here.
severity - (Optional) Specify the severity level used.
module - (Optional) Specify the modules which are to be displayed. The module can be obtained by using the show log_software_module command. Use a comma to separate multiple modules.
<module_list> - Enter the module list value here.
emergency - (Optional) Severity level 0.
alert - (Optional) Severity level 1.
critical - (Optional) Severity level 2.
error - (Optional) Severity level 3.
warning - (Optional) Severity level 4.
notice - (Optional) Severity level 5.
informational - (Optional) Severity level 6.
debug - (Optional) Severity level 7.
<level_list 0-7> - Enter a list of severity level which is to be displayed. If there is more than one severity level, please separate them by comma. The level number is from 0 to 7.
module - (Optional) Specify the modules which are to be displayed. The module can be obtained by using the show log_software_module command. Use a comma to separate multiple modules.
<module_list> - Enter the module list value here.
If no parameter is specified, all history log entries will be displayed.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the Switch’s history log:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show log index 1-3
Command: show log index 1-3
Index Date Time Level Log Text
----- ---------- -------- ------- ----------------------------------------------
3 2000-01-01 00:00:40 CRIT(2) System started up
2 2000-01-01 00:00:40 CRIT(2) System cold start
1 2000-01-01 01:49:30 INFO(6) Anonymous: execute command "reset system".
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
719
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
84-3 show log_software_module
Description
This command is used to display the protocols or applications that support the enhanced log. The enhanced log adds the module name and module ID. Network administrators can display logs by module name or module ID.
Format show log_software_module
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the protocols or applications that support the enhanced log:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show log_software_module
Command: show log_software_module
ERPS ERROR_LOG MSTP
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
84-4 enable syslog
Description
This command is used to enable the sending of syslog messages.
Format enable syslog
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators and Operators can issue this command.
Example
To enable the sending of syslog messages:
720
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#enable syslog
Command: enable syslog
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
84-5 disable syslog
Description
This command is used to disable the sending of syslog messages.
Format disable syslog
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators and Operators can issue this command.
Example
To disable the sending of syslog messages:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#disable syslog
Command: disable syslog
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
84-6 show syslog
Description
This command is used to display the syslog protocol global state.
Format show syslog
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
721
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Example
To display the syslog protocol global state:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show syslog
Command: show syslog
Syslog Global State: Enabled
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
84-7 create syslog host
Description
This command is used to create a new syslog host. The user can choose and report specific levels of messages to a specific host. When the user chooses a specific level for a specific host, messages which are at that severity level or higher will be reported to that host.
Format create syslog host <index 1-4> ipaddress [<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr>] {severity [emergency | alert | critical | error | warning | notice | informational | debug | <level 0-7>] | facility [local0 | local1 | local2 | local3 | local4 | local5 | local6 | local7] | udp_port <udp_port_number> | state [enable | disable]}
Parameters
<index 1-4> - Enter the host index value here.
ipaddress - Specify the IP address for the host.
<ipaddr> - Enter the IP address for the host.
<ipv6addr> - Enter the IPv6 address for the host.
severity - (Optional) Specify the severity level.
emergency - Severity level 0.
alert - Severity level 1.
critical - Severity level 2.
error - Severity level 3.
warning - Severity level 4.
notice - Severity level 5.
informational - Severity level 6.
debug - Severity level 7.
<level 0-7> - Enter the severity level value here. This value must be between 0 and 7.
facility - (Optional) Some of the operating system daemons and processes have been assigned Facility values.
Processes and daemons that have not been explicitly assigned a Facility may use any of the "local use" facilities or they may use the "user-level" Facility. Those Facilities that have been designated are shown below.
This facility setting will be put in the syslog packet when it is sent to a specific syslog server.
local0 - Specify that the user-defined facility will be set to local 0.
local1 - Specify that the user-defined facility will be set to local 1.
local2 - Specify that the user-defined facility will be set to local 2.
local3 - Specify that the user-defined facility will be set to local 3.
local4 - Specify that the user-defined facility will be set to local 4.
local5 - Specify that the user-defined facility will be set to local 5.
local6 - Specify that the user-defined facility will be set to local 6.
local7 - Specify that the user-defined facility will be set to local 7.
udp_port - (Optional) Specify the UDP port number.
<udp_port_number> - Enter the UDP port number used here.
state - (Optional) The syslog protocol is used for the transmission of event notification messages across networks to a host. The option enables or disables the host to receive such messages.
enable - Specify that the host to receive such messages will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the host to receive such messages will be disabled.
722
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Restrictions
Only Administrators and Operators can issue this command.
Example
Adds a new syslog host:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#create syslog host 1 ipaddress 10.90.90.1 severity debug facility local0
Command: create syslog host 1 ipaddress 10.90.90.1 severity debug facility local0
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
84-8 config syslog host
Description
This command is used to configure the syslog host configurations. The user can choose and report a specific level of messages to a specific host. When the user chooses a specific level for a specific host, messages which are at that severity level or higher will be reported to the specified host.
Format config syslog host [<index> | all] {severity [emergency | alert | critical | error | warning | notice | informational | debug| <level 0-7>] | facility [local0 | local1 | local2 | local3 | local4 | local5 | local6 | local7] | udp_port <udp_port_number> | ipaddress [<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr>] | state [enable | disable]}(1)
Parameters
<index> - Enter the host index value here.
all - Specify that all the host indexes will be used.
severity - Specify the severity level.
emergency - Severity level 0.
alert - Severity level 1.
critical - Severity level 2.
error - Severity level 3.
warning - Severity level 4.
notice - Severity level 5.
informational - Severity level 6.
debug - Severity level 7.
<level 0-7> - Enter the severity level value here. This value must be between 0 and 7.
facility - Some of the operating system daemons and processes have been assigned Facility values. Processes and daemons that have not been explicitly assigned a Facility may use any of the "local use" facilities or they may use the "user-level" Facility. Those Facilities that have been designated are shown below. This facility setting will be put in the syslog packet when it is sent to a specific syslog server.
local0 - Specify that the user-defined facility will be set to local 0.
local1 - Specify that the user-defined facility will be set to local 1.
local2 - Specify that the user-defined facility will be set to local 2.
local3 - Specify that the user-defined facility will be set to local 3.
local4 - Specify that the user-defined facility will be set to local 4.
local5 - Specify that the user-defined facility will be set to local 5.
local6 - Specify that the user-defined facility will be set to local 6.
local7 - Specify that the user-defined facility will be set to local 7.
udp_port - Specify the UDP port number.
<udp_port_number> - Enter the UDP port number used here.
ipaddress - Specify IP address for the host.
<ipaddr> - Enter the IP address used for the configuration here.
<ipv6addr> - Enter the IPv6 address used for the configuration here.
state - The syslog protocol is used for the transmission of event notification messages across networks to a host.
723
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
The option enables or disables the host to receive such messages.
enable - Specify that the host to receive such messages will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the host to receive such messages will be disabled.
Restrictions
Only Administrators and Operators can issue this command.
Example
To configure the syslog host configuration:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config syslog host all severity debug facility local0
Command: config syslog host all severity debug facility local0
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
84-9 delete syslog host
Description
This command is used to delete the syslog host(s).
Format delete syslog host [<index 1-4> | all]
Parameters
<index> - Enter the host index value here.
all - Specify that all the host indexes will be used.
Restrictions
Only Administrators and Operators can issue this command.
Example
To delete the specific syslog host:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#delete syslog host 4
Command: delete syslog host 4
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
84-10 show syslog host
Description
This command is used to display the syslog host configurations.
724
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Format show syslog host {<index 1-4>}
Parameters
<index> - (Optional) Enter the host index value here.
If no parameter is specified, all hosts will be displayed.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show the syslog host information:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show syslog host
Command: show syslog host
Syslog Global State: Disabled
Host 1
IP Address : 10.90.90.1
Severity : Debug(7)
Facility : Local0
UDP Port : 514
Status : Disabled
Total Entries : 1
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
84-11 config log_save_timing
Description
This command is used to set the method for saving the log.
Format config log_save_timing [time_interval <min 1-65535> | on_demand | log_trigger]
Parameters
time_interval - Specify the time interval used for saving the log. If there is no new log event during this time interval, the Switch will not save any log entries.
<min 1-65535> - Enter the time interval value here. This value must be between 1 and 65535 minutes.
on_demand - Specify that the log will only be saved when an on-demand event occurs. For example, issuing the command save all or save log. This is the default option.
log_trigger - Specify that the log will be saved when a new log event is triggered.
Restrictions
Only Administrators and Operators can issue this command.
725
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Example
To configure the method for saving a log as on demand:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config log_save_timing on_demand
Command: config log_save_timing on_demand
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
84-12 show log_save_timing
Description
This command is used to show the method for saving the log.
Format show log_save_timing
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show the timing method used for saving the log:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show log_save_timing
Command: show log_save_timing
Saving Log Method: On_demand
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
84-13 show attack_log
Description
This command is used to display the attack log messages. The attack log message refers to log messages driven by modules such as DOS. This type of log message may generate a large amount of messages and quickly cause the system to run out of system log storage. Therefore, for this type of log messages only the first log that is generated each minute can be stored in the system log, with the rest of them being stored in a separate table named attack log.
Format show attack_log {index <value_list>}
Parameters
index - (Optional) Specify the list of index numbers of the entries that need to be displayed. For example, the
726
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide index 1-5 will display the attack log messages from 1 to 5.
<value_list> - Enter the index numbers of the entries that needs to be displayed here.
If no parameter is specified, all entries in the attack log will be displayed.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show dangerous messages on the master:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show attack_log index 1
Command: show attack_log index 1
Index Date Time Level Log Text
----- ---------- -------- -------- ---------------------------------------------
1 2016-05-10 15:00:14 CRIT(2) Possible spoofing attack from IP: , MAC:
0A-00-00-5A-00-01, port: 3
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
84-14 clear attack_log
Description
This command is used to clear the attack log.
Format clear attack_log
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators and Operators can issue this command.
Example
To clear the master’s attack log:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#clear attack_log
Command: clear attack_log
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
727
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 85 System Severity Command List
config system_severity [trap | log | all] [emergency | alert| critical | error | warning | notice | information | debug |
<level 0-7>] show system_severity
85-1 config system_severity
Description
This command is used to configure the severity level control for the system.
When the user chooses a specific level to log or trap, messages at that severity level or more will be logged or trapped to SNMP managers.
Format config system_severity [trap | log | all] [emergency | alert| critical | error | warning | notice | information | debug | <level 0-7>]
Parameters
trap - Specify the severity level control for traps.
log - Specify the severity level control for the log.
all - Specify the severity level control for traps and the log.
emergency - Severity level 0.
alert - Severity level 1.
critical - Severity level 2.
error - Severity level 3.
warning - Severity level 4.
notice - Severity level 5.
information - Severity level 6.
debug - Severity level 7.
<level 0-7> - Enter the severity level here. This value must be between 0 and 7.
Restrictions
Only Administrators and Operators can issue this command.
Example
To configure severity level control as information level for trap:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config system_severity trap warning
Command: config system_severity trap warning
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
85-2 show system_severity
Description
This command is used to display the severity level controls for the system.
728
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Format show system_severity
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show severity level control for system:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show system_severity
Command: show system_severity
System Severity Trap : warning(4)
System Severity Log : information(6)
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
729
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 86 Telnet Client Command List
telnet [<ipaddr> | <domain_name 255> |<ipv6addr>] {tcp_port <value 1-65535>}
86-1 telnet
Description
This command is used to start the Telnet client to connect to the specific Telnet server. The parameters specified by the command will only be used for the establishment of this specific session. They will not affect the establishment of other sessions.
Format telnet [<ipaddr> | <domain_name 255> |<ipv6addr>] {tcp_port <value 1-65535>}
Parameters
<ipaddr> - Enter the IP address of the Telnet server.
<domain_name 255> - Enter the domain name of the Telnet server.
<ipv6addr> - Enter the IPv6 address of the Telnet server.
tcp_port - (Optional) Specify the Telnet server port number to be connected. If not specified, the default port is
23.
<value 1-65535> - Enter the TCP port number used here. This value must be between 1 and 65535.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
Telnet to a Switch by specifying the IP address:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#telnet 10.90.90.90
Command: telnet 10.90.90.90
DGS-3000-26TC Gigabit Ethernet Switch
Command Line Interface
Firmware: Build 2.00.004
Copyright(C) 2016 D-Link Corporation. All rights reserved.
UserName:
730
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 87 TFTP Client Command List
download [firmware_fromTFTP {[<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr> | <domain_name 255>] src_file <path_filename 64>
{dest_file <pathname 64>} {boot_up}} | cfg_fromTFTP{ [<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr> | <domain_name 255>] src_file
<path_filename 64> {dest_file <pathname 64>}}]
upload [cfg_toTFTP {[<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr> | <domain_name 255>] dest_file <path_filename 64> {src_file
<pathname 64>} {[include | exclude | begin] <filter_string 80> {<filter_string 80> {<filter_string 80>}} {[include | exclude | begin ] <filter_string 80> {<filter_string 80> {<filter_string 80>}} {[include | exclude | begin ]
<filter_string 80> {<filter_string 80> {<filter_string 80>}}}}}} | log_toTFTP{[<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr> |
<domain_name 255>] dest_file <path_filename 64>} | attack_log_toTFTP {[<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr> |
<domain_name 255>] dest_file <path_filename 64>} | firmware_toTFTP {[<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr> |
<domain_name 255>] dest_file <path_filename 64> {src_file <path_filename 64>}}]
config tftp {server <ipaddr> | firmware_file <path_filename 64> | cfg_file <path_filename 64> | log_file
<path_filename 64> | attack_log_file <path_filename 64> | certificate_file <path_filename 64> | key_file
<path_filename 64> | tech_support_file <path_filename 64> | debug_error_log_file <path_filename 64> | sim_firmware_file <path_filename 64> | sim_cfg_file <path_filename 64> | sim_log_file <path_filename 64>} show tftp
87-1 download
Description
This command is used to download a new firmware or a switch configuration file.
Format download [firmware_fromTFTP {[<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr> | <domain_name 255>] src_file <path_filename 64>
{dest_file <pathname 64>} {boot_up}} | cfg_fromTFTP{[<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr> | <domain_name 255>] src_file <path_filename 64> {dest_file <pathname 64>}}]
Parameters
firmware_fromTFTP - Download and install new firmware on the switch from a TFTP server.
<ipaddr> - (Optional) Enter the IP address of the TFTP server.
<ipv6addr> - (Optional) Enter the IPv6 address of the TFTP server.
<domain_name 255> - (Optional) Enter the domain name of the TFTP server. This name can be up to 255 characters long.
src_file – (Optional) Specify the path name and file name of the TFTP server. It can be a relative path name or an absolute path name. If path name is not specified, it refers to the TFTP server path. The maximum length is 64 characters.
<path_filename 64> - Enter the path name and file name of the TFTP server. It can be a relative path name or an absolute path name. If path name is not specified, it refers to the TFTP server path. The maximum length is 64 characters.
dest_file - (Optional) Specify an absolute path name on the device file system. If path name is not specified, it overwrites the boot-up image on the Switch.
<pathname 64> - Enter an absolute path name on the device file system.
boot_up - (Optional) Specify as boot-up file.
cfg_fromTFTP - Download and install new configuration file on the switch from a TFTP server.
<ipaddr> - (Optional) Enter the IP address of the TFTP server.
<ipv6addr> - (Optional) Enter the IPv6 address of the TFTP server.
<domain_name 255> - (Optional) Enter the domain name of the TFTP server. This name can be up to 255 characters long.
src_file - Specify the path name and file name of the FTP server. It can be a relative path name or an absolute path name. If path name is not specified, it refers to the TFTP server path. The maximum length is
64 characters.
<path_filename 64> - Enter the path name and file name of the FTP server. It can be a relative path name or an absolute path name. If path name is not specified, it refers to the TFTP server path. The maximum length is 64 characters.
dest_file - (Optional) Specify an absolute path name on the device. If path name is not specified, it refers to
731
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide the boot-up configuration file.
<pathname 64> - Enter an absolute path name on the device.
Restrictions
Only Administrator-level users can issue this command.
Example
To download runtime firmware from a TFTP server:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#download firmware_fromTFTP 10.0.0.66 src_file runtime.had dest_file runtime.had
Command: download firmware_fromTFTP 10.0.0.66 src_file runtime.had dest_file runtime.had
Connecting to server................... Done.
Download firmware...................... Done. Do not power off!
Please wait, programming flash......... Done.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
87-2 upload
Description
This command is used to upload the firmware, configuration file, system log, or attack log to the TFTP server.
Format upload [cfg_toTFTP {[<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr> | <domain_name 255>] dest_file <path_filename 64> {src_file
<pathname 64>} {[include | exclude | begin] <filter_string 80> {<filter_string 80> {<filter_string 80>}}
{[include | exclude | begin ] <filter_string 80> {<filter_string 80> {<filter_string 80>}} {[include | exclude | begin ] <filter_string 80> {<filter_string 80> {<filter_string 80>}}}}}} | log_toTFTP{[<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr> |
<domain_name 255>] dest_file <path_filename 64>} | attack_log_toTFTP {[<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr> |
<domain_name 255>] dest_file <path_filename 64>} | firmware_toTFTP {[<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr> |
<domain_name 255>] dest_file <path_filename 64> {src_file <path_filename 64>}}]
Parameters
cfg_toTFTP - Used to upload a configuration file from the Switch to the TFTP server.
<ipaddr> - (Optional) Enter the IP address of the TFTP server.
<ipv6addr> - (Optional) Enter the IPv6 address of the TFTP server.
<domain_name 255> - (Optional) Enter the domain name of the TFTP server here. This name can be up to
255 characters long.
dest_file – (Optional) Specify the path name on the TFTP server.
<path_filename 64> - Enter the location of the Switch configuration file on the TFTP server. This file will be replaced by the uploaded file from the Switch. The maximum length is 64 characters.
src_file - (Optional) Specify the source file’s path name on the Switch file system. If the path name is not specified, it refers to the boot-up configuration file.
<path_filename 64> - Enter the location of the Switch configuration file on device. The maximum length is
64 characters.
include - (Optional) Includes lines that contain the specified filter string.
exclude - (Optional) Excludes lines that contain the specified filter string.
begin - (Optional) The first line that contains the specified filter string will be the first line of the output.
<filter_string 80> - (Optional) Enter a filter string enclosed by the quotation mark symbol. Thus, the filter string itself cannot contain the quotation mark character. The filter string is case sensitive.
<filter_string 80> - (Optional) Enter a filter string enclosed by the quotation mark symbol.
<filter_string 80> - (Optional) Enter a filter string enclosed by the quotation mark symbol.
include - (Optional) Includes lines that contain the specified filter string.
exclude - (Optional) Excludes lines that contain the specified filter string.
732
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
begin - (Optional) The first line that contains the specified filter string will be the first line of the output.
<filter_string 80> - (Optional) Enter a filter string enclosed by the quotation mark symbol. Thus, the filter string itself cannot contain the quotation mark character. The filter string is case sensitive.
<filter_string 80> - (Optional) Enter a filter string enclosed by the quotation mark symbol.
<filter_string 80> - (Optional) Enter a filter string enclosed by the quotation mark symbol.
log_toTFTP - Used to upload the log file from the Switch to the TFTP server.
<ipaddr> - Enter the IP address of the TFTP server.
<ipv6addr> - Enter the IPv6 address of the TFTP server.
<domain_name 255> - Enter the domain name of the TFTP server here. This name can be up to 255 characters long.
dest_file - Specify the path name to the TFTP server.
<path_filename 64> - Enter the path name to the TFTP server.
attack_log_toFTP - Used to upload the attack log from the Switch to the TFTP server.
<ipaddr> - Enter the IP address of the TFTP server.
<ipv6addr> - Enter the IPv6 address of the TFTP server.
<domain_name 255> - Enter the domain name of the TFTP server here. This name can be up to 255 characters long.
firmware_toTFTP - Used to upload firmware from the Switch to the TFTP server.
<ipaddr> - Enter the IP address of the TFTP server.
<ipv6addr> - Enter the IPv6 address of the TFTP server.
<domain_name 255> - Enter the domain name of the TFTP server here. This name can be up to 255 characters long.
dest_file - Specify the path name to the TFTP server.
<path_filename 64> - Enter the path name to the TFTP server.
src_file - (Optional) Specify the source file’s path name on the Switch file system. If the path name is not specified, it refers to the boot-up image.
<pathname> - Enter the source file’s path name on the Switch file system. If the path name is not specified, it refers to the boot-up image.
Restrictions
Only Administrators and Operators can issue this command.
Example
To upload firmware from a file system device to a TFTP server:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#upload firmware_toTFTP 10.90.90.10 dest_file d:\firmware.had
Command: upload firmware_toTFTP 10.90.90.10 dest_file d:\firmware.had
Connecting to server................... Done.
Upload firmware........................ Done.
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To display a scenario where the uploading of the firmware to the TFTP server failed, because of an incorrect or missing filename from the source. This error can also be found if the directory, on the source, does not exit.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#upload firmware_toTFTP 10.90.90.10 dest_file D:/firmware.had src_file
4.00.020.had
Command: upload firmware_toTFTP 10.90.90.10 dest_file D:/firmware.had src_file 4.00.020.had
No such file or directory.
Fail!
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
733
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
To upload configuration from TFTP:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#upload cfg_toTFTP 10.90.90.10 dest_file d:\config.cfg
Command: upload cfg_toTFTP 10.90.90.10 dest_file d:\config.cfg
Connecting to server................... Done.
Upload configuration................... Done.
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To display a scenario where the uploading of the config file to the TFTP server failed, because of an incorrect or missing filename from the source. This error can also be found if the directory, on the source, does not exit.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#upload cfg_toTFTP 10.90.90.10 dest_file d:\config.cfg src_file missing.cfg
Command: upload cfg_toTFTP 10.90.90.10 dest_file d:\config.cfg src_file missing.cfg
No such file or directory.
Fail!
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To upload the attack log from the Switch to the TFTP server:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#upload attack_log_toTFTP 10.90.90.10 dest_file d:\attack.txt
Command: upload attack_log_toTFTP 10.90.90.10 dest_file d:\attack.txt
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
87-3 config tftp
Description
This command is used to configure the TFTP server and file pathname on the TFTP server.
Format config tftp {server <ipaddr> | firmware_file <path_filename 64> | cfg_file <path_filename 64> | log_file
<path_filename 64> | attack_log_file <path_filename 64> | certificate_file <path_filename 64> | key_file
<path_filename 64> | tech_support_file <path_filename 64> | debug_error_log_file <path_filename 64> | sim_firmware_file <path_filename 64> | sim_cfg_file <path_filename 64> | sim_log_file <path_filename
64>}(1)
Parameters
server - Specify the IP address of the TFTP server.
<ipaddr> - Enter the IP address of the TFTP server.
firmware_file - Specify the path and name of the firmware file that will be used for the upload and download.
<path_filename 64> - Enter the path and name of the firmware file that will be used for the upload and download. This name can be up to 64 characters long.
cfg_file - Specify the path and name of the configuration file that will be used for the upload and download.
<path_filename 64> - Specify the path and name of the configuration file that will be used for the upload and download. This name can be up to 64 characters long.
734
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
log_file - Specify the path and name of the system log file that will be used for the upload and download.
<path_filename 64> - Enter the path and name of the system log file that will be used for the upload and download. This name can be up to 64 characters long.
attack_log_file - Specify the path and name of the attack log file that will be used for the upload and download.
<path_filename 64> - Enter the path and name of the attack log file that will be used for the upload and download. This name can be up to 64 characters long.
certificate_file - Specify the path and name of the SSL certificate file that will be used for the upload and download.
<path_filename 64> - Enter the path and name of the SSL certificate file that will be used for the upload and download. This name can be up to 64 characters long.
key_file - Specify the path and name of the SSL certificate key file that will be used for the upload and download.
<path_filename 64> - Enter the path and name of the SSL certificate key file that will be used for the upload and download. This name can be up to 64 characters long.
tech_support_file - Specify the path and name of the technical support file that will be used for the upload.
<path_filename 64> - Enter the path and name of the technical support file that will be used for the upload.
This name can be up to 64 characters long.
debug_error_log_file - Specify the path and name of the debugged error log file that will be used for the upload.
<path_filename 64> - Enter the path and name of the debugged error log file that will be used for the upload.
This name can be up to 64 characters long.
sim_firmware_file - Specify the path and name of the SIM firmware file that will be used for the upload and download.
<path_filename 64> - Enter the path and name of the SIM firmware file that will be used for the upload and download. This name can be up to 64 characters long.
sim_cfg_file - Specify the path and name of the SIM configuration file that will be used for the upload and download.
<path_filename 64> - Enter the path and name of the SIM configuration file that will be used for the upload and download. This name can be up to 64 characters long.
sim_log_file - Specify the path and name of the SIM system log file that will be used for the upload and download.
<path_filename 64> - Enter the path and name of the SIM system log file that will be used for the upload and download. This name can be up to 64 characters long.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure the IP address of the TFTP server:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config tftp server 10.90.90.10
Command: config tftp server 10.90.90.10
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To configure the TFTP server and specify the pre-defined firmware and log filenames:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config tftp server 10.90.90.1 firmware_file runtime.had cfg_file log_tmp
Command: config tftp server 10.90.90.1 firmware_file runtime.had cfg_file log_tmp
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
735
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
87-4 show tftp
Description
This command is used to display the TFTP server’s settings.
Format show tftp
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the TFTP server’s settings:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show tftp
Command: show tftp
TFTP Server Settings
IPv4 Address :
File Type Path_filename
-------------------- ----------------------
firmware_file
cfg_file
log_file
attack_log_file
certificate_file
key_file
tech_support_file
debug_error_log_file
sim_firmware_file
sim_cfg_file
sim_log_file
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
736
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 88 Time and SNTP Command List
config sntp {primary <ipaddr> | secondary <ipaddr> | poll-interval <int 30-99999>}(1)
config sntp ipv6server {primary <ipv6addr> | secondary <ipv6addr> }(1) show sntp enable sntp disable sntp
config time <date ddmthyyyy> <time hh:mm:ss>
config time_zone {operator [+ | -] | hour <gmt_hour 0-13> | min <minute 0-59>}
config dst [disable | repeating {s_week <start_week 1-4,last> | s_day <start_weekday sun-sat> | s_mth
<start_mth 1-12> | s_time <start_time hh:mm> | e_week <end_week 1-4,last> | e_day <end_weekday sunsat> | e_mth <end_mth 1-12> | e_time <end_time hh:mm> | offset [30 | 60 | 90 | 120]} | annual {s_date
<start_date 1-31> | s_mth<start_mth 1-12> | s_time <start_time hh:mm> | e_date <end_date 1-31> | e_mth
<end_mth 1-12> | e_time <end_time hh:mm> | offset [30 | 60 | 90 | 120]}] show time
88-1 config sntp
Description
This command is used to change SNTP configurations.
Format config sntp {primary <ipaddr> | secondary <ipaddr> | poll-interval <int 30-99999>}(1)
Parameters
primary - SNTP primary server IP address.
<ipaddr> - Enter the IP address used for this configuration here.
secondary - SNTP secondary server IP address.
<ipaddr> - Enter the IP address used for this configuration here.
poll-interval - Specify the polling interval range seconds.
<int 30-99999> - Enter the polling interval range here. This value must be between 30 and 99999 seconds.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure SNTP:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config sntp primary 10.1.1.1 secondary 10.1.1.2 poll-interval 30
Command: config sntp primary 10.1.1.1 secondary 10.1.1.2 poll-interval 30
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
737
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
88-2 config sntp ipv6server
Description
This command is used to configure the SNTP IPv6 server information.
Format config sntp ipv6server {primary <ipv6addr> | secondary <ipv6addr> }(1)
Parameters
primary - SNTP primary IPv6 server address.
<ipv6addr> - Enter the IPv6 address of the Primary SNTP IPv6 server.
secondary - SNTP secondary IPv6 server address.
<ipv6addr> - Enter the IPv6 address of the Secondary SNTP IPv6 server.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure SNTP (primary IPv6 server: 1000::1, secondary IPv6 server: 1000::2):
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config sntp ipv6server primary 1000::1 secondary 1000::2
Command: config sntp ipv6server primary 1000::1 secondary 1000::2
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
88-3 show sntp
Description
This command is used to display SNTP current time source and configuration.
Format show sntp
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show SNTP:
738
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show sntp
Command: show sntp
Current Time Source : System Clock
SNTP : Disabled
IPv4 Primary SNTP Server : 10.1.1.1
IPv4 Secondary SNTP Server: 10.1.1.2
IPv6 Primary SNTP Server : ::
IPv6 Secondary SNTP Server: ::
SNTP Poll Interval : 30 sec
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
88-4 enable sntp
Description
This command is used to turn on SNTP support.
Format enable sntp
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To enable SNTP:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#enable sntp
Command: enable sntp
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
88-5 disable sntp
Description
This command is used to turn off SNTP support.
Format disable sntp
Parameters
None.
739
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To disable SNTP:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#disable sntp
Command: disable sntp
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
88-6 config time
Description
This command is used to configure time and date settings of the device.
Format config time <date ddmthyyyy> <time hh:mm:ss>
Parameters
<date ddmthyyyy> - Enter the system clock date. An example would look like this: '30jun2010'.
<time hh:mm:ss> - Enter the system clock time. An example would look like this: '12:00:00'.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure time:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config time 30jan2016 16:30:30
Command: config time 30jan2016 16:30:30
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
88-7 config time_zone
Description
This command is used to configure time zone of the device.
Format config time_zone {operator [+ | -] | hour <gmt_hour 0-13> | min <minute 0-59>}
740
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Parameters
operator - (Optional) Specify the operator of time zone.
[+ | -] - Specify that time should be added or subtracted to or from the GMT.
hour - (Optional) Specify the hour of time zone.
<gmt_hour 0-13> - Enter the hour value of the time zone here. This value must be between 0 and 13.
min - (Optional) Specify the minute of time zone.
<minute 0-59> - Enter the minute value of the time zone here. This value must be between 0 and 59.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure time_zone:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config time_zone operator + hour 2 min 30
Command: config time_zone operator + hour 2 min 30
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
88-8 config dst
Description
This command is used to configure Daylight Saving Time of the device.
Format config dst [disable | repeating {s_week <start_week 1-4,last> | s_day <start_weekday sun-sat> | s_mth
<start_mth 1-12> | s_time <start_time hh:mm> | e_week <end_week 1-4,last> | e_day <end_weekday sunsat> | e_mth <end_mth 1-12> | e_time <end_time hh:mm> | offset [30 | 60 | 90 | 120]} | annual {s_date
<start_date 1-31> | s_mth<start_mth 1-12> | s_time <start_time hh:mm> | e_date <end_date 1-31> | e_mth
<end_mth 1-12> | e_time <end_time hh:mm> | offset [30 | 60 | 90 | 120]}]
Parameters
disable - Specify to disable the Daylight Saving Time of the Switch.
repeating - Sets the Daylight Saving Time to repeating mode.
s_week - (Optional) Specify the start week number of Daylight Saving Time.
<start_week 1-4, last> - Enter the starting week number of Daylight Saving Time here. This value must be between 1 and 4.
s_day - (Optional) Specify the start day number of Daylight Saving Time.
<start_weekday sun-sat> - Enter the starting day value of Daylight Saving Time here. This value must either be sun, mon, tue, wed, thu, fri or sat.
s_mth - (Optional) Specify the start month number of Daylight Saving Time.
<start_mth 1-12> - Enter the starting month number of Daylight Saving Time here. This value must be between 1 and 12.
s_time - (Optional) Specify the start time of Daylight Saving Time.
<start_time hh:mm> - Enter the starting time of Daylight Saving Time here. This value must be in the hh:mm format.
e_week - (Optional) Specify the end week number of Daylight Saving Time.
<end_week 1-4, last> - Enter the ending week number of Daylight Saving Time here. This value must be between 1 and 4.
e_day - (Optional) Specify the end day number of Daylight Saving Time.
<end_weekday sun-sat> - Enter the ending day value of Daylight Saving Time here. This value must either be sun, mon, tue, wed, thu, fri or sat.
741
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
e_mth - (Optional) Specify the end month number of Daylight Saving Time.
<end_mth 1-12> - Enter the ending month number of Daylight Saving Time here. This value must be between 1 and 12.
e_time - (Optional) Specify the end time of Daylight Saving Time.
<end_time hh:mm> - Enter the starting time of Daylight Saving Time here. This value must be in the hh:mm format.
offset - (Optional) Indicates number of minutes to add or to subtract during summertime.
30 - Specify that the offset range will 30 minutes.
60 - Specify that the offset range will 60 minutes. This is the default.
90 - Specify that the offset range will 90 minutes.
120 - Specify that the offset range will 120 minutes.
annual - Set the Daylight Saving Time to annual mode.
s_date - (Optional) Specify the start date of Daylight Saving Time.
<start_date 1-31> - Enter the starting date of Daylight Saving Time here. This range must be between 1 and 31.
s_mth - (Optional) Specify the start month number of Daylight Saving Time.
<start_mth 1-12> - Enter the starting month number of Daylight Saving Time here. This value must be between 1 and 12.
s_time - (Optional) Specify the start time of Daylight Saving Time.
<start_time hh:mm> - Enter the starting time of Daylight Saving Time here. This value must be in the hh:mm format.
e_date - (Optional) Specify the end date of Daylight Saving Time.
<end_date 1-31> - Enter the ending date of Daylight Saving Time here. This range must be between 1 and
31.
e_mth - (Optional) Specify the end month number of Daylight Saving Time.
<end_mth 1-12> - Enter the ending month number of Daylight Saving Time here. This value must be between 1 and 12.
e_time - (Optional) Specify the end time of Daylight Saving Time.
<end_time hh:mm> - Enter the starting time of Daylight Saving Time here. This value must be in the hh:mm format.
offset - (Optional) Indicates number of minutes to add or to subtract during summertime.
30 - Specify that the offset range will 30 minutes.
60 - Specify that the offset range will 60 minutes. This is the default.
90 - Specify that the offset range will 90 minutes.
120 - Specify that the offset range will 120 minutes.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure time:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config dst repeating s_week 2 s_day tue s_mth 4 s_time 15:00 e_week2 e_day wed e_mth 10 e_time 15:30 offset 30
Command: config dst repeating s_week 2 s_day tue s_mth 4 s_time 15:00 e_week 2 e_day wed e_mth 10 e_time 15:30 offset 30
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
88-9 show time
Description
This command is used to display time states.
742
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Format show time
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show time:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show time
Command: show time
Current Time Source : System Clock
Boot Time : 9 May 2016 06:20:55
Current Time : 9 May 2016 07:46:10
Time Zone : GMT +00:00
Daylight Saving Time : Disabled
Offset In Minutes : 60
Repeating From : Apr 1st Sun 00:00
To : Oct last Sun 00:00
Annual From : 29 Apr 00:00
To : 12 Oct 00:00
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
743
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 89 Trace Route Command List
traceroute [<ipaddr> | <domain_name 255>] {ttl <value 1-60> | port <value 30000-64900> | timeout <sec 1-
65535> | probe <value 1-9> | source_ip <ipaddr>}
traceroute6 [<ipv6addr> | <domain_name 255>] {ttl <value 1-60> | port <value 30000-64900> | timeout <sec 1-
65535> | probe <value 1-9> | source_ip <ipv6addr>}
89-1 traceroute
Description
This command is used to trace the routed path between the Switch and a destination end station.
Format traceroute [<ipaddr> | <domain_name 255>] {ttl <value 1-60> | port <value 30000-64900> | timeout <sec 1-
65535> | probe <value 1-9> | source_ip <ipaddr>}
Parameters
<ipaddr> - Enter the IP address of the destination end station.
<domain_name 255> - The domain name of the destination end station.
ttl - (Optional) The time to live value of the trace route request. This is the maximum number of routers that a trace route packet can pass. The traceroute command will cross while seeking the network path between two devices. The range for the TTL is 1 to 60 hops.
<value 1-60> - Enter the time to live value here. This value must be between 1 and 60.
port - (Optional) The port number. The value range is from 30000 to 64900.
<value 30000-64900> - Enter the port number here. This value must be between 30000 and 64900.
timeout - (Optional) Specify the timeout period while waiting for a response from the remote device. A value of 1 to 65535 seconds can be specified. The default is 5 seconds.
<sec 1-65535> - Enter the timeout period value here. This value must be between 1 and 65535 seconds.
probe - (Optional) The number of probing. The range is from 1 to 9. If unspecified, the default value is 1.
<value 1-9> - Enter the probing number value here. This value must be between 1 and 9.
source_ip - (Optional) Specify the source IP of the traceroute packets. The IP address is used as the source IP address of the packets that send to the remote host.
<ipaddr> - Enter the IP address.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To trace the routed path between the Switch and 10.48.74.121:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#traceroute 10.48.74.121 probe 3
Command: traceroute 10.48.74.121 probe 3
1 <10 ms. 10.12.73.254
2 <10 ms. 10.19.68.1
3 <10 ms. 10.48.74.121
Trace complete.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
744
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
89-2 traceroute6
Description
This command is used to trace the IPv6 routed path between the Switch and a destination end station.
Format traceroute6 [<ipv6addr> | <domain_name 255>] {ttl <value 1-60> | port <value 30000-64900> | timeout <sec
1-65535> | probe <value 1-9> | source_ip <ipv6addr>}
Parameters
<ipv6addr> - Enter the IPv6 address of the destination end station.
<domain_name 255> - Enter the domain name of the destination end station.
ttl - (Optional) The time to live value of the trace route request. This is the maximum number of routers that a trace route packet can pass. The traceroute command will cross while seeking the network path between two devices. The range for the TTL is 1 to 60 hops.
<value 1-60> - Enter the time to live value here. This value must be between 1 and 60.
port - (Optional) The port number. The value range is from 30000 to 64900.
<value 30000-64900> - Enter the port number here. This value must be between 30000 and 64900.
timeout - (Optional) Specify the timeout period while waiting for a response from the remote device. A value of 1 to 65535 seconds can be specified. The default is 5 seconds.
<sec 1-65535> - Enter the timeout period value here. This value must be between 1 and 65535 seconds.
probe - (Optional) The number of probing. The range is from 1 to 9. If unspecified, the default value is 1.
<value 1-9> - Enter the probing number value here. This value must be between 1 and 9.
source_ip - (Optional) Specify the source IPv6 of the traceroute packets. The IPv6 address is used as the source
IPv6 address of the packets that send to the remote host.
<ipv6addr> - Enter the IPv6 address.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To trace the IPv6 routed path between the Switch and 3000::1:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#traceroute6 3000::1 probe 3
Command: traceroute6 3000::1 probe 3
1 <10 ms. 1345:142::11
2 <10 ms. 2011:14::100
3 <10 ms. 3000::1
Trace complete.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To trace the IPv6 routed path between the Switch and 1210:100::11 with port 40000:
745
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#traceroute6 1210:100::11 port 40000
Command: traceroute6 1210:100::11 port 40000
1 <10 ms. 3100::25
2 <10 ms. 4130::100
3 <10 ms. 1210:100::11
Trace complete.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
746
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 90 Traffic Control Command List
config traffic control [<portlist> | all] {broadcast [enable | disable] | multicast [enable | disable] | unicast [enable | disable] | action [drop | shutdown] | threshold <value 0-255000> | countdown [<min 0> | <min 3-30> | disable] | time_interval <sec 5-600>}(1)
config traffic trap [none | storm_occurred | storm_cleared | both]
show traffic control {<portlist>}
config traffic control log state [enable | disable]
config traffic control auto_recover_time [<min 0> | <min 1-65535>]
90-1 config traffic control
Description
This command is used to configure broadcast/ multicast/ unicast packet storm control. Shutdown mode is provided to monitor the traffic rate in addition to the storm control drop mode. If traffic rate is too high, this port will be shut down.
Format config traffic control [<portlist> | all] {broadcast [enable | disable] | multicast [enable | disable] | unicast
[enable | disable] | action [drop | shutdown] | threshold <value 0-255000> | countdown [<min 0> | <min 3-
30> | disable] | time_interval <sec 5-600>}(1)
Parameters
<portlist> - Enter a range of ports to be configured.
all - Specify that all the ports will be used for this configuration.
broadcast - Specify to enable or disable broadcast storm control.
enable - Specify that broadcast storm control will be enabled.
disable - Specify that broadcast storm control will be disabled.
multicast - Specify to enable or disable multicast storm control.
enable - Specify that multicast storm control will be enabled.
disable - Specify that multicast storm control will be disabled.
unicast - Specify to enable or disable unknown packet storm control. ( Supported for drop mode only)
enable - Specify that unicast storm control will be enabled.
disable - Specify that unicast storm control will be disabled.
action - One of the two options for action is specified for storm control, shutdown or drop mode. Shutdown mode is a function of software, drop mode is implemented by the chip. If shutdown mode is specified, it is necessary to configure values for the countdown and time_interval parameters.
drop - Specify that the action applied will be drop mode.
shutdown - Specify that the action applied will be shutdown mode.
threshold - The upper threshold, at which point the specified storm control is triggered. The <value> is the number of broadcast/multicast/unknown unicast packets per second received by the Switch that will trigger the storm traffic control measure. The threshold is expressed as PPS (packets per second) and must be an unsigned integer.
<value 0-255000> - Enter the upper threshold value here. This value must be between 0 and 255000.
countdown - Timer for shutdown mode. If a port enters the shutdown Rx state and this timer runs out, port will be shutdown forever. The parameter is not applicable if “drop” (mode) is specified for the “action” parameter.
<min 0> - Enter 0 to disable the forever state, meaning that the port will not enter the shutdown forever state.
<min 3-30> - Enter the countdown timer value here. This value must be between 3 and 30.
disable – Specify that the countdown timer will be disabled.
time_interval - The sampling interval of received packet counts. The possible value will be m-n seconds. The parameter is not applicable if “drop” (mode) is specified for the “action” parameter.
<sec 5-600> - Enter the time interval value here. This value must be between 5 and 600.
747
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure the parameters so that the traffic control status is enabled on ports 1-12:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config traffic control 1-12 broadcast enable action shutdown threshold 1 countdown 5 time_interval 10
Command: config traffic control 1-12 broadcast enable action shutdown threshold 1 countdown 5 time_interval 10
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
90-2 config traffic trap
Description
This command is used to configure trap modes.
• Occurred Mode: This trap is sent when a packet storm is detected by the packet storm mechanism.
• Cleared Mode: This trap is sent when the packet storm is cleared by the packet storm mechanism.
Format config traffic trap [none | storm_occurred | storm_cleared | both]
Parameters
none - No trap state is specified for storm control.
storm_occurred - Occurred mode is enabled and cleared mode is disabled.
storm_cleared - Occurred mode is disabled and cleared mode is enabled.
both - Both occurred and cleared modes are enabled.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To enable both the occurred mode and cleared mode traffic control traps:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config traffic trap both
Command: config traffic trap both
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
90-3 show traffic control
Description
This command is used to display the current traffic control settings.
748
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Format show traffic control {<portlist>}
Parameters
<portlist> - (Optional) Enter the range of ports to be shown.
If no parameter is specified, the system will display the packet storm control configuration for all ports.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the traffic control parameters for ports 1 to 10:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show traffic control 1-10
Command: show traffic control 1-10
Traffic Control Trap : [Both]
Traffic Control Log : Enabled
Traffic Control Auto Recover Time: 0 Minutes
Port Thres Broadcast Multicast Unicast Action Count Time Shutdown
hold Storm Storm Storm down Interval Forever
---- ------ --------- --------- -------- -------- -------- -------- --------
1 1 Enabled Disabled Disabled shutdown 5 10
2 1 Enabled Disabled Disabled shutdown 5 10
3 1 Enabled Disabled Disabled shutdown 5 10
4 1 Enabled Disabled Disabled shutdown 5 10
5 1 Enabled Disabled Disabled shutdown 5 10
6 1 Enabled Disabled Disabled shutdown 5 10
7 1 Enabled Disabled Disabled shutdown 5 10
8 1 Enabled Disabled Disabled shutdown 5 10
9 1 Enabled Disabled Disabled shutdown 5 10
10 1 Enabled Disabled Disabled shutdown 5 10
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
90-4 config traffic control log state
Description
This command is used to configure the traffic control log state. When the log state is enabled, traffic control states are logged when a storm occurs and when a storm is cleared. If the log state is disabled, traffic control events are not logged.
NOTE: The log state is only applicable for shutdown mode. Since shutdown mode only support broadcast and multicast storm control, doesn’t support unicast storm control. The log only generate for broadcast and multicast storm control.
Format config traffic control log state [enable | disable]
749
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Parameters
enable - Both occurred and cleared are logged.
disable - Neither occurred nor cleared is logged.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure the traffic log state on the Switch:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config traffic control log state enable
Command: config traffic control log state enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
90-5 config traffic control auto_recover_time
Description
This command is used to configure the traffic auto-recovery time that is allowed for a port to recover from the shutdown forever status. When the auto-recovery option is disabled on a port, the port will remain in the shutdown mode. The only way to restore the port to the forwarding state is by entering the config ports [ <portlist> | all ]
state enable command manually.
Format config traffic control auto_recover_time [<min 0> | <min 1-65535>]
Parameters
<min 0> - Enter that the auto-recovery option will be disabled. This is the default value.
<min 1-65535> - Enter the auto-recovery from shutdown time value here. This value must be between 1 and
65535.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure the auto-recovery time to 5 minutes:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config traffic control auto_recover_time 5
Command: config traffic control auto_recover_time 5
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
750
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 91 Traffic Segmentation Command
List
config traffic_segmentation [<portlist> | all] forward_list [null | all | <portlist>]
show traffic_segmentation {<portlist>}
91-1 config traffic_segmentation
Description
This command is used to configure the traffic segmentation.
Format config traffic_segmentation [<portlist> | all] forward_list [null | all | <portlist>]
Parameters
<portlist> - Enter a range of ports to be configured.
all - Specify that all the ports will be used for this configuration.
forward_list - Specify a range of port forwarding domain.
null - Specify a range of port forwarding domain is null.
all - Specify all ports to be configured.
<portlist> - Enter a range of ports to be configured.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure traffic segmentation:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config traffic_segmentation 1-10 forward_list 11-15
Command: config traffic_segmentation 1-10 forward_list 11-15
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
91-2 show traffic_segmentation
Description
This command is used to display current traffic segmentation table.
Format show traffic_segmentation {<portlist>}
Parameters
<portlist> - (Optional) Enter a range of ports to be displayed.
751
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
If no parameter is specified, the system will display all current traffic segmentation tables.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display traffic segmentation table:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show traffic_segmentation 1-10
Command: show traffic_segmentation 1-10
Traffic Segmentation Table
Port Forward Portlist
---- ------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 11-15
2 11-15
3 11-15
4 11-15
5 11-15
6 11-15
7 11-15
8 11-15
9 11-15
10 11-15
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
752
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 92 Trusted Host Command List
create trusted_host [<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr> | network <network_address> | ipv6_prefix <ipv6networkaddr>]
{snmp | telnet | ssh | http | https | ping}
delete trusted_host [ipaddr <ipaddr> | ipv6address <ipv6addr> | network <network_address> | ipv6_prefix
<ipv6networkaddr > | all]
config trusted_host [<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr> | network <network_address> | ipv6_prefix <ipv6networkaddr>] [add
| delete] {snmp | telnet | ssh | http | https | ping | all} show trusted_host
92-1 create trusted_host
Description
This command is used to create the trusted host. The switch allows you to specify up to ten IPv4 and IPv6 addresses that are allowed to manage the Switch via in-band SNMP, Telnet or WEB based management software.
These IPv4 or IPv6 addresses must be members of the Management VLAN. If no IPv4 or IPv6 addresses are specified, then there is nothing to prevent any IPv4 or IPv6 addresses from accessing the Switch, provided the user knows the Username and Password.
When the access interface is not specified, the trusted host will be created for all interfaces.
Format create trusted_host [<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr> | network <network_address> | ipv6_prefix <ipv6networkaddr>]
{snmp | telnet | ssh | http | https | ping}
Parameters
<ipaddr> - Enter the trusted host IP address.
<ipv6addr> - Enter the trusted host IPv6 address.
network - The network address of the trusted network. The network address takes the form of: xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/y.
Where “x” represents an IP number.
<network_address> - Enter the network address used here.
ipv6_prefix - Specify that IPv6 prefix here.
<ipv6networkaddr> - Enter the IPv6 network address here.
snmp - (Optional) Specify trusted host for SNMP.
telnet - (Optional) Specify trusted host for TELENT.
ssh - (Optional) Specify trusted host for SSH.
http - (Optional) Specify trusted host for HTTP.
https - (Optional) Specify trusted host for HTTPs.
ping - (Optional) Specify trusted host for PING.
Restrictions
Only Administrators and Operators can issue this command.
Example
To create the trusted host:
753
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#create trusted_host 10.48.74.121
Command: create trusted_host 10.48.74.121
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
92-2 delete trusted_host
Description
This command is used to delete a trusted host entry made using the create trusted_host command above.
Format delete trusted_host [ipaddr <ipaddr> | ipv6address <ipv6addr> | network <network_address> | ipv6_prefix
<ipv6networkaddr > | all]
Parameters
ipaddr - The IP address of the trusted host.
<ipaddr> - Enter the IP address used for this configuration here.
ipv6addr - The IPv6 address of the trusted host.
<ipv6addr> - Enter the IPv6 address used for this configuration here.
network - The network address of the trusted network.
<network_address> - Enter the network address used for this configuration here.
ipv6_prefix - The IPv6 subnet prefix of the trusted network.
<ipv6networkaddr> - Enter the IPv6 subnet prefix here.
all - All trusted hosts will be deleted.
Restrictions
Only Administrators and Operators can issue this command.
Example
To delete the trusted host:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#delete trusted_host ipaddr 10.48.74.121
Command: delete trusted_host ipaddr 10.48.74.121
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
92-3 config trusted_host
Description
This command is used to configure the access interfaces for the trusted host.
Format config trusted_host [<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr> | network <network_address> | ipv6_prefix <ipv6networkaddr>]
[add | delete] {snmp | telnet | ssh | http | https | ping | all}
754
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Parameters
<ipaddr> - Enter the trusted host IP address.
<ipv6addr> - Enter the trusted host IPv6 address.
network - The network address of the trusted network. The network address takes the form of: xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/y where “x” represents an IP number.
<network_address> - Enter the network address used here.
ipv6_prefix - The IPv6 subnet prefix of the trusted network.
<ipv6networkaddr> - Enter the IPv6 subnet prefix here.
add - Adds interfaces for that trusted host.
delete - Deletes interfaces for that trusted host.
snmp - (Optional) Specify trusted host for SNMP.
telnet - (Optional) Specify trusted host for TELENT.
ssh - (Optional) Specify trusted host for SSH.
http - (Optional) Specify trusted host for HTTP.
https - (Optional) Specify trusted host for HTTPs.
ping - (Optional) Specify trusted host for PING.
all - (Optional) Specify trusted host for all applications.
Restrictions
Only Administrators and Operators can issue this command.
Example
To configure the trusted host:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config trusted_host 10.48.74.121 add ssh telnet
Command: config trusted_host 10.48.74.121 add ssh telnet
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
92-4 show trusted_host
Description
This command is used to display a list of trusted hosts entered on the Switch using the create trusted_host command above.
Format show trusted_host
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display trusted host:
755
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show trusted_host
Command: show trusted_host
Management Stations
IP Address Access Interface
----------------------------------------------------------------
10.48.74.121 SNMP Telnet SSH HTTP HTTPs Ping
Total Entries: 1
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
756
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 93 Unicast Routing Command List
create iproute [default | <network_address>] <ipaddr> {<metric 1-65535>} {[primary | backup]}
delete iproute [default | <network_address>] <ipaddr>
show iproute {<network_address> | <ipaddr>} {static}
93-1 create iproute
Description
This command is used to create an IP route entry in the Switch’s IP routing table. “Primary” and “backup” are mutually exclusive. Users can select only one when creating one new route. If a user sets neither of these, the system will try to set the new route first by primary and second by backup and not set this route to be a multipath route.
Format create iproute [default | <network_address>] <ipaddr> {<metric 1-65535>} {[primary | backup]}
Parameters
default - Specify to create an IP default route (0.0.0.0/0).
network_address - Specify the IP address and net mask of the destination route. The address and the mask can be set using the traditional format (for example, 10.1.2.3/255.0.0.0) or in CIDR format (for example,10.1.2.3/16).
<ipaddr> - Enter the IP address for the IP route.
<metric 1-65535> - (Optional) Enter the routing protocol metric entry representing the number of routers between the Switch and the IP address above. The default setting is 1.
primary - (Optional) Specify the route as the primary route to the destination
backup - (Optional) Specify the route as the backup route to the destination.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To add an IP default route:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# create iproute 10.48.74.121/255.0.0.0 10.1.1.254 primary
Command: create iproute 10.48.74.121/8 10.1.1.254 primary
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# create iproute 11.53.73.131/8 10.1.2.11
Command: Command: create iproute 11.53.73.131/8 10.1.2.11
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
93-2 delete iproute
Description
This command is used to delete an IP route entry from the Switch’s IP routing table.
757
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Format delete iproute [default | <network_address>] <ipaddr>
Parameters
default - Deletes an IP default route (0.0.0.0/0).
<network_address> - Enter the destination IP address and net mask route. The address and the mask can be set by the traditional format (for example, 10.1.2.3/255.0.0.0 or in CIDR format, 10.1.2.3/16).
<ipaddr> - Enter the next hop IP address route that needs to be deleted
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To delete an IP default route:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# delete iproute 10.48.74.121/255.0.0.0 10.1.1.254
Command: delete iproute 10.48.74.121/8 10.1.1.254
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
93-3 show iproute
Description
This command is used to display the switch’s IP routing table.
Format show iproute {<network_address> | <ipaddr>} {static}
Parameters
<network_address> - (Optional) Enter the destination network address of the route to be displayed.
<ipaddr> - (Optional) Enter the destination IP address of the route to be displayed. The longest prefix matched route will be displayed
static - (Optional) Specify to display only static routes. One static route may be active or inactive.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the contents of the IP routing table:
758
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show iproute
Command: show iproute
Routing Table
IP Address/Netmask Gateway Interface Cost Protocol
------------------ --------------- ------------ -------- --------
10.1.1.0/24 0.0.0.0 System 1 Local
192.168.1.0/24 0.0.0.0 ip1 1 Local
Total Entries : 2
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show iproute static
Command: show iproute static
Routing Table
IP Address/Netmask Gateway Cost Protocol Backup Status
------------------ ------------- ----- -------- -------- ------
0.0.0.0/0 10.1.1.11 1 Default Primary Active
100.1.1.0/24 10.1.1.11 1 Static Primary Active
101.1.1.0/24 10.1.1.12 1 Static Primary Inactive
102.1.1.0/24 tn1 1 Static Primary Inactive
103.1.1.0/24 tn2 1 Static Primary Active
Total Entries : 5
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
759
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 94 VLAN Trunking Command List
enable vlan_trunk disable vlan_trunk
config vlan_trunk ports [<portlist> | all] state [enable | disable] show vlan_trunk
94-1 enable vlan_trunk
Description
This command is used to enable the VLAN trunk function. When the VLAN trunk function is enabled, the VLAN trunk ports shall be able to forward all tagged frames with any VID.
Format enable vlan_trunk
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To enable the VLAN Trunk:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#enable vlan_trunk
Command: enable vlan_trunk
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
94-2 disable vlan_trunk
Description
This command is used to disable the VLAN trunk function.
Format disable vlan_trunk
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
760
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Example
To disable the VLAN Trunk:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#disable vlan_trunk
Command: disable vlan_trunk
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
94-3 config vlan_trunk ports
Description
This command is used to configure a port as a VLAN trunk port. By default, none of the port is a VLAN trunk port.
If the user enables the global VLAN trunk function and configure the VLAN trunk ports, then the trunk port will be member port of all VLANs. That is, if a VLAN is already configured by the user, but the trunk port is not member port of that VLAN, this trunk port will automatically become tagged member port of that VLAN. If a VLAN is not created yet, the VLAN will be automatically created, and the trunk port will become tagged member of this VLAN.
When the user disables the VLAN trunk globally, all VLANs automatically created by VLAN Trunk enabled shall be destroyed, and all the automatically added port membership will be removed.
A VLAN trunk port and a non-VLAN trunk port cannot be grouped as an aggregated link. To change the VLAN trunk setting for an aggregated link, the user must apply the command to the master port. However, this setting will disappear as the aggregated link is destroyed, and the VLAN trunk setting of the individual port will follow the original setting of the port.
If the command is applied to link aggregation member port excluding the master, the command will be rejected.
The ports with different VLAN configurations are not allowed to form an aggregated link. However, if they are specified as VLAN trunk port, they are allowed to form an aggregated link.
For a VLAN trunk port, the VLANs on which the packets can be by passed will not be advertised by GVRP on this port. However, since the traffic on these VLANs are forwarded, this VLAN trunk port should participate the MSTP instances corresponding to these VLAN.
Format config vlan_trunk ports [<portlist> | all] state [enable | disable]
Parameters
<portlist> - Enter a list of ports used for the configuration here.
all - Specify that all the ports will be used for this configuration.
state - Specify that the port is a VLAN trunk port or not.
enable - Specify that the port is a VLAN trunk port.
disable - Specify that the port is not a VLAN trunk port.
Restrictions
Only Administrators can issue this command.
Example
To configure VLAN trunk ports:
761
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config vlan_trunk ports 1-5 state enable
Command: config vlan_trunk ports 1-5 state enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
Port 6 is LA-1 member port; port 7 is LA-2 master port:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config vlan_trunk ports 6-7 state enable
Command: config vlan_trunk ports 6-7 state enable
Warning: Port 6 is a Link Aggregation member port, VLAN trunk is not enabled on port 6.
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config vlan_trunk ports 7 state disable
Command: config vlan_trunk ports 7 state disable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config vlan_trunk ports 6-7 state disable
Command: config vlan_trunk ports 6-7 state disable
Warning: Port 6 is a Link Aggregation member port, VLAN trunk is not enabled on port 6.
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
Port 6 is LA-1 member port; port 7 is LA-1 master port:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config vlan_trunk ports 6-7 state enable
Command: config vlan_trunk ports 6-7 state enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
Port 6, 7 have the same VLAN configuration before enabling VLAN trunk.
Port 6 is LA-1 member port; port 7 is LA-1 master port.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config vlan_trunk ports 7 state disable
Command: config vlan_trunk ports 7 state disable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config vlan_trunk ports 6-7 state disable
Command: config vlan_trunk ports 6-7 state disable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
762
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
94-4 show vlan_trunk
Description
This command is used to show the VLAN trunk configuration.
Format show vlan_trunk
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show the VLAN Trunk information:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show vlan_trunk
Command: show vlan_trunk
VLAN Trunk Global Setting
----------------------------
VLAN Trunk Status : Disabled
VLAN Trunk Member Ports : 1-5
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
The following example displays the VLAN information which will also display VLAN trunk setting:
763
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show vlan
Command: show vlan
VLAN Trunk State : Enabled
VLAN Trunk Member Ports : 1-5
VID : 1 VLAN Name : default
VLAN Type : Static Advertisement : Enabled
Member Ports : 1-26
Static Ports : 1-26
Current Tagged Ports :
Current Untagged Ports: 1-26
Static Tagged Ports :
Static Untagged Ports : 1-26
Forbidden Ports :
Total Static VLAN Entries: 1
Total GVRP VLAN Entries: 0
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
764
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 95 Voice VLAN Command List
enable voice_vlan [<vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid 1-4094>] disable voice_vlan
config voice_vlan priority <int 0-7>
config voice_vlan oui [add | delete] <macaddr> <macmask> {description <desc 32>}
config voice_vlan ports [<portlist> | all] [state [enable | disable] | mode [auto {[tag | untag]} | manual]]
config voice_vlan aging_time <min 1-65535>
config voice_vlan log state [enable | disable] show voice_vlan show voice_vlan oui
show voice_vlan ports {<portlist>}
show voice_vlan voice_device {ports <portlist>} show voice_vlan lldp_med voice_device
95-1 enable voice_vlan
Description
This command is used to enable the global voice VLAN function on a switch. To enable the voice VLAN, the voice
VLAN must be also assigned .At the same time, the VLAN must be an existing static 802.1Q VLAN. To change the voice VLAN, the user must disable the voice VLAN function, and re-issue this command. By default, the global voice VLAN state is disabled.
Format enable voice_vlan [<vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid 1-4094>]
Parameters
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the name of the voice VLAN here. This name can be up to 32 characters long.
vlanid - Specify the VLAN ID of the voice VLAN.
<vlanid 1-4094> - Enter the voice VLAN ID here. This value must be between 1 and 4094.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To enable a voice VLAN with name “v2”:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#enable voice_vlan v2
Command: enable voice_vlan v2
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
765
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
95-2 disable voice_vlan
Description
This command is used to disable the voice VLAN function on a switch. When the voice VLAN function is disabled, the voice VLAN will become unassigned.
Format disable voice_vlan
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To disable the voice VLAN:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#disable voice_vlan
Command: disable voice_vlan
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
95-3 config voice_vlan priority
Description
This command is used to configure the voice VLAN priority. The voice VLAN priority will be the priority associated with the voice VLAN traffic to distinguish the QoS of the voice traffic from data traffic.
Format config voice_vlan priority <int 0-7>
Parameters
<int 0-7> - Enter the priority of the voice VLAN. This value must be between 0 and 7. The default priority is 5.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To set the priority of the voice VLAN to be 6:
766
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config voice_vlan priority 6
Command: config voice_vlan priority 6
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
95-4 config voice_vlan oui
Description
This command is used to configure the user-defined voice traffic’s OUI. The OUI is used to identify the voice traffic.
There are a number of pre-defined OUIs. The user can further define the user-defined OUIs if needed. The userdefined OUI cannot be the same as the pre-defined OUI.
The following are the pre-defined voice traffic’s OUI:
OUI
00:E0:BB
00:03:6B
00:E0:75
00:D0:1E
00:01:E3
00:60:B9
00:0F:E2
00:09:6E
Vendor
3COM.
Cisco
Veritel
Pingtel
Siemens
NEC/ Philips
Huawei-3COM
Avaya
Mnemonic Name
3com cisco veritel pingtel siemens nec&philips huawei&3com avaya
Format config voice_vlan oui [add | delete] <macaddr> <macmask> {description <desc 32>}
Parameters
add - Adds a user-defined OUI of a voice device vendor.
delete - Deletes a user-defined OUI of a voice device vendor.
<macaddr> - Enter the user-defined OUI MAC address.
<macmask> - Enter the user-defined OUI MAC address mask.
description - (Optional) The description for the user-defined OUI.
<desc 32> - Enter the description here. This value can be up to 32 characters long.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To add a user-defined OUI for a voice device:
767
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config voice_vlan oui add 00-0A-0B-00-00-00 FF-FF-FF-00-00-00
Command: config voice_vlan oui add 00-0A-0B-00-00-00 FF-FF-FF-00-00-00
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
95-5 config voice_vlan ports
Description
This command is used to enable or disable the voice VLAN function on ports.
Format config voice_vlan ports [<portlist> | all] [state [enable | disable] | mode [auto {[tag | untag]} | manual]]
Parameters
<portlist> - Enter a list of ports to be configured.
all - Specify to configure all ports.
state - The voice VLAN function state on ports. The default state is disabled.
enable - Specify that the voice VLAN function for this switch will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the voice VLAN function for this switch will be disabled.
mode - The voice VLAN mode. The default mode is auto.
auto - Specify that the voice VLAN mode will be set to auto.
tag - When the port is working in auto-tagged mode, and learns about a voice device through the device’s
OUI, it will join the voice VLAN as a tagged member automatically. When the voice device sends voice
VLAN tagged packets, the Switch will change its priority. When the voice device sends untagged packets, it will forward them to port’s PVID VLAN.
untag - When the port is working in auto-untagged mode, and the port captures a voice device through the device’s OUI, it will join the voice VLAN as an untagged member automatically. When the voice device sends voice VLAN tagged packets, the Switch will forward them according to the tag. When the voice device sends voice VLAN untagged packets, it will assign priority and voice VLAN ID into this packet.
When the Switch receives LLDP-MED packets, it checks the VLAN ID, tagged flag and priority flag. The switch should follow the tagged flag and priority setting. By default, the mode is auto untagged.
manual - Specify that the voice VLAN mode will be set to manual.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure voice VLAN ports 4-6 to enable:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config voice_vlan ports 4-6 state enable
Command: config voice_vlan ports 4-6 state enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To set the mode auto to voice VLAN ports 3-5:
768
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config voice_vlan ports 3-5 mode auto
Command: config voice_vlan ports 3-5 mode auto
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
95-6 config voice_vlan aging_time
Description
This command is used to set the aging time of the voice VLAN. The aging time is used to remove a port from voice
VLAN if the port is an automatic VLAN member. When the last voice device stops sending traffic and the MAC address of this voice device is aged out, the voice VLAN aging timer will be started. The port will be removed from the voice VLAN after expiration of the voice VLAN aging timer.
If the voice traffic resumes during the aging time, the aging timer will be stopped and reset.
Format config voice_vlan aging_time <min 1-65535>
Parameters
<min 1-65535> - Enter the aging time between 1 and 65535.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To set 60 minutes as the aging time of voice VLAN:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config voice_vlan aging_time 60
Command: config voice_vlan aging_time 60
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
95-7 config voice_vlan log state
Description
This command is used to configure the log state for voice VLAN. If there is a new voice device detected/or a port joins/leaves the voice VLAN dynamically, and the log is enabled, a log will be triggered.
Format config voice_vlan log state [enable | disable]
Parameters
enable - Specify that the sending of a voice VLAN log will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the sending of a voice VLAN log will be disabled.
769
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To enable the log state for voice VLAN:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config voice_vlan log state enable
Command: config voice_vlan log state enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
95-8 show voice_vlan
Description
This command is used to show the voice VLAN global information.
Format show voice_vlan
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the voice VLAN global information when voice VLAN is enabled:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show voice_vlan
Command: show voice_vlan
Voice VLAN State : Enabled
VLAN ID : 2
VLAN Name : v2
Priority : 6
Aging Time : 60 minutes
Log State : Enabled
Member Ports :
Dynamic Member Ports :
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To display the voice VLAN global information when voice VLAN is disabled:
770
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show voice_vlan
Command: show voice_vlan
Voice VLAN State : Disabled
Voice VLAN : Unassigned
Priority : 6
Aging Time : 60 minutes
Log State : Enabled
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
95-9 show voice_vlan oui
Description
This command is used to display OUI information of voice VLAN.
Format show voice_vlan oui
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the OUI information of voice VLAN:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show voice_vlan oui
Command: show voice_vlan oui
OUI Address Mask Description
------------------ ------------------ --------------
00-01-E3-00-00-00 FF-FF-FF-00-00-00 Siemens
00-03-6B-00-00-00 FF-FF-FF-00-00-00 Cisco
00-09-6E-00-00-00 FF-FF-FF-00-00-00 Avaya
00-0A-0B-00-00-00 FF-FF-FF-00-00-00
00-0F-E2-00-00-00 FF-FF-FF-00-00-00 Huawei&3COM
00-60-B9-00-00-00 FF-FF-FF-00-00-00 NEC&Philips
00-D0-1E-00-00-00 FF-FF-FF-00-00-00 Pingtel
00-E0-75-00-00-00 FF-FF-FF-00-00-00 Veritel
00-E0-BB-00-00-00 FF-FF-FF-00-00-00 3COM
Total Entries: 9
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
771
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
95-10 show voice_vlan ports
Description
This command is used to display the port voice VLAN information.
Format show voice_vlan ports {<portlist>}
Parameters
<portlist> - (Optional) Enter a list of ports to be displayed.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the voice VLAN information of ports 1-5:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show voice_vlan ports 1-5
Command: show voice_vlan ports 1-5
Ports Status Mode
----- --------- --------------
1 Disabled Auto Untagged
2 Disabled Auto Untagged
3 Disabled Auto Untagged
4 Enabled Auto Untagged
5 Enabled Auto Untagged
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
95-11 show voice_vlan voice_device
Description
This command is used to show voice devices that are connected to the ports. The start time is the time when the device is detected on this port and the activate time is the latest time the device sent traffic.
Format show voice_vlan voice_device {ports <portlist>}
Parameters
ports - (Optional) Specify the list of ports to be configured here.
<portlist> - Enter a list of ports used to be displayed here.
Restrictions
None.
772
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Example
To display the voice devices that are connected to the ports 1-5:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show voice_vlan voice_device ports 1-5
Command: show voice_vlan voice_device ports 1-5
Ports Voice Device Start Time Last Active Time
----- ----------------- ---------------- ----------------
1 00-E0-BB-00-00-01 2008-10-6 09:00 2008-10-6 10:30
1 00-E0-BB-00-00-02 2008-10-6 14:10 2008-10-6 15:00
1 00-E0-BB-00-00-03 2008-10-6 14:20 2008-10-6 15:30
2 00-03-6B-00-00-01 2008-10-6 17:15 2008-10-6 18:00
4 00-E0-75-00-00-02 2008-10-6 18:15 2008-10-6 20:00
5 00-01-E3-01-02-03 2008-10-6 18:30 2008-10-6 20:30
Total Entries : 6
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
95-12 show voice_vlan lldp_med voice_device
Description
This command is used to show the voice devices being discovered by the LLDP-MED.
Format show voice_vlan lldp_med voice_device
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the voice devices discovered by LLDP-MED:
773
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show voice_vlan lldp_med voice_device
Command: show voice_vlan lldp_med voice_device
Index : 1
Local Port : 1
Chassis ID Subtype : MAC Address
Chassis ID : 00-E0-BB-00-00-11
Port ID Subtype : Network Address
Port ID : 172.18.1.1
Create Time : 10/6/2008 09:00
Remain Time : 120 Seconds
Index : 2
Local Port : 3
Chassis ID Subtype : MAC Address
Chassis ID : 00-E0-BB-00-00-12
Port ID Subtype : Network Address
Port ID : 172.18.1.2
Create Time : 10/6/2008 09:00
Remain Time : 120 Seconds
Total Entries: 2
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
774
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 96 Web-based Access Control (WAC)
Command List
enable wac disable wac
config wac authorization attributes {radius [enable | disable] | local [enable | disable]}(1)
config wac ports [<portlist> | all] {state [enable | disable] | aging_time [infinite | <min 1-1440>] | idle_time [infinite
| <min 1-1440>] | block_time [<sec 0-300>]}(1)
config wac method [local | radius]
config wac default_redirpath <string 128> config wac clear_default_redirpath
config wac virtual_ip {<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr>}(1)
config wac switch_http_port <tcp_port_number 1-65535> {[http | https]}
create wac user <username 15> {[vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid 1-4094>]}
delete wac [user <username 15> | all_users]
config wac user <username 15> [vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid 1-4094> | clear_vlan] show wac
show wac ports {<portlist>} show wac user
show wac auth_state ports {<portlist>}
clear wac auth_state [ports [<portlist> | all] {authenticated | authenticating | blocked} | macaddr <macaddr>]
config wac authentication_page element [default | page_title <desc 128> | login_window_title <desc 64> | user_name_title <desc 32> | password_title <desc 32> | logout_window_title <desc 64> | notification_line
<value 1-5> <desc 128>] show wac authenticate_page
config wac trap state [enable | disable]
96-1 enable wac
Description
This command is used to enable the WAC function.
Format enable wac
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To enable the WAC function:
775
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#enable wac
Command: enable wac
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
96-2 disable wac
Description
This command is used to disable the WAC function.
Format disable wac
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To disable the WAC function:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#disable wac
Command: disable wac
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
96-3 config wac authorization attributes
Description
This command is used to configure the acceptance of an authorized configuration. When the authorization is enabled for WAC’s RADIUS, the authorized data assigned by the RADUIS server will be accepted if the global authorization network is enabled. When the authorization is enabled for WAC’s local, the authorized data assigned by the local database will be accepted.
Format config wac authorization attributes {radius [enable | disable] | local [enable | disable]}(1)
Parameters
radius - If specified to enable, the authorized data assigned by the RADUIS server will be accepted if the global authorization network is enabled. The default state is enabled.
enable - Specify to enable authorized data assigned by the RADIUS server to be accepted.
disable - Specify to disable authorized data assigned by the RADIUS server from being accepted.
local - If specified to enable, the authorized data assigned by the local database will be accepted if the global
776
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide authorization network is enabled. The default state is enabled.
enable - Specify to enable authorized data assigned by the local database to be accepted.
disable - Specify to disable authorized data assigned by the local database from being accepted.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure the acceptance of an authorized configuration:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config wac authorization attributes local disable
Command: config wac authorization attributes local disable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
96-4 config wac ports
Description
This command is used to configure the WAC port parameters.
Format config wac ports [<portlist> | all] {state [enable | disable] | aging_time [infinite | <min 1-1440>] | idle_time
[infinite | <min 1-1440>] | block_time [<sec 0-300>]}(1)
Parameters
<portlist> - Enter a range of ports to configure.
all - Specify to configure all ports.
state - Specify to enable or disable the WAC state.
enable - Specify to enable the WAC state.
disable - Specify to disable the WAC state.
aging_time - Specify a time period during which an authenticated host will be kept in authenticated state. The default value is 1440 minutes.
infinite - Specify to indicate the authenticated host on the port will not ageout.
<min 1-1440> - Enter an ageout value between 1 and 1440 minutes.
idle_time - Specify a time period after which an authenticated host will be moved to un-authenticated state if there is no traffic during that period. The default value is infinite.
infinite - Specify to indicate the host will not be removed from the authenticated state due to idle of traffic.
<min 1-1440> - Enter an idle time between 1 and 1440 minutes.
block_time - If a host fails to pass the authentication, it will be blocked for this period of time before it can be reauthenticated. The default value is 60 seconds.
<sec 0-300> - Enter a block time between 0 and 300 seconds.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure the WAC port state:
777
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config wac ports 1-8 state enable
Command: config wac ports 1-8 state enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
To configure the WAC port aging time:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config wac ports 1-5 aging_time 200
Command: config wac ports 1-5 aging_time 200
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
96-5 config wac method
Description
This command is used to allow specification of the RADIUS protocol used by WAC to complete RADIUS authentication. WAC shares other RADIUS configuration with 802.1X. When using this command to set the
RADIUS protocol, users must make sure the RADIUS server added by the config RADIUS command supports the protocol.
Format config wac method [local | radius]
Parameters
local - Specify the authentication will be done via the local database.
radius - Specify the authentication will be done via the RADIUS server.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure the WAC authentication method:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config wac method radius
Command: config wac method radius
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
96-6 config wac default_redirpath
Description
This command is used to configure the WAC default redirect path. If default redirect path is configured, the user will be redirected to the default redirect path after successful authentication. When the string is cleared, the client will not be redirected to another URL after successful authentication.
778
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Format config wac default_redirpath <string 128>
Parameters
<string 128> - Enter the URL that the client will be redirected to after successful authentication. By default, the redirected path is cleared.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure the WAC default redirect path:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config wac default_redirpath http://www.dlink.com
Command: config wac default_redirpath http://www.dlink.com
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
96-7 config wac clear_default_redirpath
Description
This command is used to clear the WAC default redirect path. When the string is cleared, the client will not be redirected to another URL after successful authentication.
Format config wac clear_default_redirpath
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To clear the WAC default redirect path:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#config wac clear_default_redirpath
Command: config wac clear_default_redirpath
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
779
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
96-8 config wac virtual_ip
Description
This command is used to configure the virtual IP address for WAC. The virtual IP of WAC is used to accept authentication request from unauthenticated host. Only requests sent to this IP will get response correctly.
This IP does not respond to ARP request or ICMP packet!
NOTE: The WAC virtual IP address should be configured before enabling WAC because WAC will not work correctly if the virtual IP address is not set. A warning message “Warning! WAC virtual IPv4 or IPv6 address is not configured.” will be prompted even when enabling WAC successfully.
Format config wac virtual_ip {<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr>}(1)
Parameters
<ipaddr> - Enter the IPv4 address of the virtual IP.
<ipv6addr> - Enter the IPv6 address of the virtual IP
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
Set virtual IP address:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# config wac virtual_ip 1.1.1.1
Command: config wac virtual_ip 1.1.1.1
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
96-9 config wac switch_http_port
Description
This command is used to configure the TCP port which the WAC switch listens to. The TCP port for HTTP or
HTTPs is used to identify the HTTP or HTTPs packets that will be trapped to CPU for authentication processing, or to access the login page. If not specified, the default port number for HTTP is 80, and the default port number for
HTTPS is 443. If no protocol is specified, the protocol is HTTP.
Format config wac switch_http_port <tcp_port_number 1-65535> {[http | https]}
Parameters
<tcp_port_number 1-65535> - Enter a TCP port which the WAC switch listens to and uses to finish the authenticating process.
http - (Optional) Specify that WAC runs HTTP protocol on this TCP port.
https - (Optional) Specify that WAC runs HTTPS protocol on this TCP port.
780
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure a TCP port which the WAC switch listens to:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# config wac switch_http_port 8888 http
Command: config wac switch_http_port 8888 http
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
96-10 create wac user
Description
This command is used to create accounts for Web-based Access Control. This user account is independent of the login user account. If VLAN is not specified, the user will not get a VLAN assigned after the authentication.
Format create wac user <username 15> {[vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid 1-4094>]}
Parameters
<username 15> - Enter the user account for Web-based Access Control.
vlan - (Optional) Specify the authentication VLAN name.
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the authentication VLAN name. The VLAN name can be up to 32 characters long.
vlanid - (Optional) Specify the authentication VLAN ID number.
<vlanid 1-4094> - Enter the authentication VLAN ID number. The VLAN ID must be between 1 and 4094.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To create a WAC account:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# create wac user abc vlanid 123
Command: create wac user abc vlanid 123
Enter a case-sensitive new password:**
Enter the new password again for confirmation:**
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
96-11 delete wac
Description
This command is used to delete an account.
781
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Format delete wac [user <username 15> | all_users]
Parameters
user - Specify the user account for Web-based Access Control.
<username 15> - Enter the user account for Web-based Access Control. The username can be up to 15 characters long.
all_users - Specify this option to delete all current WAC users.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To delete a WAC account:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#delete wac user duhon
Command: delete wac user duhon
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
96-12 config wac user
Description
This command is used to change the VLAN associated with a user.
Format config wac user <username 15> [vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid 1-4094> | clear_vlan]
Parameters
<username 15> - Enter the name of user account which will change its VID.
vlan - Specify the authentication VLAN name.
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the authentication VLAN name. The VLAN name can be up to 32 characters long.
vlanid - Specify the authentication VLAN ID.
<vlanid 1-4094> - Enter the authentication VLAN ID. The VLAN ID must be between 1 and 4094.
clear_vlan - Specify to clear the specified VLAN.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To configure the user’s VLAN:
782
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# config wac user abc vlanid 100
Command: config wac user abc vlanid 100
Enter a old password:**
Enter a case-sensitive new password:**
Enter the new password again for confirmation:**
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
96-13 show wac
Description
This command is used to display the WAC global setting.
Format show wac
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show WAC:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# show wac
Command: show wac
Web-based Access Control
-----------------------------------
State : Enabled
Method : RADIUS
Redirect Path : http://www.dlink.com
Virtual IP : 0.0.0.0
Virtual IPv6 : 2000::20
Switch HTTP Port : 80 (HTTP)
RADIUS Authorization : Enabled
Local Authorization : Enabled
Trap State : Enabled
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
96-14 show wac ports
Description
This command is used to display WAC port information.
783
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Format show wac ports {<portlist>}
Parameters
<portlist> - (Optional) Enter a range of member ports to display the status.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display WAC ports 1 to 3:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# show wac ports 1-3
Command: show wac ports 1-3
Port State Aging Time Idle Time Block Time
(min) (min) (sec)
------- -------- ------------ ---------- -----------
1 Disabled 1440 Infinite 60
2 Disabled 1440 Infinite 60
3 Disabled 1440 Infinite 60
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
96-15 show wac user
Description
This command is used to display WAC user accounts.
Format show wac user
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show Web authentication user accounts:
784
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# show wac user
Command: show wac user
User Name Password VID
----------------- ----------------- ---------
123 ************ 1000
Total Entries : 1
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
96-16 show wac auth_state ports
Description
This command is used to display the authentication state for ports.
Format show wac auth_state ports {<portlist>}
Parameters
<portlist> - (Optional) Enter the list of ports whose WAC authentication state will be displayed.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the WAC authentication status of ports:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# show wac auth_state ports
Command: show wac auth_state ports
P:Port-based Pri:Priority
Port MAC Address Original State VID Pri Aging Time/ Idle
RX VID Block Time Time
------ -------------------- ---- -------------- ---- -- ----------- ----
31 00-05-5D-F9-16-76 1 Authenticating - - 27 -
Total Authenticating Hosts : 1
Total Authenticated Hosts : 0
Total Blocked Hosts : 0
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
96-17 clear wac auth_state
Description
This command is used to clear the authentication state of a port. The port will return to un-authenticated state. All the timers associated with the port will be reset.
785
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Format clear wac auth_state [ports [<portlist> | all] {authenticated | authenticating | blocked} | macaddr <macaddr>]
Parameters
ports - Specify the list of ports whose WAC state will be cleared.
<portlist> - Enter a range of ports.
all - Specify to clear all ports.
authenticated - (Optional) Specify to clear all authenticated users for a port.
authenticating - (Optional) Specify to clear all authenticating users for a port.
blocked - (Optional) Specify to clear all blocked users for a port.
macaddr - Specify to clear a specific user.
<macaddr> - Enter the MAC address here.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To clear the WAC authentication state of ports 1 to 5:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# clear wac auth_state ports 1-5
Command: clear wac auth_state ports 1-5
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
96-18 config wac authentication_page element
Description
This command is used to customize the authenticate page elements.
Format config wac authentication_page element [default | page_title <desc 128> | login_window_title <desc 64> | user_name_title <desc 32> | password_title <desc 32> | logout_window_title <desc 64> | notification_line
<value 1-5> <desc 128>]
Parameters
default - Specify to reset the page elements to default.
page_title - Specify to configure the title of the authentication page.
<desc 128> - Enter the page title used here. This value can be up to 128 characters long.
login_window_title - Specify to configure the login window title of the authentication page
<desc 64> - Enter the login window title used here. This value can be up to 64 characters long.
user_name_title - Specify to configure the user name title of the authentication page
<desc 32> - Enter the user name title used here. This value can be up to 32 characters long.
password_title - Specify to configure the password title of the authentication page.
<desc 32> - Enter the password title used here. This value can be up to 32 characters long.
logout_window_title - Specify to configure the logout window title of the authentication page.
<desc 64> - Enter the logout window title used here. This value can be up to 64 characters long.
notification_line - Specify to set the notification information by line in authentication Web pages.
<value 1-5> - Enter the notification line number used here. This value must be between 1 and 5.
<desc 128> - Enter the notification line description used here. This value can be up to 128 characters long.
786
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
To customize the authenticate page elements:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# config wac authentication_page element notification_line 1 Copyright @
2016 D-Link All Rights Reserved
Command: config wac authentication_page element notification_line 1 Copyright @ 2016 D-Link
All Rights Reserved
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
96-19 show wac authenticate_page
Description
This command is used to show the elements of the customized authenticate pages.
Format show wac authenticate_page
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
The following example displays the authentication page elements:
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#show wac authenticate_page
Command: show wac authenticate_page
Page Title : D-Link
Login Window Title : Authentication Login
User Name Title : User Name
Password Title : Password
Logout Window Title : Logout From The Network
Notification :
Copyright @ 2016 D-Link All Rights Reserved
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
787
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
96-20 config wac trap state
Description
This command is used to enable or disable the WAC trap state.
Format config wac trap state [enable | disable]
Parameters
enable - Specify to enable the WAC trap state.
disable - Specify to disable the WAC trap state.
Restrictions
Only Administrators, Operators and Power-Users can issue this command.
Example
This example show how to enable the WAC trap state.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin# config wac trap state enable
Command: config wac trap state enable
Success.
DGS-3000-26TC:admin#
788
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Appendix A Password Recovery Procedure
This chapter describes the procedure for resetting passwords on D-Link switches. Authenticating any user who tries to access networks is necessary and important. The basic authentication method used to accept qualified users is through a local login, utilizing a Username and Password. Sometimes, passwords get forgotten or destroyed, so network administrators need to reset these passwords. This chapter explains how the Password
Recovery feature can help network administrators reach this goal.
The following steps explain how to use the Password Recovery feature on D-Link devices to easily recover passwords.
Complete these steps to reset the password:
1.
2.
For security reasons, the Password Recovery feature requires the user to physically access the device.
Therefore this feature is only applicable when there is a direct connection to the console port of the device.
It is necessary for the user needs to attach a terminal or PC with terminal emulation to the console port of the Switch.
Power on the Switch. After the ‘Starting runtime image’ message, the Switch will allow 2 seconds for the user to press the hotkey [^] (Shift + 6) to enter the “Password Recovery Mode.” Once the Switch enters the “Password Recovery Mode,” all ports on the Switch will be disabled.
Boot Procedure V2.00.001
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Power On Self Test ........................................ 100 %
MAC Address : B0-C5-54-30-00-A0
H/W Version : A2
Please Wait, Loading V2.00.004 Runtime Image .............. 100 %
UART init ................................................. 100 %
Starting runtime image
Password Recovery Mode
>
3. In the “Password Recovery Mode” only the following commands can be used.
Command reset config {force_agree} reboot reset account reset password {<username>} show account
Parameters
The reset config command resets the whole configuration back to the default values. The option force_agree means to reset the whole configuration without the user’s agreement.
The reboot command exits the Reset Password Recovery Mode and restarts the switch. A confirmation message will be displayed to allow the user to save the current settings.
The reset account command deletes all the previously created accounts.
The reset password command resets the password of the specified user. If a username is not specified, the passwords of all users will be reset.
The show account command displays all previously created accounts.
789
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Appendix B System Log Entries
The following table lists all possible entries and their corresponding meanings that will appear in the System Log of this Switch.
Category
System
Up/Download
Event Description
System started up
System warm start
System cold start
Configuration saved to flash
System log saved to flash
Configuration and log saved to flash
Side Fan failed.
Side Fan recovered.
Back Fan failed.
Back Fan recovered.
Temperature sensor enters alarm state.
Temperature recovers to normal.
Firmware upgraded successfully.
Firmware upgrade was unsuccessful.
Firmware successfully uploaded.
Firmware upload was unsuccessful.
Configuration successfully downloaded.
Configuration download was unsuccessful.
Configuration successfully uploaded.
Configuration upload was unsuccessful.
Log message successfully uploaded.
Log message upload was unsuccessful.
Attack log message successfully uploaded.
Attack log message upload was unsuccessful.
Log Information
System started up
System warm start
Severity
Critical
Critical
System cold start
Configuration saved to flash by console(Username: <username>, IP: <ipaddr> )
Critical
Informational
System log saved to flash by console(Username:
<username>, IP: <ipaddr> )
Informational
Configuration and log saved to flash by console(Username: <username>, IP: <ipaddr> )
Informational
Side Fan failed
Side Fan recovered
Critical
Critical
Back Fan failed
Back Fan recovered
Temperature sensor <sensorID> enters alarm state (current temperature: <temperature>)
Temperature sensor <sensorID> recovers to normal state (current temperature:
<temperature>)
Critical
Critical
Warning
Informational
Firmware upgraded by <session> successfully
(Username: <username>, IP: <ipaddr>, MAC:
<macaddr>)
Firmware upgrade by <session> was unsuccessful! (Username: <username>, IP:
<ipaddr>, MAC: <macaddr>)
Informational
Warning
Firmware successfully uploaded by <session>
(Username: <username>, IP: <ipaddr>, MAC:
<macaddr>)
Informational
Firmware upload by <session> was unsuccessful!
(Username: <username>, IP: <ipaddr>, MAC:
<macaddr>)
Warning
Configuration successfully downloaded by
<session> (Username: <username>, IP:
<ipaddr>, MAC: <macaddr>)
Informational
Warning Configuration download by <session> was unsuccessful! (Username: <username>, IP:
<ipaddr>, MAC: <macaddr>)
Configuration successfully uploaded by
<session> (Username: <username>, IP:
<ipaddr>, MAC: <macaddr>)
Informational
Configuration upload by <session> was unsuccessful! (Username: <username>, IP:
<ipaddr>, MAC: <macaddr>)
Log message successfully uploaded by
<session> (Username: <username>, IP:
<ipaddr>, MAC: <macaddr>)
Log message upload by <session> was unsuccessful! (Username: <username>, IP:
<ipaddr>, MAC: <macaddr>)
Attack log message successfully uploaded by
<session> (Username: <username>, IP:
<ipaddr>, MAC: <macaddr>)
Attack log message upload by <session> was unsuccessful! (Username: <username>, IP:
<ipaddr>, MAC: <macaddr>)
Warning
Informational
Warning
Informational
Warning
790
Category
Interface
Console
Web
Telnet
SNMP
STP
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Event Description
Port link up.
Port link down.
Successful login through Console.
Login failed through Console.
Logout through Console.
Console session timed out.
Successful login through Web.
Login failed through Web.
Logout through Web.
Web session timed out
Successful login through Web(SSL).
Login failed through Web(SSL).
Logout through Web(SSL).
Web(SSL) session timed out.
Successful login through Telnet.
Login failed through Telnet.
Logout through Telnet.
Telnet session timed out.
SNMP request received with invalid community string.
Topology changed.
Enable spanning tree protocol.
Disable spanning tree protocol.
New root bridge.
New root bridge.
New root bridge.
New root bridge.
New root port.
Spanning Tree port status changed.
Spanning Tree port role changed.
Log Information
Port <portNum> link up, <link state>
Port <portNum> link down
Severity
Informational
Informational
Successful login through Console (Username:
<username>)
Login failed through Console (Username:
<username>)
Logout through Console (Username:
<username>)
Console session timed out (Username:
<username>)
Informational
Warning
Informational
Informational
Successful login through Web (Username:
<username>, IP: <ipaddr> )
Login failed through Web (Username:
<username>, IP: <ipaddr> )
Informational
Warning
Logout through Web (Username: <username>,
IP: <ipaddr>, )
Informational
Web session timed out (Username: <username>,
IP: <ipaddr>, )
Informational
Successful login through Web(SSL) (Username:
<username>, IP: <ipaddr>, )
Informational
Warning Login failed through Web(SSL) (Username:
<username>, IP: <ipaddr>, )
Logout through Web(SSL) (Username:
<username>, IP: <ipaddr>, )
Informational
Web(SSL) session timed out (Username:
<username>, IP: <ipaddr>, )
Successful login through Telnet (Username:
<username>, IP: <ipaddr>, )
Login failed through Telnet (Username:
<username>, IP: <ipaddr>, )
Logout through Telnet (Username: <username>,
IP: <ipaddr>, )
Telnet session timed out (Username:
<username>, IP: <ipaddr>, )
SNMP request received from <ipAddress> with invalid community string!
Topology changed (Instance:<InstanceID>,
Port:<portNum>,MAC:<macaddr>)
Spanning Tree Protocol is enabled
Spanning Tree Protocol is disabled
CIST New Root bridge selected ( MAC:
<macaddr> Priority :<value>)
CIST Region New Root bridge selected ( MAC:
<macaddr> Priority :<value>)
MSTI Region New Root bridge selected
(Instance:<InstanceID>, MAC: <macaddr>
Priority :<value>)
New Root bridge selected ( MAC: <macaddr>
Priority :<value>)
New root port selected (Instance:<InstanceID>,
Port:<portNum>)
Spanning Tree port status changed
(Instance:<InstanceID>, Port:<portNum>)
<old_status> -> <new_status>
Spanning Tree port role changed
(Instance:<InstanceID>, Port:<portNum>)
<old_role> -> <new_role>
Informational
Informational
Warning
Informational
Informational
Informational
Notice
Informational
Informational
Informational
Informational
Informational
Informational
Notice
Notice
Informational
791
AAA
SSH
Category
DoS
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Event Description Log Information Severity
Spanning Tree instance created.
Spanning Tree instance deleted.
Spanning Tree Version changed.
Spanning Tree MST configuration ID name and revision level changed.
SSH server is enabled.
Spanning Tree instance created
(Instance:<InstanceID>)
Spanning Tree instance deleted
(Instance:<InstanceID>)
Spanning Tree version changed (new version:<new_version>)
Spanning Tree MST configuration ID name and revision level changed (name:<name> ,revision level <revision_level>)
Informational
Informational
Informational
Informational
Spanning Tree MST configuration ID VLAN mapping table added.
Spanning Tree MST configuration ID VLAN mapping table deleted.
Spoofing attack:
1. The source ip is same as switch's interface ip but the source mac is different.
2. Source ip is the same as the switch's IP in ARP packet.
3. Self IP packet detected.
Possible spoofing attack from (IP: <ipaddr> MAC:
<macaddr> Port: <portNum>)
Critical
The DoS attack is blocked. Critical
Successful login through SSH.
<dos_name> is blocked from (IP: <ipaddr> Port:
<portNum>)
Successful login through SSH (Username:
<username>, IP: <ipaddr> )
Informational
Login failed through SSH.
Logout through SSH.
Spanning Tree MST configuration ID VLAN mapping table changed (instance: <InstanceID> add vlan <startvlanid> [- <endvlanid>])
Spanning Tree MST configuration ID VLAN mapping table changed (instance: <InstanceID> delete vlan <startvlanid> [- <endvlanid>])
Login failed through SSH (Username:
<username>, IP: <ipaddr>, )
Logout through SSH (Username: <username>,
IP: <ipaddr> )
Informational
Informational
Warning
Informational
SSH session timed out. SSH session timed out (Username: <username>,
IP: <ipaddr>)
Informational
SSH server is enabled Informational
Informational
Informational
Informational
Informational
SSH server is disabled.
Authentication Policy is enabled.
Authentication Policy is disabled.
Successful login through Console authenticated by AAA local method.
Login failed through Console authenticated by
AAA local method.
Successful login through Web authenticated by
AAA local method.
SSH server is disabled
Authentication Policy is enabled (Module: AAA)
Authentication Policy is disabled (Module: AAA)
Successful login through Console authenticated by AAA local method (Username: <username>)
Login failed through Console authenticated by
AAA local method (Username: <username>)
Login failed through Web authenticated by AAA local method.
Successful login through Web from <userIP> authenticated by AAA local method (Username:
<username> )
Login failed failed through Web from <userIP> authenticated by AAA local method (Username:
<username> )
Successful login through Web(SSL) authenticated by AAA local method.
Successful login through Web(SSL) from
<userIP> authenticated by AAA local method
(Username: <username> )
Login failed through Web(SSL) authenticated by
AAA local method.
Successful login through Telnet authenticated by
AAA local method.
Login failed through Web(SSL) from <userIP> authenticated by AAA local method (Username:
<username>)
Successful login through Telnet from <userIP> authenticated by AAA local method (Username:
<username>, )
Login failed through Telnet authenticated by AAA local method.
Login failed through Telnet from <userIP> authenticated by AAA local method (Username:
<username> )
Successful login through SSH authenticated by
AAA local method.
Successful login through SSH from <userIP> authenticated by AAA local method (Username:
<username> )
Warning
Informational
Warning
Informational
Warning
Informational
Warning
Informational
792
Category
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Event Description Log Information
Login failed through SSH authenticated by AAA local method.
Successful login through Console authenticated by AAA none method.
Successful login through Web authenticated by
AAA none method.
Login failed through SSH from <userIP> authenticated by AAA local method (Username:
<username>)
Successful login through Console authenticated by AAA none method (Username: <username>)
Successful login through Web from <userIP> authenticated by AAA none method (Username:
<username> )
Successful login through Web(SSL) authenticated by AAA none method.
Successful login through Web(SSL) from
<userIP> authenticated by AAA none method
(Username: <username> )
Successful login through Telnet authenticated by
AAA none method.
Successful login through Telnet from <userIP> authenticated by AAA none method (Username:
<username> )
Severity
Warning
Informational
Informational
Informational
Informational
Successful login through SSH authenticated by
AAA none method.
Successful login through Console authenticated by AAA server.
Login failed through Console authenticated by
AAA server.
Login failed through Console due to AAA server timeout or improper configuration.
Successful login through SSH from <userIP> authenticated by AAA none (Username:
<username> )
Successful login through Console authenticated by AAA server <serverIP> (Username:
<username>)
Informational
Informational
Login failed through Console authenticated by
AAA server <serverIP> (Username: <username>)
Warning
Login failed through Console due to AAA server timeout or improper configuration (Username:
<username>)
Warning
Informational Successful login through Web authenticated by
AAA server.
Login failed through Web authenticated by AAA server.
Successful login through Web from <userIP> authenticated by AAA server <serverIP>
(Username: <username>)
Login failed through Web from <userIP> authenticated by AAA server <serverIP>
(Username: <username> )
Login failed through Web due to AAA server timeout or improper configuration.
Successful login through Web(SSL) authenticated by AAA server.
Successful login through Web(SSL) from
<userIP> authenticated by AAA server
<serverIP> (Username: <username> )
Login failed through Web(SSL) authenticated by
AAA server.
Login failed through Web from <userIP> due to
AAA server timeout or improper configuration
(Username: <username> )
Login failed through Web(SSL) from <userIP> authenticated by AAA server <serverIP>
(Username: <username> )
Login failed through Web(SSL) due to AAA server timeout or improper configuration.
Login failed through Web(SSL) from <userIP> due to AAA server timeout or improper configuration (Username: <username> )
Successful login through Telnet authenticated by
AAA server.
Successful login through Telnet from <userIP> authenticated by AAA server <serverIP>
(Username: <username> )
Login failed through Telnet authenticated by AAA server.
Login failed through Telnet from <userIP> authenticated by AAA server <serverIP>
(Username: <username> )
Login failed through Telnet due to AAA server timeout or improper configuration.
Successful login through SSH authenticated by
AAA server.
Login failed through Telnet from <userIP> due to
AAA server timeout or improper configuration
(Username: <username>)
Successful login through SSH from <userIP> authenticated by AAA server <serverIP>
(Username: <username> )
Warning
Warning
Informational
Warning
Warning
Informational
Warning
Warning
Informational
Login failed through SSH authenticated by AAA server.
Login failed through SSH due to AAA server timeout or improper configuration.
Successful Enable Admin through Console authenticated by AAA local_enable method.
Login failed through SSH from <userIP> authenticated by AAA server <serverIP>
(Username: <username> )
Login failed through SSH from <userIP> due to
AAA server timeout or improper configuration
(Username: <username> )
Successful Enable Admin through Console authenticated by AAA local_enable method
Warning
Warning
Informational
793
Category
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Event Description
Enable Admin failed through Console authenticated by AAA local_enable method.
Log Information
(Username: <username>)
Enable Admin failed through Console authenticated by AAA local_enable method
(Username: <username>)
Severity
Warning
Successful Enable Admin through Web authenticated by AAA local_enable method.
Enable Admin failed through Web authenticated by AAA local_enable method.
Successful Enable Admin through Web from
<userIP> authenticated by AAA local_enable method (Username: <username> )
Enable Admin failed through Web from <userIP> authenticated by AAA local_enable method
(Username: <username>)
Informational
Warning
Successful Enable Admin through Web(SSL) authenticated by AAA local_enable method.
Enable Admin failed through Web(SSL) authenticated by AAA local_enable method.
Successful Enable Admin through Telnet authenticated by AAA local_enable method.
Successful Enable Admin through Web(SSL) from <userIP> authenticated by AAA local_enable method (Username: <username>, )
Informational
Warning Enable Admin failed through Web(SSL) from
<userIP> authenticated by AAA local_enable method (Username: <username> )
Successful Enable Admin through Telnet from
<userIP> authenticated by AAA local_enable method (Username: <username> )
Informational
Enable Admin failed through Telnet authenticated by AAA local_enable method.
Enable Admin failed through Telnet from
<userIP> authenticated by AAA local_enable method (Username: <username> )
Successful Enable Admin through SSH authenticated by AAA local_enable method.
Successful Enable Admin through SSH from
<userIP> authenticated by AAA local (Username:
<username> )
Warning
Informational
Enable Admin failed through SSH authenticated by AAA local_enable method.
Warning
Successful Enable Admin through Console authenticated by AAA none method.
Successful Enable Admin through Web authenticated by AAA none method.
Successful Enable Admin through Web(SSL) authenticated by AAA none method.
Enable Admin failed through <Telnet or Web or
SSH> from <userIP> authenticated by AAA local_enable method (Username: <username> )
Successful Enable Admin through Console authenticated by AAA none method (Username:
<username>)
Successful Enable Admin through Web from
<userIP> authenticated by AAA none method
(Username: <username> )
Successful Enable Admin through Web(SSL) from <userIP> authenticated by AAA none method (Username: <username>)
Informational
Informational
Informational
Successful Enable Admin through Telnet authenticated by AAA none method.
Successful Enable Admin through Telnet from
<userIP> authenticated by AAA none method
(Username: <username>)
Informational
Successful Enable Admin through SSH authenticated by AAA none method.
Successful Enable Admin through Console authenticated by AAA server.
Enable Admin failed through Console authenticated by AAA server.
Enable Admin failed through Web due to AAA server timeout or improper configuration.
Successful Enable Admin through Web(SSL) authenticated by AAA server.
Successful Enable Admin through SSH from
<userIP> authenticated by AAA none (Username:
<username> )
Informational
Informational Successful Enable Admin through Console authenticated by AAA server <serverIP>
(Username: <username>)
Enable Admin failed through Console authenticated by AAA server <serverIP>
(Username: <username>)
Warning
Enable Admin failed through Console due to AAA server timeout or improper configuration.
Enable Admin failed through Console due to AAA server timeout or improper configuration
(Username: <username>)
Warning
Successful Enable Admin through Web authenticated by AAA server.
Enable Admin failed through Web authenticated by AAA server.
Successful Enable Admin through Web from
<userIP> authenticated by AAA server
<serverIP> (Username: <username> )
Enable Admin failed through Web from <userIP> authenticated by AAA server <serverIP>
(Username: <username> )
Informational
Warning
Enable Admin failed through Web from <userIP> due to AAA server timeout or improper configuration (Username: <username>)
Successful Enable Admin through Web(SSL) from <userIP> authenticated by AAA server
<serverIP> (Username: <username> )
Warning
Informational
794
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Category Event Description Log Information
Enable Admin failed through Web(SSL) authenticated by AAA server.
Enable Admin failed through Web(SSL) due to
AAA server timeout or improper configuration.
Enable Admin failed through Web(SSL) from
<userIP> authenticated by AAA server
<serverIP> (Username: <username> )
Enable Admin failed through Web(SSL) from
<userIP> due to AAA server timeout or improper configuration (Username: <username>)
Successful Enable Admin through Telnet authenticated by AAA server.
Successful Enable Admin through Telnet from
<userIP> authenticated by AAA server
<serverIP> (Username: <username>)
Enable Admin failed through Telnet authenticated by AAA server.
Enable Admin failed through Telnet from
<userIP> authenticated by AAA server
<serverIP> (Username: <username> )
Severity
Warning
Warning
Informational
Warning
Enable Admin failed through Telnet due to AAA server timeout or improper configuration.
Enable Admin failed through Telnet from
<userIP> due to AAA server timeout or improper configuration (Username: <username>)
Warning
Port security
IMPB
IP and Password
Changed
Safeguard Engine
Successful Enable Admin through SSH authenticated by AAA server.
Enable Admin failed through SSH authenticated by AAA server.
Enable Admin failed through SSH due to AAA server timeout or improper configuration.
AAA server timed out.
AAA server ACK error.
AAA does not support this functionality. port security is exceeded to its maximum learning size and will not learn any new address.
Port security violation (MAC address:<macaddr> on port:<portNum>)
Unauthenticated IP address encountered and discarded by ip IP-MAC port binding.
Unauthenticated IP-MAC address and discarded by IMPB (IP: <ipaddr>, MAC: <macaddr>, Port
<portNum>)
Dynamic IMPB entry is conflict with static ARP.
Dynamic IMPB entry is conflict with static FDB.
Dynamic IMPB entry conflicts with static IMPB.
Creating IMPB entry failed due to no ACL rule available.
IP Address change activity.
Password change activity.
Safeguard Engine is in normal mode.
Safeguard Engine is in filtering packet mode.
Successful Enable Admin through SSH from
<userIP> authenticated by AAA server
<serverIP> (Username: <username> )
Enable Admin failed through SSH from <userIP> authenticated by AAA server <serverIP>
(Username: <username> )
Enable Admin failed through SSH from <userIP> due to AAA server timeout or improper configuration (Username: <username> )
AAA server <serverIP> (Protocol: <protocol>) connection failed
AAA server <serverIP> (Protocol: <protocol>) response is wrong
AAA doesn't support this functionality
Informational
Warning
Warning
Warning
Warning
Informational
Warning
Warning
Dynamic IMPB entry conflicts with static ARP(IP:
<ipaddr>, MAC: <macaddr>, Port <portNum>)
Dynamic IMPB entry conflicts with static FDB(IP:
<ipaddr>, MAC: <macaddr>, Port <portNum>)
Warning
Warning
Dynamic IMPB entry conflicts with static IMPB(IP:
<ipaddr>, MAC: <macaddr>, Port <portNum>)
Warning
Creating IMPB entry failed due to no ACL rule being available(IP:<ipaddr>, MAC: <macaddr>,
Port <portNum>)
Warning
Informational Management IP address was changed by
(Username: <username>,IP:<ipaddr>)
Password was changed by (Username:
<username>,IP:<ipaddr> )
Safeguard Engine enters NORMAL mode
Safeguard Engine enters EXHAUSTED mode
Informational
Informational
Warning
Packet Storm Broadcast storm occurrence.
Broadcast storm cleared.
Multicast storm occurrence.
Multicast storm cleared.
Port shut down due to a packet storm.
Port loop occurred.
Port <portNum> Broadcast storm is occurring
Port <portNum> Broadcast storm has cleared
Port <portNum> Multicast storm is occurring
Warning
Informational
Warning
Port <portNum> Multicast storm has cleared
Port <portNum> is currently shut down due to a packet storm
Informational
Warning
Port <portNum> LBD loop occurred. Port blocked. Critical Loop Back
Detection
Port loop detection restarted after interval time. Port <portNum> LBD port recovered. Loop detection restarted.
Informational
795
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Category
802.1X
Event Description Log Information
Port with VID loop occurred.
Port with VID Loop detection restarted after interval time.
VID assigned from RADIUS server after RADIUS client authenticated by RADIUS server successfully .This VID will assign to the port and this port will be the vlan untag port member.
Port <portNum> VID <vlanID> LBD loop occurred. Packet discard begun.
Port <portNum> VID <vlanID> LBD recovered.
Loop detection restarted.
Radius server <ipaddr> assigned vid :<vlanID> to port <portNum> (account :<username> )
Ingress bandwidth assigned from RADIUS server after RADIUS client authenticated by RADIUS server successfully. This Ingress bandwidth will assign to the port.
Radius server <ipaddr> assigned ingress bandwidth:<ingressBandwidth> to port
<portNum> (account : <username>)
Severity
Critical
Informational
Informational
Informational
CFM
Egress bandwidth assigned from RADIUS server after RADIUS client authenticated by RADIUS server successfully. This egress bandwidth will assign to the port.
802.1p default priority assigned from RADIUS server after RADIUS client authenticated by
RADIUS server successfully. This 802.1p default priority will assign to the port.
802.1x Authentication failure.
Radius server <ipaddr> assigned egress bandwidth:<egressBandwidth> to port
<portNum> (account: <username>)
Informational
Radius server <ipaddr> assigned 802.1p default priority:<priority> to port <portNum> (account :
<username>)
Informational
802.1x Authentication success.
Cross-connect is detected.
802.1x Authentication failure [for <reason>] from
(Username: <username>, Port: <portNum>, MAC:
<macaddr> )
Warning
Informational 802.1x Authentication success from (Username:
<username>, Port: <portNum>, MAC:
<macaddr>)
CFM cross-connect. VLAN:<vlanid>, Local(MD
Level:<mdlevel>, Port <portNum>,
Direction:<mepdirection>)
Remote(MEPID:<mepid>, MAC:<macaddr>)
Critical
ARP
DHCP
Command Logging
MBAC
Error CFM CCM packet is detected.
Can not receive remote MEP's CCM packet.
Remote MEP's MAC reports an error status.
Remote MEP detects CFM defects.
Gratuitous ARP detected duplicate IP.
Detect untrusted DHCP server IP address.
Command Logging.
A host passes the authentication.
A host fails to pass the authentication.
A host is aged out.
The authorized user number on a port reaches the maximum user limit.
The authorized user number on a port is below the maximum user limit in a time interval (interval is project depended).
The authorized user number on whole device reaches the maximum user limit.
CFM error ccm. MD Level:<mdlevel>,
VLAN:<vlanid>, Local(Port <portNum>,
Direction:<mepdirection>)
Remote(MEPID:<mepid>, MAC:<macaddr>)
CFM remote down. MD Level:<mdlevel>,
VLAN:<vlanid>, Local(Port <portNum>,
Direction:<mepdirection>)
CFM remote MAC error. MD Level:<mdlevel>,
VLAN:<vlanid>, Local(Port <portNum>,
Direction:<mepdirection>)
CFM remote detects a defect. MD
Level:<mdlevel>, VLAN:<vlanid>, Local(Port
<portNum>, Direction:<mepdirection>)
Conflict IP was detected with this device ! (IP:
<ipaddr>, MAC: <macaddr>, Port <portNum>,
Interface: <ipif_name>).
Detected untrusted DHCP server(IP: <ipaddr>,
Port: <portNum>)
<username>: execute command "<string>"
Informational
MAC-based Access Control unauthenticated host(MAC: <macaddr>, Port <portNum>, VID:
<vid>)
Informational
MAC-based Access Control host login successful
(MAC: <macaddr>, port: <portNum>, VID: <vid>)
Informational
Critical
MAC-based Access Control host aged out (MAC:
<macaddr>, port: <portNum>, VID: <vid>)
Informational
Port <portNum> enters MAC-based Access
Control stop learning state.
Port <portNum> recovers from MAC-based
Access Control stop learning state.
MAC-based Access Control enters stop learning state.
Warning
Warning
Warning
Informational
Warning
Warning
Warning
Warning
796
Category
BPDU Protection
JWAC
WAC
DHCPv6 Server
DHCPv6 Server
Screening
Y.1731
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Event Description
The authorized user number on whole device is below the maximum user limit in a time interval
(interval is project depended).
BPDU attack happened.
Log Information
MAC-based Access Control recovers from stop learning state.
Severity
Warning
BPDU attack happened.
BPDU attack happened.
BPDU attack automatically recover.
BPDU attack manually recover.
Port <port> enter BPDU under protection state
(mode: drop )
Port <port> enter BPDU under protection state
(mode: block)
Port <port> enter BPDU under protection state
(mode: shutdown)
Port <port> recover from BPDU under protection state automatically
Port <port> recover from BPDU under protection state manually
Informational
Informational
Informational
Informational
Informational
System re-start reason: system fatal error.
System re-start reason: CPU exception.
System re-start reason: system fatal error
System re-start reason: CPU exception
Emergent
Emergent
When a client host authenticated successful.
When a client host fail to authenticate.
JWAC authenticated user (Username: <string>,
IP: <ipaddr | ipv6addr>, MAC: <macaddr>, Port:
<portNum>)
Informational
JWAC unauthenticated user (Username: <string>,
IP: <ipaddr | ipv6addr>, MAC: <macaddr>, Port:
<portNum>)
Warning
Warning This log will be triggered when the authorized user number reaches the max user limit on whole device.
JWAC enters stop learning state.
This log will be triggered when the authorized user number is below the max user limit on whole device in a time interval (interval is project depended).
JWAC recovered from stop learning state. Warning
When a client host authenticated successful. WAC authenticated user (Username: <string>, IP:
<ipaddr | ipv6address>, MAC: <macaddr>, Port:
<portNum>)
Informational
When a client host fail to authenticate. WAC unauthenticated user (User Name: <string>,
IP: <ipaddr | ipv6address>, MAC: <macaddr>,
Port: <portNum>)
Warning
Warning This log will be triggered when the number of authorized users reaches the maximum user limit on the whole device.
WAC enters stop learning state.
Warning This log will be triggered when the number of authorized users is below the maximum user limit on whole device in a time interval (The interval is project dependent).
WAC recovered from stop learning state.
The address of the DHCPv6 Server pool is used up.
The number of allocated ipv6 addresses of the
DHCPv6 Server pool is equal to MAX-NUM.
Detected untrusted DHCPv6 server IP address.
The address of the DHCPv6 Server pool <poolname> is used up.
The number of allocated ipv6 addresses of the
DHCPv6 Server pool is equal to MAX-NUM.
Detected untrusted source IP in ICMPv6 Router
Advertisement Message.
Detected untrusted DHCPv6 server (IP:
<ipv6addr>, Port:<portNum> )
Detected untrusted source IP of ICMPv6 Router
Advertisement message (IP: <ipv6addr>,
Port:<portNum> )
Informational
Informational
Informational
Informational
AIS condition detected.
AIS condition cleared.
LCK condition detected.
AIS condition detected. MD Level:<mdlevel>,
VLAN:<vlanid>, Local(Port <portNum>,
Direction:<mepdirection>, MEPID:<mepid>)
AIS condition cleared. MD Level:<mdlevel>,
VLAN:<vlanid>, Local(Port <portNum>,
Direction:<mepdirection>, MEPID:<mepid>)
LCK condition detected. MD Level:<mdlevel>,
VLAN:<vlanid>, Local(Port <portNum>,
Direction:<mepdirection>, MEPID:<mepid>)
Notice
Notice
Notice
LCK condition cleared. LCK condition cleared. MD Level:<mdlevel>,
VLAN:<vlanid>, Local(Port <portNum>,
Direction:<mepdirection>, MEPID:<mepid>)
Notice
797
Category
DHCPv6 Relay
RCP
DHCPv6 Client
DDM
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Event Description
DHCPv6 relay on a specific interface’s administrator state changed.
Firmware upgraded successfully.
Firmware upgrade unsuccessfully.
Firmware uploaded successfully.
Firmware upload unsuccessfully.
Configuration downloaded successfully.
Configuration download unsuccessfully.
Configuration uploaded successfully.
Configuration upload unsuccessfully.
Log message uploaded successfully.
Log message upload unsuccessfully.
The downloaded configurations executed successfully.
The downloaded configurations execute unsuccessfully.
Attack log message uploaded successfully.
Attack log message upload unsuccessfully.
DHCPv6 client interface administrator state changed.
DHCPv6 client obtains an ipv6 address from a
DHCPv6 server.
The IPv6 address obtained from a DHCPv6 server starts renewing.
The IPv6 address obtained from a DHCPv6 server renews success.
The IPv6 address obtained from a DHCPv6 server starts rebinding.
The IPv6 address obtained from a DHCPv6 server rebinds success.
The IPv6 address from a DHCPv6 server was deleted.
DDM exceeded DDM alarm threshold
DDM exceeded DDM warning threshold
Log Information
DHCPv6 relay on interface <intf-name> changed state to <enabled | disabled>
Firmware upgraded by <session> successfully.
(Username: <username>, IP: <ipaddr>, MAC:
<macaddr>)
Firmware upgrade by <session> unsuccessfully.
(Username: <username>, IP: <ipaddr>, MAC:
<macaddr>)
Firmware uploaded by <session> successfully.
(Username: <username>, IP: <ipaddr>, MAC:
<macaddr>)
Firmware upload by <session> unsuccessfully.
(Username: <username>, IP: <ipaddr>, MAC:
<macaddr>)
Severity
Informational
Informational
Warning
Informational
Warning
Configuration downloaded by <session> successfully. (Username: <username>, IP:
<ipaddr>, MAC: <macaddr>)
Configuration download by <session> unsuccessfully. (Username: <username>, IP:
<ipaddr>, MAC: <macaddr>)
Configuration uploaded by <session> successfully. (Username: <username>, IP:
<ipaddr>, MAC: <macaddr>)
Configuration upload by <session> unsuccessfully. (Username: <username>, IP:
<ipaddr>, MAC: <macaddr>)
Log message uploaded by <session> successfully. (Username: <username>, IP:
<ipaddr>, MAC: <macaddr>)
Log message upload by <session> unsuccessfully. (Username: <username>, IP:
<ipaddr>, MAC: <macaddr>)
The downloaded configurations executed by
<session> successfully. (Username:
<username>, IP: <ipaddr>, MAC: <macaddr>)
The downloaded configurations executed by
<session> unsuccessfully. (Username:
<username>, IP: <ipaddr>, MAC: <macaddr>)
Attack log message uploaded by <session> successfully. (Username: <username>, IP:
<ipaddr>, MAC: <macaddr>)
Attack log message upload by <session> unsuccessfully. (Username: <username>, IP:
<ipaddr>, MAC: <macaddr>)
Informational
Warning
Informational
Warning
Informational
Warning
Informational
Warning
Informational
Warning
DHCPv6 client on interface <intf-name> changed state to <enabled | disabled>
Informational
Informational DHCPv6 client obtains an ipv6 address < ipv6address > on interface <intf-name>
The IPv6 address < ipv6address > on interface
<intf-name> starts renewing.
Informational
The IPv6 address < ipv6address > on interface
<intf-name> renews success.
The IPv6 address < ipv6address > on interface
<intf-name> starts rebinding.
The IPv6 address < ipv6address > on interface
<intf-name> rebinds success.
The IPv6 address < ipv6address > on interface
<intf-name> was deleted.
Informational
Informational
Informational
Informational
Port <portNum> optic module [thresholdType] exceeded the [thresholdSubType] alarm threshold
Critical
Port <portNum> optic module [thresholdType] exceeded the [thresholdSubType] warning
Critical
798
Category
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Event Description
DDM recovered to normal
Log Information threshold.
Port <portNum> optic module [thresholdType] back to normal
Severity
Warning
799
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Appendix C Trap Log Entries
This table lists the trap logs found on the Switch.
Trap Name risingAlarm fallingAlarm
LldpRemTablesChange coldStart warmStart authenticationFailure linkDown linkUp newRoot topologyChange dot1agCfmFaultAlarm
Trap Description
The SNMP trap that is generated when an alarm entry crosses its falling threshold and generates an event that is configured for sending SNMP traps.
Binding:
1. alarmIndex
2. alarmVariable
3. alarmSampleType
4. alarmValue
5. alarmFallingThreshold
1.3.6.1.2.1.16.0.2
A lldpRemTablesChange notification is sent when the value of lldpStatsRemTableLastChangeTime changes. It can be utilized by an NMS to trigger LLDP remote systems table maintenance polls. Note that transmission of lldpRemTablesChange notifications are throttled by the agent, as specified by the 'lldpNotificationInterval' object.
Binding:
1.lldpStatsRemTablesInserts
2.lldpStatsRemTablesDeletes
3.lldpStatsRemTablesDrops
4.lldpStatsRemTablesAgeouts
1.0.8802.1.1.2.0.0.1
1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.1 A coldStart trap signifies that the SNMPv2 entity, acting in an agent role, is reinitializing itself and that its configuration may have been altered.
A warmStart trap signifies that the SNMPv2 entity, acting in an agent role, is reinitializing itself such that its configuration is unaltered.
1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.2
An authenticationFailure trap signifies that the SNMPv2 entity, acting in an agent role, has received a protocol message that is not properly authenticated.
A linkDown trap signifies that the SNMP entity, acting in an agent role, has detected that the ifOperStatus object for one of its communication links is about to enter the down state from some other state (but not from the notPresent state). This other state is indicated by the included value of ifOperStatus.
1.ifIndex
2.ifAdminStatus
3.ifOperStatus
A linkUp trap signifies that the SNMP entity, acting in an agent role, has detected that the ifOperStatus object for one of its communication links left the down state and transitioned into some other state (but not into the notPresent state). This other state is indicated by the included value of ifOperStatus.
Binding:
1.ifIndex
2.ifAdminStatus
3.ifOperStatus
1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.5
1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.3
1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.4
The newRoot trap indicates that the sending agent has become the new root of the Spanning Tree; the trap is sent by a bridge soon after its election as the new root, e.g., upon expiration of the Topology Change Timer, immediately subsequent to its election. Implementation of this trap is optional.
1.3.6.1.2.1.17.0.1
A topologyChange trap is sent by a bridge when any of its configured ports transitions from the Learning state to the Forwarding state, or from the
Forwarding state to the Blocking state. The trap is not sent if a newRoot trap is sent for the same transition. Implementation of this trap is optional.
A MEP has a persistent defect condition. A notification (fault alarm) is sent to the management entity with the OID of the MEP that has detected the fault.
Whenever a MEP has a persistent defect, it may or may not generate a Fault
1.3.6.1.2.1.17.0.2
1.3.111.2.802.1.1.8.0.1
800
OID
The SNMP trap that is generated when an alarm entry crosses its falling threshold and generates an event that is configured for sending SNMP traps.
Binding:
1.alarmIndex
2.alarmVariable
3.alarmSampleType
4.alarmValue
5.alarmFallingThreshold
1.3.6.1.2.1.16.0.1
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Trap Name dot3OamThresholdEvent
Trap Description
Alarm to warn the system administrator of the problem, as controlled by the
MEP Fault Notification Generator State Machine and associated Managed
Objects. Only the highest-priority defect, as shown in Table 20-1, is reported in the Fault Alarm. If a defect with a higher priority is raised after a Fault
Alarm has been issued, another Fault Alarm is issued. The management entity receiving the notification can identify the system from the network source address of the notification, and can identify the MEP reporting the defect by the indices in the OID of the dot1agCfmMepHighestPrDefect variable in the notification: dot1agCfmMdIndex - Also the index of the MEP's
Maintenance Domain table entry (dot1agCfmMdTable). dot1agCfmMaIndex -
Also an index (with the MD table index) of the MEP's Maintenance
Association network table entry (dot1agCfmMaNetTable), and (with the MD table index and component ID) of the MEP's MA component table entry
(dot1agCfmMaCompTable). dot1agCfmMepIdentifier - MEP Identifier and final index into the MEP table (dot1agCfmMepTable).
Binding:
1.dot1agCfmMepHighestPrDefect
A dot3OamThresholdEvent notification is sent when a local or remote threshold crossing event is detected. A local threshold crossing event is detected by the local entity, while a remote threshold crossing event is detected by the reception of an Ethernet OAM Event Notification OAMPDU that indicates a threshold event. This notification should not be sent more than once per second. The OAM entity can be derived from extracting the ifIndex from the variable bindings. The objects in the notification correspond to the values in a row instance in the dot3OamEventLogTable. The management entity should periodically check dot3OamEventLogTable to detect any missed events.
Binding:
1.dot3OamEventLogTimestamp
2.dot3OamEventLogOui
3.dot3OamEventLogType
4.dot3OamEventLogLocation
5.dot3OamEventLogWindowHi
6.dot3OamEventLogWindowLo
7.dot3OamEventLogThresholdHi
8.dot3OamEventLogThresholdLo
9.dot3OamEventLogValue
10.dot3OamEventLogRunningTotal
11.dot3OamEventLogEventTotal
OID
1.3.6.1.2.1.158.0.1 swPktStormOccurred swPktStormCleared swPktStormDisablePort
This trap is sent when a packet storm is detected by a packet storm mechanism and a shutdown action is taken.
Binding:
1: swPktStormCtrlPortIndex
The trap is sent when the packet storm is cleared by the packet storm mechanism.
Binding:
1: swPktStormCtrlPortIndex
The trap is sent when the port is disabled by the packet storm mechanism.
Binding:
1: swPktStormCtrlPortIndex
1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.25.5.0.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.25.5.0.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.25.5.0.3 swSafeGuardChgToExhauste d
This trap indicates System change operation mode from normal to exhausted.
Binding:
1: swSafeGuardCurrentStatus
1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.19.4.1.0.1 swSafeGuardChgToNormal This trap indicates System change operation mode from exhausted to normal.
Binding:
1: swSafeGuardCurrentStatus
1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.19.4.1.0.2 swDoSAttackDetected 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.59.4.0.1 swIpMacBindingViolationTra p
This trap is sent when the specific DoS packet is received and trap is enabled.
Binding:
1: swDoSCtrlType
2: swDoSNotifyVarIpAddr
3: swDoSNotifyVarPortNumber
When the IP-MAC Binding trap is enabled, if there's a new MAC that violates the pre-defined port security configuration, a trap will be sent out.
Binding:
1: swIpMacBindingPortIndex
2: swIpMacBindingViolationIP
3: swIpMacBindingViolationMac
1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.23.5.0.1 swIpMacBindingStopLearnin gTrap
When the IP-MAC Binding trap is enabled, if the specific port changes from a normal state to a stop_learning state, a trap will be sent out.
1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.23.5.0.2
801
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Trap Name Trap Description
Binding:
1: swIpMacBindingPortIndex
OID swIpMacBindingRecoverLear ningTrap
When the IP-MAC Binding trap is enabled, if the specific port changes from a stop_learning state to a normal state, a trap will be sent out.
Binding:
1: swIpMacBindingPortIndex
1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.23.5.0.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.35.11.1.0.
1 swMacBasedAccessControlL oggedSuccess
The trap is sent when a MAC-based access control host is successfully logged in.
Binding:
1.swMacBasedAuthInfoMacIndex
2.swMacBasedAuthInfoPortIndex
3.swMacBasedAuthVID swMacBasedAccessControlL oggedFail
The trap is sent when a MAC-based access control host login fails.
Binding:
1.swMacBasedAuthInfoMacIndex
2.swMacBasedAuthInfoPortIndex
3.swMacBasedAuthVID swMacBasedAccessControl
AgesOut
The trap is sent when a MAC-based access control host ages out.
Binding:
1.swMacBasedAuthInfoMacIndex
2.swMacBasedAuthInfoPortIndex
3.swMacBasedAuthVID
1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.35.11.1.0.
2
1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.35.11.1.0.
3 swWACLoggedSuccess swWACLoggedFail
The trap is sent when a WAC client has successfully logged in.
Binding:
1: swWACAuthStatePort
2: swWACAuthStateOriginalVid
3: swWACAuthStateMACAddr
4: swWACAuthUserName
5: swWACClientAddrType
6: swWACClientAddress
The trap is sent when a WAC client fails to login.
Binding:
1: swWACAuthStatePort
2: swWACAuthStateOriginalVid
3: swWACAuthStateMACAddr
4: swWACAuthUserName
5: swWACClientAddrType
6: swWACClientAddress swERPSSFDetectedTrap swERPSSFClearedTrap
When the signal fail occurs, a trap will be generated.
Binding:
1.swERPSNodeId
When the signal fail clears, a trap will be generated.
Binding:
1.swERPSNodeId swERPSRPLOwnerConflictTr ap
When a conflict occurs, a trap will be generated.
Binding:
1.swERPSNodeId
1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.27.11.1.0.
1
1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.27.11.1.0.
2
1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.78.4.0.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.78.4.0.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.78.4.0.3 swBpduProtectionUnderAtta ckingTrap
When the BPDU Protection trap is enabled, if the specific port changes from a normal state to an under attack state, a trap will be sent out.
Binding:
1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.76.4.0.1
1.swBpduProtectionPortIndex
2.swBpduProtectionPortMode
1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.76.4.0.2 swBpduProtectionRecoveryT rap
When the BPDU Protection trap is enabled, if the specific port changes from an under attack state to a normal state, a trap will be sent out.
Binding:
1.swBpduProtectionPortIndex
2.swBpduProtectionRecoveryMethod swL2PortSecurityViolationTr ap
When the port_security trap is enabled, if there's a new MAC that violates the pre-defined port security configuration, a trap will be sent out.
Binding:
1: swL2PortSecurityPortIndex
1.3.6.1.4.1.171.11.133.1.1.2.
100.1.2.0.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.171.11.133.2.1.2.
100.1.2.0.2
802
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Trap Name swL2macNotification swPortLoopOccurred swPortLoopRestart swVlanLoopOccurred swVlanLoopRestart swFilterDetectedTrap swSingleIPMSColdStart swSingleIPMSWarmStart
Trap Description
2: swL2PortSecurityViolationMac
This trap indicates the MAC address variations in the address table.
Binding:
1: swL2macNotifyInfo
OID
1.3.6.1.4.1.171.11.133.1.1.2.
100.1.2.0.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.171.11.133.2.1.2.
100.1.2.0.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.41.10.0.1 The trap is sent when a Port loop occurs.
Binding:
1.swLoopDetectPortIndex
The trap is sent when a Port loop restarts after the interval time.
Binding:
1.swLoopDetectPortIndex
The trap is sent when a Port with a VID loop occurs.
Binding:
1.swLoopDetectPortIndex
2.swVlanLoopDetectVID
The trap is sent when a Port with a VID loop restarts after the interval time.
Binding:
1.swLoopDetectPortIndex
2.swVlanLoopDetectVID
Send trap when illegal DHCP server is detected. The same illegal DHCP server IP address detected is just sent once to the trap receivers within the log ceasing unauthorized duration.
Binding:
1.swFilterDetectedIP
2.swFilterDetectedport
1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.41.10.0.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.41.10.0.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.41.10.0.4
1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.37.100.0.
1
Commander switch will send swSingleIPMSColdStart notification to indicated host when its Member generate cold start notification.
Binding:
1: swSingleIPMSID
2: swSingleIPMSMacAddr
1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.8.6.0.11
Commander switch will send swSingleIPMSWarmStart notification to indicated host when its Member generate warm start notification.
Binding:
1: swSingleIPMSID
2: swSingleIPMSMacAddr
1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.8.6.0.12 swSingleIPMSLinkDown swSingleIPMSLinkUp swSingleIPMSAuthFail swSingleIPMSnewRoot swSingleIPMSTopologyChan ge swDdmAlarmTrap
Commander switch will send swSingleIPMSLinkDown notification to indicated host when its Member generate link down notification.
Binding:
1: swSingleIPMSID
2: swSingleIPMSMacAddr
3: ifIndex
1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.8.6.0.13
1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.8.6.0.14 If Commander switch will send swSingleIPMSLinkUp notification to indicated host when its Member generate link up notification.
Binding:
1: swSingleIPMSID
2: swSingleIPMSMacAddr
3: ifIndex
Commander switch will send swSingleIPMSAuthFail notification to indicated host when it Member generate authentication failure notification.
Binding:
1: swSingleIPMSID
2: swSingleIPMSMacAddr
1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.8.6.0.15
Commander switch will send swSingleIPMSnewRoot notification to indicated host when it Member generate new root notification.
Binding:
1: swSingleIPMSID
2: swSingleIPMSMacAddr
Commander switch will send swSingleIPMSTopologyChange notification to indicated host when it Member generate topology change notification.
Binding:
1: swSingleIPMSID
2: swSingleIPMSMacAddr
1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.8.6.0.16
1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.8.6.0.17
The trap is sent when any parameter value exceeds the alarm threshold value or recover to normal status depending on the configuration of the trap action.
Binding:
1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.72.4.0.1
803
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Trap Name swDdmWarningTrap
Trap Description
1: swDdmPort
2: swDdmThresholdType
3: swDdmThresholdExceedType
4: swDdmThresholdExceedOrRecover
The trap is sent when any parameter value exceeds the warning threshold value or recover to normal status depending on the configuration of the trap action.
Binding:
1: swDdmPort
2: swDdmThresholdType
3: swDdmThresholdExceedType
4: swDdmThresholdExceedOrRecover
OID
1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.72.4.0.2 agentGratuitousARPTrap agentCfgOperCompleteTrap The trap is sent when the configuration is completely saved, uploaded or downloaded.
Binding:
1: unitID
2: agentCfgOperate
3: agentLoginUserName agentFirmwareUpgrade This trap is sent when the process of upgrading the firmware via SNMP has finished.
Binding: 1: swMultiImageVersion swPowerStatusChg
This trap is sent when there is an IP address conflict.
Binding:
1: agentGratuitousARPIpAddr
2: agentGratuitousARPMacAddr
3: agentGratuitousARPPortNumber
4: agentGratuitousARPInterfaceName swPowerFailure swPowerRecover
1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.1.7.2.0.5
1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.1.7.2.0.9
1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.1.7.2.0.7
Power Status change notification. The notification is issued when the swPowerStatus changes in the following cases: lowVoltage -> overCurrent. lowVoltage -> working. lowVoltage -> disconnect. lowVoltage -> connect. overCurrent -> lowVoltage. overCurrent -> working. overCurrent -> disconnect. overCurrent -> connect. working -> lowVoltage. working -> overCurrent. working -> connect. working -> disconnect. fail -> connect. fail -> disconnect. connect -> lowVoltage. connect -> overCurrent. connect -> working. connect -> disconnect. disconnect -> lowVoltage. disconnect -> overCurrent. disconnect -> working. disconnect -> connect.
Binding:
1: swPowerUnitIndex
2: swPowerID
3: swPowerStatus
1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.11.2.2.2.0
.1
Power Failure notification. The notification is issued when the swPowerStatus changes in the following cases: lowVoltage -> fail. overcurrent -> fail. working -> fail. connect -> fail. disconnect -> fail.
Binding:
1: swPowerUnitIndex
2: swPowerID
3: swPowerStatus
1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.11.2.2.2.0
.2
Power Recover notification. The notification is issued when the swPowerStatus changes in the following cases:
Binding:
1: swPowerUnitIndex
2: swPowerID
1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.11.2.2.2.0
.3
804
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
OID Trap Name Trap Description
3: swPowerStatus swFanFailure swFanRecover
Fan Failure notification.
Binding:
1: swFanUnitIndex
2: swFanID
Fan Recover notification.
Binding:
1: swFanUnitIndex
2: swFanID swHighTemperature swHighTemperatureRecover High Temperature notification
Binding:
1: swTemperatureUnitIndex
2: swTemperSensorID
3: swTemperatureCurrent swLowTemperature
High Temperature notification
Binding:
1: swTemperatureUnitIndex
2: swTemperSensorID
3: swTemperatureCurrent
Low Temperature notification
Binding:
1: swTemperatureUnitIndex
2: swTemperSensorID
3: swTemperatureCurrent swLowTemperatureRecover Low Temperature notification
Binding:
1: swTemperatureUnitIndex
2: swTemperSensorID
3: swTemperatureCurrent swFilterDHCPv6ServerDetect edTrap
Send trap when an illegal DHCPv6 server is detected.
Binding:
1: swFilterDetectedIPv6
2: swFilterDetectedport swFilterICMPv6RaAllNodeDe tectedTrap
Send trap when an illegal ICMPv6 All-nodes RA is detected.
Binding:
1: swFilterDetectedIPv6
2: swFilterDetectedport swDot1xLoggedSuccess swDot1xLoggedFail swCFMExtAISOccurred swCFMExtAISCleared
The trap is sent when a dot1x Supplicant has successfully logged in.
Binding:
1: swDot1xAuthPortNumber
2: swDot1xAuthVID
3: swDot1xAuthMACAddress
4: swDot1XAuthUserName
The trap is sent when a dot1x Supplicant fails to login.
Binding:
1: swDot1xAuthPortNumber
2: swDot1xAuthVID
3: swDot1xAuthMACAddress
4: swDot1XAuthUserName
5: swDot1XAuthFailReason
A notification is generated when local MEP enters AIS status.
Binding:
1: dot1agCfmMdIndex
2: dot1agCfmMaIndex
3: dot1agCfmMepIdentifier
A notification is generated when local MEP exits AIS status.
Binding:
1: dot1agCfmMdIndex
2: dot1agCfmMaIndex
3: dot1agCfmMepIdentifier
1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.11.2.2.3.0
.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.11.2.2.3.0
.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.11.2.2.4.0
.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.11.2.2.4.0
.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.11.2.2.4.0
.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.11.2.2.4.0
.4
1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.37.100.0.
2
1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.37.100.0.
3
1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.30.11.1.0.
1
1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.30.11.1.0.
2
1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.86.100.0.
1
1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.86.100.0.
2
805
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Trap Name swCFMExtLockOccurred swCFMExtLockCleared
Trap Description
A notification is generated when local MEP enters lock status.
Binding:
1: dot1agCfmMdIndex
2: dot1agCfmMaIndex
3: dot1agCfmMepIdentifier
A notification is generated when local MEP exits lock status.
Binding:
1: dot1agCfmMdIndex
2: dot1agCfmMaIndex
3: dot1agCfmMepIdentifier
OID
1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.86.100.0.
3
1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.86.100.0.
4
806
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
Appendix D RADIUS Attributes Assignment
The RADIUS Attributes Assignment on the Switch is used in the following modules: 802.1X (Port-based and Hostbased), and MAC-based Access Control.
The description that follows explains the following RADIUS Attributes Assignment types:
• Ingress/Egress Bandwidth
• 802.1p Default Priority
• VLAN
• ACL
To assign Ingress/Egress bandwidth by RADIUS Server, the proper parameters should be configured on the
RADIUS Server. The tables below show the parameters for bandwidth.
The parameters of the Vendor-Specific attributes are:
Vendor-Specific Attribute
Vendor-ID
Vendor-Type
Description
Defines the vendor.
Value
171 (DLINK)
Defines the attribute. 2 (for ingress bandwidth)
3 (for egress bandwidth)
Used to assign the bandwidth of a port. Unit (Kbits)
Usage
Required
Required
Attribute-Specific Field Required
If the user has configured the bandwidth attribute of the RADIUS server (for example, ingress bandwidth 1000Kbps) and the 802.1X authentication is successful, the device will assign the bandwidth (according to the RADIUS server) to the port. However, if the user does not configure the bandwidth attribute and authenticates successfully, the device will not assign any bandwidth to the port. If the bandwidth attribute is configured on the RADIUS server with a value of “0” or more, than the effective bandwidth (100Mbps on an Ethernet port or 1Gbps on a Gigabit port) of the port will be set to no_limited.
To assign 802.1p default priority by RADIUS Server, the proper parameters should be configured on the
RADIUS Server. The tables below show the parameters for 802.1p default priority.
The parameters of the Vendor-Specific attributes are:
Vendor-Specific Attribute
Vendor-ID
Vendor-Type
Attribute-Specific Field
Description
Defines the vendor.
Defines the attribute.
Used to assign the 802.1p default priority of the port.
Value
171 (DLINK)
4
0-7
Usage
Required
Required
Required
If the user has configured the 802.1p priority attribute of the RADIUS server (for example, priority 7) and the
802.1X, or MAC-based authentication is successful, the device will assign the 802.1p default priority (according to the RADIUS server) to the port. However, if the user does not configure the priority attribute and authenticates successfully, the device will not assign a priority to this port. If the priority attribute is configured on the RADIUS server is a value out of range (>7), it will not be set to the device.
To assign VLAN by RADIUS Server, the proper parameters should be configured on the RADIUS Server. To use
VLAN assignment, RFC3580 defines the following tunnel attributes in RADIUS packets.
The table below shows the parameters for a VLAN:
807
DGS-3000 Series Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide
RADIUS Tunnel Attribute
Tunnel-Type
Tunnel-Medium-Type
Tunnel-Private-Group-ID
Description Value
This attribute indicates the tunneling protocol(s) to be used (in the case of a tunnel initiator) or the tunneling protocol in use (in the case of a tunnel terminator).
13 (VLAN)
6 (802) This attribute indicates the transport medium being used.
This attribute indicates group ID for a particular tunneled session.
A string (VID)
Usage
Required
Required
Required
If the user has configured the VLAN attribute of the RADIUS server (for example, VID 3) and the 802.1X, or
MAC-based Access Control authentication is successful, the port will be added to VLAN 3. However, if the user does not configure the VLAN attribute and authenticates successfully, the port will be kept in its original VLAN. If the VLAN attribute configured on the RADIUS server does not exist, the port will not be assigned to the requested
VLAN.
To assign ACL by RADIUS Server, the proper parameters should be configured on the RADIUS Server. The table below shows the parameters for an ACL.
The parameters of the Vendor-Specific Attribute are:
RADIUS Tunnel Attribute
Vendor-ID
Vendor-Type
Attribute-Specific Field
Description
Defines the vendor.
Defines the attribute.
Used to assign the ACL profile or rule.
Value
171 (DLINK)
12 (for ACL profile)
13 (for ACL rule)
ACL Command
For example:
ACL profile: create access_profile profile_id 1 profile_name profile1 ethernet vlan 0xFFF;
ACL rule: config access_profile profile_id 1 add access_id auto_assign ethernet vlan_id 1 port all deny;
Usage
Required
Required
Required
If the user has configured the ACL attribute of the RADIUS server (for example, ACL profile: create
access_profile profile_id 1 profile_name profile1 ethernet vlan 0xFFF; ACL rule: config access_profile
profile_id 1 add access_id auto_assign ethernet vlan_id 1 port all deny), the device will assign the ACL profiles and rules according to the RADIUS server. For more information about the ACL module, please refer to the
ACL chapter.
808
Download
Public link updated
The public link to your chat has been updated. You may view and manage your chat links after registration here.
Document public link
Advertisement
Key features
VLANs
802.1X authentication
Quality of Service (QoS)
Link Aggregation
Spanning Tree Protocol (STP)
Security
Management
Monitoring
Troubleshooting
Command Line Interface (CLI)
Frequently asked questions
You can configure VLANs on the DGS-3000 Series switch by using the command line interface (CLI) or the web-based management interface. You can use the CLI to create VLANs, assign ports to VLANs, and configure VLAN trunking. The web-based management interface provides a graphical user interface for configuring VLANs.
You can configure 802.1X authentication on the DGS-3000 Series switch by using the command line interface (CLI) or the web-based management interface. You can use the CLI to create authentication profiles, assign ports to authentication profiles, and configure authentication methods. The web-based management interface provides a graphical user interface for configuring 802.1X authentication.
You can configure QoS on the DGS-3000 Series switch by using the command line interface (CLI) or the web-based management interface. You can use the CLI to create QoS policies, assign ports to QoS policies, and configure QoS parameters. The web-based management interface provides a graphical user interface for configuring QoS.